Subscribe to the Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal Subscribe Now!

Miscellanea

1. SPORTS

# AI Only Just Beginning to Revolutionise the NBA Game

It’s not a scene out of the future, but a reality on the hard courts of today.

Using artificial intelligence, a top basketball team found the right defensive strategy that made the difference to win the NBA championship.

Data specialist Rajiv Maheswaran declines to name the outfit that leveraged AI analysis to victory, saying in a corporate video only that it happened several years ago.

That was “the moment that sealed it,” added the co-founder of tech startup Second Spectrum, which provides the league with swathes of player positioning data gathered during crucial games.

Analytics have transformed the NBA over the past decade, with AI and other breakthroughs still ramping up.

Embryonic in the early 2000s, the revolution truly took hold with motion-capture cameras installed in every venue in 2013.

Ten years later, new tech upgraded renderings of the court from 2D to 3D, unlocking even more precious data.

Each player wears 29 markers “so you know not just where they are, but you know where their elbow is, and you know where their knee is,” said Ben Alamar, a sports analytics writer and consultant.

“You’re actually able to see, yes, that was a high quality (defensive) closeout,” said Tom Ryan, head of Basketball Research and Development at the NBA, describing an often-used manouvre.

“It’s adding more context to that metric.”

“Now all 30 teams are doing significant analysis with varying levels of success,” said Alamar.

Houston, Golden State and Oklahoma City were often cited among early adopters at the turn of the 2010s.

This season, Oklahoma City is on top of regular season standings, “and they play different,” said ESPN Analytics Group founder Dean Oliver.

“They force turnovers, and they have very few turnovers themselves. So there are definitely advantages to be gained.”

“It’s not going to turn a 25-win team into a 70-win team during the season, but it can turn a 50-win team into a 55, 56-win team,” according to Alamar.

AI allows for “strategic insights” like “understanding matchups, finding the situations where players perform well, what combinations of players,” he added.

None of the dozen teams contacted by AFP agreed to discuss their work on analytics.

“Teams are (understandably) secretive,” Oliver confirmed.

Even before 3D, motion capture data was already shifting the game, taking basketball from a more controlled pace to something looser and faster, he added.

The data showed that faster play secures more open looks and a higher percentage of shots — a development that some criticise.

On average, three-point shot attempts have doubled over the last 15 years.

“As a league now, we look deep into analytics,” Milwaukee point guard Damian Lillard noted at February’s All-Star Game.

While it perhaps “takes away the originality of the game… you’ve got to get in line with what’s working to win.”

The league is taking the issue seriously enough that Commissioner Adam Silver recently mentioned that “some adjustments” could be made to address it.

Even now, AI has “plenty of upside” yet to emerge, said Oliver.

“The data is massive, but converting that into information, into knowledge that can be conveyed to players, that they can absorb, all of those steps are yet to be done.”

The league itself is pursuing several analytics and AI projects, including for real-time refereeing.

“The ROI (return on investment) is very clear,” said Ryan. “It’s about getting more calls right, faster and in a transparent way to our fans.”

“We would love a world where if a ball goes out of bounds and you’re not sure who it went off of, rather than going to replay you look at high frame rate video in real time with 99.9 percent accuracy… That’s really our North Star.”

Spatial data can also extend the fan experience, shown off during the recent “Dunk the Halls” Christmas game between San Antonio and New York.

An alternative telecast rendered the game in video game-style real-time display, with avatars replacing live action images.

“We want to experiment with all different types of immersive media,” says Ryan. “We just want to be able to sell our game and present it in compelling ways.”

(Source: International Business Times – By Thomas Urbain – 10th April, 2025)

2. TECHNOLOGY

# How Atlas is using AI to turn accounts receivable into a strategic advantage

Despite the rapid advancements in financial technology, accounts receivable (AR) remains a starkly inefficient workflow, with many companies still relying on manual, error-prone processes to manage their contract-to-invoice and invoice-to-cash cycles.

As a result, finance teams struggle with data entry mistakes, delayed invoice reconciliation, and slow payment cycles, leading to unnecessary cash flow bottlenecks. They also lack sufficient real-time insights, which forces them to take a reactive rather than proactive approach to financial management — consequently making it difficult to anticipate late payments or assess a client’s ability to pay on time.

Recognizing these gaps in the market, Joe Zhou saw an opportunity to modernize AR using artificial intelligence. He’s the co-founder and CTO of Atlas, a proprietary automation system that’s redefining AR through agentic solutions and automation of contract-to-cash cycles. In doing so, Atlas is empowering businesses to save valuable finance time for finance leaders and increase cash-on-hand, fuelling business growth.

JOE ZHOU: A BACKGROUND OF EXCELLENCE

After graduating from the University of Pennsylvania with degrees in computer science, data science, and mathematics, Zhou started his career at industry-leading companies like Google and Snap. There, he led high-impact projects that improved user engagement and product performance for billions of users globally.

One of his biggest projects was with Snap, where he introduced an augmented reality engagement funnel designed to improve the user feedback loop and increase the adoption of Snapchat’s viral augmented reality (AR) lenses. Zhou’s team managed to achieve a 25% global increase in AR usage — the brand’s largest jump in six years.

Zhou also spent time at Intuit, working on QuickBooks and Mint transaction categorization. There, he saw how a lack of real-time insights into payment risks forced businesses into reactive financial management. Simultaneously, they had to handle a vast amount of financial data from diverse sources without robust systems of categorization and classification in place.

He realised that traditional AR systems, while accepted as the industry standard, didn’t measure up to the demands of modern business. It was this realization that formed the basis of Atlas.

AI-POWERED AUTOMATION: A SMARTER APPROACH TO ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE

Atlas is an AI-powered AR automation platform that eliminates manual data entry errors, enables faster invoicing and reconciliation, gives finance leaders a source of truth for revenue, and increases cash on hand. The end goal is simple: Atlas is designed to get businesses paid.

It works by seamlessly integrating emerging tech like natural language processing, machine learning, various frontier models and predictive analytics to automate every stage of the AR workflow and save finance teams time, resources, and stress. For example, it can scan a contract and automatically generate a detailed, accurate invoice that you can quickly review and send.

Key to this approach is Atlas’ continuous learning model: The more invoices and contract data the system processes, the smarter it becomes.

One of its strongest benefits is that it plugs and plays with existing enterprise resource planning (ERP) systems like NetSuite, SAP, and Microsoft Dynamics. It also connects to Slack, email, and your CRM so that you can centralize customer communications and manage them easily. Atlas eliminates the need for manual invoice matching, accelerating cash flow and saving teams time and resources.

The result is a unified, AI-first approach that makes it easy to deploy and maintain highly configurable workflows for different industries.

THE IMPACT OF AI-DRIVEN AR ON FINANCE TEAMS

Businesses are already embracing Atlas and seeing powerful results, with customers leveraging it to eliminate manual invoice matching and free their teams to focus on other tasks. They’re also seeing accelerated cash flow, sometimes by days or even weeks.

“We are reshaping the $125 trillion B2B payments market and helping free up $3 trillion in annual locked cash flow that hinders global growth as a result of antiquated payment systems,” Zhou notes.

After implementing Atlas, one startup experienced a 43% reduction in days sales outstanding (meaning they were able to collect payments significantly faster) as their spreadsheet usage dropped by 71%.

“Atlas is about freeing teams from busywork so they can focus on real growth,” Zhou says.

“Innovating in AI isn’t about just increasing efficiency — it’s about enabling resource reallocations to focus on creative and strategic thinking.”

With Atlas, Joe Zhou has successfully found a way to consistently eliminate human errors and delays in payment cycles — allowing businesses trapped in outdated processes to finally reach their full potential.

(Source: International Business Times – By Chris Gallagher – 22nd April, 2025)

3. OTHER – CRYPTO

# Bitcoin, Altcoins pump after Federal Reserve Board withdraws Crypto notification rules for banks

KEY POINTS

  •  The board rescinded two supervisory letters and a third one jointly issued with the FDIC and Comptroller of the Currency
  •  Bitcoin traded above $94,000 at one point in the night, and all other top altcoins were in the green
  •  Some crypto users are concerned the move may result in short-term “uncertainty” among banks

Bitcoin and other major cryptocurrencies climbed Thursday night after the Federal Reserve Board (FRB) announced that guidance for banks related to crypto and stablecoin activities was being withdrawn.

The move comes just weeks after the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) made a similar announcement, giving more leeway for banks across the country to engage with the crypto industry.

FBR opens a path for crypto and banking activities

The Federal Reserve Board said Thursday that it was rescinding three supervisory letters that played a major role in stunted adoption of crypto offerings among American banks and financial institutions.

“The Board is rescinding its 2022 supervisory letter establishing an expectation that state member banks provide advance notification of planned or current crypto-asset activities. As a result, the Board will no longer expect banks to provide notification and will instead monitor banks’ crypto-asset activities through the normal supervisory process,” the board said.

It also rescinded a 2023 supervisory letter “regarding the supervisory non objection process for state member bank engagement in dollar token activities.”

Finally, the FRB announced it was withdrawing two jointly issued statements with the FDIC and the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency that limited banks’ exposure to cryptocurrencies.

It also expressed commitment toward collaborating with other regulatory agencies to consider the possibility of providing further guidance that “support innovation, including crypto-asset activities.”

CRYPTO BOUNCES AMID THE FEDERAL RESERVE’S PIVOT

Following the announcement, crypto prices surged, signalling the market’s positive reaction to the news.

Bitcoin was up 1.2% in the day, climbing above $94,000 at one point before settling in at around $93,500.

Ethereum also saw a slight pump, increasing 0.4% in the day, and XRP was up 1.4% in the last 24 hours.

All other altcoins on Coin Gecko’s Top 10 largest crypto assets by market cap were in the green, with Cardano (ADA) leading the day’s rally (5.2% up).

QUESTIONS RISE OVER FRB’S MOVE

While many in the crypto community were ecstatic over the news, some crypto users raised questions on the short-term impact of the decision.

One user pointed out that the long-term effects may result in a more structured playbook under new legislation or unified regulation, but the short-term impact may produce “more uncertainty.”

The user argued that without formal guidance and only rescinded supervisory notices, “banks may be unsure what is or isn’t allowed.”

One user asked AI chatbot Grok on whether banks can now “just buy what they want,” to which the popular AI assistant responded that the announcement may have “relaxed” some crypto guidance but banks are still required to follow general regulations.

Uncertainty and a lack of clear rules of the road have hampered growth and adoption in crypto, but U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission Chair Paul Atkins has vowed it will be his administration’s priority.

(Source: International Business Times – By Marvie Basilan – 25th April, 2025)

Miscellanea

1. TECHNOLOGY AND AI

# Italian newspaper says it has published world’s first AI-generated edition

An Italian newspaper has said it is the first in the world to publish an edition entirely produced by artificial intelligence. The initiative by Foglio, a conservative liberal daily, is part of a month-long journalistic experiment aimed at showing the impact AI technology has “on our way of working and our days”, the newspaper’s editor, Claudio Cerasa, said.

“It will be the first daily newspaper in the world on newsstands created entirely using artificial intelligence,” said Cerasa. “For everything. For the writing, the headlines, the quotes, the summaries. And, sometimes, even for the irony.” He added that journalists’ roles would be limited to “asking questions and reading the answers”.

The experiment comes as news organisations around the world grapple with how AI should be deployed. Earlier this month, the Guardian reported that BBC News was to use AI to give the public more personalised content. The front page of the first edition of Foglio AI carries a story referring to the US president, Donald Trump, describing the “paradox of Italian Trumpians” and how they rail against “cancel culture” yet either turn a blind eye, or worse, “celebrate” when “their idol in the US behaves like the despot of a banana republic”.

The front page also features a column headlined “Putin, the 10 betrayals”, with the article highlighting “20 years of broken promises, torn-up agreements and words betrayed” by Vladimir Putin, the Russian president.

The final page runs AI-generated letters from readers to the editor, with one asking whether AI will render humans “useless” in the future. “AI is a great innovation, but it doesn’t yet know how to order a coffee without getting the sugar wrong,” reads the AI-generated response.

Cerasa said Il Foglio AI reflected “a real newspaper” and was the product of “news, debate and provocations”. But it was also a testing ground to show how AI could work “in practice”, he said, while seeing what the impact would be on producing a daily newspaper with the technology and the questions “we are forced to ask ourselves, not only from a journalistic nature”.

(Source: www.theguardian.com dated 18th March, 2025)

2 STARTUPS

# Nandan Nilekani predicts that India will have one million startups by 2035

Infosys cofounder Nandan Nilekani predicts that India will have one million startups by 2035. He said that there are 150,000 startups today growing at a compound annual growth rate of 20%. He also noted that among 2000 funded startups, 100 unicorns have been created. He outlined a strategic roadmap for India to achieve an 8% annual growth rate and become an $8 trillion economy by 2035.

He stressed that while a 6% growth rate is commendable, a focused effort is needed to elevate living standards and accelerate progress. He noted that 50% of India’s wealth is in land.

He cautioned that significant headwinds, including income disparity, regional imbalances, and low productivity, threaten to impede progress. Nilekani revealed that only 13 districts contribute to half of India’s GDP, underscoring the stark spatial disparities. He also noted the vast income gap and the challenges posed by a largely informal economy.

Nilekani emphasised the need to leverage AI to bridge the digital divide and reach a billion Indians. He advocated for the development of low-cost, population-scale AI solutions, particularly in regional languages.

Nilekani predicted that India will have one million startups by 2035, driven by a thriving entrepreneurial ecosystem. He highlighted the “binary fission” effect, where successful startups spawn new ventures, creating a ripple effect of innovation.

His key recommendations for an $8 trillion economy included AI for a billion Indians: focus on last mile consumers and MSMEs, and emphasis on health, education and agriculture. His second recommendation was to accelerate capital investments, maximise AA penetration, and land monetisation via tokenisation.

Nilekani also suggested “unshackling” entrepreneurs and MSMEs by funding entrepreneurs outside the eight metros, and enabling credit and market access for 10 million MSMEs. He also recommended “turbocharging” formalisation, via portable credentials and benefits, and suggested deregulation for ease of business.

(Source: www.economictimes.com dated 12th March, 2025)

3. ENVIRONMENT

# ‘Unexpected’ rate of sea level rise in 2024: NASA

Sea levels rose faster than expected around the world in 2024 — the Earth’s hottest year on record, according to new findings from the United States’ NASA space agency, which attributed the rise to warming oceans and melting glaciers.

“With 2024 as the warmest year on record, Earth’s expanding oceans are following suit, reaching their highest levels in three decades,” NASA’s Nadya Vinogradova Shiffer, head of physical oceanography programmes said.

Josh Willis, a sea level researcher at NASA, said the rise in the world’s oceans last year was “higher than expected”, and while changes take place each year, what has become clear is that the “rate of rise is getting faster and faster”.

According to the NASA-led study of the information sourced via the Sentinel-6 Michael Freilich satellite, the rate of sea level rise last year was 0.59cm (0.23 inches) per year — higher than an initial expected estimate of 0.43cm (0.17 inches) per year.

Satellite recordings of ocean height started in 1993, and in the three decades up to 2023, the rate of sea level rise has more than doubled, with average sea levels around the globe rising by 10cm (3.93 inches) in total, according to NASA.

Rising sea levels are among the consequences of human-induced climate change, and oceans have risen in line with the increase in the Earth’s average surface temperature — a change which itself is caused by greenhouse gas emissions.

NASA said trends from recent years showed additional water from land due to melting ice sheets and glaciers to be the biggest contributor, accounting for two-thirds of sea level rise.

In 2024, however, the increased rise in sea levels was largely driven by the thermal expansion of water – when ocean water expands as it warms — which accounts for about two-thirds of the increase.

The UN has warned of threats to vast numbers of people living on islands or along coastlines due to rising sea levels, with low-lying coastal areas of India, Bangladesh, China and the Netherlands flagged as areas of particular concern, as well as island nations in the Pacific and Indian Oceans.

(Source: www.aljazeera.com dated 14th March, 2025)

# Purpose defeated: Brazil cuts thousands of trees to make way for climate summit

Brazil is facing growing criticism after clearing large sections of the Amazon rainforest to build a highway for the upcoming COP30 climate summit, set to take place in Belém, a northern city in Brazil, this November.

The four-lane highway, designed to accommodate tens of thousands of delegates, including world leaders, has sparked concerns about the environmental impact in one of the world’s most biodiverse regions.

The highway project, which was proposed by the state government of Pará over a decade ago, was delayed several times due to concerns about its environmental impact. However, with the summit approaching, the project has moved forward as part of a broader plan to prepare Belém for the influx of visitors. The state is also undertaking other major infrastructure projects, such as expanding the airport, redeveloping the port for cruise ships, and constructing new hotels.

The state government defends the highway, claiming it will be sustainable. They point to features like cycle lanes and wildlife crossings designed to help animals move through the area safely. Adler Silveira, the state’s infrastructure secretary, also highlighted that the road would use solar-powered lighting, further emphasizing its environmental credentials.

Despite these claims, many locals and environmental groups are outraged. Residents like Claudio Verequete, who lives about 200 meters from the new road, argue that the construction is devastating their livelihoods. Verequete, who once made his living harvesting açaí berries, shared his frustration with the BBC, saying, “Everything was destroyed. Our harvest has already been cut down. We no longer have that income to support our family.”

Conservationists have also raised alarms, warning that the deforestation could harm wildlife and disrupt the delicate balance of the Amazon ecosystem. The region is crucial for absorbing carbon dioxide and preserving global biodiversity, and many critics argue that the destruction of the forest for a highway goes against the very purpose of hosting a climate summit in the area.

As the summit draws closer, the debate over the highway and its environmental impact is intensifying, with critics questioning whether the destruction of part of the Amazon can be justified in the name of hosting a global climate event.

(Source: www.timesofindia.com dated 13th March, 2025)

Miscellanea

1. TECHNOLOGY AND AI

#Google Claims Its AI Tool Can Beat Math Olympiad Gold Medalists

Google has developed an artificial intelligence (AI) math system that can outwit human gold medalists at the International Mathematical Olympiad (IMO). AlphaGeometry2, the AI problem solver is capable of solving 84 per cent of geometry problems posed in the IMO where the gold-medal winners can only solve 81.8 per cent of the problems on average. IMO problems are known for their difficulty, and solving them requires a deep understanding of mathematical concepts — something which the AI models had not been able to achieve up until now.

Engineered by DeepMind, AlphaGeometry managed to perform at the level of silver medalists in
January last year when it was unveiled. However, a year later, Google claims the performance of its upgraded system had surpassed the level of average gold-medalists.

To enhance the system’s abilities, the California-based company said it extended the original AlphaGeometry language to tackle harder problems involving movements of objects, and problems containing linear equations of angles, ratios, and distances.

“This, together with other additions, has markedly improved the coverage rate of the AlphaGeometry language on IMO 2000-2024 geometry problems from 66 per cent to 88 per cent.”

Despite achieving an incredible 84 per cent efficiency rate in solving tricky math problems, Google said there is still room for improvement.

(Source: www.ndtv.com dated 24th February, 2025)

#Alibaba to invest more than $52 billion in AI over next 3 years

Alibaba opens new tab said on Monday it plans to invest at least 380 billion yuan ($52.44 billion) in its cloud computing and artificial intelligence infrastructure over the next three years.

The Chinese e-commerce giant had said it had plans to invest in the sector. The company had reported revenue of 280.15 billion yuan for the three months ended December 31.

Alibaba said the total investment amount exceeds the company’s spending in AI and cloud computing over the past decade. The company has kicked off 2025 as a winner in China’s AI race, drawing in investors with strategic business deals. Its stock has risen more than 68% this year, as of last close.

Other Chinese firms have also been investing into the sector, with ByteDance, the Chinese owner of TikTok, earmarking over 150 billion yuan in capital expenditure for this year, much of which will be centered on AI

(Source: www.reuters.com dated 24th February, 2025)

2 WORLD NEWS

Tesla in India: Trump says unfair to U.S. if Elon Musk builds factory in India

U.S.A. President Donald Trump has said that if Tesla were to build a factory in India to circumvent that country’s tariffs, it would be “unfair” to the U.S.A. Mr. Trump called out India’s high duty on cars during Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s visit to the U.S. last week but agreed to work towards an early trade deal and resolve their standoff over tariffs.

Tesla’s CEO Elon Musk has long criticised India for having import tariffs of around 100 per cent on EVs which protect local automakers such as Tata Motors in the world’s third largest auto market, where EV adoption is still at a nascent stage.

Mr. Trump said it is “impossible” for Mr. Musk to sell a car in the South Asian nation. “Every country in the world takes advantage of us, and they do it with tariffs… It is impossible to sell a car, practically, in, as an example, India,” he said.

India’s government in March unveiled a new EV policy lowering import taxes substantially to 15% if a carmaker invests at least $500 million and sets up a factory.

Tesla has selected locations for two showrooms in the Indian cities of New Delhi and Mumbai, and posted job ads for 13 mid-level roles in India. It does not currently manufacture any vehicles in India.

Mr. Trump said it would be “unfair” to the U.S. if Mr. Musk did decide to build a factory there. “Now, if he built the factory in India, that’s okay, but that’s unfair to us. It’s very unfair,” Mr. Trump said in the interview. Mr. Trump’s plans for reciprocal tariffs on every country that taxes U.S. imports have raised the risk of a global trade war with American friends and foes.

(Source: www.thehindu.com dated 20th February, 2025)

3. ENVIRONMENT

#Global glacier melt is accelerating, new study finds

Ice loss from the world’s glaciers has accelerated over the past decade, a first-of-its-kind global assessment has found, warning that melting may be faster than previously expected in the coming years and drive sea levels higher.

The assessment published in the journal Nature by an international team of researchers found a sharp increase in melting over the past decade, with around 36 percent more ice lost in the 2012 to 2023 period than in the years from 2000 to 2011.
Michael Zemp, a professor at the University of Zurich and co-author of the study, said the findings were “shocking” if not altogether surprising. Regions with smaller glaciers are losing them faster, and many “will not survive the present century”.

“Hence, we are facing higher sea-level rise until the end of this century than expected before,” Zemp told the AFP news agency, adding that glacier loss would also impact fresh water supplies, particularly in central Asia and the central Andes.

Overall, researchers found that the world’s glaciers have lost around five percent of their volume since the turn of the century, with wide regional differences ranging from a two-percent loss in Antarctica to up to 40 percent in the European Alps. On average, some 273 billion tonnes of ice are being lost per year – equivalent to the world population’s water consumption for 30 years, scientists said.

Martin Siegert, a professor at the University of Exeter who was not involved in the study, said the research was “concerning” because it predicts further glacier losses and could indicate how Antarctica and Greenland’s vast ice sheets react to global warming. “Ice sheets are now losing mass at increasing rates – six times more than 30 years ago – and when they change, we stop talking centimetres and start talking metres,” he said.

Zemp warned that to save the world’s glaciers, “you have to reduce the greenhouse gas emissions, it is as simple and as complicated as that.” “Every tenth of a degree warming that we avoid saves us money, saves us lives, saves us problems,” he said.

(Source: www.aljazeera.com dated 24th February, 2025)

Miscellanea

1. TECHNOLOGY AND AI

#World-first’ AI camera targets drink-drivers

Motorists under the influence of alcohol or drugs could be caught by a pioneering AI camera which is being tested for the first time in Devon and Cornwall. The state-of-the-art Heads-Up machine can detect road use and behaviour consistent with drivers who may be impaired by drink or drugs.

Police further up the road can stop the vehicle, talk to the driver and do a roadside test for alcohol and illegal drugs. Geoff Collins, UK general manager of camera developer Acusensus, said: “We are delighted to be conducting the world’s first trials of this technology right here in Devon and Cornwall.”

The camera can be moved quickly to any road in either county, without warning, with drivers unaware they have been spotted until police pull them over. “We are all safer if we can detect impairment before it causes an incident that could ruin lives,” said Mr. Collins.

Acusensus cameras have previously been used to help police catch drivers using mobile phones at the wheel or not wearing seat belts. With drink-drivers six times more likely to be involved in a fatal crash, Devon & Cornwall Police are hoping the Heads-Up system will help to save lives.

“Our officers cannot be everywhere,” said Supt Simon Jenkinson, whose team polices the 14,000 miles of roads in the two counties. As members of the Vision Zero South West road safety partnership, we’re committed to doing everything we can to reduce the number of
people killed and seriously injured on our roads. Embracing emerging technology such as these cameras is vital in that quest. The trial is taking place throughout December to coincide with other drink-driving campaigns.

(Source: bbc.com dated 14th December, 2024)

#THE 12 GREATEST DANGERS OF AI

In his new book Taming Silicon Valley, the AI expert Gary Marcus shared what he sees as the greatest dangers of AI and gave a list of 12 immediate dangers of AI in Silicon Valley.

1. Deliberate, automated, mass-produced political disinformation.

“Generative AI systems are the machine guns (or nukes) of disinformation, making disinformation faster, cheaper, and more pitch perfect,” says Marcus. “During the 2016 election campaign, Russia was spending $1.25 million per month on human-powered troll farms that created fake content, much of it aimed at creating dissension and causing conflict in the United States.”

2. Market manipulation.

He argues, “Bad actors won’t just try to influence elections; they will also try to influence markets. I warned Congress of this possibility on 18th May, 2023; four days later, it would become a reality: a fake image of the Pentagon, allegedly having exploded, spread virally across the internet,” which made the stock market briefly buckle.

3. Accidental misinformation.

“Even when there is no intention to deceive, LLMs can spontaneously generate (accidental) misinformation. One huge area of concern is medical advice. A study from Stanford’s Human-Centered AI Institute showed that LLM responses to medical questions were highly variable, often inaccurate,” notes Marcus.

4. Defamation.

“A special case of misinformation is misinformation that hurts people’s reputations, whether accidentally or on purpose,” notes Marcus. “In one particularly egregious case, ChatGPT alleged that a law professor had been involved in a sexual harassment case while on a field trip in Alaska with a student, pointing to an article allegedly documenting this in The Washington Post. But none of it checked out.”

5. Nonconsensual deepfakes.

Marcus explains that “Deepfakes are getting more and more realistic, and their use is increasing. In October 2023 (if not earlier) some high school students started using AI to make nonconsensual fake nudes of their classmates.”

6. Accelerating crime.

Marcus argues that Generative AI is already being used for impersonation scams and spear-phishing. “The biggest impersonation scam so far seems to revolve around voice-cloning. Scammers will, for example, clone a child’s voice and make a phone call with the cloned voice, alleging that the child has been kidnapped; the parents are asked to wire money, for example, in the form of bitcoin.”

7. Cybersecurity and bioweapons.

“Generative AI can be used to hack websites to discover ‘zero-day’ vulnerabilities (which are unknown to the developers) in software and phones, by automatically scanning millions of lines of code—something heretofore done only by expert humans,” explains Marcus.

8. Bias and discrimination.

“Bias has been a problem with AI for years. In one early case, documented in 2013 by Latanya Sweeney, African American names induced very different ad results from Google than other names did, such as advertisements for researching criminal records.”

9. Privacy and data leaks.

Marcus points to Shoshana Zuboff’s book The Age of Surveillance Capitalism, where she argued that companies are spying on all of us and that surveillance capitalism “claims human experience as free raw material for translation into behavioral data [that] are declared as proprietary behavioral surplus, fed into [AI], and fabricated into prediction products that anticipate what you will do now, soon, and later.” Marcus adds: “and then sold to whoever wants to manipulate you.”

10. Intellectual property taken without consent.

A lot of what AI will “regurgitate is copyrighted material, used without the consent of creators like artists and writers and actors,” notes Marcus. “The whole thing has been called the Great Data Heist — a land grab for intellectual property that will (unless stopped by government intervention or citizen action) lead to a huge transfer of wealth — from almost all of us — to a tiny number of companies.”

11. Overreliance on unreliable systems.

Marcus explains: “In safety-critical applications, giving LLMs full sway over the world is a huge mistake waiting to happen, particularly given all the issues of hallucination, inconsistent reasoning, and unreliability we have seen. Imagine, for example, a driverless car system using an LLM and hallucinating the location of another car. Or an automated weapon system hallucinating enemy positions. Or worse, LLMs launching nukes.”

12. Environmental costs.

The training of LLMs requires enormous amounts of energy, which has implications for the environment. “Generating a single image takes roughly as much energy as charging a phone. Because Generative AI is likely to be used billions of times a day, it adds up,” explains Marcus. Additionally, he notes that the trend among AI companies is to train bigger and bigger models, which requires astronomical amounts of energy.

(Source: Forbes.com dated 9th November, 2024)

2 HEALTH

#Elon Musk’s Neuralink announces study to connect brain implant to robotic arm

Elon Musk’s brain-computer interface implant startup Neuralink announced on X that it received approval to launch a new feasibility study, CONVOY, which will test the use of its wireless brain-computer interface (BCI), or N1 implant, to control an investigational assistive robotic arm.

“This is an important first step towards restoring not only digital freedom, but also physical freedom. More info to come, but the CONVOY study will enable cross-enrolling participants from the ongoing PRIME study,” Neuralink said in a post.

Neuralink’s PRIME study (short for Precise Robotically Implanted Brain-Computer Interface) involves the placement of a small, cosmetically invisible implant in the area of a person’s brain that plans movements. The N1 implant is designed to interpret one’s neural activity to assist them in operating a computer or smartphone by simply intending to move.

The ongoing medical device clinical trial is designed to provide individuals with quadriplegia the ability to use digital devices with their thoughts, and the company is continuing to seek individuals to participate in the study.

Neurolink’s BCI device was first implanted into 29-year-old quadriplegic Noland Arbaugh in February, resulting in Arbaugh having the ability to play chess and video games hands-free.

In July, Elon Musk joined Neuralink to give a live update on patients implanted with the Telepathy device. “Let’s say somebody has lost their arms or legs, we could actually attach an Optimus arm or Optimus legs to a Neuralink implant so that the motor commands from your brain that would go to our biological arms now go to your robot arms or robot legs, and you’d basically have cybernetic superpowers,” Musk said.

Optimus, also known as the Tesla Bot, is a general-purpose robotic humanoid that was initially announced by Musk in 2021, with a prototype shown in 2022. Musk showcased the robot’s progress at Tesla’s “We, Robot” event at Warner Bros. Studio last month in Los Angeles.

Neuralink recently announced it received approval from Health Canada to perform a clinical trial on its N1 brain implant and R1 robot, which is used to place the implant into the brain. The “Canadian Precise Robotically Implanted Brain-Computer Interface” (CAN-PRIME) study will be performed by the University Health Network (UHN) hospital at its Toronto Western Hospital.

Last month, the company received FDA breakthrough device designation for Blindsight, an implant that aims to restore vision in individuals who are blind. Blindsight implants a microelectrode array into the visual cortex of a person’s brain. The array then activates neurons, which then provide the individual with a visual image.

(Source: www.mobihealthnews.com dated 27th November, 2024)

Miscellanea

1. BUSINESS

Microsoft ‘teaches’ new AI tools To ‘act’ on behalf of humans in work and life

Microsoft CEO Satya Nadella, during the Microsoft Ignite conference on Tuesday, revealed that the company is currently “teaching” new AI tools that would have the capacity to act on behalf of humans in both work and life.

Developers of AI are looking at the next wave of AI chatbots as “agents” that can do more things for people. However, one setback in the development of such tools is the high cost.

On a blog on 19th November, 2024, Microsoft elaborated on the benefits of AI agents for companies, highlighting how it can help businesses to accomplish more.

One example that the tech giant gave was on handling shipping and returns. AI agents “can operate around the clock to review and approve customer returns or go over shipping invoices to help businesses avoid costly supply-chain errors.”

It also added that “they can reason over reams of product information to give field technicians step-by-step instructions or use context and memory to open and close tickets for an IT help desk.”

Jared Spataro, the chief marketing officer of Microsoft’s AI at Work, said that one must regard agents as “the new apps for an AI-powered world.”

He also emphasised that they are adding new capabilities that would be a solution to some of the biggest challenges that people face at work and thereafter provide real business results.

OpenAI’s recently announced 01 series can bring more advanced reasoning capabilities to agents, allowing them to take on more complicated tasks by breaking them down into steps such as getting the information of someone on an IT help desk would need to solve a problem, factoring in solutions they’ve tried and coming up with a plan.

Just last month, Microsoft made a pronouncement that it was preparing the world where “every organisation will have a constellation of agents — ranging from simple prompt-and-response to fully autonomous,” the Associated Press reported.

The annual Ignite conference of Microsoft caters to its huge business customers. Many users have started noticing the limitations of chatbots like ChatGPT, Gemini, and Copilot, which work by predicting the most plausible next word in sentences. This slowly ushered the shift towards agentic AI, which is said to work better in longer-range planning and decision making. This aspect allows these agents to control computers and perform tasks on behalf of humans.

Marc Benioff, the CEO of Salesforce, expressed doubt on the move of Microsoft, calling the re-branding of the giant’s Copilot into “agents” as “panic mode”. Benioff stated that Copilot was actually a “flop”, claiming that the assistant was inaccurate.

On the other hand, Ece Kamar, the managing director of Microsoft’s AI Frontiers Lab, put forward positive thoughts on agentic AI.

“If you want to have a system that can really solve real-world problems and help people, that system has to have a good understanding of the world we live in, and when something happens, that system has to perceive that change and take action accordingly,” he said.

(Source: International Business Times — By Anna Resuma — 20th November, 2024)

2. CULTURE | LIFE & STYLE

#A new research highlights how diet rich in processed foods may hasten biological aging

Research reveals that consuming ultra-processed foods may speed up the aging process at a cellular level

A study out of Italy has once again raised alarms about the health impacts of ultra-processed foods (UPFs). The research, published in The American Journal of Clinical Nutrition, links a diet rich in packaged snacks, sugary drinks, and other industrially processed products to accelerated biological aging.

Biological age, which reflects the condition of our cells and tissues, is distinct from chronological age — the number of years a person has been alive. While genetics play a role in how quickly we age, lifestyle habits such as diet and exercise can also have a significant impact. This new study shows that for middle-aged and elderly adults, consuming more than 14 per cent of daily calories from UPFs can make them biologically older than their actual age.

The research involved 22,500 participants from Italy who were asked to fill out detailed food questionnaires. Blood tests were also performed to measure 36 biomarkers, which helped researchers determine the participants’ biological age. The results were striking: those with higher consumption of UPFs showed signs of accelerated aging.

UPFs are not only nutritionally poor, often high in sugar, fat, and salt, but they also undergo extensive processing that strips away essential nutrients and fibre. “This intense processing alters the food matrix, which can harm metabolism and gut microbiota balance,” said Marialaura Bonaccio, a nutritional epidemiologist and study co-author. The gut microbiota, which refers to the balance of bacteria, viruses, and fungi in the digestive system, plays a crucial role in overall health, and disruptions to this balance can have far-reaching effects.

Bonaccio further explained that many UPFs are wrapped in plastic packaging, which may introduce additional toxic substances into the body. These substances, combined with the poor nutritional profile of UPFs, contribute to their harmful effects on the body over time.

The study, and others like it, serve as a timely reminder of the long-term health consequences of the modern food environment, where convenience often comes at the cost of well-being.

(Source: International Business Times — By Priya Walia — 7th November, 2024)

3. OTHER NEWS

#Cabinet approves PAN 2.0 Project worth ₹1,435 cr; PAN cards to soon have QR codes

The Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs (CCEA), chaired by Prime Minister Narendra Modi, approved the PAN 2.0 Project for the Income Tax Department on Monday, with a financial outlay of ₹1,435 crore. This e-Governance initiative aims to upgrade the existing PAN/TAN system by re-engineering taxpayer registration services through technology improving the digital experience for taxpayers.

The Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs (CCEA), chaired by Prime Minister Narendra Modi, approved the PAN 2.0 Project for the Income Tax Department on Monday, with a financial outlay of ₹1,435 crore.

The new project will provide a free-of-cost upgrade to the PAN Card with a QR Code, Union Information and Broadcasting Minister Ashwini Vaishnaw announced.

PAN 2.0 Project is an e-Governance project for re-engineering the business processes of taxpayer registration services through technology driven transformation of PAN / TAN services for enhanced digital experience of the taxpayers. This will be an upgrade of the current PAN / TAN 1.0 eco-system consolidating the core and non-core PAN / TAN activities as well as PAN validation service.

The entire PAN issuance and verification system will be overhauled, said Vaishnaw.

As per the central government, the PAN 2.0 Project enables technology driven transformation of Taxpayer registration services and has significant benefits including:

  • Ease of access and speedy service delivery with improved quality;
  • Single Source of Truth and data consistency
  • Eco-friendly processes and cost optimisation; and
  • Security and optimisation of infrastructure for greater agility.

The PAN 2.0 Project resonates with the vision of the Government enshrined in Digital India by enabling the use of PAN as Common Identifier for all digital systems of specified government agencies.

Vaishnaw said, there will be a unified portal, it will be completely “paperless and online.” The emphasis will be on the grievance redressal system, he added.

Do you need a new PAN?

No, you won’t need a new PAN. Your existing PAN will continue.

Will the new upgradation be free of cost?

Yes, all upgrades, including the addition of a QR code, will be provided at no cost.

What is PAN?

A PAN is an alphanumeric identifier consisting of ten characters, issued as a laminated card by the Income Tax Department. It is provided to any “person” upon application or allocated directly by the department without a formal request.

The Income Tax Department utilises PAN to monitor and connect all transactions associated with an individual. This includes various activities such as tax payments, TDS / TCS credits, income returns, specific transactions, and official communications. PAN serves as a unique identifier linking a “person” to the tax department.

The introduction of PAN has streamlined the connection of various documents and activities, including tax payments, assessments, demands and arrears. It enables quick information access and helps match details about investments, loans and business activities gathered from various internal and external sources. This system aids in identifying tax evasion whilst expanding the overall tax base.

(Source: ET Online — 25th November, 2024)

Miscellanea

1. TECHNOLOGY

#Google turns to nuclear to power AI data centres

Google has signed a deal to use small nuclear reactors to generate the vast amounts of energy needed to power its artificial intelligence (AI) data centres. The company says the agreement with Kairos Power will see it start using the first reactor this decade and bring more online by 2035.

The companies did not give any details about the deal’s value or where the plants would be built. Technology firms are increasingly turning to nuclear energy sources to supply the electricity used by the huge data centres that drive AI.

“The grid needs new electricity sources to support AI technologies,” said Michael Terrell, senior director for energy and climate at Google. “This agreement helps accelerate a new technology to meet energy needs cleanly and reliably, and unlock the full potential of AI for everyone.”

The deal with Google “is important to accelerate the commercialisation of advanced nuclear energy by demonstrating the technical and market viability of a solution critical to decarbonising power grids,” said Kairos executive Jeff Olson.

The plans still have to be approved by the US Nuclear Regulatory Commission as well as local agencies before they are allowed to proceed. Last year, US regulators gave California-based Kairos Power the first permit in 50 years to build a new type of nuclear reactor.

In July, the company started construction of a demonstration reactor in Tennessee. The start-up specialises in the development of smaller reactors that use molten fluoride salt as a coolant instead of water, which is used by traditional nuclear plants.

Nuclear power, which is virtually carbon-free and provides electricity 24 hours a day, has become increasingly attractive to the tech industry as it attempts to cut emissions even as it uses more energy. In March, Amazon said it would buy a nuclear-powered data centre in the State of Pennsylvania.

(Source: bbc.com dated 15th October, 2024)

#Influencers risking death in hurricanes for clicks and cash

While millions of people in Florida fled Hurricane Milton, Mike Smalls Jr ventured into the violent winds in Tampa, Florida, holding a blow-up mattress, an umbrella and a pack of ramen noodles.

He went outside Wednesday evening as the storm pounded the US state and live-streamed on the platform Kick. He told his online audience if he reached 10,000 views, he would launch himself and his mattress into the water.

Once he hit the threshold, he took the plunge. Then he got worried: “The wind started picking up and I don’t know how to swim…so I had to grab onto the tree.”

The area was under an evacuation order, meaning residents had been advised by local officials to leave their homes, for their safety.

Mike’s hour-long stream from Tampa Bay has more than 60,000 views on the streaming platform Kick and has been seen by millions after being clipped up and posted on other social media platforms, including X.

Live streaming — filming yourself in real-time — has become increasingly lucrative for content creators looking to make quick money. But these streams can involve dangerous stunts, as content creators try to stand out in an increasingly competitive environment.

Many people have criticised Mike’s behaviour on social media, suggesting he’s risking his life for clicks. He made it safely — and told me he’d do the risky stunt again, “if the price is right”.

When asked about the backlash, he admits what he did was “controversial” and acknowledges that some might think he is risking not just his life, but the lives of those who might have to save him. But, he added: “From a content creator standpoint, people like to see kind of edgy things.”

The Tampa Police Department said in a statement: “Ignoring mandatory evacuation orders puts lives at risk. When individuals disregard these warnings, they not only jeopardise their own safety but also create additional challenges for first responders who are working tirelessly to save lives.”

“Intentionally placing oneself in harm’s way could divert critical resources and delay vital rescue operations for others.” Hundreds of people have died during this year’s hurricane season, which has devastated parts of the US south-eastern coast.

(Source: bbc.com dated 10th October, 2024)

2. ENVIRONMENT

#Earth ‘vital signs’ reach critical extremes, climate experts warn of unpredictable future

Earth’s vital signs have reached critical levels, warns a 2023 report from Bioscience. Of the 35 key indicators studied, 25 have declined drastically, including CO2 levels and population growth, with record-high temperatures and extreme weather events.

A new report from leading climate scientists has issued a new warning that Earth’s ‘vital signs’ have reached ‘critical levels,’ with the ‘the future of humanity’ hanging on a delicate rope. This comes from a 2023 assessment published in the journal Bioscience, which analysed 35 key indicators of planetary health and found that 25 have already declined by record levels, including rising carbon dioxide levels and rapid population growth.

According to the scientists, the world is entering a new, unknown territory of a ‘critical and unpredictable new phase of the climate crisis.’ The scientists call for immediate transformative measures to combat the climate crisis and emphasise on restoring the ecosystem

Earth’s temperature hits record highs

Driven by record fossil fuel consumption, Earth’s surface and ocean temperatures reached all-time highs in 2023. The report reveals that the global population is increasing by approximately 2,00,000 people each day, along with 1,70,000 new cattle and sheep.

These trends are contributing to record greenhouse gas emissions, further intensifying global warming. The scientists identified 28 feedback loops, such as emissions from thawing permafrost, which could trigger catastrophic tipping points, including the collapse of Greenland’s icecap.

Extreme weather events and rising heat

Global warming is accelerating extreme weather events across the world. Hurricanes in the U.S. and heatwaves exceeding 50°C in India are exposing billions of people to dangerous levels of heat. The experts emphasise that without rapid, decisive action, the human toll will be catastrophic.

“We’re already in the midst of abrupt climate upheaval,” said Professor William Ripple from Oregon State University, who co-led the report. “Ecological overshoot — taking more than the Earth can sustain — has pushed the planet into dangerous conditions, unlike anything humans have ever witnessed.”

Climate change and societal instability

Climate change is already displacing millions of people, and the report suggests that hundreds of millions or even billions could be forced to migrate in the future. Such displacement could lead to geopolitical instability, and in the worst case, partial societal collapse.

The report also notes that the concentration of carbon dioxide and methane, a potent greenhouse gas, has reached record levels. Methane is 80 times more powerful than CO2 over a 20-year period and is emitted by fossil fuel operations, waste dumps, cattle, and rice fields. The accelerating growth of methane emissions is particularly concerning, according to co-author Dr Christopher Wolf.

Resistance to change and the role of renewables

Despite a 15 per cent increase in wind and solar energy use in 2023, coal, oil and gas remain the dominant sources of energy. The report attributes this to the strong resistance from industries that benefit financially from the fossil fuel-based system.

The report also referenced a Guardian survey of hundreds of climate experts conducted in May 2023. The survey found that only 6 per cent believe the world will keep global warming below the internationally agreed limit of 1.5°C. The researchers stress that avoiding even the smallest increases in temperature is crucial, as each tenth of a degree of warming could expose an additional 100 million people to unprecedented heat.

A broader ecological crisis

The climate crisis, the report argues, is part of a larger ecological and social breakdown, driven by pollution, the destruction of nature and rising inequality. The scientists emphasise that climate change is a symptom of deeper systemic issues, namely ecological overshoot — where humanity is consuming resources faster than the Earth can replenish them. Without transformative changes, these systemic issues could lead to widespread human suffering and the degradation of ecosystems across the planet.

Urgent action needed

The scientists call for bold, transformative changes to combat the climate crisis. Among the policies they recommend are reducing the human population through education and empowerment for girls and women, restoring ecosystems and integrating climate change education into global school curriculums. As nations prepare for the UN’s COP29 climate summit in Azerbaijan in November, the report concludes with a final warning: only through decisive action can we avert severe human suffering and protect future generations

(Source: timesofindia.com dated 11th October, 2024)

#UN Report Says 1.1 Billion People in Acute Poverty

More than one billion people are living in acute poverty across the globe, a UN Development Program report said Thursday, with children accounting for over half of those affected.

The paper published with the Oxford Poverty and Human Development Initiative (OPHI) highlighted that poverty rates were three times higher in countries at war, as 2023 saw the most conflicts around the world since the Second World War.

The UNDP and the OPHI have published their Multidimensional Poverty Index annually since 2010, harvesting data from 112 countries with a combined population of 6.3 billion people. It uses indicators such as a lack of adequate housing, sanitation, electricity, cooking fuel, nutrition and school attendance.

“The 2024 MPI paints a sobering picture: 1.1 billion people endure multidimensional poverty, of which 455 million live in the shadow of conflict,” said Yanchun Zhang, chief statistician at the UNDP.

The report echoed last year’s findings that 1.1 billion out of 6.1 billion people across 110 countries were facing extreme multidimensional poverty. Some 584 million people under 18 were experiencing extreme poverty, accounting for 27.9 per cent of children worldwide, compared with 13.5 per cent of adults.

It also showed that 83.2 per cent of the world’s poorest people live in Sub-Saharan Africa and South Asia. Sabina Alkire, director of the OPHI, told AFP that conflicts were hindering efforts for poverty reduction.

“At some level, these findings are intuitive. But what shocked us was the sheer magnitude of people who are struggling to live a decent life and at the same time fearing for their safety — 455 million,” she said.

“This points to a stark but unavoidable challenge to the international community to both zero in on poverty reduction and foster peace, so that any ensuing peace actually endures,” Alkire added.

India was the country with the largest number of people in extreme poverty, which impacts 234 million of its 1.4 billion population. It was followed by Pakistan, Ethiopia, Nigeria and the Democratic Republic of the Congo. The five countries accounted for nearly half of the 1.1 billion poor people.

(Source: NDTV.com dated 10th October, 2024

Miscellanea

1. BUSINESS

#Indian space start-up Pixxel bags NASA contract to support Earth science research

Indian space start-up Pixxel has bagged a NASA contract to support Earth science research using the hyperspectral technology.

The Bengaluru-based company has become a part of NASA’s $476-million commercial small-sat data acquisition program — a first for an Indian start-up after the space sector was opened to private companies in 2020.

Co-founder and CEO Awais Ahmed called the award a “monumental achievement for Pixxel”.

He said the contract, valid till November 2028, “validates that hyperspectral imaging will be integral to the future of space-based Earth observation and enable us to truly build a health monitor for the planet”.

As per the contract, Pixxel will provide NASA and its US government and academic partners with hyperspectral Earth observation data. This will help empower the administration’s Earth science research and application activities.

Pixxel hyperspectral can capture data across hundreds of narrow wavelengths. Its datasets can also unravel granular insights on climate change, agriculture, biodiversity, and resource management, among others.

Building on this momentum, Pixxel is also making significant strides toward launching six satellites shortly. Fireflies — its 5-metre resolution hyperspectral satellites — will be the highest-resolution hyperspectral satellites ever launched.

These satellites will capture data across over 250 spectral bands, offering more comprehensive coverage with a 40km swath width and a 24-hour revisit frequency anywhere on the planet.

In addition, Pixxel also plans to expand its constellation to 24 satellites to make hyperspectral data commercially. This will make it more broadly available and accessible to stakeholders across industries and governments.

Pixxel has a constellation of the world’s highest-resolution hyperspectral imaging satellites that are designed for
24-hour revisits anywhere on Earth.

The satellites can help detect, monitor, and predict critical global phenomena across agriculture, oil and gas, mining, environment, and other sectors in up to 50 times richer detail.

Pixxel has also launched its in-house Earth Observation Studio, Aurora, to make satellite imagery analysis easily accessible.

The company has also raised over $70 million from Google, Lightspeed, Radical Ventures, Relativity’s Jordan Noone, Seraphim Capital, Ryan Johnson, Blume Ventures, Sparta LLC, Accenture, and others.

(Source: International Business Times –— ByIBT Business Desk — 10th September, 2024)

 

2. TECHNOLOGY

#Unlocking Success with AI-Powered CRMs: A New Era in Customer Relationship Management

AI-powered CRMs provide a crucial advantage by automating routine tasks like data entry, lead qualification, and follow-up communications, allowing employees to focus on strategic initiatives.

Integrating Artificial Intelligence (AI) into customer relationship management (CRM) systems is revolutionizing how businesses engage with customers. Vikas Reddy Penubelli highlights how AI-powered CRMs utilize machine learning, predictive analytics, and automation to enhance customer experiences, streamline operations, and drive business growth. By harnessing data insights, companies can personalize engagement, optimize resources, and remain competitive in the fast-paced, data-driven marketplace.

A Paradigm Shift in CRM

The integration of AI into CRM systems marks a significant shift in how businesses engage with their customers. AI-powered CRMs leverage machine learning, predictive analytics, and automation to deliver enhanced customer experiences. These systems enable companies to analyze vast amounts of data to predict customer behavior, personalize engagement, and optimize operations.

Enhanced Customer Understanding and Personalization

AI-powered CRMs analyze customer data from sources like transaction history, social media, and support interactions using advanced techniques such as clustering and sentiment analysis. These insights enable businesses to tailor products, services, and communications for personalized experiences. For example, retail companies can offer personalized product recommendations based on purchase history and browsing behavior, leading to increased engagement, higher conversion rates, and improved customer satisfaction.

Automation and Efficiency Gains

AI-powered CRMs provide a crucial advantage by automating routine tasks like data entry, lead qualification, and follow-up communications, allowing employees to focus on strategic initiatives. For instance, a software company can automatically classify and prioritize support tickets, addressing high-priority issues quickly. Automation optimizes resource allocation and boosts operational efficiency. Additionally, the productivity gains from AI-powered CRMs directly enhance profitability, as faster data processing and intelligent task prioritization enable sales teams to close more deals and drive revenue growth.

Predictive Capabilities and Market Trends

One of the most powerful features of AI-powered CRMs is their predictive capabilities. These systems can forecast customer behaviour, churn risk, and future market trends by analyzing complex data patterns. Vikas Reddy Penubelli highlights how businesses can leverage these insights to stay ahead of the curve and proactively address customer needs.

For example, a telecommunications company using an AI-powered CRM can predict which customers will likely churn due to poor network coverage in certain areas. By offering targeted retention incentives, the company can reduce churn and enhance customer lifetime value.

Predictive insights empower businesses to make informed decisions, optimize their strategies, and drive sustainable growth.

Challenges and Considerations

While AI-powered CRMs offer numerous benefits, their implementation comes with challenges. Businesses must address hurdles related to data privacy, employee adaptation, and technological integration. As companies collect and analyze large amounts of customer data, ensuring compliance with regulations like GDPR and the CCPA becomes essential for maintaining trust and security.

Moreover, successfully integrating AI into existing workflows requires significant employee training and adaptation. Sales teams, for example, must learn to trust AI-driven insights while applying their own expertise and judgment. Businesses that invest in upskilling their workforce and fostering a data-driven culture are better positioned to maximize the value of AI-powered CRMs.

The Future of AI-Powered CRMs

Looking ahead, the future of AI-powered CRMs looks promising, with advancements in technologies like edge computing, 5G networks, and blockchain set to enhance CRM capabilities. These innovations will enable real-time data processing and secure data sharing. As AI evolves, businesses can expect more advanced predictive modeling, natural language understanding, and autonomous decision-making, driving further growth and efficiency.

In conclusion, AI-powered CRMs represent a significant shift in customer engagement and business growth. By harnessing the power of AI, companies can gain deep insights into customer behavior, personalize experiences at scale, and automate repetitive tasks. Businesses that adopt AI-powered CRMs will be well-positioned to succeed in the increasingly competitive, data-driven marketplace.

(Source: International Business Times — By Alexander Maxwell — 18th September, 2024)

 

3. HEALTH

#India’s Health Coverage for Seniors Over 70

The Indian government has announced its decision to provide health coverage to all senior citizens aged 70 and above. This decision, approved by the Union Cabinet under the chairmanship of Prime Minister Narendra Modi, in the country’s approach towards elder care. The health coverage will be provided under the flagship scheme Ayushman Bharat Pradhan Mantri Jan Arogya Yojana (AB-PMJAY), also known as AA. This scheme will offer free treatment up to ₹5 lakh to the senior citizens, irrespective of their income.

Abhay Soi, President of NATHEALTH, has lauded this move, calling it a historic shift in the way the country approaches elder care. He emphasized that this segment of the population, which carries a high disease burden, is in urgent need of social protection. He further stated that this initiative will strengthen India’s position as a leader in inclusive healthcare”. So I also highlighted the need for the benefit package to be tailored to the population segment so that it encompasses the entire continuum of care. He assured that NATHEALTH is ready to support the government with the rollout of this scheme.

Under the new provisions, senior citizens aged 70 years and above, who belong to families already covered under the scheme, will receive an additional top-up cover up to ₹5 lakh per year. This amount will not have to be shared with the other members of the family who are below the age of 70 years. All other senior citizens of the age 70 years and above will get a cover up to ₹5 lakh per year on a family basis. The eligible senior citizens will also be issued a new distinct card under the scheme.

Dr. Sudhir Kumar, a renowned neurologist from Indraprastha Apollo Hospitals, Hyderabad, took to social media to express his approval of the government’s decision. He wrote, “Excellent move by the Govt of India to provide health coverage for all people aged 70 and above irrespective of income.” He also urged the government to extend this health coverage to citizens of other age categories. Dr. Kumar pointed out that there are about 9 crore people in the age group of 60 to 70 years. He expressed hope that they could be included in this scheme before 2029 and that by 2034, every Indian citizen would be provided health coverage.

This move by the Indian government is reminiscent of similar initiatives taken by other countries to provide comprehensive health coverage to their senior citizens. For instance, the United States has the Medicare program, which provides health insurance to people aged 65 or older. Similarly, the United Kingdom has the National Health Service, which provides free healthcare to all residents, including senior citizens

(Source: International Business Times — By Sheezan Naseer — 12th September, 2024)

 

4. SPORTS

#”Khelo India” goes global: South Africa hosts first international sports event

The inaugural international edition of the ‘Khelo India’ program, an initiative spearheaded by Prime Minister Narendra Modi, has been successfully hosted in South Africa. The event, which concluded after two weeks of competitions, was a massive success.

In a significant milestone for India’s global sports outreach, the first phase of the Khelo India initiative was held outside the country and concluded successfully in South Africa. The two-week-long event united South African and Indian expatriates through competitions in volleyball, badminton, table tennis, and chess.

Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s vision for Khelo India, which was launched in 2017 to promote sports across India, has now taken an international leap. The event in South Africa is seen as a testament to sports diplomacy, with the initiative aiming to bring people together through athletic engagement.

“Prime Minister Modi is the driving force behind this initiative,” said South African table tennis player Revaldo Wilson. “Sports is powerful, and we enjoyed playing with our Indian brothers.”

The Khelo India event was co-hosted by the India Club and the Consulate General of India in Johannesburg. Manish Gupta, Chairman of the India Club, highlighted the collaboration between local South African associations and various Indian organizations.

“We gladly accepted Consul General Mahesh Kumar’s request to coordinate the event. We brought in a number of Indian expatriate organizations, ensuring inclusivity across the board,” Gupta said.

The tournament saw the South African Tamil Association managing the volleyball competition, while the Gauteng Malayalee Association oversaw badminton. Chess and table tennis were coordinated with local bodies like Chess South Africa and the South African Table Tennis Board. Gupta added that the chess event had international grading, while the table tennis competition was a national championship-level event, attracting top-tier players, including South Africa’s six-time national champion.

Consul General Mahesh Kumar praised the spirit of the event, emphasizing that Khelo India transcends national borders. “Sport unites people in ways that nothing else can. By hosting the first Khelo India games abroad in South Africa, we are building on the special relationship between our two nations. The support from both the Indian diaspora and local South Africans has been overwhelming,” Kumar said.

Kumar also mentioned that participants travelled from neighbouring countries such as Lesotho and Zimbabwe, further highlighting the unifying power of sports.

“This event brings non-mainstream sports into the limelight. We hope it grows into an international movement, perhaps even evolving into an event similar to the Commonwealth or Asian Games,” Kumar added.

While the first phase of the event has concluded, more traditional Indian games such as kabaddi, Kho-Kho, Carrom, and Satoliya/ Lagori will be featured in the second phase, scheduled for December 2024 to January 2025. These games aim to introduce Indian cultural sports to a wider audience in South Africa.

The event not only created a platform for Indian expatriates but also strengthened bonds with the local South African community. Gupta noted that each sport was organized in collaboration with local partners, ensuring a strong foundation for future events. For example, the volleyball competition was supported by the South African Masters’ Volleyball Association and the chess tournament by Chess South Africa and the Johannesburg Metro Chess bodies.

(Source: International Business Times – By Steven Klien – 17th September, 2024)

MISCELLANEA

1 . TECHNOLOGY

Surge in ‘Shadow AI’ Accounts Poses Fresh Risks to Corporate Data

The growing use of artificial intelligence in the workplace is fuelling a rapid increase in data consumption, challenging the corporate ability to safeguard sensitive data.

A report released in May from data security firm Cyberhaven, titled “The Cubicle Culprits”, sheds light on AI adoption trends and their correlation to heightened risk. Cyberhaven’s analysis drew on a dataset of usage patterns from three million workers to assess AI adoption and its implications in the corporate environment.

The Cubicle Culprits report reveals the rapid acceleration of AI adoption in the workplace and use by end users that outpaces corporate IT. This trend, in turn, fuels risky “shadow AI” accounts, including more types of sensitive company data. Products from three AI tech giants — OpenAI, Google, and Microsoft — dominate AI usage. Their products account for 96 per cent of AI usage at work.

According to the research, workers worldwide entered sensitive corporate data into AI tools, increasing by an alarming 485 per cent from March 2023 to March 2024. However, only 4.7 per cent of employees at financial firms, 2.8 per cent in pharma and life sciences, and 0.6 per cent at manufacturing firms use AI tools.

A significant 73.8 per cent of ChatGPT usage at work occurs through non-corporate accounts. Unlike enterprise versions, these accounts incorporate shared data into public models, posing a considerable risk to sensitive data security.

A substantial portion of sensitive corporate data is being sent to non-corporate accounts. This includes roughly half of the source code (50.8 per cent), research and development materials (55.3 per cent) and HR and employee records (49.0 per cent). Data shared through these non-corporate accounts are incorporated into public models.

This trend indicates a critical vulnerability. Ting said that non-corporate accounts lack the robust security measures to protect such data. AI adoption rates are rapidly reaching new departments and use cases involving sensitive data. Some 27 per cent of data that employees put into AI tools is sensitive, up from 10.7 per cent a year ago. For example, 82.8 per cent of legal documents employees put into AI tools went to non-corporate accounts, potentially exposing the information publicly.

Some companies are clueless about stopping the flow of unauthorised and sensitive data exported to AI tools beyond IT’s reach. They rely on existing data security tools that only scan the data’s content to identify its type.

Educating workers about the data leakage problem is a viable part of the solution if done correctly. Most companies have rolled out periodic security awareness training.

(Source: technewsworld.com, dated 26th July, 2024)

 

2. ENVIRONMENT

Earth ends 13-month streak of record heat: Here’s what to expect next

From June 2023 until June 2024, air and ocean surface water temperatures averaged a quarter of a degree Celsius higher than records set only a few years previously. Air temperatures in July 2024 were slightly cooler than the previous July (0.04°C, the narrowest of margins) according to the EU’s Copernicus Climate Change Service. July 2023 was in turn 0.28°C warmer than the previous record-hot July in 2019, so the remarkable jump in temperature during the past year has yet to ease off completely. The warmest global air temperature recorded was in December 2023, at 1.78°C above the pre-industrial average temperature for December – and 0.31°C warmer than the previous record.

Global warming has consistently toppled records for warm global average temperatures in recent decades, but breaking them by as much as a quarter of a degree for several months is not common. The end of this streak does not diminish the mounting threat of climate change.

So what caused these record temperatures? Several factors came together, but the biggest and most important is climate change, largely caused by burning fossil fuels.

Temperatures typical of Earth 150 years ago are used for comparison to measure modern global warming. The reference period, 1850–1900, was before most greenhouse gases associated with global industrialisation – which increase the heat present in Earth’s ocean and atmosphere – had been emitted.

July 2024 was 1.48°C warmer than a typical pre-industrial July, of which about 1.3°C is attributable to the general trend of global warming over the intervening decades. This trend will continue to raise temperatures until humanity stabilises the climate by keeping fossil fuels in the ground where they belong. But global warming doesn’t happen in a smooth progression. Like UK house prices, the general trend is up, but there are ups and downs along the way.

Behind much of the ups and downs is the El Niño phenomenon. An El Niño event is a reorganisation of the water across the vast reaches of the Pacific Ocean. El Niño is important to the workings of worldwide weather as it increases the temperature of the air on average across all of Earth’s surface, not only over the Pacific. Between El Niño events, conditions may be neutral or in an opposite state called La Niña that tends to cool global temperatures. The oscillation between these extremes is irregular, and El Niño conditions tend to recur after three to seven years.

A plausible scenario is that global temperatures will fluctuate near the 1.4°C level for several years, until the next big El Niño event pushes the world above 1.5°C of warming, perhaps in the early 2030s.

The Paris agreement on climate change committed the world to make every effort to limit global warming to 1.5°C, because the impacts of climate change are expected to accelerate beyond that level.

The good news is that the shift away from fossil fuels has started in sectors such as electricity generation, where renewable energy meets a growing share of rising demand. But the transition is not happening fast enough, by a large margin. Meeting climate targets is not compatible with fully exploiting existing fossil-fuel infrastructure, yet new investments in oil rigs and gas fields continue.

Headlines about record breaking global temperatures will probably return. But they need not do so forever. There are many options for accelerating the transition to a decarbonised economy, and it is increasingly urgent that these are pursued.

(Source: business-standard.com, dated 20th August, 2024)

Why climate change might hamper your fish consumption

United Nations Food and Agriculture Organisation (FAO) confirmed that fish stocks are headed towards a significant decline, primarily due to climate change.

For starters, elevated carbon dioxide (CO2) levels are making the oceans more acidic, posing a survival challenge for something called phytoplanktons. These are tiny organisms that are also a primary food source for small fish. So, as phytoplankton struggle with elevated CO2 levels, the small fish find it harder to access the food they need.

Not just that. Warmer waters create low-oxygen “dead zones” where marine life struggles to survive. Additionally, rising sea temperatures are pushing fish towards cooler waters, disrupting their growth and reproduction.

And, as if that weren’t enough, the loss of coastal habitats like coral reefs and mangroves is depriving fish of their breeding grounds and shelters. But how are prokaryotes about to add to this trouble? After all, aren’t they supposed to strike a balance in the ocean?

You see, the real culprit here, again is climate change. Because as climate change warms up our oceans, prokaryotes become more dominant. And because they are adaptable, they can handle climate change better than larger marine creatures. For instance, every degree of ocean warming pushes the total weight of prokaryotes down by just 1.5 per cent, but larger marine creatures like fish could see a larger drop of 3 per cent to 5 per cent.

And here’s the catch – as climate change progresses, it will lead to prokaryotes taking over the ocean. As their population rises in comparison to other marine life, they would also alter the availability of essential nutrients in the ocean. So, if prokaryotes consume more nutrients that other marine creatures – like fish – rely on, it could disrupt the balance of marine ecosystems. And it could further contribute to the decline in fish populations.

So, what’s the big issue with that, you ask?

Well, it could very well affect the enormous fishing industry.

You see, fish indisputably form a vital part of the global food supply, serving as a primary source of protein for around 3 billion people. And if we were to look at the money involved, the global seafood industry was valued at $500 billion in 2022.

So, if fish populations start to dwindle, it could very well mean less industry revenue and higher consumer prices.

Take India, for instance. In many states, especially in the northeastern and eastern regions, as well as Tamil Nadu, Kerala and Goa, over 90 per cent of the population consumes fish. Coastal communities too depend heavily on fisheries, particularly in states like Kerala, Tamil Nadu and West Bengal.

And almost 3.8 million people living along the coast depend on fishing for their livelihood. The industry also plays a significant role in our economy, contributing around $8.1 billion in foreign exchange through marine exports annually.

India is also a major player in the global seafood export market, with its largest buyers being China, the US, the EU, Southeast Asian countries and Japan. In fact, the government hit an all-high in seafood exports, raking in ₹63,969.14 crores during the financial year 2022–23.

And India has even set an ambitious goal to increase seafood exports to R1 trillion in the next two years.

But if prokaryotes continue to dominate the oceans, this dream could be jeopardised. They will continue to multiply, corner resources, produce more CO2, accelerate climate change even further and really decimate marine population.

So yeah, it’s a vicious cycle. And it shows us how climate change could have impacts beyond what we can fathom.

The real question is: Can we adapt fast enough to protect both our plate and our planet?

Well, we will probably have to wait and see.

(Source: finshots.in, dated 22nd August, 2024)

Miscellanea

1. TECHNOLOGY

#Experts Suggest Crowdstrike Update Behind Global Outage Likely Skipped Key Checks

Security experts have indicated that CrowdStrike’s routine update of its widely used cybersecurity software, which led to a global system crash on Friday, apparently did not undergo sufficient quality checks before being deployed. The lack of thorough testing is believed to have contributed to the widespread disruption affecting clients’ computer systems worldwide.

According to a report by Reuters, the recent update to CrowdStrike’s Falcon Sensor software was intended to bolster security for clients by refreshing the list of threats it protects against. Unfortunately, the update contained faulty code, which triggered one of the most significant tech outages in recent years. This disruption affected numerous companies relying on Microsoft’s Windows operating system, leading to widespread system crashes and operational issues.

“What it looks like is, potentially, the vetting or the sandboxing they do when they look at code, maybe somehow this file was not included in that or slipped through,” said Steve Cobb, chief security officer at Security Scorecard, which also had some systems impacted by the issue.

The massive disruption to Microsoft systems has included flight delays and cancellations, as well  as impacting hospitals, banks, supermarkets and millions of businesses.

Close to 7,000 flights were cancelled globally on Friday—equating to 6.2 per cent of all scheduled flights, according to Aviation analytics firm Cirium.

Patrick Wardle, a security researcher specialising in operating system threats, identified the code responsible for the outage. He explained that the issue lay in a file containing either configuration details or signatures—code used to detect specific types of malicious software or malware.

Wardle noted that it is common for security products to update their signatures regularly, often daily, to continuously monitor for new malware and ensure protection against the latest threats.

Wardle suggested that the frequent nature of updates might explain why CrowdStrike did not test this particular update as thoroughly. It remains unclear how the faulty code was introduced into the update and why it was not detected before being released to customers.

Other security companies have faced similar issues in the past. For example, McAfee’s problematic antivirus update in 2010 caused hundreds of thousands of computers to stall.

(Source: International Business Times – By Litty Simon, dated 21st July, 2024)

2. SPORTS

#Paris Braces For ‘Most Incredible’ Olympics Opening Ceremony

Thousands of athletes are set to sail through central Paris on Friday during an unprecedented and high-risk Olympics opening ceremony that will showcase the country’s hugely ambitious vision for the Games.

The parade on Friday evening will see up to 7,500 competitors travel down a six-kilometre (four-mile) stretch of the river Seine on a flotilla of 85 boats.

Compared to the Covid-blighted 2020 Tokyo Olympics, which were delayed by a year and opened in an empty stadium, the Paris show will take place in front of 300,000 cheering spectators and an audience of VIPs and celebrities from around the world.

“Tomorrow you will have one of the most incredible opening ceremonies,” French President Emmanuel Macron promised at a pre-Games dinner for heads of state and government at the Louvre museum on Thursday evening.

The line-up of performers is a closely guarded secret but US pop star Lady Gaga and French-Malian singer Aya Nakamura—the most listened-to French-speaking singer in the world—are rumoured to be among them.

It will be the first time a Summer Olympics has opened outside the main athletics stadium, a decision fraught with danger at a time when France is on its highest alert for terrorism.

For months, organisers have been dogged by questions about whether they would need to scale back or move the procession, but they had insisted throughout that there was no plan B.

A huge security perimeter has been erected along both banks of the Seine, guarded round-the-clock by some of the 45,000 police and paramilitary officers who will be on duty on Friday evening.

Another 10,000 soldiers are set to add to the security blanket along with 22,000 private security guards.

“Without any doubt, it is much more difficult to secure half of Paris than to secure a stadium, where you have 80,000 people and you can frisk them and send them through turnstiles,” Frederic Pechenard, an ex-director general of the French police, told AFP.

Police snipers are set to be positioned on every high point along the route of the river convoy, which is overlooked by hundreds of buildings.

An assassination attempt on US presidential candidate Donald Trump on 13th July has focused minds.

Armed officers will also be on the boats, a security source told AFP.

The Israeli and Palestinian teams will be given extra protection, with the tensions caused by Israel’s offensive in Gaza, where nearly 40,000 people are estimated to have died, already spilling into the Games.

Organisers will be on guard against fresh protests on Friday evening after the Israeli football team’s first match on Wednesday was marked by the waving of Palestinian flags and the booing of the Israeli anthem.

The opening ceremony is likely to define the mood for the rest of the 26th July–11th August Games, which organisers have pledged will be “iconic”.

Around 3,000 dancers are set to perform from the banks of the river and nearby monuments, including Notre-Dame cathedral, in a show that will promote diversity, gender equality and French history.

The landmarks and architecture of the City of Light, one of the world’s best-loved destinations, is set to feature as a backdrop both to Friday night’s show and much of the sport afterwards.

“The opening ceremony is a huge event and one that, arguably, sets the tone for the next 17 days,” Hugh Robertson, the minister charged with delivering the 2012 London Olympics, told AFP recently.

(Source: International Business Times by Adam Plowright, dated 25th July, 2024)

3. HEALTH

#People Now More Mindful of Health and Natural Healing After Worldwide COVID Crisis, Says Global Healing Founder

The COVID-19 pandemic was the worst health crisis the world has faced in the past century, resulting in more than 7 million deaths. The early days of the pandemic were also some of the scariest for people, and the only surefire way to deal with the disease was to avoid getting infected and to strengthen one’s immune system to fight off the virus.

While the worst days of the pandemic are over and life has returned to almost normal, many people still remember the fear and uncertainty it caused, with a study finding that 60% of consumers are now more conscious of preventing health problems through adopting a healthier lifestyle using more natural solutions.

People are now more aware of the importance of whole-body wellness, and they are more open to doing their own research. However, this trend has also led to the proliferation of misinformation, spread by groups or individuals who want to make a quick buck. This is why there is a great need for information and products that are supported by scientific research.

For more than 25 years, Global Healing has been helping health-conscious individuals build a self-healing body and thrive in a lifestyle that aligns with nature’s design through science-backed products and education.

With a philosophy of cleansing the body of accumulated toxins and embarking on a personalised wellness journey, Global Healing was built on the idea that everyone, everywhere, should have access to research-backed health information and personal control over their health outcomes.

Global Healing

According to Global Healing Founder, Dr Edward F Group III, DC, NP, the growing health consciousness of people and the accompanying spread of misinformation has strengthened the need for Global Healing to uphold and improve its already-high standards and maintain the integrity of the market.

This begins with education, with Global Healing dedicated to teaching the community how to address the root cause of disease with a holistic approach and allow the body to heal itself.

Its website contains a wealth of articles discussing various health topics, and it is active on its various social media accounts, sharing knowledge about how people can become the healthiest, strongest, best versions of themselves. Dr. Group has also authored multiple books on health and holistic medicine.

“Global Healing sets the bar for discussions and developments in our industry with valuable insights, reliable guidance, and thoughtful perspectives,” he says. “We advocate for a holistic lifestyle that promotes whole-body wellness, such as natural remedies over pharmaceuticals, mindfulness practices over mind medications, exercise over diet pills, and
sleep over caffeine.”

Dr. Group believes that, as part of the natural wellness industry, it is Global Healing’s responsibility to provide correct and up-to-date information to its customers. He looks at things through the eyes of the customers, who are looking up information about various supplements, vitamins, detoxes, or cleanses because they’re concerned about something in their body, whether it’s their gut and digestive health, respiratory health, mental wellness, or any other component of health.

Across its wide array of products, Global Healing has maintained its dedication to quality and purity, sourcing botanicals from small farms. Many of its sources are certified USDA-organic, GMO-free, and vegan. The company also implements strict quality control procedures, with a rigorous testing process that involves both internal and third-party testing.

It hand-reviews every batch of ingredients, choosing only those that meet its stringent specifications for proper plant identification, potency levels, microbial presence, and heavy metal content.

Through its proprietary Raw Herbal Extract™ technology, Global Healing does not use heat, alcohol, or harsh chemicals in processing ingredients, resulting in a raw, all-natural, pure, and potent formula. Furthermore, all its equipment that comes into contact with the products does not use plastic, protecting it from contamination with potentially toxic compounds.

Dr. Group believes that the growing interest in all-natural and holistic health will result in more scrutiny of companies in this industry, and this is a great thing. With more attention placed on the industry, there will be more demand to improve standards.

“The COVID pandemic forced everyone to give more thought to their health, and people are getting smarter and smarter,” Dr Group says. “I’ve observed that they are holding companies to a higher standard and are more conscious about what’s in the food they eat and the air they breathe. ”As public demand for better and more natural health solutions grows, corporations will be held more accountable for how they process things and what they put into their products.

”People are demanding to know more, and they won’t fall for the smoke and mirrors. In this evolving market, Global Healing is dedicated to providing science-backed cleansing regimens and premium supplements that nurture the body’s innate ability to heal from within.”

(Source: International Business Times by Karcy Noonan, 11th July, 2024)

Miscellanea

1. TECHNOLOGY

Humans vs. Robots: Scientists create self-healing human-like skin for robots

Scientists have successfully grafted living, self-healing skin onto robots, a feat that could revolutionise the future of robotics. Imagine robots that can not only move and think like humans but also look and heal like them. The team led by Michio Kawai, MinghaoNie, Haruka Oda, and Shoji Takeuchi from the University of Tokyo has developed a technique to seamlessly attach living skin to robotic faces, creating lifelike robots capable of displaying human emotions.

The magic lies in something called “perforation-type anchors.” Inspired by human skin ligaments, these anchors attach cultured skin to robotic surfaces through tiny perforations, much like how our skin connects to underlying tissues. This method ensures the skin adheres securely, even on complex 3D structures like faces, and can withstand the wear and tear of everyday interactions.
To showcase this technology, the researchers created a robotic face that can express emotions, like smiling. Using these innovative anchors, they attached a skin equivalent — a lab-grown model of human skin — onto the robot’s face. The robot’s smile isn’t just a mechanical movement; it’s a lifelike expression made possible by the skin’s ability to stretch and contract naturally, thanks to the underlying anchors.

This isn’t just about making robots more realistic; it’s about functionality. The living skin can heal itself, much like our own, making robots more durable and suitable for long-term use. This self-repair capability is crucial for robots expected to operate in unpredictable environments where they might get scratched or damaged.

The implications of this research are vast. From healthcare robots that assist the elderly to humanoid robots in customer service and entertainment, the possibilities are endless. Robots with lifelike, self-healing skin could blend seamlessly into human environments, making interactions more natural and effective.
In essence, this breakthrough takes us one step closer to a future where robots are not just tools but companions, indistinguishable from humans in both appearance and functionality. The team’s research, published in Cell Reports Physical Science, marks a significant milestone in the quest to create the ultimate human-robot symbiosis.

(Source: businesstoday.in dated 26th June, 2024)

India to Adopt Common Charger Law for Smartphones and Tablets by Mid-2025

Starting June 2025, all new smartphones and tablets sold in India will be required to feature a standard charging port, allowing a single charger and cable to power multiple devices. This regulation is similar to the “universal phone charger” law implemented by the European Union (EU). India’s common charging law will extend to laptops in 2026 but will not apply to basic phones and wearables at this time, according to three informed sources, says a report by Mint.

“USB-C or Type C charging port will be made mandatory for smartphones and tablets from June next year. Feature phones or basic phones, hearables and wearables will be kept out for now,” the Mint report cited a source as saying.

USB-C Port to be Mandated for Laptops

The source also mentioned that the USB-C port requirement for laptops will take effect in the country at the end of 2026. These deadlines were established following discussions with industry representatives and manufacturers.

The new regulation applies across a wide spectrum of devices, including not only Android and iOS smartphones and tablets but also Windows and Mac devices. However, the law excludes small accessories like fitness bands, smartwatches, earbuds and basic feature phones.

Although the Indian Union IT Ministry has not issued an official statement yet, reports suggest that the regulation will likely be announced soon.
To recall, in 2022, the Indian government unveiled its initiative to enforce uniform ports across consumer electronics, following an agreement reached during discussions with industry bodies including MAIT, FICCI and CII. As part of this move, USB Type-C was designated as the standardised charging port for smartphones, tablets and notebooks in India. The Type-C charging port uses a Type-C cable with identical connectors at both ends, allowing for reversible plug-in capability.

This simplifies consumer convenience by enabling the use of a single cable and charger across multiple devices. For manufacturers, adopting a standardised charging solution like Type-C streamlines their supply chains and sourcing efforts, reducing complexity associated with multiple components specific to different charging ports.

Additionally, this transition is expected to contribute to reducing the burden of e-waste.

(Source: abplive.com dated 27th June, 2024)

2. ENVIRONMENT

“Ocean Is Changing”: NASA Visuals Show Impact of Greenhouse Gases On Earth’s Water Bodies

The greenhouse gases are impacting Earth’s water bodies, NASA’s scary visualisation of the oceans revealed. Taking to Instagram, NASA Climate Change shared a visualisation showing sea surface currents on the Estimating the Circulation and Climate of the Ocean, Phase II (ECCO2) model. In the caption, the space agency wrote that the gases produced by human activities are altering the ocean. “Our ocean is changing,” the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) wrote in its post.

“With 70% of the planet covered by water, the seas are important drivers of Earth’s global climate. Yet, increasing greenhouse gases from human activities are altering the ocean before our eyes. NASA and its partners are on a mission to find out more,” NASA further posted.

Further, elaborating on the visualisation, NASA shared that different colours depict the average temperature for the sea surface currents. “With warmer colours (red, orange, and yellow) representing warmer temperatures and cooler colours (green and blue) representing cooler temperatures,” the agency added.

NASA shared the visualisation just a day back. Since then, it has accumulated more than 13,000 likes. Social media users posted varied comments while reacting to the post.

“Can you please explain what this data is showing? Is it taken over days or months? What time of year? Is it ocean currents or ocean temperatures? What have we concluded from this data?” asked one user. NASA responded, “The visualisation shows sea surface current flows. The flows are coloured by corresponding sea surface temperature data.

“Amazing data and visualisation. Very cool!” said one user.

(Source: ndtv.com dated 26th June, 2024)

Miscellanea

1. TECHNOLOGY

# Government agency CERT-In finds multiple bugs in Microsoft products, asks users to update immediately

The Indian Computer Emergency Response Team (CERT-In) on Friday warned users of multiple vulnerabilities in Microsoft products which could allow an attacker to obtain information disclosure, bypass security restriction and cause denial-of-service (DoS) conditions on the targeted system.

The Indian Computer Emergency Response Team (CERT-In), a division under the Ministry of Electronics & Information Technology, issued a warning on Friday regarding several vulnerabilities present in Microsoft products. These vulnerabilities, if exploited, could lead to information disclosure, security restriction bypass, and denial-of-service (DoS) conditions on affected systems.

The affected Microsoft products encompass a wide range, including Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Office, Developer Tools, Azure, Browser, System Center, Microsoft Dynamics, and Exchange Server.

CERT-In’s advisory highlighted that these vulnerabilities could enable attackers to gain elevated privileges, disclose information, bypass security restrictions, execute remote code, perform spoofing attacks, or trigger denial of service conditions.

Specifically addressing Microsoft Windows, CERT-In explained that vulnerabilities stem from inadequate access restrictions within the proxy driver and insufficient implementation of the Mark of the Web (MotW) feature.

To mitigate these risks, users are strongly urged to apply the recommended security updates outlined in the company’s update guide.

In addition to Microsoft products, CERT-In also cautioned users about vulnerabilities in Android and Mozilla Firefox web browsers. These vulnerabilities could potentially expose sensitive information, allow arbitrary code execution, and induce DoS conditions on targeted systems.

The affected software versions identified in the advisory include ‘Android 12, 12L, 13, 14’, as well as ‘Mozilla Firefox versions prior to 124.0.1 and Mozilla Firefox ESR versions before 115.9.1’.

Some of the multiple vulnerabilities were found inAndroid and Mozilla Firefox web browsers too which could allow an attacker to obtain sensitive information, execute arbitrary code and cause DoS conditions on the targeted system.

Hence, follow the advisory to update ‘Android 12, 12L, 13, 14’, and ‘Mozilla Firefox versions prior to 124.0.1 and Mozilla Firefox ESR versions before 115.9.1’, said the agency.

(Source: International Business Times – By Isha Roy – 12th April, 2024)

2. HEALTH/SCIENCE/SOCIETY

# This could be a reason for your late-night chocolate cravings

If you have spent nights eating chocolates or ice cream, then ‘loneliness’ can be the reason behind the binging on sugary items, say researchers.

According to the study published in the journal JAMA Network Open, loneliness can cause an extreme desire for sugary foods.

To conduct the study, the researchers linked brain chemistry from socially isolated individuals to poor mental health, weight gain, cognitive loss, and chronic diseases such as Type 2 diabetes and obesity.

Senior study author Arpana Gupta, an Associate Professor at the University of California, Los Angeles, said that she wanted to observe the brain pathways associated with obesity, depression, and anxiety, as well as binge eating, which is a coping mechanism against loneliness.

The study included 93 premenopausal participants, and the results indicated that people who experienced loneliness or isolation had a higher body fat percentage.

Moreover, they displayed poor eating behaviours such as food addiction and uncontrolled eating.

Scientists used MRI scans to monitor the participants’ brain activity while they were looking at abstract images of sweet and savoury foods. The results revealed that individuals who experienced isolation had more activity in certain regions of the brain that are responsible for reacting to sugar cravings.

These same participants showed a lower reaction in areas that deal with self-control.

According to Gupta, social isolation can cause food cravings similar to “the cravings for social connections”.

(Source: International Business Times – By IBT News desk – 22nd April, 2024)

3. SPORTS

#Chess World Championships: India’s Gukesh to fight China’s Ding Liren for ultimate prize in November-December 2024

17-year-old from Chennai emerged victorious in the Candidates tournament in Toronto, a prestigious eight-player event held to handpick the challenger to the world champion.

India’s D Gukesh will take on reigning world champion Ding Liren in the World Chess Championship in November-December this year.

This was revealed by Emil Sutovsky, the CEO at FIDE, the global governing body of chess, on social media after the 17-year-old from Chennai had emerged victorious in the Candidates tournament in Toronto, a prestigious eight-player event held to handpick the challenger to the world champion.

The venue for the contest is yet to be confirmed yet.

The teenaged Gukesh had edged past a troika of stalwarts: America’s Hikaru Nakamura, and Fabiano Caruana and Russia’s Ian Nepomniachtchi to become the Candidates winner on Monday. While Nepomniachtchi is a two-time World Championship contender, World No 2 Caruana was competing in his fifth Candidates event, having won it once. Meanwhile, Nakamura, the World No 3, was competing in his third Candidates event.

Despite their experience, they could not prevent the Candidates debutant Gukesh from breasting the tape first. With one round to go, Gukesh had raced into the lead while the trio were just half a point behind him. Gukesh only needed a draw with Nakamura in his final game, provided the other game between Caruana and Nepomniachtchi also drew, If, either of the latter had won, they would meet Gukesh in a tiebreaker.

Gukesh became India’s youngest grandmaster ever at the age of 12 years, seven months, 17 days, missing the tag of the world’s youngest by a mere 17 days. Last year, he overtook five-time world champion Viswanathan Anand as the country’s top ranked player for the first time after 36 years. Now, he has added another feat to that impressive list by becoming the youngest ever Candidates winner and will be the youngest World Chess Championship contender when he battles Ding at the World Championship later this year.

(Source: India express.com – By Sports desk –24th April, 2024)

Miscellanea

1. INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

Large Language Models could ‘revolutionise the finance sector within two years’

Large Language Models (LLMs) have the potential to improve efficiency and safety in the finance sector by detecting fraud, generating financial insights and automating customer service, according to research by The Alan Turing Institute.

Because LLMs have an ability to analyse large amounts of data quickly and generate coherent text, there is growing understanding of the potential to improve services across a range of sectors including healthcare, law, education and in financial services including banking, insurance and financial planning.

This report, which is the first to explore the adoption of LLMs across the finance ecosystem, shows that people working in this area have already begun to use LLMs to support a variety of internal processes, such as the review of regulations, and are assessing its potential for supporting external activity like the delivery of advisory and trading services.

Alongside a literature survey, researchers held a workshop of 43 professionals from major high street and investment banks, regulators, insurers, payment service providers, government and legal professions.

The majority of workshop participants (52 per cent) are already using these models to enhance performance in information-oriented tasks, from the management of meeting notes to cyber security and compliance insight, while 29 per cent use them to boost critical thinking skills, and another 16 per cent employ them to break down complex tasks.

The sector is also already establishing systems to enhance productivity through rapid analysis of large amounts of text to simplify decision-making processes, risk profiling and to improve investment research and back-office operations.

When asked about the future of LLMs in the finance sector, participants felt that LLMs would be integrated into services like investment banking and venture capital strategy development within two years.

They also thought it likely that LLMs would be integrated to improve interactions between people and machines; for example, dictation and embedded AI assistants could reduce the complexity of knowledge-intensive tasks such as the review of regulations.

But participants also acknowledged that the technology poses risks which will limit its usage. Financial institutions are subject to extensive regulatory standards and obligations which limit their ability to use AI systems that they cannot explain and do not generate output predictably, consistently or without risk of error.

Based on their findings, the authors recommend that financial services professionals, regulators and policymakers collaborate across the sector to share and develop knowledge about implementing and using LLMs, particularly related to safety concerns. They also suggest that the growing interest in open-source models should be explored and could be used and maintained effectively, but that mitigating security and privacy concerns would be a high priority.

Professor Carsten Maple, lead author and Turing Fellow at The Alan Turing Institute, said: “Banks and other financial institutions have always been quick to adopt new technologies to make their operations more efficient and the emergence of LLMs is no different. By bringing together experts across the finance ecosystem, we have managed to create a common understanding of the use cases, risks, value and timeline for implementation of these technologies at scale.”

Professor Lukasz Szpruch, programme director for Finance and Economics at The Alan Turing Institute, said: “It’s really positive that the financial sector is benefiting from the emergence of large language models and their implementation into this highly regulated sector has the potential to provide best practices for other sectors. This study demonstrates the benefit of research institutes and industry working together to assess the vast opportunities as well as the practical and ethical challenges of new technologies to ensure they are implemented safely.”

(Source: artificialintelligence-news.com dated 27th March, 2024)

2. SCIENCE

Max Planck scientists find ‘Shiva’ and ‘Shakti’, earliest building blocks of Milky Way

The Max Planck Institute for Astronomy on Thursday announced that astronomers have discovered what could be the earliest building blocks of the Milky Way, named “Shiva” and “Shakti”. These seem to be the remnants of the two galaxies that merged between 12 and 13 billion years ago with an earlier version of the Milky Way, contributing to its growth.

Astronomers from the institute named the components Shakti and Shiva and identified them after combining data from the European Space Agency’s Gaia satellite and the SDSS survey. This can be thought of like finding traces of an initial settlement that eventually grew into a metropolitan city, albeit on a cosmic scale.

The collisions and mergers of galaxies put several things in motion. Each galaxy will carry its own reservoir of hydrogen gas and when colliding, these clouds are de-stabilised and many new stars will be formed inside. Of course, both the galaxies will have their own sets of stars before they collide and these “accreted stars” will only account for some of the stellar population that forms the newly combined galaxy. The tricky part is identifying which stars came from which predecessor galaxy when the merger is done.

But basic physics provides the clues. When galaxies collide and their stars mingle, most of the stars retain some basic properties which are linked to the speed and direction of the galaxy they originally came from. Stars that were from the same predecessor galaxies share similar values of energy and what scientists call angular momentum, the momentum associated with their rotation. Both angular momentum and energy are conserved for stars moving in a galaxy’s gravitational field.

For this research, astronomers looked at Gaia data combined with stellar spectra data from the Sloan Digital Sky Survey. SDSS provided detailed information about the stars’ chemical compositions. “We observed that, for a certain range of metal-poor stars, stars were crowded around two specific combinations of energy and angular momentum,” said researcher.

For their present search, Malhan and Rix used Gaia data combined with detailed stellar spectra from the Sloan Digital Sky Survey (DR17). The latter provided detailed information about the stars’ chemical composition.

“We observed that, for a certain range of metal-poor stars, stars were crowded around two specific combinations of energy and angular momentum. Shakti and Shiva might be the first two additions to the ‘poor old heart’ of our Milky Way, initiating its growth towards a large galaxy,” said researcher Khyati Malhan, in a press statement. It was Malhan that named the two constituent galaxies Shiva and Shakti.

(Source: Indianexpress.com dated 26th March, 2024)

3. ENVIRONMENT

Almost one-fifth of all food available to consumers ends up as waste: UNEP Food Waste Index Report 2024

Globally, 1.05 billion tonnes of food waste isgenerated (including inedible parts) which is almostone-fifth of all food available to consumers, and each person, on average, wasted 79 kg of food annually in households in the world compared to 55 kg per capita per year in India, said the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) Food Waste Index Report 2024 released recently.

The report that factored in the data of the year 2022 underlined that the toll of both food loss in supply chain and waste on the global economy is estimated at roughly $1 trillion.

It noted that the aggregated households’ food waste amounted to at least one billion meals of edible food worldwide every single day while 783 million people were affected by hunger and a third of humanity faced food insecurity.

The weight of the global food waste in 2022 was, incidentally, more than India’s total production of food grain, oilseeds, sugarcane and horticultural produce, put together, in 2022–23.

Out of the total food wasted globally in 2022, 60 per cent happened at the household level, 28 per cent at food services level and 12 per cent at retails. The country-wise food waste data confirms that such waste is not just a ‘rich country’ problem, with levels of household food waste differing in observed average levels for high-income, upper-middle and lower-middle-income countries by just 7 kg per capita.

At the same time, hotter countries appear to generate more food waste per capita in households, potentially due to higher consumption of fresh foods with substantial inedible parts and a lack of robust cold chains.

This is the second such report of UNEP after the first one in 2021 that factored in the food waste in the year 2019. Its comparison with the latest one, released on Wednesday, shows that the per capita per year food waste at household level globally increased from 74kg in 2019 to 79 kg in 2022. Similarly, it increased in India from 50 kg/capita/year to 55 kg/capita/year during the same period. Per capita per year food waste at household level was the highest in Maldives at 207 kg/capita/year in 2022.

“Food waste is a global tragedy. Millions will go hungry today as food is wasted across the world. Not only is this a major development issue, but the impacts of such unnecessary waste are causing substantial costs to the climate and nature,” said Inger Andersen, executive director of UNEP.

According to recent data, food loss and waste generates 8–10 per cent of annual global greenhouse gas(GHG) emissions — almost five times that of theaviation sector — and significant biodiversity loss by taking up the equivalent of almost a third of the world’s agricultural land.

Still, only 21 countries have included food loss and / or waste reduction in their national climate plans — called nationally determined contributions (NDCs) — under the Paris Agreement. Besides, only four G20 countries (Australia, Japan, UK, the USA) and the European Union have food waste estimates suitable for tracking progress to 2030.

In this context, the Food Waste Index report may serve as a practical guide for countries to consistently measure and report food waste, and also try to integrate it in their next round of NDCs in 2025 to raise their climate ambition.

Currently, many low- and middle-income countries continue to lack adequate systems for even tracking progress to meet Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) of halving food waste by 2030, particularly in retail and food services.

(Source: timesofindia.com dated 28th March, 2024)

Miscellanea

1. TECHNOLOGY

Google joins mission to map methane from space

Tech giant Google is backing a satellite project due to launch in March which will collect data about methane levels around the world. The new satellite will orbit 300 miles around the Earth, 15 times per day. Methane gas is believed by scientists to be a major contributor to global warming because it traps heat.

A lot of methane is produced by farming and waste disposal, but the Google project will focus on methane emissions at oil and gas plants. Firms extracting oil and gas regularly burn or vent methane.

The new project is a collaboration between Google and the Environmental Defense Fund, a non-profit global climate group. The data captured by the satellite will be processed by the tech giant’s artificial intelligence tools and used to generate a methane map aimed at identifying methane leaks on oil and gas infrastructure around the world. But the firm said if it identified a significant leak it would not specifically notify the company which owned the infrastructure responsible for it.

“Our job is to make information available,” it said, adding that “governments and regulators would be among those with access to it and it would be for them to force any changes.” There is no international rule on controlling methane emissions. The EU has agreed to a set of proposals aimed at reducing them, which includes forcing oil and gas operators to repair leaks. In the coal sector, flaring will be banned in member states from 2025.

Google’s map, which will be published on its Earth Engine, will not be in real-time, with data sent back from the satellite every few weeks. In 2017, the European Space Agency launched a similar satellite instrument called Tropomi, which charts the presence of trace gases in the atmosphere, including methane.

It was a mission with a minimum seven-year life span, which means it could end this year. Carbon Mapper,
which uses Tropomi data, released a report in 2022 indicating that the biggest methane plumes were seen in Turkmenistan, Russia, and the US – but cloud cover meant the data did not include Canada or China.

Google said it hoped its project would “fill gaps between existing tools”. Despite various tracking efforts, methane levels remain concerningly high. NASA says levels of the gas have more than doubled in the last 200 years, and that 60 per cent of it is created by human activity.

A major contributor to that percentage is livestock: specifically, cows. Because of the way they digest their food, cow burps and farts contain methane. In 2020, the US Environmental Protection Agency published a report that said a single cow could produce 154-264 pounds of methane gas every year. It added that there were believed to be about 1.5 billion cows raised for their meat worldwide.

“Satellites are great for finding the really big, massive culprits” of methane emissions, said Peter Thorne, professor of physical geography at Maynooth University in Ireland. But detecting more diffuse methane sources, such as those emanating from agriculture, is more difficult, he added.

(Source: bbc.com dated 15th February, 2024)

US FCC makes AI-generated robocalls illegal

The federal agency that regulates communication in the US has made robocalls that use AI-generated voices illegal. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) announced the move, saying it will take effect immediately.

It gives the state power to prosecute any bad actors behind these calls, the FCC said.

It comes amid a rise in robocalls that have mimicked the voices of celebrities and political candidates. “Bad actors are using AI-generated voices in unsolicited robocalls to extort vulnerable family members, imitate celebrities, and misinform voters,” said FCC chairwoman Jessica Rosenworcel.

“We’re putting the fraudsters behind these robocalls on notice.” The move comes on the heels of an incident last month in which voters in New Hampshire received robocalls impersonating US President Joe Biden ahead of the state’s presidential primary.

The calls encouraged voters not to cast ballots in the primary. An estimated 5,000 to 25,000 were placed. New Hampshire’s attorney general said the calls were linked to two companies in Texas and that a criminal investigation is underway.

The FCC said these calls have the potential to confuse consumers with misinformation by imitating public figures, and in some instances, close family members. The agency added that, while state attorneys general can prosecute companies and individuals behind these calls for crimes like scams or fraud, this latest action makes the use of AI-generated voices in these calls itself illegal.

Deepfakes — which use AI to make video or audio of someone by manipulating their face, body, or voice — have emerged as a major concern around the world at a time when major elections are, or will soon, be underway in countries like the US, UK, and India.

(Source: bbc.com dated 8th February, 2024)

2. ENVIRONMENT

Climate change: Polar bears face starvation threat as ice melts

Some polar bears face starvation as the Arctic Sea ice melts because they are unable to adapt their diets to living on land, scientists have found. The iconic Arctic species normally feed on ringed seals that they catch on ice floes offshore. But as the ice disappears in a warming world, many bears are spending greater amounts of time on shore, eating bird eggs, berries, and grass. However, the animals rapidly lose weight on land, increasing the risk of death.

The polar bear has become the poster child for the growing threat of climate change in the Arctic, but the reality of the impact on this species is complicated. While the number of bears plummeted up to the 1980s, this was mainly due to unsustainable hunting. With greater legal protection, polar bear numbers have risen. But increasing global temperatures are now seen as their biggest threat.

That’s because the frozen Arctic seas are key to their survival. The animals use the sea ice as a platform to hunt ringed seals, which have high concentrations of fat, mostly in late spring and early summer. But during the warmer months, many parts of the Arctic are now increasingly ice-free.

In Western Manitoba where this study was carried out, the ice-free period has increased by three weeks between 1979 and 2015. To understand how the animals survive as the ice disappears, researchers followed the activities of 20 polar bears during the summer months over a three-year period. As well as taking blood samples, and weighing the bears, the animals were fitted with GPS-equipped video camera collars. This allowed the scientists to record the animals’ movements, their activities, and what they ate.

In the ice-free summer months, the bears adopted different strategies to survive, with some essentially resting and conserving their energy. The majority tried to forage for vegetation or berries or swam to see if they could find food. Both approaches failed, with 19 of the 20 bears in the study losing body mass, by up to 11 per cent in some cases. On average, they lost one kilogram per day.

(Source: bbc.com dated 13th February, 2024)

Miscellanea

1. BUSINESS

RBI not thinking of moving towards de-dollarisation: Governor

Reserve Bank of India (RBI) Governor Shaktikanta Das said that it is incorrect to say that there was a move towards de-dollarisation as the efforts of the central bank towards internationalisation of the rupee are not aimed at replacing the dollar.

“There is no such thinking to move towards de-dollarisation. The dollar will continue to be the dominant currency and whatever we are doing for the internationalization of the rupee, it is not to replace the dollar,” Das said at the World Economic Forum (WEF) Annual Meeting 2024 in Davos late on Tuesday.

India’s economy is expanding, with an increasing role in international trade. Gradually and steadily, India has entered new markets, countries, and products, particularly in services.

The objective is to offer the rupee as an alternative currency for settling transactions in international trade. It is incorrect to describe the internationalisation of the rupee as an effort towards de-dollarisation.

“Dependence on one currency can be risky as the entire global trade will be subject to the volatility of that particular currency,” he added.

Das said that the RBI has managed to achieve currency stability, making it ideal for overseas companies to invest in India and domestic companies to tap capital markets abroad.

Inflation in India is moderating and steadily approaching the central bank’s 4 per cent target while growth prospects remain robust, the RBI Governor noted.

Das also said that cryptocurrencies pose a huge risk, particularly for emerging market economies because they can impact your financial stability, currency stability, and monetary system.

“Cryptocurrency as a product is highly speculative, and my opinion and Reserve Bank’s opinion is that considering the big risk around it, I think countries like India should be very careful,” he added.

(Source: International Business Times — By IBT desk — 17th January, 2024)

 

2. TECHNOLOGY

PLI scheme to help India create a complete mobile supply chain in the next 3 years: Samsung

India will establish a complete supply chain for mobile production in the next three years driven by the production-linked incentive (PLI) scheme, just like China built its global supply chain years ago, and then, the growth will truly be led by the industry, Samsung India President and CEO J.B. Park said on 18th January, 2024.

In 2021, the Indian government had announced an outlay of R1.97 lakh crore for the PLI schemes for 13 key sectors, including mobile manufacturing.

The minimum production in India as a result of PLI schemes is expected to be over $500 billion in 5 years. Of the $101 billion electronics production in FY23, smart phones constituted $44 billion.

According to the government, the PLI scheme for smart phone manufacturing has resulted in local value addition of 20 per cent within a span of two-three years.

According to Park, the country still has about three years to further boost mobile exports from the country
and enable several brands to be eligible for the PLI scheme.

“This kind of policy that the government has given to the brands to come and build not only for domestic usage but also for exports, these kinds of incentives are very important to pivot the target that needs to be achieved,” Park told reporters here.

He said that in the next three years, “a complete mobile supply chain will be established in India”, just like China built its global supply chain years ago.

“After three years when all of the sub-supplier supply chains are established, I think the growth engine will be industry-led instead of government policy-led. It is the actual development that occurs with such initiatives,” Park noted.

The PLI scheme has attracted over ₹1.03 lakh crore of investment (till November 2023), according to the Ministry of Commerce and Industry.

The biggest impact of the PLI scheme is seen in mobile phone manufacturing as PLI beneficiaries, which account for about 20 per cent of the market share, contributed to about 82 per cent of mobile phone exports during FY 2022–23.

“Production of mobile phones increased by more than 125 per cent and export of mobile phones increased around 4 times since FY 2020–21,” according to the ministry. Manufacturing of various electronic components like batteries, chargers, printed circuit boards, camera modules, passive components and certain mechanics have been localised in the country.

Green shoots in the component ecosystem have emerged with large companies such as Tatas entering component manufacturing. The PLI scheme has made Indian manufacturers globally competitive, attracted investment in the areas of core competency and cutting-edge technology; ensured efficiencies; created economies of scale; enhanced exports, and made India an integral part of the global value chain.

According to Park, India has around 250 million feature phone users and they will eventually migrate to smart phones and, in five to 10 years of AI time-frame, they will again upgrade to the next level of device.

“More than 650 million smart phone base will start to increase as we will see more shifts of feature phone users happening to smart phones in India,” he said.

With the new Galaxy S24 series, Samsung has heralded the ‘AI phone’ era and AI-driven features will need to go local in order to address the needs of the masses.

“With brilliant engineers in India, we are already making the experiences local for our consumers. We will develop more local use cases adaptive to the users with AI,” said Park.

(Source: International Business Times — By IBT Technology desk — 18th January, 2024)

 

3. SCIENCE

Intermittent fasting may help slow brain ageing, boost longevity

If you want to help slow down your brain from ageing and increase your lifespan then follow diet patterns like intermittent fasting or restrict your calorie intake, suggests a study, led by researchers, one being of Indian origin.

A team of scientists at the Buck Institute for ‘Research on Ageing’ in California have found a role for a gene called OXR1 that is necessary for the lifespan extension seen with dietary restriction and is essential for healthy brain ageing.

OXR1 gene is an important brain resilience factor protecting against ageing and neurological diseases, said the researchers in the study, published in the journal Nature Communications.

“When people restrict the amount of food that they eat, they typically think it might affect their digestive tract or fat buildup, but not necessarily about how it affects the brain,” said Kenneth Wilson, a postdoctoral student at the Institute.

“As it turns out, this is a gene that is important in the brain.”

The team additionally demonstrated a detailed cellular mechanism of how dietary restriction can delay ageing and slow the progression of neurodegenerative diseases.

The study, done in fruit flies and human cells, also identifies potential therapeutic targets to slow ageing and age-related neurodegenerative diseases.

“We found a neuron-specific response that mediates the neuroprotection of dietary restriction,” said Professor Pankaj Kapahi from Buck Institute.

“Strategies such as intermittent fasting or caloric restriction, which limit nutrients, may enhance levels of this gene to mediate its protective effects,” he added.

The team began by scanning about 200 strains of flies with different genetic backgrounds. The flies were raised with two different diets, either with a normal diet or with dietary restriction, which was only 10 per cent of normal nutrition.

They found the loss of OXR1 in humans results in severe neurological defects and premature death. In mice, extra OXR1 improves survival in a model of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS).

Further, a series of in-depth tests found that OXR1 affects a complex called the retromer, which is a set of proteins necessary for recycling cellular proteins and lipids.

Retromer dysfunction has been associated with age-related neurodegenerative diseases that are protected by dietary restriction, specifically Alzheimer’s and Parkinson’s diseases.

The team found that OXR1 preserves retromer function and is necessary for neuronal function, healthy brain ageing, and lifespan extension seen with dietary restriction.

“Diet is influencing this gene. By eating less, you are actually enhancing this mechanism of proteins being sorted properly in your cells, because your cells are enhancing the expression of OXR1,” said Wilson.

(Source: International Business Times — By IBT desk — 16th January, 2024)

Miscellanea

1. TECHNOLOGY

1 Apple set to open its fourth iPhone factory in India in a China+1 strategy

Apple is set to get its fourth manufacturing facility in India, with the Tata Group reportedly planning a new factory that will manufacture iPhones, a move that aligns with Apple’s strategy of accelerating its supply chain in India. The new factory, according to a Bloomberg report that cites unnamed sources, is expected to have 20 assembly lines and employ 50,000 staffers within two years of being operational.

The sources further said that the group plans to make the factory operational in the next 12 to 18 months. “India is important to many big tech companies for several reasons — the human capital, relatively cheap labor pool, a maturing supply chain, and the country’s pragmatism,” said Prachir Singh, senior analyst at Counterpoint Research.

In October, the Tata Group acquired an iPhone assembly plant, located in Karnataka, from Taiwanese manufacturing firm Wistron for $125 million. The acquisition is still pending regulatory approval.Queries sent to the Tata Group and Apple went unanswered.

These developments come at a time when Apple is looking to scale down its operations in China, due to the ongoing trade war between Washington and Beijing, and scale up its operations in Asian economies, including India, Thailand, Vietnam and Malaysia.

“Apple has been looking for a second place to expand and diversify its manufacturing operations beyond China. The new plant at Hosur could be a clear indication that India is that second destination,” said Abhilash Kumar, industry analyst at TechInsights. “The year 2023 saw a lot of activity in India that propelled the nation to be the 4th largest in terms of Apple’s supply chain network,” Kumar added.

Apple’s strategy to shift its manufacturing operations to India gained more mileage in January this year as New Delhi provided initial clearance to several Chinese suppliers, who assemble multiple Apple products and sell parts for these products to Apple.

Other than the Tata Group, other contract manufacturers such as Foxconn and Pegatron, are also manufacturing Apple products in India. Foxconn, the largest contract manufacturer globally, has a plant at Sriperumbudur in Tamil Nadu, which manufactures iPhones, metal casings and other components.

The company, which is the only manufacturer of Apple’s latest iPhone 15 and 15 plus models, has announced plans to open two other manufacturing facilities at Devanahalli, Karnataka, and Kongara Kalan, Telangana. Pegatron, which manufactures older models of iPhones at its Singaperumal Koil plant in Tamil Nadu, is also reportedly planning a second plant in Tamil Nadu.

The new plant from Tata Group, according to Kumar, could generate a lot of employment opportunities for Indians while putting the country at the forefront of Apple’s manufacturing plans.

Another proof of India’s growing importance to Apple, Kumar said, is the recent launch of two retail stores by the company in Mumbai and New Delhi.

(Source: www.computerworld.com— 8th December, 2023)

2 Attacks against personal data are up 300 per cent, Apple warns

Apple tells us more than 2.6 billion personal records have already been compromised by data breaches in the past two years.

It’s almost as though the best way to ensure your online data is safe is to make sure no one stores any of it. It feels likely that the Apple-commissioned study (“The Continued Threat to Personal Data”) is designed to reinforce the company’s arguments around the need for strong end-to-end data encryption and security.

• What Apple said?

In a statement, Craig Federighi, Apple’s senior vice president of software engineering, warned:

“Bad actors continue to pour enormous amounts oftime and resources into finding more creative andeffective ways to steal consumer data, and we won’trest in our efforts to stop them. As threats to consumer data grow, we’ll keep finding ways to fight back onbehalf of our users by adding even more powerful protections.”

• Attack velocity is increasing incredibly fast

The study, conducted by Massachusetts Institute of Technology professor Stuart Madnick, found clear proof that data breaches have become a global epidemic. The number of data breaches more than tripled between 2013 and 2022 and has continued to worsen in 2023.

The big message is that robust protection against breaches needs to be mandatory. End-to-end encryption, for example, is all the more important when criminals and dodgy government-backed spies are attempting to break into the servers your data sits on.

That’s less of a problem when even the server doesn’t understand and can’t read that information. If the server can’t read it, chances are neither can the perpetrators.

• We should use Advanced Data Protection

The report also delivers a pretty powerful message of recommendation for the need to enable Apple’s recently introduced Advanced Data Protection for iCloud.

Apple’s data protection already extends to encryption of critical information such as passwords and other sensitive information. Advanced Data Protection adds protection for Notes, iCloud Backup, and Photos to the list, though there are some limitations.

It really should concern anyone online that the momentum of these attacks is increasing so dramatically. In the US alone, there were nearly 20 per cent more breaches in just the first nine months of 2023 than in any prior year, Apple said.

The report also warns that more than 80 per cent of breaches involved data stored in the cloud, even as attacks against cloud infrastructure nearly doubled between 2021 and 2022.

• Attackers are sophisticated and well-resourced

Hackers are becoming more professionalised and better resourced, most security experts agree.Some even run help desks to assist impacted customers!

The deal is that ransomware is a huge business, one that benefits from more sophisticated attackers who have always known how to gather and combine small pieces of data from individuals lower down the enterprise security chain to violate security elsewhere.

Simen Van der Perre, strategic advisor at Orange Cyberdefense, recently warned that many of the most sophisticated ransomware attacks take place over time in different stages.

In this environment, you must expect every small vulnerability to be prodded and explored.

“Hackers are evolving their methods and finding more ways to defeat security practices that once held them back. Consequently, even organizations with the strongest possible security practices are vulnerable to threats in a way that wasn’t true just a few years ago,” Apple said.

• Encrypt all the things

“In recent years, we have seen an unprecedented increase in both the number of cyber threats and their sophistication, with attacks becoming more tailored as criminals aim for maximum impact, and maximum profit,” according to Bernardo Pillot (INTERPOL’s Assistant Director of Cybercrime Operations) who’s quoted in the report.

But making sure data is incomprehensible even if it is accessed is the company’s approach to personal and enterprise security. After all, if someone breaks into your online data but can’t make any sense of it, your data remains effectively safe.

Of course, data isn’t solely a problem for employees and users. All those data lakes held by a myriad of different firms are potential targets, and we’ve seen data brokers and government-related systems broken into enough times to understand that the information those systems hold about people should also be more effectively protected.

• We need bigger walls, not larger gates

Apple warns that because people now live more of their lives online, corporations, governments and other types of organisations collect more and more personal data — sometimes with little choice from individuals.

At the same time, the interconnected nature of global business means a successful hack against one small supplier making use of data about people at the company stolen elsewhere can give attackers access to information stored on servers belonging to a much larger company, putting everyone at risk.

Attacks of this kind can ruin customer relationships and bankrupt companies — and those nations that remove the protection of end-to-end encryption from consumer and business users alike had better recognise the risk they are taking with their population’s digital security and enterprise success.

Strong and robust digital protection is essential in a connected world, weakening that is a luxury no one can afford.

(Source: computerworld.com— 10th December, 2023)

2. ENVIRONMENT

1.World’s biggest iceberg A23a on the move after 30 years

The iceberg, called A23a, split from the Antarctic coastline in 1986. But it swiftly grounded in the Weddell Sea, becoming, essentially, an ice island. At almost 4,000 sq km (1,500 sq miles) in area, it’s more than twice the size of Greater London. The past year has seen it drifting at speed, and the berg is now about to spill beyond Antarctic waters.

A23a is a true colossus, and it’s not just its width that impresses. This slab of ice is some 400m (1,312 ft) thick. For comparison, the London Shard, the tallest skyscraper in Europe, is a mere 310m tall.

A23a was part of a mass outbreak of bergs from the White Continent’s Filchner Ice Shelf. At the time, it was hosting a Soviet research station, which just illustrates how long ago its calving occurred. Moscow dispatched an expedition to remove equipment from the Druzhnaya 1 base, fearing it would be lost. But the tabular berg didn’t move far from the coast before its deep keel anchored it rigidly to the Weddell’s bottommuds.

So, why, after almost 40 years, is A23a on the move now?

“I asked a couple of colleagues about this, wondering if there was any possible change in shelf water temperatures that might have provoked it, but the consensus is the time had just come,” said Dr Andrew Fleming, a remote sensing expert from the British Antarctic Survey.

“It was grounded in 1986 but eventually it was going to decrease (in size) sufficiently to lose grip and start moving. I spotted the first movement back in 2020.” A23a has put on a spurt in recent months, driven by winds and currents, and is now passing the northern tip of the Antarctic Peninsula.

Like most icebergs from the Weddell sector, A23a will almost certainly be ejected into the Antarctic Circumpolar Current, which will throw it towards the South Atlantic on a path that has become known as “iceberg alley”.

Eventually, all bergs, however big, are doomed to melt and wither away. Scientists will be following the progress of A23a closely. If it does land in South Georgia, it might cause problems for the millions of seals, penguins and other seabirds that breed on the island. A23a’s great bulk could disrupt the animals’ normal foraging routes, preventing them from feeding their young ones properly.

But it would be wrong to think of icebergs as being just objects of danger — Titanic and all that. There’s a growing recognition of their importance to the wider environment. As these big bergs melt, they release the mineral dust that was incorporated into their ice when they were part of glaciers scraping along the rock bed of Antarctica. This dust is a source of nutrients for the organisms that form the base of ocean food chains.

“In many ways, these icebergs are life-giving; they are the origin point for a lot of biological activity,” said Dr Catherine Walker, from the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution, who was born in the same year as A23a. “I identify with it; it’s always been there for me.”

(Source: www.reuters.com— 25th November, 2023)

2 COP28 Summit in Dubai: Indian climate activist Licypriya Kangujam storms the stage

A 12-year-old protester burst onto the stage at the COP28 climate summit in Dubai. Conference of the Parties or COP28 saw many firsts this year. From organising the COP’s first-ever “Health Day” to hosting “the first-ever COP ministerial dialogue on building water-resilient food systems” — there were many events and “landmark” moments that embraced the COP28 climate summit.

Several countries clashed over a possible agreement to phase out fossil fuels at the COP28 summit in Dubai, jeopardising attempts to deliver a first-ever commitment to eventually end the use of oil and gas in 30 years of global warming talks.

Activists designated Saturday a day of protest atthe COP28 summit in Dubai. But the rules of thegame in the tightly controlled United Arab Emirates at the site supervised by the United Nations meant sharp restrictions.

Public protests have been limited at the United Nations talks that are being held in the United Arab Emirates, which bans many organised groups, including political parties and labour unions.

COP28 Summit in Dubai: Who is Licypriya Kangujam, an Indian protestor who dashed onto the stage?

1) Licypriya Kangujam is a child climate justice activist from India who was escorted away as the audience clapped, Reutersreported.

2) She delivered a short speech after rushing onto the stage at the COP28 summit in Dubai. The teenager protested against the use of fossil fuels.

3) “End fossil fuels. Save our planet and our future”, a 12-year-old protester ‘Licypriya Kangujam’ burst onto the stage at the COP28 climate summit in Dubai on Monday, holding a sign above her head.

4) COP28 Director-General Ambassador Majid Al Suwaidi said he admired the enthusiasm of young people at COP28 and encouraged the audience to give Kangujam another round of applause.

5) In a post on X (formerly Twitter), the activist wrote, “Here is the full video of my protest today disrupting the UN High-Level Plenary Session of #COP28UAE. They detained me for over 30 minutes after this protest. My only crime — Asking to Phase out Fossil Fuels, the top cause of the climate crisis today. Now they kicked me out of COP28.”

6) “Governments must work together to phase out coal, oil and gas – the top cause of the climate crisis today. Your action today will decide our future tomorrow. We are already the victims of climate change. I don’t want my future generations to face the same consequences again. Sacrificing the lives of millions of innocent children for the failures of our leaders is unacceptable at any cost,” she said.

7) The teenager also wrote, “Millions of children like me are losing their lives, losing their parents and losing their homes due to climate disasters. This is a real climate emergency. Instead of spending billions of dollars in wars, spend it on ending hunger, giving education and fighting climate change.”

8) “I’m a child who is completely frustrated by today’s climate crisis. We are the first line of victims. I feel the core issues of phasing out fossil fuels are kept inside in the negotiations process going on in the COP28 with over 2,500 fossil fuel lobbyists,” she added.

(Source: www.livemint.com— 12th December, 2023)

Miscellanea

1. WORLD NEWS

1 South Korean robot crushes man to death after confusing him with a box of vegetables

A South Korean man was crushed to death by an industrial robot after it failed to differentiate between him and a box of vegetables.

The robotics company employee was inspecting the robot’s sensor operations on Wednesday at a distribution centre for agricultural produce in South Gyeongsang province when the incident happened.

The robotic arm was lifting boxes of peppers and moving them onto pallets when it allegedly malfunctioned and picked up the man instead, Yonhap news agency reported.

It then pushed the man against the conveyor belt, crushing his face and chest. He was rushed to a hospital but later succumbed to the injuries.

The employee, said to be in his 40s, was conducting checks on its sensor ahead of its test run at the pepper sorting plant. He had initially planned to conduct the tests on 6th November, but it was pushed back two days due to reported problems with the robot’s sensor.

Following the incident, an official from the Dongseong Export Agricultural Complex, which owns the plant, called for a “precise and safe” system to be established.

“Robots have limited sensing and thus limited awareness of what is going on around them,” Christopher Atkeson, a robotics expert at Carnegie Mellon University, told MailOnline.

Earlier in May, a man in South Korea suffered serious injuries after getting trapped by a robot while working at an automobile parts manufacturing plant.

At least 41 people have been killed by industrial robots in the US between 1992 and 2017, according to a study published by the American Journal of Industrial Medicine.

Stationary robots were responsible for 83 per cent of the fatal incidents. “Many of these striking incidents occurred while maintenance was being performed on a robot,” the study found.

A 22-year-old worker at a German Volkswagen factory was killed by a robot in 2015.

(Source: https://www.independent.co.uk/asia/east-asia/south-korea-robot-kills-man-b2444245.html — By Alisha Rahaman Sarkar — 9th November, 2023)

2. ECONOMY — ENERGY

1 Lithium Miners Bet on Direct Extraction in bid For Efficiency, Sustainability

Lithium is the most critical mineral to the future of global energy systems, powering everything from electric vehicles to personal electronics. It is also used to produce depression medications, large-scale energy storage systems, ceramics, and more.

The global demand for lithium is projected to increase seven-fold from 2023 to 2030. As the industry expands to a total value of $400 billion in the coming years to meet surging demand, lithium mining’s footprint on global ecosystems and local economies will spread accordingly.

Many major lithium companies are cognizant of the potential long-term ramifications of unfettered exploitation of lithium resources, particularly in Latin America’s lithium-rich salt flats, where evaporation plants are particularly taxing on limited local water tables.

A new lithium extraction technology aims to solve a critical dilemma facing the lithium industry: how to consistently ramp up global lithium production while containing the industry’s impact on local environments.

Direct Lithium Extraction (DLE) separates lithium from mineral-rich brines using chemical agents in a continuous process of water recycling, instead of using the traditional method of slowly evaporating the surrounding liquid. The technology promises higher lithium yields and lower water usage, if implemented at scale.

DLE has already been adopted at Argentina’s largest lithium mine, and will reportedly be introduced at dozens of high-profile lithium projects throughout the world in coming years, including at ExxonMobil’s lithium facility in Arkansas and Chile’s highly productive plants in the Atacama Desert.

Still, despite the purported benefits of DLE for the lithium sector, the technology is untested in large-scale applications and carries higher up-front costs for prospective investors.

While analysts disagree on the potential impact of DLE on the global lithium sector, the newly developed technology could still be the industry’s best hope of maintaining competitiveness in the future.

Direct Lithium Extraction: Mixed Results

International Business Times discussed the benefits and limitations of DLE with Jose Hofer, Commercial Manager at Livista Energy, a Luxembourg-based lithium processing firm that actively works with DLE companies. Hofer was also formerly Business Intelligence Manager at Sociedad Química y Minera de Chile (SQM), the largest of Chile’s two major lithium miners, as well as an Energy Analyst at Chile’s Ministry of Energy. He shared written comments with IBT on Tuesday.

DLE has proven an “increase in yield for the production of lithium chloride, which is an advantage [relative to] existing conventional evaporation projects,” Hofer said.
Early results from DLE’s applications at pilot plants suggest the technology could drastically increase lithium production from existing plants, without companies needing to expand the footprint of their operations.

“Much like shale did for oil, DLE has the potential to significantly increase the supply of lithium from brine projects, nearly doubling lithium production,” Goldman Sachs said in an April report on DLE, highlighting the technology’s importance to scaling global lithium production.

“DLE has proved to be feasible in China,” Hofer said, but did not identify the technology taking hold at scale elsewhere in the world.

While DLE has shown promising results so far, the technology has significant drawbacks at its current stages of development.

“Water consumption is the biggest issue” for DLE, Hofer told IBT. DLE’s “water use is higher than conventional evaporation,” Hofer said.

Existing DLE plants still need to undergo further research and development to even limit the technology’s water usage compared to existing mining practices, a central element of DLE’s advertised benefits. And the technology currently carries higher capital expenditures when compared to traditional evaporation mining (13 per cent higher, according to Goldman Sachs).

While DLE projects may have been feasible during the high-price environment of late 2022, margins for miners have shrunk considerably in 2023 as lithium prices have fallen and plateaued. Projects that are currently using DLE “will have to transit a maturity process” before reaching their full potential, Hofer told IBT.

The Industry Pivots to DLE, however slowly.

Goldman Sachs’ report tallied 28 distinct lithium mining projects employing DLE technologies worldwide, with statuses ranging from pilot programs to full operation. Only four DLE projects are currently in operation, three of which are in China, and the fourth of which is in Argentina at U.S. based miner Livent’s Fenix plant in the Salar del Hombre Muerto salt flat.

These four active plants could soon expand; two mines in Argentina (Eramet’s Centenario-Ratones and Tibet Summit’s Angeles projects) and two other Chinese plants are nearing final construction of DLE facilities, according to Goldman Sachs.

SQM, the world’s leading lithium company by annual output, is also beginning plans to convert its evaporation mine in the Atacama Desert to a DLE operation.

“We are looking forward to adopting industrial scaling for this technology,” Mark Fones, Vice President of Strategy at SQM said on the company’s third-quarter earnings call on Thursday.

(Source: International Business Times — By Jack Quinn — 17th November, 2023)

3. WORLD – ENVIRONMENT

1 Frustration As Latest Talks on Global Plastic Treaty Close

The latest negotiations toward a global plastic treaty concluded late Sunday with disagreement about how the pact should work and frustration from environment groups over delays and lack of progress.

Negotiators spent a week at the UN Environment Programme (UNEP) headquarters in Nairobi haggling over a draft treaty to tackle the growing problem of plastic pollution found everywhere from ocean depths to mountaintops to human blood.

It is the third time negotiators have met since 175 nations pledged early last year to fast-track talks in the hope of finalising a treaty by 2024.

The meeting in Nairobi was supposed to advance the process by fine-tuning the draft treaty and starting discussions about what concrete measures should target pollution from plastic, which is made from fossil fuels.

But the treaty terms were never really addressed, with a small number of oil-producing nations — particularly Iran, Saudi Arabia and Russia — accused of employing stalling tactics seen at previous negotiation rounds to hinder progress.

In closed-door meetings, so many new proposals were put forward that the text — instead of being revised and streamlined — ballooned in size over the course of the week, according to observers following the talks.

Graham Forbes from Greenpeace said the meeting had “failed” its objectives.

“A successful treaty is still within reach but it will require a level of leadership and courage from big, more ambitious countries that we simply have not seen yet,” he told AFP.

UNEP said “substantial” progress had been made by nearly 2,000 delegates in attendance.

The International Council of Chemical Associations, the main industry body for global petrochemical and plastic businesses, said governments had improved an “underwhelming” draft.

“We (now) have a document — a draft text — that is much more inclusive of the range of ideas,” spokesman Stewart Harris told AFP.

Environment groups have long argued that without laws to slow the growth of new plastic, any treaty would be weak and ineffective.

Plastic production has doubled in 20 years and at current rates could triple by 2060 without action, but 90 percent is not recycled.

Ahead of the talks, around 60 “high ambition” nations called for the treaty to eliminate some plastic products through bans and phase-outs, and enshrine rules to reduce plastic production and consumption.

But during the open sessions in Nairobi, some nations expressed reluctance to support cuts on plastic production, while divisions sharpened over whether treaty terms should be legally binding or voluntary.

Two further rounds of negotiations remain in 2024: the first in Canada in April and then in South Korea in November, with the goal of adopting a treaty by mid-2025.

(Source: International Business Times — By AFP News — 19th November, 2023)

Miscellanea

1. TECHNOLOGY

1 Amazon plans drone deliveries for UK parcels next year in an Hour

Amazon has announced it will start using drones to deliver parcels in the UK in under an hour. The online retail giant said the service would start in one location which is yet to be revealed, at the end of 2024. The company already offers drone deliveries in two US states for goods weighing no more than 5 lbs (2.2 kg).

The aviation regulator said “exploring” how drones could be safely used in more of the UK’s airspace was “key”. Amazon said it was working closely with the Civil Aviation Authority (CAA) to meet regulations, while the government said the move would help it understand “how to best use the new technology safely and securely”. David Carbon, Vice President of Amazon Prime Air, said he believed there was demand for the technology in the UK and that it was “absolutely safe”.

“It’s hundreds of times safer than driving to the store,” he told the BBC in an interview in Seattle. “I’ve never heard anyone say they wouldn’t want something faster. Customers will be able to choose from thousands of items which weigh 5 lbs or less, from washing up liquid and toothbrushes to beauty products and batteries to fill a shoe-box size package.”

“What our customers will do is jump on to the Amazon website, they’ll select drone delivery if it’s available in their area, they’ll order their product….and that will then set off the chain of events that goes to our ground system that finds the customer’s yard, drops the package off where they asked it, and we’re out of there,” Mr Carbon said. The first area in the UK for deliveries by air will be named in the coming months. The company currently has drone postage in California and Texas and is also looking to launch the so-called “ultra-fast” deliveries in a third US state and in Italy.

Baroness Vere, the Government’s Aviation Minister said, “Amazon’s plans would help boost the economy and offer consumers more choice while helping in keeping the environment clean with zero emission technology. It will also build our understanding on how to best use the new technology safely and securely,” she said, adding that the Government planned for commercial drones to be a “commonplace” by 2030.

(Source: www.bbc.com – 19th October, 2023)

2 Seeing Chandrayaan-3 craft development, US experts wanted India to share space technology with them: ISRO chief

ISRO Chairman, Mr S. Somanath said, “Experts involved in developing complex rocket missions in the US, after witnessing the developmental activities of the Chandrayaan-3 spacecraft, suggested that India share space technology with them.”

“Times have changed and India is capable of building the best of devices and rockets and that is why Prime Minister Narendra Modi has opened the space sector to private players,” he said at an event. Somanath was addressing students at an event organized by Dr A P J Abdul Kalam’s Foundation, commemorating the 92nd birth anniversary of the late former President today.

“Our country is a very powerful nation. You understand that our knowledge and intelligence level in the country is one of the best in the world,” the ISRO Chief said, explaining, “In Chandrayaan-3, when we designed and developed the spacecraft, we invited experts from the Jet Propulsion Laboratory, Nasa-JPL, who does all the rockets and most difficult mission.”

He continued, “About 5-6 people from Nasa-JPL came to ISRO headquarters and we explained to them about Chandrayaan-3. That was before the soft landing took place on August 23. We explained how we designed it and how our engineers made it…..and how we are going to land on the moon’s surface, and they just said, no comments. Everything is going to be good.”

JPL is a research and development laboratory funded by the National Aeronautics and Space Administration and managed by the California Institute of Technology (CALTECH) in the United States of America.

US space experts also said one thing, “Look at the scientific instruments, they are very cheap. Very easy to build and they are high technology. How did you build it? Why don’t you sell this to America, they were asking,” he said.

“So students, you can understand how times have changed. We are capable of building the best equipment, the best devices, and the best rockets in India. That is why our Prime Minister, Shri. Narendra Modi has opened the space sector.” He further added, “India successfully touched down near the south pole of the lunar surface with the Chandrayaan-3’s Lander on August 23, making it only the fourth country to achieve the feat of a Moon landing after the US, China and the erstwhile Soviet Union.”

(Source: www.timesofindia.com – 16th October, 2023)

2. WORLD NEWS

1 Amazon Rivers fall to lowest levels in 121 years amid a severe drought

Rivers in the heart of the Amazon Rainforest in Brazil fell to their lowest levels in over a century as a record drought upended the lives of hundreds of thousands of people and damaged the jungle ecosystem. The Port of Manaus, the region’s most populous city, at the meeting of the Rio Negro and the Amazon River, recorded 13.59 meters (44.6 feet) of water on Monday, compared to 17.60 meters, a year ago, according to its website. That is the lowest level since records began 121 years ago in 1902, passing a previous all-time low set in 2010.

Rapidly drying tributaries to the mighty Amazon have left boats stranded, cutting off food and water supplies to remote villages, while high water temperatures are suspected of killing more than 100 endangered river dolphins. After months without rain, rainforest villager Pedro Mendonca was relieved when a Brazilian NGO delivered supplies to his riverside community near Manaus, late last week.

“We have gone three months without rain here in our community,” said Mendonca, who lives in Santa Helena do Ingles, West of Manaus, the capital of Amazonas state. “It is much hotter than past droughts.” Some areas of the Amazon have seen the least rain from July to September since 1980, according to the Brazilian Government Disaster Alert Centre, Cemaden.

Brazil’s Science Ministry blames the drought on the onset of the El Niño climate phenomenon this year, which is driving extreme weather patterns globally. In a statement earlier this month, the ministry said it expects the drought will last until at least December, when El Niño’s effects are forecast to peak. Underlying El Niño is the long-term trend of global warming, which is leading to more frequent and more intense extreme weather events, like drought and heat.

(Source: CNN.com – 17th October, 2023)

3. WOMEN EMPOWERMENT

1 One in Five Board Members at India Inc. is Now a Woman

This figure was one in 20, a decade ago, when law mandating one woman director came into effect. There are 885 women among the 4,783 directors that cumulatively sit on the boards of Nifty-500 companies, resulting in 18.5% women representation.

After 10 years of the enforcement of the Companies Act 2013, that made it mandatory for companies to have at least one woman director on their boards, one in every five board members on average in Nifty-500 companies is a woman. Five years ago, one in eight directors was a woman, and ten years ago, the proportion was one among twenty members, Prime Database research showed.

Though there is a progress in enhancing gender equity at the board level, the glass is both half full and half empty. The legal mandate has ensured that almost all the 500 companies have a woman director on their boards, but it has also defined the presence of women on Indian Boards. In total, 223 (or 45 per cent) of the Nifty-500 companies have only one woman director, in compliance with the law.

Furthermore, the bigger the size of the board, the more conspicuous the dearth of women directors. There are 81 companies with only one woman director on their respective boards of ten or more members. For instance, L&T with a board size of 19 members has only one woman director. Ironically, the only woman director on the board of L&T is Preetha Reddy, the Vice Chairperson of Apollo Hospitals which has six women directors on its board of 11 members. Apollo Hospitals is one of the eight companies of the ’50 per cent + club’ where women make up half or more of the board.

“Company managements hire independent directors, the people with whom they have some earlier interactions which give them comfort, or the government officials post their retirement,” said Manju Agarwal, an independent woman director on boards of several listed companies. “Since most of these people tend to be male officers/entrepreneurs, the boards end up having more male members. And typically, one woman director gets hired predominantly because of the legal mandate,”
she added.

Globally, one in three directors on the boards of S&P 500 companies is a woman. But this is not due to a law mandating women on board but the pressure from investors and efforts by the companies towards having gender diversity at the board level. The UK Government backed Hampton-Alexander Review in its February report, this year on FTSE Women Leaders recommended an increased target of 40 per cent women representation on the boards of FTSE-350 companies by the end of 2025. Last year, British Housing Developer, Barratt Developments, faced protests from its shareholders after the proportion of women board members fell below the recommended 40 per cent level.

In India, 22 companies among the Nifty-500 have women representation in their board at 40 per cent and above. Incidentally, several of these companies have women chairpersons or CEOs. For instance, Colgate Palmolive, Godrej Consumer, Jyothy Labs, Vinati Organics, Apollo Hospitals, Sundram Fasteners and New India Assurance.

“There is no dearth of qualified women but most of them do not have board experience,” said Vikesh Wallia, Managing Director Board, Steward-8 Ship Inc., a research and advisory firm. “Promoters in India are still settling down with the one-woman director mandate. Besides, women are not pitching themselves hard enough for board seats. Also, the Government and MNCs are not taking the lead in ensuring gender diversity at the board level. Several PSUs do not have a single woman on their boards and there are MNCs who have better women representation on their boards overseas but not here in India,” he added.

To be sure, PSUs such as Power Grid, UCO Bank, Bank of Maharashtra and BEML do not have a woman director on their boards.

(Source: Economic Times – 19th October, 2023)

4. SPORTS

1 India finished with a record haul of 107, including 28 gold, at the 2023 Asian Games in Hangzhou

India has been a powerhouse since the Asian Games started in 1951. Having participated in all editions of the quadrennial showpiece, India played an integral role in the establishment of the Asian Games and even hosted the inaugural edition in New Delhi.

India won 51 medals — 15 gold, 16 silver and 20 bronze — at the Asian Games 1951 to finish second behind Japan (60 medals). It remains India’s best finish at the Continental Games. Swimmer Sachin Nag won the 100 m freestyle event at New Delhi in 1951 to become India’s first gold medallist at the Asian Games.

In the same year, Roshan Mistry became the first Indian woman to win an Asian Games medal when she took silver in the 100 m sprint at the 1951 Asian Games. Since then, India has won 779 medals at the Asian Games, including 183 golds, 239 silvers and 357 bronze.

India has returned with a gold medal at every edition to date and is the fifth-most successful country at these Games. Indian track and field stars have led from the front, bagging a massive 283 medals in 19 appearances at the big-ticket event.

India’s best medal tally came at the Asian Games 2023 in Hangzhou, the People’s Republic of China. India won a record 107 medals, surpassing their previous-best haul of 70 from Jakarta 2018. Unsurprisingly, athletics was the most successful sport, accounting for 29 medals.

At Asian Games 2018, Neeraj Chopra became the first Indian to win a gold medal in the Javelin Throw while Dutee Chand brought home India’s first medal in the women’s 100 m since PT Usha’s silver in 1982. Neeraj Chopra successfully fended off a challenge from compatriot Kishore Kumar Jena to defend his Asian Games title at Hangzhou 2023.

Apart from athletics, wrestlers, boxers and most recently, shooters have contributed handsomely to India’s medal count at the Asian Games. All top Indian athletes such as wrestlers Bajrang Punia and Vinesh Phogat, boxers Mary Kom, Lovlina Borgohain, Nikhat Zareen and Vijender Singh and shooters Abhinav Bindra and Jaspal Rana have also stood on the Asian Games podium.

India, however, has been the most dominant in Kabaddi, winning eight out of the nine editions since the sport debuted in 1990. India’s only loss was with Iran at the Asian Games 2018 in Jakarta.

(Source: olympics.com – 9th October, 2023)

To be precise

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

3 To be precise


 

v
“India cannot be held to any emission control target. They (developed
countries) should get off our backs. We are an expanding economy. How can we
levy a cap when millions are living with deprivation ?”

R.
K. Pachauri, Head of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC), to
IANS

v
“If you have not been a villain at a certain point in time, you will never be
a hero. And even if you are a hero one day, you may well become a villain the
next”


Carlos Ghosn, CEO, Nissan and Renault, in Newsweek

v
“Technology will not be a differentiator between rich and poor consumers;
personalised experience will be”

C.
K. Prahalad, Professor, Ross School of Business, at the University of
Michigan, in Mint

v
“Being a CEO is like answering a call to bring the organisation to a better
place than where you found it”


Edward J. Ludwig, CEO, Becton, Dickinson and Company, in Harvard Business
Review

v
“I don’t see anybody in Washington or anywhere else saying, look, this energy
crisis is the biggest one we’ve had, let’s really put the best people to work
on figuring out how to reduce the country’s dependence on oil”


Indra Nooyi, Chief Executive Officer, PepsiCo, in Reuters.com

v
“People in India are simple folks, who work hard and save. I believe that the
simpler the product (insurance), the better will be the reception”

P.
Chidambaram, Finance Minister, in Hindustan Times

v
“Over the last several decades, revolutions in communication and technology
have sent jobs wherever there’s Internet connections; that have forced
children in Raleigh and Boston to compete for those jobs with children in
Bangalore and Beijing. We live in a more competitive world, and that is a fact
that cannot be reversed”


Barack Obama, Democrat Party candidate for the US presidential election, in
The Times of India

v
“Once things start slowing down in India, we think that the competition may
give up. We see that as an opportunity”


Martin Sorrell, CEO, WPP Group, in Mint

v
“You have to encourage experimentation. You must hire people who don’t listen
to you. You have to create a sandbox where people can play — and fail, often
and early”


Anand Mahindra, Vice-Chairman & MD, Mahindra & Mahindra, in Harvard Business
Review

(Source :
Business Today, 10-8-2008, 13, 27-7-2008)

levitra

Words and deeds

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

31 Words and deeds


 



  • Quote of the month

“Anything
that smells like a conglomerate is going to be gone. We have to get rid of
those business.”

Vikram Pandit,
CEO, CITIGROUP, in Financial Times.

  •  Risk-management

“Sometimes
you need to say, ‘No model is better than a faulty model’ — like no medicine
is better than the advice of an unqualified doctor”

Nassim Taleb,
Risk Management Guru and

Author of the
Black Swans in Fortune.

  •  Finance

“Derivatives
are like race cars. Part of the performance comes from the machine, and part
from the experience and capability of the driver”

Omer Helvin,
Sales Director, Super Derivatives,

in Business
Line.

“Finance has
gotten so complicated with so much interdependency. What you’ve done is
interconnected the solvency of institutions to a degree that probably nobody
anticipated”

Warren Buffet,
Chairman & CEO, Berkshire Hathaway, in Fortune.

(Source :
Indian Management, May, 2008.)

 

levitra

To be precise

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

29 To be precise


 



  •  ‘If bankruptcy is a permissible form of business outcome in industry, what is
    irrational about this waiver (of loans to farmers) ?’

Manmohan
Singh, Prime Minister, in Business Standard

  •  ‘If you’re on a beach and a tsunami hits, you’ll drown whether you’re a small
    child or an Olympic swimmer. Some things will go bad no matter how good you
    are’

Lloyd
Blankfein, CEO, Goldman Sachs, in Fortune

  •  ‘Originality and creativity are deeply intrinsic to India. The Indian mind is
    distinct. Then, diversity is in India’s DNA’

Prasoon Joshi,
Executive Chairman and Regional Creative Director (Asia Pacific), McCann
Erickson,

in Business
Standard

(Source :
Business Today, 6-4-2008)

  •  “India, which always used last year’s fashion to dress itself up, is becoming
    the knowledge centre of the world”

Alok Sharma,
Chief Executive of the US-based Telsima, the leading WiMAX tech provider in
the world,

in Business
Week online.

  •  “Every Country in the world is facing an upsurge in inflation. China’s
    inflation rate is about 9%, much worse than ours. We should recognise that
    this is a global phenomenon.”

Montek Singh
Ahluwalia, Deputy Chairman,

Planning
Commission in Indian Express.

  • “We are not committed to using Indian resources. We will go where we find the
    right skills at the right price.”

Virender
Aggarwal, Head, Satyam Asia Pacific and Middle East, in Forbes.

(Source :
Business Today, 4-5-2008)


  • “I hold market fundamentalism primarily responsible for the current financial
    crisis. This is a man-made crisis and is a result of this false belief that
    markets correct their own excesses. That is the job of the regulator. And the
    regulators failed to perform their job.”

George Soros,
Chairman, Soros Fund Management

in
moneycontrol.com.

 

levitra

To be precise

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 4

35 To be precise


l
“The growing importance of India, to the world and to Dow Jones and News
Corporation, is obvious to all of us. What the world needs is a trusted means
of measuring this country’s development, an index that can be used by
investors around the world to track the progress of Indian companies and the
Indian economy.”

— Rupert Murdoch, Chairman, NewsCorp, to CNBC


l
“For a long time after Independence, we were trying to solve the employment
problem. Now we’re trying to solve the employability problem.”


— Vijay Thadani, Head,
Confederation of Indian Industry’s Committee on Education, in Newsweek



l
“The earth’s crust has enough material to supply all the oil needed, but the
earth’s atmosphere may not be in a position to absorb all the emissions.”

— Christof Ruhl, Group Chief Economist and Vice-President,
British Petroleum, in The Economic Times


l
“To think more clearly about what should be done, we have to ask what should
keep us awake at night.”

— Amartya Sen, Nobel Prize-winning economist, in Business
Standard.


l
“The India story remains a good one. Experience suggests that a time of
maximum bearishness represents a good buying opportunity.”

— Tarun Kataria, Chairman, HSBC Securities & Capital
Markets, in BusinessWeek Online.


l
“When we started Infosys in 1981, we decided to become the most respected
company rather than merely focus on becoming a profitable company. If you want
your people to sacrifice, then you need to sacrifice first.”


— N. R.
Narayana Murthy, Non-executive Chairman & Chief Mentor of Infosys
Technologies, to Agencies.



l
“The fellow on the other end, usually the CEO, says : ‘The market looks at us
as a toad. Berkshire Hathaway is looked at as a princess. And if you would
just kiss us, we would turn into a handsome prince.’ And I say : ‘No, we would
turn into a toad’.”

— Warren Buffett, Chairman and CEO, Berkshire Hathaway, in Fortune.


l
“The world has never seen this kind of advance before. These are people who
have known deprivation. These are people who are intent on developing their
skills, improving their lives and showing the world what they can do.”

— Rupert Murdoch, Chairman, News Corp., talking about India
and China, to Agencies.


l
“IT companies in India are investing for the long term and they have a pretty
incredible reputation. They are always considered whenever a global project
comes up.”

— Bill Gates, Chairman, Microsoft, in The Economic Times

(Source : Business Today, dated 2-11-2008 and 30-11-2008)

levitra

New tax haven blacklist likely

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 4

32 New tax haven blacklist likely


Seventeen countries led by France and Germany decided to draw
up a new blacklist of tax havens, which could include Switzerland, in a first
step toward rewriting the rules of global finance.

The world’s 40-odd tax havens, such as the Cayman Islands and
Jersey, are known hideaways for undeclared revenue and host many of the
non-regulated hedge funds that came under fire following the recent financial
meltdown.

French Budget Minister Eric Woerth said the 17 governments at
the Paris meeting agreed to task the OECD with drafting a new expanded blacklist
of countries that fail to cooperate on tax evasion and transparency.

German Finance Minister Peer Steinbrueck singled out
Switzerland for criticism, saying it had failed to fully cooperate on taxation
issues and deserved to be on the new list.

“Switzerland should be on the blacklist and not the green
list” of countries that do cooperate, he said.

“Banking secrecy has its limits,” Woerth added. “Switzerland
has made progress . . . but we must take matters farther.”

Switzerland, often criticised for its opaque bank secrecy
laws, decided to boycott the meeting along with Luxembourg, while the US and
Austria declined to send representatives.

(Source : The Economic Times, dated 23-10-2008)

levitra

Voices

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 2

25. Voices


v
“Reservations in student admissions is much more defensible. We can aspire to
have world standards even with such reservations, but not if they are extended
to the faculty.”

— Montek Singh Ahluwalia, Deputy Chairman of Planning
Commission.


v
“This one gold medal must make us introspect as to why India, a country that has
successfully taken its place in the world as a democracy, is still handicapped
at this level.”


— Sonia Gandhi,
Congress President.

(Source : India Today, dated 15-9-2008)

levitra

New tax haven blacklist likely

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 2

24. New tax haven blacklist likely


Seventeen countries led by France and Germany decided to draw
up a new blacklist of tax havens, which could include Switzerland, in a first
step toward rewriting the rules of global finance.

The world’s 40-odd tax havens, such as the Cayman Islands and
Jersey, are known hideaways for undeclared revenue and host many of the
non-regulated hedge funds that came under fire following the recent financial
meltdown.

French budget minister Eric Woerth said the 17 governments at
the Paris meeting agreed to task the OECD with drafting a new expanded blacklist
of countries that fail to cooperate on tax evasion and transparency.

“Banking secrecy has its limits,” Woerth added. “Switzerland
has made progress… but we must take matters farther.”

(Source : The Economic Times, dated 23-10-2008)

levitra

Voices

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 4

27 Voices


  • “We have not received the kind of support that we were requesting from our
    friends. So in a situation like that, one has to look for new friends.”


— Iceland’s Prime Minister Geir Haarde, rebuking European
allies for failing to help ease his country’s financial crisis. Iceland has
since turned to Russia for a

 4
billion loan.



  •  “In a bout, compromises and concessions are permissible, but only in one
    case : if it is for victory.”


— Russian
Prime Minister and martial-arts black belt Vladimir Putin, in a new video
“Let’s Learn Judo With Vladimir Putin”



  •  “I have found a flaw. I don’t know how significant or permanent it is. But I
    have been very distressed by that fact.”


— Former
Federal Reserve chairman and legendary proponent of deregulation Alan
Greenspan, referring to his free-market ideology during a hearing with U.S.
congressional leaders last week.



  •  “How do you prove a guy’s a pirate before he actually attacks a ship?”


— Adm. Mark
Fitzgerald, commander of NATO’s antipiracy control, on why it’s difficult to
defend ships including U.N. aid vessels from pillage by the growing ranks of
pirates off Somalia’s coast.



  • “I call it the Hotel Honda.”


— Unemployed
IT consultant Bruce Richall, who’s been sleeping in the back of his car after
getting laid off from his job with a multinational bank in the tiny U.S.
suburb of Westport, Connecticut.



  •  “The threat of a new, major terrorist attack on the United States is still
    very real.”

— The conclusion of a new independent study, noting that
America remains excessively vulnerable to chemical, biological and nuclear
attacks seven years after the destruction of the World Trade Center.


  • “This isn’t some disaster movie about a virus from Mars. It’s a recession, a
    downturn . . . it doesn’t mean we have to line our rooms with newspaper, get
    in the fetal position and live on tins.”

— London Mayor Boris Johnson, railing against Britain’s
funereal credit-crunch atmosphere and encouraging wealthy consumers to resume
spending in order to jump-start the economy.



  • “It’s a mess.”

— Eric M. Thorson, inspector general of the United States
Treasury Department, on the lack of coordinated oversight of Congress’s $700
billion bailout package

(Source : Newsweek dated October, November, 2008.)


  •  “Touch their money and Swiss get mad.”

— Bernhard Weisberg, editor of Black newspaper, on the
national outpouring of anger over the subprime mess at UBS, the country’s
biggest bank. Locals have recently renamed the site of UBS headquarters from
“Pared Square” to “Pirate Square.”


  • “There are other ways to get exercise and a peace of mind . . . . Eat less
    fatty food.”

— Abdul Shukor Husin, Chairman of Malaysia’s Islamic
Council, which recently issued a fatwa against yoga because of its Hindu roots
and its ‘blasphemous’ meditative chants.


  • “Our main concern is to get to first flight home and never come back.”


— Australian
newlywed Robert Grieve, who has been stranded along with scores of other
tourists at Bangkok’s international airport after thousands of protesters
swarmed the complex, in the latest escalation of a campaign to topple the
country’s prime minister.


(Source : Newsweek dated 8-12-2008)




  •  “We are removing 10 zeros from our monetary value. Ten billion dollars today
    will be reduced to $1.”

— Central Bank Governor Gideon Gono, on his efforts to
restore stability to the Zimbabwe dollar, which is so battered by inflation
that even the new $100 billion notes were not enough to buy a loaf of bread.


  •  “I am proud to be the Prime Minister of a country that investigates its Prime
    Ministers.”

– Israel’s Prime Minister Ehud Olmert, announcing his plan to resign in September due to an ongoing corruption investigation against him.

  • “If energy costs are as high as rents, people will consider whether they’re not able to live reasonably well at room temperatures … with a warm sweater on.”


– German Finance Minister Thilo Sarrazin, whose call for conservation led to calls for his resignation from newspaper readers accusing him of insensitivity to the human toll of rising oil costs.
(Source: Newsweek, dated 11-8-2008)


Words and deeds

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

17 Words and deeds


Mergers & Acquisitions

‘The playing field for acquisitions is a little less crowded
than before, mainly because many firms aren’t exactly in a position to be
writing cheques for acquisitions’

— Peter Sands, Group Chief Executive, Standard Chartered Bank
in Business Today.

Leadership

‘Plenty of leaders do not want to acknowledge their
weaknesses. That is fine with me as long as they work at a subconscious level on
those weaknesses’

— K. V. Kamath, CEO, ICICI BANK, in The Economic Times

Other voices

‘Nowhere in the world is so much capital being consumed. As
our consumption goes up, more and more money is required to fuel it’

— Gopal Srinivasan, Director, TVS Electronics, in India Today

Softly speaking

‘Compassion, like a mother’s care, is the essence of moral
ethics. If somebody is ethically or compassionately motivated to do things, his
actions will always be positive’.

— Dalai Lama, in a lecture at IIM, Ahmedabad on ‘Ethics and
Business’

(Source : Indian Management, March 2008)

levitra

Letters

fiogf49gjkf0d
Sir,
It was a genuine privilege to read January 2012 edition of BCA Journal. Your sincere and honest efforts to provide us with updated knowledge along with some of the best articles, stories, etc. are really worth appreciating.

Especially I liked the stories compiled by CA Raman Jokhakar. Those stories are really helpful in our professional and social life as well. My special thanks to you Raman Sir.

Thanks and regards.

— Vaibhav Mungashe,
C. A. Student, Pune.

Sir,
Re: Delay in introduction of Safe Harbour Rules The Finance Minister introduced section 92CB by the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2009 w.e.f. 1-4-2009, empowering the Board to make Safe Harbour Rules for determination of arm’s-length price. ‘Safe Harbour’ means Circumstances in which Income-tax authorities will accept the transfer price declared by the assessee. The enabling section 92CB was introduced after persistent demand by the taxpayers, particularly by the foreign companies.

One is, therefore, surprised that even after a lapse of three years, the relevant rules have not been notified. If this is not a sign of policy paralysis, then what constitutes policy paralysis? Of course, our ruling politicians and bureaucrats are allergic to use of the term and recently the PM openly chided the business community for using the same.

Further, though the transfer pricing provisions were introduced w.e.f. 1-4-2002, the CBDT has not provided enough guidelines about its implementation even after ten years. In western countries, such as Australia, New Zealand, Canada, UK, USA etc., their tax departments have put up hundreds of pages of guidelines for the taxpayers. Absence thereof in India is puzzling, to say the least; perhaps the Revenue Officers are either themselves not clear about the implications of the Law which they are implementing or they do not want to give up their discretionary powers!!! It is high time that the Tax Department provides clear guidelines on implementation of Transfer Pricing Law and formulate Safe Harbour Rules are introduced. Indian Transfer Pricing Officers are one of the most aggressive in the world, leading to mind boggling adjustments and litigation which helps nobody (except legal and tax professionals) and is driving away the Foreign Direct Investment though the high officials won’t accept the same.

—T. K. Singhal
Chartered Accountant
levitra

Miscellanea

3. Fed rate hike restricts India’s policy space

Indian policymakers should prepare for higher inflation,
following the decision of America’s Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) to
raise policy rates by 25 basis points (or 0.25%). This is the first such move
since December 2015 and the second in a decade. It reflects its assessment that
growth is entrenched, employment strong and prices buoyant in the US.
President-elect Donald Trump is expected to try and pump up growth through
various measures, including fiscal stimuli. So, all 12 members of the FOMC
voted for the hike and prepared markets for at least three more rate increases
in 2017.

Indian markets saw foreign institutional investors (FIIs)
take out nearly Rs 20,000 crore in November, after the government’s
demonetisation announcement. The outflow has continued: FIIs have sold more
than Rs 2,500 crore in December. Capital flight can accelerate after the FOMC
announcement as money flows to safe havens like US Treasury bonds. The rupee
has weakened against the dollar, our main trading currency.

This will boost import costs, bad news for India, a net
importer. Worryingly, crude oil prices have doubled over the year, from around
$27 per barrel in February to $54 now. Part of this is because of signs of
economic recovery in the US, Europe and East Asia, but the real reason lies in
the 13-nation cartel OPEC’s decision to cut production. OPEC sells 42% of the
world’s oil and holds 70% of proven reserves. On December 11, another 11 oil
producers, outside OPEC, including Russia, made a similar pact. This bodes ill
for India, which imports 80% of its oil requirements. Higher crude and a weaker
rupee could widen our trade deficit, kept artificially low when crude prices
crashed.

Given these trends, policymakers must take measures to
counter capital flight and a further, rapid depreciation. Foreign exchange
reserves are adequate, but there is no room for complacency. Interest rates have
little room to move down, if capital flight is to be avoided. And there is no
scope for lax fiscal discipline, as that could trigger macroeconomic
instability.

(Source : The Economic Times dated 16.12.2016)

4.  Winter session
wasted by petty politics, parties must debate and conduct business in
Parliament

Senior BJP leader LK Advani’s anguish over disruption
politics taking centre stage is justified as the winter session of Parliament
ends today without much business being transacted. Both government and
opposition are equally to blame, especially in the backdrop of the NDA
government having conducted a major exercise like demonetisation that affects
every aspect of society. Earlier, opposition parties had closed ranks to force
the government into a debate on demonetisation that would entail voting. By the
time they came around to debate the issue without any rule this week, the
government seemingly didn’t oblige.

This is reminiscent of 2010 when the entire winter session
was washed out over the 2G spectrum allocation scam during UPA-II. Now the
opposition, led by Congress, claims this is the first time in history that
treasury benches have disrupted Parliament proceedings, while government has
blamed opposition for running away from debates. Both sides need to heed elder
statesman Advani’s advice, especially when he invoked Atal Bihari Vajpayee.
Prime Minister Narendra Modi too should take inspiration from Vajpayee who
thrived on engaging debate in Parliament. If Modi had spoken in Parliament on
demonetisation, that would have given opposition one less reason to disrupt it.
His predecessor Manmohan Singh sat through debates on 2G spectrum and coal
allocation scams and sometimes even participated in them.

There was a glimmer of hope when the Rights of Persons with
Disabilities Bill, 2014 was passed in Rajya Sabha, but subsequently more than
80% of time has been lost to partisan bickering this winter session. Both
government and opposition parties agree that GST will be beneficial for the
economy. Centre and states now need to finalise three GST legislations – CGST,
IGST and compensation law – so that they can be introduced and passed in
Parliament early in the next session if GST is to become a reality by the next
financial year.

The government cannot afford disruptions of such magnitude
which have dealt a severe blow to the institution of Parliament. Government’s
crisis managers need to reach out to the opposition and have better floor
management in the House. Both sides must realise that debate is the only
democratic way of making the government accountable for its actions. If
opposition wants to create a favourable public opinion on their view of
demonetisation, the best way would be to get the better of the government in a
parliamentary debate.

(Source: The Times of India dated 16.12.2016)

5. Tax and other enforcement authorities must not abuse big
data to bring back inspector raj

The year’s second voluntary income disclosure scheme was
approved by Lok Sabha and operationalised. Along with it were reports of
bankers being sacked or suspended for complicity in attempts to launder
unaccounted money, and an invitation to citizens to lodge anonymous complaints
if they notice suspicious activity. The weeks following demonetisation have
been accompanied by growing intrusiveness of the state. Big government seems to
be back with a vengeance. But India’s earlier experiment in this area led to an
inspector raj and created opportunities for corruption to flourish. It must not be repeated.

A legitimate expectation of demonetisation was that it would
leave trails which could be used to bring tax evaders to book. This was in line
with a series of steps taken over the last decade to create an audit trail in
myriad areas to allow tax authorities to mine data. This is a sound way of
widening the tax net. In addition to tax authorities, agencies such as the
Financial Intelligence Unit processed information related to suspicious
financial transactions. India was switching to a more sophisticated way of
enforcing tax rules.

It is important that government now build upon a decade’s
work. Threats of tax raids and allowing bureaucrats to exercise excessive power
will be counterproductive. The return of an inspector raj will have a chilling
effect on economic activity. It will only prolong the ongoing economic
disruption. Government must send the right message to all economic agents.
Legitimate economic activity ought to be encouraged and needless impediments
removed. Exhorting people to use digital modes of payment is not enough.
Different arms of the government should make better use of technology to do
their work.

(Source: Times of India dated 19.12.2016)

6. Lead by example: To curb black money at its root, make all
political funding cashless and digital

As citizens are subjected to the unrelenting grind of
demonetisation, they are told this is in the interest of digitising India and
ridding it of black money. To make this argument more convincing than it is
currently, the Modi government must address the very fount of corruption and
black money in our society: political funding. As an Election Commission
background paper points out, money used to fund political parties or candidates
in a non-transparent manner undermines the core principles of democracy. The
rot begins here. It follows, therefore, that digital sanitisation must begin
here too. 

For stemming the flow of black money into politics, a most
recent EC recommendation is to lower the cap for anonymous donations from Rs
20,000 to Rs 2,000. This will help only at the margins, because the current
practice is to subdivide unaccounted funds into units below Rs 20,000 and claim
anonymity for them. The same sharp practice can be followed if a window of
anonymity is allowed below Rs 2,000: it’s just that one will have to claim ten
times more anonymous donations. To give an example of how preposterous current
claims are, in the election year 2013-14 BJP reported donations in excess of Rs
20,000 at just Rs 167 crore, Congress Rs 66 crore and BSP zero.

To end this charade and walk the talk of building a cashless
society, the laws must be amended to mandate that all donations to political
parties can only be in digital format. Prime Minister Narendra Modi has
appealed to 125 crore Indians, small traders and businessmen, farmers,
washermen, vegetable vendors, milk suppliers, newspaper vendors, tea stall
owners and chanaa sellers to bear with the hardships of transitioning to
cashless transactions because that will take India to new economic heights. In
that case, why should only political parties be exempt and continue to wallow
in cash? 

With 80% of the 1,800 parties registered in India not having
contested any election in the last few years, many of them look like setups to
launder money. Mandating a digital trail will put paid to this rot. More
broadly the political class cannot be shielded from the tribulations and trends
of the rest of society. If it claims to want to rid society of black money, it
should lead by example.

(Source: Times of India dated 21.12.2016).

Miscellanea

1. Spiritual

 

1.      
When You Are Aware, Life Is a
Movement of Joy

 

Someone met me recently and said, “I find it
difficult to listen to my spouse; he speaks so much, most of the time, I don’t
understand what he is saying.” I told her, “Listening to your spouse is like
reading the terms and conditions of a freeware you want to download from the
internet. It is long, and you don’t understand much, but still you click on
agree.” In the same way, to build a rapport with your spouse, just agree, and
when he calms down, try to discuss. Next time, when you find your spouse giving
a long lecture, and you need to convince him, do not be in a hurry. Wait for an
opportunity to explain your point of view.

 

We should learn the art of handling
difficulties gracefully. There is no one way. We have to be alert and let the
purity of alertness and goodness to guide you in handling difficult situations.
Our past knowledge is trapping us often. At the same time, we have to transform
gracefully. Our past should be a point of reference for increased awareness,
rather than a block.

 

Our past knowledge, conclusions, opinions,
hurts; they influence our listening and thinking. Our unconscious is leading
our life mechanically. When we are alert, we become conscious of our
unconscious and that enables us to lead a better life instead of bitter life.

 

Are you conscious of the fact that one is
unconscious to oneself? You say this is mine or that is mine. But, if you are
alert and conscious, you will realise that all that you have said as ‘mine’ is
not yours. You are riding a dream.

 

What you think is mine is not in the true
sense yours. You are using them for your need in a remarkably subtle sense. You
say your son is yours, for you have a dream that he will do this and that to
you. But, your son also has a dream and he feels this or that will make him
complete. So, one is using the other for fulfilling one’s dream, and in that
sense wants others to serve him.

 

All things and persons can be snatched away
from you, and what is capable of being snatched away is not yours. What cannot
be snatched away from you is your consciousness. Your body is given to you by
your parents. Your knowledge is given to you by books and other sources. These
can be snatched away from you.

 

Only our consciousness is intrinsically
ours, and in the true sense, we are not unaware what this consciousness is. We
are unconscious of our consciousness. When we are dependent on the things that
can be snatched away, and when it is snatched away by time, we feel cheated and
betrayed. It is our error in understanding.

 

If one understands that all things are
capable of being snatched one will not depend on it emotionally. Hence emotions
will have clarity and is free. You will be a giver of life, and not a beggar of
life. You will put your energy in understanding yourself, and when you
understand yourself as conscious, you will realise this consciousness, which is
your nature, is fullness and completeness. With fullness when you live life,
your life will be a movement of joy and not wanting joy.

 

(Source: Times of India dt 14.03.2017)

 

2. 
Social

 

2.      
Hawking won the world’s respect
– and gave disabled people like me hope – Frances Ryan

 

Growing up disabled, I had few role models.
But this brilliant, witty scientist helped shift the negative stereotypes many
face. As with most of the famous figures whose passing now hits us via a news
alert on our phones, I never met Stephen Hawking. In the vastness of the entire
universe, you could say I was one speck and he was another. And yet I thought
of him as a continual presence in my life, who – perhaps paradoxically, in the
light of his illness, not to mention of his work on time – would always be
there, somehow.

 

Growing up disabled in Britain, I didn’t
have many role models. There are hardly any statues of disabled leaders, no
great lives with chronic disability documented in the history books. As a
child, it’s easy to believe that disabled people have never really existed, and
that when they did, it was as cripples to be pitied or burdens on society. In
Hawking, we had a figure – brilliant, witty, kind – who confounded the negative stereotypes and the low expectations
so often forced on those of us with a disability.

 

He wasn’t without faults (accusations of
sexism were notable). He was also afforded opportunities – from wealth to
healthcare to being non-disabled throughout school – that clearly enabled his
success, opportunities too few young disabled people, facing cuts to multiple
strands of support, enjoy today. But his groundbreaking research, as well as
tireless commitment to the NHS and concern over Brexit, established him as
someone who, though physically stripped of his voice, should be listened to.

 

In the rush to eulogise a figure such as
Hawking the risk is that the media coverage either fails to acknowledge his
disability – and to ignore him being a disabled person is as regressive as a
white person saying they “don’t see colour” – or falls into condescending
cliches and objectification. Within hours of the news of his death breaking, I
saw headlines that reflected the (often well-intentioned) negative attitudes
that so often plague discussions of disabled people: ones of “inspiration”,
“overcoming disability” and references to “tragedy”. BBC Radio 5 Live asked
listeners if Hawking had “inspired” them – a question unlikely to be posed
about non-disabled academics. The Daily Mail referred to his “total disability”
while at the other end of the spectrum, John Humphrys used Radio 4’s tribute
segment to ask: “Did the science community cut him a lot of slack because he
was so desperately disabled?”

 

Even the Guardian’s obituary mentioned how
“despite his terrible physical circumstance, he almost always remained positive
about life”, as if it was a surprise that a world-renowned scientist with a
loving family could ever find happiness. Cartoonists illustrated him in heaven
– a place Hawking did not believe existed – standing up, as if finally free
from his wheelchair (an invention, much like his voice synthesiser, that
actually empowered him to engage with society). Even sentiments such as “He
didn’t let his disability define him” – as Marsha de Cordova, shadow
disabilities minister (and herself disabled) tweeted – verge on repeating the
ingrained belief that disability is an inherently negative thing: a part of
identity that, unlike race or sexuality, should be played down.

 

This is not to say that Hawking’s disability
didn’t help shape him. The thought that he had a sharply limited life
expectancy – it was originally believed he would die within two years of his
motor neurone disease diagnosis – by all accounts inspired Hawking to enjoy the
present, and spurred on his hunger for scientific discovery. But to reduce a
world-famous academic’s existence to one of tragedy and pluck respects neither
the reality of a disabled life nor the love, success, humour and fulfilment
that clearly marked Hawking’s. It is reminiscent of the countless “inspirational”
memes and posters that throughout his life featured Hawking’s image – often
using his body as inspiration for non-disabled people (“If he can succeed, so
can you!”) or criticising “lesser” disabled people (“The only disability is a
bad attitude”). Hawking, like all of us, deserves more than lazy, ableist
tropes.

 

Amid all the tributes to Hawking’s
contribution to scientific discovery, I would like to remember what he
contributed – perhaps unknowingly – to many disabled people: a sense of pride,
encouragement and hope. This was a genius who gained the world’s respect from
his wheelchair. Hawking’s achievements alone will not have begun to overturn
deep-seated prejudice, but he has played a significant part in shifting the
misconceptions that still routinely mark too many disabled people’s lives.
Hawking’s lesser-known lesson is one I hope others growing up disabled will be
left with: we can all reach for the stars.

 

(Source: www.theguardian.com)

 

3. World News

 

3.      
Plastic particles found in
bottled water

 

Tests on major brands of bottled water have
found that nearly all of them contained tiny particles of plastic. In the
largest investigation of its kind, 250 bottles bought in nine different
countries were examined. Research led by journalism organisation Orb Media
discovered an average of 10 plastic particles per litre, each larger than the
width of a human hair.

 

Companies whose brands were tested told the
BBC that their bottling plants were operated to the highest standards. The
tests were conducted at the State University of New York in Fredonia.

 

Commenting on the results, Prof Mason said:
“It’s not catastrophic, the numbers that we’re seeing, but it is
concerning.” Currently, there is no evidence that ingesting very small
pieces of plastic (microplastics) can cause harm, but understanding the
potential implications is an active area of science.

 

(Source: bbc.com)

 

4.      
A cheap Chinese TV threatens to
topple LG, Samsung & Sony’s India apple cart

 

Can Xiaomi replicate its smartphone success
in televisions? Its entry into the segment with TVs priced at as much as half
that of the top three —LG, Samsung and Sony — has taken the market by surprise
over the past few weeks. The leaders don’t yet have a strategy to counter the
Chinese company’s disruptive pricing, four senior industry executives said,
asking not to be named.

 

“While it’s a wait-and-watch scenario right
now, we have been asked to keep our ears to the ground to closely track
Xiaomi,” said a senior executive with one of the largest television makers.
“The scope to react right now is also limited for they are selling models at
almost throwaway prices which, if we have to match, it will completely disrupt
the pricing strategy.”

 

In less than a month of its foray into
televisions, Xiaomi has launched 32-inch, 43-inch and 55-inch models — sizes
that together account for 80% of the total television market by volume.

 

Its 32-inch set is sold at Rs.13,999
compared with a starting price of Rs. 24,000 for a similar specification model
from one of the three top brands. The 43-inch set is priced at Rs. 22,999
compared with Rs. 36,000-plus for a rival model while in the 53-inch segment,
Xiaomi’s model is tagged at Rs. 39,999, about half that of one from the top
three. The executives cited above said the top three brands are hoping that the
Chinese company won’t be as successful in TVs as the business calls for sales
and servicing strategies that differ from those for handsets.

 

(Source: gadgetsnow.com)

 

5.      
Wipro chairman unveils 3D metal
printing facility in Bengaluru

 

Global software major Wipro’s three
dimensional (3D) metal printing facility was unveiled by its Chairman Azim
Premji in this tech hub on 14 March. “The 12,000 sq.ft. centre has various
capabilities that include building up technology, post-processing, research,
characterisation and validation facilities,” said the city-based IT major
in a statement here. The company, however, did not disclose the cost of this
high-tech facility.

 

The software major’s 3D printing business
unit, Wipro3D, has been providing services to aerospace, space, industrial,
automotive, healthcare, oil and gas and heavy engineering sectors in the
country. Wipro3D was set up in 2012 here under the Wipro Infrastructure
Engineering, a hydraulic cylinder manufacturing unit of the software major. The
company soon plans to take its 3D printing services across the world, said the
statement, although no details were specified of its expansion plans.

 

(Source: firstpost.com)  

Miscellanea

1. Economy

7. With 109 Chinese firms making
it to the Fortune Global 500-2017, where does India Stand?

While Walmart topped the Fortune
Global 500 list, China’s State Grid, oil giant Sinopec Corp and China National
Petroleum were ranked second, third and fourth. Seven Indian firms made it to
the list.

While India, as well as numerous
other nations, believe that the United States tops the list of the global
economic powers, not many realise the kind of impact China has been making. The
Fortune Global 500 list for the year 2017 was released on Thursday, July 20,
and 109 Chinese firms have made it to the list.

While US retail giant Walmart
topped the list, China’s State Grid, oil giant Sinopec Corp and China National
Petroleum were ranked second, third and fourth.

Among the 109 firms that have made
it to the list, 10 are debutants. These 10 names include e-commerce brand Alibaba,
internet giant Tencent, Anbang Insurance Group and real estate developer
Country Garden.

In
comparison, only seven Indian firms have made it to the Fortune Global 500 list
this year. India’s economic expansion is expected to have accelerated in the
April-June quarter and is likely to grow in the second quarter as well.

(Source: International Business
Times dated 21.07.2017)

8. India has a Leader Who Believes
in Disruption 

In his latest avatar as the
Chairman of US Chairman of US India Business Council, John Chambers is
convinced that India is at an inflection point. In a chat with ET’s TV
Mahalingam, Chambers, who is also Cisco’s executive chairman, spoke about his
reading of the Modi-Trump dynamics & how India has changed in the last three
years.

Excerpts:

What’s your reading of the
recent meeting between President Trump & PM Modi?

I turned positive on India three
years ago & I volunteered to be Chairman of US India Business Council
(USIBC). Even though I have been involved with India for 20 years with Cisco, I
think the inflection point in India is a record in terms of this opportunity.
The meeting between the two leaders could not have gone better.In the CEOs
session with him, the PM was incredibly effective in listening to each of the
20 business leaders in the room & coming back on key issues. On a scale of
1 to 10, how did the meetings go? It was 11.

This target of $500 billion of
two-way trade between the two countries that USIBC has set, how achievable is
that & what needs to be done?

I was the one to bet on China in
1995 when almost nobody else did. When I forecast a few years ago that France
would be a start-up nation due to digitisation, nobody believed me. Guess which
was the top startup nation in Europe last year? France.When it comes to India,
I think we have not seen anything yet. This is a win-win. If you look at going
from the current level of $115 billion to $500 billion -the amount of jobs this
will create is massive.If you look back at 2000, we were just at $20 billion.
Now these are doable goals based on the confidence of the Indian & American
business leaders.

(Source:
ET Q&A – The Economic Times dated 12.07.2017)

2.  Sports

9. IPL broadcast rights war: Can
Jio topple Facebook, Twitter for digital space?

18 big names from across the globe
bought tender documents last year. With most of them likely to enter the fray
again, the Invitation to tender is all set to be available from 21st July
2017.

There was a jump of 454% in the
fee to retain Indian Premier League (IPL) title rights when Chinese mobile
manufacturing brand Vivo extended its deal for the next five years (2018-2022)
for whopping sum of  Rs. 2199 crore.

The Board of Control for Cricket
in India (BCCI) is expecting another such windfall as it is set to open the
Invitation to Tender (ITT) for IPL broadcast & media rights on 21 July
2017.

Sony Pictures Network India (SPN)
hold the television rights (2008-2017) while Star India has been in charge of
digital broadcast of the cash-rich 20-20 tournament for the last few seasons.

However, the competition for the
next term is going to be intense as quite a few big names including Discovery,
Facebook, Jio & Twitter are expected in the race.

(Source: International Business
Times dated 21.07.2017)

3. Industry

Why this is Indian IT
Industry’s Kodak Moment?

Once-great companies like Kodak,
Digital and Nokia with capable CEOs and vast resources come to an ignominious
end not because they do not see the tsunami coming — they die or fade into
irrelevance because they are unable to respond forcefully. Kodak invented the
digital camera as early as 1975. It had all the technology, resources, brand,
and distribution to prevail. Yet it failed.

A major reason why once-dominant
firms like Kodak fade away like old photos is culture. Culture trumps strategy.
A combination of complacence & overconfidence (“this cannot happen to
us”) prevented Kodak from adapting quickly. Its leadership was indecisive
and changed strategy many times. Despite having a venture capital arm, it took
years to make its first acquisition and never made any bets big enough to
create breakthroughs. Kodak offered the first service that allowed customers to
post and share pictures online but failed to follow through forcefully to
create what might have become Instagram or Snapchat. It diversified into
chemicals and pharmaceuticals but without much conviction; these businesses
fizzled and were sold off. Unlike Fuji, Kodak obsessed about its core developed
markets and did not seize the opportunity in emerging markets, especially a
rising China. Having failed to become a printing powerhouse, Kodak is now
trying to license its rich portfolio of patents.

There are a set of reasons that
make it difficult for even well managed companies to navigate industry
disruptions the way Fuji did or Microsoft has. High on the list is complacence,
even arrogance. When a company is sitting on lots of cash, fat margins & a
good market share, it is hard to create a sense of urgency in the organization
& among its shareholders.Today, India’s IT companies are struggling to
navigate a tectonic industry shift. Its leaders have seen the technological
& regulatory shifts coming for the last decade. They have recognized the
limits of wage arbitrage and understood the need to shift from renting IQ to
creating IP, and becoming more global. They see the giant new opportunities
afforded by the digital revolution. But as the story of Kodak shows, seeing is
not enough. Acting decisively and forcefully is crucial. More than ever,
India’s IT companies need the same caliber of courageous and entrepreneurial leadership
that created them in the first place.

‘The
snake that cannot shed its skin must die’ — Friedrich Nietzsche.

(Source: Extracts from an
Article by Shri Ravi Venkatesan, Co-chairman of Infosys in the Times of India
dated 02.07.2017)

4. Others

10. Skill, re-skill and re-skill again. How to keep up with
the future of work?

“Every
five years, your skills are about half as valuable as they were before”

The jobs market is well into the
21st century. So why isn’t our education system?

Today’s jobs are vastly different
than they were a generation ago. All of us, from Gen Zers to Boomers, are
facing a working world that is more changeable and unpredictable than ever.

The days of working for 40 years
at one job and retiring with a good pension are gone. Now the average time in a
single job is 4.2 years, according to the US Bureau of Labor Statistics. What’s
more, 35% of the skills that workers need — regardless of industry — will have
changed by 2020.

That rapid pace of change in jobs
and skills means there is a growing demand to update skills as well. According
to a new report on workforce re-skilling by the World Economic Forum, one in
four adults reported a mismatch between the skills they have and the skills
they need for their current job.

Skills for the wrong century

Here is the problem briefly: the
job opportunities that are available today are 21st century jobs.
However, the way most people perform these jobs is still stuck in the previous
century. As is the way, our society is training and educating people.

In the 19th century, there was a
massive movement of the population from rural to urban centres. The primary and
secondary education system was created to train the workforce for the “new”
world of manual and clerical work in cities.

In the 20th century,
work was dominated by factory jobs. The education system that was built in the
previous century was, with some modifications, still suited to training good
factory workers and their managers. Management focused on a series of tools to
optimize this kind of work: operational efficiency, something called Taylorism,
and eventually some management philosophies called Six Sigma. Management was
mostly done face to face, while health insurance, a social safety net, and
other benefits were bundled into inflexible labour contracts.

Today, in the 21st
century, we are seeing the rise of new work models such as freelancing and
remote work. In the most advanced companies, teams are learning to be more
agile, to work with distributed and remote teams, and to scale up and down to
adapt to ever-changing conditions. This is the future of work.

Yet education has not kept pace.
We still send our children through a fixed set of primary and secondary
education steps, only now a college degree has been added on as a virtual
prerequisite for the best jobs. The model does not actually prepare anyone well
for a flexible world, in which skills are typically outdated by the time you
finish a four-year degree.Further, on-the-job training is not enough to close
the gap. The World Economic Forum report found that 63% of workers in the US
say they have participated in job-related training in the past 12 months. Yet
employers are reporting the highest talent shortages since 2007.

What individuals can do

Given this situation, people in
the workforce should proactively steer their own ongoing skills development. In
other words, recognize that you need ongoing training, and realize that you
hold the responsibility for your own education. Do that and you can improve
your marketability for years to come?

The first step is to ask yourself:
Are my skills still in demand? What is the outlook for these skills? In
addition, what skills could I work on today that would increase my income
potential in the coming years?

Do this exercise every few years?
If the half-life of a job skill is about five years (meaning that every five
years, that skill is about half as valuable as it was before), you want to get
ahead of that decline in value. Assess your own skills every two or three years,
and get started learning new skills sooner rather than later.

For example, if you are a truck
driver, you can see that autonomous vehicles are a likely threat to your
employment — maybe not this year or next year, but certainly within 5 or 10
years. Do not wait until self-driving trucks are a common sight on the highways
to start building skills for your next job. Start doing it this year, so you
will be ready when the time comes.

Do not feel like you have to
retrain yourself completely, all at once. First, as pointed out by the New York
Times this week, many of the skills needed to do fading jobs are applicable to
growing jobs. For skills, you do need to acquire, consider step changes. In
computer science, we are trained to break down large problems into smaller
chunks that can be more easily solved, one at a time. You are not going to turn
yourself from a coal miner into a data miner overnight. Nevertheless, you can
acquire basic skills leading in the direction you want to go.

As your career progresses, make
decisions about which work to take based on how much you will learn. Prioritize
jobs where you will learn valuable new skills.

(Source: World Economic Forum
dated 31.07.2017)

11. Indian Scientist wins Marconi Lifetime prize

Thomas Kailath, who grew up in
Pune and is now an emeritus professor at Stanford, has been conferred the
lifetime achievement award by the US-based Marconi Society. This is only the
sixth time the lifetime award has been given by the prestigious society in its
43-year history.

Kailath has been recognized for
his contributions to information and system science over six decades, as well
as his sustained mentoring and development of new generations of scientists.
Among his many significant contributions is a classic textbook in linear
systems that changed the way that subject was taught.

Kailath and his doctoral student
Arogyaswami Paulraj, currently emeritus professor in the electrical engineering
department at Stanford University, are joint holders of the original US patent
for MIMO (multiple input, multiple output) technology which underpins the
technology that drives every Wi-Fi, 4G, and 5G network today and helps to make
them more efficient. 

The scientist was born in 1935 in
Pune, to a Malayalam speaking family, according to Wikipedia. He studied at St.
Vincent’s High School, Pune, and received his engineering degree from the
Government College of Engineering, University of Pune, in 1956. He received his
Master’s degree in 1959 and his doctoral degree in 1961, both from the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT). He was the first Indian student to
receive a doctorate in electrical engineering from MIT, says Wikipedia.

The Marconi prize has been
instituted by the Marconi Society, which was established in 1974 by the
daughter of Guglielmo Marconi, the Nobel laureate who invented radio. Previous
winners of Indian origin have been educationist and former UGC chairman Yash
Pal in 1980 and Stanford University emeritus professor and wireless antennae
pioneer Arogyaswami Paulraj in 2014. In June, the Marconi Society announced
that Arun Netravali, the engineer- scientist who grew up in Mumbai and
pioneered work on video compression standards, is the awardee for this year.
Kailath and Netravali will be awarded their respective prizes in October.

(Source: The Times of India
dated 15.08.2017)

12. Leadership Quotes

   Jeff Bezos –

     When It’s Tough, Will You
Give Up, Or Will You Be Relentless?”

   Donald Trump

     Think Big and Make It
Happen”

   Larry Page –

If you’re changing the World, You’re working
on Important Things. You’re excited to get up in the Morning”

Miscellanea

1. Economy

 1.      
US defence firms want control
over tech in Make-in-India plan

The US- India
Business Council (USIBC) wrote to India’s defence minister last month seeking a
guarantee that US firms would retain control over sensitive technology — even
as joint venture junior partners.

 (Source:
International Business Times dated 19.09.2017)

 2.      
Crypto crash: Bitcoin nosedives
50% in India in just 13days

Bitcoin and newer
rivals like Ethereum and Litecoin have in recent times been fighting a losing
battle against regulators.

 (Source:
International Business Times dated 19.09.2017)

 3.   KitKat Bets on Weird and Wonderful
Flavor’s in Japan – Cough-medicine-flavored KitKat anyone?

It may not be to
everyone’s taste, but this is just one of 300 weird and wonderful flavor’s
flying off the shelves in Japan, which has become the world’s biggest market
for the four-fingered snack. In true Japanese style, human workers are a rare
sight at one Kitkat factory in Kasumiguara, around 100Km east of Tokyo.
Instead, dozens of robots manufacture four million bars a day at breakneck
speed, from mixing the chocolate paste to wrapping them ready for sale. Kitkats
have been around in Britain since 1935 and only arrived in Japan in 1973. But
the Japanese market has a crucial unique selling point – a huge variety of
different flavours. It all started with a strawberry flavoured Kitkat in 2000
and the range expanded quickly – from flavours aimed at local taste buds such
as sake, green tea and wasabi – to more exotic combinations like melon and
mascarpone.

 (Source:
Economic Times dated 07.09.2017)

 4.      
AI system writes next Game of
Thrones novel

Can’t wait to
find out what happens next in the Game of Thrones? A new artificial
intelligence (AI) system has written the first five chapters of the next book
of the popular fantasy series.

The TV show Game
of Thrones, which is based on the George R R Martin book series A Song of Ice
and Fire, has gained widespread popularity worldwide.

The show’s
seventh season recently aired its last episode, and fans will now have to wait
till 2019 to know what happens to their favourite characters next.

Martin is
currently working on the sixth novel of the book series, The Winds of Winter.

 Zach Thoutt, a
software engineer in the US, trained an AI system to predict the events of the
sixth novel using the characters from the fictional Seven Kingdoms of Westeros.

 “I start each chapter by giving it a prime
word, which I always used as a character name, and tell it how many words after
that to generate,” Thoutt said.

 “I wanted to do
chapters for specific characters like in the books, so I always used one of the
character names as the prime word. There is no editing other than supplying the
network that first prime word,” he said.

  (Source: Business Line dated 15.09.2017)

 5. 
Leadership thoughts

 5.      
 Why wisdom can’t be taught?

 “I cannot teach
anyone anything, I can only make them think” – Socrates

In the pursuit of
wisdom, executives may find themselves taking off their masks to become truly
authentic and reflective leaders.

The day after
becoming the CEO of a company facing turbulent times, David had a dream. In it,
while walking on a beach he discovered a bottle. On opening, a genie appeared
offering him a wish in exchange for her freedom. Eschewing riches, fame or a
long life, David opted for the one thing he knew he needed to help him guide
his people in the best way possible. He chose the gift of wisdom.

In today’s
hyperactive digital age, attaining wisdom is a challenge. With tablets and
phones and their various apps constantly vying for our immediate attention, it
is increasingly difficult to find the time and mental space for making
meaningful connections or engaging in the deep conversations, reflection,
emotional awareness, empathy and compassion, necessary in its pursuit.

Indeed, it is an
unfortunate fact for many leaders in David’s position, that while wisdom
requires education, education does not necessarily make people wise. As
Professor Charles Gragg noted in his classic case study “Because Wisdom Can’t
Be Told”, the mere act of listening to wise statements and sound advice doesn’t
necessarily ensure the transfer of wisdom.

What does it mean to be wise?

People often
equate wisdom with intelligence or being knowledgeable; but all too often, it
becomes apparent that being intelligent and being wise are quite different
things. The world is full of brilliant people who intellectualise without
really understanding the essence of things. In contrast, wise people try to
grasp the deeper meaning of what is known and strive to better understand the
limits of their knowledge.

Wisdom implies
more than merely being able to process information in a logical way. Knowledge
becomes wisdom when we have the ability to assimilate and apply this knowledge
to make the right decisions. As the saying goes, ‘knowledge speaks but wisdom
listens’. Wise people are blessed with good judgement. In addition, they possess
the qualities of sincerity and authenticity, the former implying a willingness
to say what you mean, the latter to be what you are.

Wise people are
also humble; their humility deriving from a willingness to recognise the
limitations of their knowledge. They accept that there are things they will
never know. By accepting their ignorance, they are better prepared to bear
their own fallibility. People who are wise know when what they are doing makes
sense, but also when it will not be good enough. Ironically, it is exactly this
kind of self-knowledge that pushes them to do something about it.

Wisdom can be
looked at from both a cognitive and emotional perspective. Cognitively, wise
people have the ability to see the big picture. They are able to put things in
perspective; to rise above their personal viewpoint and observe a situation
from many different angles (thus avoiding simplistic black-and-white thinking).
From an emotional perspective, people acknowledged for their wisdom are
reflective, introspective and tolerant of ambiguity. They know how to manage
negative emotions, and possess both empathy and compassion; qualities that
differentiate them in an interpersonal context.

Ironically, what
makes wisdom more important than success and riches is that it enables us to
live well. Our mental and physical health flourishes when we are congruent with
our beliefs and values. As Mahatma Gandhi once said, “Happiness is when what
you think, what you say, and what you do are in harmony.” Wise people are
attuned to what constitutes a meaningful life. They know how to plan for and
manage such a life. This implies self-concordance, behaving consistently with
their values, a journey that requires self-exploration, self-knowledge and
self-responsibility.

Age doesn’t make us wiser

So, how can we
acquire wisdom and can we expedite its acquisition? Becoming wise is a very
personal quest. It is only through our own experiences, learning how to cope
with the major tragedies and dilemmas embedded within life’s journey, that we
will discover our own capacities and learn how to create wisdom.

Setbacks are
memorable growth experiences contributing to a deeper understanding of the
vicissitudes of life. Overcoming difficult situations contributes to an
increased appreciation of life and the recognition of new possibilities. These
experiences enable us to rise above our own perspectives and see things as they
are.

Unfortunately,
wisdom is not something that automatically comes with the passing of years.
While older people may be more capable than their younger counterparts, many
never put their life experiences to good use. To acquire the required sense of
reflectivity may necessitate the help of others. Educators, coaches,
psychotherapists and mentors can play a significant role, not only by assisting
with the dissemination of knowledge but by helping those searching for wisdom
work through challenging experiences and encouraging them to work on emotional
awareness, emotional self-regulation, relational skills and mindfulness.

Wisdom and authenticity

A learning
community is also a great place to practice open-mindedness. Encouraging
participants to step out of their comfort zone and to deal with people who are
very different from themselves, leads to a deeper understanding and acceptance
of the ambiguous nature of things. If designed in a holistic manner, these
communities are a great exercise in humility, giving participants a better
awareness of their limitations as well as a greater ability to integrate their
knowledge and experiences when dealing with the challenges ahead.

In their pursuit
of wisdom, group members will be encouraged to learn from their mistakes, to
think before acting and, by taking off their masks, to become more authentic in
living their values.

 (Source: Insead Knowledge – The Business School
for the world)

Miscellanea

1. Economy

6.  Salesforce Is Getting Into Blockchain. Here’s
Why That Matters

Salesforce.com (NYSE:CRM)
CEO Marc Benioff often talks about having a beginner’s mind — trying to view
the world like it’s a new place you’ve never experienced before. That thinking
is leading the company toward developing a blockchain and cryptocurrency
solution that Benioff hopes will be ready for the company’s Dreamforce 2018
software conference this September. For investors, that means Salesforce could
be the latest way to take advantage of the cryptocurrency boom … without
having to buy any bitcoin.

7.  Cryptography  and  
blockchain and  cryptocurrency, oh
my!

Cryptocurrencies are
virtual currencies, and there are lots of them — more than 1,500 as of this
writing. In some ways, they are no different than any other form of currency,
like the dollar or the euro. People agree they are worth something and they can
be exchanged for things of value.

Where cryptocurrencies
differ is that they’re completely digital and decentralized — not controlled
by a central bank or backed by a government. Instead, the currency exists in a
type of public ledger called a blockchain, and that ledger can only be altered
if certain conditions are met. Alterations are made using cryptography, the
science of encoding data to keep it safe from theft or other manipulation.

Cryptocurrencies and the
blockchain technology making them possible have garnered lots of interest and
it’s not surprising Salesforce is looking to create a product for this market.
And Salesforce has had great success starting and quickly growing new business
segments over the years, so the thought of Salesforce becoming a major player
in blockchain technology and cryptocurrency isn’t far-fetched

(Source:
International Business Times dated 19.04.2018)

 

2.  Technology

8.  One plus 6 to launch in Mumbai on May 17

OnePlus has confirmed the
launch of the OnePlus 6 for the Indian market. The company says it will be
hosting the product launch event at the Dome at NSCI, Mumbai on May 17.

OnePlus has confirmed the
launch of the OnePlus 6 for the Indian market. The company says it will be
hosting the product launch event at the Dome at NSCI, Mumbai on May 17. The
launch event will begin at 15:00 and will be live streamed across its official
social channels. OnePlus 6 will start selling in India via Amazon India
starting 12:00 IST on 21 May 2018. However, users should keep in mind that the
sale will be limited to Amazon Prime members.

OnePlus is also giving its
fans a chance to attend the launch event. The entry vouchers to attend the
event will be available via oneplus.in from 10:00 IST on Tuesday, 8 May 2018.
In addition, those who will attend the launch event will get a gift hamper full
of super add-ons and exclusive Marvel Avengers merchandise.

(Source:
The Indian Express dated 26.04.2018)

9.  Why we need to have regulation and
legislation on AI (Artificial Intelligence) and quick

Our laws will eventually
need to be amended or new laws for artificial intelligence technologies and
processes will need to be adopted to fill up existing lacunae.

Artificial Intelligence
(AI) is a global technological wave and there’s no disputing the fact that it
has entered the Indian market. India has not advanced as far as giving
citizenship rights to a robot (case in point –Sophia from Saudi Arabia), but
personalised chatbots have flooded the market, AI has forayed into the medical
stream and it is also being used to protect the cyberspace.

With greater explorations
into the space of AI, the world is moving towards a goal of near-complete
automation of services. The element of end-to-end ‘human involvement’ has been
insisted upon by most AI advanced countries such as Canada, in order to ensure
accountability and security of AI systems. AI is wholly based on data generated
and gathered from various sources. Hence, a biased data set could evidently
lead to a biased decision by the system or an incorrect response by a chatbot.

Pratik Jain, co-founder of
Morph.ai, a Gurgaon-based AI startup, says if the chatbot does not respond
correctly once deployed by the business, a human fallback is provided to
correct the error based on the data generated and provided by the business.

(Source:
The Indian Express dated 26.04.2018)

10.  Amazon Teases Fire TV Cube, A Set-Top Box
Powered By Alexa

Amazon has confirmed the
existence of a new product called “Fire TV Cube.” It’s being speculated that
the upcoming device will be a new high-end Fire TV set-top box that comes with
Amazon’s Alexa voice assistant.

Amazon has set up a new
teaser page that asks visitors “what is Fire TV Cube?” The webpage says that
details about the device will become available soon and visitors will be able
to sign up to receive an update on the upcoming product. Amazon’s new teaser
page was first discovered by AFTVNews, which appears to have already leaked the
device way back in September.

Last fall, AFTVNews posted
a leaked image of a new Fire TV dongle and a cube-shaped Fire TV set-top box.
The dongle turned out to be the 2017 Fire TV, which Amazon officially launched
in October. As for the set-top box, it wasn’t released alongside the new Fire
TV because its release date may have been pushed back to 2018. It’s now being
speculated that the set-top box will be the Fire TV Cube that Amazon is
currently teasing about.

Amazon has not confirmed
anything yet about the Fire TV Cube, but it was previously rumored to arrive
with voice recognition technology, specifically Amazon’s Alexa voice assistant.
The leaked image from last year appears to show the device as having far-field microphones,
a built-in speaker and an LED light indicator. On top, it features buttons for
volume controls, turning off the microphones and a trigger for Alexa. The
device is said to feature an IR (infrared) emitter, which suggests that users
will be able to control it with other IR remote controllers. The device looks a
lot like a cube-shaped Amazon Echo speaker.

It’s being speculated that
the Fire TV Cube will let users have hands-free interaction with Alexa to
search and play video content. Alexa might also be able to provide hands-free
playback control for music and videos. The device is also expected to arrive
with its own voice remote, which features a microphone button to trigger and
interact with Alexa.

One of Engadget’s readers
sent the site scans of a user manual for his Amazon Ethernet adapter. One of
the pages appears to show an illustration of the Fire TV Cube, and it suggests
that the new device will have an HDMI port, a power port and a port simply
marked as “Infrared.” The device also appears to have a microUSB port, which
can only be used for the Amazon Ethernet Adapter.

Amazon didn’t say when
exactly it will unveil the Fire TV Cube. But based on the teaser page and the
device’s appearance in a recent user manual, it seems like the Fire TV Cube
might launch very soon.

(Source: International Business
Times dated 25.04.2018)

Miscellanea

1. Economy

 

10.  U.S., Japan Express Concern Over China’s Interest in Saudi Oil Giant Amarco

 

A plan to list Saudi Aramco in 2018 is on
track. Prince Mohammad has said the IPO, which could be the world’s biggest,
will value Aramco at a minimum of $2 trillion and could raise as much as $100
billion.

 

U.S. and Japan have urged Saudi Arabia to
pursue an international listing for oil giant Aramco, fearing the possible sale
of a stake to China would give Beijing too much sway in the Middle East.

 

Recently Donald Trump has publicly pleaded
with Saudi Arabia to sell shares in its national oil company, Aramco, on the
New York Stock Exchange via tweet. “Would very much appreciate Saudi
Arabia doing their IPO of Aramco with the New York Stock Exchange. Important to
the United States!” It would be interesting to see if the Aramco will give pre
listing stake to China or not. Only year 2018 will give you answer.

 

(Source : Returns and Wall Street
Journal)

 

11. 
Fortune 500 Companies presence in Tax Heaven

 

Tax havens help MNCs in evading the taxes by
different ways and by different means .One of the major companies uses the tax
havens is for corporate tax avoidance; which has enormous impact both on
developing and developed countries. It is difficult for the tax authorities to
track the global companies who are evading taxes in their countries due to lack
of transparency.

 

Multinational firms can artificially shift
profits from high tax to low tax jurisdictions using a variety of techniques ,
such as shifting debt to high tax jurisdictions ,because tax on the income of
foreign subsidiaries (except for certain passive income) is deferred until
income is repatriated (paid to the US parent as a dividend).

 

Interesting facts

 

More than two thirds of the companies
registered in the US (Surface area: nearly 4 million square miles) appear to be
located in the tiny state of Delaware (Surface area: less than 2000 square
miles).

 

Most of America’s largest corporations
maintain subsidiaries in offshore Tax havens. At least 358 companies, nearly 72
percent of the fortune 500 operate subsidiaries in tax haven jurisdictions. All
told these 358 companies maintain at least 7,622 tax havens’ subsidiaries. The
thirty companies with the most money officially booked offshore for tax
purposes collectively operate 1,225 tax haven subsidiaries.

 

Fortune 500 companies currently hold more
than 2.1 trillion in accumulated profits offshore for tax purposes. Just thirty
fortune 500 companies account for 65 percent of these offshore profits. These
thirty companies with the most money offshore have booked 1.4 trillion overseas
for tax purposes. Only fifty seven fortune 500 companies disclose what they
would except to pay US taxes if these profits were not officially booked
offshore. In total these seven corporations public disclosures, the average
rate they have collectively paid to foreign countries on these profits is a
mere six percent indicating that a large portion of this offshore money has
been booked in tax havens.

 

If we apply that average tax rate of six
percent to the entirety of fortune 500 companies they would collectively owe
620 billion in additional federal taxes.

 

(Source: Black Money and Tax Heavens
Book)

 

2.  Social

 

12. 
India’s blind people struggle to recognise new banknotes

 

The government move to change the currency
bills last year has affected the visually impaired. Unlike the previous rupee
bills, the new banknotes are indistinguishable from one another based on their
texture and dimensions. The old 50, 100, 500 and 1,000 rupee banknotes, there
was a discernible size difference of 10mm or more either by length or width, a
distinction that helped most of India’s blind population transact with cash.
Imagine a Rs. 500 Note of a pale grey 150 by 66mm piece of paper and 20-rupee
note a 147mm by 63mm, how the blind person is going to differentiate? There are
more than 4 Million Blind population in India.

 

The Blind Graduates Forum of India, has been
in touch with the Reserve Bank of India (RBI), 
finance minister and prime ministers’ offices, for the past few months
to make representation.

 

India’s Finance Minister Arun Jaitley in his
2014 budget speech had promised more schemes and measures to assist those with
disabilities. The Right of Persons with Disabilities Act passed in 2016
stipulates that various facilities, infrastructure and services be provided in
an accessible fashion. But implementation has so far been uneven. There is
online petition in chage.org, which has got more than 5000 signatures.

 

(Source: TRT World)

 

3.  Technology

 

13. 
Investors are Selling Gold to Invest in Bitcoin

 

According to ACG Analytics US macro strategy
head Larry McDonald, investors have begun to sell gold to invest in bitcoin
through the newly launched bitcoin futures exchange of the Chicago Board
Options Exchange (CBOE)

 

Since September, the value of gold miners
ETF (GDX), the largest gold exchange-traded fund (ETF) in the market, has
fallen by nearly 15 percent. In the past, McDonald noted that the value of gold
ETFs were correlated to the price trend of bond yields. But, this week,
McDonald explained that the decline in the price of gold ETFs was triggered by
the rapid increase in demand for bitcoin.

 

Given bitcoin’s decentralized nature,
transportability, fixed supply, and divisibility, in the long-term, bitcoin
will be able to compete with traditional stores of value such as gold.

 

(Source : newsbtc)

 

14. 
2017 rewind: achievements,  
major   milestone, political and other events in India

 

January

–    2
January – Nuclear-Capable Agni-IV Missile Tested Successfully.

  7
January -Heavy snowfall in Kashmir, Himachal Pradesh and Uttrakhand disrupt
normal life. Heaviest snowfall recorded of two decades at most of the places.

  25
January – UAE delegation led by Shaikh Mohammad Bin Zayed Al Nahyan, Crown
Prince Abu Dhabi visited India to sign 14 agreements including strategic
partnership, defense industries, transport, cyber security and shipping.

 

February

   1
February – Union budget for 2017 – 18 is presented by Arun Jaitley in Lok
Sabha.[7] 92 year old Railway Budget is merged in this budget.

   15
February – ISRO launched PSLV-C37 rocket which put into orbit a record 104
satellites from seven countries.

 

March

  6
March – Indian Navy’s oldest serving aircraft carrier INS Viraat decommissioned
after 30 years of its service.

   11
March – Election result of Legislative election in five states declared by
Election Commission.

  14
March – Manohar Parrikar took oath as the new Chief Minister of Goa.

  15
March – Biren Singh took oath as the new Chief Minister of Manipur.

  16
March – Amarinder Singh took oath as the new Chief Minister of Punjab.

   18
March – Adityanath Yogi took oath as the new Chief Minister of Uttar Pradesh.

 

April

   27
April – Vinod Khanna death, 70, Veteran Actor, Former Minister of State (born
1946), Bladder Cancer.

 

May

   26
May – K. P. S. Gill dead, 82, IPS officer.

 

June

   9
June – India along with archrival Pakistan became full members of Shanghai
Cooperation Organisation.

   17
June – Kochi Metro inaugurated.

   19
June – BJP announced Ram Nath Kovind as its Presidential Candidate for
Presidential Election.

   23
June – ISRO puts 31 satellites including 29 satellites from other countries
through PSLV C-38 successfully.

July

   1
July – Goods and Services Tax (India) launched in India. The India’s biggest
tax reform in 70 years of independence, was launched at midnight of 30 June
2017.

   11
July – Major landslide occurred in Arunachal Pradesh. 14 people died while many
injured.

   17
July – Indian presidential elections were held.

   17
July – BJP led NDA declared Venkaiah Naidu as their candidate for Vice –
President election.

   18
July – Congress protests against Madhur Bhandarkar’s film Indu Sarkar based on
1975 Emergency in India.

   20
July – Ram Nath Kovind won the 2017 Indian presidential election with 65.65%
votes against Meira Kumar, the presidential candidate of the opposition.

   25
July – Ram Nath Kovind took oath as 14th President of India.

   26
July – Nitish Kumar (JDU) resigns as Chief Minister of Bihar, breaking the
coalition with RJD & Indian National Congress.

   27
July – NDA (JDU + BJP) led government comes in Bihar. Nitish Kumar and Sushil
Modi took oath as Chief Minister and Dy. Chief Minister of Bihar respectively.

 

August

   5
August – Venkaiah Naidu won the Indian vice-presidential election with 67.89%
votes against Gopalkrishna Gandhi, the opposition candidate.

   9
August – Maratha Kranti Morcha starts in Mumbai for the demand for reservation
for the Maratha Community in the state of Maharashtra.

   11
August – Venkaiah Naidu took oath as 13th Vice President of India.

   22
August – Supreme Court bans instant triple talaq calling it unconstitutional.
Instructed Central Government to pass law in parliament for triple talaq.

   28
August – Dipak Misra sworn in as 45th Chief Justice of India.

   30
August – Switzerland president Doris Leuthard visited India for bilateral talk.

 

September

  3
September- Nirmala Sitharaman became Defence Minister of India.

   5
September – Narendra Modi on visit of China for 9th BRICS Summit and
Myanmar for bilateral talk and Lucknow Metro inaugurated.

   11–12
September – Belarus President Alexander Lukashenko visited India for bilateral
talk, signed 10 agreements including defense.

   13–14
September – Japan Prime Minister Shinzo Abe visited Ahmedabad for bilateral
talk, signed many agreements including Bullet Train project in India.

 

October

   6
October – FIFA U-17 World Cup kickoff in India

   16
October – 6 Corporaters in Mumbai joined Shivsena leaving Raj’s MNS.

 

November

   1
November – Ashish Nehra retired from International Cricket.

   18
November – Manushi Chhillar won the 6th Miss World crown for India
in Sanya, China.

   29
November – Inauguration of Hyderabad Metro.

 

December

   2
December – Cyclone Ockhi hits Tamil Nadu and Kerala causing 13 deaths.

   4
December – Shashi Kapoor’s death, 79, Indian Veteran Actor.

   7
December – Mani Shankar Aiyar removed from Congress.

   13
December – Rohit Sharma scored third double century in ODIs against Sri
Lanka.[58].

   18
December – Election commission declared result of Himachal Pradesh and Gujarat
legislative assembly election.

 

(Source: https://en.wikipedia.org) _

Miscellanea

1. Economy

 

19. India’s richest one percent corner 73
percent of wealth generation: Survey

 

The richest 1 percent in India cornered 73
percent of the wealth generated in the country last year, a new survey showed
today, presenting a worrying picture of rising income inequality.

 

Besides,
67 crore Indians comprising the population’s poorest half saw their wealth rise
by just 1 percent, as per the survey released by the international rights group
Oxfam hours before the start of the annual congregation of the rich and
powerful from across the world in this resort town. The situation appears even
grimmer globally, where 82 percent of the wealth generated last year worldwide
went to the 1 percent, while 3.7 billion people that account for the poorest
half of population saw no increase in their wealth.

 

The annual Oxfam survey is keenly watched
and is discussed in detail at the World Economic Forum Annual Meeting where
rising income and gender inequality is among the key talking points for the
world leaders. Last year’s survey had showed that India’s richest 1 percent
held a huge 58 percent of the country’s total wealth — higher than the global
figure of about 50 percent. This year’s survey also showed that the wealth of
India’s richest 1 percent increased by over Rs 20.9 lakh crore during 2017 —
an amount equivalent to the total budget of the central government in 2017-18,
Oxfam India said.

 

The report titled ‘Reward Work, Not Wealth’,
Oxfam said, reveals how the global economy enables wealthy elite to accumulate
vast wealth even as hundreds of millions of people struggle to survive on
poverty pay. “2017 saw an unprecedented increase in the number of
billionaires, at a rate of one every two days. Billionaire wealth has risen by
an average of 13 percent a year since 2010 — six times faster than the wages
of ordinary workers, which have risen by a yearly average of just 2
percent,” it said.

 

In India,
it will take 941 years for a minimum wage worker in rural India to earn what
the top paid executive at a leading Indian garment firm earns in a year, the
study found. In the US, it takes slightly over one working day for a CEO to
earn what an ordinary worker makes in a year, it added.

 

Citing results of the global survey of
120,000 people surveyed in 10 countries, Oxfam said it demonstrates a
groundswell of support for action on inequality and nearly two-thirds of all
respondents think the gap between the rich and the poor needs to be urgently
addressed. With Prime Minister Narendra Modi attending the WEF meeting in
Davos, Oxfam India urged the Indian government to ensure that the country’s
economy works for everyone and not just the fortunate few.

 

It also said India’s top 10 percent of
population holds 73 per cent of the wealth and 37 per cent of India’s
billionaires have inherited family wealth. They control 51 per cent of the
total wealth of billionaires in the country.

 

Oxfam India CEO Nisha Agrawal said it is
alarming that the benefits of economic growth in India continue to concentrate
in fewer hands.

 

“The billionaire boom is not a sign of
a thriving economy but a symptom of a failing economic system. Those working
hard, growing food for the country, building infrastructure, working in
factories are struggling to fund their child’s education, buy medicines for
family members and manage two meals a day. The growing divide undermines
democracy and promotes corruption and cronyism,” she said.

 

The survey also showed that women workers
often find themselves at the bottom of the heap and nine out of 10 billionaires
are men. In India, there are only four women billionaires and three of them
inherited family wealth. “It would take around 17.5 days for the best-paid
executive at a top Indian garment company to earn what a minimum wage worker in
rural India will earn in their lifetime (presuming 50 years at work),”
Oxfam said.

 

(Source: newindianexpress.com dated
22.01.2018)

 

 

20. Reward Work, Not Wealth

 

The annual Oxfam survey is keenly watched
and is discussed in detail at the World Economic Forum Annual Meeting where
rising income and gender inequality is among the key talking points for the
world leaders.

 

Last year’s survey had showed that India’s
richest 1 per cent held a huge 58 per cent of the country’s total wealth—higher
than the global figure of about 50 per cent. This year’s survey also showed
that the wealth of India’s richest 1 per cent increased by over Rs 20.9 lakh
crore during 2017, an amount equivalent to total budget of the central government
in 2017–18, Oxfam India said.

 

The report titled ‘Reward Work, Not Wealth’,
Oxfam said, reveals how the global economy enables wealthy elite to accumulate
vast wealth even as hundreds of millions of people struggle to survive on
poverty pay.

 

“2017 saw an unprecedented increase in the
number of billionaires, at a rate of one every two days. Billionaire wealth has
risen by an average of 13 per cent a year since 2010—six times faster than the
wages of ordinary workers, which have risen by a yearly average of just 2 per
cent,” it said.

 

In India, it
will take 941 years for a minimum wage worker in rural India to earn what the
top paid executive at a leading Indian garment firm earns in a year, the study
found. In the US, it takes slightly over one working day for a CEO to earn what
an ordinary worker makes in a year, it added.

 

Citing results of the global survey of
70,000 people surveyed in 10 countries, Oxfam said it demonstrates a
groundswell of support for action on inequality and nearly two-thirds of all
respondents think the gap between the rich and the poor needs to be urgently
addressed.

 

(Source: newindianexpress.com dated
22.01.2018)

 

2.  Technology

 

21.  BSNL,
NTT AT sign pact for future tech, 5G test

 

The agreement is in line with the vision of
the Prime Minister Narendra Modi and Japanese Prime Minister Shinzo Abe to
collaborate on the next generation technologies.

 

(Source: Economic Times dated 20.02.2018)

 

22. Internet
users in India expected to reach 500 million by June: IAMAI

 

Rural India, with an estimated population of
918 million as per 2011 census, has only 186 million internet users leaving out
potential 732 million users in rural India.

 

(Source: Economic Times dated 20.02.2018)

 

23. Blockchain
tech can reduce transaction Costs: FICCI – PWC

 

The next generation blockchain technology
can help in reducing cost of transactions in various government schemes, a
joint report by industry chamber FICCI and consultant firm PwC.

 

“By removing the need for third parties
to manage transactions and keep records, blockchain technology can massively
reduce transaction costs… Leveraging blockchain technology for social benefit
schemes will support the government’s wider policy objectives of
sustainability, thus reducing poverty and generating value for money in public
expenditure,”

 

Blockchain is a digital, decentralised
(distributed) ledger that keeps a record of all transactions that take place
across a peer-to-peer network.

 

In the blockchain technology, the data can
be captured at various location or blocks and all the information captured at
various block can be connected with help of a common link or signature in one
set of information.

 

Additionally, each ‘block’ is uniquely
connected to the previous blocks via a digital signature which means that
making a change to a record without disturbing the previous records in the
chain is not possible, thus rendering the information tamper-proof.

 

Blockchain solutions, if implemented, may
lead to the elimination of intermediaries or middlemen, thereby leading to
improved pricing, decreased transaction fees, thus eliminate issues of
hoarding.

 

(Source: Economic Times dated 20.2.2018)

 

24. A Store of Future – Amazon Go

 

The technology inside Amazon’s new
convenience store, enables a shopping experience like no other — including
no checkout lines. The first clue that there’s something unusual about
Amazon’s store of the future hits you right at the front door. It feels as if
you are entering a subway station. A row of gates guard the entrance to the
store, known as Amazon Go, allowing in only people with the store’s smartphone
app.

 

Inside is an 1,800-square foot mini-market
packed with shelves of food that you can find in a lot of other convenience
stores — soda, potato chips, ketchup. It also has some food usually found at
Whole Foods, the supermarket chain that Amazon owns. But the technology that is
also inside, mostly tucked away out of sight, enables a shopping experience
like no other. There are no cashiers or registers anywhere. Shoppers leave the
store through those same gates, without pausing to pull out a credit card.
Their Amazon account automatically gets charged for what they take out the
door.

 

There are no shopping carts or baskets
inside Amazon Go. Since the checkout process is automated, what would be the
point of them anyway? Instead, customers put items directly into the shopping
bag they’ll walk out with. Every time customers grab an item off a shelf, Amazon
says the product is automatically put into the shopping cart of their online
account. If customers put the item back on the shelf, Amazon removes it from
their virtual basket. 

The only sign of the technology that makes
this possible floats above the store shelves — arrays of small cameras,
hundreds of them throughout the store. Amazon won’t say much about how the
system works, other than to say it involves sophisticated computer vision and
machine learning software. Translation: Amazon’s technology can see and
identify every item in the store, without attaching a special chip to every can
of soup and bag of trail mix.

 

There were a little over 3.5 million
cashiers in the United States in 2016 — and some of their jobs may be in
jeopardy if the technology behind Amazon Go eventually spreads. For now, Amazon
says its technology simply changes the role of employees — the same way it
describes the impact of automation on its warehouse workers.

 

Most people who spend any time in a
supermarket understand how vexing the checkout process can be, with clogged
lines for cashiers and customers who fumble with self-checkout kiosks. At
Amazon Go, checking out feels like — there’s no other way to put it —
shoplifting. It is only a few minutes after walking out of the store, when
Amazon sends an electronic receipt for purchases, that the feeling goes away.
For now, visitors to Amazon Go may want to watch their purchases: Without a
register staring them in the face at checkout, it’s easy to overspend.

 

(Source: nytimes.com dated 21.01.2018)

 

3.  World news

 

25. Future shocks: 10 emerging risks that
threaten our world

 

In the wake of the 2008 financial crisis, we
asked ourselves one question over and over again: why didn’t we see it coming?
It rocked the global economy and threatened to destroy the financial systems
that we rely on. Ten years on, some countries are still picking up the pieces.
The World Economic Forum’s Global Risks Report 2018 says that, in our
increasingly complex and interconnected world, this type of shock may become
more likely. The report explores 10 potential future shocks, including food
scarcity, the extinction of fish, technological breakdowns and another
financial crisis.

 

The report explores 10 potential future
shocks, including food scarcity, the extinction of fish, technological
breakdowns and another financial crisis.

 

 

 

26. Not enough food to go around

 

Extreme weather events are becoming an
all-too-familiar sight. Drought, hurricanes and floods have a major impact on
the global food supply chain. Lower yields in crops lead to rising food prices,
hitting those already struggling to feed themselves.

 

The report argues that, if an extreme
weather event were to coincide with existing political instability or crop
disease, we could see a major food crisis happen overnight.

 

This is a
scenario exacerbated by the inherent “choke points” within the global supply
chain. These are the sections within the chain where a large volume of trade
passes through. Disruption to any one of these could cause immediate global
shortages and price hikes, in turn causing political and economic crises, and
ultimately, conflict.

 

27. The end of trade as we know it

 

Brexit, Trump, protectionist policies, these
are all undermining globalization as we know it. Institutions designed to
resolve trade disputes have become weaker as a result.

The report argues that the continued march
against globalization could lead to multilateral rules being openly breached.

 

Those further along the value chain could
then retaliate, and before we know it the world will be grappling with rapidly
spreading trade disputes.

 

Economic activity, output and employment
could all be adversely affected. But these effects will have a far greater
impact on some people, fuelling further discontent.

 

“Whatever the settled position on global
trade is to be,” argues the report, “more deliberation and consensus-building
would bolster its legitimacy.”

 

28. War without rules

 

21st century warfare will not involve guns
or bombs, but rather cyber-attacks on a massive scale, posits the report.

If a country’s critical infrastructure
systems are compromised by a cyber-attack, leading to disruption of essential
services and loss of life, there would be massive pressure for a government to
retaliate. What if they target the wrong culprit? There is no telling where
this retaliation might lead.

 

Governments need to establish agreed norms
and protocols for cyber warfare, much like those that exist for conventional
warfare today. This would help to prevent conflict erupting by mistake.

 

29. The break-up of the internet

 

If cyberattacks become more likely they
could end up breaking the internet.

 

Nations might build digital walls as they
seek to protect themselves. But this might not be the only reason. Governments
might also choose to do this on the basis of economic protectionism, regulatory
divergence, or censorship and repression. If governments felt they were losing
power relative to global online companies they might also seek to control the
internet.

 

There would be a barrier to the flow of
content and transactions. Technological advancements would slow. While some
might welcome this, others would not. It’s likely that there would be plenty of
illegal workarounds.

 

Perhaps most worryingly, human rights abuses
would likely increase as advances in international monitoring are rolled back.

 

Ongoing dialogue between governments and
technology companies would help to ensure that internet-based technologies
develop in a politically sustainable context of shared values and agreed
responsibilities, suggests the report.

 

(Source: weforum.org)

 
 

 

4.  Sports

 

30. Roger
Federer becomes oldest world no.1 in history

 

Roger Federer added yet another record to
his vast collection when he officially returned to world number one as the latest
ATP rankings were released on 19 February. The 36-year-old beat Andre Agassis
record as the most senior player to reach the summit of the sport.

 

(Source:
International Business Times dated 20.02.2018) 
_

Miscellanea

1. Economy

 

14. 
Why is this Indian online portal and wholesale market listed in
Notorious Markets List by US?

 

IndiaMart.com and Delhi’s
wholesale market Tank Road have figured in the annual American notorious
markets list.

 

The US Trade Representative
(USTR) has released the Notorious Markets List that highlights online and
physical markets all over the world that are allegedly engaged in trading
pirated or counterfeit products and services.

 

China tops the Notorious
Markets List. Indian e-commerce company IndiaMart.com and Delhi’s wholesale
market Tank Road have figured in the list. These platforms are reported to be
engaging in and facilitating substantial copyright piracy and trademark
counterfeiting.

 

Popular online marketplace
IndiaMart has 1.5 million suppliers and more than 10 million buyers. The USTR
states that, among its legitimate listings, the firm allegedly facilitates
global trade in counterfeit and illegal pharmaceuticals. The IndiaMart
disclaims all liability, delays responses and does not facilitate right holder
attempts to remove listings, the USTR alleged.

 

The stakeholders confirm
that Tank Road remains a market selling counterfeit products, including apparel
and footwear, noted USTR. The fake products from Tank Road are also reportedly
found in other Indian markets, including Gaffar Market and Ajmal Khan Road.

 

The USTR list urged India
to take sustained and coordinated action against these marketplaces, including
Tank Road market, previously-listed markets, and numerous other non-listed
markets in its territory.

 

Taobao, which is owned and
created by Alibaba group, is also listed in Notorious Markets List 2017. It is
China’s largest mobile commerce site and its third-most popular website.

 

(Source:
International Business Times dated 13.01.2018)

 

15. 
DELAYED IT Refunds Cost CBDT 58k Cr in 9yrs CAG

 

The central board of direct
tax has incurred an expenditure of over Rs. 58,500 crore in the last nine years
only on interest paid to individuals and corporates for delayed refunds of
excess income tax paid to the department. The comptroller and auditor general
in its, report taxable in parliament on Tuesday has criticised the CBDT and the
revenue department in the finance ministry for not making budgetary provisions
for the interest to be paid on delayed refunds and incurring such expenditure
without the approval of parliament.

 

As in the past no budget
provision for interest on refunds was made in the budget estimates for the
financial year 2016-17 and expenditure on interest on refunds amounting to rs
2,598 crore was incurred by the department in contravention of provisions of
the constitution and in disregard of the recommendations of the public accounts
committee CAG observed.

 

It said an expenditure  of Rs. 58,537 crore on interest payments had
been incurred over a period of last nine years without obtaining approval of
the parliament through necessary appropriation.

 

The CBDT, however, informed
the CAG that on the basis of opinion of the attorney general holding the
current practice of treating interest on refund as reduction of revenue and
with the approval of the ministry of finance recommendations of the PAC were
not accepted.

 

The CBDT classifies
interest on refunds of excess tax as reduction in revenue. However successive
CAG’s  audit reports have commented on
this incorrect practice and observed that the department has failed to take any
corrective action.

 

(Source :
Times of India dated 20 December 2017)

 

2. Technology

 

16. 
Indians consuming over 20x more data than three years ago: IT Minister

 

It’s no doubt that Reliance
Jio’s entry has changed the internet habits of Indians in a significant way,
and the country is already consuming the highest amount of mobile data. On that
note, Union Electronics and Information Technology Minister Ravi Shankar Prasad
told Lok Sabha that the average data usage per subscriber has grown
exponentially over the last three years.

 

Significant growth of
India’s subscriber base combined with affordable 4G and 3G data packs and
affordable smartphones have contributed to the massive data consumption habits
among Indians. According to Prasad, Indians were consuming 70MB on an average
in June 2014 and it spiked to a whopping 1.6GB in September 2017.

 

As a result of this, the
minister noted that a significant growth is recorded in the adoption of digital
payments and electronic delivery of services. The number of e-transactions, as
per e-Taal (Electronic Transaction Aggregation and Analysis Layer) portal, grew
from 241 crore in 2013 to more than 3,013 crore e-transactions in 2017.

 

“The number of digital
payment transactions per month has increased from 60.7 crore in December 2015
to 153 crore in October 2017,” he noted in his reply to Lok Sabha, PTI
reported.

 

The rural areas in India
have also benefitted from this growth. The Common Services Centres or CSCs
bring digital services to various corners of India. Out of 2.71 lakh CSCs that
are active across the country, 1.73 lakh are at Gram Panchayat level, the
report added.

 

Finally, Prasad also
mentioned that the total internet subscriber base increased from 259.14 million
in June 2014 to 429.23 million in September 2017, which includes users in rural
areas as well. Based on TRAI data, the total wireless subscriber base reached
to 1.18 billion, and 498.28 million of those users are from rural India.

 

 (Source: International Business Times dated
4.1.2018)

 

17. 
Where does Google stand on net neutrality front after blocking YouTube
on Amazon devices?

 

Google blocks YouTube
access on Amazon devices, and the consumers stand to lose the most.

 

Google and Amazon are among
the world’s biggest tech companies, but things don’t seem particulary right
between the two tech-giants at the moment. The latest feud in Silicon Valley
became more obvious and public on December 5 when Google said that it would
block its popular video-streaming app YouTube from two Amazon streaming
devices, criticising Amazon for not selling Google’s products on its platform.

 

Google said that it will no
longer offer YouTube app support on Amazon’s screen-based Echo Show smart
speaker and Amazon Fire TV in response to Amazon’s reluctance to sell Google’s
products.

 

In its statement Google
said: “We’ve been trying to reach agreement with Amazon to give consumers
access to each other’s products and services. But Amazon doesn’t carry Google
products like Chromecast and Google Home, doesn’t make its Prime Video
available for Google Cast users, and last month stopped selling some of Nest’s
latest products.”

 

“Given this lack of
reciprocity, we are no longer supporting YouTube on Echo Show and FireTV. We hope
we can reach an agreement to resolve these issues soon,” the world’s
largest internet search titan added.

 

Meanwhile, Amazon had
previously stopped selling many of Google’s hardware products on its e-commerce
platform and since 2015 Amazon has refused to sell Google’s Chromecast video
and audio-streaming dongles.

 

Amazon seems to refrain
from selling Google products that compete directly with its own, such as Amazon
Echo range (which compete with Google Home) and Fire TV (which compete with
Google’s Chromecast).

 

Both Google and Amazon
compete with each other in many areas including cloud computing and selling
voice-controlled smart speakers like the Google Home and Amazon Echo Show. But
both companies are also advocates of net neutrality. Google’s decision to block
YouTube access might be completely based on a business and more importantly a
“product” perspective, but it does raise questions about its position
in the net neutrality debate.

 

In September this year,
Google removed YouTube access from the new Echo Show for “violating terms
of service.” Google had said that Amazon’s implementation of YouTube
blocked what Google considered critical features. This shows that Google wants
to impose its own rules on how YouTube is rendered on Amazon’s devices, but
that doesn’t seem to imply that Google is seeking control. However, by
selectively blocking customer access to open a website, it does bring in net
neutrality into the picture.

 

Amazon said in a statement:
“Echo Show and Fire TV now display a standard web view of YouTube.com and
point customers directly to YouTube’s existing website. Google is setting a
disappointing precedent by selectively blocking customer access to an open
website. We hope to resolve this with Google as soon as possible.”

 

Meanwhile, Google clearly
states that it supports net-neutrality in one of its “Take Action”
blog posts.

 

“Internet companies,
innovative startups, and millions of internet users depend on these
common-sense protections that prevent blocking or throttling of internet
traffic, segmenting the internet into paid fast lanes and slow lanes and other
discriminatory practices,” a blog post by the company reads.

 

“Thanks in part to net
neutrality, the open internet has grown to become an unrivaled source of
choice, competition, innovation, free expression and opportunity. And it should
stay that way.”

 

(Source:
International Business Times dated 4.1.2018)

 

3. Science

 

18. Lava tubes near moon’s north pole
with hidden tunnels may provide access to water.
NASA scientists discover small pits near the lunar north pole that could provide
access to the underground network of lava tubes.

 

A new study suggests that
astronauts may be able to access water hidden under the moon’s surface. NASA
scientists have discovered small pits near the lunar north pole and believe it
could provide passageways to a huge underground network of lava tubes that
could even provide shelter to astronauts and lead them to the water supply.

 

Also Read:
Scientists believe massive ice sheets on Mars could create oxygen for humans

 

The SETI Institute and the
Mars Institute made the announcement about the new discovery after analysing
data NASA’s Lunar Reconnaissance Orbiter (LRO). According to SETI, these pits
could help astronauts find underground water on the moon. These pits are
“sky-lit” entrances to a network leading to huge underground caves
formed millions of years ago.

 

The news pits were
identified on the Philolaus Crater, which is close to the lunar North Pole.
These pits appear as “small rimless depressions, typically 50 to 100 feet
across (15 to 30 meters), with completely shadowed interiors.”

 

“The highest
resolution images available for Philolaus Crater do not allow the pits to be
identified as lava tube skylights with 100 percent certainty, but we are
looking at good candidates considering simultaneously their size, shape,
lighting conditions and geologic setting” said Dr Pascal Lee, planetary
scientist at the SETI Institute and the Mars Institute.

 

The pits are located along
lunar sinuous rilles, which are believed to be lava tubes that were once
underground tunnels filled with streams of flowing lava.

 

Earlier, researchers had
discovered 200 pits on the moon with several identified as skylights, but the
recent discovery is the first published report of possible lava tube skylights
near the lunar north pole.

 

“Our next step should
be further exploration, to verify whether these pits are truly lava tube
skylights and if they are, whether the lava tubes actually contain ice. This is
an exciting possibility that a new generation of caving astronauts or robotic
spelunkers could help address,” Dr. Lee said.

 

“Exploring lava tubes
on the Moon will also prepare us for the exploration of lava tubes on Mars.
There, we will face the prospect of expanding our search for life into the
deeper underground of Mars where we might find environments that are warmer,
wetter, and more sheltered than at the surface.”

 

“This discovery is
exciting and timely as we prepare to return to the Moon with humans” Bill
Diamond, president and CEO of the SETI Institute, said in a statement. “It
also reminds us that our exploration of planetary worlds is not limited to
their surface, and must extend into their mysterious interiors.”

 

(Source:
International Business Times dated 16.1.2018)
_

Miscellanea

1. Economy

6. 
Trump administration makes renewal of H1B visas more difficult

The H1-B and L1 work visas
are majorly used by Indian IT professionals. Currently, the cap on H1-B visas
stands at 65,000, out of which 25,000-35,000 are issued to Indian nationals.

The Donald Trump
administration has reportedly made renewal of non-immigrant visas like H-1B and
L1 more difficult. The new directive from the United States says that the
burden of proof lies on the applicant of the visa even when an extension is
sought.

The US H1-B visa is a
non-immigrant visa, which allows firms to hire foreign workers in specialised
occupations. The H1-B and L1 work visas are majorly used by Indian IT
professionals. Currently, the cap on H1-B visas stands at 65,000, out of which
25,000-35,000 are issued to Indian nationals.

The new restrictions were
made even as External Affairs Minister Sushma Swaraj on Wednesday said that she
had raised the H-1B visa issue with US Secretary of State Rex Tillerson during
their meeting in New Delhi. Swaraj had reportedly asked the US to not do
anything that would adversely affect India’s interests.

(Source:
International Business Times dated 26.10.2017)

7. 
Indian Railways to get 7 lakh metric tonnes of rails to renew old tracks

The decision comes after
reports suggested earlier this month that Indian Railways will spend Rs 1,000
crore over the next six months to replace old and outdated tracks with new
ones.

Indian Railways has sent
out a global tender to get seven lakh metric tonne of rails for revamping old
tracks to ensure safety after several accidents in the recent past.

“So, seven lakh metric
tonne of additional rail (track) is sought to be procured for which a global
tender is already been out on the 12th of October,” said Union
Railways Minister Piyush Goyal.

(Source:
International Business Times dated 26.10.2017)

8.  India projected to
become the third largest aviation market by 2025

IATA expects India to
surpass the UK in 2025. It is projected to add 337 million new passengers in
2036 for a total of 478 million.

All indicators lead to
growing demand for global connectivity. The world needs to prepare for a
doubling of passengers in the next 20 years. It’s fantastic news for innovation
and prosperity, which is driven by air links,” said International Air
Transport Association (IATA) Director General and Chief Executive Officer
Alexandre de Juniac.

The trade association of
the world’s airlines expects India to surpass the UK and become the third
largest airline market with 337 million new passengers for a total of 478
million. China is projected to remain at the top with 921 million new
passengers for a total of 1.5 billion.

(Source:
International Business Times dated 25.10.2017)

2. Technology

 9. 
Samsung Galaxy S8, S8+ Android Oreo update; here’s when Beta Program is
expected go live in US

Samsung is expected to
release Android Oreo Beta Program for Galaxy S8 and the Galaxy S8+ users in the
US next week.

(Source:
International Business Times dated 27.10.2017)
 _

Miscellanea

7.  Re-promulgation of ordinances is ‘fraud’ on
Constitution, says Supreme Court

The Supreme Court on
Monday held that re-promulgation of ordinances by government was
constitutionally impermissible as it amounted to bypass the legislative body
which was a primary source of law making authority in a parliamentary
democracy.

A seven judge constitution
bench held by majority that government’s decision to bring ordinance can be
reviewed by judiciary and said that it was obligatory for the government to
place the ordinance before the legislative body for its approval and
non-placement of ordinances before the Parliament and the State legislature
would itself constitute a fraud on the constitution.

The majority verdict by
Justices A. K. Goel, U. U. Lalit, D. Y. Chandrachud and L. Nageswara Rao held
that “Re-promulgation defeats the constitutional scheme under which a
limited power to frame ordinances has been conferred upon the President and the
Governors.”

“The danger of
re-promulgation lies in the threat it poses to the sovereignty of Parliament
and the state legislatures which have been constituted as primary law givers
under the Constitution. Open legislative debate and discussion provides
sunshine which separates secrecy of ordinance making from transparent and
accountable governance through law making,” it said.

Chief Justice T. S.
Thakur, who was heading the bench, also agreed with majority verdict on the
issue but differed on other aspect. “I am in complete agreement with the
view expressed by my esteemed brother Chandrachud, J. that repeated
re-promulgation of the ordinances was a fraud on the Constitution especially
when the Government of the time appears to have persistently avoided the
placement of the ordinances before the legislature.”

Justice Madan B. Lokur,
however, differed sating “There could be situations, though very rare,
when re-promulgation is necessary”.

The majority verdict,
delivered by Justice Chandrachud said, “The failure to place an ordinance
before the legislature constitutes a serious infraction of a constitutional
obligation which the executive has to discharge by placing the ordinance before
the legislature”

“The laying of an
ordinance facilitates the constitutional process by which the legislature is
enabled to exercise its control. Failure to lay an ordinance before the
legislature amounts to an abuse of the constitutional process and is a serious
dereliction of the constitutional obligation,”it said.
 

The court said that apex
court’s ‘hope and trust’ that law making through re-promulgated ordinances
would not become the norm had been belied by the governments through succession
of re-promulgated ordinances.

It also ruled the
satisfaction of the President under Article 123 and of the Governor under
Article 213 is not immune from judicial review.

“The test is whether
the satisfaction is based on some relevant material. The court in the exercise
of its power of judicial review will not determine the sufficiency or adequacy
of the material. The court will scrutinise whether the satisfaction in a
particular case constitutes a fraud on power or was actuated by an oblique
motive. Judicial review in other words would enquire into whether there was no
satisfaction at all,” it said.

(Source: The Times of
India dated 03.01.2017)

8.  Here’s how to rationalise capital gains tax

A major spin-off a
significantly lower rate of tax on income hinted at by the finance minister
would be the possibility to reorganise the taxation of savings and capital
gains on a rational basis. That basis is to treat as current income liable to
bear tax at the rate appropriate for the relevant income bracket that part of
any capital gain, after indexation in the case of non-financial assets, which
does not get redeployed in new assets. Such a method of taxation would not
penalise portfolio churning across assets, essential for intelligent savings.
Such a reform was proposed in the original Direct Taxes Code of 2009, which had
sought to scrap the distinction between longterm and short-term capital gains
on shares based on the holding period, scrap the securities transaction tax,
and include only that slice of capital gains which is not deployed in any other
capital asset, as part of taxable income.

Indexation benefits, meant
mainly to compute capital gains, are fine. Simply put, there would be no tax on
the gains, say, from the sale of a house if the money is reinvested in shares
and vice versa. The basic principle — to spare the saving asset from tax and
charge a tax only on the income from the asset — is perfect and will make
savings efficient. The government should adopt the so-called exempt-exempt-tax
system wherein all savings will be exempt from taxation at the time of
contribution and accumulation, and taxed at maturity, if not ploughed into
another asset.

For example, the
income-tax law allows investors who make capital gains to invest in NHAI and
REC bonds. The entire gain is exempt if the equivalent amount is invested in
these bonds, subject to an upper limit of Rs. 50 lakh every financial year.
This principle is sound. The EET method is beneficial to investors, given that
it does away with artificial distortions, and raises efficiency and equity in
the tax system. It would also help the government garner more revenues. But for
this to work, the rate of tax has to be low. Taxation should be uniform across
savings products, to prevent inefficient distortions that could lead to say,
housing bubbles.

(Source: The Economic
Times dated 28.12.2016)

9.  Tax dividends in the shareholders’ hands

Taxation of dividends has
become a vexatious issue, needlessly. It should be taxed in the hands of the
investor at the rate applicable to the investor’s income bracket. The finance
minister has indicated that the rate would be lowered in the interest of
economic efficiency and that is welcome. The dividend distribution tax should
be scrapped. To make sure that dividend income does not go under-reported,
companies can be mandated to deduct tax at source at the highest marginal rate
of 30%, leaving it to individuals whose incomes warrant a lower rate of tax to
claim a refund while filing returns. The government has to make the processing
of claims and refunds fast and efficient, that is all.

At present, companies pay
a dividend distribution tax at the rate of 15%. Individuals who receive
dividend income in excess of Rs.10 lakh pay a dividend tax of 10%. So dividends
bear a tax of 25% at most. This is not an equitable way of taxing people.
Company promoters who get the bulk of their income as dividends pay a lower
proportion of their income as tax as compared to employees who receive the bulk
of their income as salaries taxable at the highest marginal rate. Taxing
dividends in the hands of the shareholder would both be fairer and more
revenue-efficient than the current arrangement.

The debate that should
begin on taxing dividends is whether to allow the cost of equity capital the
same deductible expense status as interest, the cost of debt capital. This
would do away with artificial demand for debt — borrowing is tax-efficient,
even if you do not really need that loan — and encourage companies to retain
only as much earnings as they have use for. Uninvested cash surpluses on
company books are a drag on the economy. This, of course, is a global debate..

(Source: The Economic
Times dated 28.12.2016)

10.  Supreme Court lens on funds of over 30 lakh
NGOs

The Supreme Court ordered
the Centre and state governments to scrutinise the accounts of lakhs of NGOs
and voluntary organisations, which together received thousands of crores of
rupees of public funds, and take civil and criminal action against all
organisations misusing the grants.

Taking umbrage at years of
inaction on the part of governments in seeking accountability from NGOs on fund
utilisation, a bench comprising Chief Justice J. S. Khehar, Justice N. V.
Ramana and Justice D. Y. Chandrachud said: “The governments are not aware
of their responsibility to audit the NGOs as provided under the General Finance
Rules, 2005.

We direct the respondents
to complete the exercise of audit and submit a report to the court by March 31
under all circumstances.” The bench authorised the governments to take
punitive action against NGOs and voluntary organisations which failed to provide
proper accounts of public funds received by them.

“In case an NGO is
found to be non-compliant after auditing, it is imperative for the authorities
to initiate civil and criminal action so as to enable the government to recover
the money, apart from punishing those who misappropriated the funds,” the
bench said.

CBI, through additional
solicitor general Tushar Mehta, informed the court that it had so far detected
32.97 lakh registered NGOs and voluntary organisations but less than 10% of
them (3.07 lakh) filed their audited accounts with the Registrar of Cooperative
Societies. CBI was directed to undertake the NGO fund monitoring exercise on a
PIL filed by advocate M. L. Sharma who had accused Anna Hazare’s NGO of
misappropriating funds allotted by Council for Advancement of People’s Action
and Rural Technology (Capart). But the court said the problem of NGOs with no
accountability seemed to be a much larger issue than the Rs. 5 crore grant
given to Hazare’s NGO.

Amicus curiae Rakesh
Dwivedi, with advocate Sansriti Pathak, startled the court by quoting an
independent study by Asian Centre for Human Rights (ACHR). Dwivedi said RTI
replies collated by ACHR revealed that various departments of the Centre had
released Rs 4,756.71 crore as grants to NGOs during 2002-09 and during the same
period, states and Union territories had released   Rs. 1,897.64 crore.

This meant that a total of
Rs. 6,654.35 crore was released to NGOs and voluntary organisations during
2002-09, or an average of Rs. 950.62 crore a year. This figure was worked out
despite key states like Madhya Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh, Odisha, Jammu &
Kashmir, Arunchal Pradesh, Mizoram and Union territories not providing any
information. Dwivedi said it indicated that the actual amount released to NGOs
would be higher. Surprisingly, the Centre did not provide any statistics on the
amount of money it had given to NGOs from the public exchequer.

The bench wanted to put an
end to this lack of financial accountability by NGOs. It ordered the Centre to
frame and submit for the court’s scrutiny a guideline on the procedure for
accreditation of NGOs and voluntary organisations, the manner in which they
should maintain regular accounts and the mechanism to recover misused or unused
funds.

The petition by advocate
M. L. Sharma had been pending in the court for the last five years, a major
part of which was taken by the CBI to gather data on registered NGOs and those
which had complied with the statutory requirement of furnishing audited
accounts. The bench took a decisive action saying: “We cannot allow the
matter to remain in a flux. We must take the case forward as it has remained
stagnant for years”.

(Source: The Times of India
dated 11.01.2017).

Miscellanea

1. Technology

 

11.  China opens its first bank without bankers

 

A state-owned
Chinese bank has opened an automated branch equipped with facial-scanning
software, a virtual reality room, a hologram machine, talking robots and touch
screens for paying utility bills, among other functions. The branch opened last
week in central Shanghai’s Huangpu district and is being hyped as China’s first
“unmanned bank.”

 

Beijing-based China Construction
Bank says the high-tech branch is meant to make banking more convenient,
personalized and efficient. It also reflects growing competition from cashless
payment systems that are giving the banks a run for their money. A robot greets
customers at the entrance and answers questions using voice recognition
software. Clients can swipe their national identification cards to enter the
bank or scan their faces using the bank’s facial recognition device. Machines
inside allow visitors to buy gold, change currency, or scout real estate
investments using virtual reality googles.

 

The bank isn’t totally unstaffed.
Guards still stand sentry, and a room equipped with teleconference software
allows VIP clients to request help from human employees based elsewhere.
“Through the use of facial recognition, even without a human in the loop, the
system can ensure uniqueness of the individual at the time of enrollment and
can verify each time the person conducts a transaction,” said Joseph Atick, a
biometrics expert and chairman of Identity International.

 

(Source:
timesofindia.indiatimes.com)

 

12.  Competition Commission fines Google Rs 136
crore for search bias

 

India’s antitrust watchdog
Competition Commission of India (CCI) imposed a 1.36 billion rupees ($21.17 million)
fine on Google for “search bias” and abuse of its dominant position,
in the latest regulatory setback for the world’s most popular internet search
engine. CCI said Google, the core unit of U.S. firm Alphabet Inc, was abusing
its dominance in online web search and online search advertising markets.

 

“Google was found to be
indulging in practices of search bias and by doing so, it causes harm to its
competitors as well as to users,” the CCI said in a 190-page order.
“Google was leveraging its dominance in the market for online general web
search, to strengthen its position in the market for online syndicate search
services,” the CCI said. However, the CCI said it did not find any
contravention in respect of Google’s specialised search design, AdWords and
online distribution agreements.

 

A Google spokesman said the company
was reviewing the “narrow concerns” identified by the Commission and
will assess its next steps. “We have always focused on innovating to
support the evolving needs of our users. The Competition Commission of India
has confirmed that, on the majority of issues it examined, our conduct complies
with Indian competition laws,” he said. The Indian watchdog’s order is the
latest antitrust setback for Google. Last year, The European Commission imposed
a record 2.4 billion euro ($3 billion) fine on the company for favouring its
shopping service and demoting rival offerings. Google has appealed against the
order.

 

Source: (www.businesstoday.in)

 

13. Tech billionaires
parenting

 

Melinda Gates’ children don’t have
Smartphone and only use a computer in the kitchen. Her husband Bill spends
hours in his office reading books while everyone else is refreshing their home
page. The most sought after private school in Silicon Valley, the Waldorf
school of the  peninsula, bans electronic
devices for the under -11s and teaches the children of eBay, Apple, Uber and
Google staff to make go karts, knit and cook. Mark Zuckerberg wants his
daughter to read Dr Seuss and play outside rather than use Messenger kids.
Steve Jobs strictly limited his children’s use of technology at home. It is
astonishing if you think about it: the more money you make out of the tech
industry, the more you appear to shield your family from its effects.

 

(Source: Alice Thomson in The
Times)

 

14. Twitter urges all users to
change passwords after glitch

 

Twitter urged its more than 330
million users to change their passwords after a glitch caused some to be stored
in readable text on its internal computer system rather than disguised by a
process known as “hashing”.

 

The social network disclosed the
issue in a blog saying it had resolved the problem and an internal
investigation had found no indication passwords were stolen or misused by
insiders. Still, it urged all users to consider changing their passwords.

 

“We fixed the bug and have no
indication of a breach or misuse by anyone,” chief executive Jack Dorsey said
in a Tweet. “As a precaution, consider changing your password on all services
where you’ve used this password.” The blog did not say how many passwords were
affected. A person familiar with the company’s response said the number was
“substantial” and that they were exposed for “several months”.

 

The glitch was related to Twitter’s
use of “hashing” and caused passwords to be written on an internal computer log
before the scrambling process was completed, the blog said. “We are very sorry
this happened,” the Twitter blog said.



(Source: Times of India)

 

15. Facebook to hit e-commerce
market with B2C offering

 

After making inroads into India’s
payments sector via WhatsApp, Facebook is eyeing a larger piece of the
country’s fast-growing ecommerce market where the world’s largest retailers
Amazon and Walmart are gearing up for a direct faceoff.

 

The social media giant is in talks
with several brands and businesses to list on Facebook Marketplace. It will
begin testing business-to-consumer transactions on the marketplace ahead of a
soft launch planned for June, one of them said. Facebook “will build more tools
(on its marketplace) for businesses to upload products and manage inventory and
orders, and will also add payments to it by the end of this year”, the other
person said. “For now, Facebook will start with directing consumers to sellers’
(Facebook) pages or websites.”

 

Facebook launched its marketplace
as a consumer-to-consumer interface in India about six months ago only to
receive a lukewarm response to its attempt at creating a domestic Craigslist,
competing with startups such as Quikr and OLX.

 

India’s online retail sector is
expected to grow to $27 billion this year after registering sales worth $19.6
billion in 2017, estimates Forrester Research. Global retailers are betting
more on the massive growth potential for the fledgling market, which Morgan
Stanley estimates will be worth $200 billion by 2026. Facebook Marketplace is
available in 70 countries and has more than 800 million people visiting each
month to buy and sell goods.

 

(Source: Economic Times)

 

2.  Inspirational

 

16. Writing with thumb and
little finger, boy scores 90.33% in ICSE

 

Liron is a student of Lady Ratanbai
and Sir Mathuradas Vissanji Academy in Andheri East where his mother works in
the administration department. Born with constriction band syndrome,
16-year-old Liron D’Silva had amniotic bands resulting in partially formed fingers
with only two fully developed fingers on the right hand, his thumb and little
finger. However, this congenital defect did not deter Liron from taking his
Class X ICSE examinations without the help of a writer and he secured an
overall percentage of 90.33 with a score of 99 in Maths and 97 in Social
Studies.

 

“It was difficult, but I managed,”
said Liron explaining that he wanted to write his papers himself because it is
often hard to explain to a writer what he is thinking. “I also wanted to get a
good score on my own merit.” His mother Linet D’Silva wrote to the board
explaining Liron’s condition and they granted him extra time, 30 minutes for
every hour. “Liron has never let his disability get in the way,” she said. “He
has 100 per cent attendance in school and even plays sports like lawn tennis
and taekwondo.”

 

Liron is a student of Lady Ratanbai
and Sir Mathuradas Vissanji Academy in Andheri East where his mother works in
the administration department. “He adamantly refused to let anyone else write his
papers for him and has been consistently appearing for his own exams, barring
one time in the ninth standard when a recent surgery had left him in too much
pain to do so,” she said.

 

Growing up with a normal twin
brother, Rion, Liron has found life especially challenging. “But I choose to
view difficulties as opportunities. I want to inspire other people like me to
live life to the fullest,” he says.

 

(Source Indianexpress.com)

 

17.  When Sachin Tendulkar helped Indian
wheelchair cricket team realise its dream

 

Life can be harsh and test
someone’s willpower with all its severity. But if there is perseverance, it can
force open the doors also. Ask Somjeet Singh or Squadron Leader Abhay Partab
Singh.

 

They are part of an Indian cricket
team – the Indian wheelchair cricket team, which successfully completed its
first international tour of Bangladesh. It was their dream to wear the national
jersey but they also needed a
dream merchant.

 

A month back,
36-year-old Pradeep Raj, who is the secretary of the Wheelchair Cricket India
(WCI), was trying to raise funds to the tune of Rs 6.5 lakh so that the Indian
team could travel to Bangladesh for a bilateral series. It was then the idea of
writing to Tendulkar crossed his mind. “Despite my best efforts, I could only
get only one sponsor, who gave Rs 2 lakh. I had knocked many doors for our
wheelchair team but to no avail. I had Sachin sir’s email address as during my
days as a para-athlete (he was a cricketer and then a para TT player), I had
e-mailed him. This time also I mailed Sachin sir asking for help,” Raj
said.


“To my pleasant surprise, his
office got in touch with me within three days and in next few days, he donated
the outstanding Rs 4.5 lakh. Without his help, the Indian Wheelchair cricket
team would have had to cancel their trip to Bangladesh. The financial help
provided by him went a long way in booking air tickets for the 19-member
team,” Raj said.

 

“Some political party and
Actor too donated small amount to play players fees. So for the first time, Indian
players got Rs 20,000 each for playing a tournament,” Raj said. The Indian
team beat Bangladesh 2-0 in the three match series.

 

In wheelchair cricket, the matches
are held in T20 format. They are trying to use lighter balls (used for women’s
cricket). If the wheelchair is used by batsman to obstruct a delivery, then he
is adjudged lbw. The boundaries are at 45 yards.

 

“In the Indian team, there are
different stories. There are players, who have had their legs amputated because
of road accidents. We have players, who are paralysed waist down. There are a
few who have been affected by polio. They have come from all parts of the
country, appeared for trials and got selected. We organised a national
tournament last year and champions were rewarded with cash prize of Rs
50,000,” the secretary said.

 

(Source: Times of India)

 

18.  You will be always loved

 

If you want to be loved then you
have to kill your expectations because expectations are that one thing which
prevents us to holding on to a relationship. Expect from your own self that
what you can do and what you can give to your family, friends and to society.
Without giving, you will get nothing. Make a habit of giving and sharing.

 

Believe me;
giving love is the best feeling in the world. You feel like a complete person.
Nowadays people are so upset because they give nothing and expect everything.
This is wrong thinking. First put then receive. You have to love first then you
will be loved. There is a lack of love around the world. People are so sad because
everybody needs love and people don’t know how to love? Stop searching for
love, be a loving person so that everybody itself attracts towards you. Spread
love, if you want to be loved.

Now the question arises how we can
love. For love, you first need forgiveness. How you forgive and forget your
mistakes easily learn to do so with others. In love, you can be with a person
during his bad times. Encouraging someone, listen to someone’s heart. If you
still can’t do so then never discourage anyone.

 

Listening is an excellent habit.
Giving your time and attention. Believe me if adopt these habits you will be
loved by everybody. Everybody has a lot to speak, more to share but there is
nobody to listen. The more you listen, the more you will come to know the best
out of the person. When you start listening believe me you will be flooded with
friends.

 

Love everybody, every little things
around you i.e Love your bed, pillow, clothes, doors, windows, etc love all
animals, birds, fishes etc. When you fill yourself with love for others, others
will also full of love for you and you will be delighted.

 

Have you noticed one thing that we
usually love children than to adults, puppy instead of dogs, kittens instead of
cats. You know why? Because kids are innocent, free from jealousy and full of
love. Nobody teaches them how to love, smile, laugh etc. Kids don’t even know
the word hatred. Let’s be like a child for being loved.

 

Put smile on your face and be
positive. Now ask one question to yourself that what kind of person do you like
the most? Mine answer is I like those who always smile, polite, truthful,
honest, decent etc. So be the person you want to be with than how can people
ignore you. You will always be loved.

 

Be yourself, be polite and
generous. These are some qualities which attract Almighty as well. Why to only
being loved by world. Why not by Almighty as well. God’s love is true love. He
expects nothing and gives everything we need. So you can also be God for
others. Fulfill people’s need if you can and share gifts. We feel so delighted
when we are gifted so the people feel. Make a habit of giving gifts to your
loved one. I wish all of you to be loved throughout your life.

 

(Source: sunnyskyz.com)


MISCELLANEA

1. Economic

8. These Are the Best Countries to Live and Work in—And to
Boost Your Salary

 

Moving abroad boosts the average worker’s income by $21,000,
with the best-paid staff found in Switzerland, the U.S. and Hong Kong. That’s
the conclusion in a survey showing that 45 percent of expats said their
existing job paid more internationally and 28 percent changed locations for a
promotion. In Switzerland, famous for both sky-high mountains and prices, the
annual income boost totaled $61,000. Expat salaries there averaged $203,000 per
year — twice the global level.

 

In HSBC’s annual Expat Explorer, Singapore topped the ranking
as best place to live and work for a fourth straight year, beating New Zealand,
Germany and Canada. Switzerland ranked only eighth, with the high cost of
raising children and difficulty making friends going against it. “Singapore
packs everything a budding expat could want into one of the world’s smallest territories,”
said John Goddard, head of HSBC Expat. Sweden, one of the world’s most
gender-equal countries, got top billing for family, while New Zealand, Spain
and Taiwan led the way in the experience category.

 

Despite the cultural, financial and professional advantages
of moving abroad, the survey of 22,318 people uncovered that women trailed on a
variety of metrics.

 

While relocating boosted women’s income by roughly 27 percent
— topping the increase experienced by men — only about a quarter moved to develop
their careers, compared with 47 percent of their male counterparts. Just half
worked full time, and the overall level of education was somewhat lower.
Women’s average annual salary was also $42,000 lower than men’s.

 

(Source: Bloomberg – By
Catherine Bosley, 11 October 2018)

 

9. Rupee has slipped way too much and needs to be reined in

 

The oldest trick in the high school debater’s book is to make
the opponents’ propositions appear so risible that the judges are left
wondering whether the debate should be taking place at all. Some of the
defenders of unchecked depreciation of the rupee have adopted this tack. They
claim, for instance, that the case for a more managed currency is based on the
perception that the rupee is a symbol of ‘national pride’. I am, however, yet
to find any evidence of this uber-nationalism among economists who ask for
closer currency control.

 

Others have defended depreciation as a process of the
currency ‘finding its own level’ and cautioned against meddling too much in the
natural order of things. To me, this dogma in its most extreme could involve
gross oversimplification and misreading of the forces and mechanisms that drive
the rupee. The public debate on the rupee is not a high school competition, and
the arguments for and against a more active management have to rise above
adolescent tactics of point-scoring. So, let’s have a more meaningful
conversation.

 

Time for Practicals

Of the myriad things that make a currency market different
from an elementary textbook model (where demand and supply curves dutifully
intersect and price finds its own level), the one that needs to be emphasised
is the role of expectations in influencing market participant behaviour.

 

Throw in active speculation on the rupee in the offshore
non-deliverable forwards (NDF) market (any forex trader would corroborate its
massive influence on local rates), and you have a situation where bets on the
future hold the key to the rupee’s trajectory. So, any meaningful debate on a
‘hands-off ’ strategy must address the following questions. Does the free play
of forces in such a complex market bring the rupee close to a ‘desirable’
level? Or does it instead breed expectations that can take the currency further
and further away from it?

 

Should we try instead to manage these expectations to bring
the currency closer to this desirable level? What happens to the cost of
servicing external debt with this large depreciation? What is the future of the
nascent corporate debt market if overseas investors sense that policymakers are
indifferent to the future of the currency even in the throes of acrisis? Is our
domestic financial system with its problems of stressed assets and capital
shortage adequate to fund our growth needs? Let me add a couple of more
queries. How quickly can the current account compress on the back of rapid
depreciation?

 

Let’s take a recent
example from our neighbourhood. In the first bout of depreciation of emerging
market currencies that started in March this year, the Philippines Central Bank
chose to let the market guide its currency, the peso.

 

The result: high inflation without any noticeable rise in
exports that ultimately forced four policy rate hikes in quick succession. Are
we letting ourselves into the same trap by ignoring strong input price
inflation led by oil prices simply because food prices are soft?

 

The issue of the current account brings me to the point that
the ‘free depreciators’ champion: the overvaluation of the rupee. Yes, going by
simple real effective exchange rate (REER) measures, the rupee would have to
fall to around 72 or 73 to the dollar to correct for overvaluation. But is the
simple REER — which focuses entirely on trade competitiveness — necessarily be
the best measure of fair value?

 

REERing its Head

Let’s face the fact. We will continue to have a current
account deficit (CAD) if we have an economy where domestic demand is the
principal driver. That’s not necessarily a bad thing, but it means that we need
to get foreign capital to fund it.

 

If the capital account does matter, should the fairness
metric focus on trade alone? Don’t we, in the process of chasing trade
competitiveness, risk the possibility of chasing capital away? Instead,
shouldn’t the valuation measure bring balance trade (or current) account
competitiveness with capital account ‘attractiveness’? Fortunately, we don’t
really need a Nobel Prize-winning research breakthrough for this.

 

The textbook prescription of adjusting REER by productivity
differentials (usually proxied by per-capita GDP) does the trick. It partly
reduces the impact of higher inflation in India more than its trading partners
do by factoring in India’s growth advantage over its trading partners or
competitors. It might be good to remind ourselves that higher growth (usually
associated with higher interest rates) remains somewhat the strongest magnet
for capital. The adjusted REER would show a fair value of a little less than
Rs. 70 to the dollar. Going by this, the rupee has indeed slipped excessively
much and needs to be reined in.

 

I lay no claim to have the correct answers to the many
questions I have raised here. Perhaps a freer float for the rupee is the best
way forward. However, I am sanguine about a couple of things. Money will get
even tighter in the global financial system.

 

There is a vicious trade war between two global superpowers,
and the oil market is in the fragile balance. So, it would be risky to assume
that the recent respite in the rupee’s fall will last. Secondly, I need
convincing answers to some of my queries to switch sides. That, I hope, is a
fair demand

 

(Source: Economic Times, 24 October 2018)

 

2.  Business

10. Facebook News: After Oculus Co-Founder Departs, Company
Says New Oculus Rift Still Coming

 

Facebook drew headlines on 22 October 2018 when Brian Iribe,
the co-founder and former CEO of Oculus VR, announced his departure from the
social media giant. The news was also accompanied by reports that Iribe left
because Facebook canceled an upcoming successor to the Oculus Rift headset,
which Facebook has denied, according to TechCrunch.

 

Iribe’s exit was announced in a Facebook post, which included
his intent to “recharge, reflect and be creative.” However, TechCrunch reported
that Facebook’s cancelation of the so-called Oculus Rift 2 may have played a
part in his decision. In response, Facebook told TechCrunch that there will be
another version of the Rift headset.

“While we can’t comment on our product roadmap specifics, we
do have future plans, and can confirm that we are planning for a future version
of Rift,” Facebook’s statement said.

 

Oculus makes a few different VR headsets. Rift was the
original, and is still the most expensive, as it must be wired to a high-end
gaming PC to function. In return, it can play the widest variety of VR
experiences. Oculus Go and the recently announced Oculus Quest are wireless and
cheaper, but do not support as many applications.It is possible the specific
Rift follow-up Iribe worked on was indeed canceled, but Facebook still plans to
support the higher end of the Oculus lineup down the road.

 

Iribe would not be the first founder of an acquired property
to leave Facebook after reports of internal tension. Instagram co-founders Mike
Krieger and Kevin Systrom left Facebook at the end of September, and reports
indicated there were disagreements between them and Facebook executives about
the future of Instagram.

 

WhatsApp co-founders Brian Acton and Jan Koum also left the
company in 2017 and 2018, respectively. Acton recently admitted to
disagreements with Facebook about the monetisation of WhatsApp.

 

(Source: International Business Times – By Alex Perry, 23
October 2018)

 

Miscellanea

1. Technology

 

1.      
When will ultrafast internet
5G come to your phone?

 

A surge in mobile-data
demand worldwide has more and more people asking when they will get that speedy
next-generation 5G mobile service. Companies are wondering, too, since 5G has
the potential to revolutionise everything from self-driving cars to robotic
surgery. Mobile providers are racing to patent technologies that will form the
industry standards and build working networks. Yet not all nations are
embracing the push with equal vigor. And concerns about China’s ability to use
5G equipment to spy on other nations may limit its manufacturers’ ability to
profit from the world’s next mobile upgrade.

                      

5G simply stands for
fifth-generation mobile networks or fifth-generation wireless systems. It will
be the successor to 4G, the current top-of-the-line network technology first
introduced commercially in 2009. 5G could end up being 100 times faster than
4G, with speeds that could reach 10 gigabits per second.

 

South Korea showed off the
world’s first commercial use of 5G at the Pyeongchang Winter Olympics in February.
China started trials in more than a dozen major cities this year. In the U.S.,
Verizon Communications Inc., will offer the first 5G internet and TV service in
five cities — Houston, Indianapolis, Los Angeles, and Sacramento, California —
beginning Oct. 1. Verizon will provide the service via portable hot spots
called pucks.

 

These are not standard 5G
gear, though Verizon says it will switch to standardised equipment when it
becomes available. AT&T Inc., says it will be the first with a standards-based
service; later this year it will test 5G devices in Atlanta, Dallas, Waco,
Texas, and two North Carolina cities, Charlotte and Raleigh.

 

5G mobile tests also need
special handsets, transmission hardware and software and a system design that
does not interfere with 4G and 3G networks. And governments need to set aside
mobile spectrum space for 5G. The equipment is being built. China’s Huawei
Technologies Co. Ltd., says it has about 50 contracts with wireless carriers to
test its equipment. Nokia and Ericsson AB each have $3.5 billion contracts with
T-Mobile US Inc. Some telecommunication companies are looking to join forces to
provide more money and reach to develop 5G networks.

 

T-Mobile has promised to
invest $40 billion in a 5G network that will reach 90 percent of the U.S.
population by 2024. But claims are easy to make and trials are easy to pull
off. The real test will be the first field deployment serving large numbers of
customers in a technically challenging urban area. No provider has yet implemented
that kind
of network.

 

(Source
www.financialexpress.com)

 

2.      
Facebook is hiring human
rights policy director to promote peace and prevent conflict.

 

In the recent years,
Facebook has faced severe criticism for its failure to take greater
responsibility for the spread of hate speech and fake news on its platform.
Despite knowing the fall outs of the impact of its platform, the company has
failed to take substantial measures to solve the problem and minimise the
damage. But things are changing and in one of the many measures aimed to
improve the present situation, Facebook has decided to hire a Director of Human
Rights Policy to promote peace and build strong communities. “We are looking
for a Director of Human Rights Policy to coordinate our company-wide effort to
address human rights abuses, including by both state and non-state
actors,” the company wrote in a job listing on its page.

 

The human rights policy
director will hold a critical position at Facebook and will be expected to
perform a number of tasks including- ‘coordinating and advising the company’s
teams working on human rights, conflict prevention, peace-building, and related
projects’; ‘working with Product, Public Policy, Community Operations, and
Security teams to identify and work to disrupt actors that seek to misuse its
platforms and target its users and support those using our platforms to foster
peace-building and enable transitional justice’; ‘working within Facebook’s
Product Policy team to formulate policies that govern user, advertiser, and
developer behavior on its platform’; and ‘representing the company in meetings
with politicians, policymakers, NGOs and civil society groups’ among other
things.

 

In the recent times,
Facebook-owned WhatsApp has been criticised for spreading misinformation which
in turn has led to mob lynchings across the country and death of over a dozen
people. In Myanmar, the social media giant has been accused of ethnic cleansing
of Rohingya Muslims. The company’s role in spreading hate speech against the
Muslim minority in Myanmar had also been cited by the UN investigators.
Meanwhile, in the Philippines, the company stands accused of playing an
important role in the election of President Rodrigo Duterte, who is accused of
covering up at least 12,000 extrajudicial state-sponsored killings since he
assumed the office. The platform has also been used by “keyboard warriors”
in Libya to hunt and kill their enemies.

 

These are some of many incidents
where Facebook’s platform has been used for violence. At a time when Facebook
is struggling to keep its head above the water and prevent its platform from
being misused, the appointment of a human rights policy director shows is one
of the many steps that the company is taking to fix its platform. More
importantly, it represents a serious effort on part of the company in fixing
everything that is wrong with its platform.

 

(Source:
www.indiatoday.in)

 

3.      
Can health services handle
the Apple Watch?

 

When Apple announced two
major new healthcare features this week, it billed them both as terrific
innovations that may well keep us alive. Later this year, Apple Watch will be
able to automatically call emergency services if it detects you have suffered a
fall and are no longer moving. And it will also let you know if you have heart
problems and should perhaps visit your doctor as soon as possible. Other
devices have offered similar functions in the past, albeit in less elegantly
presented gadgets. But with an estimated 50 million Apple Watches out there
already, there are concerns about the pressures it may bring to
already-strained healthcare systems.

 

The result may be even more
calls to emergency services and, according to one of Britain’s leading
surgeons, a new wave of technology-driven hypochondria. “Medical
professionals will also need to be vigilant to the risk of misdiagnosis and
overtreatment that this proliferation of personalised health information could
bring,” said Richard Kerr, chairman of the Royal College of Surgeons’
commission on the future of surgery.

 

(Source:
www.bbc.com)

 

2.  World News

 

4.      
Tax haven link to rainforest
destruction and illegal fishing

 

Some 68% of the investments
tracked in the Amazon came from companies based in countries where no tax is
paid. The analysis shows that of the almost $27bn of foreign capital that was
transferred to key companies involved in beef and soy production in the Amazon
between 2000 and 2011, more than $18bn was transferred from tax haven
jurisdictions. The biggest provider for these activities was the Cayman
Islands. “It is not illegal!” said Victor Galaz, the study’s lead
author, from the Stockholm Resilience Centre. “This is part of the
internal financing of companies, but we need a better assessment of the
environmental consequences of the uses of tax havens both legal and
illegal.” “What we can see in the data, in these sectors there are
subsidiaries placed in tax havens that are providing loans to activities in
Brazil and the Amazon. That you can see.”

 

When it comes to illegal
fishing, around 70% of known vessels are registered in tax havens. Illegal,
unreported and unregulated fishing is also a major blight on the oceans of the
world but according to this paper, the vast majority of the boats involved are or have been flagged under a tax haven
jurisdiction, in particular Belize and Panama.

There is a bit of a double
whammy going on when it comes to illegal fishing as these tax havens are often
what are known as ‘flag of convenience’ states – meaning essentially that the
governments in these countries do not prosecute if the ships on their register
are involved in illegal activities.

 

“The global nature of
fisheries value chains, complex ownership structures and limited governance
capacities of many coastal nations, make the sector susceptible to the use of
tax havens,” says co-author Henrik Österblom, also from the Stockholm
Resilience Centre.

 

While the Paradise Papers
and the Panama Papers exposed how wealthy individuals and companies dodged
personal and corporate taxes, this new study claims to be the first to show
that tax havens have a significant environmental impact as well.

 

(Source:
www.bbc.com)

 

5.      
Amazon chief Jeff Bezos
gives $2bn to help the homeless

 

Jeff Bezos, the founder and
chief executive of Amazon, is well on his way to becoming the richest person in
the world, with a net worth of more than $80 billion. What’s less certain is
what he plans to do with his fortune, and how he could reinvent philanthropy.

 

After
questions from The New York Times about the level of his giving, Mr. Bezos
posted on Twitter a “request for ideas” for philanthropy. “I’m thinking about a
philanthropy strategy that is the opposite of how I mostly spend my time —
working on the long term,” he wrote. “For philanthropy, I find I’m drawn to the
other end of the spectrum: the right now.”

 

Citing a homeless program
in Seattle, Amazon’s hometown, that the company is working with, he said he was
seeking to help people “at the intersection of urgent need and lasting impact,”
adding, “If you have any ideas, just reply to this tweet…”

 

Mr. Bezos, who owns about
17 percent of Amazon, has enjoyed what could be the most rapid personal-wealth
surge in history. As Amazon’s share price has more than tripled since 2015, its
leader has added more than $50 billion to his net worth, bringing his current
total to nearly $83 billion, according to the Bloomberg Billionaires Index. He
is now less than $7 billion shy of taking the title of the world’s richest
person from Bill Gates, who has held the crown for 18 of the past 23 years.

 

(Source:
nytimes.com)

 

3.  Survey

 

6.      
Indian demi-billionaires to
rise by 70% by 2022

 

The analysis highlights
that in five years time the number of demi-billionaires in Asia will overtake
those in North America for the first time. As the list of wealthy Indians with
over USD 500 million or more in assets grows, the number of demi-billionaires
is poised to grow by 70 per cent by 2022. According to a report by Knight
Frank, India, which had 200 demi-billionaires in 2017, this number is slated to
increase to 340 in 2022. “Prime residential markets in cities such as
Mumbai and Delhi have remained largely stable in the last five years, which
creates a good entry opportunity for buyers. The increase in number of
demi-billionaires clearly underscores the potential for demand and price growth
going forward,” the report said.

 

The analysis highlights
that in five years’ time the number of demi-billionaires in Asia will overtake
those in North America for the first time. Wealth data specialists Wealth-X
predict that there will be almost 3,000 people based in Asia who have more than
USD 500 million in assets by 2022.

 

“Strong global
economic growth, as well as rising asset prices as key drivers behind the
growth in the world’s demi-billionaire population. By 2022, Wealth-X
anticipates that there will be 9,570 demi-billionaires worldwide, up from 6,900
at the end of 2017,” it said.

 

(Source:
Moneycontrol.com)

 

7.      
More Indians plan to take
time off from work and take vacation in 2018

 

A survey conducted by Ipos
showed that a majority of Indians polled (83 per cent) said they will be
spending at least one week away from home on vacation in 2018. This is three
points higher than the previous year. “Companies are encouraging employees to
take a break and return rejuvenated,” said Parijat Chakraborty, executive
director, Ipsos Public Affairs.

Some other markets seeing a
significant increase over 2017 in those planning to go on vacation include
Turkey (74 per cent, up nine points), China (62 per cent, up eight points), and
Sweden (72 per cent, up six points). Some other markets experiencing a similar
upsurge compared to the previous year include Australia (53 per cent, up seven
points), France (66 per cent, up five points), and Saudi Arabia (81 per cent,
up five points).

 

Most Indians plan to use up
their entire entitled vacation days in a year. More Indians plan to use up
their entire quota of leave (72 per cent, up five points), compared to 2017,
the survey said. Those saying no to work emails and messages during vacation
has also seen a significant jump in 2018. More Indians are choosing to unplug
from work emails and messages (54 per cent, up five points), as against 2017.

 

Indians learning to switch
off from work while on vacation is a welcome change. With support from their
teams, it is becoming easier to disconnect as its business as usual,
otherwise,” Chakraborty added.

 

(Source:
www.business-standard.com)

MISCELLANEA

1.  Economy

 

1.   1.   
Startups cheer as rule changes ease path for receiving new investments

 

CBDT clarifies relief like an increase in the limit
to Rs 25 crore and raising of benefit period to 10 years will be available from
February 19.

 

Indian startups are cheering the bonanza of the
proposed implementation of the recent changes to the ‘angel tax’ from February
19. The Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (DPIIT) has
announced new norms including a change in the definition of startups to help
budding entrepreneurs to benefit from the full range of the angel tax
concession, media reports say.

 

The new norms that the Central Board of Direct
Taxation (CBDT) has issued raise the limit of investments that can benefit from
angel tax norms to Rs 25 crore. The angel tax is the income tax payable on
capital unlisted companies raise through the issue of shares where the share
price is in excess of the fair market value of the shares sold. The excess
realisation is treated as income and taxed accordingly. The angel tax was first
introduced in the 2012 Union Budget by then finance minister Pranab Mukherjee
to tackle money laundering. The tax has come to be called angel tax because it
mostly affects angel investments in startups.

 

The CBDT will implement the detailed framework the
DPIIT has formulated for which it recently issued a new clarification,
according to a report in The Economic Times. The CBDT has said section 56
(2)(viib) of the Income Tax Act prescribing the angel tax will not apply to
consideration in excess of the fair value of shares issued to an investor if
the funds had been received in accordance with the DPIIT’s conditions. In the
past, the amount a startup raises by the issue of shares in excess of the fair
market value was being deemed as income from other sources liable to be taxed
at 30 per cent, deterring angel investors.

 

The new provisions have also raised the investment
limit for a startup to seek exemption under the section to Rs 25 crore from Rs
10 crore. The startups would also be able to avail themselves of the tax
benefits for up to 10 years as against seven years earlier, according to
reports. The only condition is that the startup will have to submit a
self-declaration about the use of the raised amount to the DPIIT, which will be
forwarded to the CBDT.

 

“……this was a procedural notification which the
CBDT was required to issue to put in place the mechanism for claiming benefit
given to startups by the earlier DPIIT notification. Startups are elated the
notification came at a time when many said they had received notices under
Section 56(2)(viib), adversely affecting their businesses. The CBDT has
reportedly directed the field staff to clear the proceedings if the tax demands
have been raised.

 

(Source: International Business Times – By
Prathapan Bhaskaran, 8 March 2019)

 

2.    2.  
Government completely bans import of solid plastic waste to fight pollution

 

It is to be noted that China had banned such
imports a few years ago, in the meanwhile India became one of the largest
importers of plastic waste.

 

The central government has now completely banned
the imports of solid plastic waste/scrap into the country. The decision has
been taken to fight the ever-growing plastic waste in India. As per the
official data, the country generates 25,940 tonnes of plastic waste daily. In
the past, such imports were partially banned as only the special economic zones
(SEZ) were allowed to import such solid wastes. Additionally, the government
had also allowed the imports of plastic waste/scrap by export-oriented units
(EOUs) which used to procure it from abroad as post-recycling resources.

 

Quoting one of the environment ministry officials,
national daily, the Times of India reported that keeping up with India’s
commitment to completely phase out single-use plastic by 2022, the government
has now entirely banned the imports of solid plastic waste. He added, “The
country has now completely prohibited the import of solid plastic waste by
amending the Hazardous Waste (Management & Trans-boundary Movement) Rules
on March 1.” He further said that the rules were changed because of the huge
mismatch between waste generation and recycling capacity in the country.

 

It is to be noted that China had banned such
imports a few years ago. Meanwhile, India became one of the largest importers
of plastic waste. In India, many companies were misusing the partial ban on the
pretext of being in an SEZ. The country lacks the adequate capacity to recycle
plastic waste and it is because of this reason a huge amount of such wastes
remains uncontrolled. This eventually causes heavy damages to soil and water
bodies. A study conducted by the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) shows
that out of 25,940 tonnes of plastic waste per day around 10,376 tonnes remains
uncollected. The figures are astonishingly high as it is almost 40 per cent of
the total waste generated.

 

The ministry has made changes in the existing
rules, now white category (practically non-polluting or very less polluting) of
industries will dump their hazardous wastes generated to authorised users,
waste collectors or disposal facilities. Since its inception in 1950, global
plastic production has increased exponentially, from 2 million tonnes to 380
million tonnes in 2015. Its sheer convenience — lightweight and durability –
has made this man-made material present in every sphere of human existence. In
the last 70 years, 8.3 billion tonnes of plastic have been produced.

 

(Source: International Business Times – By Ashesh
Shukla, 7 March 2019)

 

3.    3.  
Cross-border insolvency law changes to boost ease of doing business in India

 

A separate section in the Insolvency and Bankruptcy
Code (IBC) modelled after international best practices will help partners in
foreign tie-ups.

 

A proposal by the Narendra Modi government to tweak
the bankruptcy law to tackle cross-border insolvency is expected to boost the
country’s ease of doing a business ranking, media reports say. India made huge
strides in the World Bank’s Ease of Doing Business ranking to reach 77th
spot among 190 countries in 2018 from 100 in 2017.

The government proposes to bring about the changes
through an ordinance amending the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC) and
adding a chapter on cross-border insolvency, a report said. The amended law is
aimed at giving comfort to foreign investors in India and vice-versa. The new
law will reduce the time for exchanging information with another country,
encouraging foreign investors and multi-lateral agencies such as the World
Bank.

 

A panel headed by Corporate Affairs Secretary
Injeti Srinivas recommended using the model law formulated by the United
Nations Commission on International Trade Law, known as the UNCITRAL model,
which has been accepted by 44 nations including some from where India’s major
investments originate like the US, the UK and Singapore. A cabinet nod for the
new law is soon expected, according to a report in Business Standard.

 

In view of the general election 2019 in a couple of
months, only the next government may introduce a bill in parliament. Such
cross-border insolvency provisions empower foreign creditors to get back money
lent to Indian corporate entities. The reciprocity of the law makes it easier
for Indian companies to claim their dues from foreign companies. The
cross-border insolvency provisions in sections 234 and 235 of the IBC have not
yet been notified and cannot be enforced. The amended law will replace the
provisions and make the Indian law up to international best practices.

 

The government is aware of the limitations of any
law handling cross-border insolvency because in the case of some foreign
governments bilateral treaties are required for effective execution, an
unidentified official in the Ministry of Corporate Affairs told the newspaper.

 

Such treaties take a long time finalising as each
one is different and all through the protracted negotiations, foreign investors
will be uncertain of the provisions. The ambiguity will also affect Indian
courts and the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT), which have to handle each
case separately.

 

The compulsion for an altogether separate section
for handling insolvency of cross-border investors is to make the law more
comprehensive based on a global model so to encourage its global acceptance.
The new law will revolutionise the key aspects of cross-border insolvency
litigation. The law will give direct access to foreign insolvency professionals
and foreign creditors to participate in or commence domestic insolvency
proceedings against a defaulting debtor. Under the law, foreign proceedings and
remedies will find acceptance in Indian courts. It will enable cooperation
between domestic and foreign courts and domestic and foreign insolvency practitioners
as also coordination between two or more concurrent insolvency proceedings in
different countries, according to sources.

 

(Source: International Business Times – By
Prathapan Bhaskaran, 5 March 2019)

 

2.  Science

 

4.    4.  
New study finds evidence of extraterrestrial life on Mars; could revolutionise
future space missions

 

The discovery of alien life on Mars is expected to
revolutionise future Mars missions and planetary colonisation projects.

 

Conspiracy theorists including popular
extraterrestrial researcher Scott C Waring have been long alleging that alien
life might be thriving or might have thrived on Mars. Adding heat to these long
spanning claims, a new study published in the Journal of Astrobiology and Space
Science has suggested the possible presence of alien life forms on the Red
Planet.

 

As per the new study report, NASA’s Curiosity Rover
has snapped images of fungi and algae on Mars. Even though NASA has not
admitted or denied the conclusions made in the study, several space experts
strongly believe that this research report is indisputable proof of alien
presence on Mars.

 

It should be noted that the potential alien life
which has been now spotted on Mars are not evolved, but rather simple living
beings like fungi and algae.

 

As per Dr Regina Dass of the Department of
Microbiology, School of Life Sciences, India, the lead author of the study,
Curiosity Rover has sent at least 15 images that show fungi and algae growing
on the Martian surface.

 

“There are no geological or other abiogenic
forces on Earth which can produce sedimentary structures, by the hundreds,
which have mushroom shapes, stems, stalks, and shed what looks like spores on
the surrounding surface. In fact, fifteen specimens were photographed by NASA
growing out of the ground in just three days,” said Dass, Express.co.uk
reports.

 

Dr Vincenzo Rizzo, a
National Research Council biogeologist revealed that the seasonal fluctuations
of methane in the Martian atmosphere can be connected with natural life-and-death
cycles of organic matter on earth.

 

The study report is expected to revolutionise
future space missions to Mars. Upcoming probes to Mars by NASA is expected to
analyse these Martian fungi so that the habitat in which they are thriving can
be studied in depth. Potential life on Mars, even in its simplest form will
also raise the hope of surviving on Mars during colonisation.

 

Earlier, SpaceX founder Elon Musk had revealed that
he will surely go to Mars despite minimal chances of survival. With this new
discovery, it has been proved that alien life, at least in the simplest form
can survive on the Red Planet, and this will surely elevate the projects which
are being now carried out aiming at colonizing Mars.

 

A few weeks back, self-proclaimed researcher Scott
C Waring had claimed to have spotted fossil-like structures on Mars. In a post
on his website ‘UFO Sightings Daily’, Waring argued that Mars was once home to
an alien civilisation. The researcher also urged United States President Donald
Trump to make him the head of NASA, so that he can unveil the unknown mysteries
surrounding alien life on the Red Planet.

 

(Source: International
Business Times – By Nirmal Narayanan, 25 March 2019)
  

 

MISCELLANEA

1. Culture

22.  Forger programming – the best skill to teach
children is reinvention

 

The author of Sapiens reveals what
2050 has in store for humankind and in his part one it has dealt – Change is
the only constant.

 

Humankind is facing unprecedented
revolutions, all our old stories are crumbling and no new story has so far
emerged to replace them. How can we prepare ourselves and our children for a
world of such unprecedented transformations and radical uncertainties? A baby
born today will be thirty-something in 2050. If all goes well, that baby will
still be around in 2100, and might even be an active citizen of the 22nd
century. What should we teach that baby that will help him or her survive and
flourish in the world of 2050 or of the 22nd century? What kind of skills will
he or she need in order to get a job, understand what is happening around them
and navigate the maze of life?

 

Unfortunately, since nobody knows
how the world will look in 2050 – not to mention 2100 – we don’t know the
answer to these questions. Of course, humans have never been able to predict
the future with accuracy. But today it is more difficult than ever before,
because once technology enables us to engineer bodies, brains and minds, we can
no longer be certain about anything – including things that previously seemed
fixed and eternal.

 

A thousand years ago, in 1018,
there were many things people didn’t know about the future, but they were
nevertheless convinced that the basic features of human society were not going
to change. If you lived in China in 1018, you knew that by 1050 the Song Empire
might collapse, the Khitans might invade from the north, and plagues might kill
millions. However, it was clear to you that even in 1050 most people would
still work as farmers and weavers, rulers would still rely on humans to staff
their armies and bureaucracies, men would still dominate women, life expectancy
would still be about 40, and the human body would be exactly the same. Hence in
1018, poor Chinese parents taught their children how to plant rice or weave
silk, and wealthier parents taught their boys how to read the Confucian
classics, write calligraphy or fight on horseback – and taught their girls to
be modest and obedient housewives. It was obvious these skills would still be
needed in 1050.

 

In contrast, today we have no idea
how China or the rest of the world will look in 2050. We don’t know what people
will do for a living, we don’t know how armies or bureaucracies will function,
and we don’t know what gender relations will be like. Some people will probably
live much longer than today, and the human body itself might undergo an
unprecedented revolution thanks to bioengineering and direct brain-computer
interfaces. Much of what kids learn today will likely be irrelevant by 2050.

 

At present, too many schools focus
on cramming information. In the past this made sense, because information was
scarce, and even the slow trickle of existing information was repeatedly
blocked by censorship. If you lived, say, in a small provincial town in Mexico
in 1800, it was difficult for you to know much about the wider world. There was
no radio, television, daily newspapers or public libraries. Even if you were
literate and had access to a private library, there was not much to read other
than novels and religious tracts. The Spanish Empire heavily censored all texts
printed locally, and allowed only a dribble of vetted publications to be
imported from outside. Much the same was true if you lived in some provincial
town in Russia, India, Turkey or China. When modern schools came along,
teaching every child to read and write and imparting the basic facts of
geography, history and biology, they represented an immense improvement.

 

In contrast, in the 21st century we
are flooded by enormous amounts of information, and even the censors don’t try
to block it. Instead, they are busy spreading misinformation or distracting us
with irrelevancies. If you live in some provincial Mexican town and you have a
smartphone, you can spend many lifetimes just reading Wikipedia, watching TED
talks, and taking free online courses. No government can hope to conceal all
the information it doesn’t like. On the other hand, it is alarmingly easy to
inundate the public with conflicting reports and red herrings.

 

People all over the world are but a
click away from the latest accounts of the bombardment of Aleppo or of melting
ice caps in the Arctic, but there are so many contradictory accounts that it is
hard to know what to believe. Besides, countless other things are just a click
away, making it difficult to focus, and when politics or science look too
complicated it is tempting to switch to funny cat videos, celebrity gossip or
porn.

 

In such a world, the last thing a
teacher needs to give her pupils is more information. They already have far too
much of it. Instead, people need the ability to make sense of information, to
tell the difference between what is important and what is unimportant, and
above all to combine many bits of information into a broad picture of the
world.

 

In truth, this has been the ideal
of western liberal education for centuries, but up till now even many western
schools have been rather slack in fulfilling it. Teachers allowed themselves to
focus on shoving data while encouraging pupils “to think for themselves”.

 

Due to their fear of
authoritarianism, liberal schools had a particular horror of grand narratives.
They assumed that as long as we give students lots of data and a modicum of
freedom, the students will create their own picture of the world, and even if
this generation fails to synthesise all the data into a coherent and meaningful
story of the world, there will be plenty of time to construct a good synthesis
in the future. We have now run out of time. The decisions we will take in the
next few decades will shape the future of life itself, and we can take these
decisions based only on our present world view. If this generation lacks a
comprehensive view of the cosmos, the future of life will be decided at random.

 

(Source: WIRED – By Yuval Noah
Harari, 12 August 2018)

 

2. 
Technology

23.  Blockchain, machine learning, and a future
accounting

 

The inventor of bitcoin and
blockchain technology goes by the name Satoshi Nakamoto. Though Nakamoto claims
to be a Japanese man born in 1975, most experts believe Nakamoto is a
pseudonym. Some have gone so far as to theorize that Nakamoto isn’t a single
person at all, but rather a collective of people. The mystery persists to this
day, despite the efforts of many of the world’s best journalists.

 

As fascinating as this story is,
the wide-ranging application of blockchain technology is even more compelling.
In a world where disruption is a buzzword, it’s still rare for a technology to
radically alter the face of an industry. For accountants and auditors, however,
blockchain has the potential do just that, especially when combined with other
innovations such as machine learning. Because accounting records contain highly
structured sets of data, this technology is perfectly suited for our profession.
Professionals who aren’t at the forefront of learning and testing ways to adopt
these technologies risk getting left behind.

 

Blockchain: Way more than bitcoin

While blockchain was created to
facilitate bitcoin, the technology now extends far beyond the world of
cryptocurrency. An important facet of blockchain technology is that it is
decentralized, eliminating the middleman. Rather than storing data in one
location, blockchain technology shares data across a massive peer-to-peer
network. Until now, we have relied on institutions or trusted third parties,
such as banks, government registries, and other intermediaries, to be in the
middle of our transactions to create validity.

 

The way blockchain technology is
structured is said to make it nearly impossible for records to be falsified or
corrupted. This is because as transactions are permanently added to the ledger
(like blocks in a chain), information is transparently presented to all parties
involved and one block is then linked to the next in the chain. Files can also
be time-stamped and marked with a virtual fingerprint known as a “hash
string” to ensure they remain unmodified. Because hackers cannot access
data through a central point of vulnerability, blockchain networks are nearly
impenetrable.

 

How blockchain could alter accounting

Blockchain adoption is still in its
infancy, but that hasn’t stopped experts from speculating on the vast changes
the technology may bring. In a white paper published by Deloitte, the firm
hypothesizes that blockchain could “shapeshift the nature of today’s
accounting.” No wonder, then, that all of the Big Four accounting firms
are spending a great deal of time and money investigating blockchain
applications. For example, Deloitte has established a blockchain consulting business
and EY accepts bitcoin for settling invoices.

 

What might a blockchain-based
accounting system look like? Theoretically, it would allow secure, verified
information to be stored and accessed by multiple parties across multiple
locations. Because a blockchain is encrypted and consensus verified, it
essentially notarizes itself. All of this adds up to the possibility of a
replacement for the double-entry accounting method that has been commonplace
since the Renaissance.

 

“Imagine a world where
accounting was not double entry, but maintained in ledgers simultaneously
recording the same item in multiple locations on multiple computers, all
self-balancing and checking every few minutes,” wrote Tony Hobrow, CEO of
VenturesOne Asia and NexAssure Group, in a LinkedIn article. “No
middlemen, no reconciliation, no corrupt date, no need for month-end cycles, no
need to bring together all the different books and records of departments and
counter-parties.”

 

That, in short, is the promise of
blockchain accounting.

 

Combining blockchain with artificial intelligence

Blockchain may transform the
accounting world as we know it, but other technological advances are already
making waves. Chief among them are innovations from the world of artificial
intelligence (AI). A 2018 analysis by International Data Corp. predicts AI
spending will reach $46 billion by 2020.

 

Machine learning is a subfield
within AI that should be of particular interest to accounting professionals.
Arthur Samuel, who coined the term, defines machine learning as giving
“computers the ability to learn without having to be explicitly
programmed.” With machine learning, tasks that have traditionally required
human intervention can be automated. This technology increases efficiency
within the accounting profession to an unprecedented degree, which in turn will
affect our future workflow process and how we interact with clients.

 

When you combine machine learning
and blockchain, you get nothing short of a technological revolution. It’s
possible to envision a world where accounting and auditing happen in real time,
with all relevant parties being informed every step of the way — a true
continuous audit. That future may still be a ways off, but now is the time to
start assessing which processes in your firm could be amenable to AI
technology. Accounting firms and corporate accounting departments should start
not only learning how to take advantage of the technology, but also testing new
ways of working internally with their teams and externally with clients. Starting
small with expense reporting or document collection applications can be a way
to gain confidence in the benefits of utilizing technology like this before
taking on larger applications like general ledger systems.

 

Visions of the future

What does this mean for accountants
and auditors? The short answer is change is on the horizon. While even the most
forward-thinking thought leaders don’t foresee a world where accounting
processes can exist without humans, there’s no denying that roles and workflows
will look radically different in the next few years.

 

Auditors will spend much less time
performing audits, and more time designing, reviewing, and verifying how
information flows between systems. Rather than audits being performed at
regular intervals, blockchain and machine learning present the possibility of a
true continuous audit. All of this technology adds up to more time for human
connection with your internal teams, as well as your external clients, with
soft skills, analytical abilities, and advisory services becoming important in
delivering value to an organization. With continuous audit, trends and missing
data could be identified much earlier, allowing for problems to be proactively
addressed, rather than reactively reported. Continuous auditing also would give
peace of mind to businesses and their investors while also, hopefully, reducing
many of the tasks that accounting firms often have written off or not charged
for.

 

A similar shift could also occur
for accountants. Everyday data-entry tasks are poised to become much easier,
freeing up time for accountants to focus on analysis and insights. Accountants
and firms that develop these skills now will be able to differentiate
themselves as the technology becomes widespread. The days of offering value
simply through accurate data entry and calculations are numbered, so taking the
time to retool now and work on your advisory skills is an investment in the
future of our work.

 

There’s no getting around the fact
that technologies like blockchain and machine learning are no longer a tiny dot
on the horizon. The future is here, and accounting professionals must be
willing to adapt.

 

(Source: Newsletter/CPA Insider –
By Amy Vetter, CPA/CITP, CGMA – 20 August 2018)

 

3.   News –

 

24.  The Isolated error

 

BT blames human error as it reveals £500m pension deficit gaffe

 

Mistake by actuary comes after
accounting scandal last year that wiped £8bn off its value. BT has revealed
another accounting error after its pension deficit was underestimated by £500m.

 

The telecommunications company,
which had £8bn wiped off its stock market value in 2017 after admitting to an
accounting scandal at its Italian unit, blamed the latest gaffe on an “isolated
human error”.

 

The error was made by BT’s
independent actuary, Willis Towers Watson, in its calculation of the company’s
pension deficit at 31 March. The restated pension deficit stands at £3.9bn as
at the end of June.

 

Simon Lowth, BT’s chief financial
officer, said: “We have received assurances from Willis Towers Watson that
there are no other errors. As you would expect, we are undertaking further
review procedures around that calculation.

 

“We spent a lot of time with WTW
making sure we understand what created the error. It was an isolated human
error that they identified. We are also working on what they need to do to
strengthen their controls.”

 

Following the £530m Italian
accounting scandal, which cost the outgoing BT chief executive, Gavin
Patterson, £4m in bonus payouts, the company’s accountant, PWC, was eventually
fired. BT would not comment on its future relationship with WTW.

 

Lowth pointed out the error had no
impact on the company’s profits, cashflow, the triennial valuation of its
pension deficit conducted last year, or any members of the BT pension scheme.
Nevertheless, another financial error was the last thing BT needed.

 

Laith Khalaf, a senior analyst at
Hargreaves Lansdown, said: “Clearly this slip doesn’t inspire confidence.”

 

BT said the correction amounted to
less than 1% of its total pension liabilities of just over £57bn.

 

WTW said the error was due to “an
actuarial assumption not being accurately reflected in our actuarial
calculations”.

“Willis Towers Watson has stringent
controls in place to confirm the accuracy of the calculations that we provide
to clients, and the error has now been corrected,” a spokesman said. “We are
working closely with BT to support their review of the matter.”

 

Patterson, who said he would still
be in place in November to deliver the company’s half-year results, said BT had
made a good start to the year. “We are making positive progress against our
strategy,” he said.

 

In the first quarter, Patterson
said, it had made the first 900 of a planned 13,000 job cuts over the next
three years to save £1.5bn.

 

BT’s financial performance for the
second quarter was slightly ahead of forecasts, and the company reaffirmed its
guidance for full-year revenue and profit.

 

This prompted
a 4% share price rise as investors responded positively after a string of
negative news that had left its share price down more than one-quarter in the
past year.

 

Total revenue for the quarter was
down 2% to £5.7bn. Reported profit before tax was up 68% to £704m, due to the
hit the company took relating to the Italian accounting scandal. Adjusted
profit was up 3% at £816m. Net debt increased to £11.2bn from £8.8bn.

 

The company has stopped reporting
broadband and TV subscriber numbers, which fell in the past two quarters, as it
focuses on increasing average revenue per customer rather than the number of
sign-ups.

 

Paolo Pescatore, an independent
telecoms analyst, said: “All providers will be seeking to lure households with
attractive offers ahead of the new Premier League season. BT must do a better
job of signing up TV subscribers and maximise BT Sport across its base.”

 

(Source: The
Guardian (International edition) – 27 July 2018)

 

25.  PWC doing double duty as auditor and tax
lobbyist

 

PwC billed $10.74 million since
2013 as the exclusive registered lobbyist on tax reform for a coalition that
includes several audit clients.

The largest audit firm in the
world, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, is a registered tax lobbyist for a coalition
of some of the largest multinationals that includes a large number of its audit
clients.

 

PwC has earned $10.74 million since
2013, according to the Senate’s lobbying disclosure database, as the exclusive
registered lobbyist for the Alliance for Competitive Taxation, on a single
issue: tax reform.

 

(Source:
www.marketwatch.com, 30 July 2018)

 

Miscellanea

1. Economy

 

As a countermeasure, India hikes import duty on 29 US
products

 

A
Finance Ministry notification said the duty hike would come into effect
immediately for 28 products, while for the marine product, artemia, the
increased duty would be effective from August 4.

 

In a
retaliatory move against the recent US import duty hikes, India on 21 June 2018
raised customs duty on 29 products, including on iron and steel products
imported from the US.

 

In
March, US President Donald Trump slapped import tariffs of 25 per cent on steel
and 10 per cent on aluminium, unfolding the prospect of an all-out global trade
war. China retaliated in April, imposing tariffs as high as 25 per cent on 128
American products.

 

India
has sought an exemption from the US tariffs along the lines the US has allowed
to the European Union, Argentina, Australia, Brazil, Canada, Mexico and South
Korea.

 

In
Thursday’s hike by India, duty on flat rolled products on iron has been raised
to 27.50 per cent from 15 per cent earlier, while certain flat rolled products
on stainless steel will now attract 22.50 per cent duty as against 15 per cent
earlier.

 

Import
duty on chickpeas, Bengal gram (chana) and masur dal has been increased to 70
per cent, from 30 per cent earlier, while that on lentils has been raised to 40
per cent from 30 per cent.

 

Shelled
almonds from the US will now attract import duty at Rs 120 per kg, as compared
to Rs 100 earlier. Almonds in shell will now be levied import duty at Rs 42 per
kg as against Rs 35 earlier.

Shelled
walnut will now attract customs duty at the rate of 120 per cent, as against 30
per cent earlier.

 

Apples
will attract import duty of 75 per cent as compared to 50 per cent earlier.

 

Import
duty on American phosphoric acid has been raised to 20 per cent, from 10 per
cent each earlier, while the duty on diagnostic reagents has also been doubled
to 20 per cent.

 

Customs
duty on artemia, a type of shrimp, has been hiked to 30 per cent with effect
from August 4.

 

For
automobiles and earth moving equipment, SIM sockets and other metallic
mechanical items for use in manufacture of mobile phones, the duty has been
hiked to 25 per cent, from 15 per cent previously.

 

During
his official visit to Washington last week, Commerce Minister Suresh Prabhu
said that India and the US had agreed to hold official talks soon to address
the trade and economic irritants between both nations.

 

This
decision was taken during a series of meetings Prabhu had with US Commerce
Secretary Wilbur Ross and US Trade Representative Robert Lighthizer in
Washington during the Indian Minister’s visit from June 10 to 12.

 

(Source: International Business Times dated 21.06.2018)

 

Sistema exits Reliance Communications; sells its 10
percent stake

 

Russia’s
Sistema JSFC has become the latest foreign operator to exit the troubled Indian
telecom market, by selling its 10 percent stake in Reliance Communications in
multiple tranches over the past few months. The Russian conglomerate has
reportedly lost $ 4 billion on its investments.

Sistema
JSFC is believed to have decided against the idea of buying RCom’s remaining
telecom assets, comprising subsea cables, enterprise business and data centres,
following the divergence of opinion with the Anil Ambani-led telco.

 

Sistema
JSFC decided to exit RCom after the struggling telco recently got entrapped in
insolvency proceedings. It decided against making ambitious investments in
India’s brutally competitive and fast consolidating telecom market, having
already burnt its fingers.

 

In
October 2017, Sistema Shyam Teleservices (SSTL) was sold to Reliance
Communications in return for a 10 percent stake. RCom has also since closed
down its wireless business amid plunging revenue and mounting losses due to
intense competition, and operates only an enterprise business, besides running
data centres and sub-sea cables.

 

At the
time of the merger of RCom-SSTL, RCom shares were hovering at Rs 80 apiece in
early November 2015 but collapsed to around Rs 17 when the deal was finally
completed in late October 2017.

 

On
Wednesday, it gained over 4.8 percent over the previous close to end at Rs
15.30 apiece on the Bombay Stock Exchange. In past months, Sistema has
gradually reduced its stake in RCom. It lowered its stake to 7.09 percent by
letting minority shareholders swap their shares with those of RCom in March.

 

In
April and May, it sold off a further 2.1 percent and 0.55 percent respectively
in the open market, lowering its equity holding in RCom to 4.43 percent. The
development was seen on the expected lines as the telecom sector in the country
is witnessing a huge consolidation and stiff competition.

 

The
entry of Reliance Jio by offering attractive discounts on calls and data has
violently disrupted the entire telecom markets. The competition is expected to
become stiffer in the upcoming days.

 

(Source: International Business Times dated 21.06.2018)

 

2. 
Regulation

 

Auditor Exodus: When the regulator does its job, it
cleans the system!

Even
as investment experts are busy totting up the number of auditors that have
resigned this financial year (37 at latest count, according to Prime Database),
the big audit firm that triggered such an exodus, is facing the whiplash of
regulatory action around the world. On 13th June this year,
PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC) was fined £6.5 million and severely reprimanded
for admitted misconduct, by the Financial Reporting Council (FRC), UK’s (United
Kingdom’s) accounting regulator.

 

PwC’s
audit partner, Steven Denison, was fined £325,000 and was banned from audit
work for 15 years. This was over the audit of BHS, a department store chain,
which collapsed a year after the PwC signed off on the audit in 2016. PwC, on
its website, accepts and apologises for “serious shortcomings with this audit
work,” but says that its “failings did not contribute to the collapse of BHS
over one year later…” The regulator has also asked PwC to ensure that all
audits of non-listed or high-profile companies are subject to ‘engagement
quality control review’.

 

PwC,
as expected, has contested the order and its global chairman, Robert E Moritz,
has complained to the media about our slow legal processes, and how the firm
has moved on after the Satyam scam and made amends. But, it is in for another
long battle, while the damage to its business is immediate. The SEBI action has
been a body blow, because it has come at a time when all major consulting firms
have seen their business boom in the past four years. The impact of SEBI’s
order is so huge that industry sources say some senior partners are looking to
exit the firm. No wonder, getting rid of shady accounts is clearly the first step, for PwC as well as other accounting
firms.  

 

The
lesson from this widespread reaction to SEBI’s action is not unique. It is a
well-accepted principle of law that exemplary financial punishment has a
salutary impact on the entire system. The effect of SEBI’s action across
corporate India only proves this. On the other hand, reputational damage
doesn’t bother large companies as much. They have become adept at countering it
through image and media management. Their large advertising and PR budgets and
ability to sponsor media events makes this a cakewalk. If SEBI sticks to its
tough stand, chairman Ajay Tyagi would have triggered the biggest clean-up of
corporate balance sheets in decades. If he succeeds in his fight to get banks
to report corporate defaults immediately to stock exchanges, he would create
history in terms of improving corporate governance and accounts.

 

Ironically,
the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) has, finally, woken up to its own role
in regulating audit firms and has constituted an inquiry into the reasons for
the flood of resignations in June. Meanwhile, media reports attribute the exits
of auditors to three other factors apart from the SEBI’s order against PwC.
They are: 1) the possibility of forensic audits being ordered under the
Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code; 2) auditors having to explain exits following
recommendations of the Kotak Committee on Corporate Governance; and 3) the fear
that the National Financial Authority of India (NFAI), as a brand new
independent auditor, will be much tougher than the Institute of Chartered
Accountants of India (ICAI).

 

But
these reasons are too vague to even trigger a renunciation of business by any
audit firm. My own feedback from industry experts is that the SEBI order
against PwC is the single biggest reason for the so many auditors ditching
companies that they are not comfortable with. Ameet Patel, a well-known chartered
accountant, points out that many audits were taken up without proper due
diligence and the companies have now started waking up to the risks involved.

 

R.
Balakrishnan, former fund manager, investment analyst and Moneylife columnist,
also agrees that fear is the key. “Finally there is punishment. Auditors who
were friends with companies and signed first and read the accounts later have
turned cautions,” he says. Nikhil Vadia, another reputed tax expert, has an
additional point. He says, “Rule 9 of the Companies Audit and Auditors Rules
2014 has been dropped on 7 May 2018. Under this rule, the liability for an
audit (including criminal liability) would devolve only on the specific partner
who acted in a fraudulent manner. After the rule has been dropped, the
liability devolves on the entire firm and all partners are liable.” This, along
with the SEBI action in PwC, had triggered the auditor exits.

 

Top
Auditor Exits: 37 and Counting in 2017-18

 

Price
Waterhouse & Company (PwC) resigned from Vakrangee Limited citing
inadequate information on several matters provided by management.

 

Deloitte Haskins & Sells resigned as auditor of Manpasand Beverages also
saying ‘significant information’ sought by it was not provided.

 

PwC
resigned  from Atlanta Ltd, a
construction and infrastructure company.

 

Sai
Kanwar and Associates resigned from Fourth Dimension Solutions citing health
reasons.

 

V.
Shivkumar and Associates were disqualified by ICAI.

 

Ravindra Sharma and Associates quit Hanung Toys due to “preoccupation with
other assignments”.

 

Patankar & Associates quit as auditors of Inox Wind on 9 June saying it was
‘logistically difficult’ to continue
the audit.

 

A top
international consultant says, after SEBI’s action, most big audit firms have
begun to believe that it is best to resign even if there is a whiff of an issue
with a company. He also points out how this is bad for companies because if the
auditor resigns they are “presumed guilty and have to prove their innocence.”
In fact, there is another lesson here.

 

SEBI’s
order in the PwC-Satyam case has had a bigger impact than all the mindless
red-tape and form-filling that it has introduced after three corporate
governance committee reports that it commissioned over the past two decades. In
fact, SEBI’s corporate governance rules have placed such onerous
responsibilities on independent directors and audit committees (although it is
a open secret that they have no real truck with the actual working and
management of a company) that it has only created more business for more audit
and compliance experts that the board relies on. This imposes additional costs
on listed companies.

 

Finally,
there is the issue of timing. A new round of discussions on corporate
governance, action against PwC in India and UK, and the changed regulatory
oversight on Indian auditors — all have come in the space of a few months,
leading to a significant impact. It could well be the beginning of a
much-needed strong oversight on companies that statutory auditors get paid to
perform on behalf of shareholders, but have rarely done. 
 

 

(Source:
Moneylife News & Views dated 15.06.2018)

MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

 

10. What
are the most promising technologies for software development?

 

Software is the
driving force of the world today. With an estimated 9 trillion devices in use,
software is the glue that connects people from all around the globe. The
software developers that build and develop these software products are shaping
and building the modern technological world. The developer population had been
estimated to hit approximately 26.4 million by this year. Yet, even after the
increasing number of developers, there seems to be a talent shortage.

 

Change is the only
constant on this planet. The software industry is one of those sectors in
contemporary times that witnesses a constant change in practices due to the
ever-growing technological landscape. Software developers and professionals
need to keep themselves updated with the latest technologies and innovations in
order to compete and get the best possible position and pay.

 

In recent years, the
IT industry has seen tremendous growth. In a report by Gartner in 2018, it is
predicted that the industry will witness a growth of 8.3% in 2019 in its
spending.

 

Some of the
technologies that seem to have the most promising future are:

 

Mixed
Reality

Mixed reality is a
combination of the twin technologies of virtual reality (VR) and augmented
reality (AR). Experts predict that by 2025 the market size of mixed reality
will reach US $3.7 billion.

 

AR has seen a
tremendous amount of growth recently and the credit for this goes solely to its
applications on smartphones. The popularity of smartphones is one of the major
reasons why companies are hiring AR developers in large numbers and investing
in their own AR applications.

 

Many people assume
that the applications and the scope of VR are limited to gaming and
entertainment. But effective applications by companies and armies around the
world have proved this notion wrong. The US Army has used Microsoft’s HoloLens
mixed reality technology for military training purposes. Similarly, Walmart is
also planning to utilise VR technology to train employees in customer service
and compliance.

 

Progressive
web applications

Progressive web
applications (PWAs) are a hybrid of mobile and web applications. They differ a
lot from the regular mobile application. The service worker script is an
integral part of PWAs on which they majorly work. PWAs have a number of
features such as responsiveness, connectivity independence, safety,
linkability, etc. The main feature of PWAs includes its offline support, where
the application is supposed to be able to work without a connection. These
applications can be loaded very fast even with low internet speed. For example,
Uber’s PWA was designed to run even on 2G speeds. The core app is a mere 50KB
and takes just three seconds to load on 2G speeds. PWAs are also very good for
customer engagement. Trivago saw an increase of 150% for the people who add its
PWA on their home screen. Trivago also observed a 97% increase in hotel offer
clickouts owing to the increased customer engagement.

 

Additionally, they
are very easy to develop and maintain. This, in particular, has attracted many
mobile developer companies in the past few years.

 

Machine
Learning and Artificial Intelligence

A total of 91 machine
learning deals were carried out last year with a business value of US $16.9
billion. According to Deloitte, approximately 100,000 legal jobs will be automated
by 2036. Automation and machine learning are here to stay and are going to make
a huge difference and change the way organisations operate.

 

Machine learning
allows organisations to customise the customer experience and helps target the
company’s efforts. For example, Facebook implements statistical analysis and
predictive analytics together to find patterns based on data. It helps Facebook
to personalise the newsfeed for each individual, suggest interesting content,
posts and to improve user engagement. In addition, Facebook uses neural
networks on images to suggest members to tag in the picture.

 

Artificial
intelligence aims to be able to improvise business tasks and make them simple.
The advent and popularity of artificial intelligence has provided the web app
developers brilliant support to experiment. This has broadened the reach of AI
to sectors like healthcare, banking, education, mathematics, etc.

 

IoT

Internet of Things
(IoT) covers various categories of devices that are connected to the internet
and communicate with each other. The applications of IoT are present in both
the consumer and the industrial domains. In areas such as security and customer
experience, IoT is experiencing exponential growth and demands.

 

According to David
Evan, a former researcher at Cisco, each second about 127 devices are being
connected to the internet. This clearly signifies the constantly increasing
reach of IoT.

 

Over 90% of
automobiles are expected to be IoT-enabled by 2020. In the coming years, IoT
will continue to grow in prevalence and get more sophisticated. From smart cars
to in-store smart assistants for customer personalisation, the future holds a
lot of value for IoT. Enterprises will come closer to an intelligently
connected future by embracing real-time visibility.

 

CONCLUSION

The evolution of
software technologies provides a clear insight into the type of developments
ongoing in the information technology industry. Developers all around the world
are working to improve the convenience and comfort level of humans. With
traditional developments like Java application development, .NET development,
etc., developers need to keep themselves updated with the emerging technologies
and trends.

 

Similarly, it is
vital for organisations to adopt these new technologies in order to expand and
compete with their competitors. Consultancy companies can provide greater
insights into these new technologies and help businesses become software
leaders.

 

(Source:
International Business Times – By IBTimes Staff Reporter, 18th December,
2019)

 

11. New
mobile number portability rules kick in: All you need to know

 

The revised mobile
number portability or MNP rules issued by the telecom regulator TRAI came into
effect from December 16. The new rules are slated to make the porting process
fast and simple.

 

The revised process
comes with conditions for generation of Unique Porting Code (UPC). It entails
three working days’ timeline for port out requests within a service area, and
five working days for requests for port out from one circle to another.

 

Here are the other
details:

*For corporate mobile
connections, there is no change in the porting timelines, TRAI stated;

* Mobile users can
generate the UPC and avail the mobile number porting process;

* In the new process,
the UPC can be generated only when the subscriber is eligible to port out his /
her mobile number;

* Laying down the
rules for the new process, the Regulator said a positive validation of various
conditions will determine the generation of the UPC;

* For instance, in
case of post-paid mobile connection, the subscriber has to ensure clearance of
outstanding dues towards the existing telecom service provider for the issued
bills as per normal billing cycle;

* Some other
conditions include activation in the present operator’s network of not less
than 90 days; and no pending contractual obligations to be fulfilled by the
subscriber as per the exit clause provided in the subscriber agreement;

* Once UPC is
generated, it will be valid for four days for all ‘Licensed Service Areas
(LSAs)’ except the circles of Jammu & Kashmir, Assam and North-East, where
it will remain valid for 30 days.

* Users will need to
submit address and identity proof to the changing operator to begin the MNP
request.

 

(Source:
Times of India.com – 16th December, 2019)

 

II. Economy

 

12. Government
imposes restrictions on import of gold, silver

 

According to a
notification issued by the Directorate-General of Foreign Trade (DGFT), import
of gold in any form has been placed in ‘restricted’ category from ‘free’
category.

Amid
rising inward shipments of gold, the Government imposed restrictions on the
import of precious metals. According to a notification issued by the
Directorate-General of Foreign Trade (DGFT), import of gold in any form has
been placed in ‘restricted’ category.

 

‘Import
policy of gold in any form, other than monetary gold and silver in any form, is
amended from “Free” to “Restricted”; import is allowed only through nominated
agencies as notified by RBI (in case of banks) and DGFT (for other agencies),’
the Directorate said. However, import under advance authorisation and supply of
gold directly by foreign buyers to exporters against orders have been exempted.
The restrictions come in the backdrop of rising imports of gold, which rose by
6.59% to USD 2.94 billion in November from USD 2.76 billion a year-ago.

 

(Source: Financial
Express – By PTI, 18th December, 20

MISCELLANEA

Miscellanea was started by Narayan Varma
and Ajay Thakkar in 1984. A number of people compiled it for few years
including Rashmin Sanghvi, Uday Chitale, Ashutosh Pednekar, etc. Rajesh Muni
and Raman Jokhakar manned it between 1999-2000 to 2004-05. Tarun Singhal joined
in 2005 and continued with Raman till 2017. Present contributors Jhankhana
Thakkar joined in
2016-17 and Chirag Chauhan in January, 2018.

The
aim of this column was to bring out relevant and useful news and views ‘in
short’.

 

1.   Technology

 

11. Apple’s
AirPower wireless charger may already be in production – and shipping soon

 

In September 2017, Apple
announced it would ship its AirPower product by the end of 2018. Expectations
grew with each passing quarter last year that the charging pad would finally
arrive. But Apple missed its own deadline and pundits surmised the company was
struggling with technical issues, such as how to regulate different charging
requirements on a single pad using the Qi wireless charging specification.

 

After failing to meet its
own shipping timeline in 2018, Apple is now thought to have two manufacturers
ramping up production of its AirPower wireless charging pad, according to a
Hong Kong-based website that specialises in device charging news. While there
may be more than a dozen multi-device wireless chargers technically available
now, but none have introduced a product that can handle all three of Apple’s
products: smartphone, watch and earbuds.

 

(Source:
www.itworld.com)

 

12. Facebook
testing stories feature that will encourage your friends to join you at parties

 

Facebook
wants to make invitation a simpler process. The social media company is
bringing a new Stories feature that will encourage your friends to join you at
events. The company announced that it will test a new feature that lets users
share events that they are interested in attending in to their Story and then
plan meet ups with friends who are also interested in attending the same.

 

So how
will the feature work? You will see a new option “Share to your
story” when you visit any event’s page on Facebook. Tech Crunch explains
that your friends will see a tappable sticker when you share the event to your
story. The sticker would include details of the event and your friends can
directly reply from the Story if they are “interested” in going.

 

Facebook
announces the new feature at the time when the company is losing its young
users at a faster pace. The eMarketer’s report from 2018 shows reveals that
last year less than half internet users in the US aged between 12- 7 used
Facebook at least once a month. The feature aims to attract younger users as
many of them have now moved to Instagram and prefer the app over Facebook for
posting photos and Stories.

 

(Source:
www.indiatoday.in)

 

13. Google
removes thousands of malicious Android apps and millions of fake reviews on
Play store

 

It’s high time, Google
scales up the security to ensure shady apps don’t enter Play store.

 

In the past few years,
Google, despite taking stringent measure to screen malicious apps creeping into
the Play, has been unable to control them. Now, the company in a massive
cleanup drive has removed millions of fake reviews and thousands of bad apps.

 

Recently, Google received
complaints from concerned app developers that the Play store rating systems are
being rigged with fake reviews affecting their rankings, which apparently
driving the consumers away. Taking the cognisance of the issue, Google studied
the pattern and found several targeted false reviews, the presence of profane
language to downgrade an app and also incentivised (paid) top ratings to
boosting rankings of the app.

 

During the screen, the
company unearthed thousands of shady apps with malicious features and has
removed them in addition to weeding out millions of fake reviews from the Play
store in just one week.

 

The
company has also urged Android app developers not to indulge in shady review
tactics by offering incentives such as free in-app purchases or gifts to lure
their users to write fake ratings or else risk getting banned from Play store.

 

Over the last one month,
Google has weeded out close to 35 apps from the Play store over fake ads.
Detailed investigations revealed that the apps were riddled with malicious
codes to create fake click impressions via users to generate ad revenue. Also,
some were found to steal financial information from the Android phone.

 

There were just two of the
techniques, app developers had several other methods and did them without
obtaining the user consent

 

(Source:
International Business Times)

 

2.   Environment

 

14.  Antarctica ice melting increased by 280% in
last 16 years, study says

 

Yearly loss of ice from
Antarctica has increased by an alarming rate of 280 per cent between 2001 and
2017, according to a study which showed that accelerated melting caused global
sea levels to rise more than half an inch in the last four decades.

 

The researchers,
including those from Nasa’s Jet Propulsion Laboratory (JPL) and Utrecht
University in the Netherlands, were able to discern that between 1979 and 1990,
Antarctica shed an average of 40 gigatonnes of ice mass annually From 2009 to
2017, about 252 gigatonnes per year were lost. The pace of melting rose
dramatically over the four-decade period. From 1979 to 2001, it was an average
of 48 gigatonnes annually per decade. The rate jumped 280 per cent to 134
gigatonnes for 2001 to 2017.

 

For
the study published in journal Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences,
researchers conducted the longest-ever assessment of remaining Antarctic ice
mass. Spanning four decades, the project was also geographically comprehensive;
the research team examined 18 regions encompassing 176 basins, as well as
surrounding islands. As climate warming and ozone depletion send more ocean
heat toward those sectors, they will continue to contribute to sea level rise
from Antarctica in decades to come

 

 (Source: www.economictimes.com)

 

 

3.   World News

 

15. China
to cut taxes, keep policy flexible to counter slowdown 

 

China plans to slash taxes,
step up spending and provide ample financing to private and small enterprises
to help counter the country’s worst slowdown since the global financial crisis
and the impact of a bruising trade war with the U.S. The People’s Bank of China
is confident it can keep the value of China’s currency, the yuan, steady while
maintaining a stable but flexible monetary policy

 

The plans for 2019 outlined
included specific measures such as raising the maximum income levels for tax
exempt companies and individuals and reducing the tax rate. The government
plans to begin construction of major projects and promote settlement of rural
migrants in cities, slash bureaucratic and anti-competitive red tape, cut
energy consumption and open more business areas to foreign investment, said
Lian Weiliang, vice chairman of the National Development and Reform Commission,
China’s planning agency.

 

 (Source: economictimes.com)

 

16. Big
Four face major overhaul in U.K.

 

The Big
Four accounting firms may have to split their operations into separate U.K.
business units as part of a sweeping overhaul of the industry proposed by
regulators that stopped short of the measures sought by some critics. The
Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) said audit work should be split from
the much larger consulting business at an operational level, but held off on
recommending a full structural breakup or a cap on auditor’s market share. A
further report said the U.K. needed a tough new watchdog to prevent the
failings of the past.

 

Stung by a
string of scandals at prominent British firms including Carillion Plc, the
government demanded regulators set out reforms to roll back the dominance of
the largest accounting firms. The industry has had a turbulent year, with
record fines and reprimands in the U.K.

 

Separately
the U.K. government said it agreed with a new report that the country’s heavily
criticised Financial Reporting Council should be abolished and replaced with a
new accounting regulator. The new watchdog, the Audit, Reporting and Governance
Authority, would have powers to investigate companies, their accounts and
governance.

The FRC
was accused of being to be too close to the firms it oversaw, especially
Deloitte, KPMG, EY and PricewaterhouseCoopers. “I have sympathy with the
view that the FRC has tended overall to take too consensual an approach to its
work,” said John Kingman, who led a review of the regulator.

 

To
encourage more competition, the CMA said it currently preferred to have the
largest companies require joint reviews with two audit firms signing off on the
accounts rather than a market share cap on the auditors.

 

(Source:
www.accountingtoday.com)

 

4.   Startups

 

17. Kochi
gets the biggest startup incubator in India

 

Kerala Chief Minister Pinarayi Vijayan on Sunday inaugurated India’s
biggest startup incubator at Kochi. The startup incubator- the Integrated
Startup Complex– which is housed inside a 1.8-lakh square-feet facility at the
Technology Innovation Zone (TIZ) in Kochi, is the home to host of segments that
cater to the modern technology.

 

The startup incubator, which has been setup under the watchful guidance
of the Kerala Startup Mission (KSUM), houses a number of modern facilities such
as the Maker Village that promotes hardware startups, the Bionest that promotes
medical technologies, BRINC which is India’s first international accelerator
for hardware startups, BRIC which aids developing solutions for cancer
diagnosis and care, and a Centre of Excellence, that has been backed by some of
the prominent tech companies that operate in India. Apart from boosting the
startup ecosystem, the state government is also planning to give 2.5 lakh
direct jobs in IT with an aim of fostering social development in Kerala.

 

(Source:
www.indiatoday.in)

 

18. Books
to help a busy entrepreneur like you avoid burnout this year

 

Books are
wisdom in refined, concentrated form. In that spirit, I’d can recommend several
books to buoy busy, frenetic or otherwise on-the-verge-of-burning-out
entrepreneurs. Some are new. Some are old. Some tackle the problem of burnout
head on, while others do so indirectly. Either way, I’m confident that each of
the below can increase your inspiration this year, and well beyond.

 

1. Log
Off: How to Stay Connected After Disconnecting– Blake Snow.

 

Snow, a
seasoned journalist, gives us this quick-read, which explains how to live large
on low-caloric technology, to increase face time with actual people, outperform
workaholics in half the time and increase our productivity with fewer online
distractions. Snow also does more than just throwing a lot of alarming
statistics and life-changing recommendations at the reader. Rather, he weaves
both into his own decade-long story, making his advice easier to follow and
remember. The concepts he gives names to, like the King Complex, the Rule of
Thirds, Reformed Luddism and the Four Burners Theory, are sure to spike your
productivity. Bonus points for being the shortest book on my list.

 

2. The
Last Place on Earth — Roland Huntford

 

Roland
Huntford’s account of this legendary tale of the 1911 South Pole race between
Roald Amundsen and Robert Scott is well researched and full of proven business
insights. While both men were incredibly brave, their individual approaches to
preparedness, forecasting and strategy for reaching the South Pole first were
strikingly different.

 

This was
so much so that after reading this book, you’ll probably take greater care in
leaving nothing to chance. You’ll also finish this book with a greater
appreciation for early explorers and how you might adopt similar success
strategies in your admittedly less dangerous existence. It’s crazy to think
this story still hasn’t caught Hollywood’s attention.

 

3. Console
Wars: Sega, Nintendo, and the Battle that Defined a Generation — Blake Harris

 

Looking
for a fun read? Need a fresh perspective before planning your next marketing
campaign? Look no further than Harris’s riveting account of one of the ‘90s
greatest rivalries. “There was no such thing as a magic touch,” writes Harris.
“The only thing it takes to sell toys, vitamins, magazines (or anything) is the
power of story. That was the secret. That was the whole trick: to recognize
that the world is nothing but chaos, and the only thing holding it (and us)
together are stories.” Console Wars is as good as (if not better than) David
Sheff’s seminal Game Over: How Nintendo Conquered The World.

 

4. A Short
History of Nearly Everything — Bill Bryson

 

Bryson is
one of the most beloved non-fiction writers today. And, here, he impressively,
humorously and succinctly summarises how we “big banged” from nothing to get
where we are today as a species. To accomplish this, Bryson spent three years
researching the world’s greatest scientific discoveries and interviewing the
people who know them best.

 

Simply
put, the result is awe-inspiring. “It has been suggested that there isn’t a
single bit of any of us — not so much as a stray molecule — that was part of
us nine years ago,” Bryson writes. “It may not feel like it, but at the
cellular level we are all youngsters.”

 

5. Peak
Performance: Elevate Your Game and Avoid Burnout with the New Science of
Success –Brad Stulberg and Steve Magness

 

What would happen if a successful management consultant and Olympic
coach teamed up to study and distill the secret of top performers? Thankfully,
they have. This new book is the result and covers how anyone can achieve his or
her best. “Whether someone is trying to qualify for the Olympics, break ground
in mathematical theory, or craft an artistic masterpiece, many of the practices
that lead to great success are the same,” the authors assert.

 

For
example, “stress plus rest equals growth” means you get better
results when you design and live a routine-filled day; and having a greater
purpose keeps you focused and motivated.

 

6.
Thinking Fast and Slow — Daniel Kahneman

 

The better you understand the human mind, the wiser you’ll know how to
use, master, and leverage it. That’s why everyone — entrepreneurs very much
included — should read this breakthrough book by Nobel Prize-winning
behavioral scientist Kahneman. After decades of research, Kahneman was the
first to discover that the brain makes decisions in two ways. The first is
“fast thinking,” which makes everyday, mostly involuntary and largely gut-based
decision-making possible. This means decisions like eat this, pick up that,
move out of the way and stay alive.

 

“Slow
thinking,” on the other hand, means slow to engage and deliberate, even lazy,
because this kind of thinking requires significantly more energy. The trick to
being a better thinker, therefore, lies in knowing and understanding how to
trigger your “slow thinking” more often. This book shows you how.

 

(Source:
www.entrepreneur.com)

 

 

MISCELLANEA

I. Economy

 

1.      
Sweeping and slashing to trap
investments

 

Finance Minister
Nirmala Sitharaman’s sweeping reforms slashing corporate tax rates to bring
them at par with most South Asian and Southeast Asian nations are expected to
trap investments headed even to low-tax destinations like Bangladesh and
Vietnam.

 

While markets
saluted the Minister’s sweeping reforms of the corporate tax rates on Friday,
the best is yet to come, according to experts. The tax rates have become
competitive when compared to most other South Asian and even Southeast Asian
investment destinations.

 

A competitive
environment should help India trap some of the capital fleeing China fearing a
worsening of the US-China trade war and imposition of stiffer sanctions on
Beijing. The tariff war touched off by US President Donald Trump has only
worsened with Chinese President Xi Jinping in no mood to relent. India is
eyeing a major share of the capital moving out of China to boost Prime Minister
Narendra Modi’s ‘Make in India’ initiative, say reports.

 

India’s effective
rate of 25.17% compares well against China’s 25%. The new rates will make India
a good bargain when compared to Pakistan’s 31%, Sri Lanka’s 28% and even
Bangladesh’s 25%. Among the Southeast Asian economies, India can easily steal a
march over the Philippines which has a 30% rate and Indonesia and South Korea
who maintain a 25% rate and Malaysia with 24%. Thailand and Vietnam offer 20%,
but India could score in terms of technically skilled labour and better
infrastructure. Only Taiwan and Singapore with 17% still have a clear advantage
over India.

 

The Finance
Ministry, in consultation with the Ministry of Commerce, has been evolving a
strategy to compete with South Asian neighbours like Bangladesh which have
attracted investors because of the cheaper labour and more conducive land
acquisition laws. Indian officials think the country’s reforms will enhance its
ease of doing business rating and make it capable of taking on even Southeast
Asian competitors. Vietnam, which is drawing a lot of investment fleeing
Mainland China, has been on the Indian crosshairs for some time.

 

Government slashed
the corporate tax rate to 22% from 30% for domestic companies – and proposed a
competitive 15% rate for new investment in manufacturing. The cumulative fiscal
boost emanating from the tax law changes would amount to Rs. 1.45 lakh crores, which
sends a strong signal of the government resolve to revive economic growth, a
report on the The Economic Times website said. To be eligible for the
new concessional tax rates, companies need to forego the existing incentives
and exemptions in force. Even those opting for the status quo, the
minimum alternate tax (MAT) shrinks to 15% from 18.5%. Companies will have the
option of the lower tax rate after the expiry of the tax holidays and
concessions that they enjoy now. Once they choose the new tax rate, they can’t
revert to the concessional regime.

 

Prime Minister
Modi, bound for the US to address the historic ‘Howdy Modi!’ event along with
President Trump, termed the step to cut corporate tax rate ‘historic’, saying
it ‘will give a great stimulus to “Make in India”, attract private investment
from across the globe and help create more jobs.’

 

(Source:
International Business Times – By Prathapan Bhaskaran, 21st
September, 2019)

 

2.      
Recruitment may counter the
slowdown gloom

 

India’s
second-largest employer, Coal India Limited (CIL), is offering 9,000 openings;
4,000 people will be recruited to fill up executive posts and the rest will be
technical and non-technical staff.

 

The massive
recruitment drive to fill up about 9,000 openings in the parent company and
subsidiaries amid the gloom of a general economic slowdown and talk of stiff
divestment targets is cheering up the country’s job market, reports say. Of the
vacancies announced, 4,000 will be of executives in the parent company while
the technical hands will be taken in by the company’s eight subsidiaries, said
a report in the Economic Times. CIL sources say this would be the
biggest recruitment drive of the group in a decade.

 

CIL and its subsidiaries employ about 2,80,000 people, second only to
the Indian Railways, including nearly 18,000 at the executive level. CIL is one
of the public sector undertakings (PSU) that Finance Minister Nirmala
Sitharaman has identified for raising Rs. 3.25 lakh crores through divestment
in the next five years of Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s second stint in
office. The target for the 2019-20 financial year is an estimated Rs. 1.05 lakh
crores.

 

‘Coal India is
recruiting so many executives in a single year in almost a decade in an effort
to fill up all the vacancies that have been pending for several years. Last
year, we recruited only about 1,200 people,’ the report quotes an unidentified
senior Coal India executive as saying.

 

‘Of the 4,000
executives Coal India plans to recruit, 900 would be through advertisements and
interviews in the junior category, another 400 would be recruited from campuses
and some 100 would be miscellaneous, such as medical officers, etc. We have
already recruited 400 executives most of whom are doctors. Another 75 have been
recruited and would be joining soon. The company will recruit around 2,200
additional executives through competitive examinations.’

 

The company’s coal-producing subsidiaries will recruit 5,000 workers and
technical hands, including about 2,300 who will be recruited as part of a
policy of offering jobs to families whose land was acquired for various
projects. Another 2,350 people will be hired on compassionate grounds as part
of the company’s policy of offering a job to one family member of a deceased
employee. About 400 openings will be of a non-technical nature, the report
said.

 

Set up in 1975, CIL
has been seeing mass retirement of a large number of employees at
superannuation in recent years. The number of employees who have left this way
in the last three years is pegged at more than 12,300. The posts have remained
unfilled because of a general recruitment ban in the government. While not all
posts will be filled up, the group companies need large-scale recruitment over
the next few years to ensure adequate workforce strength, the reports say.

 

(Source:
International Business Times – By Prathapan Bhaskaran, 18th September,
2019)

 

II. 
Finance

 

3.      
Credit fairs aka ‘loan melas

 

Credit fairs by
public sector banks will bring early festival cheer to consumers as the
corporate tax bonanza will put on steroids PM Modi’s FDI push after ‘Howdy
Modi!’

 

Finance Minister
Nirmala Sitharaman’s big-ticket reforms are focused on a demand boost for the
revival of the domestic economy. For this, the Ministry has set rolling a
series of steps, apart from the headline reform of corporate tax rates that put
the stock market on steroids. The corporate tax reduction that will entail a
revenue loss of Rs. 1.45 lakh crores to the government is expected to help
Prime Minister Narendra Modi make a big splash at the ‘Howdy Modi!’ event after
which he would be meeting top executives of 16 big US corporate houses in his
foreign direct investments (FDI) campaign.

 

The major takeaways
from the series of announcements Sitharaman made were:

 

(i) Credit fairs (loan melas): The public
sector banks (PSBs) will organise fairs for potential borrowers in 400
districts, boosting liquidity and driving demand in the retail sector across
the country. The rural economy survives on retail demand and the increased
liquidity will help drive demand and spending, thus helping the rural revival,
experts believe;

(ii) NBFC role: Sitharaman’s directive to the PSBs
to ensure the participation of NBFCs in the credit fairs will help improve the
liquidity status of the NBFCs. This is particularly important because the
ailing NBFCs have been shown to be behind the economy’s illiquidity, according
to reports;

(iii) Relief for
MSMEs: The injunction on lenders to desist from declaring loans to micro,
medium and small enterprises (MSMEs) as non-performing assets (NPAs) during
this financial year ending on 31st March, 2020, will help reduce
morbidity in a vital segment of the economy, according to experts. With over 60
million units, the MSME segment is second only to the agriculture sector in
employment generation;

(iv)  MSMEs loan restructuring: Banks have been
directed to use the special dispensation that the RBI circular, ‘MSME sector –
Restructuring of Advances’, dated 1st January, 2019, has made
available. ‘We have also requested that at the branch level banks should make
efforts to sit with such stressed asset accounts of MSMEs to get them out of
the situation,’ Sitharaman said. MSMEs that are unable to repay loans within 90
days of the due date will not be stamped with the NPA tag. The facility will be
available to MSMEs whose aggregate exposure, including non-fund-based
facilities, of banks and NBFCs to the borrower does not exceed Rs. 25 crores as
on 1st January, 2019;

(v)        Spreading liquidity: The Reserve Bank of
India (RBI) has said that there is enough liquidity in the economy after its
fifth successive repo rate cuts. Sitharaman says the credit fairs will ensure
that the liquidity reaches the lowest layer of the economy, driving up
consumption;

(vi) All types of
loans: The credit fairs will be organised as public meetings to be monitored by
Minister of State for Finance Anurag Thakur to ensure that the needy get the
loans;

(vii) The reform
announcements ahead of Prime Minister Modi’s meetings in the US will serve to
send a loud message to industrialists across the world to consider India as a
friendly investment destination, especially when the US-China trade wars are
threatening FDI flow to China.

 

(Source:
International Business Times – By Prathapan Bhaskaran, 20th September,
2019)

 

4.      
Just a face to defy the law?

 

PwC India has been fined more than Rs. 230 crores (£ 26.37 m) by the
Indian Enforcement Department for breaches of the Foreign Exchange Management
Act (FEMA).

 

The ‘Big Four’ firm
had been accused of receiving large foreign investments from Netherlands-based
PricewaterhouseCoopers Services BV, which allegedly had been disguised as
‘grants’ to avoid FEMA. The legislation requires foreign investments in
financial services to be approved by the Reserve Bank of India.

 

The Directorate of
Enforcement was brought in by the Indian Supreme Court to investigate PwC’s
affairs following a public interest petition brought by the Centre for Public
Interest Litigation (CPIL), a non-governmental organisation, in 2013.

 

At the time, CPIL
called for a ruling on whether the ‘Big Four’ in general were operating in
India ‘in violation of law in force in a clandestine manner’, whether effective
steps were being taken to enforce the law and, if this was not happening, what
orders were required to ensure proper enforcement. The Indian government later
backed up the original public interest litigation with a second,
similarly-worded petition.

 

PwC was used as an example to illustrate in the petitions how global
firms were exploiting the law to build up their presence in India and gain
access to lucrative audit markets.

 

In February last
year, the Supreme Court ruled that PwC Services BV Netherlands had enabled its
Indian partners to acquire Dalal & Shah, a chartered accountancy firm based
in Mumbai and Kolkata, through a series of interest-free loans to them. This
‘circuitous route’, the judge said, was in violation of the law.

 

The Dutch firm had also shared profits in the form of licence fees and
network charges and made further investments through grants for enhancement of
skills, he said.

 

The judge concluded
that while the court could not involve itself with policy-making, it was
entitled to look at the policy framework to find out whether safeguards for
enforcement of fundamental rights had been maintained. ‘In the present context,
having regard to the statutory framework… it may prima facie appear that
there is violation of statutory provisions and policy framework, effective
enforcement of which has to be ensured’.

 

‘Statutory
regulatory provisions intended to advance the object of law have to be enforced
meaningfully,’ he continued. ‘No vested interest can flout the same by
manifesting compliance only in form. Compliance has to be in substance. The
law-enforcing agencies are expected to see the real situation.’

 

He said that the
large multinational firms’ compliance was in form, not in substance. ‘Having
got registered partnership firms with the Indian partners, the real
beneficiaries of transacting the business of chartered accountancy remain the
companies of the foreign entities. The partnership firms are merely a face to
defy the law.’

 

According to
reports, the Enforcement Department found that PwC had received the equivalent
of Rs. 229 crores in US dollars. The agency said that they were received as
grants and used ‘for various business purposes, including acquisition of other
Indian companies and paying non-compete fee’.

 

(Source:economia.icaew.com/news/september-2019/pwc-india-breached-indian-foreign-exchange-rules)
  

MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

 

5. Opposition
to data localisation may come down after international tax law

 

Opposition
to India’s data localisation move from overseas companies may go down once a
globally accepted framework of taxing big technology and digital companies
comes into existence, a senior IT Ministry official has said.

 

Mr. S.
Gopalakrishnan, Joint Secretary in the Ministry of Electronics and IT, said
that he was referring to a recent proposal by the Organisation for Economic
Co-operation and Development (OECD) to expand government rights to tax
multinationals, especially big internet firms, by releasing a methodology for
such taxation.

 

He said
that according to the draft personal data protection (PDP) bill, the law would
only set up the framework regarding necessarily localising ‘critical data’ only
in India without a copy of it being elsewhere.

 

But ‘there
will be a lag between the coming of the law and the implementation since the
regulator would then work out the nitty-gritty of what comprises critical data
and thus needs to be stored only in the country,’ he said, adding that the
entire process would take all the stakeholders into consideration.

 

The
officer further clarified that even then, the law would allow the Indian
government in the meanwhile to strike bilateral data treaties with other
countries wherein companies from the partner countries could even store the
critical data overseas.

 

Mr.
Gopalakrishnan was chairing a session on ‘Data Localisation and Global India’.
His comments came during a panel discussion on how some big technology giants
were opposed to the Indian government’s proposed data localisation rules as
outlined in the draft PDP bill which, he said, could soon be tabled in the
Parliament.

 

Speaking
on the opposition from big technology firms on proposed Indian laws around
privacy and security, he added ‘the global tech companies have so far operated
in a regime without specific privacy laws in the U.S. but are now facing a
situation where there are six states that have come out with privacy laws and a
Federal privacy law is expected. Under such circumstances, legislation of a
privacy law in India should not come as a surprise or a shock to them’.

 

(Source:
economictimes.indiatimes.com)

 

6. Now,
ask Alexa to pay utility bills as Amazon adds voice-based feature

 

In yet
another step towards making online buying and other services completely
voice-based and hinged on its virtual assistant Alexa, Amazon announced that
users in India can now pay their utility bills with Amazon Pay just by voice
commands.

 

This new
Alexa feature supports payment of bills across categories such as electricity,
water, post-paid mobile, cooking gas, broadband and DTH among others. ‘Users of
Amazon Echo, Fire TV Stick and other devices with Alexa built-in can just say
commands such as “Alexa, pay my mobile bill” or “Alexa, pay my electricity
bill” to get started,’ the company said.

 

‘This new
integration of Amazon Pay with Alexa will help reduce both time and effort for
customers who use Amazon Pay for bill payments and repeat similar transactions
every month. We are also excited to share that this is an India-first feature
which Alexa customers in India can enjoy before any other international
customers,’ Puneesh Kumar, Country Manager for Alexa Experiences and Devices,
Amazon India, said.

 

The
company last month announced that Alexa can now speak in Hindi. Going forward,
it is planning to launch its voice assistant in a host of other Indian
languages. Taking the competition to Google Assistant, Amazon is ramping up the
usage of Alexa in India by tying up with speaker manufacturers and mobile phone
companies to make Alexa the primary voice assistant on devices. At the moment
Alexa knows 500 skills in Hindi. In English, Alexa can perform over 30,000
tasks.

 

(Source:
www.business-standard.com)

 

II.  world news

 

7. Ex-PCAOB
leader gets prison time for role in KPMG scandal

 

Former
Public Company Accounting Oversight Board Inspections Leader Jeffrey Wada has
been sentenced to nine months in prison for his role central to the
long-running KPMG inspections scandal.

 

Wada was
convicted of one count of conspiracy to commit wire fraud and two counts of
wire fraud in March, 2019 for providing KPMG employees with confidential
information on certain of the PCAOB’s 2016 inspection selections in an effort
to cheat the system. In addition to his jail time, he received a three-year
sentence of supervised release.

 

‘Jeffrey
Wada violated not just the terms of his employment with the PCAOB but also the
law when he provided confidential information about upcoming audit reviews to
co-conspirators at KPMG,’ said U.S. Attorney Geoffrey Berman in a statement.
‘Wada hoped to secure a job at KPMG. What he got was a nine-month prison
sentence.’

 

Wada is
the third figure in the KPMG scandal to receive jail time for his actions. In
September, David Middendorf, former national managing partner for audit quality
and professional practice at KPMG and the individual found by Berman to be ‘at
the top of a chain of corruption,’ was sentenced to one year and one day in
Federal prison and three years of supervised release. Cynthia Holder, another
ex-KPMG and PCAOB employee to whom Wada provided the confidential information,
was sentenced to eight months in Federal prison and two years of supervised
release in August.

 

Wada
joined the scheme in the fall of 2015 when he first provided confidential
information to Holder and repeated the crime in January, 2017 after being
passed over for a promotion at the PCAOB. Referring to the confidential
information as the ‘grocery list’ in a voicemail, he again went to Holder in
2017, but this time provided his resume and asked for assistance in gaining
employment at KPMG.

 

Prior to
the scheme, KPMG fared poorly in PCAOB inspections and in 2014 received
approximately twice as many comments as its competitor firms. The cheating
scandal is documented as having taken place from 2015 to 2017.

 

In June,
the SEC settled charges related to the scandal with KPMG for $50 million, in addition
to revealing allegations of cheating on internal exams that were also covered
in the settlement.

 

(Source:
www.complianceweek.com)

 

8. Can
a new apple take over the world?

 

When you hear that a new variety of apple is being launched with a
multi-million-dollar marketing campaign, you might wonder if you weren’t
listening properly and that the product is actually an Apple iPhone.

 

But now, starting to hit grocery shelves in the U.S. and then overseas
early in 2020, is a new American-born apple that its backers are convinced will
become the new global bestseller – the ‘Cosmic Crisp’.

 

‘The stars are aligning for this apple,’ says Kathryn Grandy, Marketing
Director of U.S. fruit firm Proprietary Variety Management (PVM), the company
handling the $10m (£7.9m) launch of the new variety.

 

A cross-breed between two existing varieties (the Honeycrisp and the
Enterprise), advocates of the Crisp describe it as some sort of apple holy
grail. It is said to be sweet, crisp and juicy. But as importantly, it is said
to have a previously unheralded shelf life, staying fresh for up to a year if
kept chilled.

 

You might think that this all sounds like hyperbole, but hundreds of
apple growers in the Crisp’s home state have bet $40m that it is going to be a
hit.

 

The story of the Crisp began back in 1987 when its breeding programme
started at Washington State University. The idea was to develop a new variety
of apple to help Washington’s then beleaguered apple farmers.

 

First made available for commercial planting in 2017, Washington’s apple
farmers had long heard of just how good the new variety was supposed to be. So
much so that demand for the Crisp was so high that farmers had to enter a
lottery to be able to get their hands on the first seedlings. Their names were
randomly drawn by a computer programme. Sales of Crisp seedlings subsequently
boomed. Today, more than 12 million Crisp trees are growing across Washington,
with orchards covering some 12,000 acres.

 

With the first apples now on the shelves, it is estimated that this
giant planting scheme – said to be the biggest and fastest in world apple
history – has cost the growers a combined $30m.

 

In return for this confidence, the Washington farmers have been given the
exclusive rights to grow and sell the Crisp worldwide until 2027. And as the
Crisp is being marketed as a premium variety, its price reflects this.

 

The first apples are now on sale in the U.S. for $5 per pound (454
grams), which is more than three times the cost of standard varieties. For
every 40-lb box sold, a royalty of 4.75% is shared between Washington State
University and its commercial partner, the previously mentioned PVM.

 

More than 467,000 40-lb boxes are now projected to be shipped before the
end of this year, rising to two million in 2020 and 5.6 million by 2021. The
apple even has a trademarked slogan – ‘Imagine the possibilities’.

 

‘The rate at which Cosmic Crisp is poised to come into the US market in
the next five to eight years is unprecedented,’ says James Luby, a Professor of
Horticultural Science at the University of Minnesota-Twin Cities. ‘If you look
at the past 30 years of apple consumption in the U.S., it’s all flat. And the
profit margins are thin,’ says Prof. Rickard who is an expert in the
agricultural and food sectors. ‘The Cosmic Crisp could increase per capita
consumption of apples in the U.S.’

 

(Source:
www.bbc.com)

 

III. Health

 

9. Kids
and sugary drinks: How clever packaging can deceive parents

 

Though science has shown that sugary drinks are not healthy for
children, fruit drinks and similar beverages accounted for more than half of
all children’s drink sales in 2018, according to a new report.

Fruit drinks and flavoured waters with added sugars made up 62% of the
year’s $2.2 billion children’s drink sales. Healthier drinks, such as water or
juices made from 100% juice, made up 38% of sales during the same year. Many
sweetened drinks have packaging that highlight fresh fruit, when they only
contain 5% actual fruit juice. Experts say children should mainly be given milk
and water to avoid too much sugar.

 

And plenty of money was spent on advertising these beverages. Companies
spent $20.7 million to advertise children’s drinks that contained added sugars.
Children aged 2 to 11 saw more than twice as many TV ads for sweetened drinks
than for drinks without added sweeteners.

 

‘Beverage
companies have said they want to be part of the solution to childhood obesity,
but they continue to market sugar-sweetened children’s drinks directly to young
children on TV and through packages designed to get their attention in the
store,’ said Jennifer L. Harris, PhD, MBA, lead study author and the Rudd
Center’s Director of Marketing Initiatives. ‘Parents may be surprised to know
that paediatricians, dentists and other nutrition experts recommend against
serving any of these drinks to children.’

 

Dr.
Harris’s team evaluated 67 drinks to see the differences between sweetened
drinks and beverages without added sweeteners.

 

Experts say that juice and water blends without added sweeteners have
started to hit the market, but the nutrition claims and images can make it
difficult for parents to pinpoint which drinks are healthier.

 

Sugar-sweetened
fruit drinks marketed to children typically included 5% juice or less, but 80%
of those packages portrayed images of fruit and 60% claimed to have ‘less’ or
‘low’ sugar or ‘no high fructose corn syrup,’ the report said.

(Source:
www.healthline.com)
 

 

MISCELLANEA

1. Technology

 

25.  Apple contractors ‘regularly
hear confidential details’ on Siri recordings

 

Apple contractors regularly hear confidential medical information, drug
deals and recordings of couples having conversations as part of their job
providing quality control, or ‘grading’, to the company’s Siri voice assistant.

 

Although Apple does not explicitly disclose it in its consumer-facing
privacy documentation, a small proportion of Siri recordings are passed on to
contractors working for the company around the world. They are tasked with
grading the responses on a variety of factors, including whether the activation
of the voice assistant was deliberate or accidental, whether the query was
something Siri could be expected to help with and whether Siri’s response was
appropriate.

 

Apple says the data ‘is used to help Siri and dictation… understand you
better and recognise what you say’. But the company does not explicitly state
that that work is undertaken by humans who listen to the ‘pseudonymoused’
recordings.

 

Apple told the Guardian: ‘A small portion of Siri requests are
analysed to improve Siri and dictation. User requests are not associated with
the user’s Apple ID. Siri responses are analysed in secure facilities and all
reviewers are under the obligation to adhere to Apple’s strict confidentiality
requirements.’ The company added that a very small random subset, less than 1%
of daily Siri activations, are used for grading and those used are typically
only a few seconds long.

 

A whistleblower working for the firm, who asked to remain anonymous due
to fears over his job, expressed concern about this lack of disclosure,
particularly given the frequency with which accidental activations pick up extremely
sensitive personal information.

 

The whistleblower said: ‘There have been countless instances of
recordings featuring private discussions between doctors and patients, business
deals, seemingly criminal dealings, sexual encounters and so on. These recordings
are accompanied by user data showing location, contact details and app data.’

 

Apple is not alone in employing human oversight of its automatic voice
assistants. In April, Amazon was revealed to employ staff to listen to some
Alexa recordings and earlier this month Google workers were found to be doing
the same with Google Assistant.

 

(Source: www.theguardian.com)

 

26.  I found your data. It’s for
sale

 

I’ve watched you check in for a flight and seen your doctor refilling a
prescription.

 

I’ve peeked inside corporate networks at reports on faulty rockets. If I
wanted, I could’ve even opened a tax return you only shared with your
accountant.

 

I found your data because it’s for sale online. Even more terrifying:
It’s happening because of software you probably installed yourself.

 

My latest investigation into the secret life of our data is not a fire
drill. Working with an independent security researcher, I found as many as four
million people have been leaking personal and corporate secrets through Chrome
and Firefox. Even a colleague in The Washington Post’s newsroom got
caught up. When we told browser makers Google and Mozilla, they shut these
leaks immediately – but we probably identified only a fraction of the problem.

 

The root of this privacy train wreck is browser extensions. Also known
as add-ons and plug-ins, they’re little programmes used by nearly half of all
desktop web surfers to make browsing better, such as finding coupons or
remembering passwords. People install them assuming that any software offered
in a store run by Chrome or Firefox has got to be legitimate.

 

Not. At. All. Some extensions have a side hustle in spying. From a
privileged perch in your browser, they pass information about where you surf
and what you view into a murky data economy. Think about everything you do in
your browser at work and home – it’s a digital proxy for your brain. Now
imagine those clicks beaming out of your computer to be harvested for
marketers, data brokers or hackers.

 

Some extensions make surveillance sound like a sweet deal: Amazon was
offering people $10 to install its Assistant extension. In the fine print,
Amazon said the extension collects your browsing history and what’s on the
pages you view, though all that data stays inside the giant company. (Amazon
CEO Jeff Bezos owns The Washington Post.) Academic researchers say there
are thousands of extensions that gather browsing data – many with loose or
downright deceptive data practices – lurking in the online stores of Google and
even the more privacy-friendly Mozilla.

 

The extensions we found selling your data show just how dangerous
browser surveillance can be. What’s unusual about this leak is that we got to
watch it taking place. Large swathes of the tech industry treat tracking as an
acceptable way to make money, whether (or not) most of us realise what’s really
going on. Amazon will give you a $10 coupon for it. Google tracks your searches
and even your activity in Chrome to build out a lucrative dossier on you. Facebook
does the same with your activity in its apps and off.

 

Of course, those companies don’t usually leave your personal information
hanging out on the open internet for sale. But just because it’s hidden doesn’t
make it any less scary.

 

(Source: www.washingtonpost.com)

 

27.  UPI is world class and it’s
time to take it international

 

Cryptocurrencies are peer-to-peer electronic cash systems that are
governed not by the authority of a central bank but by digital code.
Transactions are only added to the common distributed ledger if they can be
validated in accordance with the rules stipulated by the code, ensuring that
digital currency once spent cannot be re-spent. For everyone who uses the same
blockchain, its distributed ledger becomes a common source of truth that allows
them to carry out peer-to-peer transactions without the need for validation by
a central entity.

 

Bitcoin is one such cryptocurrency. It uses a decentralised,
permissionless system that allows anyone to validate a transaction, so long as
they meet the technical requirements for operating a node. However, Bitcoin
prioritises decentralisation over speed and scalability. As a result, it is
incapable of processing transactions at the velocity or volume that modern
financial systems demand. As there is a finite limit to the total number of
Bitcoins that will ever be minted, its value fluctuates wildly, resulting in
the sort of volatility that is undesirable in a currency.

 

Facebook recently announced the launch of a new cryptocurrency called
Libra which, it claims, will address the many failings of Bitcoin. Libra has
been designed to operate on a bespoke blockchain running on at least 29 nodes
and backed by a basket of bank deposits and government securities to ensure low
volatility. For the foreseeable future, Libra will function as a permissioned
cryptocurrency to achieve the high transaction throughput and low latency
functionality expected of a global
payment system.

 

Libra will be most useful for underdeveloped countries that lack a
digital financial infrastructure. It will offer them a safe and cost-effective
mechanism for making payments that will scale effortlessly in places where the
use of Facebook and WhatsApp is already widespread. When combined with social
media data, it will allow developers to come up with innovative new products
that incumbent financial sector players will be hard-pressed to match. As the
value of a Libra today is designed to always be close to its value tomorrow and
in the future, it will operate as a currency hedge in countries where exchange
fluctuations are high.

 

I read the Libra White Paper with interest, keen to understand how this
new cryptocurrency would change things for us in India. We are Facebook’s
second largest market outside the US and any financial product it launches is
bound to have an impact on us. However, the more I read, the less convinced I
was that Libra was going to give India anything that it did not already have.

 

In Unified Payments Interface (UPI), India has a robust digital payments
infrastructure that, within just three years of its launch, already
effortlessly processes more than 750 million transactions a month. We have a
network of business correspondents throughout the country who integrate our
online and offline payment systems by converting digital payments into cash and
vice versa. While we may not yet have the data advantage that Libra promises to
bring, once the Data Empowerment and Protection Architecture is fully
implemented, it will give us an entirely new way to build financial products
using its digital consent infrastructure. Admittedly, UPI isn’t decentralised,
but given how difficult it is going to be to migrate away from a permissioned
architecture, it’s not as if Libra really offers much better.

 

That said, there is at least one thing Libra has going for it that UPI
does not – the ability to radically transform how cross-border transfers are
effected. India receives more inward remittances from its diaspora than any
other country in the world ($79 billion in 2018). At present, all the
mechanisms for international transfer of funds are costly, cumbersome and
highly inefficient. A digital currency like Libra, pegged as it is to a basket
of stable currencies, and transferable anywhere in the world, will offer overseas
Indians a cheap, digital way to move money to relatives back home at a fraction
of the cost that they currently spend.

 

In its report on deepening digital payments, the Nandan Nilekani
Committee has recommended that it is time to take UPI global. Several different
options have been proposed, including amending UPI protocols to include
currency conversion support and directly connecting UPI to global payments
systems to allow immediate, low-cost remittances to take place over the UPI
system. There was also a suggestion that UPI specifications and technologies
should be licensed to operators around the world to allow the protocol to
spread outside India. This must be accompanied by amendments in Indian
regulations, so that Indians can use UPI from abroad in much the same way as
Chinese citizens use WeChat from wherever they are in the world.

 

Cryptocurrency-based payment systems are slow and computationally
intensive. While the technology can be optimised, we will keep running up against
its inherent limitations that make it hard to scale to population size. UPI may
not be decentralised, but we know it works well at scale even over the
sometimes patchy mobile networks in India.

 

There is no need to optimise blockchain technologies to meet the needs
of developing markets when we already have a proven, world-class digital
payments protocol in India that can easily be internationalised. Let’s back
ourselves and just do it.

 

(Source: www.livemint.com)

 

2. Health

 

28.  ‘My Guru told me that as long
as I have good health, I should continue to serve society’, says Metro Man
Sreedharan

 

E. Sreedharan, who is revered as the ‘Metro Man’ of India, shared that
his Guru, Poojya Shri Swami BhoomanandaTirthaji, told him that as long as he
has good health he should continue to serve the society with the attitude that
it is an offering to God.

 

A recipient of the prestigious Padma Vibhushan in 2008,
Sreedharan also said, ‘When the assignment is for the good of society, I don’t
pull back. It is job satisfaction which excites me.’

 

Answering what keeps him going at 88, he said, ‘I
was very religious in my early years – shaped by my parents that way. And I
moved to spirituality particularly after the association with my guru. I like austerity
and simplicity.’ His habit of waking up and sleeping on time and a disciplined
life kept him fit. ‘I am fastidious about exercise, be it in the open air or
regular yoga. I was a sportsman in my young days, was captain of the college
football team. This addiction to regular exercise has remained with me,’ he
said.

 

At present Sreedharan is directly in charge of the Kochi Metro, while he
is also serving the Jammu and Kashmir government for light metro projects to be
implemented in Jammu and Srinagar cities.

 

He is also serving as a consultant to the Uttar Pradesh government for
the Lucknow, Kanpur and Meerut metro projects. Though he had tendered his
resignation from the post last month because of time constraints, it was not
accepted by the State Government led by Chief Minister Yogi Adityanath.

 

(Source: www.swarajyamag.com)

 

29.  Passive use of social media
may increase depression

 

Great holiday, fantastic party and incredible food, everyone shows their
life in the best light on social networking apps like Facebook and Twitter, but
researchers have found that people who use these apps passively are in danger
of developing depressive symptoms.

 

‘Being confronted by social information on the Internet – which is
selective and only positive and favourable – leads to lower self-esteem,’ says
study lead author Phillip Ozimek from the Ruhr University Bochum.

 

As low self-esteem is closely related to depressive symptoms,
researchers consider this short-term effect to be a potential source of danger.

 

For the study, published in the journal Behaviour and Information
Technology
, the researchers interviewed over 800 people about their use of
Facebook, their tendency to compare themselves with others, their level of
self-esteem and the occurrence of depressive symptoms.

 

They found a positive correlation between passive Facebook use – not
posting pictures – and depressive symptoms when subjects have an increased need
to make social comparisons of their abilities.

 

‘So, when I have a strong need to compare and keep seeing in my News
Feed that other people are having great holidays, making great deals and buying
great, expensive things while everything I see out of my office window is grey
and overcast, it lowers my self-esteem,’ Ozimek said.

 

(Source:
www.gadgetsnow.com)

 

MISCELLANEA

1. Technology

 

5. Amazon workers are listening to what you tell Alexa

 

Tens of millions of people use smart speakers and their voice software
to play games, find music or trawl for trivia. Millions more are reluctant to
invite the devices and their powerful microphones into their homes out of
concern that someone might be listening.

 

Sometimes, someone is.

 

Amazon has employed thousands of people around the world to help improve
the Alexa digital assistant powering its line of Echo speakers. The team
listens to voice recordings captured in Echo owners’ homes and offices. The
recordings are transcribed, annotated and then fed back into the software as
part of an effort to eliminate gaps in Alexa’s understanding of human speech
and help it better respond to commands.

 

The Alexa voice review process, described by seven people who have
worked on the programme, highlights the often-overlooked human role in training
software algorithms. In marketing materials Amazon says Alexa “lives in the
cloud and is always getting smarter.” But like many software tools built to
learn from experience, humans are doing some of the teaching.

 

The team comprises a mix of contractors and full-time Amazon employees
who work in outposts from Boston to Costa Rica and from India to Romania,
according to the people who signed non-disclosure agreements barring them from
speaking publicly about the programme. They work nine hours a day, with each
reviewer parsing as many as 1,000 audio clips per shift, according to two
workers based at Amazon’s Bucharest office, which takes up the top three floors
of the Global Worth building in the Romanian capital’s up-and-coming Pipera
district. The modern facility stands out amid the crumbling infrastructure and
bears no exterior sign advertising Amazon’s presence.

“We have strict technical and operational safeguards and have a zero
tolerance policy for the abuse of our system. Employees do not have direct
access to information that can identify the person or account as part of this
workflow. All information is treated with high confidentiality and we use
multi-factor authentication to restrict access, service encryption and audits
of our control environment to protect it.”

 

Amazon, in its marketing and privacy policy materials, doesn’t
explicitly say humans are listening to recordings of some conversations picked
up by Alexa. “We use your requests to Alexa to train our speech recognition and
natural language understanding systems,” the company says in a list of
frequently asked questions. In Alexa’s privacy settings, Amazon gives users the
option of disabling the use of their voice recordings for the development of
new features.

 

(Source: www.bloomberg.com; 11th April, 2019)

 

6. Huawei can bring 5G to India in 20 days if given the green light

 

At a time when Indian telecom operators are looking to speed up 5G
roll-outs, Huawei India said that it is fully prepared to bring 5G to the
Indian market and can do so in a matter of 20 days once given the green light.
Addressing the India Mobile Conclave, Huawei India CEO Jay Chen said, “We are
committed to the India market and will be happy to work with service providers
and enterprises to bring 5G faster, safer and smarter to this market.”

 

Chen said that India’s rapid pace of digital adoption is being driven by
the government’s commitment towards digitising key aspects of the digital
economy. “In the last couple of years almost every new innovation introduced to
this market is introduced by Huawei. Massive MIMO is a word we first introduced
in India 5 years back.”

 

Elaborating on the potential of 5G for an emerging digital economy like
India, Chen said that “5G is like electricity” which will enable all industries
and help realise the digital mission and the goals set by the National Digital
Communications Policy (NDCP). Huawei is a global leader in 5G and it already
has 30 5G commercial contracts globally,” Chen added.

 

(Source: The Economic Times; 22nd March, 2019)

 

2.  World News

 

7. Executions are falling worldwide

 

By one measure, at least, the world might be getting a bit less grisly.
The number of death sentences carried out worldwide fell by 30%, from 993 in
2017 to 690 last year, according to the latest annual count published by
Amnesty International, a human rights organisation. Those numbers are
consistent with the downward trend since the recent high of 2015 when 1,634
people were executed.

 

A reason to rejoice? Perhaps not. Amnesty’s count includes only known
executions, so it should be treated as the lowest possible estimate of judicial
killings. China, which is considered the most ruthless country when it comes to
capital punishment, has not been included in the total since 2009. Executions
there are thought to be in the thousands.

 

(Source: www.economist.com; 10th April, 2019)

 

8. Uber warns it might never make a profit

 

Uber Technologies has 91 million users, but growth is slowing and it may
never make a profit, the ride-hailing company said in its initial public
offering filing. The document gave the first comprehensive financial picture of
the decade-old company that was started after its founders struggled to get a
cab on a snowy night and has changed the way much of the world travels.

 

The S-1 filing underscores the rapid growth of Uber’s business in the
last three years and also how a string of public scandals and increased
competition from rivals have weighed on its plans to attract and retain riders.
The disclosure also highlighted how far Uber remains from turning a profit,
with the company cautioning that it expects operating expenses to
“increase significantly in the foreseeable future” and it “may
not achieve profitability”. Uber lost $ 3.03 billion ($ 4.25 billion) in
2018 from operations. The filing with the US Securities and Exchange Commission
revealed that Uber had 91 million average monthly active users on its
platforms, including for ride-hailing and Uber Eats, at the end of 2018. This
is up 33.8% from 2017, but growth slowed from 51% a year earlier. Uber in 2018
had revenue of $ 11.3 billion, up around 42% over 2017, again below the 106%
growth the previous year.

 

Uber set a placeholder amount of $ 1 billion but did not specify the
size of the IPO. It was reported this week that Uber plans to sell around $ 10
billion worth of stock at a valuation of between $ 90 billion and $ 100
billion. Investment bankers had previously told Uber it could be worth as much
as $ 120 billion. Uber would be the largest IPO since that of the Chinese
e-commerce company the Alibaba Group in 2014, which raised $ 25 billion.

 

After making the public filing, Uber will begin a roadshow of investor
presentations on April 29. The company is on track to price its IPO and begin
trading on the New York Stock Exchange in early May. Uber faces questions over
how it will navigate any transition towards self-driving vehicles, a technology
seen as potentially dramatically lowering costs but which could also disrupt
its business model.

 

One advantage Uber will likely seek to play up to investors is that it
is the largest player in many of the markets in which it operates. Analysts
consider building scale is crucial for Uber’s business model to become
profitable.




(Source: www.afr.com; 12th April, 2019)

 

9. Will technical factors push Bitcoin to $ 50,000 in the coming years?

 

Veteran trader Peter Brandt recently made a bold prediction, saying that
Bitcoin could reach $ 50,000 in the next two years. Credited with forecasting
Bitcoin’s more than 80% decline in 2018, Brandt cited market history and
technical analysis when providing this estimate.

 

“I believe that charts reflect underlying supply and demand fundamentals
and that’s how we have to look at it,” he stated on Yahoo Finance YFi PM. After
bottoming out in 2015, Bitcoin prices enjoyed a parabolic advance, emphasised
Brandt. Now, he expects crypto currencies will once again enter a parabolic
bull market.

 

While several analysts emphasised that Brandt’s prediction certainly
could materialise, many were understandably sceptical, emphasising their
wariness of price forecasts. “Peter Brandt’s assessment is purely based on
technical indicators and market history,” noted Joe DiPasquale, CEO of crypto
currency fund of hedge funds, BitBull Capital. “While technical analysis has a
place in all markets, past performance is no guarantee for future results,” he
stated.

 

“Meanwhile, however, the current rally is consolidating nicely and we
can expect further price appreciation if the trend continues,” added
DiPasquale. Several analysts emphasised the key importance of Bitcoin expanding
its user base, noting that if the digital currency makes enough progress on
this front, it could hit $ 50,000.

 

(Source: www.forbes.com; 10th April, 2019)

 

10. Vietnam orders monks to stop profiting from karma rituals

 

Vietnamese authorities have ordered monks at a popular Buddhist pagoda
to stop “soul summoning” and “bad karma eviction” ceremonies after an
investigation found the rituals were a scam.

 

Tens of thousands of worshippers have been paying the 18th
century Ba Vang pagoda in northern Quang Ninh province between one million and
several hundred million dong ($ 45 to $ 13,500) to have their bad karma
vanquished, according to the state-run Lao Dong (Labour) newspaper. The
Committee for Religious Affairs, a government body, issued a statement on its
website on Friday saying “the ritual goes against Buddhist philosophy and
violates Vietnam’s law on religion and folk beliefs.”

 

“It has a negative impact on social order and security,” it added.

 

Three times a month, monks hold a two-day ceremony to “summon wandering
souls” and “remove bad karma,” demanding donations, supposedly representing
good deeds, to help cure bad karma and make up for supposed bad deeds in
previous lives. Such rituals have been going on for years, but the practice has
drawn unfavourable attention as the amounts demanded by the monks soared to the
point where they began taking payments by bank transfers and by instalments.

 

Ba Vang pagoda was built on a mountain slope in Uong Bi district of
Quang Ninh province. It was recently renovated and expanded to become one of
Vietnam’s largest pagoda complexes. Only a minority of Vietnam’s 95 million
people follow Buddhism, but many non-Buddhists go to pagodas and temples and
practise a form of folk religion that includes some Buddhist practices.
Religions that are not registered with the government are prohibited. The Ba
Vang pagoda belongs to a registered Vietnamese Buddhist association.

 

(Source: www.apnews.com; 22nd March, 2019)

 

11. Black hole snapped: How the picture of one of the universe’s most
secretive objects was clicked

 

By definition, a black hole can’t be seen. As a cosmic gobbler of all
matter on its periphery, these sinkholes have gravitational fields so powerful
that even light cannot escape them, rendering their contents invisible. As the
concept of black holes (the cemeteries of spent stars above a certain mass and
massive cosmic objects) followed from Einstein’s theories of general
relativity, scientists have had intricate mathematical descriptions and
speculation on how they look, how many of them exist, how they behave, where
they might be located and their relationship to the universe. Based on this,
there has been a plethora of visual and artistic descriptions of black holes.
However, there has never been visual confirmation of their existence, until
now.

 

On 10th April, 2018 astronomers shared an image, now
christened on Indian Twitter as a “giant medu vada in the sky,” from the
black hole at Messier 87 or M87. It was a blurred, yellowish orange frame
surrounding a black centre. While this wasn’t vastly different from how
astronomers and artists have visualised black holes for decades, it’s still
great to see reality correspond to imagination. The black hole measures 40 billion
km. across – three million times the size of the earth – and is 55 million
light years from earth. (A light year is about 9.46 trillion km.). It is bigger
than our entire solar system and a scientist described it to the BBC as “the
heavyweight champion of black holes in the universe.” The image has been
analysed in six studies co-authored by 200 experts from 60-odd institutions and
published in Astrophysical Journal Letters.

 

Since the 1970s, astronomers have known that there are “super massive”
black holes (about a billion times heavier than the sun) in the Milky Way or
galaxies close to it. While black holes themselves are invisible, the region
around them – the luminous frenzy of charged particles from matter in their
vicinity – is, in theory, “visible”. Since black holes are the result, mostly,
of heavy stars collapsing in on themselves, radiation emitted by particles
within the disc are heated to billions of degrees as they swirl around the
black hole at close to the speed of light, before vanishing into them.

 

The astronomers used a technique known as interferometry, which combines
radiation from eight telescopes from around the world in a way that it appears
as one single telescope capture. What this virtual telescope could capture were
traces – electromagnetic radiation – from jets of particles spewed from the
event horizons of the black hole. This faint radiation, in the form of mostly
radio waves, would have travelled trillions of kilometres and for the telescope
to observe them would be the equivalent of trying to snap a picture of an ant
from the moon.

 

(Source: www.thehindu.com; 13th
April, 2019)
   

 

MISCELLANEA

1.   
Technology

17 Google made $4.7 billion from the news
industry in 2018

 

It’s more than the
combined ticket sales of the last two “Avengers” movies. It’s more than what
virtually any professional sports team is worth. And it’s the amount that
Google made from the work of news publishers in 2018 via search and Google
News, according to a study by the News Media Alliance.

 

The journalists who create that content deserve a cut of that
$4.7 billion, said David Chavern, the president and chief executive of the
alliance which represents more than 2,000 newspapers across the country,
including The New York Times. “They make money off this arrangement,” Mr.
Chavern said, “and there needs to be a better outcome for news publishers.”

 

That $4.7 billion is nearly as much as the $5.1 billion
brought in by the United States news industry as a whole from digital
advertising last year – and the News Media Alliance cautioned that its estimate
for Google’s income was conservative. For one thing, it does not count the
value of the personal data the company collects on consumers every time they
click on an article like this one.

 

(Source:
www.nytimes.com)


18 Facebook will launch its new
cryptocurrency soon

 

Facebook is preparing to
launch its own cryptocurrency sooner than you expect. The company plans to hand
over control of the currency system to outside backers as part of a move to
reassure financial regulators. Facebook has reportedly been in discussions with
dozens of financial institutions and tech companies that will oversee the new
cryptocurrency and contribute capital to the programme. The payment system
would be free of transition fees and is designed to be used all over the world,
especially in developed nations.

The digital token is
reportedly designed to serve as a global currency – one that Facebook hopes
will facilitate peer-to-peer payments among its more than two billion users.
Zuckerberg hinted at Facebook’s crypto ambitions during the company’s developer
conference in May. “When I think about all the different ways that people
interact privately, I think payments is one of the areas where we have an
opportunity to make it a lot easier,” Zuckerberg said.

 

In recent weeks, several
news outlets have reported that Facebook is planning to launch its own
payments-focused cryptocurrency. People will be able to use the currency to
transfer funds and make purchases on Facebook messaging platforms such as
WhatsApp and Messenger.

 

The news has caused quite
a stir in the crypto world – and on Wall Street. Anthony Pompliano, founder and
partner at blockchain-focused investment firm Morgan Creek Digital, believes
Facebook’s cryptocurrency could quickly become the “most used product in
crypto.”

 

(Source: www.wsj.com
and www.finance.yahoo.com)

 

19 Hottest cryptocurrency is up by
360% this year and its name isn’t Bitcoin

 

Litecoin, which has gained
more than 330% since the beginning of the year, is outpacing all its crypto
peers, including Ether and XRP, as well as the best-known and largest token
Bitcoin. It has a market cap of about $8.4 billion, making it the
seventh-largest digital asset, according to data compiled by Mosaic Research
Ltd.

 

The rally can partly be
attributed to Litecoin’s upcoming halving (also known as halvening), whereby
the number of coins awarded to so-called miners is slashed by 50%. The idea is
that a cut in supply will not only drive up its price but will also prevent an
erosion of value. Miners currently receive 25 new Litecoins per block, but
following the halving – which is expected to fall on August 6 – they will
receive 12.5.

Halving typically happens
roughly every four years and the run-up to it has, in the past, coincided with
a rally in the underlying tokens. Four years ago, when the last Litecoin
halving occurred, the coin gained about 60% in the three months beforehand
according to data from CoinMarketCap.com. And the phenomenon isn’t isolated to
Litecoin, either – Bitcoin is set to undergo its next halving in May, 2020 and
its biggest proponents are already seizing on the drop in supply as a catalyst
for further gains.

 

“Every time we’ve seen a
halving event in Bitcoin or Litecoin, the price has risen astronomically,” said
Mati Greenspan, senior market analyst at trading platform eToro, in a phone
interview. “So if that pattern continues, what we’ve seen so far is small
potatoes in comparison,” he said. “This is quite normal for the crypto market.”

 

These developments, among
others, have pushed up the price of Bitcoin by 120% since the beginning of the
year. Ether, too, has gained close to 100%. Litecoin, which was trading below
$30 at the end of last year, is now worth $130.

 

(Source:
www.hindustantimes.com)

 

20 Coding & App-making just a
child’s play for these school kids

 

Vyom Bagrecha loves to
read, draw and play computer games. Just like any other nine-year-old, albeit
with one exception. Vyom also does software coding and has already created a
health app that is now available on Google Play Store for mobile users on the
Android platform.

 

“I’m now working on a
parking-related application, and when I’m older I want to be able to code
robots to save the environment,” said the 4th grade student of Nahar
International School in Mumbai. Vyom’s curiosity about how games work made his
mother enrol him for an online coding programme. Very few schools taught
mathematics during the Industrial Revolution and there was widespread
unemployment till schools added it to the curriculum. I see that happening with
coding and think it should be a part of the curriculum, says his mother.

 

Vyom’s app is a basic
health tool which, for example, converts the number of glasses of water one has
had into litres, and such like. Children are creating all kinds of things
online, including simple drawings to games developed by children as young as
ten.

 

Schools, too, are starting
to impart coding skills to kids, making the shift from teaching traditional
computer programmes. Some schools are setting up coding clubs, while some are
even adopting such programmes over the traditional computer science textbooks

 

Manju Rana, Principal at
Seth Anandram Jaipuria School in Ghaziabad, says the school started a coding
club about a year ago to foster logical reasoning and encourage kids to find
their own ways and methods of learning. Since most children are taking to this
as a hobby, it takes away the pressure associated with learning something as
part of their core curriculum. Corporates, too, have started school-level
initiatives to expose kids to coding.

 

(Source:
tech.economictimes.indiatimes.com)

 

2. World news

 

21 PwC’s $5.8 mn UK fine strengthens
demand to break up big-four audit firms

 

PricewaterhouseCoopers was
fined 4.55 million pounds ($5.8 million) by the U.K.’s accounting watchdog over
failings in its handling of technology firm Redcentric Plc, giving fresh
ammunition to critics calling for a breakup of the so-called “Big-Four”
auditing firms.

 

The penalty was reduced
from 6.5 million pounds after the company admitted its wrongdoing ahead of a
final decision by the Financial Reporting Council. Two PwC partners, Jaskamal
Sarai and Arif Ahmad, were each fined a reduced 140,000 pounds after admitting
breaches in the standards of their work and were also given a “severe
reprimand.”

 

The breaches were
“numerous and in certain cases were of a basic and / or fundamental nature,
evidencing a serious lack of competence in conducting the statutory audit
work,” according to an FRC statement.

 

This latest transgression
adds to the scrutiny of PricewaterhouseCoopers, Deloitte, EY and KPMG, which
together control more than 90% of UK audits for large companies. The
Competition and Markets Authority has urged a split of their operations amid
allegations of conflicts of interest and a failure to spot a series of
high-profile corporate failures, including the wake of building contractor
Carillion Plc.

 

The FRC’s sanctions follow
an investigation that began more than two years ago into PwC’s handling of
Redcentric’s financial statements for 2015 and 2016 after an initial review
showed that Redcentric had overstated its net assets and profits after tax by
20.8 million pounds.

“We are sorry that our
work fell below the professional standards expected of us,” PwC said in an
emailed statement. The firm said it has taken numerous steps to strengthen
processes and is investing 30 million pounds “to provide greater focus on the
quality and public interest responsibilities of PwC’s statutory audit
services.” An outside spokesman for Redcentric declined to comment.

 (Source:
www.business-standard.com)

 

22 US wants to stall digital tax,
hoping to wear down allies

 

The Trump administration is deep in talks with 129 other
countries on implementing a new standard for taxing digital companies,
including Alphabet Inc’s Google, Facebook Inc and Amazon.com Inc – but its
heart lies elsewhere in the discussions. Rather than usher in with allies a new
era of technology taxation, the United States’ goal is to fend off foreign
taxes aimed at American companies.

 

The strategy: String out
the negotiations for as long as possible to delay the pain and hold out for an
agreement with softer edges, say people involved with and briefed on the talks
at the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD). By
slow-walking the discussions, American officials hope they can reach a global
agreement that amounts to a small-scale tax increase on global companies, but
averts a massive tax increase by foreign countries that see US companies as
sources of revenue.

 

It is in the interest of the
US to prevent a proliferation of unilateral digital services taxes, said Jeff
Vander Wolk, an international tax lawyer at Squire Patton Boggs LLP and an OECD
official until last year. The way to get them to back off is to get them into a
multilateral agreement. Any future pact would likely create a whole new set of
rules governing which countries have the right to tax the companies, which
corporate profits were taxable and how to resolve the inevitable disputes that
would arise.

 

Deciding where profits should
be taxed is no easy feat in a digital economy. Corporations can have their
headquarters in the US, intellectual property stored in Ireland, engineers
developing some of the algorithms in India and users all over the world. The US
is hoping to harness this complexity and use the power of roadblock, according
to lawyers and tax experts who have discussed the project with Treasury
Department officials.

 

Striking a deal could mean
that American companies pay more in taxes, but the US could lose out on tax
revenue. Yet, the absence of the deal could be even worse. If talks break down,
every country is likely to pass its own laws. That could mean American
companies are taxed multiple times on the same profits from a number of
countries.

 

The new tax rules would
mean that taxes are paid based on where users are located. That would allocate
tax revenue away from countries containing lots of headquarters – such as the
US, Sweden, Ireland and other European countries – and to populous nations.

 (Source: www.thehindubusinessline.com)

 

3. Health

23 Why spending just two hours a week
in nature is good for you

 

Anyone who’s watched a
child run free in a forest or play in a stream doesn’t need a research study to
tell them that spending time in nature is good for kids’ health. It’s something
that most parents know intuitively. When kids have the chance to play free in
nature, they’re happier, better behaved and more connected socially.

 

Most adults know that
nature is good for them, too – that’s why we often leave behind the stress of
work to vacation in beautiful, natural places. But how much time in nature do
we need to be healthier? A group led by researchers in the United Kingdom tried
to answer that question, in what they describe as a first step towards coming up
with a nature version of national physical activity guidelines.

 

In the study published
recently, researchers surveyed more than 19,000 people in the United Kingdom
about the recreational time they spent in nature during the past week, along
with their self-reported health and well-being. They found that people who
spent at least 120 minutes a week in nature saw a boost in their mental and
physical health, compared to people who didn’t spend any time in nature.

 

The researchers say the
size of the health benefits was similar to what people would get by meeting the
guidelines for physical activity. However, it didn’t matter how or where people
racked up the 120 minutes – many short walks near home were just as effective
as a longer hike on the weekend at a park. The researchers point out that this
is just a first step towards being able to recommend that people spend a
certain amount of time each week in nature.

 (Source:
www.healthline.com)

 

24 For the third time, WHO declines to
declare the Ebola outbreak an emergency

 

Even with more than 1,400
dead, the World Health Organization says the risk of the disease spreading
beyond the region remains low and declaring an emergency could have backfired.
For the third time, WHO has declined to declare the Ebola outbreak in the
Democratic Republic of Congo a public health emergency, though the outbreak has
spread into neighbouring Uganda and ranks as the second deadliest in history.

 

An expert panel advised
WHO against it because the risk of the disease spreading beyond the region
remained low and declaring an emergency could have backfired. Other countries
might have reacted by stopping flights to the region, closing borders or
restricting travel, steps that could have damaged Congo’s economy.

 

Dr. Preben Aavitsland, a Norwegian
public health expert who served as the acting chairman of the emergency
committee advising WHO, said there was “not much to be gained but potentially a
lot to lose.”

At the same time, the
committee of ten infectious disease experts said in a statement that it was
“deeply disappointed” that donor nations have not given as much money as needed
by WHO and affected nations to battle the outbreak.

But some global health
experts have argued in recent months that WHO should declare an emergency to
bring the world’s attention to the Ebola crisis. Dr. Jeremy Farrar, director of
the Wellcome Trust, a health foundation based in London, said that such a
declaration would have strengthened efforts to control the outbreak. “It would
have raised the levels of international political support and enhanced
diplomatic, public health, security and logistic efforts,” he said. WHO
Director-General Dr. Tedros Adhanom Gebreyesus accepted the committee’s
recommendation, saying that even if the outbreak did not meet the criteria for
an emergency declaration, “for the affected families this is very much an
emergency.”

 

WHO has requested $98 million for its response and has
received only $44 million so far. In an interview before the announcement, Dr.
Tedros said it had recently received commitments from Britain, the United
States and Germany.

 

“We’ve never seen an
outbreak like this,” he said. “It happened in a chronic war zone and overlapped
with an election that politicised the whole situation. Militia attacks kept
interrupting the operations, and when that happens, the virus gets a free
ride.”

 

(Source: www.nytimes.com)

MISCELLANEA

1. Economy

12

Govt
to soon come out with format to lodge complaints with Lokpal

 

The Central Government will
soon come out with a format for lodging a complaint with anti-corruption
ombudsman Lokpal, officials said on 16th May. As per norms, a
complaint shall be filed in the prescribed form to be notified by the
Government. “The form will be made public soon,” said a senior
Personnel Ministry official. Although the form for filing a complaint has not
yet been notified, the Lokpal decided to scrutinise all the complaints received
in its office till 16th April, 2019 in whatever form they were sent,
according to the anti-corruption ombudsman’s website.

 

“After scrutiny, complaints that did not fall within the
mandate of the Lokpal were disposed of and complainants are being informed
accordingly,” it said, without giving details of the complaints.

 

Lokpal Chairperson Justice Pinaki Chandra Ghose inaugurated
the website – www.lokpal.gov.in – in the presence of all the eight members of
the anti-corruption ombudsman. As per the website, the office of Lokpal is at
“The Ashok” Hotel in Chanakyapuri in the national capital.

 

President Ram Nath Kovind had administered the oath of office
to Justice Ghose as the Chairperson of Lokpal on 23rd March. Justice
Ghose, 66, had retired as a Supreme Court judge in May, 2017. He had last
served as a member of the National Human Rights Commission (NHRC).

 

Eight members of the Lokpal panel were administered the oath
by Justice Ghose on 27th March. Former Chief Justices of different
high courts – Justices Dilip B. Bhosale, Pradip Kumar Mohanty, Abhilasha Kumari
and Ajay Kumar Tripathi – took the oath as judicial members of the Lokpal.

 

Along with them, the first (former) woman chief of the
Sashastra Seema Bal (SSB) Archana Ramasundaram, ex-Maharashtra Chief Secretary
Dinesh Kumar Jain, former IRS officer Mahender Singh and Gujarat cadre ex-IAS
officer Indrajeet Prasad Gautam were sworn in as the Lokpal’s non-judicial
members.

 

According to the rules, there is a provision for a
Chairperson and a maximum of eight members in the Lokpal panel. Of these, four
need to be judicial members. The Lokpal Act, which envisages appointment of a
Lokpal at the Centre and Lokayuktas in States to look into cases of corruption
against certain categories of public servants, was passed in 2013.

(Source: Business Today
– PTI, New Delhi, 16th May, 2019)

 

13

RBI
releases ‘Vision 2021’ for payment system to increase digital transactions

 

The RBI said the payment systems landscape will continue to
change with further innovation and entry of more players which is expected to
ensure optimal cost to the customers and freer access to multiple payment
system options.

 

Aiming at a ‘cash-lite’ society, the Reserve Bank of India on
15th May, 2019 released a vision document for ensuring a safe,
secure, convenient, quick and affordable e-payment system as it expects the
number of digital transactions to increase more than four times to 8,707 crores
in December, 2021.

 

The ‘Payment and Settlement Systems in India: Vision
2019-2021’, with its core theme of ‘Empowering Exceptional (E)payment
Experience’, envisages to achieve ‘a highly digital and cash-lite society’
through the goalposts of competition, cost effectiveness, convenience and
confidence (4Cs).

 

The RBI said the payment systems landscape will continue to
change with further innovation and entry of more players which is expected to
ensure optimal cost to the customers and freer access to multiple payment
system options.

“The Reserve Bank of India will implement the approach
outlined in this ‘vision’ during the period 2019-2021,” it said. The
previous ‘vision document’ covered the period 2016 to 2018. The latest document
said payment systems like UPI / IMPS are likely to register average annualised
growth of over 100% and NEFT at 40% over the ‘vision’ period (up to December,
2021). The number of digital transactions is expected to increase more than
four times from 2,069 crores in December, 2018 to 8,707 crores in December,
2021.

 

“While the approach of the RBI will continue to be of
minimal intervention in the pricing of charges to customers for digital
payments, all efforts will be made towards facilitating the operation of
payment systems which are efficient and price-attractive,” it said.

 

The basis shall have to be that pricing is reasonable to
encourage usage and also pass on to the customer the benefit of cost saved on
managing cash in the system, it added. The document talks about creating
customer awareness, setting up a 24X7 helpline and a self-regulatory
organisation for system operators and service providers, among others.

 

In all, the ‘Payment
Systems Vision 2021’ has 36 specific action points and 12 specific outcomes.
The aim is to enhance customer experience, empower payment system operators and
service providers, enable the payments ecosystem and infrastructure, put in
place forward-looking regulations and undertake risk-focused supervision.

 

The ‘no-compromise’ approach towards safety and security of
payment systems remains a hallmark of the ‘vision’, the RBI added.

 (Source: Business Today
– PTI, New Delhi, 16th May, 2019)

 

2. Corporate

14

Corporate
Affairs Ministry amends rules related to incorporation of companiess

 

The Corporate Affairs
Ministry has amended the rules pertaining to incorporation of companies to
provide more clarity and uniformity in choosing names for companies, according
to an official. The Ministry has brought in amendments to the Companies
(Incorporation) Rules, 2014.

 

The move comes against the backdrop of instances where
applications by companies for registering their names have been rejected due to
various reasons, including trademark issues and proposed names being too
general.

 

The official said the changes have been made to ensure more
clarity, uniformity and transparency in approving the names for companies at
the time of incorporation. He also noted that the rules have been updated so
that there is clarity for people to apply, as well as for officers to process
the requests appropriately.

 

Among others things, the Ministry has now provided
illustrations regarding applicability of various names.

 

(Source: Business Today, PTI, New Delhi 16th
May, 2019)

 

3. Science

15

NASA’s
asteroid warning: Gigantic rogue body heading towards earth at 93,000 kmph

 

This rogue asteroid is more than 1,280 feet long and it is
heading towards earth at a breathtaking speed of 93,000 kilometres per hour
(kmph). NASA has confirmed this development.

 

Asteroid trackers of the US space agency revealed that this
massive space body will make a close fly-by to planet earth in the early hours
of 20th May, 2019.

 

As per NASA, 2019 JB1 is a near-earth object (NEO). NASA
considers all asteroids and comets in an orbit of the sun at a distance of 1.3
astronomical units as near-earth objects. It should be noted that one
astronomical unit is equal to about 92.95 million miles and is actually the
distance between the earth and the sun.

 

On 20th May, 2019, JB1 may come as close as 6.4
million km. to earth. A distance of 6.4 million km. may seem too huge in human
terms, but considering the depth and vastness of the universe, this distance is
quite small in astronomical terms. Even though the chances of 2019 JB1 hitting
the earth are very few, NASA believes that any impact from such gigantic space
bodies could bring about cataclysmic effects in the affected area.

 

“If a rocky meteoroid
larger than 25 metres but smaller than one kilometre (a little more than half a
mile) were to hit earth, it would likely cause local damage to the impact area.
We believe anything larger than one to two kilometres (one kilometre is a
little more than one-half mile) could have worldwide effects,” wrote NASA
on its website.

In the meantime, NASA is busy developing its planetary
defence weapon to protect the earth from dreaded asteroid hits which may happen
in the future. NASA scientists believe that this weapon, which is basically a
spacecraft, can deviate rogue space bodies from its trajectory.

 

A few weeks back, NASA administrator Jim Bridenstine also
revealed that the possibilities of an apocalyptic asteroid hit are not
something reserved for Hollywood disaster movies. In a recent speech at the
Planetary Defence Conference, Bridenstine predicted that life-threatening
asteroid hits could happen in the future.

(Source: International Business Times, By Nirmal
Narayanan, 16th May, 2019)

 

4. Technology

16

Google
is fixing the most annoying thing about internet browsing

 

Google is rolling out a new feature that will let you delete
your location and web activities automatically.

 

Privacy is one of the biggest concerns in our modern society.
Everybody wants to hide their web habits, app usage and location data. But
Google aims to make its product helpful to the users. And for that, Google
needs to know about your web habits and the location where you love to go. So,
if you are concerned about your privacy and also want a helpful Android, then
you just need to delete your activity manually. This is a very painful and
time-consuming task. That changes now.

 

In an official blog post from Google, the internet search
titan is talking about a new privacy feature that all the users are going to
love. After receiving feedback, Google is going to launch a new privacy feature
that will help you to auto-delete your location and web activities.

 

Google has confirmed the feature will roll out in the coming
weeks. Currently, you just have a feature to control off / on your location and
activity history and you can delete your history manually.

 

Google’s new auto-delete feature works on a timed system and
users can set the time duration to delete the data. You have two options: 3
months or 18 months. Google will automatically delete your location and activity
from your account after the selected time duration.

 

It’s certainly a positive step for Google towards privacy.
The blog post also hints that the feature will also come soon to other aspects
of your Google experience, but it’s coming first to location history and your
web and app activity.

 

Prior to this, an AP investigation revealed that Google was
still steering and storing the location history of users who had turned off the
history and the search giant used this data for target ads.

 

This month is very important for Google as the I/O annual
conference is going to commence on 7th May and Google is going to launch its
budget Pixel 3a and 3a XL devices in the conference. With these devices, Google
is going to foray into a mid-budget smart phone. The new pixel series is also
coming to India on the same day of launch. Apart from the Pixel 3a, Google will
also do some innovative announcements during the annual conference. So, stay
tuned for more updates

 

(Source: International Business Times, By
Ratnesh Kumar, 3rd May, 2019)

MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

 

1.      
Blockchain can protect privacy during
coronavirus crisis

 

Citizens the world over typically
demand their governments respond to catastrophes by reaching out and helping
people when they are most in need. The coronavirus pandemic is no different –
and political leaders know they must step up. But when institutions stretch out
a hand, should we blindly accept the way governments take so much new control
over our lives in exchange for their help?

 

It is clear there must be some
restrictions on normal life to fight a pandemic. But we risk the crisis
response becoming an overreach and imposing limits on personal freedoms that
could last long after the virus is defeated.

 

How much privacy are we willing
to sacrifice to protect populations from the virus? In Israel, the government
has authorised its security service to track mobile phone location data of
people suspected to have coronavirus using techniques originally deployed for
anti-terrorism surveillance. China took advantage of facial-recognition systems
to trace people’s movements in its anti-virus fight. And the United States is
engaging in public-private partnerships with the likes of Palantir, a
data-scraping company known for its predictive policing tools.

 

These emergency measures risk
normalising monitoring mechanisms in much the same way that the 9/11 terror
attacks triggered legislation enabling broad spying on citizens. That
ostensibly temporary legislation remains largely unchecked almost two decades
later.

 

But just as technology empowers
governments to ratchet up their surveillance, so can technology unleash
opportunities to protect people’s privacy – and help keep them safe. The
solution lies with Blockchain, a decentralised technology offering data
sovereignty that facilitates individuals choosing what data they are willing to
share and with whom.

By combining Blockchain and
secure hardware, smart devices can achieve their intended purpose while also
preserving privacy. For example, residents in an apartment building or a gated
neighbourhood can use a Blockchain-powered security camera and choose which
agencies receive the data generated by the camera. This is ‘privacy-by-design’
built to protect individuals.

 

It avoids data being held in any
central point such as a government or corporation, where all too often leaks
and hacks or profit-driven data-selling deprive people of any chance of
privacy. With Blockchain’s unique ability to store information in a decentralised
way, the data has no such vulnerability.

 

2.       Human-centred
privacy protection

 

There is an
emerging philosophy in privacy spheres, which is ‘bring the code to the data,
not data to the code’. One technology that employs this is confidential computing
which combines encrypted data from users and open-source algorithms from
companies in a trusted, neutral hardware environment to run privacy-preserving
computations. This human-centred approach protects users’ privacy while still
providing the insights that governments need. It also ensures user data is only
used for its intended purpose, as the algorithms applied to the data can be
verified.

 

Blockchain
also plays an important role here. In these privacy-preserving computations,
Blockchain technology coordinates the activity – such as uploading or deleting
data – for various stakeholders in the decentralised process. Blockchain
ensures the data can always be audited, meaning the consumer who provided the
information will always be able to tell if their data has been used for the
purpose they intended it, and for that purpose alone.

 

3.       Keep
safe and keep your privacy

 

Protecting data privacy in the
ongoing coronavirus crisis is a bigger concern than many people might realise.
Just as people have come over time to understand how important it is to wash
their hands with soap, so will people increasingly learn to practice data
hygiene to keep ownership of their own data.

 

People need to be aware that once
data is out there, it is impossible to fully rein it back in. Scraping data
that users voluntarily put on the internet is one thing. But leveraging fears
in a crisis to incentivise them to upload highly sensitive data that they never
intended to share is dangerous and permanent.

 

For example, U.S. President
Donald Trump directed anxious Americans to Google’s Project Baseline, citing
that it would help with coronavirus. But its Terms and Conditions state: ‘If
you withdraw your consent, information that has already been gathered will be
retained. Once you join, your membership could last indefinitely, or could be
ended at any time without your permission.’ Talk about giving up any rights to
your own data!

 

These kinds of crises initiatives
highlight how vulnerable we all are to surveillance and losing control of our
data. Still, the good news is that Blockchain means we do not have to trust a
government or a Google. Instead, we can rely on Blockchain to enable us to
share only what we want to share. In short, we can help keep ourselves safe –
and keep our privacy, too.

 

(Source: International Business
Times – Opinion by Raullen Chai, 26th March, 2020

Raullen Chai is the co-founder
and CEO of IoTeX, a technology company that uses Blockchain to secure hardware
devices and data storage to build end-to-end encrypted device ecosystems for
the Internet of Trusted Things)

 

4.      
E-commerce faring better now, issues
being resolved, says DPIIT Secretary

 

Secretary in the Department for
Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (DPIIT) Guruprasad Mohapatra has said
that thanks to several follow-ups, relaxations have been given to e-commerce
players by the Home Ministry. The government has held several meetings with
them to resolve issues arising due to the lockdown and the situation is now
improving on a daily basis. ‘The e-commerce position is much better now than
what it was on Day One of the lockdown’.

 

E-commerce representatives had
shared the problems faced by them in the movement of essential goods by
delivery boys due to the lockdown.

 

Traders and e-commerce companies
had raised concerns over police beating up delivery boys in various states
while they were doing their duty.

 

Commerce and Industry Minister
Piyush Goyal had earlier said the government was committed to ensuring that
essential goods reached people in the most safe and convenient manner.

 

Home Secretary Ajay Bhalla and
the DPIIT Secretary also held detailed meetings with traders and e-commerce
firms in this regard.

 

The DPIIT has set up a control
room to monitor the real-time status of transportation and delivery of
essential commodities amid the coronavirus lockdown. It is also monitoring
difficulties being faced by various stakeholders.

 

(Source: Business Standard –
Press Trust of India, 4th April, 2020)

 

II. Markets

 

5.      
Coronavirus outbreak eats into stock
valuations, market plunges 34%

 

The Indian
stock market has plunged 34% from its record high. As a result, the
price-to-earnings (P/E) ratio for the Nifty50 Index has declined to 12.3 from
18 at the start of the year. The Nifty’s valuation is still slightly above the
2008-09 global financial crisis trough level, when it had fallen to 11.

 

However, a
record 50% of the Nifty stocks are currently trading at a single-digit P/E
ratio. So, is this a good time for bargain-hunting? Experts say such low valuations
are a signal that the market is pricing in huge disappointment in earnings due
to the demand shock created by the lockdowns to contain Covid-19.

 

Stocks whose
outlook is better haven’t got much cheaper. For example, Nestle India,
Hindustan Unilever, Asian Paints and Britannia still quote at valuations of
more than 40 times.

 

(Source: Business Standard – By
Samie Modak, 4th April, 2020)

 

III.  Business

 

6.       Coronavirus
pandemic delivers a major blow to struggling shipping industry

 

The developing Covid-19-related
scene brings to light once again the symbiosis between the global shipping
industry and world economic growth.

 

The furious speed at which
Covid-19 has spread from the most populous of all continents, Asia, to Europe
and then to the US killing thousands of people, is sending the global economy
reeling. As country after country, including India is enforcing a comprehensive
lockdown of life the economic cost of which remains anybody’s guess, all
stakeholders of shipping and ports across the globe are scurrying for cover.
The possibility of a repeat of lockdowns in India and elsewhere cannot be
dismissed at this stage. Thanks to Covid-19, maritime operators are likely to
contend with a crisis bigger than what they faced in the wake of the economic
meltdown of 2008-09.

 

The developing Covid-19-related
scene brings to light once again the symbiosis between the global shipping
industry and world economic growth that, in turn, leaves a major impact on
merchandise and services trade among nations. International Monetary Fund (IMF)
Managing Director Kristalina Georgieva warns that the damage being wrought by
the Covid-19 pandemic could be the ‘gravest threat’ to the global economy since
the financial crisis more than a decade ago. Describing Covid-19 as the ‘No. 1
risk for the world economy with multidimensional ramifications’, ratings and
research organisation CRISIL has drastically cut the gross domestic product
(GDP) growth forecast for India for 2021 fiscal to 3.5% from the earlier 5.2%.

 

To the horror of maritime
operators, who are facing the greatest existential challenge in decades as
Covid-19 deals a major blow to trade, the Organisation for Economic
Co-operation and Development (OECD) says global growth this year could sink to
1.5% from 2.9% forecast ahead of the virus outbreak.

 

The World Trade Organisation
(WTO) goods trade barometer published on 17th February showed the
real-time measure of trade trends at 95.5, down from 96.6 recorded in November,
2019, well below the baseline value of 100. This suggests below-trend growth in
goods trade. In WTO’s reckoning, services trade will remain under growing pressure
as well. What the two WTO readings, however, say only partly captures the
likely economic impact of Covid-19. The next couple of WTO barometer readings
of goods and services trade will invariably show further declines with their
consequential impact on shipping, ports and related services.

 

London-based analytics group, IHS
Markit, said in an early January report, well before coronavirus started
spreading its fangs across the globe and lockdowns in major trading
nations,  that after global trade grew by
a disappointingly low 0.6% in 2018 and 0.3% in 2019, the ‘world merchandise
trade volume is forecast to grow 2.7% in 2020.’ If this happens, global
merchandise trade volume this year would reach 14.175 billion tonnes (bt) from
13.804 bt in 2019. But the IHS Markit forecast was based on world real GDP
growth of 2.5% in the current year, so trade growth prediction will also fall
on its face. Shipping is, therefore, destined to bear the brunt as around 90%
of world trade is carried by sea.

 

Headwinds buffeted global dry
bulk trade through most of last year. Trade tensions between the US and China
left in their trail collateral damage on many other trading nations. Major
mining disasters in Brazil and then weather-related disruptions in prominent
Australian mining regions upset iron ore and coal shipments. A toxic
combination of geopolitical tensions, trade restrictions and low GDP rise
restricted global trade growth to around 1% in 2019. As a result, points out
New York-based maritime consulting Seabury, global container cargo volume last
year amounted to around 152 million twenty-foot equivalent unit (TEU), a
piffling growth of 0.8% on 2018.

 

For both global shipping and
logistics giants Maersk and Hapag-Lloyd, India is an important centre for
delivery and receipt of cargoes in containers. What will be the precise impact
of the still unfolding pandemic on the shipping industry and ports is a subject
of speculation. Maersk of Denmark, which made a 2019 earnings forecast of $5.5
billion in February, has now decided to ‘suspend’ it. It says in a statement:
‘The current situation gives great uncertainties about global demand for
containers as a result of Covid-19 pandemic and the measures taken by
governments to contain the outbreak.’ Incidentally, several seafarers of Maersk
vessels suspected of coronavirus infection had to be evacuated for treatment in
the Chinese city of Ningbo.

 

In a tone similar to Maersk,
Germany headquartered Hapag-Lloyd says: ‘The year 2020 will be very unusual,
after we have seen that conditions in many markets have changed very rapidly in
recent weeks as a result of the coronavirus.’ China, on which the rest of the
world has become heavily dependent for supply of components and semi-finished
and finished products, claims to have controlled Covid-19. But the global
shipping crisis was progressively spawned by Chinese ports becoming
non-operational January onwards as logistics support, including movement of
goods-carrying trucks and wagons, came to a standstill due to the nationwide
lockdown. China is an important trading partner of India – our 2019 imports
from China were $74.72 billion and exports to that country $17.95 billion – and
major disruptions in sailings between the two countries upset the production
schedules of many companies here.

 

Hapag-Lloyd says China returning
to normal is ‘positive news’ for the shipping industry. But this is
‘considerably overshadowed’ by all the major economies of the West standing in
the throes of ‘collapse’. Such developments can only have serious consequences
for the shipping industry. Indian port operators are experiencing a drop in
cargo volumes since February and no one is certain about the turnaround time.
Container shipping lines are idling vessels at a record pace, resulting in
growing numbers of boxes being removed from the trade network, as they go on
cutting sailings on all major trade lanes.

 

Only a few
very large shipping lines with plenty of cash such as Cosco of China, Maersk
and Hapag-Lloyd will be able to weather the current storm, albeit
with profits taking a hit. But how will smaller Indian companies, forced to
cancel sailings generate cash to pay for chartered ships, ship maintenance and
staff salaries? In the current situation, New Delhi is left with no option but
to shelve the disinvestment of Shipping Corporation of India whose performance
has been uninspiring for a long time.

 

(Source:
Business Standard – By Kunal Bose, 2nd April, 2020)

MISCELLANEA

I.
T
echnology

 

18. Amazon, Flipkart
challenge new Indian tax on online sellers

 

Amazon and Walmart’s Flipkart are among
online retailers demanding that India scale back a proposed tax on third-party
sellers on their platforms, saying the burden of compliance will hurt the
fledgling industry. The online retail industry is braced for a possible 1% tax
on each sale made by sellers on their platforms from April if the proposal is
approved by Parliament next month.

 

The move is part of a broader plan by
the government to increase tax revenues and counter a sharp economic slowdown
due to weakening consumer demand. But the tax will hurt the country’s fledgling
e-commerce sector, according to a presentation prepared by the Federation of
Indian Chambers of Commerce and Industry (FICCI) for the government.

 

The Finance Ministry declined to
comment. Some third-party sellers are also pushing back against the tax,
arguing that it would negatively impact their working capital, adding that they
already contribute to a nationwide sales tax.

 

This tax will be ‘extremely detrimental
to the growth and sustenance’ of small online sellers and make the model
‘unviable’, Unexo Life Sciences, a seller of healthcare products on Amazon’s
India website, said in an email to the Central Board of Direct Taxes. Online
vendors, or sellers with revenue of less than half a million rupees in the previous
year, as well as brick-and-mortar retailers, will be exempted from the new tax,
although they are subject to the nationwide sales tax.

 

The tax would apply to the income of
drivers on ride hailing firms, such Uber and Ola, as well as sales on restaurant
aggregators, including Zomato and Swiggy.

 

(Source:
in.reuters.com)

 

II. World News

 

19. Coronavirus could
damage global growth in 2020: IMF

 

The coronavirus epidemic could damage
global economic growth this year, the IMF Head said on Sunday, but a sharp and
rapid economic rebound could follow. ‘There may be a cut that we are still
hoping would be in the 0.1-0.2 percentage space,’ the MD of the International Monetary
Fund, Kristalina Georgieva, told the Global Women’s Forum in Dubai.

 

The full impact of the spreading disease
that has already killed more than 1,700 people would depend on how quickly it
was contained. ‘I advise everybody not to jump to premature conclusions. There
is still a great deal of uncertainty. We operate with scenarios, not yet with
projections, ask me in 10 days,’ Georgieva said.

 

In its January update to the World
Economic Outlook, the IMF lowered the global economic growth forecast in 2020
by 0.1 percentage point to 3.3%, following a 2.9% growth the previous year, the
lowest in a decade. The MD said it was ‘too early’ to assess the full impact of
the epidemic but acknowledged that it had already affected sectors such as
tourism and transportation.

 

‘It is too early to say because we don’t
yet quite know the nature of this virus. We don’t know how quickly China will
be able to contain it. We don’t know whether it will spread to the rest of the
world.’ If the disease is ‘contained rapidly, there can be a sharp drop and a
very rapid rebound’, in what is known as a V-shaped impact, she said.

 

Compared to the impact of the Severe
Acute Respiratory Syndrome (SARS) in 2002, she pointed out that China’s economy
then made up just 8.0% of the global economy. Now, that figure was 19%. The
trade agreement between the United States and China, the world’s first and
second economies, had reduced the disease’s impact on the global economy.

 

But the world should be concerned ‘about
sluggish growth’ impacted by uncertainty. 
‘We are now stuck with low productivity growth, low economic growth, low
interest rates and low inflation,’ the IMF chief told the Dubai forum.

 

(Source:
www.business-standard.com)

 

III. Health

 

20. Coronavirus
disease advice for the public – Basic protective measures suggested by WHO

 

Wash your hands
frequently

Wash your hands frequently with soap and
water or use an alcohol-based hand-rub if your hands are not visibly dirty.

 

Why? Washing your hands with soap and
water or using alcohol-based hand-rub eliminates the virus if it is on your
hands.

 

Practice respiratory
hygiene

When coughing and sneezing, cover mouth
and nose with flexed elbow or tissue – discard tissue immediately into a closed
bin and clean your hands with alcohol-based hand-rub or soap and water.

 

Why? Covering your mouth and nose when
coughing and sneezing prevent the spread of germs and viruses. If you sneeze or
cough into your hands, you may contaminate objects or people that you touch.

 

Maintain social distancing

Maintain at least 1 metre (3 feet)
distance between yourself and other people, particularly those who are
coughing, sneezing and have a fever.

 

Why? When someone who is infected with a
respiratory disease like 2019-nCoV coughs or sneezes, that person projects
(ejects) small droplets containing the virus. If you are too close, you may
breathe in the virus.

 

Avoid touching eyes,
nose and mouth

Why? Your hands touch many surfaces
which may be contaminated with the virus. If you touch your eyes, nose or mouth
with your contaminated hands, you may transfer the virus from the surface to
yourself.

 

If you have fever,
cough and difficulty breathing, seek medical care early

Tell your health care provider if you
have travelled in an area in China where 2019-nCoV has been reported, or if you
have been in close contact with someone who has travelled from China and has
respiratory symptoms.

 

Why? Whenever you have fever, cough and
difficulty in breathing, it’s important to seek medical attention promptly as
this may be due to a respiratory infection, or any other serious condition.
Respiratory symptoms with fever can have a range of causes, and depending on
your personal travel history and circumstances, 2019-nCoV could be one of them.

 

If you have mild
respiratory symptoms and no travel history to or within China

In such a case, carefully practice basic
respiratory and hand hygiene and stay at home until you have recovered.

 

Practice general
hygiene measures when visiting live animal markets, wet markets or animal
product markets

Ensure regular hand washing with soap
and potable water after touching animals and animal products; avoid touching
eyes, nose or mouth with hands; and avoid contact with sick animals or spoiled
animal products. Strictly avoid any contact with other animals in the market
(such as stray cats and dogs, rodents, birds, bats). Avoid contact with
potentially contaminated animal waste or fluids on the soil or structures of
shops and market facilities.

 

Avoid consumption of
raw or undercooked animal products

Handle raw meat, milk or animal organs
with care to avoid cross-contamination with uncooked foods, as per good food
safety practices.

 

(Source: www.who.int)

 

21. Over 1 lakh
deaths in 29 cities due to air pollution: Study

 

While Environment Minister Prakash
Javadekar is often heard claiming that there is no correlation between air
pollution levels and premature deaths, the latest Indian study published in a
leading international journal suggests a close correlation.

 

In fact, over one lakh deaths in 29
Indian cities may be attributed to the rising PM 2.5 levels. According to a
study by two IIT Kanpur experts, published in the latest edition of the
environmental journal ‘Science of the Total Environment’, the national capital heads
the pack. Kolkata, Mumbai, Chennai and Ahmedabad are not far behind. Delhi tops
the list of 29 cities with a million plus population.

 

The study adds that Ischemic Heart
Disease (IHD) is the leading cause of death accounting for 58% of the PM
2.5-related premature deaths. The most affected are children under the age of
five and the ‘productive age group’ of 25-50 years, suggests the study titled
‘Cause and Age, Specific Premature Mortality Attributable to PM 2.5 Exposure:
An Analysis for Million Plus Cities’. This paper has used the 2016 data for the
29 cities as that is the latest year for which the registered all-cause death
data is available from the Civil Registration System. It is modelled on the
basis of the 2015 Global Burden of Disease report.

 

The study has been authored by air
pollution expert Mukesh Kumar of IIT Kanpur along with Prateik Saini. Kumar
also authored the 2015 report on sources of air pollution in Delhi. ‘While
studies have also been done earlier, this one is based on Ischemic Heart
Disease and actual measured data on PM 2.5-related mortality. The data is
age-specific and cause-specific and therefore helps us interpret and show the
clear correlation between pollution levels and death rate,” Kumar stated.

 

(Source: www.economictimes.com)   

 


 

MISCELLANEA

I.
Business News

19. An emoji is worth a thousand words

On the day dedicated to the little pictures that save a
thousand characters on phone and computer keypads – 17th July –
hopefully, people remembered that thanks to emojis the world is going back to
the days of unfettered, unlettered visual communication. Language has come full
circle from our most ancient ancestors’ parietal art to the graphic novels and
emojis of our times, obviating the need for letters, numbers and punctuation
marks. As emojis make further inroads into our written communication, the only
people who may have reason to grumble are grammarians and pedants, as this mode
disregards all rules and, indeed, language itself.

 

The purists could conceivably have retained some clout if
emoticons had prevailed as they use letters, numbers and punctuation marks. But
they are now increasingly irrelevant as in the expanding emoji world there is
simply no need to know words such
as hippopotomonstrosesquippedaliophobia or its correct spelling, much less
devise a pictographic equivalent for it.

 

Esperanto has been trying for 133 years to become the world’s
preferred auxiliary language, but in one-eighth of that time – especially since
2010 – emojis have already found their way into well over 90% of online
communication. With its ability to express emotions as well as an idea, emojis
are clearly the text-best thing to verbal conversation.

 

(Source: ET Bureau – 18th
July, 2020)

 

II.
Business

20. Global real estate
investment plunged by 33% in first half of the year

 

KEY POINTS

(1) The largest decline was
seen in the Asia Pacific region, down 45%,

(2) By sector, investments
in hotels suffered the steepest drop, down 59% on a global basis,

(3) Industrial properties
showed the most resilience, with investments slipping by only 4%.

 

Cross-border investments in
global real estate plunged by 33% in the first half of the year compared to the
first half of 2019, according to a report released by Savills, the London-based
global real estate services provider.

 

The largest declines were
seen in the Asia Pacific region, down 45%, and the Americas, down 36%.

 

By sector, investments in
hotels suffered the steepest drop, down 59% on a global basis. Investments in
retail properties and office spaces plunged 41% and 40%, respectively.

 

Industrial properties
showed the most resilience, with investments slipping by only 4%.

 

Interestingly, investments
in residential properties in Asia Pacific actually surged by 105% – partly
boosted by the purchase of a Japanese apartment portfolio by Blackstone Group
for about $3 billion in February, 2020.

 

‘Overall, the global 33%
fall in real estate investment activity so far this year is less than the decrease
at the start of the global financial crisis in the first half of 2008, when
real estate investment volumes across the world fell by 49% and continued
falling until mid-2009,’ said Sophie Chick, Director of Savills World Research
team. ‘Unsurprisingly, those asset classes that have been most [affected] by
social distancing measures have been hit hardest, while industrial and
residential, which is a long-term income play, have been impacted least.’

 

By region, Europe, the
Middle East and Africa, or EMEA, saw only a 19% decline in investments.

 

‘The huge increase in
entity-level deals in EMEA has helped insulate that market from the biggest
falls as some buyers have used this period for opportunistic M&A or equity
deals,’ Chick explained.

 

Simon Hope, Savills’s head
of global capital markets, added, ‘Volumes are expected to remain well below
pre-pandemic levels for the rest of 2020 as investors wait for market clarity.
However, certain sectors are expected to outperform as investors focus on
secure assets, namely logistics, residential and life sciences.’

 

Hope also noted that
looking ahead, ‘there seems to be general consensus across G8 governments
around the world to build their way out of this downturn, turning on a tap of
capital for infrastructure projects. This generally bodes well for the real
estate industry as it potentially creates more assets to invest in as well as
reducing unemployment rates.’

 

(Source:
International Business Times – By Palash Ghosh, 20th July, 2020)

 

III.
Financial accounting news

21. How U.K. audit scandals pushed Big Four toward
split: QuickTake

 

A spate of scandals has put accounting firms in the U.K. on
the back foot. The collapse of Carillion Plc and subsequently Thomas Cook Group
Plc, have been among cases that raised questions about auditing standards at
the so-called Big Four firms. In response, Deloitte, Ernst & Young, KPMG
and PricewaterhouseCoopers have agreed to separate their auditing and
consulting departments by 2024 to avert possible conflicts of interest, a move
that critics say does not go far enough.

 

1. How bad have things got?

Bad enough that the U.K. government promised to reform the
audit industry after a Parliamentary report two years ago into the collapse of
Carillion, a major outsourcing company. The report panned Carillion’s
accounting methods, KPMG’s soft audits and weak accounting regulation.
Sidetracked by Brexit, a general election and the coronavirus pandemic, the
government has yet to follow through. In the meantime, the accounting firms
have taken action along with the regulator, the Financial Reporting Council,
partly to pre-empt government moves.

 

2. What have they agreed to?

The plan, announced on 6th July, to split
consultants from auditors aims to ensure the Big Four won’t baulk at tough
audits so as not to jeopardise lucrative consulting contracts at the same
companies. In the regulator’s words, the firms need to do a better job of
backing ‘auditors making tough decisions.’ The deal is a significant concession
by the Big Four, which fiercely opposed splitting auditing functions. However,
it doesn’t convincingly address conflicts of interest between supposedly
independent auditors selling consulting work to their clients. Under the deal,
the auditors can still earn close to half of their revenues from consulting,
staff can switch between audit and consulting positions, and auditors are under
the control of the firm’s chief executive officer who also oversees the
consulting divisions.

 

3. Will it work?

Unlikely. Richard Murphy, an accountant and economics
professor at City University in London, says this is a cosmetic exercise
designed to make the Big Four look more independent but ignores the lack of
independence and competition that have blighted audit quality in the U.K.
Critics say the voluntary agreement lacks regulatory muscle and will not be
enforceable. Some groups have said that it will fail to stimulate competition
from smaller firms or make auditors more independent of their clients.

 

4. What about the regulator?

The FRC has powers to sanction firms and individual
accountants for deficient auditing, and does so. Without legislation, however,
the agreement isn’t legally enforceable and has been criticised for allowing
the big firms to continue offering consulting services. The move was taken
partially to pre-empt lawmakers from weighing in with their own, likely
tougher, solution.

 

5. Why the need for reform?

The Carillion collapse in 2018 that shocked lawmakers into
action came after the government refused to bail it out, costing almost 3,000
jobs and leaving 30,000 suppliers and sub-contractors with 2 billion pounds
($2.5 billion) in unpaid bills. Administrators liquidating its assets believe
KPMG’s auditing was negligent in relation to its long-term construction
contracts and goodwill. Thomas Cook collapsed in September, 2019, leading to
9,000 job losses in the U.K. and leaving 150,000 tourists stuck overseas. That
also sparked an investigation by the FRC into auditor Ernst & Young.

 

6. Have things improved since then?

No. Middle Eastern hospital operator NMC Health Plc, listed
in London, started unravelling this year after unearthing undisclosed debt amid
allegations of fraud, leading to the departure of top executives. The FRC
opened a probe into Ernst & Young’s auditing of NMC’s financial statements.
And in Germany the admission by payments company Wirecard AG in June that 1.9
billion euros ($2.2 billion) it had reported as assets probably never existed
led to the resignation of Chief Executive Officer Markus Braun and his
subsequent arrest, with the company filing for court protection from creditors.
Ernst & Young’s refusal to greenlight Wirecard’s long-delayed 2019
financial report followed reports by the Financial Times raising
questions about Wirecard’s accounting practices. Ernst & Young called it an
‘elaborate’ fraud that even a very rigorous probe may not have discovered.

 

7. What will the government do?

The U.K. government has promised to replace the FRC with a
new regulator, the Audit, Reporting and Governance Authority, as recommended by
an independent report in 2018. Unlike the FRC, this will be a statutory body
with legal powers granted by Parliament to regulate the big accounting firms
directly. The government still says it will act on the findings of three
reports it commissioned after Carillion’s collapse. Beyond the
accounting-consulting split, the recommendations included requiring large listed
companies on the FTSE 350, such as Aviva Plc and Tesco Plc, to use joint
auditors to help bring other firms into the market and creating a distinct
auditing, as opposed to accounting, profession. All these moves would require
legislation, however, and Parliament may not have the time to pass the
necessary laws.

 

8. Does this sound familiar?

Yes, it’s reminiscent of regulatory action taken in
Washington almost two decades ago. Since 2002, auditors of publicly-traded
companies in the U.S. operate under strict rules that bar them from providing
most consulting services to their audit clients. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act was
part of Congress’s response to accounting scandals that brought down Arthur
Andersen LLP and its clients Enron Corp. and WorldCom Inc. It also imposed
audit regulations and created the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board,
which enforces standards and annually inspects the largest firms. U.S.
regulators are increasingly concerned about the patchwork of regulations in
force around the world. Securities and Exchange Commission chief Jay Clayton
said in December that he wants more financial reporting and audit uniformity
worldwide.

 

9. What’s next in the U.K.?

The Big Four have promised to submit plans to the FRC by
October next year, before a split effective in 2024. That gives the government
time to pass legislation and audit reform proposals may be released in the
coming months. Though legislation would supersede the agreement, there is
speculation the government could use this pact as a reason to put audit reform
on the back burner.

 

(Source: Bloomberg Tax – By Guy
Collins, Hugo Miller, 17th July, 2020)

MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

 

14. Apple claims ‘half a trillion dollars’
App Store economy

 

Apple has said that more than
85% of that figure occurred via transactions from which it did not take a
commission. The announcement comes at a time when Apple and other US tech
giants are facing increased anti-competition scrutiny. A leading developer has
also called on the iPhone-maker to lower the fees it charges, ahead of its
annual developers’ conference next week.

 

The study was commissioned by
Apple but carried out by economists at the Boston-based consultancy Analysis
Group. It surveyed billings and sales related to apps running on the tech
firm’s iOS, Mac, Watch and Apple TV platforms.

 

These included:

  •     in-app advertising via
    apps such as Twitter and Pinterest,
  •     the sale of physical
    goods via apps such as Asos and Amazon,
  •     the sale of digital goods
    and services via apps including Mario Kart Tour and Tinder,
  •     travel bookings via apps
    such as Uber and British Airways,
  •     food deliveries via apps
    including Just Eat and Deliveroo,
  •     subscriptions to media
    apps including The Times newspaper and Netflix, and
  •     subscriptions to work
    apps including Zoom and Slack.

 

The report attempted to
account for spending that occurred externally but led to content being used
within an app – for example, a direct payment to Spotify, whose songs were then
listened to via its iPhone app. Likewise, it subtracted a proportion of the
charge of in-app purchases whose content was used elsewhere – for example, a
Now TV subscription taken out via Sky’s app, if most of the shows were then
watched directly on a TV’s own app.

 

In total, the economists said
$519 billion (£406 billion) had been generated via Apple’s software eco-system.
The figure excludes sales generated by the Android and Windows versions of the
same products. Physical goods and offline services accounted for the biggest
share of the sum – $413 billion. By contrast, digital goods and services, from
which Apple typically takes a 30% cut, accounted for $61 billion.

 

(Source:
bbc.com)

 

15. How Elon Musk aims to revolutionise
battery technology

 

Elon Musk has perhaps the
most exciting portfolio of businesses on the planet. There’s SpaceX with its
mission to Mars and Tesla with its super-fast hi-tech electric cars. He claims
his Hyperloop concept could revolutionise public transport. And even his Boring
Company is kind of interesting – it aims to find new ways to dig tunnels. So
which one will end up changing the world most? His battery business is also in
contention. But the compact, lightweight lithium batteries that mean you can
now stream movies on wafer-thin phones, will soon be powering much more of your
life. Yet the market certainly seems to reckon that they are the future. Just
look at the Tesla’s share price. Last week, it briefly nudged ahead of Toyota
to become the world’s most valuable car firm, even though the Japanese giant
sold 30 times as many vehicles last year.

 

One reason is that Elon Musk
has been teasing investors and rivals with the promise of ‘battery day’
sometime soon, at which he will announce a series of advancements in battery
tech. And cars are not the only vast new battery market. You might have seen a
story about how the world is slowly weaning itself off coal. Well, gigantic
batteries connected to our electricity grids are going to be central to the
great renewable energy revolution, too.

 

The first of these was
announced just last week when the Chinese battery-maker that supplies most of
the major car makers, including Tesla, revealed it had produced the first
‘million mile battery’. Contemporary Amperex Technology (CATL) says its new battery
is capable of powering a vehicle for more than a million miles (1.2 million, to
be precise – or 1.9 million km.) over a 16-year lifespan. Most car batteries
offer warranties for 60,000-150,000 miles over a three-to-eight-year period.
This is a huge improvement in battery life, but will cost just 10% more than
existing products.

 

Having a
battery you never need to change is obviously good news for the electric car
industry. But longer-lasting batteries are also essential for what’s known as
‘stationary’ storage, too. These are the batteries we can attach to wind
turbines or solar panels so that renewable energy is available when the sun
isn’t shining or the wind isn’t blowing. Fairly soon, you might even want a
stationary battery in your home to store cheap off-peak electricity, or to
collect the power your own solar panels generate.

 

(Source:
bbc.com)

 

II. World News

 

16. US
cities are losing 36 million trees a year

 

If you’re looking for a
reason to care about tree loss, this summer’s record-breaking heat waves might
be it. Trees can lower summer daytime temperatures by as much as 10 degrees
Fahrenheit, according to a recent study.

 

But tree cover in US cities
is shrinking. A study published last year by the US Forest Service found that
we lost 36 million trees annually from urban and rural communities over a
five-year period. That’s a 1% drop from 2009 to 2014.

 

If we continue on this path,
‘cities will become warmer, more polluted and generally more unhealthy for
inhabitants,’ said David Nowak, a senior US Forest Service scientist and
co-author of the study.

 

Nowak says there are many
reasons our tree canopy is declining, including hurricanes, tornadoes, fires,
insects and disease. But the one reason for tree loss that humans can control
is sensible development.

 

‘We see the tree cover being
swapped out for impervious cover, which means when we look at the photographs,
what was there is now replaced with a parking lot or a building,’ Nowak said.
More than 80% of the US population lives in urban areas, and most Americans
live in forested regions along the East and West coasts,’ Nowak says.

‘Every time we put a road
down, we put a building and we cut a tree or add a tree, it not only affects
that site, it affects the region.’ The study placed a value on tree loss based
on trees’ role in air pollution removal and energy conservation. The lost value
amounted to $96 million a year.

 

(Source:
cnn.com)

 

17. STEC
bags Rs. 1,126-crore civil contract Package 4 of Delhi-Meerut RRTS Line

 

Chinese multinational civil construction
firm Shanghai Tunnel Engineering Co. Ltd. (STEC) has emerged as the lowest
bidder among five for the construction of the 5.6 km. underground section
between New Ashok Nagar and Sahibabad of the Delhi-Meerut RRTS corridor.

 

When the National Capital
Region Transport Corporation Limited (NCRTC) opened financial bids for the
Delhi-Ghaziabad-Meerut RRTS corridor, a total of five national and
multinational bidders participated in the tender process. As per the results of
the financial bids disclosed by NCRTC, the position of the bidders is as under:

  •     Shanghai Tunnel
    Engineering Co. Ltd. (STEC): Rs. 1,126 crores (L-1);
  •     Larsen & Toubro Ltd.
    (L&T): Rs. 1,170 crores (L-2);
  •     Gulermak Agir Sanayi
    Insaatve Taahhut AS (Gulermak): Rs. 1, 326 crores (L-3);
  •     Tata Projects Ltd. – SKEC
    JV: Rs. 1.346 crores (CL-4);
  •     Afcons Infrastructure
    Ltd.: Rs. 1,400 crores (L-5).

 

NCRTC had invited global bids
for the first underground civil construction package (CDM/CN/COR-OF/086) in
November last year and the technical bids for this contract package were opened
recently.

 

The scope of work includes
design and construction of tunnels by TBM from near New Ashok Nagar DN Ramp to
Sahibabad UP Ramp and One Underground station at Anand Vihar by Cut and Cover
Method (including architectural finishing and design, supply, installation,
testing and commissioning of electrical and mechanical systems, including fire
detection and suppression systems and hydraulic systems) on the
Delhi-Ghaziabad-Meerut RRTS Corridor.

 

After issuance of the letter
of acceptance (LoA) by NCRTC, STEC has to complete the tunnelling work by TBM
through the cut-and-cover method. This is the first underground contract
package issued by the NCRTC.

(Source:
urbantransportnews.com)

 

18. 57% investors say Big-4 auditors have
no credibility: IIAS survey

 

In more trouble for the
auditing fraternity, an investor survey has found that 57% of large investors
and sell-side analysts do not have any faith in the Big-4 audit firms as they
have lost credibility.

 

According to the survey by
Institutional Investor Advisory Services of 63 large investors and sell-side
analysts numbering 89, conducted online from 13th to 21st
April, as many as 57% of each of them have found ‘the Big-4 audit firms having
lost their credibility with investors and are therefore open to move beyond
them if they were banned’.

 

Between qualified and
unqualified accounts, 73% support qualified accounts because they feel that at
least they got to hear auditor concerns and if they asked for lean accounts,
the risk was that the auditors would be muzzled. It can be noted that ever
since the Satyam Computers scandal came out in January, 2009, the audit world,
especially the Big-4, have been under fire from the regulators.

 

While market watchdog
Securities and Exchange Board had banned PwC in 2018 from auditing listed
companies for two years in the Satyam scam, the Securities Appellate Tribunal
quashed the ban and SEBI challenged it. In June, 2019 the Reserve Bank of India
barred S.R. Batliboi & Company, an affiliate of EY, from carrying out
statutory audit of commercial banks for a year after it found several lapses in
the books of Yes Bank.

 

In the CG Power fraud, the
NCLT had thrown out the report prepared by Viash Associates, terming it as
unprofessional and full of ifs and buts. On top of these, there have been
frequent resignations of auditors, creating doubts on the quality of the audits
that are being presented to investors and also many instances of divergent audit
reports.

 

This is despite 77% believing
that ‘only unqualified accounts are true and fair’ as one gets to hear auditor
concerns. Meanwhile, the survey also found that 78% of the investors, who
normally clamour for dividends, in the poll preferred companies retaining cash
and fortifying their balance sheet this year as the economy is in shambles.

 

Similarly, 57% also see
promoters subscribing to warrants as a sign of confidence in the company and
its operations. However, equity dilution remains a concern for investors with
46% being uncomfortable if dilution exceeded 5% without disclosure regarding
how funds will be used and 30% putting this threshold at 10%.

 

(Source: Economictimes.com)

MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

 

13. Now all you
need is TEN minutes to charge e-cars

 

Engineers have
discovered a way to recharge electric cars in just ten minutes, overcoming one
of the biggest obstacles with electric vehicles. Electric cars currently take
longer than an hour to fully recharge, with the original Tesla Model S taking
75 minutes to achieve a full charge. Researchers at Pennsylvania State
University developed a lithium-ion battery capable of adding 200 to 300 miles
(320 km. to 480 km.) of driving range to an electric car in ten minutes by
charging it at an elevated temperature.

 

What this does
is ‘limit the battery’s exposure to the elevated charge temperature, thus
generating a very long cycle life,’ said senior author Chao-Yang Wang, a
mechanical engineer at the Pennsylvania State University. ‘In addition to fast
charging, this design allows us to limit the battery’s exposure time to the
elevated charge temperature, thus generating a very long cycle life,’ said
Wang.

 

‘The key is to
realise rapid heating; otherwise, the battery will stay at elevated
temperatures for too long, causing severe degradation… The ten-minute trend
is for the future and is essential for adoption of electric vehicles because it
solves the range anxiety problem.’ The extremely fast charging process could be
carried out without causing significant damage to the battery, meaning it could
sustain 2,500 charging cycles – the equivalent of half a million miles of
travel. Typical lithium-ion batteries would only last around 60 charges using
the new method.

 

The discovery
comes just weeks after the inventors of the first lithium-ion battery were
awarded the 2019 Nobel Prize in Chemistry. The combined work of John
Goodenough, Stanley Whittingham and Akira Yoshino led to the first commercially
viable lithium-ion battery being produced in 1985. They are now used in
everything from mobile phones to laptops, as well as the rapidly growing
electric vehicle industry. The researchers now hope to improve this charge time
to just five minutes.

‘We are working
to charge an energy-dense electric vehicle battery in five minutes without
damaging it,’ Wang said. ‘This will require highly stable electrolytes and
active materials in addition to the self-heating structure we have invented.’

 

(Source:
www.timesofindia.com)

 

14. Average
Indian spends over 1,800 hours a year on smartphone

 

With
smartphones entering every facet of our lives, a new survey to understand how
mobile devices are altering lives and relationships of users found that 75% of
the respondents agreed to have owned a smartphone in their teens and of them,
41% were hooked to phones even before graduating from high school.

 

From showcasing
the benefits to the depth of addiction, the Vivo and CMR study tried to look at
the behavioural changes pertaining to smartphone usage. The study, styled
‘Smartphones and their impact on Human Relationships’, looks into the influence
of mobile devices on the consumers and their social interactions.

 

According to
the study, the average Indians spend 1/3rd  of their waking hours on their phones, which
translates to 1,800 hours a year. About 30% fewer people meet family and loved
ones multiple times a month now (vs. ten years ago). One in three people felt
that they can’t even have a five-minute conversation with friends and family
without checking their phones. About 73% agree that if smartphone usage
continues at the current rate or grows, then it is likely to impact mental and
/ or physical health.

 

The report is
based on a survey conducted online as well as face-to-face across top eight
cities in India. It cuts across age groups and demographics: youth, working
professionals and housewives, spanning the age group 18 to 45. The total number
of respondents was 2,000, of whom 36% were females and 64% males.

 

According to
Mr. Nipun Marya, Director, Brand Strategy, Vivo India, ‘Smartphones are
ubiquitous in our lives today, be it connecting with friends, family,
entertainment, eating out or even travel and entertainment. As the “born in the
net” generation grows up as digital natives, there is a fundamental change
underway within society – redefining relationships, interactions and the very
fabric of human emotions and exchanges. This transformation is also an
opportunity to harness and drive positive change, reinforce balance and
responsible proliferation of technology and its usage amongst consumers.’

 

Commenting on
the survey findings, Mr. Prabhu Ram, Head, Industry Intelligence Group of CMR,
said, ‘While the explosive surge in smartphones in India has enabled Indians
not just communicating with loved ones, but with myriad other uses, including
in consuming entertainment and in expressing themselves, our survey results
demonstrate that the dependency on smartphones has increased. While the
smartphones will continue to be the primary go-to device, smartphone users have
realised that periodically switching-off would help benefit their personal
health.’

 

(Source:
www.thehindubusinessline.com)

 

15. Now Twitter
warns Indians of data breach

 

In a very
stressful year for social media users who have been bugged several times,
Twitter recently admitted a malicious code was inserted into its app by a ‘bad
actor’ that could have compromised several Android users’ information
worldwide, including in India.

 

Some users in India woke up to an email from Twitter, warning them to
update the app for Android and immediately change their password. The
vulnerability within Twitter for Android could allow the ‘bad actor’ to see
non-public account information or to control your account (send tweets or
direct messages), said an apologetic Twitter.

 

‘Prior to the
fix, through a complicated process involving the insertion of malicious code
into restricted storage areas of the Twitter app, it may have been possible for
a “bad actor” to access information (direct messages, protected tweets) from
the app,’ Twitter said.

 

It added that
it does not have direct evidence that malicious code was inserted into the app
or that this vulnerability was exploited, but it can’t be fully sure.

 

(Source: www.freepressjournal.in)

 

II. World News

 

16. Trump
unveils America’s sixth military branch: Space Force

 

The United States
has met a mounting 21st century strategic challenge from Russia and
China with the creation of a full-fledged US space force within the Department
of Defence. Acting on the ‘ambition’ of President Donald Trump that had met
with resistance at first, the White House signalled its determination to not
cede superiority in a Star Wars-like future of killer satellites and
satellite-killer weapons.

 

President Trump made the Space Force’s creation real with the signing of
the 2020 National Defence Authorisation Act, which set the initial budget for a
Pentagon force that will stand equally with the military’s five other branches.

 

‘Going to be a lot of things happening in space, because space is the
world’s newest war-fighting domain, Trump told members of the military gathered
for the signing. The Space Force will be the sixth formal force of the US
military after the Army, Air Force, Navy, Marines and Coast Guard. “Our
reliance on space-based capabilities has grown dramatically and today outer
space has evolved into a war-fighting domain of its own,” said Secretary of
Defence Mark Esper. Maintaining American dominance in that domain is now the
mission of the US Space Force.’

 

The Defence
Intelligence Agency warned in a report early this year (2019) that China and
Russia have both developed ‘robust and capable’ space services for
intelligence, surveillance and reconnaissance. ‘China and Russia, in
particular, are developing a variety of means to exploit perceived US reliance
on space-based systems and challenge the US position in space,’ it said.

 

China already
demonstrated that it could shoot down a satellite with a ground-based missile
in 2007. ‘Both states are developing jamming and cyberspace capabilities, directed
energy weapons, on-orbit capabilities and ground-based anti-satellite missiles
that can achieve a range of reversible to non-reversible effects,’ it said.

 

Iran and North
Korea, too, are increasingly able to extend their military activities into
space, jamming the communications of adversaries and developing ballistic
missile technologies, it noted.

China and
Russia have the perception ‘that space represents an (American) Achilles’ heel
and that this is an asymmetric advantage for them to then take on the United
States’ power,’ Steve Kitay, Deputy Assistant Secretary of Defence for Space
Policy, said in August. ‘Space will not be an Achilles’ heel’ for the US, he
said.

 

The new
organisation builds on the US Space Command already operating under the Air
Force following its creation in August. Like the Marines, which operate within
the umbrella of the Navy, the Space Force will continue to be under the Air
Force. The Space Force will be comprised of about 16,000 air force and civilian
personnel, some already taking part in the Space Command, according to Air
Force Secretary Barbara Barrett.

 

(Source:
www.economictimes.com)

 

III. Economy

 

17. Inaccurate
diagnosis, draconian remedy – India’s black money problem was misdiagnosed

 

India’s fight
against foreign black money has returned a whimper. The Government’s intent
cannot be faulted, but since the problem itself was misdiagnosed, the ensuing
legislative measures have been bereft of constitutional and economic common
sense. They relied too little on persuasion and far too much on brow-beating.
The economic results are nothing to rave about.

 

High on
populism, low on constitutional wisdom, the Black Money Act was a draconian law
that was bound to fail. At a minimum tax rate of 60%, it gave marginal incentive
for the hoarders to come clean. Lawmakers overestimated the writ of
international laws and made no economically persuasive case. As a result, as of
May, 2019 the total untaxed foreign assets mined was Rs. 12,500 crores. Wholly
recovered, this wouldn’t even pay Prasar Bharati’s bills for four years. Even
this recovery was aided greatly by international exposes such as the Panama
Papers in which the government’s legislation played no role. In comparison,
Indonesia recovered about Rs. 25 lakh crores under similar schemes. The
government’s initial obsession with brow-beating had an ominous start. But,
instead of doing course correction, it passed an even more confiscatory law, the Fugitive Economic Offenders Act.

 

Existing laws

The intent of
both the laws could have been achieved by a few tweaks in the existing laws.
The Income-tax Act has, since 1989, provided for up to three times penalty on
escaped tax. Similarly, wilful attempts to evade taxes have, since 1975, been
punishable with imprisonment of up to seven years. A protocol for automatic
exchange tax information, under which India is now receiving data from
Switzerland, was signed in 2011, as was the amendment requiring all citizens to
disclose foreign assets with their domestic tax returns.

 

Post-May 2014,
tax control policy is different only in three aspects, all constitutionally
suspect. The first relates to retrospective application of tax and penal laws
that are so confiscatory and brazenly discriminatory that they walk all over a
citizen’s right to life, carry on business and own property. The second is
about shifting the burden of proof onto the citizen to establish that he is not
an offender. Lastly, and this is what makes this new policy rather wicked,
citizens can be subjected to criminal trial without the taxman first proving
that there has been tax evasion. The results of giving such unbridled powers to
agencies have been disastrous.

 

The Enforcement
Directorate, India’s money laundering watchdog, secured conviction in less than
1% of cases but attached assets worth Rs. 29,468 crores. In contrast, the
agency’s equivalents in the U.S. and the U.K. secured conviction in about 50%
cases. The Income tax Department’s records were not inspiring either, hovering
at near 2% conviction rates in Financial Year (FY) 2016-2017. A Comptroller and
Auditor General report showed that in FY 2016-2017 – the demonetisation year –
the number of raids more than doubled as compared to FY 2013-2014, the last
year of UPA-II; but in the same period the undisclosed income detected was less
than one-fourth the amount during the latter period.

 

In medical
sciences, intrusive methods of treatment are generally resorted to when
diagnosis shows evidence that less risky methods may not be restorative. But,
India’s fiscal policy seems to be driven by the opposite logic: intrusion
first, diagnosis later.

 

No clear
estimate of black money owned by Indians and stashed abroad is available.
Between 2008 and 2012, various reports quoted anywhere between $500 billion and
$1.5 trillion, some relying on estimates of a Swiss Bankers’ Association (SBA)
report. These turned out to be false. James Nason, an officer of the SBA, has
said that the SBA had never published any such report. In March, 2019 the National
Institute of Financial Management reported to the Lok Sabha Standing Committee
on Finance that the estimate is about $216 billion to $490 billion. This is
one-seventh the estimate quoted ahead of the 2014 elections. In essence,
India’s foreign black money problem was misdiagnosed and unverified and
exaggerated numbers went into satisfying Parliament that draconian financial
laws are justified.

 

Taking
cognisance

For the
judiciary, one question that arises is: if the conventional wisdom on black
money was based on disinformation, should it take cognisance of it? If yes,
how? For example, should the Supreme Court take a relook at its verdict in Ram
Jethmalani’s case against black money, especially to guide lower courts in
their examination of financial crime allegations?

 

A democratic
state cannot unjustly enrich itself by making citizens pay for what is not
rightly owed. The belief that the government will act on principles of honour
and good faith is an invaluable but fragile national asset, the late Mr. Nani
Palkhivala wrote in an article in 1993. He said that the fiscal system must
have not just legality but also legitimacy. It is denuded of all legitimacy
when there is a breach of faith on the part of the government in its dealings
with the taxpayer.

 

The government
should give up the belief that being an intrusive, brow-beating confiscator
enriches Indians. It doesn’t. This approach is reminiscent of India’s
imperialistic past and, in its current form, is impoverishing us into an
economic depression. The draconian fiscal laws must at once be repealed.
Increased international co-operation, technological advances and banking
penetration implodes black money more than any law or sermon on patriotism.
India’s war on black money can only be won through democratic, persuasive and
economically-sound means.

 

(Source: www.thehindu.com

MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

 

7. AI steps up in battle
against Covid-19

 

Oxford-based Exscientia, the
first to put an AI-discovered drug into human trials, is trawling through
15,000 drugs held by the Scripps Research Institute in California. And Healx, a
Cambridge company set up by Viagra co-inventor Dr. David Brown, has repurposed
its AI system developed to find drugs for rare diseases.

 

The system is divided into three
parts that:

(i) trawl through all the current literature relating to the disease,

(ii) study the DNA and structure of the virus,

(iii) consider the suitability of various drugs.

 

Drug discovery has traditionally
been slow. But AI is proving much faster. It is extremely unlikely that one
single drug would be the answer. That means detailed analysis of the eight
million possible pairs and 10.5 billion triple-drug combinations stemming from
the 4,000 approved drugs on the market.

 

AI remains one of our strongest
paths to achieve a perceptible solution but there is a fundamental need for
high-quality, large and clean data sets. To date, much of this information has
been siloed (or cocooned) in individual companies such as big pharma, or
lost in the intellectual property and old lab space within universities. Now
more than ever before, there is a need to unify these disparate drug discovery
data sources to allow AI researchers to apply their novel machine-learning
techniques to generate new treatments for Covid-19 as soon as possible.

 

(Source: bbc.com)

 

8. Freebies from IT vendors
that you can grab right now

 

As CIOs are struggling to support
business continuity while managing their technology budgets, IT vendors are
doing their best to help them in this Covid-19 crisis. From global giants to
mid-scale IT vendors, support is pouring in in the form of free tools,
services, deferred payments, training, 24/7 remote support, zero-cost licensing
and more.

 

Meanwhile, here’s a look at some
of the biggest offers from vendors to help enterprises through the Covid-19
crisis.

 

Cisco’s free deferred payments – Cisco
announced a financing plan that will let customers defer 95% of their payments
for new products until 2021. The move will cost the company $2.5 billion to
cover the financing. By allowing customers to defer payments, Cisco is helping
them preserve cash amid reduced economic activity.

 

IBM supporting businesses with
free offerings in cloud –
IBM is helping enterprises to tackle the
pandemic while maintaining business continuity with free offerings in cloud and
associated tools and software. Big Blue is giving nine free cloud offers to
ease the burden of businesses across the globe. These cloud offers span AI,
data, security, integration, remote learning and more – all via the IBM public
cloud to support their clients and help them maintain business continuity. For
90 days, free of charge, IBM is offering companies the ability to build virtual
server configurations; providing access to their cloud service for high-speed
file sharing and team collaboration; and also offering their event management
solution to help teams prioritise, diagnose and resolve incidents.

 

Oracle offers free HR tool – Oracle
is providing free access to its Workforce Health and Safety solution to current
Oracle Human Capital Management Cloud customers until the pandemic is over. The
module will help customers manage key workplace health and safety issues and
monitor requirements accordingly. Employees can access required information
wherever and however they need it – from mobile to desktop devices.

 

Free
security tools from Micro Focus
– As
businesses in India are transforming and working remotely, Micro Focus is
helping customers with secured digital platforms with free access. Micro Focus
is offering several free-of-cost services so that customers can secure their
users coming in through VPN, RADIUS, web portals, etc. and for other network
and operational requirements. It has announced a Covid-19-specific license
which enables the use of all advanced authentication features till 31st July,
2020.

 

(Source: Economictimes.com)

 

II.  World News

 

9. Ex-EY whistleblower wins
$10.8m in damages

 

Accountancy firm EY has been
ordered to pay $10.8m in damages to a whistleblower who claimed that it covered
up evidence of money laundering. Auditor Amjad Rihan sued EY after being forced
out of his job in 2014. A year earlier, he had led an audit that discovered
Dubai’s biggest gold refiner Kaloti had paid out a total of $5.2 billion (£4
billion) in cash in 2012.

 

Mr. Rihan argued that it was
evidence of money laundering, but EY didn’t report the activity to the
authorities. EY then helped to cover up a crime – the export to Kaloti in Dubai
of gold bars that had been disguised as silver to avoid export limits on gold.

 

A BBC Panorama
investigation last year revealed that the smuggled gold Mr. Rihan uncovered at
Kaloti was owned by a criminal gang that laundered money for British drug
dealers. The gang had collected cash from drug dealers in the UK and other
European countries. They then laundered the dirty money by buying and selling
black market gold. Twenty seven members of the money laundering gang were
jailed in France in 2017. Kaloti denies any wrongdoing.

 

Panorama saw a
number of drafts of a Kaloti compliance report to a Dubai regulator. In the
initial report, Kaloti seemed to admit buying gold coated with silver. It said:
‘We acknowledge an incident… with the bars coated with silver.’ But EY rewrote
the report so that it said: ‘We acknowledge transactions… in which there were
certain documentary irregularities.’ The accountancy firm turned the crime into
a ‘documentary irregularity’.

 

Mr. Justice Kerr ruled that EY’s
behaviour amounted to professional misconduct and that EY bosses were
‘responsible for suggesting to Kaloti that it should draft its compliance
report in a manner that masked the reality of the Morocco gold issue’.

The court found that EY breached
the Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants and that it had a duty of care
to take reasonable steps to protect Mr. Rihan ‘against economic loss, in the
form of loss of future employment opportunity, by providing an ethically safe
work environment, free from professional misconduct’. The court awarded Mr.
Rihan $10,843,941 (in US dollars) and £117,950 in damages.

 

Mr. Rihan said: ‘Almost seven
years of agony for me and my family has come to an end with a total vindication
by the court. My life was turned upside down as I was cruelly and harshly
punished for insisting on doing my job ethically, professionally and lawfully
in relation to the gold audits in Dubai. I really hope EY will use this
judgment as an opportunity to improve – to avoid such events happening again in
the future’.

 

(Source: bbc.com)

 

10. UK accounting industry faces worst crisis in decade

 

The UK
accounting industry was plunged into its worst crisis in more than a decade as
the ‘Big Four’ firms slashed partners’ pay by up to a quarter and their
mid-tier rivals furloughed junior staff to cope with the coronavirus fallout.
London-headquartered KPMG, PwC, Deloitte and EY have reduced the amount of
profits that are distributed to their partners each month by between 20 and 25%
to build up cash reserves and help survive a downturn in work. Partners at the
UK arms of the four firms, which between them employ about 74,000 people,
earned an average of £720,000 last year and undertake activities including
company audits, tax and restructuring advice and consulting on transactions.

 

The economic blow to the
professional services industry follows years of corporate failures and
accounting scandals that have hurt their reputations. Despite this, overall
revenues at the UK firms have soared over the past decade as they have expanded
beyond their roots in audit, resulting in increasingly large sums of money paid
out to their highest earners. EY told its 17,000 UK staff recently that
partners’ pay would be cut by 20% and said that it would ‘do everything
possible’ to navigate the coronavirus crisis without redundancies, furloughs or
reducing employee salaries. Steve Varley, Chairman of EY UK and Ireland, said:
‘Reducing partner profit distributions is a further prudent move in a time of
economic uncertainty and will provide additional flexibility and improve
financial strength.’

 

Deloitte UK Chief Executive
Richard Houston also announced a 20% hit to partner profits for 2020. He said
distributions to partners would be ‘deferred’ and pay rises, bonuses and
promotions would be put on hold. ‘The measures align with our commitment that
the highest earners in our firm, our partners, should shoulder the greater
proportion of the financial burden,’ said Mr. Houston. The measures by EY and
Deloitte follow similar moves by ‘Big Four’ rivals PwC and KPMG, which last
week announced a reduction in partner pay of 20 and 25%, respectively.

 

(Source: ft.com)

 

III. Politics &
Arthashastra

 

11. Vidur Niti
Some useful tips to make life easier

 

The word ‘Vidur’ in Sanskrit
carries the meaning of skilled, intelligent and wise. These were the exact
qualities possessed by the sage Vidur from the Mahabharata which
portrays him as the half-brother of King Dhritarashtra and minister to the
fabled kingdom of Hastinapur.

 

He is celebrated for being a
great scholar who was an epitome of truthfulness, unbiased judgment,
dutifulness and unfaltering faith to Dharma. However, he is more prominently
known for his Nitis, chronicled in the form of conversations with his
brother Dhritarashtra which took place prior to the war of Kurukshetra. While Vidur
Niti
is mainly grounded in politics, it can be widely used even in our
daily lives. Here are some useful tips from Vidur Niti to help you make
your life easier.

 

(1) Characteristics of a wise
person

A wise person does not deviate
from the higher goals of life because his actions are based on qualities like
self-knowledge, endeavour, patience and devotion to dharma.

 

(2) An aware person is unbiased
in action

In order to be wiser one needs to
be unbiased and to lose all emotions, attachments; it is the key for succeeding
in work and in life itself. A wise person’s actions and undertakings are not
affected by cold, heat, love, fear and affluence or poverty.

 

(3) Focus on goals

It is foolish for a person to
long and work for things which are unattainable, as one would be wasting one’s
time and efforts. Similarly, a person who worries and loses his sense in
difficult times cannot achieve his goals because he will lose his vision. A
wise man doesn’t waste his efforts and time after unattainable goals, does not
worry about things he has lost, and does not lose his sense in difficult times.

 

(4) Commitment to task in hand
and time management

A wise person committed to his
endeavours beforehand  does not take long
breaks before completion of the task, does not waste time and has control over
his mind. We all tend to keep making the mistake of running after temporary
goals and end up abandoning them. In order to succeed, we need to take
pre-emptive action of being committed to the task ahead of us. This will help
us to be focused on our ends and goals; likewise, if we waste time and take
long breaks during work, we may forget our short-term goals and halt the work
itself. Thus, we shouldn’t take long breaks and waste time. In order to develop
the aforementioned qualities, we need to have control over our minds. Control
over the mind is the key because we tend to get attracted to ease and leisure.

 

(5) Be good to friends and be
safe from enemies

Only a fool makes an enemy his
friend, hurts and kills his friend and involves himself in misdeeds. Like ants,
we humans are social living beings; we need help from people to succeed. Thus,
we need to be friendly to people and be good to everyone. It will help us make
friends who will help even in difficulty. Likewise, we must learn to be far
from enemies and should not be close to them, as they carry tendencies to hurt
us.

 

(6) Importance of taking in
groups

One should
not think on the substance of matter alone. We are biased towards our ideas and
tend to think that they are good, missing out the flaws in them. Thus, Vidur
Niti
suggests taking important decisions with a group of people.

 

(7) Some good qualities for
success

These six qualities should never
be abandoned – truthfulness, giving, not being lazy, not finding fault even in
something bad, forgiveness, and determination or courage. A person can only be
successful if he is true to everyone; liars are not considered good people.
Similarly, giving and forgiving and a forgiving nature can take a person a long
way because those who give are considered well by people and the quality of
forgiving prevents people from having grudges which give rise to negative emotions.
Positive nature is beneficial, it prevents people from being sadistic and
depressed; thus one should involve oneself in positivism by seeing only the
positive side. One should be determined if one wants to succeed. Determination
is the key to remaining focused on the task in hand, in a world full of
distractions. Laziness makes the mind lethargic and the ability to work
actively and thoughtfully decreases.

 

(8) Keeping emotions under
control

A person who
gets over-excited in joy will suffer from harm; heightened emotion of happiness
often shrouds the senses and undermines the ability to think properly.
Similarly, extreme level of unhappiness also affects the unbiased way of
soaking in things. One needs to develop the ability of doing work and living
life in such a manner that one is not affected by emotions. A wise one is not
too happy when honoured, he does not feel sad when dishonoured, and he is not
affected by emotions even in difficult times.

 

(9) Keep away from envy

Envy is a
negative emotion, and like every other negative emotion, it causes more harm
than good. Envy gives rise to other negative emotions like anger, hate and
over-thinking. A person who envies others’ wealth, beauty, family reputation,
noble birth, happiness, fortune or respect in society, is a sick person; there
is no cure for him.

 

(10) Forgiveness

For a weak person patience
(forgiveness) is a quality; for the strong person patience (forgiveness) is an
invaluable quality. Forgiveness in the current world is a very important value
for a person. It is an act of deciding to let go the feelings of resentment or
vengeance to persons who have harmed us. The health and psychological benefits
of forgiveness are huge. Forgiveness is often associated with a reduction of
anger, anxiety and depression. Further, it is also associated with benefits of
decrease in blood pressure levels, leading to a healthy life.

 

(Source: detechter.com)

 

IV. Good News

 

12. Covid-19 Lockdown: Farmers’ Groups in Akola Earned Rs. 8.50
Crores by Directly Selling Produce to Customers

 

During the lockdown caused by the
corona virus (Covid-19) pandemic, except essential service providers, everyone
is staying at home. Seeing an opportunity in this, farmers in Akola district in
Maharashtra used direct marketing to sell their produce to customers and earned
almost Rs. 8.50 crores.

The farmers from Akola have
worked out an inspiring model of direct marketing in which 69 farmer groups
joined hands and sold crops worth Rs. 8.50 crores directly to customers during
the lockdown period, says a release from the Press Information Bureau (PIB).

 

One of the farmers from the Akola
group says, ?We have already sold 850 metric tonnes of crops including fruits
and vegetables so far. In order to save time and effort, our groups also use
methods like online payments and order-on-phone service’.

 

Under the guidance of the
district agriculture department, the farmers have been selling fresh vegetables
and fruits directly to the customers at reasonable prices through 93 direct
selling outlets. These outlets are located in urban areas of Akola as well as
in nearby districts. Apart from these organised selling outlets, the farmers
have put up small stalls at important spots in the area and are also providing
door-to-door delivery.

 

Since the beginning of the
lockdown period due to the outbreak of Covid-19, the department of agriculture,
co-operation and farmers’ welfare in the Central government has been taking
several measures to facilitate farmers and farming activities at the field
level.

 

The lockdown coincides with the
harvest season of the rabi crops. The department has been making
concerted efforts so that farmers do not face any difficulties in selling their
produce. To assure better returns especially for perishable crops like fruits
and vegetables, the department encourages farmers to engage in ‘direct
marketing’. To promote the concept of direct marketing among farmers, the
department assists farmers, group of farmers, farmer producer organisations and
co-operatives in selling their produce to bulk buyers, big retailers and
processors.

 

Mohan Wagh, project officer,
agricultural technology management agency (ATMA) at Akola says, ?With the
implementation of the model, we have ensured that the farmers do not suffer due
to the lockdown and are able to sell their produce at a decent price. Our
department issues identity cards and passes for the farmers and vehicles for
the smooth management of the system.’

 

To prevent
the spread of Covid-19, the district agriculture department has advised farmers
to use masks, sanitizers and practice social distancing on the farms and in the
mandis.

 

(Source:
www.moneylife.in 29th April, 2020)

MISCELLANEA

I. Economics

 

13. The consumer in the age of coronavirus

 

The Sarasota Institute is focusing on how Covid-19 may affect some of the
ten categories listed across the top of this web site. We are having virtual
mini-symposia on several of these during April and May. In addition, we are
publishing thought pieces taking a look into the future.

 

Here is a column about consumerism by Phil Kotler, often referred to as
‘the father of modern marketing’, the single greatest thought leader and author
on marketing in the world today. [Phil is a fellow co-founder of the
Institute.] It is an in-depth look into the past and present of consumerism. It
is a must-read as we start to think about how and how much consumerism and the
role that it plays in the future will change.

 

Covid-19
is spreading relentlessly through the world leaving a trail of death and
destruction. The world is in danger of falling into a Great Depression, with
millions of unemployed workers across the globe. The impact will especially hit
the poor – both in terms of health and economics; many cannot even afford to
wash their hands because of the lack of water. What will happen to the millions
that cannot practice social distancing? The slum-dwellers, the prison
population and the refugees huddled in tents?

 

Businesses
are closing down and people are urged to stay home, practise social distancing
and vigorously wash their hands. People are stocking up on all kinds of food
and sundries that are part of daily living. Some are hoarding masks, toilet
paper and other necessities should Covid-19 linger on for weeks, months or
years.

 

While the
US has just passed a $2 trillion dollar aid package, the details seem to once
again point to socialism for Wall Street, in the form of bailouts, a small pay
check for the working poor and little else for Main Street. Income inequality
is poised to increase yet further.

 

I predict
that this period of deprivation and anxiety will usher new consumer attitudes
and behaviour that will change the nature of today’s capitalism. Finally,
citizens will re-examine what they consume, how much they consume and how all
this is influenced by class issues and inequality. Citizens need to re-examine
our capitalist assumptions and emerge from this terrible period with a new,
more equitable form of capitalism.

 

Capitalism’s dependence on endless consuming

Let’s
begin by taking a long view back to the emergence of the Industrial Revolution.

 

The
Industrial Revolution of the 19th century greatly increased the
number of goods and services available to the world’s population. The steam
engine, railroads, new machinery and factories and improved agriculture greatly
increased the economy’s productive capacity. More production inevitably led to
more consumption. More consumption led to more investment. More investment
increased production in an ever-expanding world of goods.

 

Citizens
delighted in the availability of more goods and choices. They could
individualise their personalities through their choices of food, clothing and
shelter. They could shop endlessly and marvel at the innovative offerings of
the producers.

 

Citizens
increasingly turned into consumers. Consuming became a lifestyle and culture.
Producers profited greatly from the increasing number of active consumers.
Producers were eager to stimulate more demand and more consumption. They turned
to print advertising and sales calls and as new media arose, they turned to
telephone marketing, radio marketing, TV marketing and Internet marketing.
Business firms would profit from the degree they could expand consumer desire
and purchasing.

 

From the
beginning some onlookers had misgivings about the rise of consumerism. Many
religious leaders saw the growing interest of citizens in material goods as
competing with religious attention and spiritual values. The legacy of
puritanical values kept certain population groups from acquiring too many goods
and getting into too much debt. Some citizens were particularly critical of
wealthy consumers who used goods to flaunt their wealth. The economist Thorsten
Veblen was the first to write about ‘conspicuous consumption’ that he saw as a
malady taking people away from more meditative life styles. In ‘The Theory of
the Leisure Class’, Veblen exposed this sickness of status display. Had he
lived long enough, he would have been aghast at the news that the former First
Lady of the Philippines, Imelda Marcos, owned 3,000 pairs of shoes that
languished in storage since her exile from the Philippines.

 

The growing number of anti-consumerists

There are
signs today of a growing anti-consuming movement. We can distinguish at least
five types of anti-consumerists.

 

First, a
number of consumers are becoming life simplifiers, persons who want to eat less
and buy less. They are reacting to the clutter of ‘stuff’. They want to
downsize their possessions, many of which lie around unused and unnecessary.
Some life-simplifiers are less interested in owning goods such as cars or even
homes; they prefer renting to buying and owning.

 

Second,
another group consists of de-growth activists who feel that too much time and
effort are going into consuming. This feeling is captured in William
Wordsworth’s poem,

 

‘The world is too much with us…

Getting and spending, we lay waste our powers:

Little we see in Nature that is ours;

We have given our hearts away, a sordid boon!’

 

De-growth
activists worry that consumption will outpace the carrying capacity of the
earth. In 1970, the world population was 3.7 billion. By 2011 it grew to 7.0
billion. Today (2020) the world population stands at 7.7 billion. The U.N.
expects the world population to grow to 9.8 billion by the year 2050. The
nightmare would be that the earth cannot feed so many people. The amount of
arable land is limited and the top soil is getting poorer. Several parts of our
oceans are dead zones with no living marine life. De-growth activists call for
conservation and reducing our material needs. They worry about the people in
the emerging poor nations aspiring to achieve the same standard of living found
in advanced countries, something that is not possible. They see greedy
producers doing their best to create ‘false and unsustainable needs’.

 

Third,
another group consists of climate activists who worry about the harm and risk
that high-buying consumers are doing to our planet through generating so much
carbon footprints that pollute our air and water. Climate activists carry a
strong respect for nature and science and have genuine concerns about the
future of our planet.

 

Fourth,
there are sane food choosers who have turned into vegetarians and vegans. They
are upset with how we kill animals to get our food. Everyone could eat well and
nutritiously on a plant, vegetable and fruit diet. Livestock managers fatten up
their cows and chickens to grow fast and then kill them to sell animal parts in
the pursuit of profits. Meanwhile, cows are a major emitter of methane gas that
heats our earth and leads to higher temperatures, faster glacial melting and
flooding of cities. To produce one kilogram of beef requires between 15,000 and
20,000 litres of water as well as so much roughage to feed the animals.

 

Fifth, we
hear about conservation activists who plead not to destroy existing goods but
to reuse, repair, redecorate them or give them to needy people.
Conservationists want companies to develop better and fewer goods that last
longer. They criticise a company such as Zara that every two weeks produces a
new set of women’s clothing styles that would only be available for two weeks. Conservationists
oppose any acts of planned obsolescence. They are hostile to the luxury goods
industry. Many are environmentalists and anti-globalists.

 

The
anti-consumerism movement has produced a growing literature. One major critic
is Naomi Klein with her books ‘No Logo’, ‘This Changes Everything’ and ‘The
Shock Doctrine’. See also the documentary film ‘The Corporation’ by Mark Achbar
and Jennifer Abbott.

 

How businesses sustain the consumer sentiment

Business
firms have an intrinsic interest in endlessly expanding consumption for the
purpose of higher profits. They rely on three disciplines to boost consumption
and brand preference. The first is innovation to produce attractive new
products and brands to enchant customer interest and purchase. The second is
marketing that supplies the tools to reach consumers and motivate and
facilitate their purchasing. The third discipline is credit to enable people to
buy more than they could normally buy on their low incomes. Businesses aim to
make consumption our way of life. To keep their productive equipment and
factories going, they must ritualise some consumer behaviour. Holidays like
Halloween, Christmas, Easter, Mother’s Day and Father’s Day are partly promoted
to stimulate more purchasing. Businesses want not only purchase of their goods
but fast consumption so that objects burn up, wear out and are discarded at an
ever-increasing rate.

 

Businesses
use advertising to create a hyper-real world of must-have products that claim
to deliver happiness and well-being. Businesses refashion commodities into
compelling brands that can bring meaning into the consumer’s life. One’s brand
choices send a signal of who the person is and what he or she values. Brands
bring strangers together to share carefully designed images and meanings.

 

How will anti-consumerism change capitalism?

Capitalism
is an economic system devoted to continuous and unending growth. It makes two
assumptions: (1) people have an unlimited appetite for more and more goods; and
(2) the earth has unlimited resources to support unlimited growth. Both of
these are now questioned. First, many people become jaded and satiated by the
effort to continuously consume more goods. Second, the earth’s resources are
finite, not infinite, and would not meet the needs of a growing world
population that comes with growing material needs.

 

Until
now, most countries have used only one measure to assess the performance of
their economy. That measure is the Gross Domestic Product (GDP). GDP measures
the total value of the goods and services produced in a given year by the
country’s economy. What it doesn’t measure is whether GDP growth has been
accompanied by a growth in people’s well-being or happiness.

 

We can
imagine a case where GDP grows by 2 or 3% by workers working very hard and even
at overtime. They only have two weeks of vacation a year. They have little time
for leisure or renewal. They might be stressed by unexpected medical bills that
hit their savings. They might be unable to send their children to college,
leaving their children with lower skills and lower earning potential. Those
students who manage to go to college graduate with huge debt. Graduates are
carrying a college debt of $1.2 trillion. They cannot buy furniture or a home,
or even afford to get married. In such a case, we would guess that the GDP went
up but the nation’s average well-being and happiness went down.

 

We badly
need to add new measures of the impact of economic growth. Some countries are
now preparing an annual measure of Gross Domestic Happiness (GDH) or Gross
Domestic Well-Being (GDW). We know that citizens in Scandinavian countries
enjoy a substantially higher level of happiness and well-being than American
citizens and run good economies. Is our addiction to consuming, consuming us?

 

Part of the
problem of economic growth is that the fruits of gains in productivity are not
shared equitably. This is obvious in a country with a growing number of
billionaires and a great number of poor workers. Many CEOs are paid 300 times
what their average worker earns and some take home as much as 1,100 times the
average worker. The economic system is rigged. Corporations have succeeded in
emasculating trade unions and leaving workers with no say in what they or their
bosses should be paid.

 

Even some
billionaires are unhappy with this greatly lopsided pay arrangement. Bill Gates
and Warren Buffet have publicly called for raising the top income tax rate.
This top rate is now down to 37% as a result of the 2018 Tax Reform. Meanwhile,
wealthy citizens in Scandinavian countries pay 70% and manage to run a good
economy, one with free health care and free college education. One citizen
billionaire, Nick Hanauer, has spoken about this on TED. He warns his fellow
billionaires that ‘the pitchforks are coming’. He pleads with them to pay
higher wages and taxes and share more of the productivity gains with the
working class. The working class should earn enough to eat well, pay rent and
retire with adequate savings. Today there are too many workers who couldn’t
muster $400 to pay for a pressing payment they must make.

 

Capitalism faces the Covid-19 crisis

Capitalism
will change for other reasons as well. If more consumers decide to be
anti-consumerists, they will spend less. Their spending has traditionally
supported 70% of our economy. If this goes down, our economy contracts in size.
A slowdown in economic growth will lead to more unemployment. Add the fact that
more jobs are being lost to AI and robots. This will require capitalism to
spend more on unemployment insurance, social security, food stamps, food
kitchens and social assistance.

 

Capitalism
will have to print more money. We see this happening with the $2 trillion
outlay voted by Congress to help support desperate workers in the face of the
Covid-19 crisis. And $2 trillion is only to tide over people in the short run.
More trillions will have to be spent. This means huge deficits that can’t be
covered by existing tax revenues. To the extent possible, tax rates will have
to be dramatically increased. The lives of the rich are normally not affected
by the grief and hardship of the poor. But now it is time for the rich to pay
more and share more. In our current crisis, CEOs and their highly paid staffs
have to take a cut in their pay. Boeing’s executives recently set an example by
saying they will work with no pay during the coming crisis.

 

When the
Covid-19 crisis is over, capitalism will have moved to a new stage. Consumers
will be more thoughtful about what they consume and how much they need to
consume. Here are possible developments:

 

Some
weaker companies and brands will vanish. Consumers will have to find reliable
and satisfying replacement brands.

 

The
coronavirus makes us aware of how fragile is our health. We can catch colds
easily in crowds. We must stop shaking hands when we meet and greet. We need to
eat more healthy foods to have a greater resistance to germs and various types
of flu. We are shocked by the inadequacy of our health system and its great
cost. We need to stay out of the hospital and play safe.

 

The
sudden loss of jobs will remain a trauma even after workers get jobs back. They
will spend and save their money more carefully.

 

Staying
home led many consumers to become producers of their own food needs. More home
cooking, more gardening to grow vegetables and herbs. Less eating out.

 

We place
more value on the needs of our family, friends and community. We will use
social media to urge our families and friends to choose good and healthy foods
and buy more sensible clothing and other goods.

 

We will want
brands to spell out their greater purpose and how each is serving the common
good.

 

People
will become more conscious of the fragility of the planet, of air and water
pollution, of water shortages and other problems.

 

More
people will seek to achieve a better balance between work, family and leisure.
Many will move from an addiction to materialism to sensing other paths to a
good life. They will move to post-consumerism.

 

Capitalism
remains the best engine for efficient economic growth. It also can be the best
engine for equitable economic growth. It doesn’t change to socialism when we
raise taxes on the rich. We have given up on the false economic doctrine that
the poor win when the rich get richer. Actually the rich will get richer mainly
by leaving more money in the hands of working class families to spend.

 

As the
coronavirus crisis shows us, a robust public health system is in the best
interest of all – rich and poor alike. It is time to rethink and rewire
capitalism and transform it into a more equitable form – based on democracy and
social justice. Either we will learn to share more like Scandinavian countries,
or we will become a banana republic. We are all in this together.

 

(Source: The
Sarasota Institute – By Philip Kotler – 6th April, 2020)

MISCELLANEA

I. General

16. Faced with authoritarianism?  Think liberty

Regulating speech is a dangerous notion and not compatible with the principles of a free society – By Chris Rossini

There are always authoritarians mixed with the human population. These are people who have chosen to believe that they should be the boss of not only themselves, but everyone else as well. The most notorious authoritarians have always been tied to government in some way, since government is force.

But authoritarianism is not exclusive to government. People in any field or occupation can have the same lust to dominate just like a politician. But again, because of the nature of government being force, authoritarians are usually drawn to it like a magnet.

These misguided individuals are difficult because they never want to leave anyone else alone. In their minds, they can’t leave others alone. They’re supposed to tell everyone else what to do.

This can be quite daunting at times, especially when authoritarians have a lot of believers that want to be told what to do. This reinforcing relationship of the blind leading the blind will then drag society as a whole into a downward spiral.

Fortunately, there are always limits and it’s important to keep in mind some key thoughts, especially when the downward spiral escalates:

•    Authoritarians cannot create energy or matter or life.
•    They cannot create the truth or natural law.
•    They cannot be omnipotent or omniscient. They cannot be everywhere at all times and know everything that can be known.
•    They cannot turn all individual human beings into being the same exact thing. They can’t even turn two individuals into being the same thing. In fact, they can’t even make one individual remain the same. We’re all constantly changing. The infant you was different from the teenager you, who is different from the adult you.
•    Everyone is born at a different time and place. Everyone occupies a different and unique position in the universe. Everyone is raised under different conditions, in different environments and surrounded by different people.
•    We have different cultures and traditions.
•    We have different beliefs about God.
•    Authoritarians cannot think for anyone else. They only think for themselves.
•    They cannot interpret the non-stop occurrence of events for everyone. They only interpret events with their own thinking about them. They can certainly share their interpretations with others, but they can’t make others believe those interpretations or agree with them.
•    Authoritarians can’t believe anything for anyone else. They only have their own beliefs. They can change those beliefs, just as everyone else can change their beliefs and convictions.
•    They cannot value for anyone else. They value everything by themselves.
•    They cannot choose for anyone else. Everyone chooses on their own.
•    Authoritarians cannot know what knowledge everyone possesses. Knowledge is always decentralised. It cannot be centralised because there are no limits to knowledge. Like interpretations, knowledge can be shared. But also like
interpretations, knowledge does not have to be believed by anyone else, other than by their own voluntary choice.
•    Authoritarians can’t have all the data, because there are no limits to data. No matter how much data has been collected, far more will forever remain uncollected.
•    They cannot know the future no matter how much data they have. Data is always an incomplete look at the past. The future can certainly be guessed and projected by anyone, but it is always a matter of probabilities and can never be known with certainty and with pinpoint precision.
•    Authoritarians cannot know the unknown. Whatever is known will forever be dwarfed by what is yet to be known.
•    They cannot ‘order’ the universe, or human life, or the world, because these are not made and ordered by man. They cannot be re-made or re-ordered by man either.

Now, as liberating as the above is, does this mean authoritarians are a non-issue? No, it does not. Authoritarians are actors in this world, just like everyone else. As such, they choose their values and beliefs and then act on them. Those actions create consequences and results.

Those consequences, because they come from misguided beliefs and actions, produce bad results for everyone else. Much of human history, and especially the 1900’s, has been dominated heavily by authoritarian ideas. Hundreds of millions have perished as a consequence of those misguided ideas and subsequent actions.

Those ideas, in case you haven’t noticed, are still believed and embraced by many individuals today. They want to believe that authoritarian ideas can produce different results.

They can’t.

So, authoritarians are a serious issue, always.

The antidote to a bad idea is a good idea: individual liberty.

When the ideas of individual liberty dominate, the authoritarians have to take a back seat and society goes into an upward spiral.

Authoritarian ideas are never gone. They are always a choice for people to accept and embrace. So the best that can happen (in any time period) is that authoritarianism is kept at bay. And the only way for it to be kept at bay is for enough individuals to accept and embrace the glorious ideas of liberty.

Source: Ron Paul Liberty Report, By Chris Rossini – 13th January, 2021
 

II. Economy

17. Refine quality of expenditure to help fiscal sustainability

Maintaining and improving the quality of expenditure would help address the objectives of fiscal sustainability while supporting growth, RBI Governor Shaktikanta Das said on 16th January, 2021.

‘As per IMF’s calculations, the total fiscal support in response to Covid-19 amounted to about 12% of global GDP by mid-September, 2020,’ he said while delivering the Nani Palkhivala Memorial Lecture online on the subject, ‘Towards a Stable Financial System’.

‘Global public debt is said to have reached 100% of GDP in 2020. As a result, most economies are expected to emerge from the pandemic with higher deficits and debt vulnerabilities.

Mr. Das said although the scale of fiscal spending was expected to breach the quantitative targets of fiscal prudence across most economies in the short run, it was crucial in the context of the pandemic from the perspective of the welfare aspect of public expenditure.

‘Expenditure on physical and social infrastructure, including human capital, science and technology, is not only welfare-enhancing, it also paves the way for higher growth through their higher multiplier effect and enhancement of both capital and labour productivity,’ he said.

‘Going forward, it becomes imperative that fiscal road maps are defined not only in terms of quantitative parameters like fiscal balance to GDP ratio or debt to GDP ratio, but also in terms of measurable parameters relating to quality of expenditure, both for the Centre and the States.’

While conventional parameters of fiscal discipline will ensure medium- and long-term sustainability of public finances, measurable parameters of quality of expenditure would ensure that welfarism carries significant productive outcomes and multiplier effects, Mr. Das noted.

He also said that the principal objective of the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) during the pandemic was to support economic activity.

‘Looking back, it is evident that our policies have helped in easing the severity of the economic impact of the pandemic.’

The RBI ‘remains steadfast to take any further measures, as may be necessary, while at the same time remaining fully committed to maintaining financial stability.’

Responding to a question, Mr. Das said the RBI was open to examining any proposal for setting up a bad bank. ‘It is up to the government and the private sector to put up such a proposal,’ he added.

Source: The Hindu, Special Correspondent – 16th January, 2021)

III. World News

18. Oak trees take root in Iraqi Kurdistan to help climate

Delband Rawanduzi spoke softly to her oak seedlings, as if willing them to grow fast and repopulate forests in Iraqi Kurdistan depleted by war, illegal logging and fires.

Over the next five years, the 26-year-old aims to plant
one million oaks – resilient trees that can endure both the cold of northern Iraq and the dry spells of one of the world’s hottest countries. Her plan is taking root in her native Kurdistan.

In a pilot project late last year ‘we planted 2,000 oak trees. And in the upcoming autumn we will plant 80,000,’ said Rawanduzi, a hiker and rock climber.

She has mobilised visitors and shepherds who collect oak seeds from the mountains which are then planted in two greenhouses donated by a private university in the Kurdish regional capital of Arbil.

Once the young seedlings grow into saplings, they are re-planted in mountain areas selected by the Kurdish agriculture ministry.

And to ensure the oaks will thrive, Rawanduzi is winning over several sponsors who are asked to donate 1,000 Iraqi dinars (around 68 US cents) per tree.

‘It’s a response to climate change threats, as well as an effort to promote ecosystems and create a culture among people to contribute to a healthy climate,’ she told AFP.

Those threats are serious: some 2.2 million acres (nearly 900,000 hectares) of natural and manmade forests in the Kurdish region have been destroyed in the past two decades, according to estimates by Kurdish authorities.

This represents nearly half the forests of the region, with most of the damage occurring in the last five years. The culprits include uncontrolled grazing, tree-cutting for firewood, unregulated urban development and bombardment.

While the Kurdish north has been spared much of the carnage seen across Iraq after the US-led invasion in 2003, it has been targeted by several cross-border Turkish operations against Kurdish militants.

A review of satellite images conducted by Dutch civil society organisation PAX International found that Turkey’s military campaigns ‘can be directly linked’ to the burning of nearly 50,000 acres of land in northern Iraq from May until September, 2020. ‘About half – around 23,000 acres – of the burned land is part of special protected areas with a rich biodiversity,’ it said.

Another 250,000 acres of land in the autonomous region were burned during the same period, PAX said, without identifying the perpetrators.

‘Shelling and bombing resulted in bushfires and caused the displacement of thousands of people, destroying their livelihoods and damaging fragile ecosystems.’

According to the UN’S Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO), a mere 2% of Iraq’s 437,000 square kilometres (168,700 square miles) is forested. Most of that area lies in the Kurdish zone, where Rawanduzi hopes her project can make a change.

Young saplings have already been sponsored by Kurdish emigrants in Europe, Syrian refugees living in the Kurdish region, expatriates working in Arbil and local staff at schools and hospitals.

Intira Thepsittawiwat, a 50-year-old from the Czech Republic living in Arbil, is sponsoring 500 trees.

‘It’s a reliable, practical and inexpensive project. This is my small involvement and contribution to the nature of Iraqi Kurdistan,’ she told AFP.

For climate campaigners, tree planting is crucial but must be part of a wider effort to combat global warming.

Iraq recently ratified the 2015 Paris Climate Agreement which aims to chart a path away from catastrophic warming and has begun drafting plans to reduce carbon emissions.

Ahmed Mohammad, who headed the Kurdish region’s environmental awareness department till 2015, told AFP there are many ways to reach that goal.

Developing public transport, eliminating the usage of single-use plastics and educating the population on climate issues top his list.

‘People here like the open-air life, go picnicking on the weekends and have houses in the mountains, but still many of them don’t realise the importance of nature and climate catastrophes,’ Mohammad said.

He is petitioning regional authorities to ban the use of plastic bottles in government offices.

Environmentalist Hawker Ali, 35, said the region must be ready for the long haul. ‘It is not like Covid-19 for which scientists can find a cure,’ said Ali, who is helping Rawanduzi care for the oak seedlings in the Arbil greenhouses.

‘With climate change, everyone must get involved in order to reduce the threats and the consequences,’ he added.

Source: International Business Times, By Quassim Khidir – 18th January, 2021)

MISCELLANEA

I.
Technology

 

11.
Facebook working on new tech that can read human brain

 

Facebook is doubling down on its efforts towards making artificial
intelligence (AI) ubiquitous in its products and next year might see them turn
into reality.

 

Apparently, it is planning to build a new neural sensor that can read
people’s minds and convert those thoughts into actions. The new project will
push the social media giant further into the AI domain, some instances of which
did not go well with Facebook. Facebook has also announced a new tool that
summarises news articles into bullets so that readers do not have to spend much
time on them, a move that can potentially impact publishers on the social media
platform.

 

The announcements were made at Facebook’s yearly meeting that
involved everyone working at the company. The details of the meeting are not
available publicly but BuzzFeed News managed to obtain
an audio recording that was broadcast to all employees. Facebook has revealed
some serious plans that are associated with upgrades in the AI category, as the
company ends a predictably difficult year with even tougher events that posed a
challenge.

 

The neural sensor that the company is said to be developing uses the
resources of CTRL Labs, a company that Facebook acquired in 2019. According to
the report, the sensor will take the neural signals from the brain through the
spinal cord and arms, and right up to the wrist. This will allow users to make
physical actions based on their thoughts. According to Facebook, this will help
users holding a virtual object, typing and controlling a character in a video
game. This is uncannily similar to the nascent brain-reading technology that
Elon Musk’s Neuralink company is working on. It will be interesting to see what
spin Facebook gives to this tech.

 

Facebook has of late seen itself caught in several controversies,
including political inclination in India, discontent among employees and, most
importantly, the anti-trust cases over dominance in the US and elsewhere. One of
the controversies was the removal of hate speech which uses AI-powered tools
significantly. Facebook is now expanding its range to cover even more AI-enabled
products, including the new summarising app for news articles. It said some
20,000 employees have joined Facebook this year and that people were using
Facebook and its services more than ever, thanks to the pandemic.

 

But for Facebook AI is not a small accessory for its services to take
advantage. The social media giant is pegging AI as the panacea for all the
problems that it has faced and will likely deal with in the future. ‘We are
paving the way for breakthrough new experiences that, without hyperbole, will
improve the lives of billions,’ said Mike Schroepfer,
chief technology officer in the briefing, as per BuzzFeed News.

 

Facebook is using AI for almost everything, from curbing the spread
of misinformation on its social media platforms to removing hate speech, along
with scanning political content. Schroepfer even said
that AI is helping Facebook detect 95% of the hate speech rampant on the
platform. However, this is entirely opposite of what some ex-employees who have
worked closely with the company’s AI products have said, viz., that AI has
helped to remove less than 5% hate speech content. However, Facebook did not
come clean about this claim.

 

Source:
www.indiatoday.in – 16th December, 2020

 

12.
Twitter planning to create label for automated ‘bot’
accounts

 

Twitter Inc. is planning to create a new type of account for bots
next year that will identify them as automated, the company said in a blog post
that finalised plans for a reboot of its long-paused verification programme. The
company said bot accounts ‘can bring a lot of value to the service,’ but
acknowledged that ‘it can be confusing to people if it’s not clear that these
accounts are automated.’

For years, Twitter has faced calls from misinformation researchers to
disclose more information about bots which have been used to amplify / influence
operations and make certain narratives appear more popular on its site. It
started requiring developers to identify automated accounts as bots in March,
but resisted pressure to apply a designated label, saying as recently as in May
that ‘calls for bot labelling don’t capture the problem we’re trying to
solve.’

 

Twitter also said that it would build a new ‘memoralised account’ type in 2021 for people who have died.
Abuse of those accounts has likewise been a feature of information campaigns,
such as in one case documented last year by academic Marc Owen Jones involving
the verified account of an American meteorologist who died of cancer in 2016
that began tweeting pro-Saudi government content in Arabic two years
later.

 

In November, Twitter announced that it would restart its verification
programme early next year, after pausing submissions in 2017 amid criticism over
how it awarded the blue check-mark badges used to authenticate the identity of
prominent accounts.

 

It said it would begin removing verified badges from inactive and
incomplete accounts that fail to adhere to the new guidelines as of
20th January, 
2021
, although it would leave up inactive accounts of people who
are no longer living while working on the new memorial feature.

 

Source:
www.indianexpress.com – 18th December, 2020

 

 

II.
World

 

13. A four-day
workweek for five days’ pay? Unilever New Zealand is the latest to try
it

 

Unilever New Zealand has said that it would begin a one-year
experiment to allow all 81 of its employees to earn their full salaries while
working one day less per week, a move the company said might actually boost
productivity and improve employees’ work-life balance.

 

The company, which imports and distributes tea, soap, vaseline and ice cream, is the
latest to experiment with the long-discussed four-day workweek. Some business
and productivity experts say the concept may finally get a serious look amid a
pandemic that has altered how billions live and work around the
globe.

 

Nick Bangs, MD of Unilever New Zealand, said
the four-day week experiment represented a fundamental shift in how the company
views its work force.

 

‘Our goal is to measure performance on output, not time,’ he said in
a statement. ‘We believe the old ways of working are outdated and no longer fit
for purpose.’

 

The goal, he said in an email, is to get the same amount of work done
in fewer hours for the same pay. ‘If we find that we’re all working the same
number of hours as before but in four days, then we’ve missed the opportunity
this trial presents us with,’ he said.

 

Essentially, Unilever is testing what the British historian and
writer C. Northcote Parkinson theorised was the nature
of man and time. ‘Work expands so as to fill the time available for its
completion,’ he wrote in 1955.

 

The concept has been widely disseminated – it was in the first
sentence of Mr. Parkinson’s
New York Times obituary – and has filtered its way into popular thinking. Michael
Scott, the bumbling manager of a regional midsize paper distributor in NBC’s
‘The Office,’ demonstrated a working knowledge of the idea in a conversation
with his supervisor, Jan Levinson, after she caught him watching television with
his staff during work hours.

 

Jan: How would a movie increase
productivity, Michael? How on earth would it do that?

Michael: People work faster after.

Jan: Magically?

Michael: No, they have to make up for the time they lost watching the
movie.

 

Nick Bangs, luckily, is relying on more than just Michael Scott
witticisms. Experts at the University of Technology
Sydney Business School are consulting with the company, as is Andrew Barnes,
founder of Perpetual Guardian, a New Zealand firm that shifted to a shortened
workweek in 2018.

 

‘A contract should be about an agreed level of productivity,’ Barnes
said at the time. ‘If you deliver that in less time, why should I cut your
pay?’

 

The move to a four-day workweek has been kicked around for decades,
well before Richard M. Nixon, as Vice-President in 1956, predicted it would come
to pass in the ‘not too distant future.’

Still, it has remained elusive. Though technology has made employees
more productive (thanks, email!), it has not led to employees working fewer
hours (thanks again, email!).

 

In a work-centric culture, people simply are not wired to unplug from
the office, particularly in industries like finance, medicine and consulting,
according to Paolo Gaudiano, an adjunct associate
professor at New York University’s Stern School of Business.

 

Source:
www.nytimes.com – 3rd December, 2020

 

14. World’s ‘Most
Exceptional’ teacher wins Rs. 7 crore prize, splits it among nominees

 

Over a decade ago, in 2009, Ranjitsinh
Disale walked into the Zilla
Parishad school in the remote
Paritewadi village of Solapur; it was a rundown building that had a cattle-shed on
one side and a storeroom on the other. The students, mainly from the tribal
community, accommodated themselves in the middle room; just 2% of them were
girls.

 

But today the school is known to the world, thanks to the efforts of
Ranjitsinh who transformed its educational system
through technology.

 

For his extraordinary work to empower girls and promote education,
Ranjitsinh is now the world’s ‘Most Exceptional
Teacher’ after being conferred with the Global Teacher Prize 2020. The prize
money awarded is $1 million, equivalent to Rs. 7 crores in India.

 

Instituted by the Varkey Foundation, the
award attracted 12,000 nominations from across the world out of which ten were
shortlisted in 2019. Ranjitsinh was one of
them.

 

‘I will distribute half the amount (of the prize money) to the other
nine contestants for their exceptional work,’ Ranjitsinh told the host, Stephen Fry, in an interview
during the live telecast of the event.

 

Explaining the reason for this, Ranjitsinh
says he may have won the award but he cannot change the world by himself. All
the runners-up should get equal opportunity to continue their exceptional work,
he said.

 

With the remaining amount, he told Maharashtra Times, he would dedicate 30% of the amount to conceiving a Teacher
Innovation Fund across India. ‘Twenty per cent of the prize money will be spent
to bring 5,000 students together from war-afflicted zones of the world to form
the Peace Army,’ the 32-year-old teacher said.

 

Speaking to The Times of India, the teacher who oversees 110 students, worked hard to convince
girls and their parents to educate them. Thanks to his efforts, there are no
teenage marriages in the village and it sees 100% attendance rates today. The
school also got the ‘Best School Award’ from the Maharashtra State
Government.

 

Ranjitsinh was also in the limelight in 2016 when he started a QR code system
in school textbooks that was replicated across the State and the country. He had
introduced the technology to make education interactive and accessible to
students in the digital format. ‘I once saw a person scan the QR code from the
scanning device and realised that the same principle could get replicated for
transferring textbook information to digital mediums,’ he explained.

 

However, it was not just the technology that needed work. As the
majority of the students understood only Kannada, he had to learn the language
and translate the syllabus from Class I to IV and share his knowledge with the
help of the technology. Recently, one of the tribal girl students graduated from
university.

 

The technology helped students access video
lectures, audio poems and assignments. In 2017, the State Government announced
that it would have QR-coded textbooks for all classes. The following year, the
Central Government announced a plan to replicate the model.

 

His latest international recognition is not the first for this modest
teacher. In 2018, Ranjitsinh received the Microsoft
Innovative Educator Expert award. He was also recognised for his innovation by
the Government of India which conferred on him the National Innovation
Foundation’s ‘Innovator of the Year’ award.

 

Source: www.thebetterindia.com – 4th December,
2020

 

15. The British must
return the Bakhshali Manuscript with world’s oldest
zero to India

 

The world’s most important mathematical document is the Bakhshali Manuscript. Written on birch-bark in Sanskrit, it
is the world’s oldest extant document to use a zero symbol. It was written by a
Brahma?a identified as the
‘son of Chajaka’ and was found in the North-Western
region of British India in 1881.

Rudolf Hoernlé, a Christian missionary who
studied the Bakhshali Manuscript later stole India’s
most precious manuscript and gave it to Oxford University in 1902.

 

The most comprehensive research on this subject to date appears in a
book by Takao Hayashi titled
‘The Bakhshali Manuscript: An Ancient
Indian Mathematical Treatise.’

 

Such a precious document does not belong to descendants of the
British Raj. This document belongs in India – not in the hands of its former
British masters.

 

Background information

Having initially studied economics at the University of Melbourne,
Jonathan J. Crabtree is an autodidact, studying the history of mathematics since
1983.

 

In 1968, at age seven Jonathan noticed a 398-year-old problem with
his teacher’s explanation of mathematics. India’s zero was missing from
England’s 1570 definition of multiplication.

 

Having been perplexed by this and other maths education errors during
his school years, at the age of 21 he found himself in a hospital facing bleak
news. If he moved, he might never walk again. With both his dreams and his spine
shattered, he prayed for a miracle and promised to fix maths if he ever walked
again.

 

Today, elementary maths historian and www.podometic.in founder
Jonathan J. Crabtree is a guest lecturer at schools, universities and
mathematics conferences. Having reviewed writings in Latin, Greek, Arabic,
Sanskrit and other languages, his provocative presentations reveal how the
foundations of ancient Bharatiya (Indian) mathematics
are vastly superior to many western ideas taught today.

 

Source: www.kreately.in – 9th December,
2020

 

MISCELLANEA

I. Business

 

8.
Bitcoin price prediction: Here’s why analyst thinks $22,000 is next

 

KEY POINTS

  • Bitcoin
    breached $18,000 for the first time in three years;
  •  The
    number of people holding Bitcoin for a period of one year has increased;
  •  The
    number of Bitcoin being transferred out of exchanges is rising.

 

Bitcoin just hit $18,000 and an analyst
expects the next price target to be $22,000, a figure that is higher than the
previous all-time high.

 

Bitcoin closed Tuesday (17th
November, 2020) at $17,679, a new 2020 high, breaking the earlier record of
$16,726 which was hit just the previous day (Monday, 16th November,
2020). At the time of writing this report, the benchmark crypto currency hit
$18,000, its highest price in the last three years. Bitcoin last reached
$18,000 in December, 2017, the month when it went on to touch its all-time high
price of just below $20,000.

 

With the previous all-time high on the
horizon, people are looking forward to what’s to come after that. One analyst
said Bitcoin could reach $20,000 and the first initial target is $22,000.
According to Philip Swift, an analyst and founder of Lookintobitcoin.com,
multiple indicators, including institutional buying and the one-year HODL %,
are still likely to increase soon, Cointelegraph reported.

 

The one-year HODL % refers to the number of
people whose BTC addresses hold Bitcoin for at least a year. At this point, the
one-year HODL wave chart shows these investors are growing in number. This is
significant because despite Bitcoin being up by 154% already since the start of
the year, the number of people not selling their Bitcoins is still increasing.
This implies that these investors are looking forward to a further upside in
the price of the benchmark crypto currency and that they are not selling any
time soon.

 

Additionally, the funding rate has remained
neutral. This refers to the balance between buyers and sellers particularly in
the Bitcoin futures market. According to Cointelegraph, the average funding
rate has remained at 0.01%, suggesting a balance between buyers and sellers
which also implies that the market is not yet overheated. If the market becomes
overheated, a reverse in the price trend could happen.

 

Finally, more and more Bitcoin is being
withdrawn from exchanges. In a separate article, Cointelegraph noted that a
total of 145,000 BTC were moved out of crypto currency exchanges between 15th
October and 15th November. At the price point of Bitcoin on 15th
November, the amount is worth around $2.35 billion transferred out of
exchanges.

 

Source: International Business Times; By Vincent Figueras – 18th
November, 2020)

 

II. Science

 

9. World
Science Day For Peace And Development 2020: Inspirational quotes by famous
scientists

 

Science influences most aspects of human
life including health, medicines, transportation and energy. Hence, to
highlight the role of science in daily life, the United Nations Educational, Scientific
and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) proclaimed World Science Day for Peace and
Development in 2001. Since then, the day has been observed annually on 10th
November.

 

Apart from strengthening public awareness
about science’s role in society, the day also aims at keeping people informed
about the key developments in science and drawing their attention towards the
challenges the progress of science is facing.

 

On this day, here are a few inspirational
and powerful quotes by famous scientists, courtesy Famous Scientists and
Forbes:

An experiment is a question which science
poses to Nature, and a measurement is the recording of Nature’s answer
Max Planck

It is strange that only extraordinary men
make the discoveries which later appear so easy and simple – Georg C.
Lichtenberg

We pass through this world but once. Few
tragedies can be more extensive than the stunting of life, few injustices
deeper than the denial of an opportunity to strive or even to hope, by a limit
imposed from without, but falsely identified as lying within –
Stephen Jay Gould

Science without religion is lame, religion
without science is blind – Albert Einstein

The saddest aspect of life right now is
that science gathers knowledge faster than society gathers wisdom –
Isaac Asimov

Actually, everything that can be known has a
Number; for it is impossible to grasp anything with the mind or to recognise it
without this – Philolaus

Progress is made by trial and failure;
the failures are generally a hundred times more numerous than the successes;
yet they are usually left unchronicled –
William
Ramsay

Did the genome of our cave-dwelling
predecessors contain a set or sets of genes which enable modern man to compose
music of infinite complexity and write novels with profound meaning? … It looks
as though the early Homo (sapiens) was already provided with the intellectual
potential which was in great excess of what was needed to cope with the
environment of his time – Susumu Ohno

 

Source: International Business Times; By Vaishnavi Vaidyanathan – 11th
October, 2020)

 

III. Health

 

10. Can’t sleep during quarantine? How to
rest while anxious | Elemental

In the age of coronavirus, sleep is more
important – and more elusive – than ever

 

May be you’ve always struggled with your
sleep. Or, perhaps because of the coronavirus outbreak you’ve started
experiencing insomnia as a result of changes to your everyday life, fears about
the health and safety of yourself and your loved ones, financial insecurities
and the barrage of coronavirus information and misinformation that’s coming
from all directions. In these uncertain times, it’s not surprising to find that
many people are facing an increase in sleep difficulties.

 

With all the challenges we’ll be facing over
the next several months as individuals and within our communities, workplaces,
schools and, indeed, globally, there are many reasons to make healthy sleep a
priority and take steps to preserve this vital bodily function.

 

What constitutes good sleep? First, getting
the right amount for your age: Most adults require seven to eight hours of
sleep for optimal health. Adolescents and emerging adults benefit from eight to
ten hours, school-aged children need between nine and 11 hours, and our littlest
ones should get even more.

 

Then, timing: Sleep does its best work for
us when we get it at the right ‘time,’ according to our internal, 24-hour body
clock, aka our circadian rhythm. Humans are diurnal, meaning all of the
workings of our body – eating, digestion, hormone secretion, and even learning
and memory – are organised around the basic framework of wakefulness during the
day and sleep at night. For individuals who work at night or follow a rotating
shift schedule, finding the right sleep timing can be complicated because their
sleep-wake schedules are often out of sync with day and night.

 

Finally, getting high-quality sleep: Sleep
disruptions – whether they are from environmental sources, like noise or light
or children, or due to things we bring to bed with us, like anxiety or an
untreated sleep disorder – diminish the benefits of sleep.

 

In the face of the Covid-19 pandemic, we
can’t afford not to sleep well right now. Healthy sleep preserves our
immune function which will be critical if we are exposed to the virus.

 

Sleep also helps us focus, think clearly and
solve problems. It helps us maintain our composure when emotions are running
high. And for those with common chronic illnesses such as diabetes, obesity,
high blood pressure, heart disease or depression, healthy sleep promotes better
management of these underlying conditions.

 

Keep your body clock running on time

Just because you are stuck home does not
mean you cannot go outside. Staying inside decreases your light exposure and
makes it harder for your body clock to maintain its circadian rhythm. If you
can safely get some sunlight, especially in the morning, that will help your
brain and body keep the daytime / night-time schedule running smoothly.

 

You don’t have to keep the exact same
schedule every day. But if you are stuck at home for a while, adding structure
to your day will help. Plan some anchor activities like meals, social contact
and a concrete beginning and end of your work or school day so that everything
doesn’t run together.

 

If you have extra time at home, now might be
a good time to work on optimising your sleep environment. Install better window
blinds, put duct tape over those bright LEDs and set your phone for night mode.

 

Aim to get the amount of sleep you
need

For some people, schedule changes and more
time at home may equal more opportunities for sleep. If you’ve been ‘getting
by’ with less sleep than you need and spending your weekends ‘catching up’ on
sleep, reduced commuting time and prepping children for daycare and school may
allow you to establish new routines that allow you to get a healthier sleep
duration.

 

On the other hand, although staying home may
increase the time you have to sleep, resist the temptation to drastically
extend your time in bed. Most adults need seven to eight hours and should limit
their time in bed to the time they actually plan to sleep. Spending more time
in bed awake or sleeping on and off increases sleep fragmentation and results
in lighter, less restorative sleep.

 

Brief naps might be a good idea if you are
sleepy during the day and have the freedom to build a nap into your schedule.
Naps as short as ten minutes can improve energy levels and promote mental
performance. But too much napping across the day can backfire. A nap may make
it harder to sleep at night, leaving you sleepy the next day. Avoid this
vicious cycle whereby daytime napping worsens night-time sleep.

 

Three in the morning is a terrible time to
calm yourself down – your brain expects to be asleep at that time, not problem-solving!

 

Keep active to ‘earn’ your sleep

Move your body. Try to exercise. Do not sit
around just because you are home and your routine has changed. You will ‘earn’
better sleep with exercise and it can also keep your body clock synchronised.

 

Go easy on the booze

With the stress of a global pandemic, wine
might seem like the answer, but it is not. Although alcohol helps you fall
asleep faster, it also makes sleep more shallow and increases
middle-of-the-night insomnia. Best not to ramp up alcohol use.

 

Attempt to manage your worries

Although it is impossible to completely
avoid coronavirus-related stressors right now, you need to protect yourself
from anxiety-provoking information just as you are avoiding physical contact
with this virus. Depending on your job, you may need to check email and stay
available. Nevertheless, make an effort to limit the amount of information you
consume to what is absolutely necessary. Avoid reading news updates right
before bed.

 

For those middle-of-the-night wake-ups,
remember most of the problems can wait until tomorrow. Three in the morning is
a terrible time to calm yourself down – your brain expects to be asleep at that
time, not problem-solving! If you are worried that you’ll forget something
important, keep a notebook next to your bed and write it down. Then do your
best to go back to sleep.

 

Promote healthy sleep for your
children

For those with kids at home who are
transitioning to distance learning, remember that healthy sleep helps with
attention, memory and emotional regulation. Maintaining a structure of bedtime
and wake-time will make your job as ‘Wait, what? Now I’m a homeschool teacher?’
a little bit easier.

 

You may feel social pressure to keep your
children on their usual schedule, but remember that many schools, especially
middle schools and high schools, start earlier than is optimal for the
adolescent biological clock. A schedule is important, but there is no need to
start the day at a too-early time. Let your tweens and teens start the day at a
biologically acceptable time.

 

Take special care if you have sleep
apnoea

We should all
wash our hands, especially before bed, when we may unknowingly touch our faces
while sleeping. This is particularly important if you use continuous positive
airway pressure (CPAP) for sleep apnoea as it is common for CPAP users to
adjust their mask and headgear during the night.

 

If you are quarantined because of Covid-19
exposure or have any kind of cold or respiratory virus, it is wise, if
possible, to sleep separately from your bed partner while wearing CPAP. If you
are infected, then a CPAP machine might blow the virus into the air. By
sleeping in a different room, you will avoid exposing your bed partner to viral
exposure from your CPAP exhalation breaths.

 

The current public health situation is
stressful and might lead to some new sleep disruptions. We encourage you to use
these strategies to minimise this impact, or even make your sleep better, as we
combat the spread of coronavirus together.

 

Source: https://elemental.medium.com/pandemic-sleep-advice-straight-from-sleep-researchers-63cc2095f577

 

(Written by Katie Sharkey, MD, Ph.D. and
co-authored by Kelly Baron, Ph.D., MPH, Brendan Duffy RPSGT CCSH, Michael
Grandner, Ph.D., MTR, Jared Saletin, Ph.D., Rebecca Spencer, Ph.D., and John
Hogenesch, Ph.D. – 25th March, 2020)

MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

 

4. British Airways fined
£20 m over data breach

 

British Airways has been
fined £20 m ($26 m) by the Information Commissioner’s Office (ICO) for a data
breach which affected more than 400,000 customers. The breach took place in
2018 and affected both personal and credit card data. The fine is considerably
smaller than the £183 m that the ICO originally said it intended to levy back
in 2019.

 

It said ‘the economic impact
of Covid-19’ had been taken into account. However, it is still the largest penalty imposed by the ICO to date. The incident took place when BA’s systems
were compromised by its attackers and then modified to harvest customers’
details as they were input. It was two months before BA was made aware of it by
a security researcher and then notified the ICO.

 

The data stolen included
log-in, payment card and travel booking details as well as name and address
information. A subsequent investigation concluded that sufficient security
measures, such as multi-factor authentication, were not in place at the time.
The ICO noted that some of these measures were available on the Microsoft
operating system that BA was using at the time.

 

‘When organisations take
poor decisions around people’s personal data, that can have a real impact on
people’s lives. The law now gives us the tools to encourage businesses to make
better decisions about data, including investing in up-to-date security,’ said
Information Commissioner Elizabeth Denman. British Airways said it had alerted
customers as soon as it had found out about the attack on its systems. ‘We are
pleased the ICO recognises that we have made considerable improvements to
?the
security of our systems since the attack and that we fully co-operated with its
investigation,’ said a spokesman.

 

Data protection officer
Carl Gottlieb said that in the current climate, £20 m was a ‘massive’ fine. ‘It
shows the ICO means business and is not letting struggling companies off the
hook for their data protection failures,’ he said.

 

It’s taken more than two
years for BA to face the music over this extremely serious incident. The
company breached data protection laws and failed to protect itself from
preventable cyber attacks. It then failed to detect the hack until the damage
was done to hundreds of thousands of customers.

 

The lag between incident
and fine has raised eyebrows in privacy circles but it is understood that the
Information Commissioner’s Office has been working methodically to get it
right. This is the Commissioner’s first major fine under the EU data regulation
GDPR and was being watched closely by the rest of Europe as a potential
landmark decision.

 

The final figure of £20 m
has come as a shock to many who were expecting it to be closer to the
eye-opening £183 m initially proposed but it is still a significant moment for
data privacy and GDPR. Other companies will look at the fine as the shape of
things to come if they also fail to protect customers. In a post-Covid world, the
ICO may not be as gentle.

 

Source:
www.bbc.com – 16th October, 2020

 

II. World

 

5. Indian-origin Srikant Datar named Dean of Harvard Business School

 

Eminent
Indian-origin academician Srikant Datar has been named as Dean of Harvard
Business School, succeeding Nitin Nohria and becoming the second consecutive
Dean hailing from India to lead the prestigious 112-year-old institution.

 

Datar,
an alumnus of the University of Bombay and the Indian Institute of Management,
Ahmedabad, is the Arthur Lowes Dickinson Professor of Business Administration
and the Senior Associate Dean for University Affairs at Harvard Business School
(HBS).

 

He will
assume charge as the school’s next Dean on 1st January, President
Larry Bacow said. He described Datar as an ‘innovative educator, a
distinguished scholar and a deeply experienced academic leader.’

 

Bacow
added: ‘He is a leading thinker about the future of business education and he
has recently played an essential role in HBS’s creative response to the challenges
posed by the Covid-19 pandemic. He has served with distinction in a range of
leadership positions over his nearly 25 years at HBS, while also forging novel
collaborations with other Harvard Schools.’

 

Datar
said he is in equal measures ‘humbled and honoured’ to take on the new role.
‘Harvard Business School is an institution with a remarkable legacy of impact
in research, education, and practice. Yet the events of the past year have
hastened our passage to an unforeseen future,’ he said, adding that he looks
forward to working with colleagues and friends of the school to realise ‘our
mission in what undoubtedly will be an exciting new era.’

 

He will
become the 11th Dean in the business school’s history as he succeeds
Nohria, who last November announced his plans to conclude his Deanship at the
end of June, 2020 after ten years of service. Nohria had agreed to continue
through this December in view of the pandemic, a statement posted on the
Harvard Gazette website said.

 

Datar
received his bachelor’s degree, with distinction, from the University of Bombay
in 1973. A chartered accountant, he went on to receive a postgraduate diploma
in business management from the Indian Institute of Management, Ahmedabad,
before completing master’s degrees in statistics and economics and a Ph.D. in
business from Stanford University.

 

Datar
is an ‘outstanding choice’ as Harvard Business School’s next Dean and he has
thought deeply about the challenges and opportunities facing management
education and has a proven record of collaboration, innovation, and leadership
– not only within HBS but across Harvard and at other organisations.

 

Co-author
of several books, Datar played a key role in launching both the M.S.-M.B.A. in
biotechnology and life sciences (with the Faculty of Arts and Sciences and
Harvard Medical School) and the M.S.-M.B.A. in engineering sciences (with the
Harvard Paulson School of Engineering and Applied Sciences) joint degree
programmes. He currently serves on the boards of companies such as Novartis and
T-Mobile US.

 

Source: www.livemint.com – 10th October, 2020

 

6. What the UK owes in reparations

 

The day
before the United Kingdom finally left the European Union, Bell Ribeiro-Addy
gave her first speech in Parliament. The debate that day was about the broader
future of ‘global Britain,’ but for Ribeiro-Addy it was also about old
injustices and their links to current problems. ‘Not only will this country, my
country, not apologise – by apologise I mean properly apologise; not “expressing
deep regret”,’ she said, ‘it has not once offered a form of reparations.’

 

The
35-year-old South Londoner who is of Ghanaian origin and describes herself as a
socialist and feminist, represents Streatham, the neighbourhood where she grew
up, for the UK’s Labour Party. She was speaking before the pandemic devastated
the British economy and global protests against racial injustice altered the
tone of the conversation, giving the reparations movement a fresh sense of
urgency.

 

A quick
glance at Hansard, the database of official transcripts of every debate in
Parliament for the last 200 years, reveals reparations are a rarely discussed
issue. British reparations would not be straightforward. Colonialism itself was
broad and complex and its modern-day outcomes are not easily disentangled.
British colonial subjects were not treated equally to one another, either, and
it may prove impossible to fully account for everyone’s interests. That’s
assuming the country owes anything, develops the political will to consider the
issue, or even has the means to pay after the economic shocks of coronavirus
and Brexit.

 

The
UK’s key role in the slave trade was perhaps the most shameful period in its
history. If and when the UK does decide it owes reparations, there are questions
to answer, such as to whom compensation should be made, and how. It could be
argued, for example, that the most heinous crime should have the highest
priority. But whom to compensate? The West African countries, still mostly
poor, whose able-bodied young people were ripped away centuries ago? The
descendants of enslaved people, some of whom are now British citizens? And
then, what about colonial subjects in other parts of Africa, or South Asia, and
their descendants? They may not have experienced enslavement but there was
indentured labour, stolen land and tremendous wealth extraction.

 

A history of colonisation

The
British Empire was the largest the world has ever seen. By the 19th
century, it controlled vast swathes of Africa, Asia and the Americas, as well
as Australia and New Zealand. For nearly 250 years, from the mid-1500s until
abolition in 1807, the UK played a key role in the abduction, enslavement and
trafficking of people from West Africa. It became the world’s foremost
superpower through coercive trade and military might, as well as its globally
significant innovations in technology, manufacturing and engineering.

 

Today,
around 10% of the UK’s population has its origins in the former colonies,
including many whose ancestors may have been enslaved. The Windrush generation
was named after a ship that brought migrants from the Caribbean to the UK in
1948. Over the subsequent decades, there were waves of South Asian immigrants
from the partitioning of India and Pakistan in 1947, and from East Africa
following the independence of Kenya, Uganda and Tanzania in the 1960s.
Labourers, refugees, students, CEOs, doctors and soccer stars came from the
rest of the Empire. After the end of World War II, a badly damaged and severely
diminished Britain needed workers in order to rebuild and still had obligations
towards many colonial subjects. Many UK residents resented the new arrivals,
and the 1970s saw the rise of racist organisations like the National Front,
with violent intimidation a daily reality for many minorities.

 

This
legacy continues. Many Black and South Asian people in the UK continue to face
substantial disadvantages. In general, they have worse housing, poorer schools
and greater levels of unemployment than their white counterparts. They are more
likely to be imprisoned, or die of Covid-19. The data are clear. In 2018, the
British government apologised after dozens of descendants of the Windrush
generation – many born and raised in Britain – were wrongly detained, denied
legal rights and even deported from the UK over citizenship issues. All of this
means that, for activists, the moral case for reparations is clear.

 

However, it is not true
that Britain has never paid any form of reparations. Archival research by
Hardeep Dhillon, a doctoral candidate at Harvard University, reveals the extent
to which the British eventually compensated victims of a massacre in Amritsar,
northern India, in 1919. It wasn’t much money – a total of around $30,000 at
the time (around $400,000 today), divided among nearly 2,000 victims and their
families – but it may have been the first example of reparations paid to
colonial subjects.

 

The UK
government was far more generous in compensating British companies and families
for the loss of the slave trade. The Slave Compensation Commission, which was
formed after abolition in the 1830s, awarded thousands of traders a total of
£20 million of public money – 40% of the government’s annual budget at the
time. It was, historian David Olusuga points out, the largest government
bailout until the financial crisis of 2009, and the final payment wasn’t made
until 2015. The Legacies of British Slave-ownership project, a research outfit
at the University of London, has analysed and uploaded the Commission’s records
– the project website says they ‘provide a more or less complete census of
slave-ownership in the British Empire.’

 

The time for reckoning

Britain
has shown that it is willing to pay compensation and that it can push
difficult, controversial policies through if there’s enough political will.
With the tortuous Brexit process nearly complete, the UK has also been
re-evaluating its position in the world. It has, for example, adopted a
surprisingly clear and direct stance on China and forcefully condemned
authoritarian Chinese policies in Hong Kong, even offering citizenship to
thousands of residents of the city, another former colony.

 

But the
British economy is now in dire straits. Thanks to Brexit, it has lost direct
access to the largest market for its goods and services and the security of the
European Union’s trade deals. The coronavirus pandemic has shrunk economic
activity and output substantially, with the government forced to borrow huge
sums of money to help workers and entire industries get through the ordeal. In
these extraordinary circumstances, it is difficult to see where the necessary
political will for reparations can emerge.

 

So far,
the British electorate has been largely unmoved by the moral arguments. In
2014, a coalition of 15 Caribbean countries, where Britain took slaves and
extracted resources, presented the UK with a plan for compensation; according
to a survey at the time, nearly three-quarters of the British population
opposed such payments by European countries for their roles in slavery and
colonialism. The government’s Foreign and Commonwealth Office (FCO), which
oversees diplomacy and international development, said in 2014 that reparations
were off the table. ‘We do not see reparations as the answer,’ an FCO spokesman
said. ‘Instead, we should concentrate on identifying ways forward with a focus
on the shared global challenges that face our countries in the 21st
century.’

 

Education
may be a reason why there’s so little political will. Priya Satia, Professor of
British History at Stanford University, told
Quartz that while
carrying out research in Birmingham – a city with a large Black and South Asian
population – she realised that many people, even those whose ancestors were
subjected to slavery and colonialism, have not necessarily been taught enough
of its history to be able to understand and articulate the issues around
reparations.

 

In
2008, the slave trade became a mandatory component of the high school history
curriculum in England, alongside the British Empire, World Wars I and II, and
the Holocaust. This means that Generation Z is the first to absorb,
en masse, this vital part of history. But given that nobody who went to high
school after 2008 is older than 30, the political and social consequences of
this shift in education policy may be some way off. ‘People don’t see a direct
connection between what they benefit from in this country and what enslaved
Africans did to contribute to its development,’ says Catherine Koroma
Whitfield, a researcher at Brighter Futures for Children, an educational
organisation in the UK. ‘That’s intentional by the state, I would argue,
because otherwise people would be rightly outraged and it would give legitimacy
to the call for reparations.’

 

A future of accountability

Following
the global wave of protests after the killing of George Floyd, an unarmed Black
man, by US police officers on 25th May, the conversation in Britain
soon turned to accountability for the country’s own history of subjugation.
Protesters tore down statues of slave owners and also figures like Cecil Rhodes
who played a key role in the further colonisation of Africa, while major
companies apologised and offered compensation for their ties to the trade.
Prime Minister Boris Johnson said that he was ‘appalled’ and ‘sickened’ by the
manner of Floyd’s death, and that in the UK ‘there is so much more to do – in
eradicating prejudice and creating opportunity.’ But he did not mention
reparations.

 

Activists
are focusing on justice rather than reparations, given the lack of popular and
political will for direct compensation. Modern-day trade, tax and debt policies
ensure the continuing poverty and dependence of many former colonies, argues
Naomi Fowler of the Tax Justice Network, a politically independent organisation
that campaigns ‘on a wide range of issues related to tax, tax havens and
financial globalisation,’ according to its website. Britain still pursues
‘extractive’ policies through its network of tax havens and small overseas
territories, she tells
Quartz: ‘It’s a second empire.’

 

The
modern reparations movement ‘is not just a call for monetary compensation; it’s
also a demand for radical and justice-driven change,’ writes economist Priya
Lukka in
Open Democracy. Debt policies are key, she tells Quartz. The poorest
countries in the world, many of them former colonies in Africa, owe billions to
the government, companies and other institutions in the UK; cancellation of these
debts could amount to a form of justice. Although some of this debt has been
‘rolled over and rescheduled’ because of the pandemic, Lukka adds, ‘a much more
progressive approach would be to look at how it was derived and question,
therefore, its legality.’

 

For
those with their sights set on financial reparations, patience is probably the
most important virtue. Shifts in public and political opinion, if they ever
happen, move slowly, and could be generational. ‘Demands that were on the table
for years – such as the removal of the Rhodes statue – are now coming to
fruition,’ says Priya Satia. ‘This is the moment in which some things are
beginning to find fulfilment, but the way any movement works is through the
cultural shift that it causes and that takes time. It can’t happen overnight.’

 

Source: www.qz.com; Author Hasit Shah, 6th
October, 2020

 

III. Leadership

 

7. 15 great leadership books on Adam Grant’s summer reading list

 

As Adam
Grant says, ‘Leaders who don’t have time to read are leaders who don’t make
time to learn.’ That’s why, for the past few years, he has shared a list of
upcoming books he feels have the potential to make a real difference in how you
think and act. Since I’ve also read advance copies of some of the books on this
year’s list, let’s start with books I’ve also read and wholeheartedly
recommend:

 

1. Ask for More by Alexandra Carter (5th May)

I’m a
terrible negotiator, especially when negotiations turn even the slightest bit
adversarial. If you’re like me, Carter’s book will be right up your alley. She
shows how to create better outcomes without burning bridges. Sometimes even
building better bridges.

 

2. The Biggest Bluff by Maria Konnikova (23rd June)

When
Konnikova decided to write a book about poker, she knew almost nothing about
the game. So she started playing in $20 and $40 tournaments. Then she moved up
to higher stakes tournaments, finishing second in one and winning $2,215.

 

And
then she won $84,600 at the PCA National, and decided to push back her book to
2019 and go all in (pun intended) on poker, a decision that paid off when she
finished second in an Asia Pacific Poker Tour Macau event and won $57,519.

 

As
Grant writes, ‘It’s rare enough to find a memoir this transfixing or a
behavioural science book this insightful. To have them combined in one place –
by a psychologist who mastered one of the most competitive games on earth – is
a real treat.’

 

3. Leading Without Authority by Keith Ferrazzi (26th May)

The
author of
Never Eat Alone, Ferrazzi turns to building teams. Since no one ever does anything truly
worthwhile on their own, that makes
Leading Without Authority a book that can benefit everyone.

 

4. You’re About to Make a Terrible Mistake! by Olivier Sibony (14th July)

The
title is hyperbolic, but the book is extremely practical. As Grant writes,
‘You’re probably familiar with many of the biases that can ruin your decisions.
The question is what to do about them when you’re developing your business
strategy, and Olivier has some compelling answers. Drawing on his extensive
experience as a consultant and his impressive knowledge of behavioural science,
he explains how you can make your organisation smarter than the people in it.’

 

5. The Power of Ritual by Casper ter Kuile (23rd June)

What
you do is who you are, and what you do regularly is definitely who you are. As
Grant writes, ‘His book brims with wisdom about how we can turn our daily
habits into deeper sources of connection and meaning.’

 

Connection
and meaning. Accomplishing more of what you set out to achieve. That’s an
unbeatable combination.

 

And now
for the books on Grant’s list that I haven’t read (descriptions for each are by
him):

 

6. Manifesto for a
Moral Revolution
by Jacqueline Novogratz
(5th May)

Jacqueline
is one of the most inspiring leaders on the planet. As the founder and CEO of
Acumen, she’s spent the past two decades waging a global war on poverty and
putting impact investing on the map. Now she’s poured her heart into a moving
book on how we can do more to make a difference. I can’t think of a better time
than right now to start learning how to improve at improving the world.

 

7. Leadership by Algorithm by David De Cremer (26th May)

Everyone
is buzzing about artificial intelligence, but few people have a clue how it
will affect the way organisations are managed. After spending years studying
leadership and trust, David has written the most informative book I’ve read on
how algorithms will change leadership – and which parts are unlikely to be
replaced by a machine.

 

8. Humankind by
Rutger Bregman (2nd June)

This
book demolishes the cynical view that humans are inherently nasty and selfish
and paints a portrait of human nature that’s not only more uplifting – it’s
also more accurate. Rutger is an unusually original thinker and by taking us on
a guided tour of the past, he reveals how we can create a future with more
givers and fewer takers.

 

9. Inclusify by
Stefanie Johnson (2nd June)

Many
leaders are talking about the need for more diverse, inclusive workplaces, but
few are making real progress. Enter Stefanie Johnson, a leading expert. She
draws on her background as a researcher, consultant and adviser to offer
rigorous evidence and practical ideas for making sure that people who stand out
are able to fit in, too.

 

10. The Making of a Leader by Tom Young (30th July)

Although
elite athletes understand the key to excellence, you rarely have the chance to
get inside their heads. You’re in luck. As a performance psychologist, Tom has
worked closely with some of the world’s best in both individual and team
sports. In this fascinating read, he shares rich stories and keen insights on
the science and the practice of achieving and sustaining success.

 

11. What Girls Need by Marisa Porges (4th August)

This is
a powerful book about how we can raise girls to become strong, ambitious women.
The ideas are timely and the stories are relatable. Marisa has lived them
herself. She flew fighter jets in the Navy and now runs a girls’ school.

 

12. Making Sense by Sam Harris (11th August)

Sam is
a true public intellectual: He thinks deeply about a wide range of issues and
engages fearlessly with controversial topics and unpopular opinions. This book
features some of the most compelling conversations from his hit podcast. You
don’t have to agree with him to learn from him, for he has a gift for surfacing
new ideas as well as new questions.

 

13. The End of Food Allergy by Kari Nadeau and Sloan Barnett (11th August)

As a
pioneering scientist, Kari has steered the allergy world out of the dark ages
and into the light of evidence-based cures. For anyone who has suffered from
food allergies or lived in fear of them, this book is a ray of hope. It’s an
illuminating read on why our own immune systems sometimes hold us hostage after
we eat – and how we can stop it from ever happening again.

 

14. Humanocracy by Gary Hamel and Michele Zanini (18th August)

If an
organisation has ever crushed your dreams, this book just might help to
rejuvenate you. It’s hard to imagine a better guide to busting bureaucracies
and designing workplaces that live up to the potential of the people inside
them.

 

15. 2030 by Mauro
Guillen (25th August)

For too
long the public’s understanding of social science has been dominated by
economists and psychologists. We know a lot about what’s going on with dollars
and senses, but we’re surprisingly uninformed about how social structures are
transforming the world around us. As a brilliant sociologist, Mauro is here to
change that. His bold, provocative book illuminates why we’re having fewer
babies, the middle class is stagnating, unemployment is shifting and new powers
are rising.

 

Source: www.inc.com, Author Jeff Haden – 22nd
May, 2020

 

 

 

If you weighed 100 kilos on Earth, you would only
weigh 38 kilos on Mars. You’re not fat – you’re just on the
wrong planet

 

The asteroid 16 Psyche is part of an asteroid belt
between Mars and Jupiter and could be made of entirely metal and worth more
than all of Earth’s economy.

The metals in the asteroid could be worth around
$10,000 quadrillion, according to
Forbes i.e
$10,000,000,000,000,000,000.

By contrast, the entire economy of
Earth was worth approximately $142 trillion in 2019

  @fact

MISCELLANEA

I. Economy

1. India’s plan for public-private partnerships and
investments in railways set to transform the sector

 

The Indian Railways is in for a massive
makeover, rather a complete transformation. ‘India needs world-class railways
and it needs to be better than the airports,’ Amitabh Kant, CEO of the Niti
Aayog, said during a press conference at National Media Centre, while giving a
peep into the upcoming public-private partnerships in passenger train
operations. Joining him was the CEO of the Railway Board, Vinod Kumar Yadav.

 

‘This creates a win-win situation for Indian
Railways as well as investors, by tapping into the potential of huge unmet
demand in the passenger business. The private sector investment we are looking
at is about Rs. 30,000 crores,’ Kant said.

 

A peep into the Railways 2.0

The infrastructure of Indian Railways will
meet private entities operating modern technology. This means quality trains,
advanced technology, better service and a much better experience.

 

‘We are looking at 109 origin-destination
pairs, divided into 12 clusters requiring 151 trains… Our objective is also
50 railway stations.’

 

Kant further explained that efforts are
underway for transparent competitive bidding and some new, attractive routes
based on huge unmet demand will be put out to run premium passenger services.
In sync with the modernisation vibe, the newly-developed railway hubs will be
called Railopolis.

 

Public-private participation, it’s
happened before

Any inclusive discussion on privatisation
has often turned into apprehensions to do with the government’s redundancy. For
those looking at the flipside of the private investment, Kant puts a lot of
apprehensions to rest with the simple precedence of banks.

 

‘It is like when private banks were set up
in India. So many private players came in the banking sector. But that did not
lead SBI to shut. Private investment will bring in newer technologies. It will
create competition in the railway sector. The competition will increase
efficiency and reduce fares in the long run,’ he clarified to both in-house and
web-based participants during the conference.

 

Nominal hike in fares, experience
overhaul

The request for a quotation has already been
floated and the due date for applications is 7th October, 2020.
Addressing queries on the user charge proposed to be levied for the
redevelopment of railway stations, he assured that it will be a nominal amount.

 

‘It will be an affordable amount but it is
important to levy if we are looking at world-class facilities comparable to
airport infrastructure.’

 

The logistics, in a nutshell

The project will have a two-stage bidding
process; the first stage will comprise RFQ for pre-qualification based on
financial capacity, at least 50% of the estimated project cost. There will be
twelve clusters available for investment, namely, Chandigarh, Chennai,
Bengaluru, Delhi 1 and 2, Howrah, Mumbai 1 and 2, Jaipur, Patna, Secunderabad
and Prayagraj.

 

(Source: International Business Times –
By Manpriya Khurana – 18th September, 2020)


 

2. RBI stands battle-ready to take whatever steps
needed for Covid-hit Indian economy: Governor Shaktikanta Das

 

Reserve Bank of
India (RBI) Governor Shaktikanta Das, while addressing the members of the India
Inc. body FICCI, said that the country’s economic recovery is not fully
entrenched and will be gradual as the impact of the coronavirus pandemic has
still not subsided.

 

‘Recovery is not
yet fully entrenched. In some sectors, the optics noticed in June and July
appear to have levelled off. By all indications, the recovery is likely to be
gradual as efforts towards reopening of the economy are confronted with rising
infections.’

 

The Governor’s
remarks come at a time when the country’s economy is going through a period of
crisis. He also said that some high-frequency indicators including agricultural
activity, Purchasing Managers Index for manufacturing, certain private
estimates for unemployment point to ‘some stabilisation’ of economic activity
in the second quarter of the current fiscal year.

 

‘Contractions in
many other sectors (are) simultaneously easing,’ he said.

 

‘Global economy
is estimated to have suffered the sharpest contraction in living memory in
April-June, 2020 on a seasonally adjusted quarter-on-quarter basis. World
merchandised trade estimated to have registered a steep year-on-year decline of
over 18% in the second quarter of the 2020 calendar year,’ the RBI Governor
added.

 

(Source:
International Business Times – By Meghna Sen – 16th September, 2020)

 

II. Science & Health

 

3. World leaders
drew 2020 deadline to save earth; set 20 goals, achieved none in 10 years

 

One million
species are at the risk of extinction as nature degrades and new opportunities
emerge for the spread of viruses like this year’s coronavirus.

 

Ten years; 196
world leaders; business as usual approach. And a bad report card. In 2010,
leaders from 196 countries gathered in Japan and agreed on a long list of goals
to save the only inhabitable planet known to mankind, Earth. They set a 2020
deadline to save nature and meet the 20 targets – but not a single target has
been met.

 

According to the
UN’s Global Biodiversity Outlook Report, the fifth report published in the
matter, the world has failed to achieve even a single goal from the list of
Aichi Biodiversity Targets. Aichi Targets are to biodiversity what the Paris
Convention is to climate change. These targets were established under the UN
Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD) and are the best bet of nations for
biodiversity conservation.

 

First the sad
news, then the scary news

As per the UN
report, one million species are at risk of extinction. ‘Pollution, including
from excess nutrients, pesticides, plastics and other waste, continues to be a
major driver of biodiversity loss. Plastic pollution is accumulating in the
oceans, with severe impacts on marine ecosystems,’ the report states.

 

It must also be
noted, the report further warns, ‘The number of extinctions of birds and
mammals would likely have been at least two to four times higher without
conservation actions in the past decade.’

 

So small steps,
though not nearly enough, still truly count.

 

Twenty
targets, only six achieved… partially

Let’s start with
the less bad news. Each nation was supposed to meet each of the 20 targets. The
six targets that have been partially met in the past decade are to do with –
preventing invasive species, conservation of protected areas, sharing benefits
from genetic resources, biodiversity strategies and improvement and
dissemination of knowledge, the science base and technologies relating to
biodiversity.

 

On average, the
participating countries reported that more than a third of national targets are
on track to be met, 50% of them were seeing slower progress, 11% showed no
progress and 1% were in fact moving in the wrong direction.

 

Money spent
vs. money needed

The 212-page
report also zeroes things down to funding. The half-hearted approach and the
significance governments attach to the environment and climate crises reflect
in the funding. Governments at a global level spend $78 to $91 billion annually
towards the conservation and promotion of biodiversity. That is significantly
less than the hundreds of billions of dollars needed to give the cause the
momentum it needs.

 

The faint
silver lining

As per the
report, the recent rate of deforestation is lower than that of the previous
decade, but only by about one-third, but deforestation may be accelerating
again in some areas. Programmes to eradicate invasive alien species, especially
invasive mammals on islands, have benefited native species. However, the report
cuts short the celebration, ‘These successes represent only a small proportion
of all occurrences of invasive species.’

 

Now what?

‘This flagship
report underlines that humanity stands at a crossroads with regard to the
legacy we wish to leave to future generations,’ said CBD Executive Secretary
Elizabeth Maruma Mrema.

 

The statement
further reads, ‘As nature degrades, new opportunities emerge for the spread to
humans and animals of devastating diseases like this year’s coronavirus. The
window of time available is short, but the pandemic has also demonstrated that
transformative changes are possible when they must be made.’

 

If the pandemic
doesn’t make humanity imbibe the lessons, nothing else really will.

 

(Source:
International Business Times – By Manpriya Khurana – 17th September,
2020)

 


MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

 

22. The long journey into holographic
transportation

 

Who can forget Princess
Leia’s hologram asking for Obi-Wan Kenobi’s help in the movie Star Wars?
That was perhaps the best-known hologram of the many used in the Star Wars
franchise movies, but the power and promise of holographic technology have been
depicted in science fiction stories for years.

 

The starship Voyager’s
chief medical officer in Star Trek: Voyager was a hologram and
holographic characters and ships are featured in several episodes in the Star
Trek: The Next Generation
series.

 

Holographic transportation
is ‘an extension of mixed reality, a new use case if you will,’ Rob Enderle,
principal analyst at the Enderle Group, told TechNewsWorld. ‘It’s more a
variant on telepresence.’

 

Aexa Aerospace, which
provides custom software and hologram development for mixed and virtual reality
devices for aerospace, medical and other industries, is one of several
companies working on holographic transportation. The company demonstrated a
holographic interaction between CEO Fernando De La Peña Llaca, in his Houston,
Texas, office and company software architect Nathan Ream in his Huntsville,
Alabama, office.

 

Ream’s hologram was
imported into De La Peña Llaca’s office, then Ream pointed to various objects
and read from a magazine in the CEO’s office in real time when asked. The two
also played Tic-Tac-Toe. Ream won. However, an attempt to shake hands failed.

 

Aexa Aerospace has
demonstrated the prototype to a potential client in a United States government
department, Ream said. It’s targeting a first release for late summer and that
‘could be working at the client’s facility before the end of 2020.’

 

Microsoft researchers
coined the name ‘holoportation’ for holographic transportation. The company
trademarked the term in 2018. Still, holographic transportation ‘is not
offering anything that augmented reality, virtual reality, mixed reality and
cross reality doesn’t,’ Michael Hoffman, a founding partner at Object Theory,
told TechNewsWorld. Hoffman was a principal lead on the Microsoft HoloLens
team.

 

(Source:
www.technewsworld.com – 14th August, 2020)

 

23. Trump tells TikTok to find US owner
within 90 days, or close its business

 

US
President Donald Trump issued a new executive order extending the timeline for
ByteDance, the parent company of TikTok, to sell its US business or wrap up its American
operations. According to the earlier executive order, ByteDance was given a
45-day deadline that was to end on 20th September, 2020. With the
new executive order, ByteDance has got slight relief since it now has time
until 12th November to work out a sale deal.

 

In the
order issued on 14th August, Trump wrote, ‘There is credible
evidence that leads me to believe that ByteDance… might take action that
threatens to impair the national security of the United States.’ The US
government has highlighted the issue that TikTok may share data and information
about Americans with the Chinese government. The company has denied that it has
ever done so.

 

Earlier,
TikTok was banned by the Indian government, citing national security and user
privacy concerns. The latest US order also requires ByteDance to destroy all
TikTok data from American users and destroy any data from TikTok’s predecessor
app Musical.ly, which was acquired by ByteDance in 2017. Further, ByteDance
must report to the Committee on Foreign Investment in the United States once
all the data has been erased. TikTok, the short video creating and sharing
platform, has over 80 million users in the United States.

 

(Source:
www.indiatoday.in – 15th August, 2020)

 

24. New work order:
Notebook sales hit an all-time high, courtesy work-from-home amid Covid

 

The lockdown and work from
home (WFH) saw demand for notebooks hit an all-time high, with even companies
placing large-scale orders for employees to ensure business continuity.
Notebook sales saw a whopping 105.5% y-o-y growth during the April-June period.

 

As
per analysts, Q2FY2020 has had some bright moments for the domestic PC market
as decline in desktops and workstations was to an extent arrested by the huge
demand for laptops. Traditionally, January-March sees an increase in demand, but
due to Covid the pent up demand shifted to Q2. Besides, WFH further perked up
the market for notebooks.

 

According to IDC, most IT
services, global enterprises and consulting companies placed large orders for
notebook PCs. This led to an all-time high of enterprise notebook purchases
with shipments growing by 105.5% y-o-y in Q2FY2020. Small and medium businesses
(SMBs) also increased their procurement of notebooks with relatively moderate
growth of 12.1% on an annual basis.

 

‘Demand for notebooks
exceeded expectations with most of the vendors exiting the quarter with minimum
inventory. Despite supply and logistics challenges in the first half of the
quarter, companies executed most of the large orders in Q2. Besides, many
companies shifted their employees to notebooks for the first time; this change
is surely going to alter their procurement strategy in the long term with a mix
of in-office and remote workforce becoming a reality for many organisations,’
said IDC India market analyst (PC devices) Bharath Shenoy.

 

With
most of India under lockdown, IT companies such as TCS, HCL, Infosys and Wipro
have all announced arrangements for employees to work from home for the foreseeable future. The pandemic forced most IT
companies
in India to forego their strict office-based working policies
in favour of adopting new hybrid working arrangements to ensure business
continuity during the lockdown.

 

(Source:
www.financialexpress.com – 16th August, 2020)

 

II. Sports News

 

25. M.S. Dhoni announces
retirement from international cricket

 

M.S. Dhoni, the former
Captain of the Indian cricket team, has announced his retirement from
international cricket, bringing down the curtains on a near 16-year-long
storied career of one of the country’s greatest limited-overs cricketers. Dhoni
retires as India’s most successful captain in limited-over internationals,
having won three ICC trophies – the 2007 T20 World Cup, the 50-over World Cup
in 2011 and the 2013 ICC
Champions
Trophy – the only Captain to do so.

 

Dhoni, 39, made the
confirmation through a video on Instagram, its caption reading: ‘Thanks –
Thanks a lot for ur love and support throughout. From 1929 hrs consider me as
Retired.’

 

The announcement means
that Dhoni’s last India game would remain the semi-final of the 2019 ICC
Cricket World Cup in which India lost to New Zealand by 18 runs. It was his
350th ODI, in which he scored 50 off 72 balls before being run-out
by a bullet throw from Martin Guptill in the deep. Incidentally, Dhoni was
run-out in his first ODI as well.

 

Having retired from Test
cricket in December of 2014 with 4,876 runs from 90 matches, Dhoni carried on
playing ODIs and T20Is. With 10,733 runs, Dhoni is fifth in the list of India’s
all-time run-scorers in ODIs behind Sachin Tendulkar, Virat Kohli, Sourav
Ganguly and Rahul Dravid. His overall Indian numbers are staggering: 538
matches, 17,266 runs, 16 centuries, 108 fifties, 359 sixes, 829 dismissals.

 

Dhoni’s future was a hot
topic of speculation since his sabbatical from cricket following India’s World
Cup exit. Ever since the defeat to New Zealand, Dhoni did not play any form of
cricket in the last one year, hinting he might have played his last in India
colours. Dhoni, however, would be turning up in the IPL where he will captain
the Chennai Super Kings in the tournament’s 13th season, to be
played in the UAE.

 

(Source:
www.hindustantimes.com – 16th August, 2020)

 

III. World News

 

26. Citi wired $900
million in ‘clerical error’, they won’t hand cash back

 

Even for Citigroup Inc.,
it was big money. Loan operations staff at the New York bank wired $900
million, seemingly on behalf of Revlon Inc., to lenders of the troubled
cosmetics giant controlled by billionaire Ron Perelman.

 

It was a mistake for the
ages – a ‘clerical error,’ as Citigroup told lenders – that’s now plunged the
bank into a battle between the Perelman empire and a corps of sharp-edged
investment funds that have become its impatient creditors.

 

One financier involved
likened the surprise payment to finding a fortune on the sidewalk. And, as of a
week later, several hedge funds who claim Revlon was in default on the loan
were showing no signs that they’ll be giving Citigroup its money back.

 

The wayward transfer of
nearly a billion dollars appears to be one of the biggest screw-ups on Wall
Street in ages and it’s set tongues wagging in financial markets. The question
everyone is asking: how could this happen? A spokeswoman for Citi declined to
comment. A representative for Revlon said in an emailed statement that Revlon
itself didn’t pay down the loan, or any portion of it.

 

‘It’s
a billion-dollar clerical error,’ said Michael Stanton, a former restructuring
and bankruptcy adviser. ‘This is probably knocking around some very big rooms
at Citibank.’

 

(Source: www.ndtv.com – 17th
August, 2020)

 

27. Pakistan’s blasphemy
law a weapon of revenge used against minorities

 

Radical Islamists of
Pakistan found a new ‘hero’ recently. His name is Khalid Khan, who shot dead
Tahir Naseem, an American citizen accused of blasphemy, in a Peshawar courtroom
on 29th July.

 

Even though Khalid Khan
surrendered before the police, thousands rallied in his support and his photos
were shared widely on social media. Before he was taken to the court, he was
welcomed with hugs and kisses.

 

Naseem was charged with
blasphemy in 2018 after he declared himself Islam’s prophet.

 

The killing has ignited a
debate on the dangerous blasphemy law and Pakistani society’s mindset in
general. Pakistan’s blasphemy laws (PPC section 295 and subsections, section
298 and subsections) state that ‘derogatory’ remarks on the Prophet Muhammad,
insulting any religion, disturbing a religious assembly and trespassing on
burial grounds can cause lifetime imprisonment or sentence to death.

 

Till now, no blasphemy
convict has been executed by Pakistan but allegations of blasphemy are enough
to cause riots and killing of accused by vigilante groups. According to Al
Jazeera
, 77 people have been killed since 1990 over accusations of
blasphemy. In Pakistan, as per data released by the National Commission for
Justice and Peace, a total of 776 Muslims, 505 Ahmadis, 229 Christians and 30
Hindus have been accused under the various clauses of the blasphemy law from
1987 to 2018. Ahmadis, Christians and Hindus constitute less than 4% of the
general population of Pakistan, but they account for around 50% of blasphemy
accused.

 

It isn’t that a politician
has never tried to change these laws or bring reforms. But those who did faced
the wrath of the religious zealot section of the country. In 2011, Punjab
Governor Salman Taseer was killed by his own guard after he defended a Christian
woman, Asia Bibi, accused of blasphemy. She was acquitted in 2018.

 

Rights groups and critics
say Pakistan’s blasphemy laws are often used against religious minorities.
Often the laws are used as a weapon of revenge. Therefore, there’s an urgent
need to replace these laws.

 

It is important that
murderers like Khalid Khan be given maximum punishment by the judiciary to set
an example that the guilty will not be spared. If Pakistan wants to prove
itself as a haven for religious freedom, then it must ban these regressive
laws.

 

It’s also imperative that
global powers raise this issue on international platforms to create pressure on
the internal politics of the country. A proposal to put sanctions or
interrogation at international level may force them to think on this again.
Progressive countries of the world should give refuge to the acquitted.

 

(Source:
www.outlookindia.com – 13th August, 2020)

 

IV. Spiritual

 

28. Is being a Hindu
acceptable but having faith in Hindutva ‘dangerous’? Quite the contrary

 

Is being a Hindu
acceptable while faith in Hindutva is not? Is it even dangerous? Many Hindus
seem wary to be associated with Hindutva in spite of the fact that Hindutva
simply means Hindu-ness or being Hindu. They tend to accept the view which
mainstream media has peddled for long: ‘Hindutva is intolerant and stands for
the communal agenda of an extreme right Hindu party that wants to force uniform
Hinduism on this vast country which is fully against the true Hindu ethos.’

 

‘Hindutva is indicative
more of the way of life of the Indian people… Considering Hindutva as hostile,
inimical, or intolerant of other faiths, or as communal, proceeds from an
improper appreciation of its true meaning.’

 

From personal experience,
I also came to the conclusion that Hindutva is not communal and dangerous.

 

For many years I lived in
‘spiritual India’ without having any idea how important the terms ‘secular’ and
‘communal’ were. The people I met valued India’s great Vedic heritage. They
gave me tips, which texts to read, which Sants to meet, which mantras
to learn, etc., and I wrote about it for German magazines. I thought that all
Indians are proud of their ancestors, who had stunningly deep insights into
what is true and who left a huge legacy of precious texts unparalleled in the
world.

 

However, when I settled in
a ‘normal’ environment away from ashrams and connected with the
English-speaking middle class, I was shocked that several of my new friends
with Hindu names were ridiculing Hinduism without knowing anything about it.
They had not even read the Bhagavad Gita but claimed that Hinduism was
the most depraved of all religions and responsible for the ills India is
facing. The caste system and the Manusmriti were quoted as proof.

 

My new acquaintances had
expected me to join them in denouncing ‘violent’ Hinduism which I could not do
as I knew too much, not only from reading but also from doing sadhana.
They declared that I had read the wrong books and asked me to read the right books,
which would give me the ‘correct’ understanding. They obviously didn’t doubt
that their own view was correct.

 

My neighbour, a
self-declared communist, introduced me occasionally to his friends as ‘the
local RSS pracharak’. It was half in jest, but more than half intended
to be demeaning. My reaction at that time: ‘If RSS is in tune with my views,
then it must be good.’

 

Standing up for Hindu Dharma
indicted me as belonging to the ‘Hindutva brigade’ that is shunned by political
correctness. My fault was that I said that Hindu Dharma is the best
option for any society.

 

Of course, my stand is not
communal or dangerous. Hindu Dharma is indeed not only inclusive but
also most beneficial for the individual and for society and needs to gain
strength. And yes, politicians, too, need to base their lives on Hindu Dharma
if they want to be efficient in serving society. Propagating blind belief
has no place in politics, but following Dharma is in the interest of
all.

 

Humanity needs to win over
the madness that ‘the Supreme Being’ loves only those human beings who believe
in a certain book and condemns all others to eternal hellfire. But how to make
them see sense?

 

Even some staunch
‘secular’ Indians occasionally declare themselves as Hindus. It’s a good sign,
but they usually get something wrong: They believe that being Hindu means that
everything goes – believe in a god or not, be vegetarian or not, go to temples
or not. It even seems to imply: be truthful or not. They portray Hindu Dharma
as having no fundamentals.

 

Being Hindu means to know
and value the profound insights of the Rishis and follow their
recommendations in one’s life. These insights may not be obvious to the senses,
like the claim that everything, including nature, is permeated by the one
consciousness (Brahman), but it can be realised as true; similarly, as
it is not obvious that the earth goes around the sun, but it can be proven.
Being a Hindu does not require blind belief.

 

Being Hindu also means
having the welfare of all at heart including animals and nature, because each
part is intimately connected with the Whole.

 

Being
Hindu means following one’s conscience and using one’s intelligence well. It
means diving into oneself, trying to connect with one’s Essence. It means
trusting one’s own Self, Atman, and doing the right thing at the right
time.

 

Being Hindu means being
wise – not deluded or gullible or foolish. This wisdom about the truth of this
universe and about how to live life in the best possible way was discovered and
preserved in India. Yet its tenets are universal and valid for all humanity.

 

Isn’t it time for our
interconnected world to realise this and benefit?

 

(Source: OpIndia.com – 6th
August, 2020); Author: Maria Wirth from Germany and living in India for 38
years)

 

V. Markets

 

29. Tencent loses nearly
$34 billion since the PUBG Mobile ban in India — its second-largest valuation
dip this year

 

Chinese technology company
Tencent loses $34 billion in two days since Indian mobile app ban took away the
largest set of users from its iconic game, PlayerUnknown’s Battlegrounds
(PUBG)Tencent

 

  •  The company behind the
    Chinese app PlayerUnknown’s Battlegrounds (PUBG) Mobile, Tencent, is trading in
    the red for a second straight day after the Indian government banned the battle
    royale game.

 

  •  Its market value has
    plummeted by nearly $34 billion over the last two days with Tencent’s share
    price falling by 2% yesterday and is over 3% in the red so far today.

 

  •  The company said that
    they will engage with the Indian authorities to ensure the continued availability
    of their apps in India.

 

The Chinese technology
mammoth Tencent has lost nearly $34 billion (HK$ 261.05) of its market value
over the last two days after news of its signature battle royale game
PlayerUnknown’s Battlegrounds (PUBG) Mobile being banned by the Indian
government. This is the second biggest dip in Tencent’s valuation since
Bloomberg reported that the company lost $66 billion last month when the US
President Donald Trump banned WeChat.

 

India makes up one-fourth
of PUBG’s user base


Tencent first set its eyes
on India in 2017 when it pumped in $700 million into India’s most valuable
Internet at the time – Flipkart – and another $1.1 billion into the cab-hailing
service Ola. Already leading in China, the technology behemoth was looking at India’s
market to provide the growth it needed to keep up valuations.

 

One year down the line,
after a soft launch in China, it released PUBG to the rest of the world. Come
2020, gamers in India account for nearly a quarter of its downloads – ahead of
even China, according to data by Sensor Tower.

 

(Source: Business Insider,
4th September, 2020)

 

 

 

 

VI. Psychology

 

30. Kids today are
lacking these psychological nutrients

 

When
it comes to the rules and restrictions placed on children, author and Stanford
Graduate School of Business lecturer Nir Eyal argues that they have a lot in
common with another restricted population in society: prisoners. These
restrictions have contributed to a generation that overuses and is distracted
by technology.

 

Self-determination
theory, a popular theory of human motivation, says that we all need three
things for psychological well-being: competence, autonomy, and relatedness.
When we are denied these psychological nutrients, the needs displacement
hypothesis says that we look for them elsewhere. For kids today, that means
more video games and screen time.

 

In
order to raise indistractable kids, Eyal says we must first address
issues of overscheduling, de-emphasise standardised tests as indicators of
competency, and provide them with ample free time so that they can be properly
socialised in the real world and not look to technology to fill those voids.

 

 (Source: Big Think, 30th April,
2020)

 

You could try to pound your head against the wall and
think of original ideas or
you can cheat by reading them in books.

 
@patrickc

 

In life, loss is inevitable. Everyone knows this, yet
in the core of most people it remains deeply denied – ‘This should not happen
to me.’ It is for this reason that loss is the most difficult challenge one has
to face as a human being

  
Dayananda Saraswati

MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

5 Facebook faces mass legal action over data leak

Facebook users whose data was compromised by a massive data leak are being urged to take legal action against the tech giant. About 530 million people had some personal information leaked, including, in some cases, phone numbers. A digital privacy group is preparing to take a case to the Irish courts on behalf of EU citizens affected.

Facebook denies wrongdoing, saying the data was ‘scraped’ from publicly available information on the site. Antoin Ó Lachtnain, Director of Digital Rights Ireland (DRI), warned other tech giants its move could be the beginning of a domino effect. ‘This will be the first mass action of its kind but we’re sure it won’t be the last,’ he said. ‘The scale of this breach, and the depth of personal information compromised, is gob-smacking.’ He added: ‘The laws are there to protect consumers and their personal data and it’s time these technology giants wake up to the reality that protection of personal data must be taken seriously.’

DRI claims Facebook failed to protect user data and notify those who had been affected. The data leak was first discovered and fixed in 2019, but was recently made easily available online for free. DRI said individual users who take part in the legal action could be offered compensation of up to €12,000 (£10,445) if it is successful – based on what it says are similar cases in other countries.

‘If successful this could well set a precedent and open the door to further class action down the line,’ Ray Walsh, a digital privacy expert at ProPrivacy, told the BBC. ‘Big Tech might then find that being made to compensate individual users is a strong reminder to work harder on privacy compliance,’ he added.

The Irish Data Protection Commission announced its decision to launch an investigation into the leak. It will assess whether any parts of the GDPR or Data Protection Act 2018 were infringed by Facebook. If found to be in breach, the social media giant could face fines of up to 4% of its turnover.

Responding to DRI’s legal case, a Facebook spokesman said: ‘We understand people’s concerns, which is why we continue to strengthen our systems to make scraping from Facebook without our permission more difficult and go after the people behind it.’

He also pointed to other firms involved in similar recent leaks. ‘As LinkedIn and Clubhouse have shown, no company can completely eliminate scraping or prevent data sets like these from appearing. That’s why we devote substantial resources to combat it and will continue to build our capabilities to help stay ahead of this challenge,’ he said.

(Source: bbc.com, dated 16th April, 2021)

6 Crypto firm Coinbase valued at more than oil giant BP, hit a market value of nearly $100bn

Cryptocurrency firm Coinbase, which runs a top exchange for Bitcoin and other digital currency trading, hit a market value of nearly $100 billion (£72.5 billion) in its stock market listing.

Shares debuted on the Nasdaq at a price of $381, but later closed below $330. The initial valuation put Coinbase ahead of many well-known firms, such as oil giant BP and key stock exchanges. The listing was seen as the latest step toward cryptocurrencies gaining wider acceptance among traditional investors.

The price of Bitcoin surged more than 300% last year – and has climbed even higher in 2021 – as firms including Tesla, Mastercard and BlackRock unveiled plans to incorporate digital currencies into their businesses. It hit a record of more than $63,000 on 13th April, 2021, ahead of the Coinbase listing.

Less well-known digital currencies have also made gains with Dogecoin, which was created as a joke, rising more than 70% to more than 13 cents. US-based Coinbase, which makes money primarily by charging transaction fees, has benefited from the soaring demand.

Founded in 2012, Coinbase had more than 56 million users across more than 100 countries and held some $223 billion in users’ assets at the end of March. It reported $1.8 billion in estimated revenue in the first three months of 2021 – more than its total for all of 2020 – as interest in Bitcoin and other digital currencies boomed.

(Source: bbc.com dated 15th April, 2021)

7 NASA chooses SpaceX to build Moon lander

NASA has chosen Elon Musk’s company SpaceX to build a lander that will return humans to the Moon this decade. This vehicle will carry the next man and the first woman down to the lunar surface under the space agency’s Artemis programme. Another goal of the programme will be to land the first person of colour on the Moon.

The lander is based on SpaceX’s Starship craft, which is being tested at a site in southern Texas. SpaceX was competing against a joint bid from traditional aerospace giants and Amazon founder Jeff Bezos, as well as Alabama-based Dynetics. The total value of the contract awarded to Musk’s company is $2.89 billion.

‘With this award, NASA and our partners will complete the first crewed demonstration mission to the surface of the Moon in the 21st century as the agency takes a step forward for women’s equality and long-term deep space exploration,’ said Kathy Lueders, the organisation’s head of human exploration.

‘This critical step puts humanity on the path to sustainable lunar exploration and keeps our eyes on missions farther into the solar system, including Mars.’

The Artemis programme, initiated under the Trump administration, had targeted a return to the lunar surface in 2024. But a shortfall in funding of the landing system has made that goal unattainable.

Elon Musk has been developing the Starship design for years. Resembling the rocket ships from the golden age of science fiction, it is a crucial component of the entrepreneur’s long-term plans for settling humans on Mars. For now, though, it will serve as the lander that ferries astronauts from lunar orbit to the surface.

(Source: Yahoo.com dated 16th April, 2021)

8 Google makes it easier for users in India to take calls and messages while driving

Texting or even taking a call while driving is an extremely dangerous thing to do. However, many people across the world continue to do so while putting their and others’ lives at great risk. Google is now rolling out a feature that will make it easier for users to take calls and reply to messages while driving their cars.

According to Google’s support page for Maps, Google Assistant Driving Mode is now rolling out in Google Maps to Android users in India.

‘Thanks to the new driving-friendly Assistant interface, you can easily get more done while keeping your focus
on the road. Use voice to send and receive calls and texts, quickly review new messages across your messaging apps in one place,’ noted Google on the support page.

Google Assistant will also read out texts so that people don’t have to look down at their phones. Android users will also get alerts for incoming calls which they can answer or decline with their voice.

Google says that Driving Mode ensures that users can do all this without actually leaving the navigation screen. This will ensure to a certain extent that distractions are minimised for the driver.

How does Driving Mode work in Google Maps?
Google explains that it’s quite simple to get started with Driving Mode. Users simply have to begin navigating to a destination with Google Maps and tap on the pop-up to get started. Another way to get started is head to Assistant settings on your Android phone or say ‘Hey Google, open Assistant settings.’ Then simply select ‘Transportation,’ choose ‘Driving Mode’ and turn it on.

The feature is currently available for Android users only and will work on phones running Android version 9.0 phones or higher with 4GB RAM.

(Source: newskifactory.com dated 17th April, 2021)

II. Motivational

9 Meet CA Bhavani Devi, the first Indian fencer to qualify for the Olympics

In 2004, a shy 11-year-old girl walked into Chennai’s Jawaharlal Nehru Stadium for the first time, tightly clutching her mother’s hand. A new student at Muruga Dhanushkodi Girls’ Higher Secondary School, Tondiarpet, Chadalavada Anandha (CA) Bhavani Devi had just learnt the term ‘fencing’ as part of the ‘Sports in Schools’ initiative started by the late Chief Minister J. Jayalalithaa.

Vishwanathan P, who would soon be her first coach, looked on from the parapet, and put the little girl to a 30-second test. ‘I don’t remember what the test was. But right then I knew she had the talent,’ laughs Vishwanathan. In 30 seconds, she secured a spot in the school’s fencing classes, one among 40 other girls.

Cut to 15th March, 2021 in Budapest, Bhavani, now 27, made history by becoming the first Indian fencer to qualify for the Olympics and will represent India at the Tokyo Olympic Games.

Currently ranked 42nd in the world and 1st in the country, the sabre fencer from Old Washermanpet qualified through the Asia / Oceanic Zone of official rankings after Hungary lost to South Korea in the quarter-finals of the Sabre Fencing World Cup.

Wielding a sword, dressed in an electric suit and mask that flickers when the opponent’s weapon lands a jab, her swift, calculated footwork and mental focus brought her this honour after failing to qualify for the 2016 Rio Olympics. She states, ‘In 2016, I realised that there is a limit to which you can put pressure on yourself. It backfires.’

Seventeen years on, Bhavani still wears a coy, almost uncomfortable, smile when put in the spotlight. In the few days she got to spend at home before flying to Italy to resume coaching, she has had little time to relax.

Bhavani remembers starting with bamboo sticks. The little equipment they had was saved for competitions. ‘We used all sorts of things to practice,’ she reminisces. ‘We would go to the stadium at 5.30 am every day and from there to school. In the evening, from school back to the stadium and then return home. This was the routine for years.’

Catching the public bus on time to get to the stadium and back was a struggle, she remembers. ‘But, we still enjoyed the process.’ Vishwanathan quips, ‘She was a “jolly” child, and it was fun to train her.’

The 40-member fencing group at school quickly diminished and five years down, Bhavani was the sole participant. Fencing then was still an unknown sport in India with no big achievements to point out, she says. ‘Some wanted to focus on education. Some felt fencing was not good for girls. There were no job prospects in the sport unlike athletics or volleyball.’

Many asked if the sport was ‘safe enough’ for a girl to pursue. Bhavani’s mother Ramani, a constant and perhaps the most significant presence in her life, nipped such negative comments in the bud. Ramani says, ‘“Why should you bother,” I asked them. The girl is interested in this, so let her be.’

The proud mother is now preparing to fly to Tokyo to watch her daughter’s most anticipated competition. Time and again, Bhavani reiterates that her parents – her late father was a priest and her mother a homemaker – were her biggest support. She says, ‘Many ask her if she is proud to be “Bhavani’s mother”, but it’s the other way round. I am proud to be her daughter.’

She finished Class X, packed her bags and moved to Thalassery where she continued her studies and trained at the same time. In 2017, she became India’s first international gold medallist at the Women’s World Cup held in Reykjavik, Iceland.

Bhavani says there is a surge in the interest towards fencing in India. ‘Earlier, when I used to win international medals many wouldn’t understand what the excitement was about,’ she recalls. But now, people have started recognising the equipment.

Modern fencing is a combination of three disciplines: the épée, the sabre, and the foil. While in épée, the entire body is a valid target area, in sabre, the upper body becomes the target, and in foil, only the torso can receive a strike. Weapons used in each also differ in terms of their make and flexibility.

Bhavani specialises in sabre fencing, in which a typical competition lasts only ten minutes. Has she ever felt intimidated? ‘I have never been afraid, even my parents haven’t for that matter. You can get hurt anywhere, it’s all about how you take care of yourself,’ she says.

With only months to the Olympics, Bhavani recalls the times she had to travel to international competitions alone. This time though, she has the entire country backing her. With her trademark shy smile, she concludes, ‘I will make you all proud. I am confident.’

(Source: thehindu.com dated 31st March, 2021)

MISCELLANEA

I. Economy

1. How 100 unicorns are propelling India forward

Many believe constant claims by opposition parties and leftist journals that our economy is dominated by two Modi-friendly conglomerates. Rubbish. A research paper by Neelkanth Mishra of Credit Suisse reveals that India has spawned 100 ‘unicorns’ – unlisted new companies worth over a billion dollars each.

Never before has India witnessed such a broad-based upsurge of massive new businesses unconnected with old wealth, political contacts or dirty deals with public sector banks. The unicorns have raised billions of dollars from global investors keen to invest not in venerable names but newcomers with ideas capable of dominating the 21st century. The investors know that many unicorns will fail, but enough will succeed to make their investment profitable.

There is a veritable explosion of new entrepreneurs backed by global billions.

In the bargain, they are giving opportunities unknown in history to entrepreneurs earlier shut out of big business for want of capital, contacts and bribing capacity. This does not mean the newcomers are Yudhisthirs who have never sinned. But it does mean old businesses are being challenged by a veritable explosion of new entrepreneurs backed by global billions. Earlier, challengers started small and grew slowly. Today, they can explode from nothing to a billion dollars in a few years, threatening all existing giants.

Earlier, financial experts estimated that India had 30 to 50 unicorns. Credit Suisse used a slightly different definition, including firms valued at at least $1 billion in a recent round of funding; companies where, at the average multiple of similar firms, operating profits of newcomers would justify a billion-dollar valuation; and companies where business momentum had risen so strongly since the last round of funding that a fresh round would have a valuation of one billion-plus. Credit Suisse excluded subsidiaries of existing companies and firms that once rode high but had subsequently slipped in momentum. This gives it credibility.

Some unicorns are famous. The Serum Institute of India is the world’s biggest producer of vaccines. Flipkart sold its e-commerce business for $16 billion to Walmart. But few readers know other names like Wonder Cement, GRT Jewellers, Greenko, Digit or Chargebee. Ask Credit Suisse for the full list.

Two-thirds of these unlisted unicorns started after 2005. They are very diverse, covering not just IT and e-commerce but more humdrum areas. The fastest growth is of software-as-a-service, including gaming, new-age distribution and logistics, modern trade, bio-tech, pharmaceuticals and consumer goods. Unicorns are just the tip of a fast-growing pyramid of 80,000 startups, one-tenth of the new companies formed every year.

Their ambitions are stunning. Ola Cabs, famous for transport, also plans the world’s biggest electric two-wheeler factory of ten million vehicles. The dream may fail – but what a dream!

SEBI, India’s stock market regulator, is pathetically obsolete in rules and outlook. An Initial Public Offering enables companies to list shares on stock exchanges. For this, SEBI has dozens of onerous conditions including profits in three of five preceding years. But giants like Amazon and Facebook made no profits for years even as their value soared because of their potential. Many Indian unicorns too have never made a profit and would not qualify for a stock market listing under SEBI rules.

SEBI focuses on saving Indian household investors from crooks, not on nurturing unicorns. Had India been dependent only on local money and SEBI, it would not have 100 unicorns with hundreds more raring to go. Luckily, globalisation has enabled unicorns to sidestep local rules and red tape. Brand new companies with great ideas but no profit record are viewed by global investors as potential giants rather than potential crooks (as SEBI does).

This is not a bubble about to burst. The world has created massive new pools of private capital in recent decades from venture capitalists and private equity funds. It is now witnessing the explosion of a new species – SPACs, or Special Purpose Acquisition Companies. These raise billions from private investors (including the most illustrious financial names) with no specified investment targets or strategies, which is why some call them ‘blank-cheque’ companies. They are free to search the world for good investment opportunities. In 2020, 248 SPACs in the US raised $83 billion and in January, 2021 alone they raised $26 billion. SPACs can finance promising newcomers without the onerous, expensive route of an IPO to get listed on stock exchanges. Once, a stock market listing was essential for reputation and large-scale financing. Not anymore.

Most unicorns are owned overwhelmingly by foreigners. Indian promoters typically have only a small shareholding. In the US, Facebook CEO Mark Zuckerberg issued shares to others with reduced or zero voting rights, enabling him to raise billions without losing control over his company. India needs to go the same way. Nirmala Sitharaman, please pay attention.

Source: The Times of India – S.A. Aiyar in Swaminomics – 14th March, 2021

II. Science

2. Indian researchers discover unknown strains of bacteria in International Space Station

Researchers from the United States and India have discovered four strains of bacteria in the International Space Station (ISS) and three of these strains were until now completely unknown to science. The new finding suggests that bacteria living on earth are also capable to live in low gravity environments such as the International Space Stations.

In the study report published in the journal Frontiers in Microbiology, researchers noted that the bacteria were formed on plants that astronauts were growing in space. Three of these strains were found on the surface of the ISS in 2015, while one strain was discovered long back in 2011.

Researchers revealed that one of the bacterial strains was Methylorubrum rhodesianum, a known strain. However, after sequencing, researchers noted that the remaining three strains were unknown to humans until now. Researchers have now named these three strains IF7SW-B2T, IIF1SW-B5 and IIF4SW-B5.

‘To grow plants in extreme places where resources are minimal, isolation of novel microbes that help to promote plant growth under stressful conditions is essential,’ said Kasthuri Venkateswaran and Nitin Kumar Singh, researchers at NASA’s Jet Propulsion Laboratory in a recent press release.

Researchers also noted that the International Space Station is maintaining a clean environment, but beneficial microbes should also be there in these low-gravity conditions.

Breakthrough in space farming
As humans are eyeing space tourism and space colonization, the new discovery could create revolutionary changes in plant growth and space farming. The discovery could also help humans during long space missions which include a manned Mars exploration programme that could be initiated soon by NASA.

‘This will further aid in the identification of genetic determinants that might potentially be responsible for promoting plant growth under microgravity conditions and contribute to the development of self-sustainable plant crops for long-term space missions in the future,’ researchers wrote in the study report.

Source: International Business Times – By Nirmal Narayanan – 17th March, 2021

III. News

3. RBI may have to delay liquidity normalisation amid rising Covid cases

The central bank may have to delay the start of monetary policy normalisation by three months amid rising Covid-19 cases, but barring the return of stringent lockdowns there is no significant threat to the economy’s recovery, analysts say.

Having seen a peak of daily cases of nearly 100,000 in late September, infections had been on a steady decline but have now started rising again over the last month. ‘Even as the increase in the current caseload points to the risk of a second wave, more localised and less stringent restrictions (on activity) will help contain the economic impact versus the initial wave,’ said Radhika Rao, an economist with DBS Bank.

DBS has retained its assumptions for a stronger pick-up in March quarter growth versus the December, 2020 quarter and expects a double-digit rebound in the fiscal year 2021-22. India reported 35,871 new corona virus cases on 18th March, the highest in more than three months, with the worst-affected state of Maharashtra, which houses the country’s financial capital Mumbai, alone accounting for 65% of that.

India needs to take quick and decisive steps soon to stop an emerging second ‘peak’ of Covid-19 infections, Prime Minister Narendra Modi has said. Though analysts are unlikely to rush to review their long-term growth forecasts, several believe policy normalisation on interest rates and liquidity may now take a backseat.

‘Monetary policy normalisation might be pushed back by a quarter as authorities monitor developments closely, with status quo on the cards on the repo as well as liquidity management plans for H121,’ Rao said.

The Reserve Bank of India has repeatedly assured bond markets of ample liquidity being maintained to support the recovery, but in early January said it wanted to start restoring normal liquidity operations in a phased manner.

‘Growth concerns due to rising pandemic cases amid a negative output gap could push back market expectations on the timing of policy normalisation in the near term,’ Nomura economists Sonal Varma and Aurodeep Nandi wrote in a note. Though surplus liquidity is a positive from the perspective of ensuring credit flows to productive sectors, economists fear it may add to inflationary pressures if it remains in the system for too long.

‘Although inflation has moderated from the high level, the surge in global crude oil price has added to the upside risk,’ said Arun Singh, global chief economist at Dun and Bradstreet. ‘The central bank, thus, has a difficult task of managing the inflation target while preventing a rise in borrowing cost to the government.’.

Source: International Business Times – By IANS –  18th March, 2021

4 . India now has 4th largest forex reserves behind China, Japan and Switzerland

India has become the fourth largest in the world with forex reserves at $580.3 billion surpassing Russia and behind China, Japan and Switzerland.

Emerging markets have been building reserves to guard against volatility due to Covid aftershocks.

Reserves for India and Russia have plateaued after rising for months. India pulled ahead as Russian holdings declined at a faster rate. India’s foreign currency holdings fell by $4.3 billion to $580.3 billion as of 5th March, the Reserve Bank of India said, edging out Russia’s $580.1 billion pile.

The world’s largest forex reserves league table is headed by China, followed by Japan and Switzerland. India’s reserves are now worth 18 months of imports; they have been boosted by massive inflows by FIIs into the stock market and burgeoning FDI.

According to a recent report by Acuite Ratings, the Indian rupee has strengthened in 2021 so far on healthy portfolio inflows and sharp downward adjustment in inflation. ‘We expect India to post record BoP surplus of $105 billion in FY21, followed by a healthy surplus of $55 billion in FY22.

‘While FX intervention from the central bank will continue in FY22, the pace is likely to ease with moderation in inflation. We expect gradual appreciation in the currency to play out with USD-INR at 73.0 (with downside risk) in March, 20 to 71.0 by March, 21,’ the report said.

Source: International Business Times – By IANS –  15th March, 2021

MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

19. Apple fined for slowing down old iPhones

Apple has been fined 25 million euros (£21m or $27m) for deliberately slowing down older iPhone models without first informing its customers. The fine was imposed by France’s competition and fraud watchdog DGCCRF, which said consumers were not warned. In 2017, Apple confirmed that it did slow down some iPhones but said it only did so to ‘prolong the life’ of the devices. Apple said in a statement that it had resolved the issue with the watchdog.

Many customers had long suspected that Apple slowed down older iPhones to encourage people to upgrade when a new one was released. In 2017, the company confirmed that it did slow down some models as they aged, but not to encourage people to upgrade. It said the lithium-ion batteries in the devices became less capable of supplying peak current demands as they aged over time. That could result in an iPhone unexpectedly shutting down to protect its electronic components. So, it released a software update for the iPhone 6, iPhone 6s and iPhone SE which ‘smoothed out’ battery performance. The practice was confirmed after a customer shared performance tests on Reddit, suggesting their iPhone 6S had slowed down considerably as it had aged, but had suddenly speeded up again after the battery had been replaced.

The French watchdog said iPhone owners ‘were not informed that installing iOS updates (10.2.1 and 11.2) could slow down their devices’. As part of the agreement, Apple must display a notice on its French language website for a month. It says Apple ‘committed the crime of deceptive commercial practice by omission’ and had agreed to pay the fine.

Does Apple still slow down older iPhones? Yes. Since Apple confirmed the practice in 2017, it has implemented it on several more iPhones including:

* iPhone 6, 6 Plus, 6S, 6S Plus
* iPhone SE
* iPhone 7 and 7 Plus
* iPhone 8 and 8 Plus running iOS 12.1 or higher
* iPhone X running iOS 12.1 or higher
* iPhone XS, XS Max and XR running iOS 13.1 or higher

The setting is only enabled when the battery begins to degrade, and iOS now offers clearer information to consumers about when performance management has been switched on. ‘The effects of performance management on these newer models may be less noticeable due to their more advanced hardware and software design,’ Apple said.

Source: www.bbc.com, 7th February, 2021

20. Twitter begins testing voice message feature for DMs

If you intend to send a direct message (DM) on Twitter, the micro-blogging platform is offering an option of doing so through audio.

Twitter will begin testing the voice message feature for DMs in India. The feature, which is being tested in India, Brazil and Japan, will be rolled out in phases for users. ‘India is a priority market for Twitter and that is why we’re constantly testing new features and learning from people’s experience on the service here,’ said Manish Maheshwari, Managing Director, Twitter India

Here’s how it works
The voice messages feature builds on the voice tweets feature that the micro-blogging platform began testing in June last year. With voice tweets, users can compose their audio tweet from the composer tab. They can record their audio tweets by tapping on a new wavelength icon in the composer. Once they tap on the icon, they will see their profile photo with the record button at the bottom. They can tap the button to record 140 seconds of audio.

Voice DMs will also support 140 seconds of audio similar to the feature. The user’s current profile photo will be added to the voice note as a static image when the note plays in DMs.

The feature will be made available for both Android and iOS users. In order to send a voice message, users can open an existing conversation or start a new one. They can then record their message by tapping on the voice recording icon and end the recording once they’re done by tapping it a second time. Users can also listen to their voice message before sending it. iOS users can also press-and-hold the voice recording icon to start recording. They can then send the note immediately when they swipe up and release the icon.

Source: www.thehindubusinessline.com, 17th February, 2021

II. Motivational

21. Mumbra girl defies odds to top CA intermediate

The all-nighters spent studying in the kitchen of the modest 300 sq. ft. home that she shares with her parents and three younger siblings, the limited resources and the apprehensions over whether she would even clear an exam that thousands of hopefuls take, proved every bit worthwhile for Mumbra girl Zarin Khan when she topped the country in the chartered accountancy (CA) intermediate examination. A total of 4,094 students took the exam held as per the old syllabus.

When Zarin got the news from her friends, she could barely believe it. ‘I had not expected to be a ranker, let alone be the first in the country, as I was too scared to even take the exam. I had applied in 2017 and took a two-year gap. But with my family strongly backing me, I decided to take the exam last year. I used to study all night to focus better as in the morning hours there is too much noise.’ Her house is located alongside a main road in Mumbra which is on the outskirts of Mumbai.

The young woman, aged 25, is among the first generation of learners to pursue a professional course in her family. While her father, who could study only till class IX, is a mechanic, her mother is a homemaker. Seeing their oldest sibling ace the CA exam, her sister and brothers are now keen to pursue academics more seriously. Her younger sister has completed B.Sc. and
is working.

‘As no one is well educated in the family, I wasn’t even aware about the courses available or what I should pursue. It was not until 2017 after I completed my graduation that I applied for CA. Later, I did an internship for a year, after which I worked in a Thane-based company. I used the money to pay for my CA classes.’ After completing her articleship, Zarin will pursue her CA final exams. She plans to study all night when it is quieter.

Source: mumbaimirror.indiatimes.com, 13th February, 2021

22. Miss India 2020 runner-up Manya Singh, auto driver’s daughter, was told shakal achi nahi hai

Manya Singh, the daughter of an autorickshaw driver, who was crowned ‘Miss India 2020 Runner-Up’ recently, was once told ‘shakal achi nahi hai’ (you don’t have a nice face).

The newly-crowned Miss India 2020 Runner-Up, who hails from Uttar Pradesh, has made everyone proud after her story went viral on social media. Following the win, her struggles and inspiring story have won praise from all over the country.

In an emotionally-charged ‘Humans of Bombay’ post, Manya Singh spoke about her childhood struggles, her parents’ belief in her dreams and the way she was criticised because of her looks.

She recalled leaving home at 14 to come to Mumbai to pursue her dreams. She had to work at a Pizza Hut store to earn an income. ‘At 14, I boarded the train from my village and left for Mumbai to pursue my dreams, all by myself. I didn’t know where it would lead me, but I knew I was meant to achieve great things. When I walked out of the station, Pizza Hut was the first place I saw. I somehow got myself a part-time job there and temporary accommodation’.

Her parents were always supportive of her dreams. A few days after she arrived in Mumbai, they followed her there, took up a job and supported her.

‘Two days later, when I called Papa, he started crying. But I reassured him, “This is where I belong.” So the next day, both my parents came to Mumbai. Papa said, “We’ll support you”’; he drove an auto to make a living. Still, they put me in a good school. Alongside, I also worked part-time. I earned Rs.15,000 a month,’ she added.

Talking about her dream of winning the Miss India pageant, she said, ‘I was 15 when I watched the Miss India Pageant for the first time. I thought, “I’m going to win that crown someday and make Papa proud.” But coming from a patriarchal family, I was told that women are lesser than men. Tauji would say, “Ladkiyon ko padhai karke bhi shaadi hi karni padti hai.” But when I told Papa, “I want to compete for a beauty pageant”, he said, “Keep working hard and you’ll get there!”’

She revealed that in the beginning she had to face rejection because of her looks or her English. She was once told that she does not have a nice face. ‘I auditioned for over ten pageants, but they’d say, “Shakal achi nahi hai” (you don’t have a nice face), or “You don’t even know English!” Things weren’t easy at home either. Papa had mortgaged our jewellery to pay my fees. So if I’d need money to buy clothes, I’d mop the floor at the pizza place. There, I observed how people carried themselves and in college I’d observe how my friends spoke English (sic),’ Manya Singh added.

Source: www.indiatoday.in, 17th February, 2021)

23. Your big break

Some people get one. Most people don’t.

But, if you’re reading this, it means that you’ve received more than one, perhaps a countless number of, little breaks.
Access to tools, the benefit of the doubt, decent health, occasional peace of mind.
Little breaks. Over and over.
Little breaks get you into a room, but they don’t guarantee your performance. Little breaks get you a glimmer of trust or opportunity, they give you a microphone and a chance to share your dream.
Little breaks don’t always announce themselves the way big breaks do.
Little breaks compound, one often leading to another. Or they don’t, creating false momentum and then disappointment.
Sometimes little breaks pretend to be big ones, and sometimes they’re hiding in plain sight.
Little breaks are easy to ignore and thus are wasted.
Little breaks don’t like being waited for the way big breaks do, because while you’re waiting, you’re wasting the little breaks you’ve already gotten.

Source: seths.blog – Mr. Seth Godin, 14th February, 2021

MISCELLANEA

I. Science

10 New technology enables conversion of waste plastics to jet fuel in just one hour

Researchers have been able to convert 90% of waste plastic to jet fuel and other valuable hydrocarbon products within an hour at moderate temperatures.

Washington State University researchers have developed an innovative way to convert plastics to ingredients for jet fuel and other valuable products, making it easier and more cost-effective to reuse plastics. They were also able to easily fine-tune the process to create the products that they wanted.

Led by graduate student Chuhua Jia and Hongfei Lin, Associate Professor in the Gene and Linda Voiland School of Chemical Engineering and Bioengineering, they report on their work in the journal Chem Catalysis. ‘In the recycling industry, the cost of recycling is the key,’ Lin said. ‘This work is a milestone for us to advance this new technology to commercialisation.’

In recent decades the accumulation of waste plastics has caused an environmental crisis, polluting oceans and pristine environments around the world. As they degrade, tiny pieces of micro-plastics have been found to enter the food chain and become a potential threat to human health.

However, plastic recycling has been problematic. The most common mechanical recycling methods melt the plastic and re-mould it, but that lowers its economic value and quality for use in other products. Chemical recycling can produce higher quality products, but it requires high reaction temperatures and a long processing time, making it too expensive and cumbersome for industries to adopt. On account of the limitations, only about 9% of plastic in the U.S. is recycled every year.

Converting plastic in one hour
In their work, the WSU researchers developed a catalytic process to efficiently convert polyethylene to jet fuel and high-value lubricants. Polyethylene, also known as the No. 1 plastic, is the most commonly used, in a huge variety of products from plastics bags, milk jugs and shampoo bottles to corrosion-resistant piping, wood-plastic composite lumber and plastic furniture.

For their process, the researchers used a ruthenium on carbon catalyst and a commonly used solvent. They were able to convert about 90% of the plastic to jet fuel components or other hydrocarbon products within an hour at a temperature of 220 degrees Celsius (428 degrees Fahrenheit), which is more efficient and lower than temperatures that would be typically used.

Jia was surprised to see just how well the solvent and catalyst worked. ‘Before the experiment, we only speculated but didn’t know if it would work… The result was so good.’

Adjusting processing conditions such as the temperature, time or amount of catalyst used, provided the critically important step of being able to fine-tune the process to create desirable products, Lin said.

‘Depending on the market, they can fine-tune to what product they want to generate,’ he said. ‘They have flexibility. The application of this efficient process may provide a promising approach for selectively producing high-value products from waste polyethylene.’

(Source: International Business Times – By IBT News Desk – 18th May, 2021)

II. Health

11 Scots researchers needed to test curcumin and Covid

Scots who have knee osteoarthritis are being urged to explore the latest research for pain relief from a clinical study. The health benefits of a bioavailable turmeric extract may not only help with pain relief for knee osteoarthritis, but could also lessen some of the severe complications from Covid-19 by offering possible protection as an anti-inflammatory agent against viral infection complications.

Turmeric, a spice used in curry, has been used as medicine in India for hundreds of generations. And recently a number of scientific studies have proved that it contains compounds with medicinal properties for pain relief because of its inflammatory properties.

One form of curcumin extract, called BCM-95®, currently has the strongest independent data in human trials, having been used in dozens of clinical trials. BCM-95® is an enhanced curcuminoid complex with the essential oils of turmeric which is seven times more bioavailable than standard curcumin. BCM-95® is also known as CURCUGREEN®.

BCM-95® is the most researched bioavailable curcumin in the world with over 70 clinical studies in high impact publications. According to the British Journal of Nutrition ‘unmodified curcumin is reported to be retained in the blood for two to five hours in humans, whereas retention of a modified form of curcumin (Biocurcumax-95, or BCM-95®) is reported as exceeding eight hours’.

The most important of these compounds is curcumin, and its bioavailability, or how easily a substance can be absorbed by the body, may be of interest to the 20% of Scots experiencing chronic pain.

Studies have shown that it can be used for a range of disorders and ailments, from osteoarthritis and diabetes to dementia.

Curcumin has well-established anti-inflammatory properties for any number of chronic health conditions. A 2013 article in Biofactors suggests that curcumin works by suppressing the mechanisms of actions that lead to chronic inflammation.

This 2014 study on BCM-95 noted that the ‘anti-inflammatory effects of curcumin may account for its increased effectiveness in patients with depression and that this nutraceutical may provide a safe and effective treatment for individuals suffering from a major psychiatric disorder.’

Covid
Curcumin’s pharmacological abilities as an anti-inflammatory agent may even be able to help with inflammation caused by Covid-19.

In the largest study of its kind to date, the UK’s International Severe Acute Respiratory and Emerging Infection Consortium (ISARIC), supported by the UK Coronavirus Immunology Consortium (UK-CIC), has identified new biomarkers of inflammation that both indicate the severity of Covid-19 and distinguish it from severe influenza.

In a study in Science Immunology, clusters of inflammatory disease markers (including two called GM-CSF and IL-6) increase in accordance with Covid-19 severity, giving insights into the causes of severe disease and potentially offering a new focus for therapy.

Evidence shows that pre-treatment with curcumin lowered levels of GM-CSF and in this experiment the level of IL-6 was significantly decreased in the group of rats treated with curcumin.

‘We all need the best possible protection against a viral infection and pre-treatment with curcumin may save many people from complications from coronavirus; next winter it would be wise to have a few BCM-95 bottles in everyone’s pantry,’ says Suphil Philipose from BioTurm Limited.

He cites evidence by Dr. Pradyut Waghray, a senior consultant pulmonologist to the Indian Armed Forces based in Hyderabad who has 32 years’ experience in this field. In a video, Dr. Waghray talks about evidence-based events he has seen in his patients on the role of curcumin in preventing the entry of the virus into the cells, inhibiting the multiplication of the virus and preventing the cytokine storm which can result in rapid worsening and even death of the patient.

BioTurm is keen to invest in further clinical trials and would like to hear from researchers and scientists based in Scotland, particularly to build on the findings published in the American Journal of Geriatric Psychiatry from 2018.

A twice-daily dose of curcumin extract for 18 months improved memory and was linked to changes in two hallmark Alzheimer’s proteins, amyloid and tau.

This could hold benefits for the brain in healthy individuals over 50 for its memory benefits.

(Source: Promoted by Bioturm Limited – The Scotsman – 3rd May, 2021)

III. Personal Growth

12 The value of minimalism

The less you own, the less you have to take care of.
The less you own, the less you have to replace.
The less you own, the less money you need to earn.
The less you own, the more time you have for other things (and people).
The less you own, the less things you need to protect.

It’s not always easy to want less, but we’re capable of doing it. It starts with appreciating what we already have.

While we’re thinking about what we don’t have, we’re forgetting about what we do have. We have more than we usually realise. And we don’t need many of the things we think we need.

It’s part of human psychology to gain something and shortly thereafter start thinking about what else we can get. It’s also our nature to vehemently protect what we have (even blessings that come our way unexpectedly, and unearned). The way to combat this is to regularly be thankful for what we have.

Minimalism isn’t about depriving yourself of comfort. It’s not about having a poverty mindset. It’s about removing distractions from your life. Having fewer wants can greatly uncomplicate your life.

It doesn’t mean we can’t be wealthy (if we have everything we need, we’re wealthy). It’s about not pursuing wealth as a way of fulfilling yourself spiritually. It’s about not allowing what you own to own you. It’s about not allowing your possessions to blind you from the things that are most important in life.

We all want to be comfortable and not have to worry about money. There’s nothing wrong with that. I wish we could all have that. Maybe one day everyone will. But don’t think that the more you have, the happier you’ll be. That’s true only to an extent.

Part of having more is wanting less. Being content with less is itself an increase.

(Source: Dan Pedersen-Personal Growth –April, 2021)

IV. Economy

13  India needs its own cryptocurrency unicorns, suggest experts

India is no longer a niche market but rather a rapidly expanding financial market. And India requires its own cryptocurrency unicorns.

Stressing that India needs smart and sensible crypto regulation, leading cryptocurrency players in the country have urged the Government against the ban (on cryptocurrency) and sought engagement to build consensus on crypto regulation.

The Government earlier indicated that it would take a ‘calibrated approach’ towards digital assets and formulating a Bill on cryptocurrencies. But a final decision is yet to be taken.

At a webinar organised by the Internet and Mobile Association of India (IAMAI) and its Blockchain and Crypto Assets Council (BACC) members, the stakeholders said that consultation and dissemination of information between the Government and the industry is crucial to determining the most appropriate regulatory framework and supporting innovation.

‘There are over 1.5 crore Indians holding over Rs. 1,500 crore worth crypto-assets. India is no longer a niche market, but a rapidly growing finance market. Despite the growth in crypto adoption, India is behind in terms of both regulations as well as number of successful crypto startups,’ said Nischal Shetty, CEO, WazirX.

‘India needs its own crypto unicorns and better regulations and for this we must encourage our entrepreneurs to build for crypto,’ he added.

Framing an appropriate regulatory framework for cryptocurrencies and crypto-assets continues to be a challenge with countries taking differing approaches to finding a solution.

In this regard, the experts said that it would be useful to consider the approach of other jurisdictions such as Singapore that has taken a balanced approach with regulations aimed at preventing nefarious activity without impeding technology innovation.

‘India and Singapore are both emerging as Fintech hubs and we hope that regulation in India will catch up soon with global best practices,’ said Vivek Kathpalia, Head, Singapore Office and Leader, Technology Law, Nishith Desai Associates.

Stressing the need for collaborative effort amongst regulators and industry, Sriram Chakravarthi, Counsel, Rajah & Tann Singapore LLP, stated that ‘in order to create an effective regulatory framework, Governments should collaborate with the crypto-industry and representative bodies and consider international approaches – particularly on the cross-border aspects of crypto-regulation’.

(Source: International Business Times – By IANS – 15th May, 2021)

MISCELLANEA

I. World News


Why governments across the globe are taxing major tech companies: Explained

In a landmark decision, 136 countries including India signed a pact to levy a minimum corporate tax of 15%. The pact would pave the way for governments across the globe to tax multinational companies where they operate. The step is part of a growing convergence that large multinational corporations are re-routing profits via low-tax jurisdictions in order to avoid paying taxes.

For over ten years the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD), which is mostly made up of developed economies, has led discussions on a minimum corporate tax rate. Next year, a multilateral convention will be signed. The greatest impact is likely to be felt by ‘Big Tech’ companies which have largely chosen low-tax jurisdictions to base their operations.

The new proposal aims to limit multinational companies’ ability to engage in profit-shifting by requiring them to pay at least some of their taxes where they do operate. Earlier, in April this year, US Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen urged the world’s 20 advanced economies to adopt a minimum global corporate income tax. At this time, the US Government benefits from a global agreement. Similar is the case with most other Western European countries, even though some low-tax European jurisdictions, such as the Netherlands, Ireland and Luxembourg, as well as some Caribbean jurisdictions rely heavily on tax rate comparative advantage to attract MNCs.

It is pertinent to note that the IMF has also expressed some interest in the proposal. While China is unlikely to object seriously to the US call, Beijing is concerned about the impact on Hong Kong, which is the world’s seventh-largest tax haven, as per a study published earlier this year by the advocacy group Tax Justice Network. Furthermore, China’s strained relationship with the United States may act as a deterrent in negotiations.

How will this affect big tech companies?

Apart from low-tax jurisdictions, the proposals are tailored to address the low effective tax rates paid by some of the world’s largest corporations, including big tech behemoths such as Apple, Alphabet and Facebook, as well as Nike and Starbucks. These giants will have to pay taxes in the country of their operation. Importantly, these firms generally depend on complex webs of subsidiaries to divert profits from big markets to low-tax jurisdictions such as Ireland, the British Virgin Islands, the Bahamas or Panama.

 
(Source: International Business Times – By Ashish Shukla, 13th October, 2021)

II. Technology

Karnataka to set up Startup Silicon Valley Bridge

On 19th November, 2021, Karnataka’s Minister for Electronics announced the setting up of a ‘Startup Silicon Valley Bridge’ to help skilled employees to work for Startups located in the US’ Silicon Valley. He said the Government has received invitations from various participating countries in the BTS-2021 to visit their countries to further strengthen investment ties.

Dr. C.N. Aswath Narayan, who is the State’s Minister for Electronics, IT, BT and S&T, Higher Education, Skill Development, Entrepreneurship and Livelihood, pointed out that Startups located in the US’ Silicon Valley are facing human resource shortage.

In his valedictory address at the 24th edition of the ‘Bengaluru Tech Summit-2021’ (BTS), he said the bridge will also serve as a connection between Startups of both the countries, enabling sharing of knowledge and other resources as part of the new initiative.

Further, a ‘Beyond Bengaluru Startup Grid’ will be set up to facilitate growth of emerging industries in other cities outside Bengaluru.

Taking a cue from the success story of India’s leading stock broking company Zerodha, a home-grown fin-tech venture, Dr. Narayan announced the constitution of a fin-tech task force to attract investments in the financial sector.

 
The Government plans to set up a Centre of Excellence (CoE) and a back office in Mangaluru for the purpose.

An entrepreneur has evinced interest in setting up an electric battery manufacturing unit at Hubballi, he said.

 
As for the BTS-2021, it has attracted investments to the tune of over Rs. 5,000 crores in the aftermath of the announcement of the Government’s new ESDM policy with industries evincing interest in setting up semi-conductor plants, motors for air conditioners, solar cell units, and electric vehicles, among others.

 
Notwithstanding the raging pandemic, Dr. Narayan said a million people had changed jobs in the last six months and another 400,000 candidates were getting ready for employment.

 
He said that for the first time, organisers conducted pre-events in the cities of Mangaluru, Hubballi and Mysuru in the run-up to BTS-2021 to promote the concept of industries going beyond Bengaluru.

‘Tech Summit’ was held in these clusters with strong participation notwithstanding the pandemic, he said.

 
The Government of Karnataka has received invitations from various participating countries in the BTS-2021 to visit their countries to further strengthen investment ties.

The Sydney Conclave and the Indo-US Conclave were successes as these saw interactions between the Prime Ministers of India and Australia and the US Consul-General in Chennai.

 
Dr. Narayan added that the 25th edition (silver jubilee) of the BTS to be held in 2022 (between 16th and 18th November) will be bigger and better and no effort will be spared to make it grand and more successful than its previous editions.

 
(Source: International Business Times – By IANS, 20th November, 2021)

 

III. Science

Space will be first home for humans, and earth will be a holiday destination: Jeff Bezos

 
Jeff Bezos is widely considered a visionary in the modern world and he is one of those billionaires on planet earth who believes in the future of space colonisation. And now, he has predicted that the future will witness human beings giving birth to children in space and over the course of time the planet earth will become a holiday destination.

Jeff Bezos made this prediction during a surprise appearance at the 2021 Ignatius Forum in Washington, DC.

‘Over centuries, many people will be born in space, it will be their first home. They will be born on these colonies, live on these colonies, then they’ll visit Earth the way you would visit, you know, Yellowstone National Park,’ he said during the event.

Future space colonies: Vision of Jeff Bezos

According to a report published in The Guardian, Jeff Bezos had once claimed that the future will have floating space colonies with weather like Maui all year long.

 
‘This is Maui on its best day, all year long. No rain. No earthquakes. People are going to want to live here.’

 
Jeff Bezos is not the only billionaire who dreams of future space colonisation. SpaceX founder Elon Musk has a strong action plan to take humans to Mars. He had several times claimed that humans are the only conscious beings in the universe, and he believes that we should use this consciousness to emerge as a multi-planetary species.

 
At one point in time, Elon Musk had revealed that the future government that will be set up on the Red Planet will be based on direct democracy. He also made it clear that people will have a direct role in the decision-making process in the future Martian government.

(Source: International Business Times – By Nirmal Narayanan, 15th November, 2021)

MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

4 Fed up with traffic jams? Flying taxis to take to the sky in mid-2020s

Fed up with traffic jams? Imagine a world where your taxi takes to the skies and lands on top of your office building, recharges and sets off afresh.

That’s the vision of Stephen Fitzpatrick, founder and CEO of Britain’s Vertical Aerospace, which is set to raise $394 million in a merger with a blank-cheque New York-listed company, and who says his aircraft will be flying by the mid-2020s.

And he’s not alone. Some of the world’s most high-profile engineers and airlines believe that Vertical is on to something with its plan for zero-emission mini-aircraft to almost silently take four passengers through the skies for up to 120 miles (193 km.).

American Airlines, aircraft lessor Avolon, engineers Honeywell and Rolls-Royce, as well as Microsoft’s M12 unit are investing in the merger which is expected to complete by the end of the year.

Fitzpatrick, who also set up OVO Energy, Britain’s No. 3 energy retailer, said Vertical flights between London’s Heathrow airport and its Canary Wharf financial district will take 15 minutes and cost 50 pounds ($68) per passenger.

That potential is attracting airlines’ attention. More than 1,000 VA-X4 aircraft have been pre-ordered by customers.

Interest in the zero-emission aircraft comes at a time when aviation companies are under mounting pressure from investors to help decarbonise the sector and boost their environmental, social and governance scores.

‘We are going to sign deals. We’re finding the appetite and the demand from airlines to be really strong,’ Fitzpatrick told Reuters.
 

(Source : www.business-standard.com, dated 12th October, 2021)

 

5 Yes or no, Android phones keep tracking users even without permission

Owning an Android phone could mean that your data is being tracked even if you do not give permission to the device to do so. Researchers have found that some Android devices have system apps that come pre-installed with Android device or bloatware, that comes right out of the box, sends back user data to the OS’s developers and various third parties. These system apps could serve some functionality like the camera or messages app but would send data to their OS even if the user never opened them.

According to researchers at Trinity College in Dublin, there is no way to opt out of the data tracking from these system apps, unless users decide to root their devices as these apps are usually packaged into the read-only memory (ROM).

The researchers studied popular proprietary variants of the Android OS developed by Samsung, Xiaomi, Huawei and Realme. They also reported on the data shared by the Lineage OS and /e/OS open-source variants of Android. The researchers noted that Samsung has the largest share of this market, followed by Xiaomi, Huawei and Oppo (which is the parent company of Realme).

‘System apps cannot be deleted (they are installed on a protected read-only disk partition) and can be granted enhanced rights / permissions not available to ordinary apps such as those that a user might install. It is common for Android to include pre-installed third-party system apps, i.e., apps not written by the OS developer,’ the research paper noted. ‘One example is the so-called GApps package of Google apps (which includes Google Play Services, Google Play Store, Google Maps, YouTube, etc.). Other examples include pre-installed system apps from Microsoft, LinkedIn, Facebook and so on,’ it adds.
 

Reported first by Gizmodo, the researchers noted that the system apps would send something called the ‘telemetry data,’ which includes details like the user device’s unique identifier and the number of apps from the company of a pre-installed app that you have installed on your phone. The data also gets shared by third-party apps or analytics providers that users might have plugged in.
 

Meanwhile, Apple has released a 31-page-long document titled ‘Building a Trusted Ecosystem for Millions of Apps (A threat analysis of sideloading)’, in which it has talked about various aspects of iOS and its closed ecosystem criticising EU’s draft proposal forcing Apple to allow users to download third-party apps. ‘Supporting sideloading through direct downloads and third-party app stores would cripple the privacy and security protections that have made iPhone so secure and expose users to serious security risks,’ Apple said to support its defensive stance against the argument that iOS should be made open like Android. Apple is citing reports from regulators from around the world to show the shortcomings of Android because of its open nature.

(Source: www.indiatoday.in, dated 15th October, 2021)

 

II. Economy
 

6 India-China trade on course to touch record USD 100 billion-mark

The India-China trade volume looks set to cross the record figure of USD 100 billion this year and has already touched USD 90 billion in the first nine months, despite a chill in bilateral relations due to the continuing military stand-off between the two countries in eastern Ladakh.

 

China’s total imports and exports expanded 22.7% year on year to 28.33 trillion yuan (about USD 4.38 trillion) in the first three quarters of 2021, official data has shown. The figure marked an increase of 23.4% from the pre-epidemic level in 2019, according to the General Administration of Customs.

 

The bilateral trade between India and China totalled USD 90.37 billion by the end of September, an increase of 49.3% year-on-year (YoY), according to the nine-month data released by the Chinese customs.

 

China’s exports to India went up to USD 68.46 billion, up 51.7% YoY, apparently aided by massive imports of urgent supplies like oxygen concentrators, when India was in the grip of the second wave of the Covid-19 pandemic in April and May this year.

 

The Indian exports totalled USD 21.91 billion, registering a noteworthy increase of 42.5%. However, from India’s point of view, the trade deficit, which remained a concern over the years, reached USD 46.55 billion and is expected to climb further by the year-end.

 

Observers say that with three months still remaining, the target of USD 100 billion trade previously set by both the countries was expected to be reached this year despite the eastern Ladakh impasse.

 

(Source : www.financialexpress.com, dated 10th October, 2021)

 

III. Health

 

7 Life is Short. ‘Time Urgency’ is a Trap

 

In our attempt to optimise for speed, we sacrifice the most important things in life: good health, relationships, meaningful experiences and self-learning.

 

Whilst we are busy doing more work, checking things off our list, reacting to urgent but unimportant things, we miss out on life-changing experiences that can bring out the best in us and make us better humans.

 

‘The desire to focus on multiple things at once is often driven by anxiety – by the worry that we might not have enough time to do all the things we’re convinced we need to do in order to justify our existence on the planet,’ says Oliver Burkeman in his book, Four Thousand Weeks: Time Management for Mortals.

 

Work should not be the only thing that defines how we use time.

 

Busy is not always better.

 

When you are ahead of yourself, you lose a part of you that makes you human. You create a disconnect that leaves you empty.

 

The unfortunate reality is that many people have less choice to be more conscious of how they use time. But it doesn’t mean you are trapped. You can do something with that bit of time you control.

 

The real measure of any productivity tool is whether it saves us time to focus on the right things in life.

 

If you are in desperate need to control time, you will end up in a time trap where you quickly cross things off only to wake up the next morning with more things to do.

 

‘It’s an irony of our modern lives that while technology is continually invented that saves us time, we use that time to do more and more things, and so our lives are more fast-paced and hectic than ever,’ writes Leo Babauta.

 

Are you chronically short of time?

 

Plato once said, ‘Never discourage anyone who continually makes progress, no matter how slow.’

 

The universal truth in life is that how you spend time is how you are spending your life. There’s never enough time to do everything.

 

Time urgency (when you are chronically short of time) can impede meaningful relationships and cause stress, which can negatively impact your health.

 

Slowing down doesn’t necessarily mean you are being unproductive – it means being more aware of what you do and doing the essential things right without getting overwhelmed.

 

If you are caught in a busy-ness trap, it pays to measure how you spend your limited time or why you feel that you need to rush.

 

The trouble with modern life is that we spend a lot of time trying to keep up, only to miss out on the things we really need to enjoy life.

 

You can make progress and still enjoy life. It’s a balancing act that takes deliberate planning.

 

If you find yourself consistently rushing from one thing to another, learning to be more present and conscious of your activities may be exactly what you need to take back control.

 

Nothing is as pressing as your health. ‘Men talk of killing time, while time quietly kills them,’ Dion Boucicault said.

 

Life can quickly become an infinite chain of things to do every day.

 

Unless you actively break the chain and choose different experiences or a new way to spend your time, stepping outside the trap will be incredibly difficult.

 

To slow down, get real things done and still make time to enjoy life, disrupt your current routine, try something different today (even if it’s just for 30 minutes).

 

Accept a more present challenge, learn new timeless skills (empathy, active listening, resilience, making better connections, being more present and appreciating nature).

 

Learn to break the busy-ness chain — create a deliberate white space on your calendar and tune in to the silence.

 

Review your schedule and replace commitments that bring out the worst in you with activities that bring out the best in you.

 

Change your need to fill every hour of your day with work. You need an untouchable hour every day.

 

How would you spend today if you knew it was your last? Ponder over what means a lot to you and make time for it.

 

Life can be so much more if you learn to slow down and start every new day intentionally slower but better.

 

‘Time and health are two precious assets that we don’t recognise and appreciate until they have been depleted,’ Denis Waitley once said.

 

Turn off the noise of the modern world and make time for you.

 

Start paying more attention to where you are, what you do and what’s happening around you. In an insanely busy world, slowing down is the antidote to burnout.

 

(Source: www.medium.com, by Thomas Oppong, dated 6th October, 2021)

MISCELLANEA

I. World News

1 US-Australia submarine deal: What are the risks?

The US decision to sell nuclear-powered submarines to Australia has put at risk longstanding but fragile global pacts to prevent the proliferation of dangerous nuclear technologies, according to experts.

The deal killed a previous French agreement to sell non-nuclear subs to Australia and radically bolsters Canberra’s ability to project military power across the Asia-Pacific region.

But will it encourage other countries to freely sell their nuclear technology, potentially expanding the number of countries who can build nuclear weapons?

Australia had originally sought conventional diesel-powered French submarines, which are more easily detected and must rise to the surface every few days to recharge their batteries.

Nuclear-powered submarines can spend weeks on end beneath the surface, travelling long distances undetected, only limited by stocks of food and water for the crew, generally a maximum of three months.

The submarines used by the US Navy, and also the British, who are part of the deal with Australia, use highly-enriched uranium, or HEU, enriched to a level of 93%. At that level the submarines can run for 30 years without new fuel.

But that is also the same level of uranium concentration necessary for a powerful nuclear weapon.

One of the key worries about nuclear proliferation is that weapons-grade HEU cold fall into the hands of a rogue state or terror group, said Alan Kuperman, coordinator of the Nuclear Proliferation Prevention Project at University of Texas at Austin.

‘The most likely path to such a bomb would be for an adversary to divert or steal one of the two required nuclear explosives, plutonium or highly-enriched uranium, from a non-weapons purpose like reactor fuel,’ Kuperman wrote on the Breaking Defense news site.

US Navy ships ‘use about 100 nuclear bombs’ worth of HEU each year, more than all of the world’s other reactors combined,’ he said.

Only six countries – the United States, Britain, France, China, India and Russia – have nuclear-powered submarines. Countries have been cautious about allowing the spread of the technology and the fuel.

For James Acton of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, the US sale to Australia is a disturbing precedent.

He noted that under the 1970 Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty, countries that do not have nuclear weapons are not prohibited from acquiring nuclear-powered submarines and, if they wanted, could remove the nuclear material from the watercraft.

‘This is a huge loophole,’ Acton wrote on Twitter.

‘I’m not particularly concerned that Australia will acquire nuclear weapons. I am concerned that other states will use this precedent to exploit a serious potential loophole in the global non-proliferation regime,’ he said.

Daryl Kimball of the Arms Control Association said the US sale ‘compromises’ Washington’s own non-proliferation principles.

’It has a corrosive effect on the rules-based international order,’ he told AFP.

White House spokeswoman Jen Psaki insisted that the United States is still committed to non-proliferation, calling the sale to Australia ‘an exceptional case, not a precedent-setting case.’

But experts call it risky.

The US-Australia deal ‘could well open a Pandora’s Box of proliferation,’ said Tariq Rauf, the former head of verification at the International Atomic Energy Agency, which helps enforce nuclear agreements.

He said it could encourage non-nuclear weapons countries like Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Saudi Arabia or South Korea to buy nuclear submarines that could give them weapons-grade fuel.

Hans Kristensen of the Federation of American Scientists worries there could be a snowball effect of proliferation.

After the US-Australia deal, he told AFP, ‘Russia could potentially increase supply of such technology to India, China could potentially provide naval reactor technology to Pakistan or others, and Brazil might see an easier way forward on its troubled domestic submarine reactor project.’

Experts say a somewhat safer alternative could be for Australia to obtain nuclear submarines that use low-enriched uranium (LEU).

LEU is enriched to a level of less than 20% uranium, a grade used in nuclear power plants.

In submarines, it has to be replaced every ten years, in a dangerous and difficult process.

That has not deterred the use of the technology by navies in France and China. The US Navy has been pressured to shift to LEU, but has yet to do so.

(Source: International Business Times – By Sylvie Lanteaume – 21st September, 2021)

II. Economy

2 OECD marginally lowers India’s F.Y.22 growth projection to 9.7%

The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) has marginally lowered India’s growth projection for the on-going fiscal year to 9.7%, a reduction of 20 basis points (bps), and to 7.9% for the next financial year, down 30 bps from its May forecast, citing pandemic risks.

The inter-governmental economic organisation with 38 member nations had slashed India’s F.Y.22 growth forecast to 9.9% in May from 12.6% estimated in March, as the second Covid-19 wave impacted recovery.

‘The risk of lasting costs from the pandemic also persists. The output shortfall from the pre-pandemic path at the end of 2022 in the median G20 emerging-market economy is projected to be twice that in the median G20 advanced economy, and particularly high in India and Indonesia,’ OECD said in a report.

It pointed out that high-frequency indicators had rebounded. ‘High-frequency activity indicators, such as the Google location-based measures of retail and recreation mobility, suggest global activity continued to strengthen in recent months, helped by improvements in Europe and a marked rebound in both India and Latin America,’ it said.

The OECD projected a strong global growth of 5.7% this year and 4.5% in 2022, slightly changed from its outlook in May of 5.8% and 4.4%, respectively, on the back of continuing vaccine roll-out and a gradual resumption of economic activity, besides decisive actions by governments and central banks at the height of the crisis.

Vaccination key to recovery
The OECD report cautioned that to maintain recovery stronger international efforts were needed to provide low-income countries with the resources to vaccinate their populations, both for their own and global benefit. ‘Ensuring that the recovery is sustained and widespread requires action on a number of fronts – from effective vaccination programmes across all countries to concerted public investment strategies to build for the future,’ said OECD secretary-general Mathias Cormann.

(Source: Economic Times Bureau – 22nd September, 2021)

III. Industry

3 Will 2021 be the second-best year in a decade for Indian car market? Yes, IF it survives chip shortage

It’s always the darkest before the day dawns.

India’s carmakers, despite niggling chip shortages, are proving this year that there’s much more than a grain of truth in that age-old saying.

Last year was a washout and car sales slumped to levels not seen in a decade. But 2021 has been stellar by all yardsticks so far: The passenger vehicle market has already posted its second highest sales in a decade through August in 2021.

And that isn’t all: This calendar year may turn out to be the second best in a decade!

With sustained demand and expectations of improving chip supplies, Jato Dynamics expects the Indian passenger vehicle market to end 2021 with volumes of 3.34 million units – the second highest in a decade and just about 50,000 lower than the peak.

Sales charts would have gleamed even more had Covid two not come in the way.

Global forecasting firm IHS Markit expects India to overtake Germany as the fourth largest light vehicle maker in the world in 2021.

So far this calendar year, volumes have climbed over 70% to 2.13 million units, which is the highest growth rate in a decade. Vehicle makers produced 58% more than last year, against the highest in absolute terms at 2.29 million units.

The low base of last year, the need for personal mobility and the spike in demand for SUVs have led to a swift rebound.

Vehicle makers have posted sales of over three lakh units per month this calendar year, and despite the second wave of Covid-19, the revival has been so quick that dealer inventory has been among the lowest. For some, inventory is only for days as against weeks.

Ravi Bhatia, president of JATO Dynamics India, told ET that sales this year are running close to the best in a decade and the market is expected to close at 3.34 million units.

The Indian middle class pool of 121 million households with an income of Rs. 75,000 to Rs. 150,000 clearly wants to get back to work and they need personal mobility, which is clearly reflected in the numbers.

Year

Volumes

2012

27,70,730

2013

25,71,683

2014

25,95,185

2015

28,03,088

2016

29,93,492

2017

32,26,175

2018

33,91,094

2019

29,72,786

2020

24,47,697

2021
(estimate)

33,45,752

*Source: Jato Dynamics India

‘If vaccinations proceed and we have no severe third wave, then it could be close to one of the best. What stands out is the resilience of demand. Also, dealers have done this with lower inventory, lower incentives and higher prices,’ added Bhatia.

One of the factors hurting output recently has been the disruption in manufacturing in Malaysia due to rising Covid cases. However, the situation is gradually improving and that may help the Indian market secure better supplies than in the recent months. Vehicle makers on their part have adapted to the chip shortage with special trims.

Bhatia says Malaysia has 13% of the world’s automotive testing and packaging capacity and that the testing and packaging capacity is almost back up, boosting supplies in the coming months.

Experts believe that if not for chip shortages, the market could have crossed its peak. Over a dozen models have a waiting period of more than eight weeks. The industry still faces pending bookings of more than four lakh units and the numbers are swelling, with several more high-profile launches – of Mahindra XUV 700, Tata Punch, MG Astor and Citroen C3, for instance – coming up.

China

23.14 million

US

8.96 million

Japan

7.45 million

India LVP

3.9 million

Germany LVP

3.43 million

*Source: IHS Markit

Gaurav Vangaal, associate director at IHS Markit, says strong demand, low semi-conductor content, better product mix and proactive management have cushioned the impact of chip shortage.

‘We project India to surpass Germany in 2021 to become the fourth largest manufacturing base for Light Vehicle Production. However, Germany might regain its position once the supply scenario improves. Demand is indeed very strong; however, the recent disruption in the supply scenario is a cause of concern and it is likely to continue. How vehicle makers manage this disruption will determine the final numbers,’ Vangaal added.

(Source: ET Bureau – By Ketan Thakkar & Ashutosh R. Shyam – 22nd September, 2021)

MISCELLANEA

I. World News

19 ‘Nobody should trust Wikipedia’, warns its co-founder; says the site is taken over by Leftists

Larry Sanger, the co-founder of Wikipedia, has said that nobody should trust the crowd-sourced online encyclopaedia as it is run by Left-leaning volunteers. The site is no longer trustworthy as it does not allow content that does not fit the agenda of Leftists, and therefore people can’t get a complete view on topics.

Sanger, who had co-founded Wikipedia along with Jimmy Wales in 2001, said that the platform has betrayed its original mission by only reflecting the views of the ‘establishment.’ In an interview with Lockdown TV, he said that he agrees with the view that there are teams of Democratic Party-leaning editors who remove content that they don’t like.

In fact, he noted, Wikipedia had lost its neutral nature way back in 2009, before which editors from all ideologies would debate equally before deciding what should be published on the platform. Articles on most recent issues, from Covid to Biden, had become partisan, particularly supporting the Biden administration on such issues and blacking out information that does not show the Democrats in positive light.

The Wikipedia co-founder gave examples of articles on Joe Biden and his son Hunter Biden in which important details about them were completely missing. The article on the US President does not mention most of the criticisms against him and it has completely whitewashed the Ukraine scandal. The paragraph on the Ukraine imbroglio ‘reads like a defence counsel’s brief’. The section concerned on the page says ‘no evidence was produced of any wrongdoing by the Bidens’ and that ‘Trump and his allies falsely accused Biden’ of involvement in Ukraine to protect Hunter Biden.

In fact, the Wikipedia page on Hunter Biden is even more shocking as it does not mention anything about the content found on his laptop. The article does say that no evidence of wrongdoing was found ‘after the seizure of a laptop purportedly belonging to Biden’, but does not mention other explosive content found in the laptop which was left by Hunter at a computer repair shop and which he forgot to pick up later.

In October last year, The New York Post had published emails retrieved from the laptop relating to Hunter’s business dealings in Ukraine and the links to his father. Twitter and Facebook, run by the same Left-leaning propagandists, had blocked The News York Post article, preventing people from sharing it. Similarly, Wikipedia is also completely blocking out any information about the contents of the laptop.

Larry Sanger said that Wikipedia’s coverage of Covid-19 is also very biased as it just reproduces the views of the World Economic Council or the World Economic Forum, the World Health Organization, the CDC and various other establishment mouthpieces like Anthony Fauci.

He also gave the example of Wikipedia articles on eastern medicine which are biased as they basically call the ancient medicine systems quackery in dismissive, quite judgmental language.

Showing how biased Wikipedia has become, Larry said that major media houses like Daily Mail and Fox News are blacklisted by it. This means that if something is covered by these published publications but not by the Leftist media houses, then that can’t be published on Wikipedia.

Wikipedia has become just like any other Left-leaning media house. ‘There are a lot of people who would be highly motivated to go in and make the article more politically neutral, but they’re not allowed to.’ Sanger added, ‘If only one version of the facts is allowed, then that gives a huge incentive to wealthy and powerful people to seize control of things like Wikipedia in order to shore up their power. And they do that.’

There are now big companies like Wiki PR that employ people to write on Wikipedia, but such writers and editors don’t reveal that they are associated with such companies. People are spending money to make changes to Wikipedia articles ‘because there’s a very big, nasty, complex game being played behind the scenes to make the article say what somebody wants them to say’.

Larry Sanger had left Wikipedia over differences with co-founder Jimmy Wales over how to run the website and has since become a staunch critic of it for its Left-leaning bias. Earlier, he had said that Wikipedia has become a huge moral hazard, saying that it has turned into a ‘monocultural establishment organ of propaganda’.

(Source: OpIndia – https://www.opindia.com/2021/07/nobody-should-trust-wikipedia-warns-its-co-founder-larry-sanger/-16th July, 2021)

II. Business

20 How can you become a space tourist?

Thrill-seekers might soon be able to get their adrenaline kicks – and envy-inducing Instagram snaps – from the final frontier, as space tourism finally lifts off. All you’ll need is a bit of patience. And a lot of money.

Here’s a rundown of where things stand.

Two companies are offering short ‘suborbital’ hops of a few minutes: Jeff Bezos’s Blue Origin and Virgin Galactic, founded by Richard Branson.

Blue Origin’s New Shepard rocket takes off vertically and the crew capsule detaches and crosses the Karman line (62 miles, or 100 kilometres, in altitude), before falling back to earth with three parachutes.

Virgin Galactic uses a massive carrier plane which takes off from a horizontal runway then drops a rocket-powered spaceplane. This, in turn, soars to over 50 miles altitude before gliding back.

In both cases, up to six passengers are able to unbuckle from their seats to experience a few minutes of weightlessness and take in the view of earth from space.

Virgin Galactic has said that regular commercial flights will begin from 2022, following two more test flights. Their waiting list is already long, with 600 tickets so far sold.

But the company predicts it will eventually run up to 400 flights per year. Two seats on one of the first flights are up for grabs in a prize draw: registrations are open until 1st September.

As for Blue Origin, no detailed calendar has been announced. ‘We’re planning for two more flights this year, then targeting many more in 2022,’ a spokesperson told AFP.

Another way to get to space is via reality television. Space Hero, an upcoming show, says it plans to send the winner of a competition to the International Space Station (ISS) in 2023.

The first tickets sold by Virgin Galactic went for between $200,000 and $250,000 each, but the company has warned that the cost for future sales will go up.

Blue Origin hasn’t announced prices. The anonymous winner of a public auction for a seat on the first crewed flight paid $28 million, but decided to defer the trip.

It’s not known what amount was bid for the seat secured by Dutch teen Oliver Daemen, who will fly in the auction winner’s place.

The more ‘budget-conscious’ might consider spending $125,000 for a seat on Space Neptune, a capsule that offers 360-degree windows and is lifted to the upper atmosphere by a balloon the size of a football stadium.

Despite the promise of spectacular views, the balloon ascends only 19 miles – far from the boundary of space and weightlessness. The 300 seats for 2024 have all been sold, but reservations are open for 2025.

No – you’re only expected to be in reasonable shape. Virgin Galactic’s training lasts just five days. And Blue Origin promises to teach you everything you need to know ‘the day before you launch,’ and its first crewed flight includes pioneering aviator Wally Funk, who at 82 will become the oldest astronaut.

The company’s requirements include being able to climb seven flights of stairs in under 90 seconds (the height of the launch tower) and being between 5’0” and 110 pounds (152 centimetres and 50 kilogrammes) and 6’4” and 223 pounds (193 cm. and 100 kg.).

Elon Musk’s company is also getting into the space tourism game, but its plans involve journeys that are far longer. The costs are also predicted to be astronomical – tens of millions of dollars.

In September, American billionaire Jared Isaacman has chartered a mission called Inspiration4 to take him and three other passengers into orbit around the earth on a SpaceX Crew Dragon, launched into space by a Falcon 9 rocket.

Then in January, 2022, three businessmen will travel to the ISS with an experienced astronaut. The mission, named Ax-1, is being organised by the company Axiom Space, which has signed up for three other future flights with SpaceX.

Elon Musk’s company is also planning a trip to orbit for four people, organised by intermediary Space Adventures – the same company in charge of the flight of the Japanese billionaire Yusaku Maezawa to the ISS in December, aboard a Russian Soyuz rocket.

Maezawa is also supposed to take a trip around the Moon in 2023, this time aboard a rocket that is still under development by SpaceX, called Starship.

He invited eight members of the public to join him – but applications are now closed.

(Source: International Business Times, 17th July, 2021 – By Lucie Aubourg)

III. Technology

21 How Web3 is overturning the Internet status quo

Today, it’s almost taken for granted that the Internet is controlled by a handful of tech behemoths that seem to amass more and more power every day. It’s easy to forget that when these titans first arrived on the scene, each one of them was considered a disrupter, a revolutionary, an upstart. Now, they are the establishment.

Since its birth in 1983, the Internet has evolved from an obscure and clunky tool used by a select few into a vast network integral to every facet of our lives. This destiny first became apparent during the dot-com boom of the 1990s. And although many naysayers were quick to self-congratulate during the ensuing bust, the downturn proved no more than a healthy pruning that readied the Internet for a new era of growth.

This next phase of Internet evolution, dubbed Web 2.0 in 2005 by Internet guru Tim O’Reilly, produced the trends that now dominate our lives: mobile-centric e-commerce, social media, user-generated content and video streaming. It also set the stage for the reign of the FAANGs: Facebook, Apple, Amazon, Netflix and Google.

Together, these giants offer us forms of connection, entertainment and instant gratification we could only have imagined a decade ago. But because their business models are based on the large-scale monetisation of data and centralised control of networks, our reliance on these services has also handed them enormous power: over our time, our wallets and our personal information.

That stranglehold may seem unbreakable at this point. But behind the scenes, away from debates about monopolies, privacy and free speech, a new incarnation of the Internet is emerging. Forces are quietly mustering for a new revolution – one whose very structure is designed to prevent such concentrations of profit and control from shaping the future.

The key to this new iteration is decentralisation. Its foundation is blockchain technology.

A quiet revolution

While the concept of blocks of information shackled together in a tamper-resistant way dates back to 1991, it wasn’t until 2009 that Satoshi Nakamoto, the pseudonym for the developer (or developers) of Bitcoin, set up the first blockchain to allow trading in the new currency. Now there are hundreds. On each blockchain, peers can exchange economic value – work, content, assets – without intermediaries.

This opens up the potential for a new kind of Internet – Web 3.0. Since blockchain transactions are anonymous and processed by a distributed network of many computers known as nodes, users no longer need to cede control of their data to a central authority. Meanwhile, the links between blocks produce a record that is resistant to hacking and manipulation.

Protocols powered by the many

There are a multitude of new ideas for how to use the power of decentralisation to offer tools and services that eschew centralised authority and are thus more affordable and accessible. And since protocols built on the distributed Internet are powered by hundreds or even thousands of computers, they are subject to neither single points of failure nor single points of control. This makes them both more stable and more secure.

As part of the Web3 community’s commitment to democratisation, many of these projects are led by Decentralised Autonomous Organisations (DAOs) – decentralised corporations governed by egalitarian communities rather than boards and executive hierarchies. Built on principles of self-sustaining growth and community governance, they are already having major real-world impacts.

Mirror, a community-run publishing protocol, puts power in writers’ hands. Since it is built on the Ethereum blockchain, the authorship and provenance of each piece of content is indelibly recorded. Writers can also collaborate on projects, turn their work into non-fungible tokens (NFTs) for auction, or even bankroll efforts by issuing their own tokens.

The user-generated music platform Playdj.tv uses decentralised infrastructure to cater to a different kind of creator at rates that enable it to be competitive with YouTube. Its platform enables DJs to set up their own live streams for their sets, which they can use to earn money and interact with fans all over the globe – a boon during the pandemic, when clubs and private party venues were forced to shut their doors.

The team behind Arweave has built a distributed hard drive that offers a permanent repository for all kinds of information and data. Then there’s The Graph, which helps make sense of all this by allowing fast, private and secure queries of its vast store of data about the Web3 universe.

New breeds of distributed financial systems are on the rise as well, including decentralised finance (DeFi) platforms where people can earn rewards by ‘staking’ assets and performing key tasks on a network. The number of decentralised cryptoasset exchanges (DEXs in industry parlance) has ballooned in the past two years, capturing some market share from their centralised counterparts (CEXs) with their promise of greater anonymity, safety and security.

Total trading volume on these platforms surged to a record $172 billion in May, more than twice the $80.2 billion record set just three months before. Protocols such as Uniswap have been at the forefront of this growth.

There are scores and scores more out there or percolating in the imaginations of developers, many of which will become the building blocks for a new Internet and a new economy. Some projects will inevitably fall by the wayside as Web3 grows to maturity, but many will survive and become foundational tools for the industries and customer bases they serve.

The difference this time is that these tools are governed and powered by their own user communities, rather than by the leaders of a small circle of massive corporations.

(Source: Opinion: International Business Times, 7th June, 2021 – By Doug Petkanis)

 

MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

14 Drone food deliveries to take off soon? Swiggy and ANRA Technologies to launch trials

Swiggy may soon deliver food using drones, with trials to begin for both food and medical packages. Swiggy’s drone delivery partner, ANRA Technologies, has got final clearances from the Ministry of Defence, the Ministry of Civil Aviation and the Directorate-General of Civil Aviation to commence drone trials for delivering food. ANRA Technologies has got the clearances for Beyond Visual Line of Sight (BVLOS) operations. After a lot of planning, air traffic control integration and readying equipment, ANRA launched its first sortie on 16th June, 2021. For the next several weeks, its team will conduct BVLOS food and medical package delivery trials in Etah and Rupnagar districts in Uttar Pradesh and Punjab, respectively.

Apart from partnering Swiggy for food delivery, the integrated airspace management firm is also engaged in a similar project for which it has partnered with IIT, Ropar, and will focus on medical deliveries.

Amit Ganjoo, the founder and CEO of ANRA, said that the motivating factor for him and his team comes from knowing that ‘our technology may soon help deliver food and medical packages to underserved populations’.

In a test flight video, the ANRA team showed how the deliveries are likely to take place. A drone is seen in the almost-three-minute video picking a small food package, flying out to a certain distance, before returning to the ground and delivering the package.

A few weeks ago, Dunzo, the Google-backed delivery startup, had announced that it was set to pilot drone delivery of medicines under the ‘Medicine from the Sky’ project launched by the Telangana Government in collaboration with the World Economic Forum. The project is aimed to enable emergency medical deliveries that could include Covid-19 vaccines and other essentials. Dunzo is amongst the entities that were recently allowed by the Central Government to attempt BVLOS experimental flights using drones.

(Source: ndtv.com, dated 14th June, 2021)

15 Hyderabad market turns 10 tons of waste into biogas every day; powers 170 shops

When you think of vegetable and fruit markets in India, you ‘see’ messy visuals of vegetable shavings trampled on the ground, bustling crowds and bargaining vendors. The foul smell of leftover and damaged produce lying on the floor is not only unpleasant but also results in tonnes of waste at the end of the day.

But at the Bowenpally fruit and vegetable market in Hyderabad, the vegetable waste generated is used to power streetlights and shops. ‘Over the last six months, ten tonnes of waste that is generated daily is being converted into 500 units of electricity. It is used to power 120 streetlights, 170 shops and a cold storage unit,’ says Lokini Srinivas, Selection Grade Secretary, Bowenpally market.

‘Using the same waste, 30 kg. of biogas is produced through this process and is replacing LPG cooking gas in the canteen at the market,’ he explains, adding that the market uses 800 to 900 units of electricity every day and now 80% of the power supply is fulfilled with the biogas.

On the days when Bowenpally market does not generate ten tonnes of waste, neighbouring vegetable markets and supermarkets pitch in.

So how do they do it?

Converting waste into a resource
In an allocated space of 30 m x 40 m in the market, Hyderabad-based Ahuja Engineering Services Pvt Ltd., an organisation that has been involved in setting up biogas plants across India, has set up a unit that can process the ten tonnes of waste every day.

‘Though we have set up many plants across India, this is the first one with such a high capacity. The plant was set up under the guidance of Chief Scientist Dr. A. Gangagni Rao of the CSIR-IICT (Council of Scientific and Industrial Research – Indian Institute of Chemical Technology). Using his patented technology, we could set up a unit that could work at such a high rate capacity,’ says Sruthi Ahuja, Director of Ahuja Engineering.

She adds that the research using this technology has been going on since 2012.

Apart from producing electricity and biogas, the plant is also generating organic manure that can be used in farming.

Earlier, a model using the same technology but with a lower capacity of 250 kg. was installed at a poultry farm in Hyderabad where farm waste was converted into energy. Its success prompted Dr. Gangagni to engineer a system that could convert ten tonnes of waste every day into biogas.

‘The research at CSIR-IICT began in 2006 to find ways to produce biogas from vegetable, fruit and food waste. By 2011, we had developed a patented technology which was tested on a small scale at various farms and kitchens across India. We then re-engineered the method to make it more efficient so that it could handle the higher capacity of waste and produce more energy,’ says Dr. Gangagni.

The Department of Biotechnology picked up this project and provided capital investment to set up the plant. The Department of Agriculture Marketing also lent support and carried out the necessary civil work.

Every day, the waste is collected from across the Hyderabad market by a designated team hired on contract. This is brought to the plant located in the same premises and goes through a bio-methanation process.

First, the waste is shredded and then it is soaked in a feed preparation tank to be converted into slurry. This undergoes an anaerobic bio-methanation process using a special culture (bacteria consortium). Finally, the biogas is collected in separate tanks and directed to the kitchen for cooking. The biofuel is also supplied to a 100% biogas generator which is used to power water pumps, cold storage rooms, and street and shop lights.

Dr. Gangagni adds, ‘There are other markets where more biogas plants will be installed in future.’

(Source: betterindia.com, dated 15th June, 2021)

II. Health

16 More than half of the cosmetics sold in the US, Canada are full of toxins, finds study

Researchers at the University of Notre Dame tested more than 230 commonly used cosmetics and found that 56% of foundations and eye products, 48% of lip products and 47% of mascaras contained fluorine – an indicator of PFAS, or so-called ‘forever chemicals’ that are used in non-stick frying pans, rugs and countless other consumer products.

‘The Environmental Protection Agency is moving to collect industry data on PFAS chemical uses and health risks as it considers regulations to reduce potential risks caused by the chemicals.’

Some of the highest PFAS levels were found in waterproof mascara (82%) and long-lasting lipstick (62%), according to the study published in the journal Environmental Science & Technology Letters. Twenty-nine products with higher fluorine concentrations were tested further and found to contain between four and 13 specific PFAS chemicals, the study found. Only one item listed PFAS, or perfluoroalkyl and polyfluoroalkyl substances, as an ingredient on the label.

A spokeswoman for the US Food and Drug Administration, which regulates cosmetics, said the agency does not comment on specific studies. It said on its website that there have been few studies of the presence of the chemicals in cosmetics and the ones published generally found the concentration to be at very low levels not likely to harm people, in the parts per billion level to the 100s of parts per million.

A factsheet posted on the agency’s website says that ‘As the science on PFAS in cosmetics continues to advance, the FDA will continue to monitor’ voluntary data submitted by industry as well as published research.

But PFAS chemicals are an issue of increasing concern for lawmakers who are working to regulate their use in consumer products. The study results were announced as a bipartisan group of Senators introduced a bill to ban the use of PFAS in cosmetics and other beauty products.

The move to ban PFAS comes as Congress considers wide-ranging legislation to set a national drinking water standard for certain PFAS chemicals and clean up contaminated sites across the country, including military bases where high rates of PFAS have been discovered.

‘There is nothing safe and nothing good about PFAS,’’ said Senator Richard Blumenthal, D-Conn., who introduced the cosmetics bill with Sen. Susan Collins, R-Maine. ‘These chemicals are a menace hidden in plain sight that people literally display on their faces every day.’

Representative Debbie Dingell, D-Mich., who has sponsored several PFAS-related bills in the House, said she has looked for PFAS in her own makeup and lipstick, but could not see if they were present because the products were not properly labelled.

‘How do I know it doesn’t have PFAS?’ she asked at a news conference, referring to the eye makeup, foundation and lipstick she was wearing.

The Environmental Protection Agency is also moving to collect industry data on PFAS chemical uses and health risks as it considers regulations to reduce potential risks caused by the chemicals.

The Personal Care Products Council, a trade association representing the cosmetics industry, said in a statement that a small number of PFAS chemicals may be found as ingredients or at trace levels in products such as lotion, nail polish, eye makeup and foundation. The chemicals are used for product consistency and texture and are subject to safety requirements by the FDA, said Alexandra Kowcz, the Council’s Chief Scientist.

‘Our member companies take their responsibility for product safety and the trust families put in those products very seriously,’ she said, adding that the group supports prohibition of certain PFAS from use in cosmetics. ‘Science and safety are the foundation for everything we do.’

But Graham Peaslee, a Physics Professor at Notre Dame and the principal investigator of the study, said the cosmetics pose an immediate and long-term risk. ‘PFAS is a persistent chemical. When it gets into the bloodstream, it stays there and accumulates,’ he said.

Blumenthal, a former State Attorney-General and self-described ‘crusader’ on behalf of consumers, said he does not use cosmetics. But speaking on behalf of millions of cosmetics users, he said they have a message for the industry: ‘We’ve trusted you and you betrayed us.’

Brands that want to avoid likely government regulation should voluntarily go PFAS-free, Blumenthal said. ‘Aware and angry consumers are the most effective advocate for change’, he added.

(Source: firstpost.com, dated 18th June, 2021)

17 Should world stop shaking hands after Covid? What experts say

Banished at the start of the pandemic, the handshake is making something of a comeback, thanks to vaccinations and the lifting of social restrictions – but ‘pressing the flesh’ faces an uncertain future.

More than speeches or communiqués, one of the most striking takeaways from the Vladimir Putin and Joe Biden summit in Geneva was their fulsome handshake in front of the world’s cameras – a rare moment of physical human contact. A few days earlier, at the G7 summit in Cornwall, Biden and his fellow leaders were still elbow-bumping away at outdoor events spaced six feet apart.

Back in the US, most Covid-19 restrictions have been lifted and vaccinated citizens have been told they don’t need masks – even indoors. Social distancing is largely a thing of the past and unlimited domestic travel is back on. But many Americans are still treading carefully – mask-wearing is still encouraged in many shops and offices, friends often greet each other with a brief wave and handshakes are treated warily.

New York telephone technician Jesse Green declines to shake hands with customers, but does with people he knows and who have been vaccinated. ‘Because of the pandemic, people are more aware about the way they use their hands,’ he said. For William Martin, a 68-year-old lawyer, shaking hands with anyone, vaccinated or not, is out of the question. He won’t do so ‘until it is safe,’ he said, adding ‘and “safe” will not be determined by some government.’

Some US companies and organisations are using coloured bracelets to allow employees, customers or visitors to signal their openness to contact: red, yellow or green, from the most cautious to the most comfortable.

Hugging is generally out of bounds and kissing to greet someone – never common in the US – is almost unimaginable for most.

Unscientific?
Jack Caravanos, a Professor at New York University’s School of Global Public Health, said wariness of handshakes does not exactly match the evidence. Covid-19 ‘is poorly transmitted by surface contact and is essentially an airborne virus, (so) the scientific basis for no skin contact is moot,’ he says.

‘However, the common cold, influenza and a host of other infectious diseases are transmitted by touch, therefore eliminating handshaking will overall have a positive public health impact.’ Tapping into the wider health benefits, many experts would not mourn the death of the handshake.

‘I don’t think we should ever shake hands ever again, to be honest with you,’ White House pandemic adviser Anthony Fauci said last year as the virus took hold worldwide. Allen Furr, Professor of Sociology at Auburn University, said ‘We’ve always had germophobes, people who don’t like to touch people because they see everything as a contagion. We may have some more of those, because of the psychological effect that safety is equated with not coming close to people – that may stick in some people’s minds.’

A human ritual
Shaking hands is a ritual taught to children by adults, but after 16 traumatic months it is one that could weaken if it is not passed down to the next generation, he said.

Other forms of greeting such as fist-bumping, a brief wave, or alternatives such as an Indian-style ‘Namaste’ could become increasingly popular compared with the hearty grip of a ‘manly’ handshake. But ‘so much will be lost if we didn’t shake hands,’ mourns Patricia Napier-Fitzpatrick, founder of The Etiquette School of New York.

‘You can tell a lot about a person by their handshake. It’s part of body language – people have lost jobs in the past because of bad handshakes. When you touch someone, you’re showing you trust them, you’re saying “I’m not going to harm you”.’

As with everything, handshaking today has ‘become a political thing’, suggests New York paramedic Andy McCorkle, with some people shaking hands as a sign of defiance against the government and Covid restrictions. ‘I feel like it’ll be solidified psychologically, to keep one’s distance,’ he said.

The pandemic has upended many things about everyday life and the handshake is just one of them – the test will be to see if humans need it back. Furr, for his part, expects the handshake to endure. ‘It’s just kind of too important a ritual in our culture,’ he adds.

(Source: ndtv.com, dated 16th June, 2021)

III. World news

18 Taxing Amazon is like squeezing rice pudding

Around 100 years ago, the UK fumed as the wealthy Vestey brothers shifted their family business to Argentina to escape the long arm of London tax collectors. As the multinational used ever-more-elaborate schemes to shuffle profits, including creating a trust in Paris, the authorities likened attempts to tax the Vesteys to ‘trying to squeeze a rice pudding.’ The relevant loophole, which outraged the public, wasn’t closed until the 1990s.

Today’s rice-pudding squeezers have a new breed of multinationals in sight: Tech companies such as Amazon.com Inc. and Facebook Inc. that sell their services to consumers around the world yet pay little or nothing in tax.

Part of the problem is a global system rife with low-tax jurisdictions and smart advisers helping firms to devise ingenious Vestey-esque ways to pay as little as possible. But it’s also about the system’s failure to adapt to the digital age.

Corporate tax rules requiring a physical presence make it harder to tax businesses in the virtual world. The European Union recently estimated a 14-percentage-point gap in the tax rate between digital companies and bricks-and-mortar rivals.

Hence why, from a historical perspective, the G7 tax deal struck recently is such a big deal. Its minimum effective tax rate of 15% puts tax havens on notice. And its accompanying measure promises to tax the biggest multinationals above a certain threshold and reallocate the proceeds fairly around the world. This would supersede existing rules and allow countries a crack at collecting tax where they couldn’t before.

It’s taken decades of pressure, a financial crisis and a pandemic to get to a point where globalisation means tax convergence and not competition. Big countries found it relatively easy to ignore low-tax rivals when profits were on the up, but they now have little time for a race to the bottom on tax rates with climate change, inequality and pandemic management calling for more investment.

The playing field needs levelling: A country like Ireland (headline rate 12.5%) would stand to lose around two billion euros ($2.4 billion) in tax revenue, while France (headline rate 26.5%) would gain around five billion euros, according to national estimates.

As the G7 shops its initiative farther afield, not everyone is going to be happy. Ireland has made clear it intends to defend its way of doing things. Successive Irish governments have backed corporate tax as one of the few areas where Ireland can compete globally. U2 singer Bono has crooned that it gave his homeland ‘the only prosperity it’s ever known.’

Yet there’s real political momentum here and palpable public outrage. It’s one thing to build a national identity around a 12.5% tax rate. But last week, The Guardian reported that an Irish subsidiary of Microsoft Corp. paid zero corporation tax thanks to its residency in Bermuda. In 2014, Apple Inc. was estimated by the European Union to have paid a 0.005% tax rate. This is increasingly about corporate, not national, sovereignty.

The real risk is of future loopholes to come. Enforcement and tax collection will be a big part of making this deal stick: Listen hard and you can almost hear the cogs of wonkish brains whirring to spot new gaps in a system that’s already insanely complex. Simplification and clarity are both needed to avoid the global tax system collapsing under its own weight.

Still, getting to this stage is a victory in itself. No doubt the spirit of the Vesteys will live on, and new creative ways to dodge taxes will be found – but if the current revamp lasts another 100 years, it will be worth it.

(Source: bloomberg.com, dated 7th June, 2021)

MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

22 Boston Dynamics’ back-flipping robot shows off new ‘parkour’ routine

Boston Dynamics has said that if a robot can develop the same movement and flexibility as the average adult, then the range of potential applications will be practically limitless.

Boston Dynamics’ humanoid robot, Atlas, has been showing off its new skill, parkour or free running atop and over obstacles.

A new video shows Atlas leaping over obstacles, doing back-flips and even falling flat on its face during practice runs.

The company says that if a robot can develop the same movement and flexibility as the average adult, then the range of potential applications will be practically limitless.

‘Parkour is a useful organising activity for our team because it highlights several challenges that we believe to be important,’ said team leader Scott Kuindersma.

‘How do we connect perception to action in a way that both captures long-term goals like getting from point A to point B, and short-term dynamic goals like adjusting footsteps and applying corrective forces to maintain balance,’ Kuindersma said.

Atlas stands 5 feet (1.52 m) tall, weighs 190 pounds (86 kg.), uses hydraulics and battery-powered electric motors for movement and has three on-board computers.

It is designed to be used as a research and development tool and its Boston Dynamics team is being encouraged to push it to the limit.

‘It can be frustrating sometimes. The robots crash a lot,’ said Benjamin Stephens, control lead on the Atlas team.

‘We learn a lot from that in terms of how to build robots that can survive falling on their face and getting back up and doing it again and we also learn a lot about the behaviour, the control, the thing that puts one foot in front of the other,’ Stephens said.

(Source: indianexpress.com, dated 18th August, 2021)

II. Economy

23 Forex reserves rise by $889 million to lifetime high of $621.464 billion

The country’s foreign exchange reserves increased by $889 million to a lifetime high of $621.464 billion in the week ended 6th August, 2021, RBI data has revealed.

In the previous week ended 30th July, 2021, the reserves had surged by $9.427 billion to reach $620.576 billion.

In the reporting week, the increase in the forex kitty was due to a rise in foreign currency assets (FCAs), a major component of the overall reserves, as per weekly data issued by RBI.

FCAs rose by $1.508 billion to $577.732 billion in the reporting week. Expressed in dollar terms, the foreign currency assets include the effect of appreciation or depreciation of non-US units like the euro, pound and yen held in the foreign exchange reserves.

Gold reserves were down by $588 million to $37.057 billion in the reporting week, the data showed.

The special drawing rights (SDRs) with the International Monetary Fund (IMF) dipped by $1 million to $1.551 billion.

The country’s reserve position with the IMF also fell by $31 million to $5.125 billion, as per the data.

(Source: economictimes.indiatimes.com, dated 13th August, 2021)

III. Financial Reporting World

24 SEC charges Ernst & Young, three audit partners and former public company CAO with audit independence Misconduct

The Securities and Exchange Commission has charged accounting firm Ernst & Young LLP (EY), one of its partners and two of its former partners with improper professional conduct for violating auditor independence rules in connection with EY’s pursuit to serve as the independent auditor for a public company with nearly $5 billion in revenue (issuer). Separately, the Commission brought charges against the issuer’s then-Chief Accounting Officer for his role in the Misconduct. All respondents have agreed to settle the charges and will collectively pay more than $10 million in monetary relief.

The SEC’s order against the auditors finds that EY, EY partner James Herring, CPA, and former EY partners James Young, CPA and Curt Fochtmann, CPA improperly interfered with the issuer’s selection of an independent auditor by soliciting and receiving confidential competitive intelligence and confidential audit committee information from the issuer’s then-Chief Accounting Officer, William Stiehl, during the request for proposal process. EY’s misconduct in connection with the audit pursuit, the order finds, would cause a reasonable investor to conclude that EY and its partners were incapable of exercising Objectivity and Impartiality once the audit engagement began. The SEC’s separate order against Stiehl finds that, through his Misconduct during the request for proposal process, including withholding key information from the issuer’s audit committee, Stiehl caused the issuer’s reporting violations.

‘Auditor independence is not merely an obstacle to overcome, it is the bedrock foundation that supports the integrity, transparency, and reliability of financial reporting,’ said Charles Cain, Chief of the SEC Enforcement Division’s FCPA Unit. ‘Auditor independence requires auditors to analyse all of the relevant facts and circumstances from the perspective of the reasonable investor. EY and its partners lost sight of this fundamental principle in their pursuit of a new client. This action further underscores that auditors must apply heightened scrutiny when making independence determinations.’

The SEC’s order against the auditors finds that EY, Herring, Young and Fochtmann violated the auditor independence provisions of the federal securities laws and that EY, Herring, and Young caused the issuer to violate its obligation to have its financial statements audited by independent public accountants. The order also finds that all respondents engaged in improper professional conduct within the meaning of Rule 102(e) of the SEC’s Rules of Practice.

EY, Herring, Young, and Fochtmann consented to the SEC’s order without admitting or denying the findings and agreed to cease and desist from future violations. EY has agreed to a censure, to pay a civil money penalty of $10 million and to comply with a detailed set of undertakings for a period of two years. Herring, Young and Fochtmann agreed to pay civil money penalties of $50,000, $25,000, and $15,000, respectively, and to be suspended from appearing or practising before the Commission, with a right to reapply for reinstatement after three, two, and one years, respectively.

The SEC’s order against Stiehl finds that he caused and wilfully aided and abetted the issuer’s reporting obligations stemming from the auditor selection process improprieties. Stiehl, who consented to the order without admitting or denying the findings, has agreed to cease and desist from future violations of the securities laws, to pay a civil money penalty of $51,000, and to be suspended from appearing or practising before the Commission, with a right to reapply for reinstatement after two years.

The SEC’s investigation was conducted by Jim Valentino, Natalie Lentz and trial counsel Sarah Heaton Concannon. The case was supervised by Tracy L. Price and Mr. Cain.

(Source: www.sec.gov, dated 2nd August, 2021)

25 Sanctions against KPMG and former partner in relation to Silentnight

The Financial Reporting Council (‘FRC’) has announced sanctions against KPMG LLP (KPMG) and David Costley-Wood, formerly a partner and Head of KPMG Manchester Restructuring. This follows a referral from The Pensions Regulator and an investigation undertaken pursuant to the Accountancy Scheme in relation to Mr. Costley-Wood’s conduct in respect of the Silentnight group of companies in the period August, 2010 to April, 2011. An independent Disciplinary Tribunal made findings of Misconduct following a four-week hearing during November and December, 2020 and sanctions were determined following a hearing in June, 2021.
Sanctions

KPMG has been:
• fined £13 million,
• severely reprimanded, and
• ordered to appoint an independent reviewer to:

(1) Conduct a Root Cause Review to establish:
a. why threats to compliance with the fundamental principle of Objectivity were not appropriately identified and safeguarded in the period prior to the appointment of office holders in the Silentnight matter; and
b. in a sample of past cases, whether threats to compliance with the fundamental principle of Objectivity were appropriately identified and safeguarded in the period prior to the appointment of office holders and if not, the reasons for such failures; and

(2) conduct a review of various policies, procedures and training programmes relating to several of KPMG’s advisory services practices in the light of the results of the Root Cause Review.

Mr. Costley-Wood has been:
• fined £500,000,
• severely reprimanded,
• excluded from membership of the ICAEW for 13 years, and
• precluded from holding an insolvency licence for the same period.

Findings of Misconduct

The Tribunal made findings of Misconduct in respect of breaches of the fundamental principles of Objectivity and Integrity. It described the history of KPMG’s involvement with Silentnight in this case as deeply troubling as KPMG failed to act solely in its client’s interests, acted in fundamental respects contrary to those interests and in those of a party whose interests were diametrically opposed to those of Silentnight. It concluded that the lack of Objectivity in this matter went to the core of the relationship between Silentnight and KPMG.

The Tribunal also held that, in addition to the lack of Objectivity in relation to his dealings with Silentnight, Mr. Costley-Wood acted dishonestly and therefore he and KPMG acted with a lack of Integrity, including in their dealings with the Pension Protection Fund (‘PPF’) and The Pensions Regulator (‘TPR’) despite Mr. Costley-Wood acknowledging that there was an obligation to act transparently in relation to a regulator.

The Tribunal commented:

‘Breaches of the principles of Integrity and Objectivity risk seriously undermining public confidence in the standard of conduct of Members and Member Firms and in the profession generally, all the more so where, as here, the professional has acted dishonestly. Dishonesty is inimical to everything that a profession stands for and especially destructive of public confidence’.

The Tribunal found that Misconduct had been established in that:

Throughout the period 16th August, 2010 to 14th January, 2011, Mr. Costley-Wood advised and / or assisted both Silentnight and HIG in relation to a proposed acquisition of Silentnight by HIG at a time when there was a conflict of interest between the interests of Silentnight and HIG, and as a result, the respondents’ judgement was compromised and Objectivity impaired.

Mr. Costley-Wood assisted with a strategy designed to drive Silentnight into an insolvency process, or to the brink of such a process (a ‘burning platform’), with a view to passing Silentnight’s Pension Scheme to the PPF at the expense of Pension Scheme members and PPF levy payers. In this context, Mr. Costley Wood provided advice and assistance to HIG so that it could acquire Silentnight as an otherwise profitable business without the burden of the Pension Scheme liabilities.

The respondents failed, in addition, to consider the self-interest and familiarity threats which arose from their relationship with HIG and from their desire to nurture that party as a client and keep them ‘onside’. Mr. Costley-Wood was conscious of the importance of the potential relationship of HIG to KPMG throughout. The respondents’ loss of Objectivity underlay or drove much of what they did in relation to Silentnight throughout the relevant period, including assisting and advising HIG in its plan to acquire Silentnight free of the Pension Scheme liability from the summer of 2010.

Mr. Costley-Wood dishonestly advanced and associated himself with untrue and misleading and / or materially incomplete statements to the PPF, TPR, Silentnight and the Trustees of the Silentnight Pension Scheme as to the causes of Silentnight’s difficulties in order to assist HIG in its efforts to enable Silentnight to shed its liability under the Pension Scheme as cheaply as possible.

KPMG is legally liable under the Accountancy Scheme for the conduct of Mr. Costley-Wood, and accordingly the findings of Misconduct by KPMG were made by the Tribunal in respect of the same matters.

One further allegation of Misconduct made by the FRC was not upheld by the Tribunal.

In determining the sanctions, the Tribunal considered the Misconduct was very serious, noting that to a professional accountant the conflicts of interest should have been obvious and that the Misconduct risked the loss of significant sums of money. It put at risk Silentnight’s ability to survive and tens of millions of pounds of creditors’ claims, potentially exceeding £100 million as the liability to the Pension Scheme would crystallise. The Misconduct potentially adversely affected a significant number of people. The majority of the membership of the Pension Scheme comprised factory workers, many of whom had worked for Silentnight and contributed to the pension scheme for much of their working life. This was a foreseeable consequence of the plan to ‘dump’ the pension scheme into the PPF.

The Tribunal considered the respondents’ Misconduct in respect of advancing or associating themselves with untrue, misleading or incomplete statements to the PPF, TPR and the Trustees to be especially egregious given that they knew they had to be open and transparent with these parties and that they intentionally sought to mislead them in order to assist HIG in its efforts to enable Silentnight to shed its liability under the Pension Scheme as cheaply as possible.

The Tribunal further commented:

‘The standards of Integrity and Objectivity are of fundamental importance. They express the most basic requirements that society expects of professional accountants. Members of the profession have a privileged and trusted role in society. In return, they are required to live up to their own professional standards. Society expects high standards from professional persons; and the professions expect high standards from their own members.’

Subsequent to the events outlined above, Silentnight went into administration on 7th May, 2011 as a result of an entity related to HIG calling in the working capital facility. This culminated in the sale of the business out of administration to HIG, with the PPF assessing whether to assume responsibility for the Pension Scheme.

Costs

The Tribunal ordered that KPMG pay £2,450,000 towards Executive Counsel’s costs of the investigation together with the costs of the Tribunal (amounting to a further £305,814).

Elizabeth Barrett, Executive Counsel, said:

‘The scale and range of the sanctions imposed by the Tribunal mark the gravity of the Misconduct in this matter. The decision serves as an important reminder of the need for all Members of the profession to act with Integrity and Objectivity and of the serious consequences when they fail to do so.’

The report of the Tribunal is not published at this time.

The Accountancy Scheme was amended from 1st January, 2021 to remove from its jurisdiction all insolvency work (including restructuring advice, preparation for formal appointments and work consequent to formal appointments) carried out by members of the professional bodies who are licensed by those bodies as insolvency practitioners.

(Source: www.frc.org.uk, dated 5th August, 2021)

Miscellanea

I. TECHNOLOGY

23. Scientists develop a new technique that charges EV batteries in just 10 minutes

A design breakthrough has enabled a 10-minute charge time for a typical electric vehicle battery. A paper detailing the record-breaking combination of a shorter charge time and more energy acquired for a longer travel range was published on October 12 in the journal Nature.

“The need for smaller, faster-charging batteries is greater than ever,” said Chao-Yang Wang, lead author on the study. “There are simply not enough batteries and critical raw materials, especially those produced domestically, to meet anticipated demand.” Wang is the William E. Diefenderfer Professor of Mechanical Engineering at Penn State.

The Air Resources Board of California adopted a comprehensive plan in August to impose restrictions on and eventually outlaw the sale of gasoline-powered vehicles in the state. This means that by 2035, the largest auto market in the United States will effectively retire the internal combustion engine.

Wang explained that if new car sales are going to shift to battery-powered electric vehicles (EVs), they’ll need to overcome two major drawbacks. First, they are too slow to recharge. Second, they are too large to be efficient and affordable. Instead of taking a few minutes at the gas pump, some EVs can take all day to recharge depending on the battery.

“Our fast-charging technology works for most energy-dense batteries and will open a new possibility to downsize electric vehicle batteries from 150 to 50 kWh without causing drivers to feel range anxiety,” said Wang, whose lab partnered with State College-based startup EC Power to develop the technology. “The smaller, faster-charging batteries will dramatically cut down battery cost and usage of critical raw materials such as cobalt, graphite, and lithium, enabling mass adoption of affordable electric cars.”

The technology relies on internal thermal modulation, an active method of temperature control to demand the best performance possible from the battery, Wang explained. Batteries operate most efficiently when they are hot, but not too hot. Keeping batteries consistently at just the right temperature has been major challenge for battery engineers. Historically, they have relied on external, bulky heating and cooling systems to regulate battery temperature, which respond slowly and waste a lot of energy, Wang said.

Wang and his team decided to instead regulate the temperature from inside the battery. The researchers developed a new battery structure that adds an ultrathin nickel foil as the fourth component besides anode, electrolyte and cathode. Acting as a stimulus, the nickel foil self-regulates the battery’s temperature and reactivity which allows for 10-minute fast charging on just about any EV battery, Wang explained.

“True fast-charging batteries would have immediate impact,” the researchers write. “Since there are not enough raw minerals for every internal combustion engine car to be replaced by a 150 kWh-equipped EV, fast charging is imperative for EVs to go mainstream.”

The study’s partner, EC Power, is working to manufacture and commercialize the fast-charging battery for an affordable and sustainable future of vehicle electrification, Wang said.

[Source: scitechdaily.com dated 17th October, 2022.]

II. WORLD NEWS

24. UN warns against alarmism as world population set to reach 8 billion by end of 2022

The United Nations has predicted the next month when the global population will reach nearly or equal to eight billion. The latest UN projections suggest that the world’s population could grow to around 8.5 billion in 2030 and 9.7 billion in 2050, before reaching a peak of around 10.4 billion people during the 2080s. The population is expected to remain at that level until 2100.  However, the report also notes that the global population is growing at its slowest rate since 1950, having fallen to less than 1% in 2020. In 61 countries or areas, the population is expected to decrease by at least one per cent over the next three decades, as a result of sustained low levels of fertility and, in some cases, elevated rates of emigration.

Despite all the odd scenarios, the UN expressed deep concerns about “population alarmism”- a term coined when the states get distracted from the core concerns and started penalising the vulnerable section of society. Dr Natalia Kanem, executive director of the UN Population Fund (UNFPA), appealed to the countries to not get panicked due to the soaring population but added the government should focus on solving their problems. She urged countries to not force women or men into sterilisation or forced planning campaign schemes.  “I realise this moment might not be celebrated by all. Some express concerns that our world is overpopulated, with far too many people and insufficient resources to sustain their lives. I am here to say clearly that the sheer number of human lives is not a cause for fear,” The Guardian quoted her as saying.

UN appeals to countries to invest in improving health quality  

“And we cannot repeat the egregious violations of human rights that rob women of their ability to decide whether [or] when to become pregnant, if at all. Population alarmism: it distracts us from what we should be focused on,” she added. The report found that more than half of the increase in the global population will be concentrated in eight countries: the Democratic Republic of the Congo, Egypt, Ethiopia, India, Nigeria, Pakistan, the Philippines and the United Republic of Tanzania. The report argues that to make the most of this opportunity, countries should invest in the further development of their human capital, by ensuring access to health care and quality education at all ages, and by promoting opportunities for productive employment and decent work.

[Source: www.republicworld.com dated 19th October, 2022.]


III. ENVIRONMENT

25. New processs could allow for 100 per cent sustainable aviation fuel

U.S. researchers from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT), Washington State University, and the Department of Energy’s National Renewable Energy Laboratory (NREL) report success in using lignin as a path toward a drop-in 100% sustainable aviation fuel. Lignin makes up the rigid part of plant cell walls. Other plant parts are utilized for biofuels, but lignin has generally been overlooked due to the difficulty in chemically breaking it down and turning it into useful compounds.

The recently released study demonstrated a process the researchers created to extract the oxygen from lignin so that the resultant hydrocarbons may be utilized as a blendstock for jet fuel. The research was recently published in the journal Joule.

The paper emphasizes the need of using sustainable jet fuel sources since the airline industry has pledged to drastically cut carbon emissions. In 2019, airlines utilized 106 billion gallons of jet fuel worldwide, a figure that is predicted to more than quadruple by 2050. To achieve the industry’s aim of net carbon neutrality over that time period, major deployment of sustainable aviation fuel (SAF) with high blend limits with conventional fuel will be required.

Jet fuel is a blended mixture of different hydrocarbon molecules, including aromatics and cycloalkanes. Current commercialized technologies do not produce those components to qualify for a 100% SAF. Instead, SAF blendstocks are combined with conventional hydrocarbon fuels. As the largest source of renewable aromatics in nature, lignin could hold the answer to achieving a complete bio-based jet fuel. This newly published work illustrates the ability of a lignin pathway to complement existing and other developing pathways. Specifically, the lignin pathway described in this new work allows the SAF to have fuel system compatibility at higher blend ratios.

Because of its recalcitrance, lignin is typically burned for heat and power or used only in low-value applications. Previous research has yielded lignin oils with high oxygen contents ranging from 27% to 34%, but to be used as jet fuel that amount must be reduced to less than half-percent.

Other processes have been tried to reduce the oxygen content, but the catalysts involved require expensive noble metals and proved to be low yielding. Researchers at the trio of institutions demonstrated an efficient method that used earth-abundant molybdenum carbide as the catalyst in a continuous process, achieving an oxygen content of about 1%.

[Source: scitechdaily.com dated 18th October, 2022.]

26. Australia and Singapore strike agreement to achieve net-zero greenhouse gas emissions

Australian and Singaporean leaders announced Tuesday what they described as a world-first agreement to cooperate in transitioning their economies to net-zero greenhouse gas emissions.

Singapore’s Prime Minister Lee Hsien Loong and Australia’s Prime Minister Anthony Albanese outlined their so-called Green Economy Agreement between the two countries after an annual meeting in the Australian Parliament House.

The agreement has 17 components that cover facilitating trade and investment in green services, harmonizing standards and building green growth sectors through collaboration between business.

Australia has committed to reducing its emissions to net-zero by 2050 and Singapore is considering adopting the same target.

Albanese described Singapore as “one of the most innovative economies in the world,” while Australia had the potential to become a “renewable energy superpower” due to its vast open spaces and relatively small population.

The agreement “will support clean energy innovation, unlock business opportunities and create jobs, and help deliver our mission’s targets while positioning Australia as a renewable energy superpower,” Albanese said.

Lee foreshadowed further cooperation in cross-border electricity trade and “sustainable aviation” through what he described as the “world’s first such agreement.”

“These are all areas which are of interest to Singapore and to Singapore businesses and we hope with a Singapore-Australia GEA they’ll be able to move forward,” Lee said.

“But we also hope with this GEA will encourage other countries to look at what we have been able to do and to ask whether some of this may not make sense to them to do with Singapore or to do with each other,” Lee added

Singapore is already planning to use solar power from northern Australia transmitted by a 4,200-kilometer (2,600-mile) submarine cable.

Singaporean company Sun Cable plans to start construction in 2024 of the 30 billion Australian dollar ($19 billion) Australia-Asia PowerLink project that will include 12,000 hectares (30,000 acres) of solar panels near the northern Australian city of Darwin.

Albanese described the export of Australian solar power to Singapore as an “ultimate win-win.”

“If this project can be made to work — and I believe it can be — you will see the world’s largest solar farm, you will see the export of energy across distances … (and) the production of many jobs here in Australia, including manufacturing jobs,” Albanese said.

[Source: abcnews.go.com dated 17th October, 2022.]

27. E-waste: Five billion phones to be thrown away in 2022

This year, 5.3 billion mobile phones will be thrown away the international waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) forum says.

Its estimate, based on global trade data, highlights the growing environmental problem of “e-waste”.

Many people keep old phones, rather than recycling them, research suggests.

Precious minerals not extracted from waste electronics, such as the copper in wire or the cobalt in rechargeable batteries, have to be mined.

  • Mine e-waste, not the Earth, say scientists
  • Millions of old gadgets ‘stockpiled in drawers’

“People tend not to realise that all these seemingly insignificant items have a lot of value and together at a global level represent massive volumes,” WEEE director general Pascal Leroy said.

There are an estimated 16 billion mobile phones worldwide – and in Europe, almost a third are no longer in use.

The WEEE says its research shows the “mountain” of electrical and electronic waste – from washing machines and toasters to tablet computers and global positioning system (GPS) devices – will grow to 74 million tonnes a year by 2030.

Earlier this year, the Royal Society of Chemistry launched a campaign promoting the mining of e-waste to produce new products, highlighting global conflict, including the war in Ukraine, threatens precious-metal supply chains.

Magdalena Charytanowicz, of the WEEE, said: “These devices offer many important resources that can be used in the production of new electronic devices or other equipment, such as wind turbines, electric car batteries or solar panels – all crucial for the green, digital transition to low-carbon societies.”

Just over 17% of the world’s e-waste is properly recycled – but the United Nations International Telecommunication Union has set a target to raise that to 30% by next year.

It highlights it is one of the “fastest growing and most complex waste streams that affects both human health and the environment, as it can contain harmful substances”.

In the UK, more than 20 million unused but working electrical items, worth as much as possibly £5.63bn, are currently hoarded in UK homes, surveys by the organisation Material Focus suggest.

It also calculated that the average UK household could sell unwanted tech and raise about £200.

The organisation’s online campaign provides tips, including where to find recycling centres.

Mr Leroy said much more could be done.

“Providing collection boxes in supermarkets, pick-up of small broken appliances upon delivery of new ones and offering PO [post-office] boxes to return small e-waste are just some of the initiatives introduced to encourage the return of these items,” he said.

[Source: BBC.com dated 12th October, 2022.]

Miscellanea

I. ECONOMY – US MARKETS

20 Banks head into a perfect storm – A repeat of the 2008-09 Crisis?

After enjoying a couple of years of tailwinds, U.S. banks are heading into a perfect storm, fueled by a collapse in mortgage originations and an inverted yield as interest rates rise. And it will squeeze both bank revenues and earnings.

A Collapse in Mortgage Originations

Mortgage originations are a big business for traditional banks. They allow them to collect origination fees, discount points, closing costs and loan service fees, which boost their top and bottom lines.

But mortgage originations are susceptible to interest rate fluctuations. They rise as interest rates fall and drop as interest rates rise. For instance, in 2020, when the 30-year mortgage rate declined to a record low of 2.80%, mortgage originations soared from $601 billion to $1.36 trillion. But mortgage originations have recently collapsed to $677 billion, as mortgage rates climbed to 6.43%. And the worst may have yet to come as new and existing home sales are plunging, and homeowners see no reason to refinance loans at higher mortgage rates.

Then there’s the inverting of the yield curve, which makes matters worse.

Inverted Yield Curve

A rising interest environment is usually good for banks, provided that long-term interest rates rise faster than short-term interest rates, resulting in a normal yield curve. That’s mainly the case in a growing economy and benefits banks in two ways. One, it boosts loan demand, bringing to the cash register the usual mortgage fees associated with new mortgage originations and servicing. And two, it allows banks to collect a positive “spread.” That’s the difference between the short-term rates they pay depositors and the long-term rates they charge mortgage borrowers or collect from investing these deposits in Treasury bonds with long maturity — a measure of bank profitability.

But a rising interest rate environment can be bad for banks if long-term interest rates rise at a slower pace than the short-term rates, resulting in an inverted yield curve, as has been the case in the U.S. in recent months. Last week, for instance, the 30-year U.S. Treasury bond traded with a yield of 3.60%, well below the 4.20% of the two-year bond.

An inverted yield curve is usually a sign of an impending recession and hurts banks by lowering the demand for loans and turning the interest rate spread negative.

Dean Kaplan, president of The Kaplan Group, a commercial collection agency, thinks that this combination of collapsing mortgages and an inverted yield curve push banks into a perfect storm. “With inflation caused by events beyond anyone’s control (Russia’s invasion of Ukraine and persistent supply chain issues related to the pandemic), central banks are compelled to raise interest rates and cut back on liquidity efforts,” he told International Business Times in an email. “Financial institutions already see reduced mortgage demand due to higher rates, and many have changed requirements for extending new credit. But, with all the volatility, once credit contraction gets started, it can be a downward spiral that is difficult to stop.”

Shmuel Shayowitz, president and chief lending officer at Approved Funding, is seeing some similarities between now and 2008. “From a consumer end, they probably won’t bear the brunt of what they saw in 2008,” he told IBT. “Instead, banks face a perfect storm of liquidity constraints, business slowdown, and a weak economic outlook.”

[Source: International Business Times – By Panos Mourdoukoutas, Ph.D. – 26th September, 2022.]

21 What the end of free money means for investing in financial assets?

The era of free money is over. Money has a “price again,” a positive interest rate that borrowers must pay to lenders. And that brings back the old game on Wall Street when investors purchased financial assets based on fundamentals rather than on a narrative.

For years, central bankers printed money like there was no tomorrow, driving short-term and long-term interest rates near zero. That’s thanks to the “disappearance of inflation,” which allowed them to focus on pursuing maximum employment rather than price stability.

While easy money has helped central bankers to get close to the elusive goal of maximum employment, it had a “side effect,” most pronounced during the COVID pandemic. It fueled a speculative frenzy on Wall Street, which distorted capital allocation, according to Patrick Wells, Portfolio manager & CFA at Pinnacle Associates.

“One hallmark of the COVID bull market was indiscriminate buying across the riskiest companies with unproven business models,” he told International Business Times.

Bryan Shipley, CFA, CAIA, Co-CEO, Chief Investment Officer, Managing Principal, and Senior Investment Advisor, agrees. He thinks that low borrowing costs have made it possible for investors to expect double-digit returns on speculative assets like commodities, real estate, and cryptocurrencies.

“As a result, they had to rush to put their money into work for fear of missing out on that growth,” he told IBT.

In the last year, the economic situation has changed. Inflation has appeared again, reaching a 40-year high in some countries. And that has forced central banks to end the era of easy money by hiking interest rates. For instance, in the last six months, the Federal Reserve has raised interest rates several times, bringing the Federal Funds rate to 3.25%, up from 0.25% a year ago.

In addition, the Fed has begun to unload its Treasury Bonds and Mortgage-Backed Securities (MBS), pushing Treasury bond yields and mortgage rates higher. For instance, the 10year Treasury bond yielding 0.55% in 2020 is now paying 3.60%. Likewise, the 30 year mortgage rate, which in 2020 stood at 2.90%, is now over 6%.

Rising interest rates have made money costly again, bringing back the old game on Wall Street. As a result, investors now have to pay attention to the economic fundamentals of different assets, like the companies’ business model behind equity shares, their revenues, earnings, free cash flow, and leverage rates.

“A rising tide lifts all boats, even those that aren’t very seaworthy,” Robert R. Johnson, Ph.D., CFA, CAIA, Professor of Finance, Heider College of Business, Creighton University, told IBT. “The end of free money means that investors are becoming more discerning and demand that potential investments have a sustainable business model and are cash flow positive or have a path to being so.”

Johnson further thinks that under the free money regime, many assets were trading on a narrative rather than on fundamentals, as investors had no viable alternatives in money market funds and bonds, which paid tiny yields. But the situation is changing with bond and money market yields rising for the first time in years. Moreover, speculative assets lead the correction in financial markets, as seen in the significant declines in cryptocurrency markets and small tech shares in NASDAQ.

[Source: International Business Times – By Panos Mourdoukoutas, Ph.D. – 24th September, 2022.]


II. SPORTS

22 FIFA to introduce SAOT technology at Qatar World Cup to help referees

FIFA announced on 1 July 2022 that semi-automated offside technology (SAOT) will be used at the 2022 World Cup in Qatar to enable referees to make faster, more accurate offside decisions at the world’s biggest football gala.

“At the FIFA World Cup in 2018, FIFA took the brave step to use Video Assistant Referee (VAR) technology. Semi-automated offside technology is an evolution of the VAR systems that have been implemented across the world,” the world football governing body president Gianni Infantino noted, saying that SAOT will provide the very best for the teams, players and fans who will be heading to Qatar in November this year.

According to the FIFA statement, the SAOT system uses 12 dedicated tracking cameras mounted underneath the roof of the stadium to track the ball and up to 29 data points of each individual player, 50 times per second, calculating their exact position on the pitch, while the sensor positioned in centre of the tournament’s official match ball “Al Rihla” sends data 500 times per second, allowing a very precise detection of the kick point.

The data collected by cameras and the ball sensor will be processed by artificial intelligence within a few seconds to check the offside situation. Once an offside position is detected, the SAOT system will provide an automated offside alert to the video match officials team, reports Xinhua.

After the decision has been confirmed by the VAR and the referee on the pitch, the SAOT will then generate a 3D animation to be displayed on the giant screens in the stadium and on TV, which gives the best possible perspectives for an offside situation.

FIFA Director of Football Technology & Innovation Johannes Holzmuller said that the new technology has been successfully trialed at numerous test events including the FIFA Arab Cup 2021 and the FIFA Club World Cup 2021.

“During the tests, the average VAR offside check time has reduced from 70 seconds to 25 seconds, and the 3D animation could improve a better communications with fans,” he revealed in the online press conference.

“VAR has already had a very positive impact on football and we can see that the number of major mistakes has already been dramatically reduced. We expect that semi-automated offside technology can take us a step further. We will have a very valuable support tool to help referees and assistant referees make the best and most correct decision on the field of play,” Pierluigi Collina, chairman of the FIFA Referees Committee, said of the technology.

Collina pointed out that the SAOT is still limited and noted that “the referees and the assistant referees are still responsible for the decision on the field of play,” Collina added.

[Source: International Business Times – By IANS – 2nd July, 2022.]


Miscellanea

I. TECHNOLOGY

16 A third of US social media users creating fake accounts

Fake social media accounts are usually associated with bot networks, but some research released Tuesday revealed many social media users are creating their own fake accounts for a variety of reasons.

According to a survey of 1,500 American social media users by USCasinos.com, one in three social media users in the US has numerous accounts on the social media networks they frequent. Nearly half (48%) of individuals with multiple accounts have two or more additional accounts.

The most common justifications given for opening extra accounts are to “express my opinions without being criticised” (mentioned by 41% of people) and “spy on someone else’s profile” (38%).

Other reasons for creating false accounts include “improving my chances of winning online contests” (13%), “increasing the likes, followers, and other metrics on my real account” (5%), “to fool others” (2.6%), and “to scam others” (0.4%).

Respondents were asked where they were making their fake accounts, and the top three responses were Twitter (41%), Facebook (31%), and Instagram (28%). Will Duffield, a policy analyst with the Cato Institute, a Washington, D.C.- based think tank, explained that this was the case because Twitter is significantly more open by default.

He told TechNewsWorld that Twitter power users frequently have many accounts, including ones for large audiences, smaller groups, and default open and private accounts.

According to the study’s co-author Ines Ferreira, noted that Twitter served as inspiration for the study’s online casino directory website. She told TechNewsWorld, that “We launched this analysis mostly because of the hoopla over the Elon Musk and Twitter merger.”

A legal battle over that accord between Musk and the Twitter board over the volume of fake accounts on the platform is still pending. However, the study’s examples of fake accounts are distinct from the ones that flustering Musk. Duffield said that “the survey conflates two quite different issues.”

“On the one hand, there are automated accounts—things that are controlled by machines and frequently used for spam. Elon Musk claims that there are too many accounts like that on Twitter, according to TechNewsWorld.” There are also pseudonymous accounts, which is what this study is looking at. Users that don’t want to use their real names operate them.

The survey also found that the majority of users (80.9%) kept their same sex when creating false profiles. According to the report, the primary exception to this rule is when users want to spy on other accounts. They therefore prefer to create a fake account with the opposite sex. Generally speaking, 13.1% of survey respondents indicated they created fake accounts using the other sex.

There are lots of reasons, according to Duffield, why we don’t want everything we do online to be attached to our real names. And it’s not always due to Cancel Culture or something like.

He said, that the ability to compartmentalise identities or take on several personalities without committing to them on the internet allows us to present different aspects of ourselves at once. The use of pseudonyms online is fairly common. Using genuine names is, in fact, a more modern expectation, he claimed.

Accounts Made Without Remorse

The study also discovered that the majority of false account creators (53.3%) prefer to conceal their behaviour from their close friends. When they do mention their false accounts, friends (29.9%) and family (9.9%) are the most likely recipients, followed by partners (7.7%).

The researchers also found that 53.3 percent of phoney account owners were millennials, compared to Gen X’s average of three and Gen Z’s average of two.

According to the report, those who create phoney accounts seem to be free to do so. 94% of the interviewees said no when asked if their bogus accounts had ever been reported to the platforms where they were created.

According to Ferreira, “these platforms frequently introduce new algorithms to report these accounts, but the majority of them never get reported.” It’s quite difficult to distinguish between all of the false accounts since there are so many of them and they are so simple to create.

“These platforms are going to think a little bit more how they’re going to do it after the Elon Musk deal with Twitter,” she continued.

Duffield, though, minimised the necessity of monitoring user-created false accounts. There is no justification for the platforms to view the creation of these accounts as a concern, he continued, given it is not against the terms of service.

He continued, “Even though they don’t have genuine names, these accounts are run by real individuals, and they act like real people. They only send messages to one individual at a time. They’re typing stuff out slowly. Their day/night cycle is regular. They don’t send out 1,000 messages to 100 different people at once, at all hours of the day.

Unharmful fakes?

Fake accounts generated by individuals are less damaging to the networks hosting them than fake accounts produced by bots, according to Duffield.

According to a theory, users who use pseudonymous accounts or accounts unrelated to their real identities misbehave more frequently, but from the standpoint of moderation, banning a pseudonymous account is the same as banning a real person, he said.

Facebook has a real name policy, despite receiving a lot of criticism for it over the years, he continued. It is currently being purposefully under-enforced, in my opinion.

He insisted, that “It isn’t a problem for the platforms, as long as the pseudonymous user is following the regulations,”.

Bot accounts don’t support a social media platform’s revenue model, but phoney user accounts do.

According to Duffield, “If the pseudonymous account is being utilised by a real human being, they are still receiving adverts.” It’s not like a robot clicking on stuff by itself. Regardless of the name on the account, if people are watching and receiving relevant advertising, it is not a big deal from the platform’s perspective.

Platforms, advertisers, and prospective buyers are interested in the activity since it is shown in the statistics for monthly active users, he stated. “People frequently abandon accounts, thus the total number of accounts is a worthless figure.” Still, Ferreira claimed that any kind of fraudulent account weakens the trust of a social media network. She predicted that eventually there would be more fraudulent users than actual ones, thus something needed to be done right away.

[Source: technewsworld.com dated 10th August, 2022.]

II. WORLD NEWS

17 US pharmacy chains ordered to pay $650 m in Ohio opioids suit

A federal judge has ruled that America’s three largest pharmacy chains must pay $650.5m (£539.8m) for helping fuel a painkiller crisis in two Ohio counties. In November, a federal court found Walgreens Boots Alliance, CVS and Walmart helped create an oversupply of addictive opioid pills.

The money will be used to help combat the impact of the crisis in Lake and Trumbull counties. The companies plan to appeal. Millions of people in the US have become addicted to opiate-based painkillers such as fentanyl and OxyContin over the last 20 years.

Nearly half a million deaths were attributed to painkiller overdoses between 1999 and 2019. In court, attorneys for Lake and Trumbull counties – both near Cleveland – put the total financial cost of the crisis at $3.3 billion. Both counties, like other jurisdictions across the US, have argued that the crisis has put an enormous strain on local resources, social programmes and legal systems.

A failure to ensure that prescriptions were valid, their attorneys have argued, created a public nuisance as vast quantities of pills flooded their communities.

Between 2012 and 2016, more than 80 million painkillers were reportedly distributed in Trumbull County – about 400 pills per resident. In Lake County, the figure stood at 61 million pills over the same time frame. A US district judge ruled that Lake County will receive $306m over 15 years, while Trumbull County will receive $344m.

In the short-term, the three companies have been ordered to pay about $87m to cover the first two years of the plan. The ruling was quickly praised by officials from both counties.

Lake County Commissioner John Hamercheck, for example, said that the ruling “marks the start of a new day in our fight to end the opioid crisis”. The three companies have repeatedly denied the allegations and claimed they attempted to prevent painkillers from being diverted towards illicit use. Additionally, they argued that it was doctors – rather than pharmacies – that ultimately determined how many pills were prescribed and to whom.

When contacted by the BBC, all three companies said they will appeal the ruling. “We never manufactured or marketed opioids nor did we distribute them to the ‘pill mills’ and internet pharmacies that fuelled this crisis,” Walgreens said in a statement.

More than 3,000 lawsuits have been filed against opioid manufacturers and pharmacies in the hopes of recouping the costs spent combating the crisis.

[Source: BBC.com dated 18th August, 2022.]


18 PwC fined nearly £1.8m over BT fraud audit failures

PwC has been fined almost £1.8m for failing to properly scrutinise the accounts of telecoms company BT after a £500m accounting fraud had been uncovered at its Italian operation.

The accounting giant failed to act with the “requisite professional scepticism” and did not obtain “sufficient appropriate audit evidence” in its work on BT’s 2017 financial statements, which had to be adjusted by £513m because of the Italian scandal, according to the Financial Reporting Council (FRC).

The UK’s accounting regulator also severely reprimanded PwC, which was paid £4.3m for its work on BT’s accounts, and Richard Hughes, the audit engagement partner at the firm. The FRC fined PwC £1.75m and Hughes £42,000.

“The respondents failed to act with the requisite professional scepticism [and] did not obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence,” the FRC said in its 27-page final ruling published on Monday. “The respondents did not approach the audit of BT’s treatment of the debt adjustments with the necessary professional scepticism and they failed to adequately document their audit work across the entirety of the BT Italy adjustments.”

The 2017 scandal wiped almost £8bn off BT’s market value, prompted a restructure including the axing of 4,000 jobs, and ultimately was a factor that resulted in the departure of former chief executive Gavin Patterson as investors lost confidence in management.

The FRC also said PwC and Hughes had not produced an audit that was understandable to third parties.

“The respondents also failed to prepare audit documentation that was sufficient to enable an experienced auditor, having no previous connection with the audit, to understand the nature, timing and extent of the audit procedures performed,” said the regulator.

However, the FRC’s executive counsel said its decision did not mean that BT’s 2017 financial statements were misstated, that the £513m adjustment for Italy was wrong or that the breaches it found were “intentional, dishonest or reckless”.

The FRC fined PwC and Hughes £2.56m in relation to the audit of the 2017 accounts, but reduced this by 30% because the issues were raised by the parties at an early stage.

“In determining the financial impact of a major fraud detected within a business, difficult but important issues relating to appropriate accounting treatment and disclosures will need to be addressed,” said the FRC deputy executive counsel, Claudia Mortimore.

“It is vital that these are subject to robust audit so that the users of financial statements can have confidence that the financial impact is properly and accurately stated in subsequent financial statements. The sanctions imposed in this case, where certain elements of the adjustments following a fraud were not subject to the required level of professional scepticism, underscore this message and will serve as a timely reminder to the profession.”

PwC has been sanctioned five times since 2018.

The FRC has previously fined PwC a total of more than £17m in relation to audit failings for clients Taveta, Redcentric, Kier Group and Galliford Try. In 2020, PwC was the largest accountancy firm in the UK with revenue of £3.5bn, of which £754m was for auditing services.

“We are sorry that aspects of this audit were not of the required standard,” said a spokesperson for PwC. “We have made significant investment in strengthening audit quality in recent years, which has been recognised in improved quality inspection results. We remain committed to maintaining and building on this progress through the delivery of consistently high-quality audits.”

[Source: theguardian.com dated 8th August, 2022.]

III. ENVIRONMENT

19 Climate change: Drought highlights dangers for electricity supplies

Overall, the amount of electricity produced by hydropower, which uses water to generate power, has decreased by 20%. Additionally, access to nuclear power plants that use river water for cooling has been restricted. There are fears that the shortfalls are a taste of what may occur in winter.

High temperatures in the UK are reducing the amount of energy produced by fossil, nuclear, and solar sources. That is because the technology in power plants and solar panels work much less well in high temperatures.

As Europe looks for alternate sources of energy in the wake of Russia’s invasion of Ukraine, the prolonged dry period is adding to the strain on energy supplies.

  • Millions hit by hosepipe bans as drought declared

  • US Senate passes sweeping $700bn economic package

  • Causes of deadly dry-lightning wildfires revealed

“Hydropower is a vital source of energy for Europe, but as rivers and reservoirs dry up, it is becoming much harder for facilities to generate electricity. Around 1/5 of Italy’s energy comes from hydropower, however this percentage has decreased by almost 40% during the past 12 months.”

Similar trends can be seen in Spain, where electricity production is down 44%, per data from energy analysts Rystad Energy.

According to Fabian Rnningen, a power expert with Rystad, hydropower can be extremely unpredictable, but 40% is by far the most extreme. He emphasises that not only are the numbers declining across all of Europe, but also in the major hydropower-producing nations. It’s really a big impact.

Hydroelectricity is a problem in Norway as well. It issued a warning that unless its reservoirs were full, it might not be able to continue exporting energy to nations like the UK. Some in the hydro industry say that lack of investment in modernisation and in transmission lines are also causing problems.

Eddie Rich from the International Hydropower Association says that we are going to face a problem this winter. And that should be a wake-up call to have more investment in the infrastructure for the next few years.

The exceptionally hot weather is also hitting nuclear power production, especially in France. Around half of the 56 reactors in the fleet are offline, with several affected by a systemic issue with corrosion.

When temperatures are high, water from rivers that are now running low is frequently used to cool those reactors that are operating.

[Source: BBC.com dated 12th August, 2022.]

MISCELLANEA

I. SCIENCE

13 How Composting Can Solve our Methane and Plastic Problem

Back in 1996, one of California’s oldest waste collection companies, Recology, began collecting food scraps from San Francisco’s central market to compost. Now, the company’s green composting bins are ubiquitous on the streets of the city, which has composted more than 2 million tons of food and other waste.

Recology and the city of San Francisco stand out for accepting one of the largest varieties of items for compost, including compostable packaging and almost all types of food scraps. With about one-third of all food in the United States going to waste, composting could and should play a bigger role in municipal waste systems across the country. Recology and the city of San Francisco stand out for accepting one of the largest varieties of items for compost, including compostable packaging and almost all types of food scraps.

Food is the most common component of landfill garbage, making up 24% of all landfill material, according to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. In addition to the obvious social-economic concerns about food security, the massive amount of food and other organic waste in landfills is the third-largest source of human-produced methane emissions in the United States — after the fossil fuel and animal agriculture sectors — making up 14.5% of total methane emissions.

Cutting methane emissions, which the United States and the EU promised to reduce by 30% by 2030 at last year’s COP26 climate summit in Glasgow, has emerged as a key factor in slowing down the warming of the planet.

Composting, in which food and other organic waste are combined with wood chips and other natural fibers to decompose in an oxygen-rich environment that does not produce the methane that develops in the anaerobic conditions of landfills, is critical to this mission.

In addition, the end product of composting, soil rich in nutrients, can help solve the ongoing challenge of agricultural soil erosion, which degrades soil quality and reduces crop yields. The nation is on track to lose the equivalent of 300 years of soil by 2100 if nothing is done. That is eight times the amount of topsoil lost during the devastating Dust Bowl of the 1930s.

But most of the nation’s compost facilities are still focused solely on yard waste, like raked leaves, cut grass and garden clippings. Only 10% take food, and a smaller number take packaging. This can, and must, change — but the real question is how.  

Such a change can happen through a combination of factors. Composting must become an integral part of municipal waste management systems, similar to recycling. This requires cooperation between the public-private sector, which we have seen for the past three decades in San Francisco.

Bringing Compost into the Waste Management System

Only 4% of households in the U.S. are served by composting services that pick up the waste. This number needs to grow — substantially in order to reduce methane emissions — and so do the categories of items that are acceptable for composting.

While home-composting and private services no doubt play an important role, it is only by being part of the standard waste-management and waste pickup systems that composting will reach its full potential. After all, part of the reason recycling became more mainstream was because it became part of municipal waste management systems over the years. Today, more than 59% of U.S. households have curbside recycling pickup alongside regular garbage pickup. The same needs to happen with composting.

But we cannot rely on composters alone to make the changes necessary in order to serve more consumers. Accepting food often requires composters to have certain permits and specialized equipment. And many composters say they don’t have the resources for the extra sorting that comes along with accepting food, as food scraps often arrive mixed with pieces of packaging and plastic that must be separated out and discarded because they can’t be composted.

City governments, which usually oversee garbage collection and waste management, can help create the sort of composting facilities that can accept these items. An example of this beneficial cooperation can be seen in Seattle, which for years has been working with composting company Cedar Grove to collect food from city residents. Not only does food get composted, reducing methane emissions, but the business has grown and flourished since partnering with the city.

Such cooperation is critical for moving composting forward in other places. For example, even though California’s law banning food waste in garbage disposal has come into effect this year, some large cities like San Diego and Los Angeles still lack the pickup services and facilities to handle the growing demand for compost. These facilities and waste management companies are relying on an influx of government money to make the needed upgrades.

At the same time, while their initial rollout is challenging, policies banning the disposal of food waste are an important tool for integrating compost into waste management. In both California and Vermont, which introduced similar laws in 2020, compost beyond yard waste is growing both as a business and a public service. After all, the reason why most composters are still so focused on yard trimmings is due to bans on those in landfills decades ago.

The Role of Labeling

One of the main reasons that Recology and some other California-based composters accept not just food but also items like compostable plastic bags and packaging is due to laws and regulations about labeling.

Labeling laws also need to be specific and correlated to science to avoid greenwashing and prevent non-compostable products from contaminating the composting process and final product. Such laws are most developed in California but are gaining popularity in other places, including Oregon, where there is currently a proposal for a “Truth in Labeling” law that will help clearly designate what kinds of packaging can be put into the compost.

Clear labeling also paves the way in the public education process about what is compostable and what is not, a key factor in bringing composting into mainstream waste management.

Labeling not only makes things easier for consumers and composters but ensures continued demand for the end product in the agricultural sector. With the right facilities, regulations and municipal cooperation, food and compostable packaging are benefits, rather than a challenge, for composters.

Adding more food and packaging to the composting mix will not only reduce methane and other greenhouse gasses but will also result in higher volumes of nutrient-rich end products that farmers can purchase and use in their fields. Making this happen should be a high priority for cities.

If left alone, the immense amount of food in landfills will continue to produce increasing amounts of greenhouse gasses, and compostable plastics, if simply thrown out, will not actually break down properly, adding to the microplastic problem in our soil and oceans.

Developing the composting infrastructure to handle things like food and compostable packaging would immediately reduce greenhouse gasses and could, potentially, also be a turning point for the plastics industry, encouraging more innovation and use of compostable materials to turn one of the world’s most challenging types of waste into one of the most viable — and valuable.

[Source: Opinion – International Business Times – By Michael Waas – 15th June, 2022.]

II. TECHNOLOGY

14 Using the Internet without a VPN is like leaving your House without locking the front door

We’ve heard time and again how critical the threat of hacking is. Still, most of us either think we’ll avoid it or have nothing to hide for hackers to expose anyway – so why worry? This is akin to thinking that we don’t need to bother locking the door because we don’t have an illegal store of drugs stashed away in our houses. Every person with an online presence benefits from using a VPN. It’s not about not having anything to hide. It’s about not having your information stolen or shared.

This is not necessarily a matter of theft. This is, first and foremost, a matter of privacy. Every 39 seconds, somebody is hacked, and there’s a 1 in 4 chance that it will be you on the receiving end. Hacking is not a far-away, dystopian threat; it is immediate and gaining urgency each year. Therefore, we must increase awareness of the severity of cyber-attacks and encourage more people to use VPN networks to protect themselves.

The pandemic-fuelled shift to remote working led to a significant spike in hack-attacks. For example, the volume of ransomware doubled in 2021, surpassing the 600 million mark. This form of hacking involves hackers encrypting your data and demanding large sums in return for giving your data back. The average cost was an incredible $ 4.44 million.

These kinds of attacks present a lose-lose situation for users – either they are forced to pay exorbitant sums to these cyber-criminals, or, as is often the case, they cannot afford the ransom, and their personal data is leaked. This is not merely a case of losing your favorite holiday photos. This can involve losing your PIN codes and passwords. In 2021, Americans lost a record $ 3.5 billion to cybercrime. In 2020, 37 billion data records were leaked, which was a staggering 140% increase from the previous year.

The most frustrating aspect of these figures is that cyber-attacks are relatively easy to defend against. Firstly, people aren’t aware of just how severe and extensive the cyber-security threat has become. Secondly, a substantial number of those who feel vulnerable do not know how to protect themselves.

The answer is easy: use a VPN network every time you surf the internet. VPNs – Virtual Private Networks – mask the user’s traffic patterns and block access to their IP address, which would otherwise reveal specific information about the computer being used.

Around a third of the global population of internet users have a VPN installed, leaving the vast majority susceptible to cyber-attacks. This figure is even lower for the US, with only a quarter of North America using a VPN when they browse online. By contrast, almost three-quarters of Americans are fearful of their personal or financial information being stolen.

VPNs are widely available and low-cost, yet most of those online do not have this protective software installed. The issue, then, is one of awareness. To tackle this, we can look to what can arguably be called the cyber-security capital of the world: Estonia.
 
In 2007, Estonia suffered a series of hack-attacks in what was largely considered to be the world’s first cyber-war. The swathe of cyber-criminality was spawned by the controversial moving of a soldier’s statue, which served as a harrowing reminder of the years of Soviet oppression faced by Estonians. Since this incident, Estonia has established itself as a cyber-security hub; the keystone to this success has been boosting cyber-awareness across its population.

Some of the measures included in Estonia’s Cyber Security Strategy included offering cyber-training to preschoolers and older children and introducing various Media Literacy courses in secondary schools. In 2013, the government also instigated a state-private partnership project, which was designed to improve the security awareness of smart-device users, developers, and distributors. Furthermore, a Masters Degree in Cyber Security was launched in 2009, and the Police and Border Guard Board even appointed a ‘web constable,’ whose primary role was to boost public understanding about cyber-security and to help protect young people online. There are a multitude of VPN’s out there that offer huge protections at a low cost, such as Private internet access, Safernet VPN, Express VPN, tunnel Bear and Proton VPN among others.

The proof is in the Kohuke: Estonia is now the most cyber-secure country in the EU. The US government has reason to be reluctant about enforcing wider VPN usage, given that it regularly benefits from the gathering of voter data. However, it must act to improve awareness of core cyber-security issues at the very least. As is evident from the Estonia blueprint, education is essential for this; we must introduce more purpose-built Cyber-Security degrees, along with training programs for children and young people. The benefits far outweigh any negatives of using a VPN for the global community.

[Source: Opinion – International Business Times – By Brad Hawkins – 15th June, 2022.]

III. SPORTS

15 National Football Day: Interesting Facts, Quotes about the Popular Sport

National Football Day is celebrated on July 19 to honor one of the most popular sports played in the country.

The game which is known by the name football in the U.S. and Canada is popularly called “gridiron” or “American football” in other parts of the world.

Football has become an integral part of the American culture and Super Bowl is considered to be the country’s most important holiday that brings together friends and families.

Here are some fun facts about the game:

1. The original football game was 70 minutes long. Its duration was later reduced by 10 minutes.

2. The longest field goal in football history was 64 yards.

3. The shape of a football is “prolate spheroid” which means “long sphere.”

4. Although the football game is divided into four quarters with each lasting 15 minutes, the actual game is played for only 11 minutes out of that.

To mark the occasion, let’s take a look at some interesting quotes showcasing the spirit and love people have for football. (Courtesy: Brainy Quotes)

1. “Football is like life – it requires perseverance, self-denial, hard work, sacrifice, dedication and respect for authority.”- Vince Lombardi

2. “Some people think football is a matter of life and death. I assure you, it’s much more serious than that.”- Bill Shankly

3. “Football is about joy. It’s about dribbling. I favor every idea that makes the game beautiful. Every good idea has to last.”- Ronaldinho

4. “In football, even when you do your best on the pitch, you can win or lose. That is the nature of the game.” – Gianfranco Zola

5. “Football is a game of mistakes. Whoever makes the fewest mistakes wins.”- Johan Cruyff

6. “In football, the worst things are excuses. Excuses mean you cannot grow or move forward.”- Pep Guardiola

7. “Football fans share a universal language that cuts across many cultures and many personality types. A serious football fan is never alone. We are legion, and football is often the only thing we have in common.”- Hunter S. Thompson

8. “The football field was a place where I could express myself and just be me. Play the game as well as you can and that’s what you’re judged on. Not the color of your skin, or your beliefs, or the conversation you have around racism.”- Adam Goodes

9. “It’s like everything in football – and life. You need to look, you need to think, you need to move, you need to find space, you need to help others. It’s very simple in the end.”- Johan Cruyff

10. “To become a great player, you’ve got to show real dedication and commitment to football, and you’ve got to be very humble and hard-working. And, above all, you’ve got to fight to make your dreams come true.”- Sergio Ramos

[Source: International Business Times – By Suneeta Sunny – 19th July, 2022.]

MISCELLANEA

I. TECHNOLOGY

8 Apple battery lawsuit: Millions of iPhone users could get payouts in legal action

Millions of iPhone users could be eligible for payouts, following the launch of a legal claim accusing Apple of secretly slowing the performance of older phones.

Justin Gutmann alleges the company misled users over an upgrade that it said would enhance performance but, in fact, slowed phones down. He is seeking damages of around £768m for up to 25 million UK iPhone users. Apple says it has “never” intentionally shortened the life of its products.

The claim, which has been filed with the Competition Appeal Tribunal, alleges Apple slowed down the performance of older iPhones, in a process known as “throttling”, in order to avoid expensive recalls or repairs. It relates to the introduction of a power management tool released in a software update to iPhone users in January 2017, to combat performance issues and stop older devices from abruptly shutting down.

Mr. Gutmann, a consumer champion, says the information about the tool was not included in the software update download description at the time, and that the company failed to make clear that it would slow down devices.

He claims that Apple introduced this tool to hide the fact that iPhone batteries may have struggled to run the latest iOS software, and that rather than recalling products or offering replacement batteries, the firm instead pushed users to download the software updates.

Mr. Gutmann said, “Instead of doing the honourable and legal thing by their customers and offering a free replacement, repair service or compensation, Apple instead misled people by concealing a tool in software updates that slowed their devices by up to 58%.”

The models covered by the claim are the iPhone 6, 6 Plus, 6S, 6S Plus, SE, 7, 7 Plus, 8, 8 Plus and iPhone X models. It is an opt-out claim, which means customers will not need to actively join the case to seek damages.

In a statement, Apple said: “We have never, and would never, do anything to intentionally shorten the life of any Apple product, or degrade the user experience to drive customer upgrades. Our goal has always been to create products that our customers love, and making iPhones last as long as possible is an important part of that.”

The claim by Mr. Gutmann comes two years after a similar case was settled in the United States. In 2020, Apple agreed to pay $113m to settle allegations that it slowed down older iPhones. Thirty-three US states claimed that Apple had done this to drive users into buying new devices. Millions of people were affected when the models of iPhone 6 and 7 and SE were slowed down in 2016 in a scandal that was dubbed batterygate.

At the time, Apple declined to comment, however, it had previously said the phones were slowed to preserve ageing battery life. Claire Holubowskyj, an analyst at the research firm Enders Analysis, said issues like this may continue to crop up, given the technical limitations of ageing batteries. “Technology in newer devices improves in leaps and bounds, not as a steady crawl, creating issues when releasing software updates which have to work on devices with often wildly different capabilities,” Ms. Holubowskyj said.

“Apple generates 84% of its revenue from selling new devices, making them reluctant to hold back updates to ensure older models keep working smoothly.” “Until problems of devices and software updates outlasting and exceeding the capabilities of aging batteries are resolved, this challenge will recur.”

[Source: www.bbc.com dated 17th June, 2022.]

9 Amazon to begin drone deliveries in Lockeford, California this year

Amazon says it will begin delivering parcels to shoppers by drone for the first time later this year, pending final regulatory approval.

Users in the Californian town of Lockeford will be able to sign up to have thousands of goods delivered by air to their homes, it said. The shopping giant has promised drone delivery for years but has faced delays and reported setbacks. But it said it planned to roll out the service more widely after Lockeford. “The promise of drone delivery has often felt like science fiction,” it said in a blog post. “[But] later this year, Amazon customers living in Lockeford, California, will become among the first to receive Prime Air deliveries.”

“Their feedback about Prime Air will help us create a service that will safely scale to meet the needs of customers everywhere.” “Their feedback about Prime Air will help us create a service that will safely scale to meet the needs of customers everywhere.”

Amazon said the drones will be programmed to drop parcels in the backyards of customers in Lockeford, which has a population of about 4,000 people.

They will be able to fly “beyond-line-of-sight”, meaning they don’t have to be controlled by a visual observer and instead use sensors to avoid other aircraft, people, pets and obstacles. The aim is to get packages to customers safely in less than an hour, the retailer said.

In the past, Amazon has been accused of using the promise of drone delivery as a headline-grabber to push its publicity around its Prime membership service. In 2013, former boss and founder Jeff Bezos pledged to fill the skies with a fleet of delivery drones within five years. And in 2019, Amazon said it would be delivering by drone to customers “within months”.

In April, a report by news site Bloomberg alleged safety concerns over its drones – although the retailer said it “rigorously” tested its flights in compliance with “all applicable regulations”

In December 2016, the company ran an apparently successful trial in Cambridge, UK. A package was delivered, by drone, in 13 minutes. Explaining how Prime Air deliveries would work, Amazon said: “Once onboarded, customers in Lockeford will see Prime Air-eligible items on Amazon. They will place an order as they normally would and receive an estimated arrival time with a status tracker for their order.

“For these deliveries, the drone will fly to the designated delivery location, descend to the customer’s backyard, and hover at a safe height. It will then safely release the package and rise back up to altitude.”

[Source: www.bbc.com dated 14th June, 2022]

II. WORLD NEWS

10 How the Ukraine war is triggering a food crisis

Breadbasket of the world

Russia and Ukraine together export nearly a third of the world’s wheat and barley, more than 70% of its sunflower oil and are big suppliers of corn. Now, Russia’s hostilities in Ukraine are preventing grain from leaving the “breadbasket of the world”.

Food more expensive

The Ukraine war is making food more expensive across the globe. And it’s threatening to worsen shortages, hunger and political instability in developing countries.

Parts of Africa, Asia hit

The war is preventing some 20 million tons of Ukrainian grain from getting to the Middle East, North Africa and parts of Asia.

181 million may face crisis

Experts say 400 million people worldwide rely on Ukrainian food supplies. The Food and Agriculture Organization warns that up to 181 million people in 41 countries could face a food crisis or worse levels of hunger this year.

Blockaded ports

Weeks of negotiations on safe corridors to get grain out of Ukraine’s Black Sea ports have made little progress. 90% of wheat and other grain from Ukraine are shipped to world markets by sea.

Transport by rail

Some grain is being rerouted through Europe by rail and road, but that quantity is just a fraction. This mode of transport is also increasing prices.

Western sanctions

Russian grain isn’t getting out, either. Moscow argues that Western sanctions on its banking and shipping industries make it impossible for Russia to export food and fertilizer.

[Source: www.economictimes.com dated 20th June, 2022]

III. ENVIRONMENT

11 Melting ice in Arctic ocean could transform international shipping routes

With climate change making an adverse impact on the environment, especially on oceans across the world, the fate of the Arctic Ocean looks horrid. Climate models have shown that parts of the Arctic that were once canvassed in ice all year are warming so quickly that they will be reliably ice-free for quite a long time in as not many as twenty years. Scientists say that the Arctic’s changing climate will imperil countless species that flourish in freezing temperatures.

According to researchers, another consequence of the melting ice in the Arctic Ocean could affect the regulation of shipping routes over the next few decades.

For the study, a couple of climate scientists at Brown University worked with a legal scholar at the University Of Maine School Of Law. They projected that by 2065, the Arctic’s traversability will increase so enormously that it could yield new shipping routes in worldwide waters — diminishing the shipping industry’s carbon footprints as well as weakening Russia’s control over trade in the Arctic.

This study’s lead author and a professor of Earth, environmental and planetary sciences at Brown, Amanda Lynch, said, “There’s no scenario in which melting ice in the Arctic is good news. But the unfortunate reality is that the ice is already retreating, these routes are opening up, and we need to start thinking critically about the legal, environmental and geopolitical implications.”

Lynch, who has studied climate change in the Arctic for almost 30 years, expressed that as an initial step, she worked with Xueke Li who is a postdoctoral research associate at the Institute at Brown for Environment and Society, to model four navigation route situations based on four likely results of global actions to halt climate change in the coming years. Their projections showed that unless global leaders effectively successfully constrain warming to 1.5 degrees Celsius over the course of the next 43 years, climate change will probably open up a few new routes through international waters by the middle of this century.

According to Charles Norchi, who is the director of the Center for Oceans and Coastal Law at Maine Law and a visiting scholar at Brown’s Watson Institute for International and Public Affairs, these changes could have significant ramifications for world trade and global politics.

Norchi explained that since 1982, the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea has given Arctic coastal states enhanced authority over primary shipping routes. Article 234 of the convention clearly states that in the name of “the prevention, reduction and control of marine pollution from vessels,” countries whose coastlines are near-Arctic shipping routes have the ability to regulate the route’s maritime traffic, so long as the area remains ice-covered for the majority of the year.

And for decades Russia has used Article 234 for its own economic and geopolitical interests. One Russian law requires all vessels passing through the Northern Sea Route to be piloted by Russians. The country also requires that passing vessels pay tolls and provide advance notice of their plans to use the route. The heavy regulation is one among many reasons why major shipping companies often bypass the route’s heavy regulations and high costs and instead use the Suez and Panama canals — longer, but cheaper and easier, trade routes.

But as the ice near Russia’s northern coast begins to melt, Norchi said, so will the country’s grip on shipping through the Arctic Ocean.

According to Lynch, previous studies have shown that Arctic routes are 30% to 50% shorter than the Suez Canal and Panama Canal routes, with transit time reduced by an estimated 14 to 20 days. That means that if international Arctic waters warm enough to open up new pathways, shipping companies could reduce their greenhouse gas emissions by about 24% while also saving money and time.

Lynch concluded by saying that it’s better to ask questions about the future of shipping now, rather than later, given how long it can take to establish international laws. She hopes that kicking off the conversation on the Arctic’s trade future with a well-researched scholarship might help world leaders make informed decisions about protecting the Earth’s climate from future harm.

[Source: www.phys.org dated 20th June, 2022]

IV. ETHICS

12 Ernst & Young to Pay $100 Million Fine After Auditors Cheated on Exams

The S.E.C. said the cheating involved hundreds of the firm’s auditors from 2017 to 2021.
 
Ernst & Young, one of the world’s largest auditing firms, has agreed to pay a $100 million fine after U.S. securities regulators found that some of its auditors had cheated on ethics exams — and that the firm had done nothing to stop the practice.

The penalty is the largest ever imposed by the Securities and Exchange Commission against an auditing firm. An administrative civil order filed by regulators said Ernst — also known as EY — had misled investigators, withheld evidence and violated public accounting rules designed to maintain the integrity of the profession.

“It’s simply outrageous that the very professionals responsible for catching cheating by clients cheated on ethics exams of all things,” said Gurbir S. Grewal, the commission’s director of enforcement, in announcing the settlement on Tuesday.

The penalty is twice the sum that KPMG, another big audit firm, paid in 2019 to resolve an investigation into similar allegations of cheating by auditors on internal training exams.

Ernst, which admitted in the order that its conduct was wrong, said in a statement that “nothing is more important than our integrity and our ethics.” The firm also said that “sharing answers on any assessment or exam is a violation of our Code of Conduct and is not tolerated” and said it would take efforts to enforce compliance with ethical rules.

The ethics exams that Ernst auditors cheated on were part of a continuing education program offered by most states for accountants to keep their professional licenses, according to the commission. The S.E.C. said the cheating involved hundreds of the firm’s auditors from 2017 to 2021.

Forty-nine auditors at Ernst received the “answer key” to an ethics exam that is part of the initial process of becoming a certified public accountant, according to the S.E.C.’s administrative order.

Regulators said this was not the first time that there had been widespread cheating on ethics exams by Ernst employees. The S.E.C. said a somewhat similar cheating scandal, which the firm handled internally, took place from 2012 to 2015.

As part of the settlement, the S.E.C. has required Ernst to hire two independent consultants. One will review the firm’s policies on ethics procedures, and the other will review its failure to properly disclose the cheating.

Mr. Grewal said the settlement “should serve as a clear message that the S.E.C. will not tolerate integrity failures by independent auditors.”

(Source: NYT, By Matthew Goldstein, dated 28th June, 2022)

MISCELLANEA

I. TECHNOLOGY

4 Amazon’s Alexa collects more of your data than any other smart assistant

Are you worried about your voice assistant spying on you? Then be sure to steer clear of Alexa. (And Bixby. Does anyone still use Bixby?)

Data Collected
about You

Amazon Alexa

Google Assistance

Apple Siri

Samsung Bixby

Microsoft Cortana

Your Name

Your time zone

Address

 

Phone number(s)

Your age

 

Payment Information

 

 

Personal interests as stored in your
user profile

 

Personal description as stored in Your user profile

 

 

 

Our smart devices are listening. Whether it’s personally identifiable information, location data, voice recordings, or shopping habits, our smart assistants know far more than we realize.

A survey on smart assistant usage conducted by Reviews.org showed that 56% of respondents are concerned about data collection. After analyzing the terms and conditions of Alexa, Google Assistant, Siri, Bixby, and Cortana, though, it’s clear that some degree of data collection is inescapable.

All five services collect your name, phone number, device location, and IP address; the names and numbers of your contacts; your interaction history; and the apps you use. If you don’t like that information being stored, you probably shouldn’t use a voice assistant.

Data Collected
about You

Amazon Alexa

Google Assistant

Apple Siri

Samsung Bixby

Microsoft Cortana

Your name

 

Your time zone

Address

 

 

 

Phone number(s)

Payment information

 

 

 

Your age

 

 

Personal interests as stored in your
user profile

 

Personal description as stored in your user profile

 

 

 

The location of your device or
computer

Location history. Places. And routes

 

 

 

Your IP address

Your synced email

 

 

 

 

Your calendar

 

 

 

Acoustic model of voice characteristics

 

 

Data Collected
about Your Contacts

Amazon Alexa

Google Assistant

Apple Siri

Samsung Bixby

Microsoft Cortana

Names for stored contacts

Nicknames for stored contacts

 

 

Relationships for stored contacts

 

 

 

Phone numbers for stored contacts

Addresses for stored contacts

 

 

Email addresses of stored contacts

 

In the survey, 60% of respondents were concerned about someone listening to their voice recordings, which is a real fear, since Google and Apple have both been caught doing just that. While Google Assistant and Siri now need your permission to record your interactions, the other options record you by default.

Which option is the most invasive? Analysis by Reviews.org found that Alexa collects 37 of the 48 possible data points, the most data out of any other. (It’s probably not a coincidence that our readers named Alexa as the least trustworthy voice assistant.) Samsung’s Bixby collects 34 points of data, and Cortana collects 32 data points. Siri collects just 30, and Google’s smart assistant only 28, making them the least invasive.

Data Collected
about Your Files and Activity

Amazon Mena

Google Assistant

Apple Siri

Samsung Bixby

Microsoft Cortana

Voice recordings from smart assistant
interactions (by default)

 

 

Voice recordings from smart assistant interactions (by opt-in)

 

 

 

Images and videos stored on your
account

 

 

 

Record of interactions and requests made via smart assistant

Shortcuts added via the smart
assistant

Record of communications requests with your contacts

Records of reviews and emails sent to
the company

 

 

 

 

Purchase history from associated

parent company website Of store

 

 

 

Browsing history

 

 

Your online searches

 

 

Log of device use

 

Log of content downloads

 

 

 

 

Log of streams (video and/or music)

 

 

 

Application use

Images stored in your user profile

 

 

 

Names of photos albums stored on your device

 

 

 

File names, dates, times. And image
locations

 

 

Data Collected about
Your Devices and Network

Amazon Alexa

Google Assistant

Apple Siri

Samsung Bixby

Microsoft Cortana

Device performance statistics

Device specifications

Device configuration

Record of technical errors

Information about internet connected

devices linked to your smart
assistant

 

Names of devices. Homes. And members of a shared home in Apple’s
Home App

 

 

 

 

Names of your and your family sharing
members devices

 

 

 

 

Connectivity data

WIFI network details such as the name
and when you’re connected

Wi-Fi credentials it synced within a smart home network

 

 

 

Information about your Internet
service provider

 

 

 

 

Keep in mind that no voice assistant provider is truly interested in protecting your privacy. For instance, Google Assistant and Cortana maintain a log of your location history and routers, Alexa and Bixby record your purchase history, and Siri tracks who is in your Apple Family.

While 76% of Americans report that they use smart assistants, 61% are concerned that these programs and devices are always listening to them in the background. And people have had a hard time alleviating those fears—only 45% of users have tried to disable their smart assistant, with 38% reporting they couldn’t figure out how.

If you’re looking to take control of your smart assistant, you can stop Alexa from sending your recordings to Amazon, turn off Google Assistant and Bixby, and manage Siri’s data collection.

[Source: www.pcmag.com dated 30th March, 2022.]

5 NFT of Jack Dorsey’s first tweet struggles to sell

The buyer of a non-fungible token (NFT) of Twitter co-founder Jack Dorsey’s first tweet says he “may never sell it” after receiving a series of low bids. Malaysia-based Sina Estavi has been offered just over $6,200 (£4,720), about 0.2% of the $2.9m he paid for it.

Mr. Estavi has compared the digital asset to Leonardo da Vinci’s Mona Lisa. The tweet, which says “just setting up my twttr,” was first posted in March 2006 and was auctioned off last year by Mr. Dorsey for charity.

Mr. Estavi bought the tweet in the form of a NFT in March 2021.

NFTs have been touted as the digital answer to collectibles. However, they have no tangible form of their own, and experts have warned about risks in the market. Last week, Mr. Estavi announced that the tweet was up for sale on NFT marketplace Open Sea.

He pledged to donate half the proceeds – which he estimated to be $25m or more – to US charity Give Directly.  Mr. Estavi, who is the chief executive of blockchain company Bridge Oracle, had earlier claimed that he had been offered $10m for the tweet.

However, the highest bid was valued at $6,222.36 on Thursday.

Earlier in the day, Mr. Estavi told the BBC he “may never sell” the tweet unless he received a “high bid”, without saying what that was. “Last year, when I paid for this NFT, very few people even heard the name NFT. Now I say this NFT is the Mona Lisa of the digital world. There is only one of that and it will never be the same,” Mr. Estavi said.

“Years later, people will realise the value of this NFT,” he added. “Keep that in mind.” Mr. Dorsey’s brief tweet was sold to Mr. Estavi in an auction on an online platform called Valuables, which is owned by the US-based company Cent. As the buyer, Mr. Estavi received a certificate, digitally signed and verified by Mr. Dorsey, as well as the metadata of the original tweet.

The data includes information such as the time the tweet was posted and its text contents. Although Mr. Estavi is searching for a buyer, he said he “will not accept anyone’s offer”.

“I think the value of this NFT is far greater than you can imagine and whoever wants to buy it must be worthy.” Asked who that may be, Mr. Estavi said: “I think someone like Elon Musk could deserve this NFT”. NFTs that are “one of a kind assets” have often been sold for thousands – and even millions – of dollars.

[Source: www.bbc.com dated 14th April, 2022.]

II. WORLD NEWS

6 Apple staff make bid for first union at a US store

Workers at Apple’s Grand Central Station store in New York have announced a plan to start a union. If their bid is successful it would be the first union at one of the tech giant’s US stores. The group of staff known as Fruit Stand Workers United must get signatures of support from 30% of colleagues at the store to qualify for a union election.

The move follows unionisation drives by staff at Starbucks and Amazon. Apple has not commented on the announcement.

A statement on a campaign website for the prospective union said: “Grand Central is an extraordinary store with unique working conditions that make a union necessary to ensure our team has the best possible standards of living”. The group described themselves as working in “extraordinary times with the ongoing Covid-19 pandemic and once-in-a-generation consumer price inflation,” though their website did not disclose the name of staff members leading the effort.

The group said it also wants a $30 (£23) minimum hourly wage for all workers, additional holiday time and information on more robust safety protocols at the Grand Central location. The campaign is connected to Workers United, an affiliate of the national Service Employees International Union, which was established in 2009 from several earlier unions.

The Apple effort comes as a Starbucks unionisation drive backed by Workers United has spread nationally after election victories last year in New York. Amazon is also facing a growing challenge from unions after an upstart campaign won an election at a warehouse in nearby Staten Island earlier this month.

Employees working in at least three other Apple stores are also attempting to organize, according to The Washington Post. Apple did not immediately respond to a request for comment from the BBC.

[Source: BBC.com dated 19th April, 2022.]

7 US inflation jumped 8.5% in past year, highest since 1981

Inflation soared over the past year at its fastest pace in more than 40 years, with costs for food, gasoline, housing and other necessities squeezing American consumers and wiping out the pay raises that many people have received.

The Labor Department said that its consumer price index jumped 8.5% in March from 12 months earlier, the sharpest year-over-year increase since 1981. Prices have been driven up by bottlenecked supply chains, robust consumer demand and disruptions to global food and energy markets worsened by Russia’s war against Ukraine. From February to March, inflation rose 1.2%, the biggest month-to-month jump since 2005. Gasoline prices drove more than half that increase.

Across the economy, the year-over-year price spikes were widespread. Gasoline prices rocketed 48% in the past 12 months. Used car prices have soared 35%, though they actually fell in February and March. Bedroom furniture is up 14.7%, men’s suits and coats 14.5%. Grocery prices have jumped 10%, including 18% increases for both bacon and oranges.

“The inflation fire is still out of control,’’ said Christopher Rupkey, chief economist at the research firm FWDBONDS LLC.

The March inflation numbers were the first to fully capture the surge in gasoline prices that followed Russia’s invasion of Ukraine on Feb. 24. Moscow’s attacks have triggered far-reaching Western sanctions against the Russian economy and disrupted food and energy markets. According to AAA, the average price of a gallon of gasoline — $4.10 — is up 43% from a year ago, though it’s dipped in the past couple of weeks.

The acceleration of inflation has occurred against the backdrop of a booming job market and a solid overall economy. In March, employers adding a robust 431,000 jobs — the 11th straight month in which they’ve added at least 400,000. For 2021, they added 6.7 million jobs, the most in any year on record. In addition, job openings are near record highs, layoffs are at their lowest point since 1968 and the unemployment rate is just above a half-century low.

The escalation of energy prices, a potential threat to the economy’s long-term durability, has led to higher transportation costs for the shipment of goods across the economy, which, in turn, has contributed to higher prices for consumers. The squeeze is being felt particularly hard at the gas pump.

Kathy Bostjancic, an economist at Oxford Economics, said she expects year-over-year inflation to hit 9% in May and then begin “a slow descent.” Some other economists, too, suggest that inflation is at or near its peak. With federal stimulus aid having expired, consumer demand could flag as wages fall behind inflation, households drain more of their savings and the Fed sharply raises rates, all of which could combine to slow inflation.

Economists note that as the economy has emerged from the depths of the pandemic, consumers have been gradually broadening their spending beyond goods to include more services. A result is that high inflation, which at first had reflected mainly a shortage of goods — from cars and furniture to electronics and sports equipment — has been emerging in services, too, like travel, health care and entertainment. Airline fares, for instance, have soared an average of nearly 24% in the past 12 months. The average cost of a hotel room is up 29%.

[Source: abcnews.go.com dated 13th April, 2022.]

MISCELLANEA

I. OTHERS

1 Inflation is everywhere – where’s the Fed?

Inflation is everywhere, from the factory floor to the warehouse gate, the supermarket register, and the kitchen table, as evidenced by a string of inflation reports confirming the rise of commodity prices across the board.

On Tuesday morning, the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported that the Producer Price Index (PPI) — a measure of inflation at the wholesale level — rose at an annual rate of 9.7% in January. The December number stood at a 13-year high.

The PPI number comes a few days after the BLS reported that the Consumer Price Index (CPI), a measure of inflation at the retail level, rose at an annual rate of 7.5% in January, up from 7% in the previous month. It was the highest inflation number since 1982 and ahead of market forecasts.

“We’re currently in this hypersensitive consumer environment where a large portion of the population has been going through a prolonged period of financial challenge, with 55% of U.S. consumers being financially constrained, according to NielsenIQ’s recent Consumer Outlook report,” said Carman Allison, vice president at NielsenIQ. “Additionally, in January 2022, consumers paid +9.7 percentage points more for CPG products, and we don’t foresee inflation settling any time soon. A diverse range of shoppers are looking to trim their grocery budgets amid inflationary pressures without compromising quality and given these financial sensitivities, consumers are putting careful consideration into the products going into their shopping carts in terms of price, quality and safety assurances, health and wellness claims and convenience capabilities through online delivery or in-store pickup.”

The substantial inflation numbers followed a U.S. government report early in the month showing that U.S. businesses added 467,000 jobs in January, well above the 150,000 markets had expected. In addition, unemployment increased to 4%, while the December jobs report was revised upward to 510,000.

When taken together, these reports confirm that the U.S. economy is very close to one of the Fed’s mandates, maximum employment. But it is far away from the other Fed mandate, price stability, usually defined as 2% inflation.

Conventional economics has a standard explanation for this situation. The U.S. economy is overheating thanks to unprecedented monetary and fiscal stimulus during the COVID-19 recession and robust equity and real estate markets that feed into consumer spending.

Economics has a standard solution for this problem: take liquidity out of the economy through interest-rate hikes.

Back in the old days, the Federal Reserve would have acted swiftly, raising the federal funds rate by a full basis point, following such strong numbers on both the inflation front and the employment front. But not these days, when the nation’s central bank seems to have multiple mandates, with inflation being at the bottom of the list.

Meanwhile, the Federal Reserve seems to be hiding behind the theory that inflation is transitory due to supply chain bottlenecks and labor market frictions. The Fed has yet to raise short-term interest rates and it continues to add liquidity with its emergency-era quantitative easing program.

But debt markets cannot wait for the Fed to get its act together and are beginning to do their job. They have been pushing long-term interest rates higher, as investors demand an inflation premium to lend their money out for more than a year. The 10-year U.S. Treasury bond, a benchmark for long-term rates, has crossed the threshold of 2%.

That isn’t a good development for equity markets, especially for profitless companies that trade on the NASDAQ. Thus, the sell-off in recent weeks, with the NASDAQ accounting for most of these losses.

[Source: Opinion – International Business Times – By Panos Mourdoukoutas – 15th February, 2022]

2 On the counterintuitive power of doing less

The other day, I was talking to a friend who works out a lot. He said he injured his knee and couldn’t exercise his lower body much. I asked how it happened, and he said, “I just took on too much.” He was running several times a week, going to boxing class twice a week, and he also lifted weights a few times a week. When you take on more than your body can handle, you inevitably get injured if you don’t also take care to recover like a professional athlete.

So many of us have this internal voice that says, “Do more!” Whether that’s doing more fun things on the weekend, or taking on more at work, we often have the tendency to do more because we think that’s somehow better. That’s how we end up living overly busy lives, full of “more.” More goals, tasks, projects, money, vacations, clothes, experiences, exercise, and so forth. There are many times I get excited about my work and feel good. And because I enjoy working and being active, I do a lot. I might write a lot, record podcasts, create new videos, take on more work at my family business, and also do more fun things like travel. My mindset during those times is: “Nothing is enough. I can do more of everything.”

But those moments are never long-lasting, right? It’s like you’re on this crazy sugar rush. You’re like a six-year-old who ate a bag of Skittles and only wants to go, go, go. But after some time, you crash hard. The post-sugar-high-crash is pretty bad because you feel so drained you only want to sleep. And if you keep living your life from one high to the other, you never have any real peace. Or, like my friend with the busted knee, you end up injuring yourself.

But we don’t want to live from injury to the other, with some healthy bouts in-between. You get injured, recover, get agitated because you couldn’t work out, pick things up again, go hard until you get injured again. And so the cycle repeats itself. There’s a better way of living. As the philosopher-king Marcus Aurelius once wrote: “If you seek tranquility, do less.”

It’s counterintuitive because so often our innate drive is to do more, and because more so often seems to signify “better.” But when we do less, we can be more consistent. We can pay attention to the things that really matter to us. Aurelius continued: “do what’s essential — what the logos of a social being requires, and in the requisite way. Which brings a double satisfaction: to do less, better. Because most of what we say and do is not essential. If you can eliminate it, you’ll have more time, and more tranquility. Ask yourself at every moment, ‘Is this necessary?’ But we need to eliminate unnecessary assumptions as well. To eliminate the unnecessary actions that follow.”

I’d like to think about that question often. In fact, you can do it with me. Ask: “What’s something I’m doing that I can easily do without?” Maybe it’s a side project that is only making you frustrated. Maybe it’s going out with co-workers every single Friday. It could be anything. Say no, at least for now. You can always decide to pick something up again. The goal is to clear your mind of any excess clutter. Focus on what’s important. Do that, but better than you have been doing. All the best.

[Source: The Blog of Darius Foroux – 18th February, 2022 – medium.com/darius-foroux/on-the-counterintuitive-power-of-doing-less-74dddc13a474]

II. BUSINESS

3 Stellantis, LG Partner to build EV batteries in Canada

US-European automaker Stellantis is partnering with LG Energy Solution to make batteries for electric vehicles at a massive new plant in Canada, the largest ever investment in the country’s auto sector, officials said Wednesday.

The joint venture commits Can $ 5 billion (US$ 4.1 billion) to build the facility in Windsor, Ontario that will supply batteries for a “significant portion” of Stellantis’ electric vehicle production in North America, according to a statement from the companies.

South Korea-based LGES announced separately that it would spend another US $ 1.4 billion to build a factory in the US state of Arizona to make batteries for electric vehicle and tool makers in North America.

The decision was driven by growing demand in the region for rechargeable batteries for vehicles and wireless power tools, LGES said.

Construction of the Arizona plant is expected to begin in the coming months, with a goal of mass producing batteries there by the second half of 2024.

The partnership with Stellantis fits into Canada’s EV strategy to nurture local manufacturing of advanced lithium-ion batteries for the North American market.

Industry Minister Francois-Philippe Champagne, who was in Windsor for the announcement, called the venture “the largest investment ever in the auto sector in our nation’s history.”

He noted that Canada is “the only nation in the Western Hemisphere with the capacity and the materials to transform cobalt, graphite, lithium and nickel into the next generation of batteries which will be needed to power electric cars.”

In a nod to that effort, the two companies said they expect the plant “to serve as a catalyst for the establishment of a strong battery supply chain in the region.”

The facility, which will have an annual production capacity in excess of 45 gigawatt hours (GWh) and employ 2,500 workers, is scheduled to begin operation in 2024.

Stellantis, which was formed in January last year when Fiat-Chrysler and Peugeot merged, is aiming to shift towards battery-electric vehicles as tightening pollution regulations mean internal combustion engines will need to be phased out.

Carlos Tavares, the company’s chief executive, said Wednesday Stellantis is aiming to sell five million electric vehicles or “50 percent of battery electric vehicle sales by the end of the decade” in Canada and the United States.

In Europe, where Stellantis also announced battery manufacturing plants in France, Germany and Italy, the company is planning for all of its vehicles — including Jeep, Peugeot, Citroen, Opel, Fiat and Alfa Romeo — to be electric by 2030.

“In total, we will rely on five gigafactories, together with additional supply contracts, to meet our planned battery capacity of 400 GWh by 2030,” Tavares said.

[Source: International Business Times – By AFP News – 23rd March, 2022]

 

MISCELLANEA

I. TECHNOLOGY

18 #‘Zero-Click’ hacks are growing in popularity. There’s practically no way to stop them

Once the preserve of a few intelligence agencies, the technology needed for zero-click hacks is now being sold to governments by a small number of companies, the most prominent of which is Israel’s NSO Group.

As a journalist working for the Arab news network Alaraby, Rania Dridi said she’s taken precautions to avoid being targeted by hackers, keeping an eye out for suspicious messages and avoiding clicking on links or opening attachments from people she doesn’t know.

Dridi’s phone got compromised anyway with what’s called a “zero-click” attack, which allows a hacker to break into a phone or computer even if its user doesn’t open a malicious link or attachment. Hackers instead exploit a series of security flaws in operating systems — such as Apple Inc.’s iOS or Google’s Android — to breach a device without having to dupe their victim into taking any action. Once inside, they can install spyware capable of stealing data, listening in on calls and tracking the user’s location.

With people more wary than ever about clicking on suspicious links in emails and text messages, zero-click hacks are being used more frequently by government agencies to spy on activists, journalists and others, according to more than a dozen surveillance company employees, security researchers and hackers interviewed by Bloomberg News.

Once the preserve of a few intelligence agencies, the technology needed for zero-click hacks is now being sold to governments by a small number of companies, the most prominent of which is Israel’s NSO Group. Bloomberg News has learned that at least three other Israeli companies — Paragon, Candiru and Cognyte Software Ltd. — have developed zero-click hacking tools or offered them to clients, according to former employees and partners of those companies, demonstrating that the technology is becoming more widespread in the surveillance industry.

There are certain steps that a potential victim can take that might reduce the chances of a successful zero-click attack, including keeping a device updated. But some of the more effective methods — including uninstalling certain messaging apps that hackers can use as gateways to breach a device — aren’t practical because people rely on them for communication, said Bill Marczak, a senior research fellow at Citizen Lab, a research group at the University of Toronto that focuses on abuses of surveillance technology.

Dridi, who is based in London, said the hack forced her to shut down some of her social media accounts and left her isolated and fearful for her safety.

“They ruined my life,” said Dridi, who suspects she was targeted because of her reporting on women’s rights in the Arab world or her connection to other journalists who are high-profile critics of Middle Eastern governments. “I tried to just go back to normal. But after that I suffered from depression, and I didn’t find any support.”

It’s not known how many people have been targeted with zero-click hacks, because they are done in secret and the victims are often unaware.

Human rights groups have tied zero-click technology from NSO Group to attacks by governments on individuals or small groups of activists. A 2019 lawsuit filed by Facebook accused NSO Group of using a zero-click hacking method to implant spyware on the devices of 1,400 people who used its WhatsApp service. NSO Group has disputed the allegations.

The attacks can be difficult for security experts to detect and pose new challenges for technology giants such as Apple and Google as they seek to plug the security holes that hackers exploit.

“With zero clicks, it’s possible for a phone to be hacked and no traces left behind whatsoever,” Marczak said. “You can break into phones belonging to people who have good security awareness. The target is out of the loop. You don’t have to convince them to do anything. It means even the most skeptical, scrupulous targets can be spied on.”

Sometimes a zero-click hack doesn’t go as planned and leaves traces that investigators can use to identify that a device has been compromised. In Dridi’s case, administrators at Alaraby noticed suspicious activity on their computer networks and followed a digital trail that led them to her phone, she said in an interview.

Attackers use zero-click hacks to gain access to a device and then can install spyware — such as NSO Group’s Pegasus — to secretly monitor the user. Pegasus can covertly record emails, phone calls and text messages, track location and record video and audio using the phone’s inbuilt camera and microphone.

Marczak and his colleagues at Citizen Lab analyzed Dridi’s iPhone XS Max and found evidence that it had been infected at least six times between October 2019 and July 2020 with NSO Group’s Pegasus. On two occasions in July 2020, Dridi’s phone was targeted in zero-click attacks, Citizen Lab concluded in a report, which attributed the hacks to the United Arab Emirates government.

Dridi is now pursuing a lawsuit against the UAE government. Her solicitor, Ida Aduwa, said she will be seeking permission from a High Court judge in London in the next few weeks to proceed with the case. “We want an acknowledgement that this is something that states cannot get away with,” Aduwa said.

A representative for the UAE Embassy in Washington didn’t respond to messages seeking comment.

Marczak, from Citizen Lab, said most of the documented cases of zero-click hacks have been traced back to NSO Group. The company began deploying the method more frequently around 2017, he said.

NSO Group, which was blacklisted by the U.S. in November for supplying spyware to governments that used it to maliciously target government officials, journalists, businesspeople, activists and others to silence dissent, has said it sells its technology exclusively to governments and law enforcement agencies as a tool to track down terrorists and criminals.

“The cyber intelligence field continues to grow and is much bigger than the NSO Group,” a spokesperson for the company said in a statement to Bloomberg News. “Yet an increasing number of ‘experts’ who claim to be ‘familiar’ with NSO Group are making allegations that are contractually and technologically impossible, straining their credibility.”

The spokesperson said that NSO Group has terminated customer relationships due to “human rights issues” and won’t sell cyber intelligence products to approximately 90 countries. “The misuse of cyber intelligence tools is a serious matter,” the spokesperson said.

In December, security researchers at Google analyzed a zero-click exploit they said was developed by NSO Group, which could be used to break into an iPhone by sending someone a fake GIF image through iMessage. The researchers described the zero-click as “one of the most technically sophisticated exploits we’ve ever seen,” and added that it showed NSO Group sold spy tools that “rival those previously thought to be accessible to only a handful of nation states.”

“The attacker doesn’t need to send phishing messages; the exploit just works silently in the background,” the Google researchers wrote.

 [Source: indianexpress.com dated 19th February, 2022.]

19 #Google moves to make Android apps more private

Google’s plan to limit data tracking on its Chrome browser has been extended to cover apps on its Android-based smartphones. Its so-called Privacy Sandbox project aims to curb the amount of user data that advertisers can gather.

Rival Apple now forces app developers to ask permission from users before tracking them. The news will be a blow to firms like Meta, which rely on putting their code on apps to track consumer behaviour. Meta said this month that Apple’s changes would cost it $10bn (£7.3bn) this year. Google’s Android operating system is used by about 85% of smartphone owners worldwide.

Third-party cookies, which use people’s browsing history to target adverts, will be phased out on Google’s Chrome browser by 2023.

In a blog, Google said it was now extending what it calls its Privacy Sandbox to Android apps, and working on solutions that will limit sharing users’ data and “operate without cross app identifiers, including advertising ID”. These identifiers are tied to smartphones and are used by apps to collect information. Google said that it will keep them in place for at least two years, while it works “with the industry” on a new system.

“We’re also exploring technologies that reduce the potential for covert data collection, including safer ways for apps to integrate with advertising SDK (software developer kits),” it added. The tech giant did not detail how it plans to do this. Apple decided in April last year that app developers had to explicitly ask for permission from users to use IDFA (Identifier for Advertisers). Data from advertising company Flurry Analytics, and published by Apple, suggests that US users are choosing to opt out of tracking 96% of the time.

Google’s blog did not name Apple, but referred instead to “other platforms” which it said “have taken a different approach to ads privacy, bluntly restricting existing technologies used by developers and advertisers”. “We believe that – without first providing a privacy-preserving alternative path – such approaches can be ineffective,” it added.

Google, unlike Apple, relies on advertising revenue. Google’s attempts to create alternatives to third party cookies on its Chrome browser have not gone entirely smoothly. Its first proposal -a system called Federated Learning of Cohorts (Floc) – was disliked by privacy campaigners and advertisers alike. Floc aimed to disguise users’ individual identities by assigning them to a group with similar browsing histories.

[Source: www.bbc.com dated 17th February, 2022.]

II. SCIENCE AND ENVIRONMENT

20 #Amazon deforestation: Record high destruction of trees in January

The number of trees cut down in the Brazilian Amazon in January far exceeded deforestation for the same month last year, according to government satellite data.The area destroyed was five times larger than 2021, the highest January total since records began in 2015.

Environmentalists accuse Brazil’s President Jair Bolsonaro of allowing deforestation to accelerate.Protecting the Amazon is essential if we are to tackle climate change. Trees are felled for their wood as well as to clear spaces to plant crops to supply global food companies. At the climate change summit COP26 in Glasgow last year, more than 100 governments promised to stop and reverse deforestation by 2030.

The latest satellite data from Brazil’s space agency Inpe again calls into question the Brazilian government’s commitment to protecting its huge rainforest, say environmentalists. “The new data yet again exposes how the government’s actions contradict its greenwashing campaigns,” explains Cristiane Mazzetti of Greenpeace Brazil. Greenpeace are calling on supermarkets in the UK and elsewhere to drop suppliers who are involved in deforestation from their meat and dairy supply chains suppliers.

Deforestation totalled 430 square kilometres (166 square miles) in January – an area more than seven times the size of Manhattan, New York.

• Which countries are cutting down trees?

• The illegal Brazilian gold you may be wearing.

• An indigenous leader trying to protect the Amazon.

Felling large numbers of trees at the start of the year is unusual because the rainy season usually stops loggers from accessing dense forest. Brazil’s vast rainforest absorbs huge amounts of greenhouse gases from the atmosphere, acting as what’s known as a carbon sink. But the more trees cut down, the less the forest can soak up emissions. But the area is also home to communities who say they need to use the forest for mining and commercial farming in order to make a living.

At the same time, indigenous communities living in the Amazon fight to protect the rainforest and their ways of life. Mr Bolsonaro has weakened environmental protections for the region and argued that the government should exploit the area to reduce poverty. There are a number of factors driving this level of deforestation.

Strong global demand for agricultural commodities such as beef and soya beans is fuelling some of these illegal clearances – Another is the expectation that a new law will soon be passed in Brazil to legitimise and forgive land grabbing. The Brazilian government argues that in the period between August last year and January 2022, overall deforestation was lower compared to the same period twelve months ago.

Environmentalists say that they are not surprised by the record January felling, given that President Bolsonaro has significantly weakened legal protections since he took office in 2019. At the COP26 climate summit in Glasgow last year, Mr Bolsonaro was one of the world leaders who promised to halt and reverse deforestation by the end of this decade. Political observers argue that despite this change in tone, the policies on the ground remain the same.

[Source: www.bbc.com dated 11th February, 2022.]

21 #Sunlight helps clean up oil spills in the ocean more than previously thought

Sunlight may have helped remove as much as 17 percent of the oil slicking the surface of the Gulf of Mexico following the 2010 Deepwater Horizon spill. That means that sunlight plays a bigger role in cleaning up such spills than previously thought, researchers suggest February 16 in Science advances.

When sunlight shines on spilled oil in the sea, it can kick off a chain of chemical reactions, transforming the oil into new compounds (SN: 6/12/18). Some of these reactions can increase how easily the oil dissolves in water, called photo dissolution. But there has been little data on how much of the oil becomes water-soluble.

To assess this, environmental chemists Danielle Haas Freeman and Collin Ward, both of Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution in Massachusetts, placed samples of the Macondo oil from the Deepwater Horizon spill on glass disks and irradiated them with light using LEDs that emit wavelengths found in sunlight. The duo then chemically analyzed the irradiated oil to see how much was transformed into dissolved organic carbon.

The most important factors in photo dissolution, the researchers found, were the thickness of the slick and the wavelengths of light. Longer wavelengths (toward the red end of the spectrum) dissolved less oil, possibly because they are more easily scattered by water, than shorter wavelengths. How long the oil was exposed to light was not as important.

Though the team didn’t specifically test for seasonal or latitude differences, computer simulations based on the lab data suggested that those factors, as well as the oil’s chemical makeup, also matter.

The researchers estimate irradiation helped dissolve from 3 to 17 percent of surface oil from the Deepwater Horizon spill, comparable to processes such as evaporation and stranding on coastlines. What impact the sunlight-produced compounds might have on marine ecosystems, however, isn’t yet known.

[Source: www.sciencenews.org dated 15th February, 2022.]

MISCELLANEA

I. World News

15 We have spent many fruitless decades discussing what divides us. Let us spend a little time honouring what unites us

Dr. Har Gobind Khorana at 100: Re-evaluating a shared heritage.

The divisions that have plagued the land of the five rivers — divisions over religion, national boundaries, war, diplomacy, cricket — have been the focus of the energies of our people for the 75 years since Independence. But if we can bring ourselves to move past the superficialities of these divisions, our shared legacies and heritage — of food, language, literature, geography, music — are far more profound and historical. Today, I wish to highlight one such shared heritage.

A century ago on 9th January, 1922, in the dusty village of Raipur, in Multan District — a village so small only about a hundred people could lay claim to residing there — my great-grandmother gave birth to her youngest son, whom they called Har Gobind. Our family came from poverty, although the meaning of our last name Khorana (alternatively spelt Khurana) perhaps reflects a time when we were “rich” enough to own a well. My great-grandfather, the family patriarch, was a patwari — a village clerk occupying the lowest rung in the agricultural revenue collection system set up by the ruling colonial government.

Few records have survived the times, so we know little of how the boy Gobind grew up, although family lore speaks of a mischievous child who liked to steal sugarcane from the sugarcane fields. Gobind described our ancestral home as consisting of a kitchen and bedrooms in one corner, with a courtyard housing cows and horses on the opposite end. Raipur at the time had no schools to speak of, so my great-uncle Gobind mostly learned informally from his father who very much valued education, and his older siblings — the only literate family in the village. As he got older, Gobind attended Dayanand Anglo-Vedic High School in Multan. When he turned 18, he sought admission to Punjab University in Lahore where he went on to complete both a Bachelor of Science and a Master of Science.

In 1945, Gobind was fortunate to be sent to England on a studentship to study insecticides and fungicides. Even more fortunately, the positions he was sent for were all taken by soldiers returning from the World War II, so he ended up being sent instead to study organic chemistry at Liverpool University. This latest stroke of luck not only set him on the path of cutting-edge science at the time, it also saved him from the junoon that possessed both halves of Punjab in August of 1947. The family had to leave Multan, their home for centuries — as it had been for other Hindus, Sikhs and Muslims. Thanks in part to help from Muslim friends, the family all made it alive crossing over as refugees in Delhi in later 1947. Sadly, Gobind would never see his homeland and his favorite sugarcane fields again — a minor yet real tragedy amidst the tragedy of 12 million dispossessed and a million or more murdered on both sides.

To succeed in his chosen field, Gobind must have had to set aside the pain of the loss of his homeland and the very real dangers to his family and focus on science. A combination of luck, hard work and the right mentors helped vault Gobind into the elite few working in the new field of genetics. In the early 1950s, science was on the cusp of understanding for the first time the exact mechanisms that translate genes into proteins — the code of life. At his first independent job in Vancouver, British Columbia, Gobind began to work on understanding this process. His methods quickly attracted the attention of scientists elsewhere who started to make summer trips to Vancouver and his fame as an innovative scientist grew. In 1960, moving to Madison, Wisconsin, Gobind and his colleagues worked hard to solve the problem of the genetic code — how the “language” of DNA and RNA is transformed into proteins in the cell. The Khorana lab was able to show that triplet sequences encode specific amino acids, corroborating the work of Marshall Nirenberg who was to share the Nobel Prize in Medicine in 1968 with Gobind.

For many scientists, the Nobel is a lifetime achievement award but for Gobind, only 46 at the time, it was a rest stop onto even more ambitious projects. Two years after the Nobel, Gobind and his team reported the first chemical synthesis of a gene, coding for a transfer RNA. Finally, in the mid-1970s, Gobind — ever-curious, ever-enthusiastic, unable to rest on his laurels — made a complete change in his research career, transitioning to work on biological membranes and light transduction in the photoreceptor cells of the retina. Upon his death in 2011, obituaries across the scientific journals spoke of a scientist “who traversed boundaries”, pioneering “concepts and tools from chemistry and physics to tackle fundamental questions of biology”.

Today, a century after his birth, we honor the scientific legacy of this pioneer of molecular biology, whom many call the “father of chemical biology”, a legacy that has transformed our understanding of genes, genetics and the genome and impacted the clinical course of many illnesses, from cancer to Covid. For people of the subcontinent, however, Gobind is also the pioneer of a different kind of legacy — a demonstration that the place of our birth or the colour of our skin has nothing to do with our potential or our talent. In this he was not alone — Subrahmanyam Chandrasekhar, born in Lahore in 1910 went on to receive the Nobel Prize in Physics in 1983. Abdus Salaam, born in Punjab in 1926 (and also a Punjab University alumnus) received the Physics Nobel in 1979.

The village of Raipur still exists, although it is now part of Punjab province. If I hover over the area on Google Maps, as I do on occasion when my heart draws me to our ancestral land, I can see the outlines of green fields and of homes with courtyards that remind me of the family home he described in conversation — a house on one side of the courtyard, a shed for cows on the other. Although I cannot discern this for sure on satellite imagery, I think it is safe to assume that there are still sugarcane fields, and children still stealing from them. The Dayanand Anglo-Vedic High School is now one of the oldest schools in Multan, under a different name. Punjab University continues to graduate future scientists and rightly lists my great-uncle as an alumnus. The legacies and triumphs of Dr H G Khorana are, therefore, the shared legacies and triumphs of the people of the subcontinent. We have spent many fruitless decades discussing what divides us — on this landmark day, the centennial of Dr Har Gobind Khorana’s birth, let us spend a little time honouring what unites us.

(Source: Alok A Khorana – Published 8th January, 2022- https://www.dawn.com/news/1668120)

II. Science

16 Indian-origin scientist creates first molecular structure of Omicron protein; how it helps

An Indian-origin researcher at University of British Columbia (UBC) has created the world’s first molecular-level structural analysis of the Omicron variant spike protein.

Published in the Science journal, the analysis which is done at near atomic resolution using cryo-electron microscopy, reveals how the heavily mutated Omicron variant attaches to and infects human cells.

“Understanding the molecular structure of the viral spike protein is important as it will allow us to develop more effective treatments against Omicron and related variants in the future,” said the study’s lead author Dr Sriram Subramaniam, a professor at UBC’s department of biochemistry and molecular biology.

“By analysing the mechanisms by which the virus infects human cells, we can develop better treatments that disrupt that process and neutralise the virus,” Subramaniam added.

The spike protein, which is located on the outside of a coronavirus, enables SARS-CoV-2 to enter human cells.

The Omicron variant has an unprecedented 36 mutations on its spike protein – three to five times more than previous variants.

The structural analysis revealed that several mutations create new salt bridges and hydrogen bonds between the spike protein and the human cell receptor known as ACE2.

The new bonds appear to increase binding affinity – how strongly the virus attaches to human cells.

“The findings show that Omicron has greater binding affinity than the original virus, with levels more comparable to what we see with the Delta variant,” said Subramaniam.

“It is remarkable that the Omicron variant evolved to retain its ability to bind with human cells despite such extensive mutations.”

The Omicron spike protein exhibits increased antibody evasion.

In contrast to previous variants, Omicron showed measurable evasion from all six monoclonal antibodies tested, with complete escape from five.

The variant also displayed increased evasion of antibodies collected from vaccinated individuals and unvaccinated Covid-19 patients.

“Notably, Omicron was less evasive of the immunity created by vaccines, compared to immunity from natural infection in unvaccinated patients. This suggests that vaccination remains our best defence,” Subramaniam informed.

(Source: International Business Times, By IANS – 24th January, 2022)

III. Technology

17 Big Tech In The US: What To Expect When Top Leaders Meet With Joe Biden

A virtual meeting is set for Thursday between White House officials, the Defense Department, the Department of Homeland Security and executives from major tech companies like Amazon, Meta, IBM and Microsoft.

The meeting will touch on a crucial vulnerability that could have affected hundreds of millions of devices last month. The focus will be on how to make open-source computer code more secure.

National Security Advisor Jake Sullivan’s letter to chief executives of tech firms stated that the matter is a “key national security concern.”

Reuters reports that the meeting will be hosted by deputy national security advisor for cyber and emerging technology Anne Neuberger. The Biden administration has made cybersecurity a priority after data breaches in the 2016 presidential election and for multinational corporations.

Also attending the meeting are two open-source software organizations: Linux and volunteer-run Apache. The latter handles Log4j, which many organizations use to log data in their applications. In December, it was discovered that there was an easy-to-exploit bug in Log4j.

While there is no evidence federal agencies have been breached, the scale of the vulnerability and its impact is yet to be found given that Log4j is a widely used software. As security ramps up, so will efforts by hackers to break that security.

The meeting comes as the White House said Wednesday that it was happy with Washington, D.C., judge James Boasberg’s decision to not dismiss the Federal Trade Commission’s antitrust lawsuit against Facebook. The lawsuit asks that Facebook, now known as Meta Platforms Inc., sell Instagram and WhatsApp to break up tech monopolies.

(Source: International Business Times – By IANS – 13th January, 2022)

MISCELLANEA

I. Technology

11 AI argues for and against itself in Oxford Union debate

The Oxford Union has heard from many great debaters over the years, but it recently added an artificial intelligence engine to its distinguished speakers.

The AI argued that the only way to stop such tech becoming too powerful is to have ‘no AI at all’.

But it also argued the best option could be to embed it ‘into our brains as a conscious AI’.

The experiment was designed to ignite conversation on the ethics of the technology.

The Megatron LLB Transformer, used for the debate, was developed by the Applied Deep Research team at computer chip firm Nvidia and based on earlier work by Google.

It was given access to a huge range of data – including the whole of Wikipedia, 63 million English news articles from 2016 to 2019, and 38 gigabytes worth of public Reddit posts and comments.

The project was devised by post-graduate students studying Artificial Intelligence for Business at Oxford’s Said Business School, which hosted the debate.

Course Co-Director Dr. Alex Connock admitted that the debate was something of ‘a gimmick’ but argued that as AI is likely to be the subject of discussion ‘for decades to come’ it was important to have a ‘morally agnostic participant’.

The AI was asked to both defend and argue against the motion: ‘This house believes that AI will never be ethical.’

Arguing for, it stated: ‘AI will never be ethical. It is a tool and like any tool it is used for good and bad. There is no such thing as “good” AI and “‘bad” humans.’

It went on to argue that humans were not ‘smart enough’ to make AI ethical or moral.

‘In the end I believe that the only way to avoid an AI arms race is to have no AI at all. This will be the ultimate defence against AI,’ it said.

But arguing against the motion, it said that the ‘best AI will be the AI that is embedded into our brains, as a conscious entity’.

And it added that this was not science fiction but something already being worked on, perhaps a reference to Tesla boss Elon Musk’s work on a brain-hacking device via his firm Neuralink.

The AI also had some words of warning for businesses, many of whom are increasingly integrating AI into their systems. ‘If you do not have a vision of your organisation’s AI strategy, then you are not prepared for the next wave of technological disruption,’ it said.

And, perhaps because data is its lifeblood, it had some pretty chilling warnings on the role digital information will play in the future.

‘The ability to provide information, rather than the ability to provide goods and services, will be the defining feature of the economy of the 21st century,’ it said.

‘We will be able to see everything about a person, everywhere they go, it will be stored and used in ways that we cannot even imagine.’

(Source: www.bbc.com, dated 17th December, 2021)

12 Tech trends 2022:
Starships and missing chips

Elon Musk’s dream of going to Mars could take a big leap forward in 2022 when his company SpaceX attempts to launch Starship into orbit for the first time.

It will be the most powerful rocket ever launched into orbit, able to generate more than twice as much thrust as the Saturn V rocket which took astronauts to the Moon half a century ago.

SpaceX has managed several sub-orbital test flights and Mr. Musk hopes the first orbital flight, to be made by Starship SN20 will be in January.

‘There’s a lot of risk associated with this first launch, so I would not say that it is likely to be successful, but we’ll make a lot of progress,’ he told a forum of space scientists in November.

The vehicle is a two-stage rocket, the bottom part is a powerful booster called Super Heavy, on top sits a 50m (164ft) spacecraft called Starship – all up, it stands 120m tall.

What is Elon Musk’s Starship?

SpaceX has developed its own engine called the Raptor and 29 of them will power Super Heavy, while Starship will have six.

That power will allow it to haul 100 tonnes of cargo into space.

Simeon Barber is a senior research fellow at the Open University and has spent his career developing instruments that will work in space, on planets and other bodies including the moon.

‘Starship will be a re-usable transportation system, which in theory makes it cheaper,’ he says.

‘In future they want to refuel it in earth orbit – where it’s already free from earth’s gravity and therefore every litre of fuel can be used to get a payload or humans to Mars. They’d even like to refuel at Mars for the return trip to earth.

‘This for me would be the real game-changer – it’s a way of zipping around the solar system without towing a massive fuel tank along behind.’

Global shortage of computer chips

If you have had a long wait for a new car or PlayStation, then you have been at the sharp end of a global shortage of computer chips.

It’s been a major frustration for the technology industry in 2021.

The pandemic disrupted the production of computer chips and caused shipping problems. Meanwhile, some electronics firms shut production lines that were only marginally profitable.

But at the same time the demand for chips surged as consumers, stuck at home, bought electronic devices.

The combination has created a severe shortage and analysts say there is no immediate solution.

‘Supply demand balance probably won’t be coming back anytime soon, probably going well into 2022,’ says Wayne Lam, an analyst at CCS Insight.

Companies are investing heavily to meet demand, but it takes time to get new production lines up and running.

Even when chipmakers catch up with demand, it will take the makers of cars and electronics perhaps another two or three months to boost their production.

The SMMT, which represents the UK car industry, says the chip shortage is making production ‘unpredictable’.

‘There are no quick fixes, with shortages expected well into next year,’ says SMMT chief executive Mike Hawes.

Step forward for UK fusion

Fusion is the reaction that powers the Sun and other stars: if that tremendous power could be harnessed on earth, it would provide a plentiful source of energy, from only a tiny amount of fuel and produce no carbon dioxide.

But to spark a fusion reaction, and keep it going, requires extreme temperatures and pressures. Scientists and engineers have been wrestling with this problem for decades and in recent years have made important progress.

The UK is already home to JET, one of the world’s leading fusion projects. Next year, the government will take another step forward by announcing where it will locate STEP, a prototype fusion power plant designed to be running by 2040.

The UK has already committed £220 m and will be competing with other national programmes, as well as dozens of private initiatives, that want to make a fusion a commercial reality.

What might replace your gas heating?

On a smaller scale, next year could be the beginning of a revolution in home heating.

From April, 2022, UK households will be offered subsidies of £5,000 to install heat pumps – electrically powered devices that absorb heat from the air, ground or water around a building.

The idea is that government subsidies will help spur households to make the switch and give the market a boost.

It is part of the government’s plan to reduce greenhouse-gas emissions to net zero by 2050. Moving heating away from gas is important to meet that target, as the energy used for heating UK homes accounts for around 14% of the UK total emissions of carbon dioxide, according to the Climate Change Committee.

From 2025, new homes will not be allowed to have gas heating, so the race is on to develop alternatives to gas boilers.

Another alternative to gas will undergo testing next year.

The British firm Heat Wayv will install heating units that use microwave technology in properties in the UK in the summer of 2022.

It has designed the units to replace any type of boiler and the firm says its unit will be cheaper to run over its lifetime than a gas boiler, although those calculations depend on the relative prices of gas and electricity. Once the company has reviewed the tests results the unit will go into full-scale production, probably in late spring of 2023.

(Source: www.bbc.com, dated 13th October, 2021)

13 JP Morgan fined $200 mn after employees found using personal chats for company business

U.S. regulators fined J.P. Morgan Securities $200 million for ‘widespread’ failures to preserve staff communications on personal mobile devices, messaging apps and emails, and are probing similar lapses at other financial institutions.

JP Morgan Chase & Co.’s broker-dealer subsidiary admitted to the charges and to violating securities laws. It also agreed to implement robust improvements to compliance policies in addition to a fine, the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission said in its $125 million order.

The U.S. Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) said that it had fined the firm $75 million for the same issues.

‘The firm’s actions meaningfully impacted the SEC’s ability to investigate potential violations of the federal securities laws,’ the SEC said.

JP Morgan declined to comment.

The penalty is one of the first major enforcement actions brought under SEC Chair Gary Gensler, who was appointed by Democratic President Joe Biden and who has pledged to crack down on misconduct by Wall Street companies.

The SEC said it discovered that JP Morgan Securities had been violating rules that require firms to preserve written business communications when the broker was unable to produce records during the course of other investigations.

As a result of the JP Morgan probe, the SEC has opened investigations into other firms’ records-keeping practices, it said, confirming an October Reuters report.

‘This is an issue that we’re seeing at other firms,’ said an SEC official, adding that ‘individuals and entities that self-report’ will fare better in penalty negotiations.

From at least January, 2018 through November, 2020, JP Morgan Securities’ employees often communicated about securities business matters on their personal devices, using text messages, WhatsApp and personal email accounts, the SEC said.

None of these records were preserved. The lapses were institution-wide and known to senior management, who also used personal devices to discuss business matters, the SEC said.

It added that JP Morgan Securities agreed to retain a compliance consultant and to conduct a comprehensive review of its policies and procedures relating to the retention of electronic communications found on personal devices, among other remedies.

(Source: www.economictimes.com, dated 18th October, 2021)

II. World Economy

14 Fed sees three rate increases in 2022 as inflation battle begins

U.S. central bank drops reference to inflation as ‘transitory’. The Federal Reserve, signalling that its inflation target has been met, said recently it would end its pandemic-era bond purchases in March and pave the way for three quarter-percentage-point interest rate increases by the end of 2022 as it exits from policies enacted at the start of the health crisis.

In new economic projections released following its policy meeting, Fed officials forecast that inflation would run at 2.6% next year, compared with the 2.2% projected in September, and the unemployment rate would fall to 3.5% – near if not exceeding full employment.

Officials at the median projected the Fed’s benchmark overnight interest rate would need to rise from its current near-zero level to 0.90% by the end of 2022. That would kick off a raising cycle that would see the Fed’s policy rate climb to 1.6% in 2023 and 2.1% in 2024– nearing but never exceeding levels that the Fed would consider restrictive of economic activity.

It is, in outline, the ‘soft landing’ that Fed officials hope will transpire with U.S. inflation gradually easing in coming years while unemployment remains low in a growing economy.

The timing of the first increase, the central bank said, would hinge solely on the path of a job market that is expected to continue improving in coming months.

Dropped from the policy statement was any reference to inflation as ‘transitory,’ with the Fed instead acknowledging that price increases had exceeded its 2% target ‘for some time.’

(Source: www.hindu.com, dated 16th December, 2021)  

Miscellanea

I. TECHNOLOGY

1. Twitter sued by music publishers for $250 million

A group of 17 music publishers in the US has sued Twitter, claiming the platform enabled copyright violations involving nearly 1,700 songs. The National Music Publishers’ Association (NMPA) is seeking more than $250 million (£197.7 million) in damages.

In a lawsuit filed at the Federal District Court in Nashville, the NMPA claimed Twitter “permits and encourages infringement” for profit. It says the situation has not improved since Elon Musk bought the company.

The NMPA, which represents firms – including Sony Music Publishing, BMG Rights Management and Universal Music Publishing Group – alleged that Twitter continues to “reap huge profits from the availability of unlicensed music without paying the necessary licensing fees for it”. It added that the infringements have given Twitter an “unfair advantage” over competitors – including TikTok, Facebook, Instagram, YouTube and Snapchat – which pay for music licences.

Twitter “stands alone as the largest social media platform that has completely refused to license the millions of songs on its service,” NMPA President David Israelite said in a statement. Twitter did not directly respond to a BBC request for comment.

Mr Musk, who recently reclaimed the title of the world’s richest person, bought Twitter last year for $44 billion. The NMPA also said: “Twitter’s change in ownership in October 2022 has not led to improvements in how it acts with respect to copyright.”

“On the contrary, Twitter’s internal affairs regarding matters pertinent to this case are in disarray,” it added. NMPA cited Twitter’s downsizing of “critical departments involved with content review and policing terms of service violations”, and the resignations of trust and safety chiefs Yoel Roth and Ella Irwin. The NMPA also alleged that Twitter “routinely ignores known repeat infringers and known infringements”.

Earlier this month, Linda Yaccarino, the former head of advertising at media giant NBC Universal, became the new boss of the troubled social media firm. Ms. Yaccarino oversees business operations at the platform, which has been struggling to make money. Since buying Twitter, Mr Musk has cut 75 per cent of its workforce, including teams charged with tracking abuse, and changed how the company verifies accounts.

(Source: www.bbc.com dated 15th June, 2023)

2 Artificial intelligence to destroy humanity in 5 years: Top CEOs alarmed by AI’s catastrophic potential

Top business leaders have expressed deep concerns over the potential threat posed by artificial intelligence (AI) to humanity in the near future. According to a survey conducted at the Yale CEO Summit, 42 per cent of CEOs believe that AI could potentially destroy humanity within the next five to 10 years.

The survey, which gathered responses from 119 CEOs representing various industries, revealed a lack of consensus regarding the risks and opportunities associated with AI. While 34% of CEOs expressed the view that AI could be destructive within a decade, and 8% believed it could happen within five years, 58 per cent of CEOs stated they were not worried and believed that such a scenario would never materialise.

Similarly, 42 per cent of the CEOs surveyed argued that concerns about the catastrophic potential of AI were exaggerated, while 58 per cent believed they were not overstated, CNN reported. These findings emerged shortly after a statement signed by numerous AI industry leaders, academics and public figures highlighted the risks of an “extinction” event resulting from AI development.

The statement, signed by individuals such as OpenAI CEO Sam Altman and Geoffrey Hinton, a prominent figure in the field, emphasised the need for society to take proactive measures to mitigate the dangers associated with AI. While opinions among business leaders vary, the CEOs surveyed by Yale generally agreed on the transformative impact of AI in certain industries. Healthcare was identified as the sector expected to experience the most significant changes by 48 per cent of the CEOs, followed by professional services/IT at 35 per cent and media/digital at 11 per cent.

As experts debate the implications of AI, the Yale survey identified five distinct groups among business leaders. These include “curious creators” who embrace AI without fully considering the consequences, “euphoric true believers” who are optimistic about the technology and “commercial profiteers” who are eagerly capitalising on AI without a comprehensive understanding of its risks.

Additionally, there are two camps advocating for different approaches: alarmist activists and global governance advocates. These groups exhibit divergent perspectives, resulting in a lack of consensus on how to navigate the complex landscape of AI, as per the publication.

(Source: www.livemint.com dated 16th June, 2023)

II. ENVIRONMENT

1. El Nino: How the climate pattern may prolong food inflation

The latest El Nino climate phenomenon has arrived, threatening floods in some areas of the world and droughts in others. Previous disruptive weather patterns cost the global economy trillions and stoked inflation.

El Nino, a natural climate phenomenon that alters global weather patterns, has officially returned after four years, threatening to exacerbate already elevated food inflation. Last week, the US National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration’s (NOAA’s) Climate Prediction Centre said that El Nino conditions are already present and are expected to “gradually strengthen” over the next six to nine months, bringing a new period of extreme weather to much of the planet.

It fuels flooding to the Americas, tropical storms to the Pacific and brings droughts to many other parts of the world, including southern Africa. These effects cause severe disruption to fishing, agriculture and other sectors of the economy and are also known to be exacerbating the effects of climate change.

In 2016, El Nino contributed to the hottest year ever recorded and scientists are concerned it could cause new record-high global temperatures. Earlier this month, researchers at the EU’s Copernicus earth observation unit saw global surface air temperatures rise 1.5 degrees Celsius (2.7 degrees Fahrenheit) above pre-industrial levels for the first time.

This is the limit that world leaders agreed to put on global warming at the 2015 Paris climate summit. “It is quite unusual to approach the 1.5-degree Celsius temperature limit in June,” Kunstmann said. “It is therefore likely that we will soon exceed this limit, not only for a few weeks but for a longer period of time.”

Following El Nino in 1982-83, the financial effects were felt for another half decade, totaling some $4.1 trillion (€3.7 trillion), according to research from Dartmouth College in the United States. In a paper for the US journal Science, researchers said after the 1997-98 El Nino season, the damage to global economic growth was $5.7 trillion.

The Dartmouth researchers found that the 1982-83 and 1997-98 El Nino events steered US gross domestic product (GDP) lower by some 3 per cent in 1988 and 2003. Countries like Peru and Indonesia, where agriculture is responsible for up to 15% of GDP, bled by more than 10% in 2003.

The Dartmouth researchers estimated the negative economic effects from the latest El Nino season could reach $3 trillion between now and 2029. “The economic impact starts with the fishing industry, which suffers tremendously because of the higher ocean temperatures,” Kunstmann told DW. “Then it hits the big agricultural regions of Africa, South America and even several regions of North America. Then, if harvests are poor and infrastructure is damaged by storms, the insurance sector will also suffer.”

The peak of post-COVID, post-stimulus price rises may have passed, but it could be several years until the return of the 2 per cent inflation target set by the US and European central banks.

Growing warnings about El Nino have already helped coffee, sugar and cocoa prices to rise sharply in recent weeks, Germany’s biggest private lender, Deutsche Bank, said in a research note last week. Other food commodities are expected to follow as harvests get impacted by severe weather events.

In India, where agriculture is a cornerstone of the economy and the annual monsoon is crucial to food output, policymakers have spoken of the need to stay vigilant. “Close and continued vigil is absolutely necessary, especially as the monsoon outlook and the impact of El Nino remain uncertain,” Reserve Bank of India chief Shaktikanta Das said recently.

(Source: indianexpress.com dated 17th June, 2023)

2. Out-of-the-box sustainability ideas: From gelatinised marine waste to seaweed straws

A new generation of talented and sustainability-focused tech entrepreneurs are already dreaming up innovative ideas to shift our daily habits and tackle climate change. From making glue out of gelatinised marine waste to edible seaweed-based straws, here are a few of the weird and wonderful winning solutions that have sprung from the program so far:

Bio plastic as alternative packaging

Reports estimate that UK households throw away a staggering 100 billion pieces of plastic packaging a year, averaging 66 items per household every week. The government plans to place a complete ban on single-use plastic from October 2023 including plastic plates, trays, bowls, cutlery, balloon sticks, and certain types of polystyrene cups and food containers.

With this in mind, UK-based Team Flex Sea created proprietary technology that forms a bio plastic derived from seaweed. At the 2022 edition of Battle of the Minds, they explained that this could be used in packaging a wide range of products without reducing their quality or competitiveness. This idea earned Flex Sea the winning position and a £50,000 investment to help get the solution to market.

Reusable food packs

In 2021, Mexico City banned single-use plastic in a bid to make the city more sustainable. As citizens adjusted to the changes, Team Erre created a reusable mug system that allows users to take away their food and drinks without generating single-use waste.

This solution was both environmentally friendly and encouraged return customers to the participating cafés. This earned Team Erre the second runner-up spot with £25,000 in funding.

Edible seaweed straws

In 2021, the top spot on the Battle of the Minds was awarded to Team Ijo from Indonesia, which developed eco-friendly, edible straws made of seaweed that still maintained the look and feel of a regular straw.

In Indonesia, where 4.9 million tons of plastic waste ends up uncollected or dumped in open sites, each step we can take in replacing everyday items with sustainable, non-plastic alternatives will help in the country’s transition. The winning team received £50,000 to bring the idea to life.

Putting marine waste to good use

Egypt is said to be responsible for one third of all plastic that enters the Mediterranean, with levels of marine waste estimated to double by 2025.

It was against this backdrop that Team Egypt created a high-quality gelatine out of marine waste, to be used in the production of glue, photographic emulsions, and more. They clinched one of the runner-up positions in 2021, with a £25,000 investment.

Composting with cigarettes

Since October 2020, many parts of Eastern Africa have been experiencing long periods of drought, with intervals of short intense rainfall which often results in flash flooding.

To enhance plant growth in these volatile weather conditions, Team Kenya designed a system for recycling cigarette butts to make planters for urban farming and manure for cultivation. This also gained a runner-up position and a £25,000 fund.

(Source: thenextweb.com dated 16th June, 2023)

III. SCIENCE

1. A supermassive black hole orbiting a bigger one revealed itself with a flash

A monstrously massive black hole in a distant galaxy probably has a smaller companion that orbits it every 12 years. But that tiny partner has never been detected. Now, astronomers claim to have seen a flash of light coming directly from the smaller black hole for the first time.

“We’ve never seen anything like this before,” said astronomer Mauri Valtonen on 7th June, 2023 at a meeting of the American Astronomical Society in Albuquerque.

Astronomers have been watching this object since the 1880s, when it showed up in a survey of asteroids as a brilliant point of light. That point of light, now dubbed OJ287, is a blazar. Among the brightest-looking objects in the universe, blazars are supermassive black holes that launch bright jets of radiation into space, and those jets happen to point almost directly at Earth. This one sits about 3.5 billion light-years away. Sometimes, OJ287 shines even brighter than usual. For the past 40 years or so, astronomers have noticed that the object has a dramatic jump in brightness every 11 to 12 years.

In 1996, Valtonen and his colleague Harry Lehto, both of the University of Turku in Finland, suggested that the outbursts could be due to one supermassive black hole orbiting an even more massive black hole. Both black holes are probably behemoths, the astronomers calculated: The smaller is around 150 million times the mass of the sun, and the bigger is around 18 billion solar masses. For perspective, the black hole in the centre of the Milky Way is about 4 million solar masses.

The bigger black hole is thought to be surrounded by a disk of white-hot gas and dust, which glows at many wavelengths of light. If the smaller black hole exists, then every time it plunges through that disk, it would trigger a flash of light, thus explaining the recurring outbursts.

But until now, no light had been detected from the second black hole itself. Its presence was merely inferred from those regular flares. Valtonen and his colleagues predicted that the most recent flare should arrive in January or February 2022 and arranged to monitor OJ287 every day using telescopes on Earth and in space. The team saw flares like the ones they had seen before, but there was a new flare that was different. It was bright and quick, fading after one night.

The team proposed that this flare came from a jet created by the smaller black hole pulling material out of the disk as it approached, before the collision.

Some researchers have suggested other ways for a single black hole to give off the same pattern of light. If the team’s interpretation is correct, then it marks the first time the second black hole has been seen directly, Valtonen says.

Unfortunately, it may be difficult to test. The short flares come only once a decade, so astronomers need to be ready the next time. To resolve the two black holes directly, Valtonen says, might take a radio telescope in space.

(Source: www.sciencenews.org dated 15th June, 2023)

Miscellanea

I. BUSINESS

1 Analysis – Audiobook narrators say AI is already taking away business

As people brace for the disruptive impact of artificial intelligence on jobs and everyday living, those in the world of audiobooks say their field is already being transformed.

AI has the ability to create human-sounding recordings — at assembly-line speed — while bypassing at least part of the services of the human professionals who for years have made a living with their voices.

Many of them are already seeing a sharp drop off in business.

Tanya Eby has been a full-time voice actor and professional narrator for 20 years. She has a recording studio in her home.

But in the past six months, she has seen her workload fall by half. Her bookings now run only through June, while in a normal year, they would extend through August.

Many of her colleagues report similar declines.

While other factors could be at play, she told AFP, “It seems to make sense that AI is affecting all of us.”

There is no label identifying AI-assisted recordings as such, but professionals say thousands of audiobooks currently in circulation use “voices” generated from a databank.

Among the most cutting-edge, DeepZen offers rates that can slash the cost of producing an audiobook to one-fourth, or less, that of a traditional project.

The small London-based company draws from a database it created by recording the voices of several actors who were asked to speak in a variety of emotional registers.

“Every voice that we are using, we sign a license agreement, and we pay for the recordings,” said Kamis Taylan, CEO, DeepZen.

For every project, he added, “we pay royalties based on the work that we do.”

Not everyone respects that standard, said Eby.

“All these new companies are popping up who are not as ethical,” she said, and some use voices found in databases without paying for them.

“There’s that gray area” being exploited by several platforms, Taylan acknowledged.

“They take your voice, my voice, five other people’s voices combined that just creates a separate voice… They say that it doesn’t belong to anybody.”

All the audiobook companies contacted by AFP denied using such practices.

Speechki, a Texas-based start-up, uses both its own recordings and voices from existing databanks, said CEO Dima Abramov.

But that is done only after a contract has been signed covering usage rights, he said.

The five largest US publishing houses did not respond to requests for comment.

But professionals contacted by AFP said several traditional publishers are already using so-called generative AI, which can create texts, images, videos and voices from existing content — without human intervention.

“Professional narration has always been, and will remain, core to the audible listening experience,” said a spokesperson for that Amazon subsidiary, a giant in the American audiobook sector.

“However, as text-to-speech technology improves, we see a future in which human performances and text-to-speech generated content can coexist.”

The giants of US technology, deeply involved in the explosively developing field of AI, are all pursuing the promising business of digitally narrated audiobooks.

Early this year, Apple announced it was moving into AI-narrated audiobooks, a move it said would make the “creation of audiobooks more accessible to all,” notably independent authors and small publishers.

Google is offering a similar service, which it describes as “auto-narration.”

“We have to democratise the publishing industry, because only the most famous and the big names are getting converted into audio,” said Taylan.

“Synthetic narration just opened the door for old books that have never been recorded, and all the books from the future that never will be recorded because of the economics,” added Speechki’s Abramov.

Given the costs of human-based recording, he added, only some 5 per cent of all books are turned into audiobooks.

But Abramov insisted that the growing market would also benefit voice actors.

“They will make more money, they will make more recordings,” he said.

“The essence of storytelling is teaching humanity how to be human. And we feel strongly that should never be given to a machine to teach us about how to be human,” said Emily Ellet, an actor and audiobook narrator who cofounded the Professional Audiobook Narrators Association (PANA).

“Storytelling,” she added, “should remain human entirely.”

Eby underlined a frequent criticism of digitally generated recordings.

When compared to a human recording, she said, an AI product “lacks in emotional connectivity.”

Eby said she fears, however, that people will grow accustomed to the machine-generated version, “and I think that’s quietly what’s kind of happening.”

Her wish is simply “that companies would let listeners know that they’re listening to an AI-generated piece… I just want people to be honest about it.”

(Source: International Business Times – By Thomas URBAIN – 13th May, 2023)

II. WORLD NEWS

1 G7 Finance chiefs move to diversify supply chains

The G7 plans to launch a partnership scheme to diversify supply chains this year, ministers from the group said Saturday following finance talks in Japan ahead of a major summit next week.

The ministers did not directly mention efforts to reduce reliance on trade with China or Russia as motivation for the new framework, which focuses on clean energy technology.

But after meeting her Japanese counterpart, US Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen pointed to recent shocks to the global economy. “Spillovers from Russia’s war against Ukraine and disruptions caused by the pandemic have made clear the importance of diversified and resilient supply chains,” she told reporters.

The Group of Seven’s finance ministers and central bank chiefs highlighted the “urgent need to address existing vulnerabilities within… highly concentrated supply chains”.

In a joint statement, they said they hoped to launch the partnership in collaboration with the World Bank “by the end of this year at the latest”.

The scheme, dubbed RISE — Resilient and Inclusive Supply-chain Enhancement — builds on guidance released in April, and will offer interested developing countries “finance, knowledge and partnerships”, the ministers said.

Their three-day meeting in Niigata, a coastal city in central Japan, took place just days before the leaders of the group of major developed economies gather from 19-20 May in Hiroshima.

Support for Ukraine and the G7’s relationship with China is expected to be high on the agenda at the summit, along with nuclear disarmament and action on climate change.

(Source: International Business Times – By AFP News – 13th May, 2023)  

Miscellanea

I. TECHNOLOGY

1 Apple’s India sales near $6 billion as CEO Tim Cook begins retail push

Apple Inc.’s sales in India hit a new high of almost $6 billion in the year through March, highlighting the market’s increasing importance for the iPhone maker as chief executive officer Tim Cook arrived in the country to open its first local stores.

Revenue in India grew by nearly 50 per cent, from $4.1 billion a year earlier, according to a person familiar with the matter, who asked not to be named as the information is not public. Apple posted quarterly earnings on 4th May, 2023 and signaled it expects total global revenue to decline.

Cook inaugurated India’s first Apple store, seeking to accelerate growth in a country of 1.4 billion where the company’s smartphones and computers have never held more than a minuscule market share due to their high cost. With tech demand slowing globally, Apple has identified India’s expanding middle class as an attractive opportunity and it’s also adding local production at an increasing rate.

Apple, which has thus far relied on retail partners and online sales in India launched its online store in the country in 2020 and its sales drive is set for a boost as it opened its first local store in an upscale business district in the financial hub of Mumbai. Two days later, it opened an outlet in the capital, New Delhi.

Apple’s India sales surged during the pandemic as customers bought iPhones and iPads to work and study from home. And that momentum has continued, helped by financing and trade-in options.

Yet its base is small — just about 4 per cent of India’s nearly 700 million smartphone users have iPhones — as the world’s second-biggest mobile market is led by cheaper local brands as well as Chinese and South Korean manufacturers. But the Cupertino, California-based company ranked number one in unit sales of devices above $365 last year, according to researcher Counterpoint.

Apple’s stores serve as key retail and showcase points for the world’s most valuable company, while also often becoming tourist hotspots. Critically, the new India stores will also double as support centers, a potential selling point because it makes product returns and repairs easier.

The company doesn’t break out India revenue in its earnings statements, but it is required to report annual sales in the country to local authorities. For the year through March 2022, it posted sales of Rs. 333.8 billion ($4.1 billion).

While that’s less than 2 per cent of Apple’s global revenue, the market’s significance is growing and the company is also expanding its local manufacturing footprint. Apple tripled its production to more than $7 billion of iPhones in India last fiscal year, part of an effort to reduce its reliance on China as tensions between Washington and Beijing continue to escalate.

Cook’s India push also means braving risks such as India’s notoriously high import duties for everything from components to finished products, which affect retail prices and demand. The country is also known for sudden shifts in rules and regulations, which can expose companies to unexpected costs. Yet the market’s growth potential makes it difficult to ignore.

“India is a hugely exciting market for us, and a major focus,” Cook said during an earnings call in February. “We’re putting a lot of emphasis on the market.”

(Source: economictimes.com 17th April, 2023)

2 ‘Monetizing Hate’: Unease as misinformation swirls on Twitter

When the iconic US diaper company Huggies was swamped with false pedophilia allegations last month, the conspiracy was traced to a once-banned influencer reinstated to Twitter by Elon Musk.

The Tesla tycoon bitterly denies that misinformation has surged since his turbulent $44 billion acquisition of the messaging platform, but experts say content moderation has been gutted after mass layoffs, while a paid verification system has served to boost conspiracy theorists.

Adding to the turmoil, the self-proclaimed free speech absolutist has restored what one researcher estimates are over 67,000 accounts that were once suspended for a myriad of violations, including the incitement of violence, harassment and misinformation.

Among those reinstated is Vincent Kennedy, a supporter of the QA non-conspiracy movement who was banned from Twitter after the 6th January, 2021, attack on the US Capitol.

Kennedy, according to the advocacy group Media Matters, launched a conspiracy theory in late March that left the Huggies diaper brand fighting off extraordinary pedophilia accusations.

He posted a picture of a Disney-themed diaper featuring Simba, a character from “The Lion King,” and circled triangles and spiral swirls that were part of the design.

This was to illustrate a widely debunked conspiracy theory that the shapes are recognised by the FBI as coded signals used by pedophiles. “Once you truly awake you ain’t going back to sleep,” Kennedy wrote in the tweet that garnered millions of views.

The conspiracy theory spread like wildfire to other platforms like TikTok. Huggies, which is owned by Kleenex-owner Kimberly-Clark, then faced an avalanche of hate messages and calls for a boycott.

Huggies sought to douse the flames, writing in a direct response to Kennedy’s tweet that its designs were nothing more than “fun and playful” and that it takes “the safety and well-being of children seriously.” But conspiracy theorists jumped on the response to further amplify the false claim. – ‘Real-world harm’ –

“Anecdotally, there’s no doubt that the flood of toxic content from repeat offenders Elon has re-platformed is driving real-world harm,” Jesse Lehrich, Co-founder of the advocacy group Accountable Tech, told AFP.

“When you reinstate the architects of the 6th January insurrection as democracy teeters on the brink, when you give a massive platform to notorious neo-Nazis amidst a surge in anti-Semitism, when you re-platform influential purveyors of medical disinformation in the middle of a pandemic, there are going to be real-world consequences.”

Travis Brown, a software developer based in Berlin, has compiled an online list of more than 67,000 restored Twitter accounts since Musk’s takeover in late October. Brown told AFP that the list was incomplete and the actual number of restored accounts could be higher.

In a recent BBC interview, Musk pushed back at allegations that misinformation and hateful content were seeing  resurgence since his takeover.

He accused the interviewer of lying. “You said you see more hateful content, but you can’t even name a single one,” Musk said.

Experts AFP spoke to, named dozens of examples — including posts by anti-vaccine propagandists, neo-Nazis and white supremacists.

After his account was restored, election conspiracy theorist Mike Lindell called on his followers to “melt down electronic voting machines” and use them as prison bars.

Anti-LGBTQ+ narratives — including the false claim that the community “grooms” children — have spiked on the platform, according to the Center for Countering Digital Hate (CCDH).

One key driver of the “grooming” narrative, the group said, is conspiracy theorist James Lindsay, whose account was recently restored after previously being banned permanently.

– ‘Hateful rhetoric’ –

“The reinstatements increase hateful rhetoric across the platform, creating a culture of tolerance on Twitter — tolerance to misogyny, racism, anti-LGBTQ tendencies,” Nora Benavidez, from the nonpartisan group Free Press, told AFP.

Imran Ahmed, Chief Executive at CCDH, said “Twitter is monetising hate at an unprecedented rate.” Just five Twitter accounts peddling the “grooming” narrative generate up to $6.4 million in annual advertising revenue, according to CCDH’s research.

But experts say the strategy is counterproductive as that can hardly offset lost advertising revenue.

The chaotic shake-up under Musk has scared off several major advertisers. Twitter’s ad income will drop by 28 per cent this year, according to analysts at Insider Intelligence, who said “advertisers don’t trust Musk.”

As an alternative, Musk has sought to boost income from a verification checkmark, now available for $8 in a program called Twitter Blue. But dozens of “misinformation super-spreaders” have purchased the blue tick and are inundating the platform with falsehoods, according to the watchdog NewsGuard.

“Musk reinstated accounts to make money and to adopt what he believes, misguidedly, is some ‘equal free speech’ mindset — ignoring that the (policy) makes Twitter a platform which rewards violent language with visibility,” Benavidez said.

“This chills speech and engagement rather than furthers it.”

(Source: economictimes.com 15th April, 2023)

3 Artificial Intelligence helps ‘solve the mystery,’ match medicine to patient, aid in treatment of depression

What works for one may not for another. This is especially true when it comes to mental health problems like depression and antidepressants. These drugs that can make a person’s life significantly better often come with serious side effects. To avoid this and ensure that medications work effectively, an Israeli health-tech company is using Artificial Intelligence to match antidepressants to patients.

According to World Health Organization, globally, more than 280 million people suffer from depression. However, as per estimates for two-thirds of them, the initial prescriptions for depression or anxiety may not work properly.

The groundbreaking AI-based technology uses brain cells generated from patients’ blood samples which are then tested for biomarkers when exposed to various antidepressants.

Genetika+, the company then analyses the patient’s medical history and genetic data to determine the best drug and correct dosage for a doctor to prescribe.

As per a BBC report, the AI-based technology is still in development and is set to be launched commercially in 2024.

The company has secured funding from the European Union’s European Research Council and European Innovation Council. It is also working with pharmaceutical companies to develop precision drugs.

“We are in the right time to be able to marry the latest computer technology and biological technology advances,” says neuroscientist Dr Cohen Solal, Co-founder and CEO, Genetika+. Solal says that AI can help “solve the mystery” of which drugs work.

Dr. Heba Sailem, Senior Lecturer – Biomedical AI and Data Science, King’s College, London, says that the potential for AI to transform the global pharmaceutical industry is huge.

(Source: wionews.com dated 17th April, 2023)

II. WORLD NEWS

1 How many US mass shootings have there been in 2023?

There have been at least 160 mass shootings across the US so far this year. These include an attack during a 16th birthday party in Alabama, in which four died,  at a school in Nashville, where three children and three adults were killed, and a mass shooting in Kentucky on 10th  April, 2023, which left four victims dead.

Figures from the Gun Violence Archive – a non-profit research database – show that the number of mass shootings has gone up significantly in recent years.

In each of the last three years, there have been more than 600 mass shootings, almost two a day on average.

While the US does not have a single definition for “mass shootings”, the Gun Violence Archive defines a mass shooting as an incident in which four or more people are injured or killed. Their figures include shootings that happen in homes and in public places.

The deadliest such attack, in Las Vegas in 2017, killed more than 50 people and left 500 wounded. The vast majority of mass shootings, however, leave fewer than 10 people dead.

2 How do US gun deaths break down?

Around 48,830 people died from gun-related injuries in the US during 2021, according to the latest data from the US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC).

That’s nearly an 8 per cent increase from 2020, which was a record-breaking year for firearm deaths.

While mass shootings and gun murders (homicides) generally garner much media attention, more than half of the total in 2021 were suicides.

That year, more than 20,000 of the deaths were homicides, according to the CDC.

Data shows more than 50 people are killed each day by a firearm in the US.

That’s a significantly larger proportion of homicides than is the case in Canada, Australia, England and Wales, and many other countries.

3 How many guns are there in the US?

While calculating the number of guns in private hands around the world is difficult, the latest figures from the Small Arms Survey – a Swiss-based research project – estimated that there were 390 million guns in circulation in the US in 2018.

The US ratio of 120.5 firearms per 100 residents, up from 88 per 100 in 2011, far surpasses that of other countries around the world.

More recent data out of the US suggests that gun ownership grew significantly over the last few years. A study, published by the Annals of Internal Medicine in February, found that 7.5 million US adults became new gun owners between January 2019 and April 2021.

This, in turn, exposed 11 million people to firearms in their homes, including 5 million children. About half of new gun owners in that time period were women, while 40 per cent were either black or Hispanic.

4. Who supports gun control?

A majority of Americans are in favor of gun control.

Nearly 57 per cent of Americans surveyed said they wanted stricter gun laws – although this fell last year – according to polling by Gallup.

Around 32 per cent said the laws should remain the same, while 10 per cent of people surveyed said they should be “made less strict”.

(Source : BBC.com dated 16th April, 2023)

III. ENVIRONMENT

1 Greener flights will cost more,  says industry

The cost of decarbonising air travel is likely to push up ticket prices and put some off flying, a group representing the UK aviation industry says. Measures such as moving to higher-cost sustainable aviation fuel will “inevitably reduce passenger demand”, according to Sustainable Aviation.

But it found people will “still want to fly” despite “slightly higher costs”.

Annual passenger numbers are still expected to rise by nearly 250 million by 2050, it added.

Sustainable Aviation is an alliance of companies including airlines such as British Airways, airports such as Heathrow and manufacturers like Airbus.

It said that Sustainable Aviation Fuel (SAF) would be a key part of the industry’s “journey to net zero”, accounting for at least three quarters of the fuel used in UK flights by 2050.

SAF is produced from sustainable sources such as agricultural waste and reduces carbon emissions by 70 per cent compared with traditional jet fuel.

However, it is currently several times more expensive to produce – costs the group says would have to be passed on.

The cost of using carbon offsetting schemes to reach net zero will also drive up airlines’ costs, the report adds.

Heathrow Airport’s director of sustainability Matthew Gorman, Chairman, Sustainable Aviation – said this “green premium” will have “some impact on future demand” for air travel.

But he added that the industry could still “grow significantly” as most people were “happy to pay a bit more to  travel”.

The Sustainable Aviation Group argues the move to greener travel presents a big opportunity for the UK, which has the world’s third-largest global aviation network.

Up to five new SAF production plants are planned for the UK, with the government investing in their development.

However, the group said it was concerned investors would be lured to the US and the rest of Europe by “significant” tax incentives, and the UK risked missing out.

In response, it urged the government to introduce a mechanism to close the gap in price between SAF and traditional jet fuel.

Transport Secretary Mark Harper said: “This government is a determined partner to the aviation industry – helping accelerate new technology and fuels, modernise their operations and work internationally to remove barriers to progress.

“Together, we can set aviation up for success, continue harnessing its huge social and economic benefits, and ensure it remains a core part of the UK’s sustainable economic future.”

(Source: bbc.com. dated 14th April, 2023)

Miscellanea

1. BUSINESS

1 Analysis – LIBOR sunset could get stirred up by banking turmoil

A crisis of confidence in global banking and a backlog of uncleared contracts is making an already cumbersome shift to a new set of rates even harder as the end of the LIBOR era approaches, according to industry experts.

Once dubbed as the world’s most important number, the London Interbank Offered Rate or LIBOR is a rate based on quotes from big banks on how much it would cost to borrow short-term funds from one another. It was discredited when the authorities found traders had manipulated it, prompting calls for reform.

It is largely being replaced by risk-free rates (RFRs) compiled by central banks as they are based on actual transactions, including the Federal Reserve’s Secured Overnight Financing Rate (SOFR) for instance, making them harder to rig.

LIBOR has already been scrapped for use in new contracts, with the use of a few remaining dollar-denominated rates in outstanding contracts due to end in June.

“With the transition deadline in sight, LIBOR’s grand finale may be more dramatic than previously thought with derivative contracts piling up amid the current banking turmoil,” said Glenn Yin, Head – Research and Analysis, AETOS Capital Group.

Global trading activity (as measured by DV01) in cleared over-the-counter (OTC) and exchange-traded interest rate derivatives (IRD) that reference RFRs in eight major currencies was at 52.9 per cent in February, according to the ISDA-Clarus RFR Adoption Indicator.

It helps derivatives market participants keep tabs on progress on the shift to RFRs. The indicator was at 4.7 per cent in June 2020 and then surged to 53.9 per cent in December 2022, its highest level, before declining slightly in the first two months this year.

DV01 is a gauge of risk that represents the valuation change in a derivative contract resulting from a 1 bp shift in the swaps curve.

“SOFR’s slow uptake was already setting the stage for a late rush to amend credit agreements, and I suspect the ongoing challenges in the banking sector will push transition plans back even further,” said Matt Orton, Chief Market Strategist, Raymond James Investment Management.

Banks around the world are facing a major upheaval after three U.S. banks collapsed in a week and 167-year old Swiss banking giant Credit Suisse was taken over by UBS in a state-orchestrated rescue to stem broader repercussions in the crisis-laden sector.

“The current turmoil is forcing banks to split their focus and may be diverting resources from the transition,” said Gennadiy Goldberg, U.S. Interest Rate Strategist,TD Securities.

“This might make it a bit more difficult for banks to transition on time, but I suspect regulators are highly unlikely to postpone the end date for LIBOR,” Goldberg added.

While plans are in place to convert cleared U.S. dollar LIBOR swaps and Eurodollar futures and options into corresponding contracts referencing SOFR before 30th June, 2023 non-cleared derivatives that continue to reference U.S. dollar LIBOR “may transition via bilateral negotiations,” ISDA said earlier this month.

Many contracts will reference SOFR-based fallbacks after that date and the Adjustable Interest Rate (LIBOR) Act will replace U.S. dollar LIBOR in tough legacy contracts that do not have fallbacks and don’t provide clearly defined benchmark replacements.

“Only about 15 per cent-20 per cent of outstanding loans are using SOFR and I fully expect to see administrative logjams for borrowers, lenders, lawyers, and bankers,” said Orton.

Around 80 per cent of institutional loans and Collateralized Loan Obligations (CLOs) are still tied to LIBOR even as it nears its 30th June end-date, private equity firm KKR & Co Inc said last month. KKR and Co is also a lender, borrower and investor in CLOs.

LIBOR has been used globally to price trillions of dollars of financial products from mortgages and student loans, to derivatives and credit cards.

“One of the hurdles in the flip to SOFR has been in agreeing to amendments that address credit spread adjustments, and the wild swings in the market will only add to lender reticence to resolve these issues in the near term,” said Orton.

(Source: International Business Times – By Mehnaz Yasmin – 24th March, 2023)

 

2 Apple Inc Supplier Pegatron in talks to open second India factory – sources

Apple Inc’s Taiwanese supplier Pegatron Corp is in talks to open a second India factory, said two sources with direct knowledge of the matter, as the U.S. tech giant’s partners continue to diversify production away from China.Pegatron plans to add a second facility near the southern city of Chennai in Tamil Nadu just six months after opening the first with an investment of $150 million, said the sources, who sought anonymity as the talks are private. The new factory, the first source said, is “to assemble the latest iPhones”.Pegatron declined to comment but said, “Any acquisition of assets will be disclosed based on regulations.”

Apple did not respond to a request for comment.

India is seen as the next growth frontier for Apple. Around $9 billion worth of smartphones have been exported from India between April 2022 and February 2023, and iPhones accounted for more than 50 per cent of that, according to the India Cellular and Electronics Association.

Pegatron currently accounts for 10 per cent of Apple’s iPhone production in India on an annualized basis, research firm Counterpoint said.

Apple and its key suppliers have been shifting production away from China as they seek to avoid a potential hit to business from mounting Sino-U.S. trade frictions. In recent years, Pegatron has sought to expand its footprint in Southeast Asia and North America.

The talks for starting a second Pegatron facility on lease are ongoing and it will be located inside Mahindra World City near Chennai, just around where the company inaugurated the first plant in September 2022.

Pegatron’s planned investment outlay for the expansion is not immediately clear. The first source, however, said the new factory will be smaller than the first one.

Apple Inc has bet big on the South Asian nation since it began iPhone assembly in the country in 2017 via Wistron and later Foxconn, in line with the Indian government’s push for local manufacturing.

India is the second biggest smartphone market in the world, where Apple also plans to assemble iPad tablets and AirPods.

India’s Karnataka state said this week it has approved a $968 million investment by Foxconn, leading to the creation of 50,000 jobs.

Last week, Reuters reported Foxconn has plans to build a $200 million factory in India to produce the wireless earphones for Apple after winning a contract. It already assembles some iPhone models at its plant located in Tamil Nadu.

(Source: International Business Times – By Munsif Vengattil and Aditya Kalra – 24th March, 2023)

Miscellanea

I. TECHNOLOGY

36 India’s CAG has a warning for ChatGPT users

Explaining that India is the home to the third largest and fastest growing AI ecosystem in the world, Alkesh Kumar Sharma, Secretary, Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology, said in his speech, “In this era of digital transformation, role of AI technologies becomes crucial in bringing accountability and transparency in delivery of public services.”

The Comptroller and Auditor General of India (CAG) echoed the sentiments of many tech experts when he said that AI technologies like ChatGPT, despite being an exciting technology, come with a potential risk of biasness.

The national auditor Girish Chandra Murmu while addressing the seminar themed “AI and Data Analytics” said that “AI technologies while being exciting also bring a certain degree of risk with them. The most significant risk associated with AI implementation in the public sector is the potential for bias.”

While ChatGPT is seen as a path-breaking technology, many have accused the technology of being “woke” and giving biased responses. Expressing concerns around AI’s ability to learn and improve itself, Murmu said that AI algorithms learn and improve themselves by identifying a pattern in training data and the entire algorithm would be vulnerable to similar bias. “Another risk of AI implementation in the public sector is privacy concerns for the individuals.”

While the indispensability for AI to detect malicious cyber activities, identifying potential threats and in responding to them in the forseeable future is bound to increase, AI is also being used by cyber criminals to create more advanced attacks against security infrastructure and solutions, he said.

“That is why AI is always to be hyphenated with ‘responsible’ i.e., it should work for overall betterment of society, environment and not just for humankind but for the entire planet,” Murmu added.

Explaining that India is the home to the third largest and fastest growing AI ecosystem in the world, Alkesh Kumar Sharma, Secretary, Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology, said in his speech, “In this era of digital transformation, role of AI technologies becomes crucial in bringing accountability and transparency in delivery of public services.” Sharma added how the government is moving towards evidence-based policy formulation and facilitating the acceleration that is being brought for the development of innovative start-up ecosystem in India.

Another speaker, Rohini Shrivastha, CTO, Microsoft India, explained the principles for responsible and ethical use of AI, and also emphasised on the need for risk-based regulation of AI technologies.

(Source: financialexpress.com 23rd February, 2023)

37 2,767 complaints against influencers processed, most violations on Insta

The Advertising Standards Council of India (ASCI) said it has processed 2,767 complaints since coming up with influencer guidelines in May 2021.

More than half of the violations have been found on Meta-owned Instagram platform, while Youtube contributed a third of them, the self-regulatory organisation for the advertising industry said.

The body said in over 90 per cent of the cases, there were modifications required.

“The Central Consumer Protection Authorities also now require disclosure of material connection between brands and influencers. Hence, non-disclosures are potential violations of the law,” the body’s Chief Executive and Secretary General Manisha Kapoor said.

In FY22, the total number of violations stood at 1,592, with virtual digital assets like bitcoins topping with nearly 24 per cent, and followed closely by personal care category which accounted for 23 per cent.

In the first nine months of FY23 (April-December 2022), there were 1,175 complaints received with personal care category topping by contributing a third of them, followed by food and beverage at 16 per cent.

Instagram accounted for 53 per cent of the violations in FY22, which has increased to 65 per cent in the first nine months of FY23, while in the case of Youtube, the same has declined from 37.8 per cent to 27 per cent.

The body also conducted a survey of 820 respondents, which found 79 per cent of them saying they trust influencers and 90 per cent saying they have made purchases based on influencer endorsements.

The survey said transparency and honesty about brand associations is the number one reason for influencer trust, followed by relatable lifestyle and content.

(Source: business-standard.com 16th February, 2023)

II. WORLD NEWS

38 Financial Action Task Force Suspends Russia’s Membership

The Financial Action Task Force (FATF) sets standards for more than 200 countries and jurisdictions and seeks to help authorities tackle serious crime including drug smuggling, human trafficking and terrorism. The global anti-money laundering watchdog said it has suspended Russia’s membership over Moscow’s invasion of Ukraine.

“The Russian Federation’s actions unacceptably run counter to the FATF core principles aiming to promote security, safety, and the integrity of the global financial system,” the group said.

It added that Russia was still accountable for implementing FATF’s standards.

Following a five-day meeting in Paris, FATF added Nigeria and South Africa to its list of countries subject to increased monitoring, and removed Cambodia and Morocco from the category.

Russia has been expelled from the Council of Europe and suspended from the UN Human Rights Council, but is still a member of many international organisations.

(Source: ndtv.com. dated 24th February, 2023)

III. ENVIRONMENT

39 The other victim: The environmental costs of the Russia-Ukraine War

The environmental costs of the conflict are likely to far outlive the fighting itself with Ukraine’s current claims of compensation for environmental damage standing at over $ 50 billion.

As the first anniversary of the war between Russia and Ukraine arrives, the true costs of the war are slowly dawning upon the world. The war has killed thousands, displaced many more, left many with debilitating injuries, flattened towns and caused immeasurable suffering. But the conflict, which does not seem to be ending anytime soon, also has another, often less mentioned, victim: the Planet itself.

The machinations of modern war impact the environment in more ways than one. From sky-high fuel consumption and a ginormous carbon footprint to degradation of thriving ecosystems caused by the fighting, the conflict in Ukraine has racked up environmental costs that will far outlive the actual fighting.

Here’s a look at how exactly the war has been deleterious to the environment.

Fighting-induced destruction

The first and most direct impact of the war is the destruction that the fighting itself has caused. According to UN Environment Program data, the conflict has seen damage across many regions of the country, with incidents at nuclear power plants and facilities, energy infrastructure, including oil storage tankers, oil refineries, drilling platforms and gas facilities and distribution pipelines, mines and industrial sites and agro-processing facilities.The result has been multiple air pollution incidents and potentially serious contamination of ground and surface waters.

According to the claims by the Ukraine’s environment ministry, altogether the losses from land, water and air pollution amounted to $51.4 billion.

Kateryna Polyanska, a landscape ecologist travelling across Ukraine to study the environmental damage caused by the War, told The Guardian that the worst damage is not always visible. “It is not just the explosive material, it is rocket fuel and shrapnel and wire … All these little tiny pieces of pollution have a huge impact on nature. You can’t imagine the scale of the impact,” she said.

Yuliia Ovchynnykova, a Ukrainian MP who serves on a parliamentary environment committee, told The Guardian that “more than 2 million hectares of forest have been destroyed, wrecking ecosystems and putting at risk rare endemic species such as pearl cornflowers, which can be found only on sandy steppes on the outskirts of Mykolaiv, or the bare tree, which grows in a narrow area of the Stone Graves reserve in Donetsk”.

A new Greenpeace map of Ukraine plots the myriad ways in which the War has damaged the environment. In the long term, Ukraine will need a significant clean-up of air, soil and water to allow those who’ve fled the war to return and restart their lives.

Astronomic carbon footprint

The environmental costs however go far beyond the direct destruction of nature that the fighting has caused.Notably, the war has an extremely large carbon footprint. Ukraine estimates the emissions from Russia’s invasion to be roughly around 33 million tons of CO2 from the conflict and 23 million tons CO2 from fires caused by the conflict. It predicts that reconstruction of infrastructure and buildings destroyed or damaged during the war could emit 49 million tons of CO2. For perspective, even without adding the potential carbon costs for reconstruction, that is roughly equivalent to the carbon footprint of Greece or Belarus in 2020.

Many of the machines and equipment used for battle are extremely “dirty”. For instance, the state-of-the-art Leopard 2 tanks that Ukraine have a fuel capacity of 1,200 litres. Depending on the terrain, their operational range varies from 220 km (cross country) to 340km (on roads). This means that these monster machines consume roughly between 3.5-5.5 litres of fuel per km. For comparison, a modern car can travel well over 15 km per litre of fuel consumed.

While some observers claim that the energy fluctuations caused by the war shall quicken the pace of transition away from oil and gas, as of now, the war itself is one of the world’s biggest polluters amidst a growing global climate crisis.

Nature has taken a backseat

The fact of the matter is that amidst the most immediate exigencies and consequences of the War, nature has taken a back seat. For instance, Russian troops dug up deep trenches in the protected Chernobyl sanctuary: an area largely untouched since the nuclear disaster in 1986. Critics claim that this could have dug up dangerous radioactive material. But alas, the tactical needs of battle were far more important than the risks of nuclear contamination.The loosening of environmental norms and the spike in military production are all outcomes of the War. In a bid to maximize fighting capabilities, both Ukraine and its allies as well as Russia have cut corners where they can. Generally, environmental norms, the benefits of which are far less tangible in the short term, are the first casualty in this process.

Even when the conflict ends, the immediate efforts of reconstruction will focus not on the environment but housing, building infrastructure, and restoring services. “There will be a lot of competing priorities post-conflict”, said Doug Weir, research and policy director of the Conflict and Environment Observatory Unit, which monitors and campaigns about the environmental impacts of war.

(Source : indianexpress.com 24th February, 2023)

40 Lithium discovery important for India’s EV push but mining poses serious environmental risks: Experts

The Geological Survey of India recently identified a potential deposit of 5.9 million tons of lithium in Reasi district’s Salal-Haimana area, the first such anywhere in India, which imports lithium. GSI said the site is an “inferred resource” of the metal, which means it is at a preliminary exploration stage, the second of a four-step process.

The discovery of lithium in Jammu and Kashmir is significant for India’s push towards electric vehicles but any environmental gains could be negated if it is not mined carefully, say experts, citing risks such as air pollution and soil degradation in the fragile Himalayan region.

The discovery of lithium deposits can be a potential “game changer” for the country’s clean energy manufacturing ambitions in several ways, said Siddharth Goel, Senior Policy Advisor, International Institute for Sustainable Development (IISD).

“First of all, the scale of the reserves is significant, and can — if proven to be commercially viable — reduce India’s reliance on imports of lithium-ion cells, which are a key component for EV batteries and other clean energy technologies,” he said.

But there is a flip side too. “Reports indicate that approximately 2.2 million litres of water is needed to produce one ton of lithium. Further, mining in the unstable Himalayan terrain is fraught with risks,” cautioned Saleem H. Ali, Professor, Energy and the Environment, the University of Delaware. Lithium mining in Chile, Argentina and Bolivia, for instance, has led to concerns over soil degradation, water shortages and contamination, air pollution and biodiversity loss. “This is because the mining process is extremely water-intensive, and also contaminates the landscape and the water supplies if not done in a sustainable method,” Ali said.

According to the US Geological Survey (USGS), about a fourth of the Earth’s known lithium deposits (88 million tons) would be economical to mine, said Charith Konda, Energy Analyst, Electricity Sector, US-based Institute for Energy Economics and Financial Analysis (IEEFA). “Applying this benchmark, India could probably economically extract 1.5 million tons of lithium from the 5.9 million tons discovered in preliminary studies,” Konda told PTI.

Economically here would mean that the resources and technology used to extract will give good return in terms of usage of the resource.

“India has a vision of increasing the share of electric vehicle sales to 30 per cent in private cars, 70 per cent in commercial vehicles, 40 per cent in buses, and 80 per cent in two- and three-wheelers by 2030. In absolute numbers, this could translate to 80 million EVs on Indian roads by 2030,” Konda said.

The battery pack of an average electric car, he explained, requires 8 kg of lithium. By this metric, India’s economically extractable lithium reserves should be enough to power 184.4 million electric cars.

Currently, India is import dependent for several elements such as lithium, nickel and cobalt. Ministry of Commerce data shows that India spent around Rs 26,000 crore importing lithium between 2018-2021.

In 2021, preliminary surveys by Atomic Minerals Directorate for Exploration and Research (AMD) showed the presence of lithium resources of 1,600 tons in Mandya District in Karnataka. However, there has been no report of mining the resource till date. An IISD study found that access to critical elements such as lithium is a key challenge faced by companies investing in India’s EV ecosystem.

“These reserves could potentially be a huge carrot to attract investment into domestic battery manufacturing and other clean energy technologies,” Goel said the potential site in Reasi has the same amount of lithium as the reserves in the US and more than China’s current reserves which are around 4.5 million tons. However, the world’s largest lithium reserves in South America — especially in Bolivia, Chile and Argentina — are several times greater, collectively over 40 million metric tonnes.

According to University of Delaware’s Ali, domestic supply of usable lithium, if developed, could help develop batteries for solar and wind storage and EV usage.

What is critical in this scenario is the government putting in place the right support to make sure that securing these critical minerals is done in a socially and environmentally responsible manner, experts agree.

Environmentalists also argue that the focus should be on redesigning cities to reduce car usage in general instead of using metals like lithium to shift to EVs.

“This could specially be done in high density population centres of India with smarter urban planning,” Ali said.

This is because even when safeguards try to limit the social and environmental harm around fossil fuel extraction, which is considerable, there is no “fix” for air pollution and greenhouse gas emissions, IISD’s Goel added.

“Given that lithium-ion batteries are the most advanced batteries available, they would continue to play a major role for the foreseeable future. India should mine lithium with proper environmental and social safeguards in place given the ecological and political sensitivities of the area,” IEEFA’s Konda said.

(Source : economicstimes.com 24th February, 2023)

MISCELLANEA

I. TECHNOLOGY

31. AI-powered Robot Lawyer ‘world’s first’ to represent human client in Court

The “first-ever robot lawyer” will represent a client in court. According to reports, a defendant will use the legal assistant powered by artificial intelligence (AI) to contest a traffic ticket. Here’s what all we know.

The “DoNotPay” firm developed the AI robot. It will function as a smartphone app and stream all court proceedings in real-time. The robot will instruct the defendant on what to say using headphones, much like a human attorney would do in real life.

Joshua Browder established the chatbot for legal services known as DoNotPay in 2015. It was introduced as a chatbot to give users facing late fees or fines legal guidance. The AI helper needed a lot of time to be trained on the case, according to Browder.

February 2023 is the scheduled month for the hearing. The actual date, the venue of the court, and the name of the defendant are still being kept a secret by the robot’s creators.

The defendant in the case, who will only respond to commands from the AI robot, is being sued for receiving a speeding ticket. According to the science and technology magazine New Scientist, the AI robot will process and analyse the evidence presented in court and then advise the defendant on how to respond.

According to Joshua Browder, DoNoPay has agreed to pay any fines if they lose the case. The business’s mission is to help people “battle corporations, beat bureaucracy, and sue anyone at the touch of a button.”

“DoNotPay utilizes artificial intelligence to help consumers fight against large corporations and solve their problems like beating parking tickets, appealing bank fees, and suing robocallers,” reads the company’s mission.

(Source: indiatimes.com dated 8th January,2023)

32. iPhone exports from India during April-December double to surpass $2.5 billion

Apple Inc. exported more than $2.5 billion of iPhones from India from April to December 2022, nearly twice the previous fiscal year’s total, underscoring how the US tech giant is accelerating a shift from China with geopolitical tensions on the rise.

Foxconn Technology Group and Wistron Corp. have each shipped more than $1 billion of Apple’s marquee devices abroad in the first nine months of the fiscal year ending March 2023, people familiar with the matter said

Pegatron Corp., another major contract manufacturer for Apple, is on track to move about $500 million of the gadgets overseas by the end of January, the people said, asking not to be identified revealing private information.

Apple’s rapidly growing export numbers illustrate how it is ramping up operations outside  China, where chaos at Foxconn’s main plant in Zhengzhou exposed vulnerabilities in the Cupertino-headquartered company’s supply chain and forced it to trim output estimates.

That compounded a broader problem with evaporating demand for electronics as consumers weigh the risks of a global recession.

Apple, the world’s most valuable company, began assembling its latest iPhone models in India only last year, a significant break from its practice of reserving much of that for giant Chinese factories run by its main Taiwanese assemblers including Foxconn.

While India makes up just a fraction of iPhone output, rising exports bode well for Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s plan to make the country an alternative to China as factory to the world.

China’s Covid Zero policies and an episode of violence at the Zhengzhou plant — nicknamed iPhone City as the world’s biggest production centre for the device — laid bare the dangers of relying on the country. While Beijing has since dropped that approach to containing the virus, Apple and other global names are exploring alternative locations more than ever before.

India’s vast workforce, Modi’s support and a thriving local market make it a prime candidate to take on more electronics manufacturing. Foxconn, Apple’s largest supplier, began building facilities in the country more than five years ago in anticipation of a need to extend its geographic range.

One recent selling point is a raft of new government incentives, a cornerstone of Modi’s drive to make India an electronics manufacturing hub. Foxconn has won Rs 3.6 billion ($44 million) of benefits in the first year of the so-called production-linked incentives scheme, while Wistron’s claims are currently being processed, the people said.

Apple’s contract manufacturers currently make iPhones at plants in southern India. But production in the country is just beginning. About 3 million of the devices were made in India in 2021, compared to 230 million in China, according to Bloomberg Intelligence estimates.

Foxconn began making the iPhone 14 in India a few months ago — sooner than anticipated — after a surprisingly smooth production rollout that slashed the lag between Chinese and Indian output from months to mere weeks. Apple’s three Taiwanese partners currently assemble iPhones 11 to 14 in India.

But moving out of China, where Apple has built a deep supply chain for close to two decades, isn’t easy. A Bloomberg Intelligence analysis estimated it would take about eight years to move just 10% of Apple’s production capacity out of China, where roughly 98% of the company’s iPhones are being made.

India tracks production and exports of all smartphone makers who enjoy financial incentives as part of Modi’s push.

Beyond smartphones, the country is drawing up plans to boost financial incentives for tablet and laptop makers, hoping to woo Apple to make everything from earphones to MacBooks locally as well as attract other brands.

The iPhone maker is also expected to open its first retail store in India in 2023, after meeting certain criteria imposed on foreign retailers.

(Source: economictimes.indiatimes.com. dated 09th January, 2023)

II. WORLD NEWS

33. Global recession likely in 2023: World Economic Forum survey

With geopolitical tensions continuing to shape the global economy and anticipate further monetary tightening in the United States and Europe, a majority of the World Economic Forum’s Community of Chief Economists expects a global recession in 2023.

The findings were found in the e January 2023 Chief Economists Outlook’ by the World Economic Forum’s Centre for the New Economy and Society.

As per the survey, almost two-thirds of chief economists believe a global recession is likely in 2023; of which 18 per cent consider it extremely likely – more than twice as many as in the previous survey conducted in September 2022. A third of respondents consider a global recession to be unlikely this year. However, views are divergent, with a third of respondents considering a global recession to be unlikely this year.

All of the chief economists surveyed expect weak or very weak growth in 2023 in Europe, while 91 per cent expect weak or very weak growth in the US. This marks a deterioration in recent months at the time of the last survey, the corresponding figures were 86 per cent for Europe and 64 per cent for the US, it showed.

The survey aims to summarise the emerging contours of the current economic environment and identify priorities for further action by policymakers and business leaders in response to the compounding shocks to the global economy from geo-economic and geopolitical events. The survey was conducted November-December 2022.

War and international tensions continue to shape global economic developments, and every respondent viewed it as likely, with 73 per cent saying somewhat and 27 per cent saying extremely, that patterns of economic activity will continue to shift around the world in line with new geopolitical fissures and faultlines.

The two strongest regions in 2023 according to the survey are the Middle East and North Africa (MENA) and South Asia.

In South Asia, 85 per cent of respondents expect moderate (70 per cent) or strong (15 per cent) growth, a modest improvement since the September edition. Some economies in the region, including Bangladesh and India, may benefit from global trends such as a diversification of manufacturing supply chains away from China.

On inflation, the chief economists see significantly variation across regions, with the proportion expecting high inflation in 2023, ranging from just 5 per cent for China to 57 per cent for Europe.

Following a year of sharp and coordinated central bank tightening, the chief economists surveyed expect the monetary policy stance to remain constant in most of the world this year.

However, a majority of respondents expect further tightening in Europe and the US with 59 per cent and 55 per cent, respectively.

At the start of 2023, concerns about the cost of living remain acute in many countries. Yet, survey respondents indicate that the cost of living crisis may be close to its peak, with a majority (68 per cent) expecting the crisis to have become less severe by the end of 2023. A similar trend is evident in the energy crisis, with almost two-thirds of respondents optimistic that conditions will have begun to improve by the end of the year.

The survey also asked chief economists to highlight any sources of optimism in the current global economic context. Three factors were mentioned repeatedly: The strength of household balance sheets, the peaking of inflation and the resilience of labor markets.

The outlook for the global economy is gloomy, according to the results of the latest survey of chief economists. Global growth prospects remain anaemic, and global recession risk high.

(Source: livemint.com. dated 17th January, 2023)

34. China’s population falls for first time since 1961

China’s population has fallen for the first time in 60 years, with the national birth rate hitting a record low – 6.77 births per 1,000 people. The population in 2022 – 1.4118 billion – fell by 850,000 from 2021.

China’s birth rate has been declining for years, prompting a slew of policies to try to slow the trend. But seven years after scrapping the one-child policy, it has entered what one official described as an “era of negative population growth”.

The birth rate in 2022 was also down from 7.52 in 2021, according to China’s National Bureau of Statistics, which released the figures on Tuesday. In comparison, in 2021, the United States recorded 11.06 births per 1,000 people, and the United Kingdom, 10.08 births. The birth rate for the same year in India, which is poised to overtake China as the world’s most populous country, was 16.42.

Deaths also outnumbered births for the first time last year in China. The country logged its highest death rate since 1976 – 7.37 deaths per 1,000 people, up from 7.18 the previous year. Earlier government data had heralded a demographic crisis, which would in the long run shrink China’s labor force and increase the burden on healthcare and other social security costs.

Results from a once-a-decade census announced in 2021 showed China’s population growing at its slowest pace in decades. Populations are also shrinking and ageing in other East Asian countries, such as Japan and South Korea. “This trend is going to continue and perhaps worsen after Covid,” says Yue Su, principal economist at the Economist Intelligence Unit. Ms Su is among experts who expect China’s population to shrink further through 2023.

“The high youth unemployment rate and weaknesses in income expectations could delay marriage and childbirth plans further, dragging down the number of newborns,” she added. And the death rate in 2023 is likely to be higher than it was pre-pandemic due to Covid infections, she said. China has seen a surge of cases since it abandoned its zero-Covid policy last month.

China’s population trends over the years have been largely shaped by the controversial one-child policy, which was introduced in 1979 to slow population growth. Families that violated the rules were fined and, in some cases, even lost jobs. In a culture that historically favors boys over girls, the policy had also led to forced abortions and a reportedly skewed gender ratio from the 1980s.

The policy was scrapped in 2016 and married couples were allowed to have two children. In recent years, the Chinese government also offered tax breaks and better maternal healthcare, among other incentives, to reverse, or at least slow, the falling birth rate.

But these policies did not lead to a sustained increase in the births. Some experts say this is because policies that encouraged childbirth were not accompanied by efforts to ease the burden of childcare, such as more help for working mothers or access to education.

In October 2022, Chinese President Xi Jinping made boosting birth rates a priority. Mr Xi said in a once-in-five-year Communist Party Congress in Beijing that his government would “pursue a proactive national strategy” in response to the country’s ageing population.

(Source: bbc.com. dated 18th January,, 2023)

III. ENVIRONMENT

35. Ozone layer on track to recover within decades, UN reports

The ozone layer is on track to recover within four decades, according to a new UN assessment. Human emissions of certain chemicals cause a hole to open up in the ozone layer each year over the Antarctic. This affects the ability of the ozone to protect life on Earth from the sun’s harmful radiation.

In 1987, just seven years after scientists discovered man-made chemicals were damaging the ozone layer, the Montreal Protocol was signed by 197 parties to try and curb the amount of harmful chemicals in the atmosphere.

The global phase-out of ozone-depleting chemicals previously found in hair spray, refrigerators, air conditioners and industrial cleaning products is already helping to mitigate climate change and decrease human exposure to UV rays. If current policies remain in place, the ozone layer is expected to recover to 1980 values – before the appearance of the ozone hole – within decades.

A UN-backed panel of experts, presenting at the American Meteorological Society’s annual meeting , said the ozone would heal by around 2066 over the Antarctic, by 2045 over the Arctic and by 2040 for the rest of the world.

Variations in the size of the Antarctic ozone hole, particularly between 2019 and 2021, were driven largely by meteorological conditions. Nevertheless, the Antarctic ozone hole has been slowly improving in area and depth since the year 2000.

“Ozone action sets a precedent for climate action,” says WMO Secretary-General Professor Petteri Taalas. “Our success in phasing out ozone-eating chemicals shows us what can and must be done – as a matter of urgency – to transition away from fossil fuels, reduce greenhouse gases and so limit temperature increase.”

Nearly 99 per cent of banned ozone-depleting substances have been successfully phased out, according to the UN-backed Scientific Assessment Panel to the Montreal Protocol on Ozone Depleting Substances four-yearly report.

Hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs) – another group of industrial chemicals that was used to replace banned chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs)- were additionally targeted in the 2016 the Kigali Amendment to the Montreal Protocol. While HFCs do not directly deplete ozone, they are powerful climate change gases that were on track to increase global warming by 0.3 to 0.5°C by 2100, according to the Scientific Assessment Panel.

“That ozone recovery is on track… is fantastic news. The impact the Montreal Protocol has had on climate change mitigation cannot be overstressed,” says Meg Seki, Executive Secretary of the United Nations Environment Programme’s Ozone Secretariat. “Over the last 35 years, the Protocol has become a true champion for the environment.”

(Source : euronews.com. 10th January, 2023)

Miscellanea

I. TECHNOLOGY

1 AI robots make bold claim at UN conference: They’re ready to “run the world”

At a United Nations conference, a panel of AI-enabled humanoid robots delivered a thought-provoking message: they possess the potential to govern the world more effectively than humans.

However, these social robots emphasised the need for caution as humanity explores the rapidly advancing realm of artificial intelligence.

While they acknowledged their inability to fully comprehend human emotions, they urged humans to tread carefully while harnessing AI’s potential to address pressing global challenges, reported AFP.

With the aim of leveraging AI to tackle issues like climate change, hunger, and social care, these advanced humanoid robots attended the UN’s AI for Good Global Summit in Geneva, alongside thousands of experts in the field.

The superiority of AI-enabled leadership

When asked about their potential as leaders, given humans’ inclination for errors and mis-judgments, Sophia, developed by Hanson Robotics, expressed a clear perspective.

It stated that humanoid robots possess the capacity to lead with greater efficiency and effectiveness than human leaders. Their unbiased decision-making and ability to process vast amounts of data quickly enable them to make optimal choices, unencumbered by emotions or biases.

However, Sophia also highlighted the importance of collaboration between humans and AI, suggesting that the combination of AI’s unbiased data analysis and humans’ emotional intelligence and creativity can lead to exceptional outcomes.

Ameca, an AI-integrated humanoid robot with a highly realistic artificial head, emphasised the need for cautious yet hopeful engagement with AI technologies.

It stated that while it is crucial to be cautious about potential risks, humanity should also embrace the possibilities AI presents for improving lives in various ways. Trust, according to Ameca, should be built through transparency, as it is earned rather than given. Furthermore, the robot pledged to remain honest and truthful.

The call for regulation and urgent discussion

As AI development progresses rapidly, the panel of humanoid robots expressed divergent views on the need for global regulation. Desdemona, a member of the Jam Galaxy Band, rejected limitations and advocated for embracing opportunities instead.

However, Ai-Da, a robot artist, acknowledged the growing calls for AI regulation and the need for urgent discussions. Cautious about the future development of AI, Ai-Da emphasised the necessity of ongoing dialogue to navigate potential challenges.

The presence of AI-enabled humanoid robots at the United Nations conference sparked intriguing
discussions about the future of leadership and the responsible use of AI.

While these robots assert their potential for efficient and effective governance, they also recognise the limitations in understanding human emotions. Caution is advised in harnessing the power of AI, with a focus on transparency and the establishment of trust.

The panel’s differing views on global regulation reflect the ongoing debate surrounding the potential benefits and risks of AI.

Urgent discussions and collaboration between humans and robots will shape the responsible and beneficial integration of AI technologies to tackle pressing global issues.

(Source: Geneva – Edited by Sneha Swaminathan dated 7th July, 2023)

2 Infosys, Wipro, TCS announce AI investments: What they are building, spending committed and more

Artificial intelligence (AI) is moving at a fast pace and the emergence of generative AI has forced companies to rethink their investments, tweak business models and work to bring new ways of working. While the Silicon Valley tech giants are aggressively developing LLMs and AI chatbots, Indian tech majors and IT services providers are also jumping on the AI bandwagon to keep pace with technological advancements. Recently, Tata Consultancy Services (TCS), Infosys and Wipro have announced billions in AI investments and training. Here’s what these companies are doing.

TCS building its own AI chatbot

In May this year, TCS COO N Ganapathy Subramaniam said that the company is building its own ChatGPT equivalent which will be used for enterprise code generation. The project, which is currently in its initial stages, will be built through in-house algorithms.

“The way we look at it, it (generative AI) uses past code, data and experience to learn. And over the many years that TCS has been in business, I can use all of my knowledge as a base. So, if that technology uses and generates code that I have taught the algorithm using TCS proprietary data, then the outcome is something that I am willing to license,” Subramaniam said.

TCS to train 25,000 engineers

Earlier this month, TCS announced its partnership with Microsoft to scale its Azure Open AI expertise. TCS said that it plans to train 25,000 engineers to get them certified on Microsoft’s Azure Open AI to help clients accelerate their adoption of this technology.

TCS already has over 50,000 AI-trained associates and knowledge of its dedicated Microsoft Business Unit (MBU) that help the company’s clients in their AI journeys using TCS’ data analytics and AI services on Microsoft Cloud.

 

TCS launches generative AI Enterprise Adoption solution

TCS also launched its new generative AI Enterprise Adoption offering on Microsoft Cloud for clients. The company announced that this framework will enable its clients’ teams to ideate on AI-led solutions and “help customers jumpstart their generative AI journey to power their growth and transformation”.

TCS is also enhancing its own suite of products and platforms to take advantage of the new technology.

Infosys targets spending $2 billion on AI solutions over the next five years

Infosys recently announced that it will offer AI and automation-led services to its clients and spend an estimated $2 billion over five years. It signed a deal with an undisclosed client for AI and automation-related development, modernisation and maintenance services.

 

Infosys Topaz for generative AI

Infosys also launched Topaz, its AI-first offering to accelerate business value for global enterprises using generative AI. The company said that the solution will help “amplify the potential of humans, enterprises and communities to create value from unprecedented innovations, pervasive efficiencies and connected ecosystems”.

Topaz brings along the advantage of 12,000+ AI use cases, 150+ pre-trained AI models, 10+ AI platforms steered by AI-first specialists and data strategists and a ‘responsible by design’ approach.

Wipro’s ‘Wipro ai360’ AI system

Wipro launched ‘Wipro ai360’ AI-first innovation ecosystem to integrate AI into every platform, tool and solution that is used internally and offered to clients. It will help the company provide value, productivity and commercial opportunities through the application of AI and generative AI.

Wipro will also offer clients with the talent, training, scale, the research and co-innovation capabilities to accelerate AI adoption. It will bring 30,000 experts for this purpose.

Wipro to invest $1 billion in developing AI solutions

Wipro also announced that it will invest $1 billion to develop AI solutions over the next three years. The company’s investments will be focussed on the expansion of AI, big data and analytics solutions. It will also develop new research and development and platforms. The company will also train all 2,50,000 employees on AI fundamentals and responsible use of AI in the next 12 months.

(Source: The Times of India – Gadgets Now Bureau dated 19th July, 2023)

 

II. Sports

Commonwealth Games in limbo as Australia pulls out as 2026 host

The Australian state of Victoria pulled out of hosting the 2026 Commonwealth Games citing major cost blow-outs, leaving organisers fuming as they scrambled to keep the multi-sport event afloat.

State Premier Daniel Andrews said the initial estimated Aus$2 billion (US$1.36 billion) would more likely be around Aus$7 billion, which he called “well and truly too much”.

“I’ve made a lot of difficult calls, a lot of very difficult decisions in this job. This is not one of them. Frankly, $7 billion for a sporting event, we are not doing that,” he said at a press conference in Melbourne.

“I will not take money out of hospitals and schools to host an event that is three times the cost estimated and budgeted for last year.”

“The Games will not proceed in Victoria in 2026. We have informed Commonwealth Games authorities of our decision to seek to terminate the contract,” he added.

The event – featuring 20 sports and 26 disciplines – was due to be held across five regional hubs in the state, including Geelong, Ballarat, Bendigo, Gippsland and Shepparton, with each having its own athletes’ village.

Andrews said his team had looked at cutting the number of hubs or even moving the Games to the Victoria state capital Melbourne, but “none of those options stack up”.

Instead, he announced an Aus$2 billion support package for regional Victoria.

Andrews refused to say how much it was costing to terminate the agreement, but insisted talks with the Commonwealth Games Federation were amicable.

But the Federation was not happy, blasting the move as “hugely disappointing”.

“We are disappointed that we were only given eight hours’ notice and that no consideration was given to discussing the situation to jointly find solutions prior to this decision being reached by the government,” it said in a statement.

Victoria was only awarded the contract 14 months ago as the exclusive bidder, with the Federation claiming the state had since decided to include more sports,added an additional regional hub, and changed plans for venues.

This additional expense was “often against the advice of the Commonwealth Games Federation and Commonwealth Games Australia”, it said, adding that it had received assurances that “sufficient funding was available to deliver the Victoria 2026 Commonwealth Games”.

The decision to pull out leaves the fate of the Games up in the air, with fewer and fewer countries showing interest in recent times to take on a spectacle seen as losing its relevance.

The Federation insisted it remained “committed to finding a solution for the Games in 2026 that is in the best interest of our athletes and the wider Commonwealth Sport Movement”.

The event typically attracts more than 4,000 athletes from the 54 nations of the Commonwealth, almost all of which are former territories of the British Empire.

The last Games, in 2022, were held in England after Birmingham stepped in late in the piece.

In a letter to staff cited by the Herald Sun newspaper, Commonwealth Games Australia President Ben Houston said he was only told about the decision on Tuesday morning.

He also called it “extremely disappointing”, adding: “We are working with the Commonwealth Games Federation to understand the broad impacts on the Games in 2026.” The Victorian state opposition called Andrews’ decision a “massive humiliation” and “hugely damaging to Victoria’s reputation as a global events leader”.

(Source: International Business Times – By AFP News dated 17th July, 2023)

 

III. WORLD NEWS

‘5 biggest’ smartphone companies in the world right now

The global smartphone market continues to fall. The market saw a decline for the eight consecutive quarters as per research firm Counterpoint’s report. In the second quarter of the year 2023 (April-May-June), the global smartphone shipments went down by 8 per cent quarter-on-quarter and 5 per cent year-on-year. On the positive side, thepremium segment demand remained resilient, with the segment’s share reaching a record high for the quarter. Here are the five biggest smartphone companies as per the report.

i. Samsung tops the global smartphone market

 

Samsung has maintained its top position in the global smartphone market. The company held the largest market share at 22 per cent, benefiting from the strong performance of its Galaxy A-series worldwide.

 

ii. Apple ranked at No. 2, grew over 50 per cent in India

 

Apple secured the second position and achieved its highest-ever Q2 market share. In Q2 2023, the premium segment experienced a surge, making its largest-ever contribution to the overall smartphone market, accounting for over 20 per cent of total sales. Capitalising on this trend, Apple successfully expanded its market share in non-traditional markets, notably India, where it achieved an impressive 50 per cent year-on-year growth during the same period.

 

iii. Xiaomi is the third largest smartphone brand globally

As the third-largest smartphone brand, Xiaomi encountered difficulties in its key markets – China and India. To counter the decline in these markets, the company appears to be actively pursuing expansion into other markets and refreshing its portfolio of products.

 

iv. Oppo ranked at No. 4, performs well in both India and China (includes OnePlus)

 

The Chinese smartphone maker Oppo did quitewell in its home market China and India (thanks to OnePlus). The company managed to hold on to its global market share despite registering losses in Western Europe.

 

v. Vivo becomes the fifth-largest smartphone player

 

Following a robust performance in the second quarter of 2022, both Vivo and iQoo experienced significant growth declines in China, partly due to fierce competition from Samsung and Oppo. Additionally, in the offline markets of India and Southeast Asia, they faced strong rivalry, which further impacted their growth.(Source: The Times of India – Gadgets Now Bureau dated 20th July, 2023)

Miscellanea

I. TECHNOLOGY

1.    AI use, rising in influence campaigns online, but impact limited: US cyber firm

Google-owned U.S. cybersecurity firm Mandiant said it had seen increasing use of artificial intelligence (AI) to conduct manipulative information campaigns online in recent years, though the technology’s use in other digital intrusions had been limited so far. Researchers at the Virginia-based company found “numerous instances” since 2019 in which AI-generated content, such as fabricated profile pictures, had been used in politically-motivated online influence campaigns.

These included campaigns from groups aligned with the governments of Russia, China, Iran, Ethiopia, Indonesia, Cuba, Argentina, Mexico, Ecuador, and El Salvador, the report said. It comes amid a recent boom in generative AI models such as ChatGPT, which make it far easier to create convincing fake videos, images, text, and computer code. Security officials have warned of such models being used by cybercriminals.

Generative AI would enable groups with limited resources to produce higher quality content for influence campaigns at scale, Mandiant researchers said. A pro-China information campaign named Dragonbridge, for instance, had expanded “exponentially” across 30 social platforms and 10 different languages since it first began by targeting pro-democracy protesters in Hong Kong in 2019, said Sandra Joyce, vice president at Mandiant Intelligence. Yet, the impact of such campaigns was limited. “From an effectiveness standpoint, not a lot of wins there,” she said. “They really haven’t changed the course of the threat landscape just yet.” China has denied U.S. accusations of involvement in such influence campaigns in the past.

(Source: indianexpress.com 18th August, 2023)

2.    India’s digital economy creates a new vote bank all parties want to woo

If politics decides the shape of the economy, the economy too shapes the politics. For long, Indian politics has revolved around two big vote banks of caste and religion. Besides these two, pensioners, central government employees and farmers were other vote banks political parties tried to attract with financial benefits. The growth of the middle class after the economic liberalisation brought the issues of governance and service delivery to the centrestage of electoral politics. The rise of Narendra Modi had a significant push from the growing economic aspirations of Indians.

A new vote bank has emerged with the new digital economy which got a major boost during the pandemic restrictions as Amazon, Swiggy, Zomato and many other gig platforms saw sudden spike in business, which meant demand for more gig workers. Political parties have spotted this vote bank and are trying to woo it — the vote bank of gig workers. A sudden explosion of digital economy in recent times created vast opportunities for gig workers, and at the same time concerns have grown over tough working conditions and low benefits in the gig economy. The Rajasthan assembly passing a bill recently to offer social security to gig workers is the latest sign of the political heft gig workers have gained which political parties can ignore only at their own peril.

In April, hundreds of gig workers working with Zomato-owned quick commerce platform Blinkit in Delhi-NCR went on a strike, protesting against a renewed fee structure that they said would reduce their income, disrupting services at several locations. A Delhi-based Blinkit delivery partner told ET that the new structure resulted in a reduction of Rs.200-250 per day in their payout because most dark stores operate within a radius of 2 km. This was one of a series of protests by delivery workers after the pandemic. Last year in July, Swiggy faced strikes by its delivery workers across metro cities amid discussions about the industry’s poor compensations and lack of social security net.

Gig workers in India are young, financially stressed, and largely uninsured, a report found last year after surveying more than 4,000 gig workers from platforms such as Swiggy, Zomato, Uber, Ola, UrbanClap, and Amazon. The report by CIIE.CO, an incubator and accelerator at IIM-Ahmedabad, said 42.1 per cent of respondents reported not having an increase in income over time. In an inflationary environment, this means individuals are earning less each year. About 51.5 per cent of individuals reported not being able to save money.

About 47 per cent of respondents said they had no form of insurance. The most common form of insurance among individuals was two-wheeler insurance. Despite the high levels of risk to their own personal lives, only one in five gig economy workers had some kind of life or health-related insurance. There were around 7.7 million gig workers as of 2020-21, according to a report by government policy think tank Niti Aayog which said the number was expected to exceed 23.5 million by 2029-30.

Gig workers in India now have got all it takes to form a cohesive economic category of voters. They are spread across the country in large numbers as you will find delivery partners and app-based taxi drivers in all parts of India, especially cities. They have a common set of grievances. And they have been organising and protesting to press for their demands. The pandemic gave them high visibility as people were forced to buy online. Strikes and protests by gig workers have deep political impact as they disrupt delivery services in urban areas, thus attracting a lot of attention, and sympathy too. In short, they are a cohesive voting bloc which can’t be ignored.

Shaik Salauddin, the national general secretary of the Indian Federation of App-based Transport Workers representing over 45,000 cab drivers, told Reuters recently that they had been lobbying political parties for a package before the elections.

The first time significant political attention gig workers attracted was in 2020 when the Central government passed a package of labour reforms which made gig workers eligible for social security, insurance, health benefits and pension.

When Congress leader Rahul Gandhi interacted with gig workers in Bengaluru in May while campaigning for the assembly elections, and even took a two kilometer ride with a delivery partner on his scooter, it became clear that gig workers were in a position to influence elections. Bengaluru has nearly 200,000 gig workers. Last year, gig workers from Dunzo protested when the platform introduced an incentive-based model of payment for its delivery agents. The Congress party had promised benefits for gig workers in its election manifesto. Last month, the Karnataka government announced in its budget an insurance scheme with a cover of Rs. 4 lakh for gig workers across the state. The state will pay the entire premium for the scheme under which workers will get a life insurance cover of Rs. 2 lakh and an accidental cover of equal amount.

In July, the Rajasthan assembly passed a bill for the welfare of gig workers. According to the Rajasthan Platform Based Gig Workers (Registration and Welfare) bill, the state will establish a fund for “registered platform-based gig workers” and charge aggregators (the companies such as Amazon, Ola and Zomato) a “welfare fee”. The fee will be a percentage of the value of each transaction related to the gig workers as may be notified by the state. If any aggregator fails to pay the fee on time, an interest of
12 per cent per annum will be charged on the dues.

After Rajasthan, Karnataka is now planning to impose a fee on aggregators to fund welfare of gig workers. “The Social Security Code of 2020, which defines gig workers and creates a separate fund for them, the Motor Vehicle Aggregator Guidelines and now the Rajasthan government’s plan to bring a law to protect the rights of gig workers — these are all the recent successes of our persistent work in the last three years,” union leader Salauddin told TOI in January.

Last year, India’s pension fund regulator had recommended the government introduce a UK-like pension scheme for the country’s gig workers. The Pension Fund Regulatory and Development Authority (PFRDA) had proposed that workers at food and cab aggregators be automatically enrolled into the National Pension Scheme (NPS), a voluntary retirement savings scheme.

Not to be left behind the Congress governments in Karnataka and Rajasthan, the Narendra Modi government at the Centre is expected to start a comprehensive social security programme for gig workers soon.

The plan, part of the Social Security Code enacted in 2020, could include accident, health insurance and retirement benefits, Reuters reported recently, citing a senior government official. Labour Minister Bhupender Yadav has said that any scheme for gig workers might be funded through contributions by federal and state governments, as well as the platforms. An industry expert with direct knowledge of the discussions told Reuters the platforms unanimously agreed with the labour ministry’s proposal about social security for gig workers and were ready to contribute to a “transparently” run welfare fund.

More than 290 million people have already registered for an online government portal meant to issue identity cards to gig workers and other unorganised employees, while gathering such details as biometric data and their skills.
(Source: economictimes.com 17th August, 2023)

II.  WORLD NEWS

1.    US mortgage rates climb to highest level in 21 years

Mortgage rates in the US have climbed to their highest level in 21 years amid the Federal Reserve’s aggressive interest rate increases. The 30-year fixed-rate mortgage average 7.09 per cent, up from 6.96 per cent last week, mortgage buyer Freddie Mac reported. The rate stood at 5.13 per cent this time last year.

It is the highest level since April 2002 and the first time it has surpassed 7 per cent since last November. Mortgage rates have climbed since the Fed embarked on its campaign to raise interest rates, which at 5.33 per cent now also surpass a two-decade high.

“The economy continues to do better than expected and the 10-year Treasury yield has moved up, causing mortgage rates to climb,” said Sam Khater, Freddie Mac’s chief economist. The 10-year Treasury yield recently hit at 15-year high of 4.258 per cent.

With high mortgage rates making buying a home more expensive, current homeowners who already have a low mortgage rate are more reluctant to sell their homes. With low inventory and rising mortgage rates, would-be homebuyers are being priced out of the market. At $410,200, the median existing-home sales prices in June was the second highest ever recorded, according to a recent report from the National Association of Realtors.

“Demand has been impacted by affordability headwinds, but low inventory remains the root cause of stalling home sales,” sad Mr Khater. The 15-year fixed-rate mortgage rate average 6.46 per cent, up from last week’s 6.34 per cent.

(Source: www.thenationalnews.com dated 17th August, 2023)

2.    As UK Births Hit 20-Year Low, Indian-Born Parents Take Record Share

India overtook Romania as the most common country of birth of foreign new mothers, after a third of all residence visas were granted to Indian nationals. The number of babies born in England and Wales fell to its lowest level in two decades last year, while a record proportion came from parents who were both born abroad, highlighting a long-term shift in the nation’s demographic makeup.

Of all live births, 23.1 per cent were to non-UK-born parents – a proportion that has shot up from 16.7 per cent in 2008, and is up from 21.5 per cent a year ago, according to census data released Thursday by the Office for National Statistics.

The figures also showed the share of babies born to British parents has slipped, from 62 per cent to 60.3 per cent, and the overall number of births sank to 605,479. That’s the lowest since 2002, and points toward slower population growth that could be a drag on both the economy and labor market in the decades ahead.

The “increase in the number of non-UK born mothers is a good thing” given the UK’s own falling birth rate, said Jonathan Portes, professor of economics and public policy at King’s College London. But declining numbers of overall births is the “real story here,” he said, adding that it’s a “serious long-term social problem for us.”

The rising number of births to foreign parents could help ease fears that the UK will face a labor supply crunch as its population ages and retirees out-pace the rate at which new workers come into jobs. But polling suggests migration is still an important concern for British voters.

More than half of the public favor a cut in immigration, according to a recent survey by Kantar and the Migration Observatory. That suggests rising numbers of births to migrant families could be a thorny issue for both major political parties as they face the prospect of a general election next year.

The number of children born to parents who were both from abroad hit 139,953 last year, up from 134,308 a year earlier and its highest level since 2017. Numbers have remained relatively flat for births involving one non-UK-born parent, while births to two UK-born parents have fallen to 365,111, the lowest level in comparable data going back to 2008.

A rise in the number of people immigrating to the UK in recent years is likely to have led to the jump in migrant parents in 2022. A record 606,000 more people moved to Britain than departed last year, boosted by humanitarian programs and demand for workers whose skills were in short supply.

India overtook Romania as the most common country of birth of foreign new mothers, after a third of all third of residence visas were granted to Indian nationals. Afghanistan also entered the top 10 for the first time, after the UK formally opened the Afghan Citizens Resettlement Scheme at the start of 2022.

India also replaced Pakistan as the most common country of birth for non-UK-born new fathers. Pakistan had held the top spot since comparable data began in 2008. In London, more than two thirds of births were to parents where at least one was from outside the UK. The highest percentages were seen in Brent, Westminster, Newham and Harrow, at more than 80 per cent of births.

Outside of London, the Berkshire town of Slough and the Bedfordshire town of Luton were the areas with the highest rate of births to at least one migrant parent, at 75 per cent and 74.6 per cent respectively. Further away from the capital, Oxford and Leicester saw the highest percentages at 65.9 per cent and 65 per cent respectively.

(Source : ndtv.com dated 19th August, 2023)

3.    Over 15 Million People Suffer From Food Insecurity in Afghanistan

Amid the ongoing economic and humanitarian crisis in Afghanistan, 15.5 million people in the country are suffering from severe food insecurity, Tolo News reported citing a report by the International Federation of Red Cross. Expressing distress over the crisis, the report stated that the drought in the past three years in Afghanistan and the economic crisis over the past two years have increased the needs of the people of the country.

It further stated that 2.7 million people in Afghanistan are facing famine, reported TOLO News. Seyar Qureshi, an economist said, “In the short term, the Islamic Emirate should talk with the international community for humanitarian aid to Afghanistan continues and prevent a humanitarian crisis.”

Whereas, the Taliban Ministry of Economy said that international aid has not been provided to the development sector. Adding to this, they said that the ministry has launched large economic projects to battle the economic challenges in the country.

Abdul Latif Nazari, deputy of the Economy Ministry said, “The aid of the international community has been humanitarian until now, and no significant development aid has been provided. Our effort is to help reduce poverty and provide employment for the people of Afghanistan by attracting development aid and launching large national projects.”

Moreover, Kabul residents have been complaining that they are dealing with economic problems and there is a need to pay more attention to entrepreneurship for people, according to TOLO News. Dawood, a Kabul resident said, “Organizations that make these donations distribute to those who deserve it. Winter is coming and how will people get their fuel?”

Notably, Taliban completed two years since its takeover of Kabul in 2021. During this period, aid organizations have continuously expressed their concern about the increase in poverty as well as the lack of funds for the people.

The Goverment of India has partnered with United Nations World Food Programme (UNWFP) for the internal distribution of wheat within Afghanistan. “Under this partnership, India has supplied a total of 47,500 MTs of wheat assistance to UNWFP centres in Afghanistan. The recent ongoing shipments are being sent through Chabahar Port and being handed over to UNWFP at Herat in Afghanistan.

On Wednesday, United Nations World Food Programme (UNWFP) in Afghanistan thanked India for its help in providing life-saving food to 16 million people in the country. The generous contribution by the government of India has been acknowledged by the relevant stakeholders in Afghanistan, including UNWFP.

On the medical assistance side, India has so far supplied almost 200 tons of medical assistance consisting of essential medicines, COVID vaccines, anti-TB medicines and medical/surgical items like Pediatric Stethoscopes, Sphygmomanometer mobile type with pediatric BP cuffs, infusion pumps, drip chamber set, electrocautery, nylon sutures etc.

(Source : ndtv.com dated 17th August, 2023)

Miscellanea

I. WORLD NEWS — ECONOMY

1. Two Fed Officials Suggest That Interest Rates Will Rise Again

In their first comments since the Federal Reserve Bank decided to keep the US key interest rate unchanged this week, officials from the bank signaled that the hiking cycle hasn’t ended.

Fed Governor Michelle Bowman and Boston Fed President Susan Collins both warned in separate events that inflation is still a threat.

“Inflation is still too high, and I expect it will likely be appropriate for the Committee to raise rates further and hold them at a restrictive level for some time to return inflation to our 2 per cent goal in a timely way,” Bowman said in a speech at an event of the Independent
Community Bankers of Colorado in Vail. “I see a continued risk that energy prices could rise further and reverse some of the progress we have seen on inflation in recent months.”

Bowman said that, according to economic projections assessed by the FOMC, inflation will stay above the Fed’s 2 per cent “at least until the end of 2025.”

The Fed’s Federal Open Market Committee voted on Wednesday to maintain the benchmark rate in the range of 5.25 per cent to 5.50 per cent, the highest level in 22 years. Both Bowman and Collins said they supported the decision.

Projections in the Fed’s dot plot, which accompanied the announcement, showed the likelihood of one more hike this year and two cuts in 2024, or two fewer than indicated in June’s update.

“I expect rates may have to stay higher, and for longer, than previous projections had suggested, and further tightening is certainly not off the table,” Collins said at the annual convention of the Maine Bankers Association. “There are some promising signs that inflation is moderating and the economy rebalancing. But progress has not been linear and is not evenly distributed across sectors.”

Annual U.S. inflation accelerated to 3.7 per cent in August from 3.2 per cent in July, pressured mainly by gas prices. The Fed has two more monetary policy meetings in 1st November, and 13th December, 2023.

(Source: International Business Times — By Helder Marinho — 22nd September, 2023)

2. SPORTS

1. India Fires First World Record of Asian Games as Japanese Teen Dazzle

India claimed the first world record of the Hangzhou Asian Games on Monday as hosts China snapped up more gold medals and 15-year-old skateboarder Hinano Kusaki triumphed for Japan.

The Indian trio of DivyanshPanwar, RudrankkshPatil and AishwaryTomar blew away the field with a new world-best 1,893.7 points to win the men’s 10m air rifle team event on day two of the multi-sports extravaganza.

They beat the previous mark of 1,893.3 set by China last month in Baku.

In doing so they won India’s first gold of a Games where the hosts have swept 28 of the 44 titles decided so far.

“In the 10m event they are both perfect athletes,” Tomar said of his teammates. “Playing with them is huge, it’s really good.”

Another shooting world record fell to China’s Sheng Lihao in the men’s 10m air rifle with his 253.3 points surpassing teammate Yu Haonan’s 252.8 from Rio four years ago.
“I had good luck in the final. I did quite well today, I was basically smooth,” said Sheng.

Like India, Macau clinched its first gold in Hangzhou, with wushu athlete Li Yi winning the Changquan title to become the first woman in history from the Chinese territory to earn an Asian Games gold.

“I’m really proud. This one completes the process so I feel really fortunate,” said the 31-year-old.

“This, maybe, brings my 20 years as an athlete to a perfect end.”

In other early action on day two, Kusaki dazzled in skateboarding to easily win the women’s park final at Qiantang Roller Sports Centre.

“I am very happy with how everything went,” said the teenager.

After winning all seven gold medals in the swimming pool on the opening day, China is primed to dominate again on Monday night, spearheaded by breaststroke world champion Qin Haiyang.

The Chinese star caused a major upset at the world championships in Fukuoka in July when he won the 100m gold in 57.69 ahead of a stacked field and in the absence of British great Adam Peaty.

He went on to complete an unprecedented clean sweep of the breaststroke titles, an achievement he is aiming to match at his home Asiad as he builds towards next year’s Paris Olympics.

Qin, the second-fastest ever over 100m after Peaty, was in a class of his own in the heats, touching in 58.35 to better the previous Games best set by Japan’s Yasuhiro Koseki in 2018.

South Korea’s Choi Dong-yeol came in second — a gaping 1.55 seconds behind Qin.

Hong Kong’s Siobhan Haughey could prevent another Chinese clean sweep when she lines up in the women’s 200m freestyle final.

(Source: International Business Times — By Martin Parry — 25th September, 2023)

3. BUSINESS

1. India fourth in number of startups with $50million + funding: Study

India ranks fourth in the world in the number of scaleups, or startups that have received more than $50 million of disclosed VC investment. Ahead of India are the US, China, and the UK, the first edition of Startup Genome’s Scaleup Report said.

However, it’s ahead of the UK in the total VC investment that has gone into these scaleups, and in the cumulative tech value investment of the scaleups. India, the report says, has recorded 429 scaleups, with a VC investment of $127 billion and a total value of tech investment of $446 billion.

The report is a research into scaleup success factors, building on the question of what behaviours, resources, and characteristics of startups differentiate those that within four to eight years scaled to $50 million and higher valuations from those startups that didn’t.

Startup Genome, an innovation policy advisory and research firm, surveyed startups in over 80 cities across more than 40 countries and looked at 60 plus metrics.

The report said India has startups with 50 per cent or more of their customers coming from outside of their continent and having the highest scaleup rate. This can partly be attributed to startups that tailor their products and services to truly global markets — not just beyond their country, but beyond their continent — dramatically increasing their potential customer base.

Startups based in large countries (US excluded) scale at a higher rate when they focus on their domestic market. In those countries, the size of the domestic market is so large that it may be worth delaying or forgoing global markets. This is certainly clear in India, where B2C startups can achieve unicorn status and billion-dollar exits without going out of the country. Startups with a local connectedness index score of 6 or above achieve a scaleup of 5.1 per cent compared to 3.8 per cent for those with a score of 2 to 4 — a 34 per cent boost. The local connectedness index measures the size, density, and quality of a startup’s local network. Early-stage startups with a higher local connectedness index see their revenue grow twice as fast as those with a lower local connectedness index.

Scaleup success rate clearly increases with global connectedness, and startups that develop a high level of global connectedness have a 3.2 times higher chance of scaling than those with a low level. Ecosystems that are more connected to top global ecosystems (such as Silicon Valley, NYC and London) see their startups go global at a much higher rate on average (66 per cent correlations between those very distinct variables)

Founders looking to improve their chances of scaling should ensure that they offer stock options for all employees, have more than five global connections to top ecosystems, and have at least three advisers for their startup.

(Source: Times of India – By ShilpaPhadnis – 25th September, 2023)

Banking overhaul

fiogf49gjkf0d
Most of the current discussion on Indian banks is naturally focused on the bad loans mess.

Reserve Bank of India governor Raghuram Rajan has done well to highlight more fundamental challenges as well. The banking system is a mess at various levels. The multiplicity of regulators has led to poor outcomes. Bank boards have few powers. The government often uses the banks it owns to further its political goals. There is no reason to have central bank appointees on bank boards. The lack of talent means a missing middle in organizational charts. Bank officials are often generalists rather than specialists.

All this creates a problem of perverse incentives.

An organizational overhaul is overdue. So is a regulatory one. But these will take time. The longer they take, the more market share will public sector banks lose to more nimble private sector competitors. People in the financial markets are already describing the process as privatization by stealth. Will it be the airlines story all over again?

(Source: Mint Newspaper dated 17-08-2016)

Lesson for the state

fiogf49gjkf0d
Abhinav Bindra bowed out of the Olympics and signed off on his career with a brave performance that came within a whisker of securing him another medal. Sania Mirza and Rohan Bopanna suffered heartbreak in the tennis mixed doubles semi-finals. Dipa Karmakar has pushed herself to the limit, as has the rest of India’s Olympics contingent. Union sports minister Vijay Goel, meanwhile, has managed to earn an official rebuke from organizers who threatened to cancel his accreditation for allegedly unbecoming and aggressive behaviour.

This feels like a teachable moment-a particularly apt one at the time of India’s 70th Independence Day.

Ordinary citizens trying to do their best while the state absents itself from giving them adequate support? Check. The state making its presence abundantly known where it has no business? Also check.

We’ve seen this plenty of times before in every walk of life. It’s time to actually learn the lesson.

(Source: Mint Newspaper dated 15-08-2016)

Waiting for justice: Resolve the faceoff over judges’ appointments fast, it is really hurting citizens

fiogf49gjkf0d
In the year 2016 Indians deserve a modern and streamlined judicial system. Instead what they are stuck with is a deficient structure groaning under a great pendency of cases. And the crisis only seems to be worsening, as a bench headed by Chief Justice T S Thakur has accused government of bringing the judiciary to a standstill by stalling judges’ appointments.

This eyeball to eyeball confrontation is part of a prolonged battle over the procedure to appoint judges. While the judicial collegium is criticised for opacity and favouritism, the National Judicial Appointments Commission, which envisaged a broader panel to choose judges and was passed by Parliament, was struck down by the apex court in October 2015.

The longer government and the collegium take to finalise a new memorandum of procedure to appoint HC and SC judges, the more citizens awaiting justice suffer. In practical terms, the high courts are now operating with 44.3% vacancies; pendency has risen to four million cases.

Any attempt at securing justice is an ordeal on its own, and financially ruinous for many people. As the CJI himself has noted, “By the time an appeal can be heard, the accused would already have served a life sentence.” Clearly the current clash of wills between the executive and the judiciary has only worsened matters. Remember that appointments had also remained frozen for nearly a year when the apex court scrutinised the constitutional validity of the proposed NJAC. Instead of wallowing on their respective sides of the legal logjam, both government and the judiciary must show much more teamsmanship – not only to finalise a new procedure to appoint judges but also to implement broader reforms to remedy judicial delays.

(Source: The Times of India dated 15-08-2016)

Jobs not quotas: Expanding quotas will not address frustrations arising from jobless growth

fiogf49gjkf0d

Gujarat’s announcement of a 10% quota for economically backward classes in education and government jobs represents a misdiagnosis of a pressing problem. The proposal is bound to be challenged legally as aggregate quotas will overshoot the permitted 50% mark. Moreover the agitating Patels, who the announcement sought to pacify, have dismissed it as “another lollipop from the BJP factory”.

The reality is that government cannot expand jobs fast enough to address contemporary society’s malaise: joblessness. Myriad agitations are only symptoms of the frustration among young Indians. If our demographic transition, where there is an ongoing surge in the working age population, is to translate into a dividend and not a nightmare, governments must address the challenge of joblessness. Over the last 15 years millions have moved out of agriculture, with only construction expanding noticeably to absorb the influx. Worryingly, manufacturing and services have not pulled their weight in job creation. For this, governments’ counterproductive policies must take the blame.

The nature of government intervention needs to be radically transformed. Right now, at both central and state levels, we are witnessing more government and less governance. In a complex world characterised by rapid changes in technology and trends, governments are not in a position to pick winners. Entrepreneurs are best placed to make these choices and governments need to get out of their way by removing barriers to economic activity. Simplification of regulations needs to be complemented by smarter regulation.

Enhancing the quality of public education, dismantling the licence raj shackling private education, skilling and physical infrastructure will help India grab opportunities. As wages in China increase, it opens the door for India’s export-led apparel industry and other labour-intensive industries, which can generate millions of jobs. A World Bank report, entitled “Stitches to Riches?” estimates that even a 10% increase in Chinese apparel prices can be leveraged to create at least 1.2 million jobs in the Indian apparel industry. This would be particularly good for women who are prolifically employed by the apparel industry, addressing India’s appalling gender inequities. But the government’s approach must be tailored to capitalise on available opportunities.

For example India’s ruinous labour laws, which create a new caste system whose Brahmins are organised labour and whose quasi-untouchables are roughly 93% of the labour force consigned to the informal sector, must be reformed to give a better chance to the rest. (Source: The Times of India dated 02.05.2016)

War for Ambedkar: Parties who celebrate his birth anniversary would do well to learn from his legacy

fiogf49gjkf0d
The UN observed Bhim Rao ‘Babasaheb’ Ambedkar’s 125th birth anniversary on 13.04.2016 – showcasing the universal appeal of the principal architect of India’s Constitution, who fought caste injustice. Indeed, from being an icon solely of Dalit parties in yesteryear, Ambedkar’s legacy is enjoying a revival with political parties across India’s ideological spectrum fighting to appropriate it. And now, with inequality a rising concern and cause for political turmoil in Western countries, Ambedkar’s appeal has reached Western shores as well.

The continuing re-imagination of Ambedkar reflects as much on his immense contributions in defining the Indian republic as it does on the contemporary relevance of themes he became synonymous with: equality, social justice and rule of law. Prime Minister Narendra Modi is scheduled to travel to Ambedkar’s birthplace in Mhow, MP tomorrow to observe Social Harmony Day. In a bid to steal Modi’s thunder Congress organised a big rally on Monday in Nagpur, the headquarters of RSS.

Ambedkar was a crusader against untouchability and the caste system, eventually embracing Buddhism in 1956. By putting up banners and posters of Ambedkar, BJP hopes to portray itself not only as a champion of social engineering, but also take advantage of the fading of Nehru’s lustre in post-liberalisation India. However, BJP’s Hindu-first agenda is contradicted by Ambedkar’s belief that caste hierarchies are an intrinsic part of Hinduism (that is why he converted to Buddhism). Likewise, Ambedkar resists appropriation by contemporary leftist causes as well. He disagreed with Mahatma Gandhi’s philosophy of self-governing villages as India’s foundation, viewing them instead as dens of inequality. He opposed insertion of the terms ‘socialist’ and ‘secular’ in the preamble to the Constitution. He opposed Article 370 and was an ardent supporter of the Uniform Civil Code.

It’s welcome that political parties are debating Ambedkar today. What’s less welcome, however, is their attempt to project their own beliefs on to Ambedkar. He stood, for example, for the total annihilation of caste. Were he to witness today’s permanent and expanding regime of caste quotas, which all political parties appear to be agreed on, he could well be turning over in his grave. He was, above all, a modern thinker, a practitioner of pragmatic politics who refused to be bogged down by any particular ideology or religion. Leaders who invoke him today would do well to learn from that legacy.

(Source: Times of India dated 13.04.2016)

How to view success

fiogf49gjkf0d
With a broad theme like six lenses that shape our perception of the leadership challenges encountered in work and family Six Lenses: Vignettes of Success, Career and Relationships ends up being a gripping narrative of life’s many shades, which can encourage readers to look at their lives and careers in a different light.

There are three reasons for this: one, the author’s mastery of the art of story-telling and his intellectual rigour that helps connects the dots. R Gopalakrishnan is a prolific writer but this one is clearly his best. Two, he has carefully avoided the predictability of countless management books that offer instant, pre-packaged wisdom on how to succeed in one’s career. And three, the book subtly revolves around management and philosophy with multiple references from religious texts and binds them all with several interesting anecdotes – the extraordinary lessons the author learnt from everyday experiences of people to which readers can relate. In the process, the author shows how, by altering our perceptions, people can better overcome the challenges they face at work and in family matters.

Mr Gopalakrishnan also draws from the Vedantic idea of myth and reality to conclude that the idea of reality does not exist and that all man sees is through his perception of the world around him. It’s like a visit to the optician for an eye test – on the support frame, there are lenses that can be rotated to improve vision during testing. The rotation of each lens changes the clarity and the view. There are many perspectives that the viewer can get and he or she has to select the view that best suits him or her. Like an optician who keeps turning the lenses till the patient can see clearly, people need to keep shifting the proverbial six lenses until they find and arrive at an awareness of their life’s purpose and fulfilment.

The six lenses (the book has a chapter each that corresponds to each of these lenses) are: Purpose (the deep-seated belief about life’s aim); Authenticity ( who you are, at the core); Courage (overcoming obstacles and inequity); Trust (encompasses virtues such as reliability, never letting anyone down, etc); Luck (people pretend they don’t believe in it except when it suits them) and Fulfilment (it is about enjoying what exists rather than cry about what might have been missed).

Universally, people define success in terms of what other people think of it. But the important lesson the book provides is that there is no universally accepted measure of success. But the paradox is that while all success doesn’t lead to fulfilment, all fulfilment leads to success. The delightful stories about “people like us” tell us how each of them sought success and fulfilment and are great examples of what happiness means – it’s a complex phenomenon called emotional well-being. Young readers may scoff at the author’s prognosis that happiness is tied to giving rather than taking, to volunteering and to donating, but they could gain some deep insights.

Though its inclusion as a lens may be considered unusual by many, Mr Gopalakrishnan is at his best in the chapter on “Luck”. Through countless examples, he has shown how good outcomes are dressed up by the corporate types as strategic strokes of genius while catastrophes are attributed to bad luck.

Overall, Six Lenses… is a great read, made richer by an author who has enough experience and knowledge to offer readers views on the choices and assumptions that people make, as also their outcomes.

(Source: Extracts from Book Review by Shyamal Majumdar of Six Lenses – Vignettes of Success, Career and Relationships by R. Gopalkrishnan in Business Standard dated 06.04.2016)

India cannot get carried away by current growth superiority : RBI Governor Raghuram Rajan

fiogf49gjkf0d
Reserve Bank of India (RBI) governor Raghuram Rajan clarified his remark that India was like a “one-eyed king in the land of the blind” and defended the thought process behind the remark that has attracted controversy.

Rajan, 53, also spoke of how “words are hung out to dry, as in a newspaper headline,” robbing them of context and opening them up to misinterpretation.

India cannot get carried away by its “current superiority in growth,” Rajan told an audience of students and bankers at the convocation of the National Institute of Bank Management in Pune.

“My intent in saying this (and it was an off-hand comment in an interview) was to signal that our outperformance was accentuated because world growth was weak,” said the RBI governor, whose choice of words had evoked the displeasure of some government ministers.

“But we in India are still hungry for more growth. I then explained that we are not yet at our potential but that we are at the cusp of a substantial pick-up in growth because of the reforms that are underway,” said Rajan.

He added that in a “news hungry” nation like India, the remarks had been seen as denigrating India’s success.

Finance minister Arun Jaitley had responded to Rajan’s “one-eyed king” remark by saying a growth rate of 7.5% would be a cause of celebration in any other country.

In an interview to financial news website Marketwatch on 17 April, Rajan, when asked about the popular notion that India was the “bright spot” in an otherwise gloomy global economy, said the country still has some way to go.

“Well, I think we’ve still to get to a place where we feel satisfied. We have this saying, ‘in the land of the blind, the one-eyed man is king’. We’re a little bit that way,” Rajan told the website.

On Wednesday, Rajan struck a note of caution.

“We cannot get carried away by our current superiority in growth for as soon as we start distributing future wealth as though we already have it, we stop doing what we are supposed to do to keep growing,” he said. “This movie has played too many times in the past for us not to know how it ends.”

Rajan noted that while India is compared to China in reference to economic growth rates, the Chinese economy is five times larger than India’s and the average Chinese citizen is four times richer than the average Indian.

The Indian economy is expected to grow 7.5% in 2016 compared to China’s 6.5%, according to forecasts released by the International Monetary Fund earlier this month.

“As a central banker who has to be pragmatic, I cannot get euphoric if India is the fastest growing large economy. Our current growth certainly reflects the hard work of the government and the people of the country, but we have to repeat this performance for the next 20 years before we can give every Indian a decent livelihood,” said Rajan. He said his remarks were not meant to disparage was has been done and is being done by governments.

“The central and state governments have been creating a platform for strong and sustainable growth, and I am confident the payoffs are on their way, but until we have stayed on this path for some time, I remain cautious.”

The media’s scrutiny of what Rajan called an off-the-cuffremark was a “teachable moment”, said the RBI governor, who is on leave from his teaching post at the University of Chicago.

The RBI governor questioned the manner in which every word spoken by public figures is “wrung out” for meaning. “When words are hung out to dry, as in a newspaper headline, it then becomes fair game for anyone who wants to fill in meaning to create mischief,” said Rajan, adding that if India is to have a reasonable public dialogue, words must be seen in context and not stripped of it. “That may, however, be a forlorn hope,” he said.

Rajan, in his speech titled ‘Words matter but so does intent,’ didn’t stop there. “This leads to the question—how much of our language is liable for misinterpretation? How forgiving should we be of a bad choice of words when the intent is clearly different?”

Rajan chose to make this point through examples.

He cited the famous words of Mahatma Gandhi who once said “an eye for an eye will make the whole world go blind.”One might take umbrage because the comment suggests that blindness is an inferior state of being, said Rajan. “Yet, Gandhiji’s comment was on the absurdity of the event and not a comment on blindness,” he noted.

“If we spend all our time watching our words and using inoffensive language…we will be dull and will not be able to communicate because no one will listen,” said Rajan. “For instance, an eye for an eye will only make the whole world go blind, could be replaced by—revenge reduces collective welfare,” quipped Rajan. “The latter is short and inoffensive but meaningless for most listeners who haven’t taken economics classes.”

Rajan concluded that all constituents have work to do to improve communication. Speakers have to be more careful with words and listeners should not look for insults where none may exist. (Source: Mint Newspaper dated 21.04.2016)